See discussions, stats, and author profiles for this publication at: https://www.researchgate.

net/publication/383690772

RECENT TRENDS IN MULTIDISCIPLINARY RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT

with cover (1)

Chapter · September 2024

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.02

CITATIONS READS

0 246

2 authors:

Rehana Ali Hafiza Sumaiyya Jamal

international center of chemistry and biological sciences H.E.J. Research Institute of Chemistry
1 PUBLICATION 0 CITATIONS 6 PUBLICATIONS 26 CITATIONS

SEE PROFILE SEE PROFILE

All content following this page was uploaded by Hafiza Sumaiyya Jamal on 03 September 2024.

The user has requested enhancement of the downloaded file.

Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

0
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

RECENT TRENDS IN
MULTIDISCIPLINARY
RESEARCH AND
DEVELOPMENT

VOLUME 1

1
Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

RECENT TRENDS IN
MULTIDISCIPLINARY
RESEARCH AND
DEVELOPMENT

Edited by
Dr. Mohammed Abdul Raffey

S W E D E N

3
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

REDMAC.Se
RECENT TRENDS IN MULTIDISCIPLINARY RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
Edited by Dr. Mohammed Abdul Raffey

RED’SHINE PUBLICATION
62/5834 Harplingegränd 110, LGH 1103. Älvsjö, 12573
Stockholm, Sweden
Call: +46 761508180
Email: [email protected]
Website: www.redshine.se

Text © Editors, 2024

Cover page © RED'MAC, Inc, 2024

ISBN:978-91-89764-56-9
ISBN-10:91-89764-56-0
DIP: 18.10.9189764560
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560
Price: kr 150
First Edition: January, 2024

Alla rättigheter förbehållna. Ingen del av denna publikation får reproduceras eller
användas i någon form eller på något sätt - fotografiskt, elektroniskt eller mekaniskt,
inklusive fotokopiering, inspelning, bandning eller informationslagring och -
hämtningssystem - utan föregående skriftligt tillstånd från författaren och utgivaren.

The views expressed by the authors in their articles, reviews etc. in this book are
their own. The Editors, Publisher and owner are not responsible for them.
De åsikter som författarna uttrycker i deras artiklar, recensioner i denna bok är deras
egna. Redaktörerna, utgivaren och ägaren ansvarar inte för dem.

Printed in Stockholm | Title ID: 9189764560

4
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CONTENTS
SR. MODULE NAME PAGE
NO. NO.
1 RECENT TRENDS IN MULTI-DISCIPLINARY 1
RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT IN THE
FIELD OF HUMAN RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT
Dr. Mubarak Ali
2 THE BASICS CONCEPTS AND SCOPE OF 17
BIOCHEMISTRY
Abrar Hussain, Hafiza Sumaiyya Jamal,
Muhammad Abid, Rehana, Syed Abid Ali
3 UNVEILING THE PSYCHOSOCIAL TAPESTRY: 36
EXPLORING THE INTERSECTION OF
PSYCHOLOGY AND LITERATURE
Dr. M. K. Sheeba
4 BENGAL AFTER 150 YEARS OF WIDOW 41
MARRIAGE: EXPECTATION AND
ATTAINMENT
Saroj Mahata
5 MUGHAL MINIATURES UNDER EMPEROR 53
AKBAR
Ms. Gaytri
6 BIOACTIVE COMPOUNDS IN MEDICINAL 59
PLANTS: IMPLICATIONS FOR DRUG
DEVELOPMENT
Vivek Sharma, Kartik Kumar, Priyanka and
Sahil Mokta
7 A CASE STUDY ON THE ISSUES AND 73
CHALLENGES AMONG THE INDIGENOUS
PEOPLE OF TOTO TRIBE : DOOARS REGION,
WEST BENGAL
Pritha Banerjee (Chakrabarti)
8 EMERGING TRENDS OF GLOBAL 82
MARKETING
Dr. Sumedha Vikram Khanna

5
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

9 EXPLORING PSYCHOLOGICAL WELL-BEING 91

OF HIGHER EDUCATION STUDENTS DURING
THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC
Dr. Wandaia Syngkon
10 QUANTUM COMPUTING AND FUTURE 102
NETWORKS: BRIDGING THE NEXT FRONTIER
Dr. Anuj Kumar Dwivedi
11 ROLE OF WOMEN IN A SUSTAINABLE 146
FISHERIES SECTOR- A GLOBAL CASE STUDY
PERSPECTIVE
Pushpa Warrier & Dr. Salini B. Nair
12 DISASTER MANAGEMENT THROUGH 159
HAZARD ZONATION IN SOUTH 24
PARGANAS
Rituparna Hajra
13 ENTREPRENEURSHIP: A SOCIOLOGICAL 175
APPROACH
Dr. Harjeet Kaur Virk
14 OPTIMAL NUMERICAL INTEGRATION OF 180
ARBITRARY FUNCTION BY BLOCK PULSE
WAVELET METHOD
K.T. Shivaram
15 NUTRITIONAL ASPECTS OF CEREALS AND 186
PRESENT STATUS OF SUSTAINABLE FOOD
FOR HEALTH
Mutyala Naidu Lagudu, Krishna Rao Mortha &
Mallikarjuna Kunjam
16 BIOCHEMICAL CHARACTERIZATION OF 196
GINGER (ZINGIBER OFFICINALE ROSC.) WITH
SPECIAL REFERENCE TO INDIGENOUS
GINGER CULTIVARS OF ASSAM: A MINI
REVIEW
Sourav Bhattacharjee and Chetana Hasnu
17 REFLEXIVITY IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH: 220
A COMPREHENSIVE ROADMAP
Sanjit Debnath

6
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

18 SOCIO-ECONOMIC SURVEY AT UMPHREW 233

VILLAGE OF MAWLAI C & RD BLOCK
Sukkynjai Syiem and Deimayami Suchiang
19 WORKFORCE DIVERSITY IN HIGHER 243
EDUCATION, KERALA – A CASE
STUDY ANALYSIS
Ms Aparna Swaminadhan & Dr Salini B Nair
20 THE UTILIZATION OF ARTIFICIAL 253
INTELLIGENCE AND CHAT GPT IN
ADVANCING MEDICAL RESEARCH AND
CHALLENGES ASSOCIATED WITH THEIR
IMPLEMENTATION
Dr. Pandurang Vithal Thatkar, Dr. Rajesh
Keshavrao Dase & Dr. Pramod M.Dhakane
21 E-MARKETING: THE NEW ERA OF 262
INNOVATION
Ms. Jayashri Sadanand Lokhande
22 FINANCIAL TECHNOLOGY (FINTECH) 270
INNOVATIONS IN INDIA A COMPREHENSIVE
ANALYSIS OF TRENDS, IMPACTS
AND FUTURE PROSPECTS
Dr. Snehal A. Bagul
23 NEW HISTORIES OF TRADITIONAL CINEMA 279
AND OVER-THE-TOP (OTT) PLATFORMS
Dr. Umang Gupta
24 SMART HOME SYSTEM USING CADIO: A 291
COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW
Dr. Bokare M. M., Mr. Pawale S. R. & Mr.
Thorat U. G.
25 INTEGRATION OF ARTIFICIAL 304
INTELLIGENCE AND NANOTECHNOLOGY
FOR HEAVY METAL REMOVAL AND DYE
DEGRADATION FOR WASTEWATER
TREATMENT
Shubhajit Halder, Azmiya Sadaf, Doyel
Bhattacharya, Rohit Maind

7
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

26 CYBER LAWS AND COMPUTER ETHICS 315

Dr. Manish L. Jivtode
27 NANOPARTICLES AND THEIR HAZARDS 326
Quadri F.B.
28 WORK-LIFE BALANCE IN CONTEMPORARY 334
SOCIETY: NAVIGATING THE DYNAMICS OF
MODERN EMPLOYMENT
Dr. Shahela Yasmeen Khan
29 UNDERSTANDING ELECTRONIC WASTE AND 342
DECODING ITS AMBIGUOUS NATURE
Sonawane P.M.
30 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS TO EMBEDDED 361
MACHINE LEARNING: A MANIFESTATION OF
COMMITMENT IN THE LANDSCAPE OF
TECHNOLOGY
Shaikh Adiba, Ajay D. Nagne & Shazia Shaikh
31 THE THEORY OF FEMINISM DEPICTED AS AN 379
EFFECTIVE WAY OF SELF-DETERMINATION
IN THE CONTEMPORARY NOVELS OF
ENGLISH IN INDIA WITH REFERENCE TO
THE WORKS OF CHETAN BHAGAT AND
SUDHA MURTY
Dr. Farhat. P. Durrani and Shaikh Nilofer
Shaikh Masood
32 MARGINALIZATION VOICE IN CINEMA 386
(COMPARATIVE STUDY OF SUJATA AND
DHADAK MOVIES ON SOCIAL IMPACT)
Irfana Fatima
33 UNVEILING PERSPECTIVES: EXPLORING 396
FEMINISM AND WOMEN’s EDUCATION IN
DEEP BRITISH LITERATURE
Dr. Farhat P. Durrani and Shaikh Zeba Farheen
34 A MINI REVIEW: CONVENTIONAL VS. GREEN 401
SYNTHESIS OF SUBSTITUTED OF 1, 5
BENZODIAZEPINES
Shaikh Abdul Baseer

8
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

35 ECONOMIC DIMENSIONS OF RURAL 411

POVERTY IN INDIA
Dr. Yogesh A. Patil
36 EXPLORING PLEIOTROPIC EFFECTS OF 414
STATIN IN WOUND MANAGEMENT
Dr. Rana Zainuddin, Dr. Jaiprakash Sangshetti
and Shoeb Rahim
37 REVIEW AND GRAPHICAL PRESENTATION 450
OF PRIVATE UNIVERSITIES IN INDIA UP TO
2021
Susanta Das
38 IMPACT OF ENVIRONMENTAL RADIO 460
ACTIVITY ON HUMAN
Debasmita Bondyopadhaya (Kanjilal)
39 CLOUD COMPUTING'S TRANSITION TO SAFE 475
AND RELIABLE STORAGE SERVICES
Dr. Madhav M. Bokare & Mr. Amol V.
Suryawanshi
40 UNCOVERING RESEARCH STREAMS ON 483
COMPETENCY-BASED TRAINING: A
BIBLIOMETRIC STUDY
Dr. Gayatri Panda
41 PERSPECTIVES OF ENTREPRENEURIAL 510
ORIENTATION CLUSTER AND ITS VALUE
ADDITION: A VISUALIZATION ANALYSIS
Dr.Manoj Dash & Dr. Gayatri Panda

9
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 1

RECENT TRENDS IN MULTI-DISCIPLINARY

RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT IN THE FIELD OF
HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Dr. Mubarak Ali

Abstract:
Understanding the word “Multi-disciplinary”, is of utmost importance
in order to explore the emerging trends in research, under human
resource management. Multidisciplinary research is where two or
more academic disciplines are collaborated towards a particular
objective there by gaining more insights on their interdependency. It
is evident that, multidisciplinary approach, makes use of skills and
knowledge, from more than one particular academic subject, but the
way the knowledge is used remains distinct, irrelevant to the
differences that stays subtle (Argote, 2019). To a greater extent, cross
disciplinary research is being considered as an approach to creative
practice that would comprise two or more academic disciplines, that
could range from a simple disciplinary insight or an integrated or
transformative approach. Multidisciplinary research, falls under the
cross discipline methods of research, where interdisciplinary and
transdisciplinary accompanies it (Björkman, 2016). The discussions
have highlighted the importance of Multi-Disciplinary research, in the
human resource management, followed by the ways in which Multi-
Disciplinary research teams can be built in an effective manner. The
discussions over emerging trends in the Multi-Disciplinary research in
HRM, has opened up the space for inclusion of creative research
methods, further strengthening the role of Mixed Research Methods.
The challenges linked with Multi-Disciplinary research, further opens
up the door for inclusion of multi-disciplinary, cross cultural experts
in the process of accomplishing research objectives in HRM.

Keywords: Multi-disciplinary research, HRM, Diverse workforce

Management, Employee motivation, Organisational success.

1
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Introduction:
antrais, 2022) defines multidisciplinary research as a
different approach, in research where multiple
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.01
perspectives are brought together, in evaluating a common
objective or research question. Interdisciplinary research,
is where the conceptual model integrates with theoretical
perspectives, across multiple disciplines. Interdisciplinary, is where
there is no limitation when it comes to design or methodology to one
particular field and would eventually demand the subject matter
expertise, of multiple people from different disciplines, across
sequential phases of the research process (Boykoff, 2019).

Multi-Disciplinary research is where research or executed from

investigators perspective, working in different disciplines, with
objective of creating a new concept or theory capable of driving
translational innovations, beyond one discipline (Gbosi, 2019).

Why Multi-Disciplinary Research matters?

Multidisciplinary research, matters to a greater extent, given the
integrated approach to work on human resource management, in the
highly competitive business scenario. Multidisciplinary research, is
capable of understanding complex social challenges, as well as
community responses towards issues, raising at workplace, irrelevant
to the management function. Hence, in the highly challenging
business environment, it is of utmost importance for the top level
management and managers, to be able to solve real time business
challenges, using a multifaceted approach (Marr, 2012).

Yet another important credit, associated with the multidisciplinary

approach, to researchers is that, it enables them, to reach a wide
audience and communicate on diverse perspectives. Additionally, it
encourages the researchers to come up with questions, which
traditional disciplines tends not to explore up. Also, to a greater
extent, cross disciplinary research promotes, more self-awareness
about the researcher and encourages creative practices (Miller, 2019).

Importance and need of Multi-Disciplinary in HRM:

A multidisciplinary approach, to human resource management is
essential as it offers more scope for comprehensive and holistic
understanding, of complexities associated with the field. Human
resource management, is multifaceted in nature as it comprises
ingredients such as psychology, sociology, economics, technology, as

2
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

well as other disciplines. Hence, it is crucial to embrace a

multidisciplinary approach, when it comes to yielding the fullest
tangible and intangible benefits of the research approach (Rao M.,
2019).

Complexity of the human Behaviour:

The complexity of the human behaviour, is one important factor
driving the inclusion of multidisciplinary approach to human resource
based research projects. (Townsend, 2016) states, that a single
disciplinary approach, might not be enough to capture the complete
spectrum of influences over behaviour of employees, their
motivational levels and organizational performance. Hence, by means
of combining the psychology, sociology as well as organizational
behaviour, there is more scope for understanding the complex
interplay of teams and individual associates, across borders within
organizations (Rao V., 2019).

Diverse Workforce management:

The current diverse workforce dynamics, in the modern scenario is
emphasising the top management to take up a multi-disciplinary
approach, so that the difference in cultural demographic and ethnic
aspects or understood to the fullest. By means of managing such
diversity insights, from different perspectives and views,addressing

3
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

unique challenges that promotes inclusion is feasible. Hence, under

the Diverse workforce dynamics, sociology general studies and
cultural differences are being evaluated to the fullest, there by
offering the top management, richer scope for creating a harmonious
workplace (Ray, 2020).

Progress in Technology:
Technology, is influencing how organizations operate especially in
the context of formulating and implementing human resource process,
such as recruitment, training, employee engagement and career
growth. In certain circumstances, it is not enough to focus on a
traditional approach to research human resource practices, that could
not be able to adequately evaluate the implications of technological
advancement. This is where, the multidisciplinary benefit, of
integrating multiple views and perspectives, over information
technology, data science, machine learning, allows the human
resource professionals to enjoy the benefit of making strategic human
resource decisions based on the data analysis (Chilisa, 2020).

Economic Aspects:
The impact of geopolitical tensions over labour markets and
compensation structure, is intense and it plays a crucial role in the
upliftment of human resource management. This is where a
multidisciplinary approach, is essential to explore the economic
influences, that are shaping human resource policies and practices,
thereby including more economics in the research process, that can
encourage a broader perspective on labour market, trends to enable
efficient and effective workforce planning (Ramraj, 2020).

Organizational Success:
The interdependency between human resource management and
organizational success, is eminent, as it calls for the use of
multidisciplinary research approach.The collaboration with experts in
the area of organizational development and strategic planning
facilities, human resource professionals to align individual efforts to
organizational performance (Ranjit, 2019).
Emerging Trends:
Critical understanding, of emerging trends and future readiness such
as work from home practices, adoption of artificial intelligence,
differing expectation of associates, due to difference in generations of
workforce, calls for an interdisciplinary perspective in research under
human resource management. By means of incorporating the multiple
insights and perspective of different subject matter experts, it is

4
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

capable of navigating future challenges that enables human resource

practitioners to align the current operating procedures with societal
technological and changing economic landscape (Rao V. , 2019).
On the whole, the role of multidisciplinary research in human
resource management is essential, as it is capable of fostering
effective management practices, from diverse disciplines thereby,
helping human resource experts to gain a comprehensive
understanding of how innovation and adaptive strategies can be
explored to meet organizational challenges (Ray, 2020).
Exploring the ways of building multi-disciplinary research teams:
As far as the multidisciplinary research projects, are concerned utmost
care had to be taken in the context of recruiting team members and
partners who should exhibit appropriate skills and competencies. In
evaluating the current trends in multidisciplinary research, it is
evident that selecting a mix of senior and junior researchers who have
multidimensional complementary skills in working across culture and
human resource disciplines, is essential. Yet another important
attribute, is the inclusion of researchers who have already witnessed
successful collaborations over multidisciplinary research (Reetu,
Geeta Kumari , and KM Pandey, 2021). It is very much important to
understand the challenges associated with cross disciplinary
collaboration, in order to gain access to increase return on investment
over the projects.
(Björkman, 2016) highlights, the most important challenges being the
lack of acceptance towards disciplinary differences which will exist in
the context of human resource management. With the intention of
accomplishing, multi or interdisciplinary research it is very much
important to test and evaluate the research design during the research
formulation. It is equally important to be aware that the sub samples,
that are being chosen without bias. It is crucial to agree on
dissemination strategies, at both domestic and international level for
implementing the research.
(Marr, 2012) on the other hand highlights, the importance of making
use of interactive web platform social media and other forms of
electronic and hybrid modes to encourage participation of the
respondents. It is very much evident, that introducing and publishing
multidisciplinary research in human resource management on
international context we will call for increased time and financial
resources. Most importantly, it is crucial to understand the needs and

5
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

essentials of the end target readers, and national policy context is

being evaluated in a transparent manner.
(Robson, 2019) highlights the importance of leadership, when it
comes to multidisciplinary international research in human resource
management. He highlights the fact that not all the members of the
team ,who will be involved in the multidisciplinary research will hold
same experienced or exist in the same career stage. Hence, it is of
utmost importance to exhibit leadership qualities that is capable of
motivating each one of the participants and collaborators, there by
encouraging them to make adequate contributions. This is why, it is
important to have a decentralised approach to multidisciplinary
research, as inputs from the data collectors and research collaborators
must be encouraged with equal importance of dealing any crisis
associated with confidence of peer members of the research.

(Wright, 2019) also highlights the challenges, which project managers

faced in the context of working on the same schedule for executing
the research and it is important to take into consideration the
scheduling of meeting across multiple time zones and cross functional
priorities. Travel restrictions, are in place as alternate mode of
arrangement, has to be made for the partners in order to encourage a
safe and productive multidisciplinary research execution. Avoiding
research trips, especially to locations where the climate tends to be
too hot or cold is one typical example of the challenges being faced
by the researchers, in the context of executing multidisciplinary
research in international context.

Emerging Trends in Multidisciplinary Research on Human

Resource Management: Evidence and assessment of approach by
scholars towards Multi-disciplinary research in HRM
There are several studies, which has currently got executed in the
field of human resource, taking a multidisciplinary approach to its
research. The following section focuses on evaluating the research
methodologies, and the outcome attained by the scholars, by means of
incorporating a multidisciplinary approach, to human resource
management topics.

Case study – 1 Increase in Employee Motivation through Upward

Feedback: Achala Agarwal and Shahi Joseph
Study by Achala Agarwal and Shahi Joseph, focused on evaluating
the increase in employee motivation, especially through the use of
upward feedback as a tool. In this case, the study, has been executed,
considering the impact which upward feedback has been able to

6
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

create on employee motivation. On taking a multidisciplinary

approach, the researchers did take 19 variables to identify the
relationship between employee motivation, organizational culture and
most importantly, employee feedback (Achala Agrawala and Shaji
Joseph, 2021).

The use of online survey technique, to gain insights from people

associated with multiple industries did add value to this research.Web
structural equation modelling and smart partial least square systems
were used. Such models, encourage the multidisciplinary approach to
research, as they are equally checked for their reliability and validity
of the data prior to the analysis. The findings of the study, showcased
the fact that upward feedback has been able to create positive impact
on the levels of employee motivation and it equally enhanced the
proportions of work culture due to the upward feedback process. The
outcomes, of the study to a greater extent has been significant, in
offering a multi-dimensional view for human resource personnel’s
who will be able to formulate organizational policies and thereby
using upward feedback to promote employee motivation.

Two most important hypothesis, formed the foundation of this

research, as the first hypothesis focused on the extent to which
upward feedback, was able to create an evaluative work culture, and
the second hypothesis focused on the extent to which evaluate the
work culture increased employee motivation. This particular study,
obviously was limited to certain boundaries which did not fulfil the
criteria of multidisciplinary research. Even though multiple
associates, from multiple industries, were involved in the study, not
much of clarity was offered over a comparative analysis of how
upward feedback influenced the levels of motivation and work culture
across each one of these industries. Hence, futuristic approach to
multidisciplinary research, can focus on surveying the sample from
one particular industry or an organization which can explode the
multidisciplinary impact, of upward feedback to the top of employee
motivation at workplace. Equally, there is abundance of scope for
future researchers to consider multiple dimensions of understanding,
the impact between upper feedback and employee motivation.
Additional factors, such as use of information technology, leadership
styles, nature of training, offered could promote and inclusive and
multidisciplinary approach, to this study (Achala Agrawala and Shaji
Joseph, 2021).

7
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Case study – 2Evaluating the level of job satisfaction of associates

on work performance in the Pharmaceutical industry: Reetu
Geeta Kumari and Pandey.
Evaluating job satisfaction, in India's pharmaceutical business has
been the core objective of the study, which yet again adopted a
multidisciplinary approach. The study and its objectives, focused on
examining employee job satisfaction level with the hypothesis
focusing on the relationship between employees job satisfaction,
especially with reference to King life science private limited (Reetu,
Geeta Kumari , and KM Pandey, 2021).

There are multiple components associated with job dimensions, these

range from variables such as salary, supervision, the job, working
conditions, Co-worker relations, opportunity for advancement, clarity
in the goal, employee Wellness, trust, career progression, and overall
image of the organization. The nature of research methods, being
adopted by the scholars in this case focused on making use of a
correlation matrix, between job satisfaction and work performance.
On the other hand, use of regression analysis, to identify the influence
of job satisfaction on work performance reflected the
multidisciplinary approach to the study. Yet another takeaway, from
this particular research is that majority of the researchers involving in
a multidisciplinary approach to human resource management, opt for
a convenient sampling approach baby making use of statistical tools,
such as percentage analysis, mean, standard deviation and
regressions, for the interpretation of results (Reetu, Geeta Kumari ,
and KM Pandey, 2021). The use of Likert’s 5 scale, in the
questionnaire, is being witnessed as a widespread adoption of gaining
access to respondents level of agreement in such multidisciplinary
studies. The Cronbach's alpha has been extensively used for
evaluating the reliability as well as validity, in assessing the
dependent and independent variables in a multidisciplinary study. The
outcome of the research, offers more clarity on how the
multidisciplinary variables, influenced job satisfaction at work. There
are multiple parameters such as Co-worker relations, the style of
leadership, employee Wellness, organizational image carrer
progression, democracy, being able to influence the level of
satisfaction, pursued by associates,at King life science private limited.
The credit of taking such multidisciplinary research, is that it to a
greater extent influences organization, to come up with new policies
and make modifications, to training programs and career
progressions, that can nurture the level of satisfaction,amongst the

8
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

associates, so there will be ready to offer their maximum productivity

to the organization (Reetu, Geeta Kumari , and KM Pandey, 2021).
Case Study – 3 Evaluating ways in which artificial intelligence
reshape human resource management: from authors Rama Devi
and Saroja Devi
Artificial intelligence, has become a common norm which has
integrated influence each one of the management function. To greater
extent, high performance organizations tend to benefit from the wider
adoption of artificial intelligence, there by including it in the
operations and realising benefits in both tangible and intangible forms
(Varadarajan, Ramadevi & Rajendran, Saroja Devi., 2023). One
important emerging trend, in the area of multidisciplinary research is
the interest of scholars and researchers, towards evaluating the link
between human resource management and artificial intelligence. The
outcome of the study, to a greater extent has highlighted the ways, in
which artificial intelligence has got integrated with the human
resource management practices. This equally highlights the extent to
which human resource professionals now play abundance of strategic
responsibilities to witness this transition of replacing human resource
with machines. The multidisciplinary approach, to understand
influence of artificial intelligence with human resource management
depends on a lot of capabilities, from artificial intelligence
perspective. These range from the ability of artificial intelligence to
be more transparent and also create an impact, across governance and
regulation through means of making use of data sources. When
artificial intelligence, is being adopted in manufacturing sector to a
greater extent, it does influence the human resource management with
customizations, essential across job design, characteristics,
psychological outcomes, career development, overcoming barriers to
innovative thinking respectively. The outcomes of implementing
artificial intelligence in an organization, eventually exposes the
managers to gain access to process efficiency, better data driven
decision making on manpower planning, identifying and realising
new performance indicator and key result areas, promoting employer
branding and also being able to gain access to sustainable business
performance. Such multidisciplinary trends, in evaluating the impact
of artificial intelligence in human resource management also extends
in the context of predicting candidate performance that reduces the
effort and time needed for human resource associates to match and
select right people for the right job. Emerging organizations such as
Google, Microsoft to a greater extent, have adopted artificial
intelligence in human resource context by means of screening and

9
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

interviewing the associates through a tailored yet effective artificial

intelligence software’s and web based tools (Varadarajan, Ramadevi
& Rajendran, Saroja Devi., 2023). The study, has also highlighted the
extent to which artificial intelligence, have been able to reduce the
administrative personnel tasks and also focus on offering customised
performance feedback, for internal career growth and development. It
is evident, that the multidisciplinary approach, also adopts a pure
qualitative case study based approach as in the case of the study in
order to list down the contextual qualitative benefits, realised by
companies in adopting artificial intelligence over human resource
management.

Mixed Research methods - An Effective Foundation for Multi-

Disciplinary Research:
The extent to which mixed methods have gained momentum across
multiple business and management disciplines has been phenomenal.
Currently, mixed research methods is considered as the 3rd best
methodological movement which has been able to offer strong body
of literature for the methodologists. To a greater extent, mixed
methods or capable of driving innovation and research and the same
time, being able to satisfy the expectations of multidisciplinary
research.

Grimmer and Hanson 2009, Carried out a study of multiple journals

published in human resource management exploring more than 828
articles between time span of 10 years. The outcomes of the study
revealed that 49.4 percentage of the articles where quantitative in
nature wherein 23.6 percentage of the work where theory based and
6.3 percentage of the works where qualitative, leaving out 10.7
percentage of the works that comprised both qualitative and
quantitative articles. This eventually, also added the fact that majority
of the multidisciplinary human resource based articles relied on
mixed method research, has a legitimate mode of investigating an
objective. It is evident that, there are growing number of text as well
as journals comprising mixed methods, as the foundation for
executing studies in human resource management.

Challenges influencing the adoption of Multi-Disciplinary

Research in HRM:
As equally, as there are more credits associated with the
multidisciplinary approach, there are some challenges plaguing the
concept and its execution.

10
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Lack of Coherence:
The lack of coherence, being the primary factor where it is complex
to arrive at a common understanding of people working across
multidisciplinary contexts. That's the current challenges influencing
multidisciplinary research, in human resource is linked with that of
finding a way to begin on a common objective amidst having team
members from diverse disciplines and school of thoughts. Since each
one of the researchers, and the participants have their own approach
to problem solving, it becomes a complex task to attain
synchronization and thereby being able to gain access to appropriate
feedback during the journey of research (Miller, 2019).

Lack of Oversight:
Yet another important limitation, has been associated with the lack of
oversight as meaningful review and evaluation of the scholars work
tends to become complex. The absence of constructive criticism, is
what makes the lack of oversight dominating hence the contribution
from universities and Research Institute to pursue multidisciplinary
research is of utmost importance to overcome this limitation
(Morrison, 2021).

Taking insights from multidisciplinary research to corporate

landscape
In the last decade, only few of the researchers were being able to
exploreand evolve over interdisciplinary skill sets, but ever since the
emergence of pandemic COVID-19 and the geopolitical tensions, the
need for multidisciplinary research in the field of human resource
management has sky rocketed. Factors such as working culture, origin
of business, cross cultural teams, have encouraged multidisciplinary
approach, as the top management tends to encourage associates
working in different arenas (Neet, 2019).

11
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Creative aspect:
Overall perks of implementing a multidisciplinary approach to
research, will encourage intensive proportions of creativity. As it
takes into consideration, the blend of varied expertise and scope for
intensive experimentation and analysis (Wright, 2019).

Scope for skill development:

The most influential part of multidisciplinary research, is that it is
capable of encouraging individuals to work on research ventures
which will involve inclusion of more than one scientific discipline.
Eventually, in such circumstances there is more scope, for the
researchers to hand their existing skills and thereby learning more
about the subject, for which they had an opportunity like this never
before (Walker, 2020).

Innovation:
The multidisciplinary forms of research, to a greater extent promotes
innovation of a higher calibre that could end up with incredible
scientific inventions. In the case of human resource management,
there lives more scope for gathering research perspectives, from all
fields such as engineering, biomedical, astronomy, information
technology, manufacturing and even virtual organizations. Hence
human resource personnel, would be able to arrive at mind blowing
human resource practices that are capable of promoting employee
trust and productivity even among different generations of workforce
(Varadarajan, Ramadevi & Rajendran, Saroja Devi., 2023).

Efficacy in operations:

12
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

The adoption of the findings, from the multidisciplinary research, into

the corporate landscape fosters abundance of room for imposing
greater efficiency in the operations. In executing daunting tasks or
change transition, such as adoption of e learning management into an
organization, that is more traditional in nature. The multidisciplinary
approach, to such human resource areas, encourages organization to
engage professionals who possess appropriate skills in the area of
learning management system and gamification (Townsend, 2016).
With such domain specific capabilities, there is more scope for human
resource professionals, to realise the emerging trends in information
communication and technology that that promotes knowledge
management, across the organization which could have taken more
time or even lead to failure, in case of the absence of subject matter
experts. Thus, multidisciplinary teams and multidisciplinary work
culture, is capable of creating a highly competitive corporate
environment, by inculcating greater efficiency in human resource
operations.

Overcoming disruption:
The impact of COVID-19 pandemic, as well as the geopolitical
tensions have often tested the patience, as well as the business
capabilities of organizations, across different borders. Hence
disruption, is one crucial challenge which has consistently hit the
human resource managers, when it comes to the analysis and
implementation of manpower planning and development in an
organization. This is where, it is important to adopt multidisciplinary
work, which will comprise the inclusion of professional across
departments such as finance, human resource management,
warehousing and artificial intelligence and information technology,
who work collectively towards solving a particular problem or
situation in an organization. The accumulation of multiple skill sets
and expertise of people from different genres, ads feather on the cap
for researchers and human resource personnel (Robson, 2019).

Road Ahead- Evaluating possible multidisciplinary themes for

HRM with appropriate Research methods:
There lies abundance of scope, for multidisciplinary themes in human
resource management, that can take into consideration multiple
disciplines alongside possible research methods. The following table
offers more insights into the combinations of multidisciplinary
ingredients, which can contribute for better understanding of human
resource management across pursuing personnel’s (Rialp, 2018).
Title Disciplines Stipulated Research

13
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

involved Outcomes Methods

Understanding Management of To evaluate how Longitudinal
interdependency human new technologies mixed-methods
between resources, and its study
technology and Human implementation at
organizational resource the workforce
behaviour psychology and tends to influence
information associate
technology. behaviour levels of
motivation and
organizational
behaviour.
Evaluating the Human Study will focus Case study
interdependency resource on how cultural methodology
between management, differences
innovation and cross cultural influences the
cross cultural scenarios, innovation process
management factors driving across teams as
innovation well as the process
of implementing
innovative ideas in
multinational
enterprise.
Evaluating the Information To be able to Quasi-
role of healthcare technology, understand how experimental
management healthcare information research design
systems in service quality, systems in the
enhancing patient human resource healthcare setting
care satisfaction management. influences the
levels human resource
productivity
promoting patient
care and
operational
efficiency.
Study on Neuroscience Explore the neural Neuroimaging
interdependency psychology and basis of leadership techniques
between human resource styles decision
leadership and management making and
neuro linguistic leadership emotional
programming styles intelligence to
promote leadership
development
across all the
levels.
Human resource Human Evaluating the Longitudinal
management and resource impact of diversity survey-based

14
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

diversity management, and cross culture study

inclusion diversity over human
inclusion resource practices
such as employee
engagement,
employee
satisfaction and
organizational
culture.

Conclusions:
Human capital is considered to be one of the most effective factors of
production in any organisation and so the management of human
resources assumes high priority among the top management agenda of
an organisation. The concept and practice of HR keep evolving at a
faster rate given the present condition of dynamism and complexities
of business environment. This has necessitated the need for
multidisciplinary research and development in the field of human
research management. This chapter has dealt with the need for and
importance of multidisciplinary research in HTM and explores the
ways and means of achieving this.

References:
1. Hantrais, L. (2022). How to Manage International
Multidisciplinary Research Projects. Edward Elgar Publishing.
2. Townsend, K. (2016). Handbook of Qualitative Research
Methods on Human Resource Management: Innovative
Techniques. Edward Elgar Publishing.
3. Björkman, I. (2016). Handbook of Research in International
Human Resource Management. Edward Elgar Publishing,
Incorporated.
4. Marr, B. (2012). Perspectives on Intellectual Capital. Taylor &
Francis.
5. Robson, F. J. (2019). Research Methods in Human Resource
Management: Investigating a Business Issue . Kogan Page.
6. Wright, P. M. (2019). Strategic Human Resource Management
A Research Overview. Taylor & Francis.
7. Achala Agrawala and Shaji Joseph. (2021). Increase in
employee motivation through upward feedback. In R. N.
Satyajit Chakrabarti, Interdisciplinary Research in Technology
and Management (pp. 228 - 240). CRC Press.
8. Reetu, Geeta Kumari , and KM Pandey. (2021). Mapping the
job satisfaction level of employees on work performance in
pharmaceutical industry. In R. N. Satyajit Chakrabarti,

15
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Interdisciplinary Research in Technology and Management:

Proceedings of the International Conference on
Interdisciplinary Research in Technology and Management
(IRTM, 2021), 26-28 February,2021, Kolkata, India (pp. 272-
280). CRC Press.
9. Varadarajan, Ramadevi & Rajendran, Saroja Devi. (2023).
Artificial Intelligence Reshaping Human Resource
Management: A Review. Research Gate, 114-121.
10. Boykoff, M. (2019). Creative (Climate) Communications.
Cambridge University Press.
11. Ramraj, V. V. (2020). Covid-19 in Asia: Law and Policy
Contexts. Oxford University Press.
12. Ranjit, G. (2019). Research Methodology : A Step-by-Step
Guide for Beginners (Seventh Edition ed.). SAGE Publications
Ltd.
13. Rialp, J. (2018). International Research: Opportunities and
Challenges in the 21st Century (Ninth Edition ed.). Elsevier.
14. Chilisa, B. (2020). Indigenous Research Methodologies (Fourth
Edition ed.). SAGE.
15. Walker, S. (2020). Employee Engagement and Communication
Research: Measurement, Strategy and Action (Google eBook).
Kogan Page Publishers.
16. Morrison, J. (2021). The Global Business Environment:
Meeting the Challenges (Third edition ed.). Palgrave
Macmillan.
17. Ray, P. (2020). Integrated Management from E-Business
Perspective: Concepts, Architectures and Methodologies (First
Edition ed.). Springer Science & Business Media.
18. Rao, V. (2019). Performance Management and Appraisal
Systems (Second edition ed.). SAGE Publications India.
19. Neet, J. (2019). Managing Diversity: Expert Solutions to
Everyday Challenges. Harvard Business Press.
20. Rao, M. (2019). Soft Skills: Enhancing Employability :
Connecting Campus with Corporate (Sixth Edition ed.). M.S.
Rao.
21. Argote, L. (2019). Organizational Learning: Creating, Retaining
and Transferring Knowledge (Google eBook) (second edition
ed.). Springer Science & Business Media,.
22. Miller, F. P. (2019). Force Field Analysis. VDM Publishing.
23. Gbosi, A. N. (2019). Human Resources Development and
Manpower Planning. Godsidi Press Limited.

16
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Dr. Mubarak Ali

Visiting Faculty,
Department of Business Economics, Modern College of Business &
Science, Muscat, Sultanate of Oman.
Formerly, HOD – Department of Business Administration &
Financial Sciences,
Oman College of Management and Technology,
Muscat, Sultanate of Oman
Phone: 968-92157955 Email: [email protected]

CHAPTER 2

THE BASIC CONCEPTS AND SCOPE OF

BIOCHEMISTRY

Abrar Hussain, Hafiza Sumaiyya Jamal, Muhammad Abid,

Rehana, Syed Abid Ali

Abstract:
The integration of science is the need of modern globalization and
development. The understanding of the complex nature of biological
processes and their chemical behavior is crucial for life sciences.
Biochemistry is the main player in this scenario and joins the two
important life sciences, chemistry and biology. Biochemistry is the
study and investigation of different biological processes that are
associated with living organisms. It also explained the molecular basis
of biological processes in the light of chemistry. It is the essential
science that provides understanding and solution of diseases,
regulations of biological processes, mechanisms and functions of
crucial life processes, the practical usage of life molecules, and gives
the basic understanding of all modern genetic tools and their
17
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

applications. Biochemistry is a vast discipline and comprised of many

fields like molecular biology, cell biology, genetics, and
biotechnology etc. biochemistry is important as they give the
understanding of biological processes, plays role in nutrition, provide
knowledge of biological molecules, and provides a pivotal role in
different biotechnological applications. The scope of biochemistry is
also broad and coverers many areas. Biochemists can play their role
in medicine, genetics, metabolisms, DNA technology, forensic
science, agriculture, food industries, and academia. Currently
biochemistry is tightly studied with organic chemistry and thus,
develops the understanding of bioorganic chemistry. In summary,
biochemistry is a crucial field of biological sciences that provides the
solution of cellular problems and gives a wide spectrum scope to
biochemists.

Key words: Biochemistry, Chemistry, Biomolecules, Biochemists,

DNA

Introduction
he developments
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.02 of biological science to enhance the
understanding of cellular mechanisms and their impacts
on the society are growing rapidly. Currently, the
integration and submerging of scientific fields have
attracted the attention among the scientific community for the
development, understanding, and providing the scientific background
knowledge for any scientific field. Being a human our body is
composed of different types of complex systems that are integrated in
a fine way and create an intricate and well-organized complex
organism. Our body is composed of trillions of different cells with
proper coordination with each other and provide a unique and
organized body system (Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;Hussain A &Ali
SA, 2023).

Our body is composed of a huge number of systems each with unique

compositions, mechanism, and functions. The understanding of all
these processes and mechanisms is very difficult to learn in a single
branch of science, hence different branches of science were developed
to properly understand the exact mechanism of these processes. The
biological processes that happen in our body have a crucial role in the
body’s functioning, but how these processes are coordinated with
each other and what is their molecular mechanisms of action, is very
important. It is the biology and its branches that help to understand

18
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

these processes and mechanisms. The other aspect of this

coordination is their chemistry, as how these interact, coordinate, and
produce/release energy. This area is covered by the field of chemistry
which helps us to know about their chemical nature, compositions,
and the various chemicals that are associated with all these biological
processes (Tellingen, 2001).

The development of biochemistry becomes crucial when the

researchers take interest in integrating the chemical basis of these
biological processes and their importance. Biochemistry, which was
developed in the 19th century currently,is one of the basic and crucial
science field that provide the understanding of biological processes
following the rules of chemistry. Biochemistry is the branch of
natural science that deal with the study of all biological processes that
take place inside living organisms, and provides the fundamental
chemical understanding of these processes. The discovery of
biomolecules particularly DNA change the whole paradigm and shift
to understand the molecular biology, a branch of biochemistry
(Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016; Kabir, 2021).
The scientists studying biochemistry are known as biochemists.
Biochemists have a versatile field of interest to get specialties and
have greater opportunities to embark their careers. The most relevant
places where biochemists can show their potential include academia,
the medical field, industries, and hospitals or scientific laboratories.
The future of biochemists is considered brighter due to up-hilling
development in the field and the understanding of more biological
processes and mechanisms (Kohler, 1929;Hussain A & Ali SA,
2023).

The understanding of the basic concepts in every field especially in

biochemistry playing a pivotal role, as they help the learner to apply
these concepts and build their understanding. The higher-level
biochemist (biochemists with higher degrees) mostly forget the basics
principles and there is no specific time to revise. Highlighting this
concept, it is crucial to provide an updated and comprehensive
overview of biochemistry, and to attract the beginner the scope will
be mentioned. Hence, this chapter will help to understand the basics
concepts, an overview of the subject, and the potential careers which
a biochemist can achieve.

History and developments in biochemistry

The emergence biochemistry has been traced back to 1833 when

19
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

AnselmePayen made the groundbreaking discovery of the first

enzyme, known as diastase or amylase (Butnariu, 2018). In 1896,
Eduard Buchner made a significant contribution by demonstrating a
complex biochemical process occurring outside the cells, specifically
the alcoholic fermentation facilitated by yeast cells. Understanding
more biological processes leads to the birth of Biochemistry in 1882,
but as a formal discipline and subject the biochemistry was introduced
in 1903 by German chemist Carl Neuberg(Fruton & Fruton, 1976;
Cohn, 2002; Butnariu, 2018). Earlier, this area was formerly denoted
as physiological chemistry.

Biochemistry has progressed, particularly from the middle of the

20thcentury and with the emergence of novel methodologies such as
chromatography, X-ray diffraction, dual polarization interferometry,
NMR spectroscopy, radio isotopic labeling, electron microscopy, and
molecular dynamics simulations (Butnariu, 2018). These
methodologies have facilitated the discovery and comprehensive
analysis of numerous molecules and metabolic pathways within the
cell, including glycolysis, Krebs cycle, etc.(Engwa Azeh Godwill,
2016). The development of major events in the history of
biochemistry is shown in Figure 1.

The discovery of the gene and its function in the transmission of

information within the cell is a significant event in the field of
biochemistry. This particular aspect of biochemistry is commonly
referred to as molecular biology. During late 1950s, James D.
Watson, Francis Crick, Rosalind Franklin, and Maurice Wilkins
played a key role in unraveling the structure of DNA and proposing
its association with the genetic transfer of information. In 1958,
George Beadle and Edward Tatum were awarded the Nobel Prize for
their research on fungi, which demonstrated that a single gene is
responsible for the production of a specific enzyme. A notable
milestone in the field of forensic science occurred in 1988 when Colin
Pitchfork became the first individual to be convicted of murder based
on DNA evidence, thereby led to the advancement of this scientific
discipline (Quastel, 1985). More recently, Andrew Z. Fire and Craig
C. Mello were honored with the 2006 Nobel Prize for their ground
breaking discovery of the role played by RNA interference (RNAi) in
the suppression of gene expression (Rubio et al., 2015; Butnariu,
2018; Mohammad, 2018).

20
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 1. Timeline development of major events in the

history of biochemistry

Principle of biochemistry
The study of chemical reactions and biological processes in the living
organisms is known as biochemistry (Kabir, 2021). The remarkable
complexity of life is a result of biochemical processes, which regulate
the flow of information through biochemical signaling and the flow of
chemical energy through metabolism. The fundamental principles of
biochemistry are; properties structures, mechanisms and reactions of
bio macromolecules including carbohydrates, amino acids, peptides,
proteins, and nucleic acids, enzymatic metabolic pathways, and
biochemical genetics. The organizing principles of life in all its forms
are provided by biochemistry, which also gives a molecular
description of the structures, mechanisms, and chemical processes
that are shared by all living organisms. While biochemistry offers
valuable perspectives and useful applications in the fields of
medicine, agriculture, nutrition, and industry, its primary focus lies in
the wonder of life itself (Butnariu, 2018;Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;
Lynn G Clark, 2018).

The three main principal areas of biochemistry are 1) the structures of

the chemical elements that make up living things, 2) the reactions

21
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(metabolism) that take place in living things, and 3) molecular

genetics. The ultimate aim of biochemistry is to provide a chemical
explanation for every aspect of life. The study of biochemistry is
largely dependent on the fundamentals of organic chemistry and other
basic sciences since organic molecules (proteins, lipids,
carbohydrates, nucleic acid) carry out life activities. Biochemical
reactions in living bodies follows the same principles as chemical
reactions in the test tube. Polymer chains of amino acids,
monosaccharides, and nucleotides, make up the main macromolecules
in cells like proteins, polysaccharides, and nucleic acids respectively.

Foundations of biochemistry
The question of biochemistry is how the myriad of distinct
biomolecules possess their remarkable properties. Even with these
shared characteristics and the underlying unity of life they disclose,
generalizing about living things is challenging. Living substance have
some properties like reproduction and growth, stimulus sensitivity,
and regulations, etc. which are fundamental to them(Black,
2020;Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016). The importance of these
foundations are summarized in Figure 2.

Figure 2. The importance of different foundations of biochemistry

Cellular Foundation
Both unicellular and multicellular organisms have an intricate unity
and cellular coordination at their cellular level. Irrespective of the

22
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

cell’s size, shape, and functions all the biochemical processes take
place in them and can shared characteristics. Plasma membrane
defines the boundary of the cell, separating it from the surrounding
(Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;Kreutzfeldt & Witt, 1991). It is made up
of protein and lipid molecules that surround the cell in a thin,
resilient, flexible, hydrophobic barrier and involves in the transport of
materials. An aqueous solution in the cell is called cytoplasm.
Ribosomes, proteasomes mitochondria, chloroplasts and a variety of
suspended particles with specific functions are found there(Wayne,
2019). Eukaryotic cells have a variety of membrane bonded
organelles that a have specific function, which can be isolated and
studied. All cells have a nucleus or a nucleoid, where the genome is
located. DNA makes up all of the genes which is replicated and stored
(Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;Kreutzfeldt & Witt, 1991;Lynn G Clark,
2018).

Physical Foundation
Every living organism required an energy for their activities and
survivability. Similar to the synthetic processes in any factory, the
biochemical reactions within cells also require the input of energy.
Expression and storage of information also require energy. During
evolution, cells adapted highly efficient mechanisms for coupling the
energy from chemical fuels or sunlight. Living organisms never
experience environmental equilibrium; instead, they always exist in a
dynamic steady state with surroundings. In the living system, by using
flux of mass and energy small molecules and macromolecules are
continuously synthesized and broken down. The steady state of
equilibrium is maintained by constant supply of energy. There are two
ways that organisms get energy from their environment, the chemical
way (such as oxidation of glucose to extract energy) or energy from
the sunlight. Cells combine these energy-demanding, thermody
namically unfavorable endergonic reactions to other reactions that
release free energy, or exergonic reactions, to carry out these
endergonic reactions (Lynn G Clark, 2018).

Chemical Foundation
The goal of biochemistry is to provide a chemical explanation of
biological life. The biochemical studies indicate that the breakdown
of glucose in animal muscle cells and yeast, revealed striking
chemical similarities between these two cells. In both cells, glucose
breakdown processes involved the same 10 chemical intermediates
and 10 enzymes (Lynn G Clark, 2018). More than half of the dry

23
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

weight of cells is made up of carbon, which is the central component

of the chemistry of all living organisms. With hydrogen atoms, as
well as with oxygen and nitrogen atoms, carbon can form both single
and double bonds. The capacity of carbon atoms to form more bonds
up to four (phenomenon called catenation) is utmost importance in
life. In biomolecules, carbon atoms bound by covalent bonds can
form cyclic patterns, branching chains, and linear chains. It appears
likely that during the genesis and development of living beings, the
selection of carbon compounds for the molecular machinery of cells
was influenced by the variety of carbon's bonding, both with itself and
with other elements. The majority of biomolecules can be thought of
as derivatives of hydrocarbons, with different functional groups
taking the place of hydrogen atoms to give the molecule unique
chemical properties that give rise to different families of organic
substances. Numerous biomolecules have multiple functional groups,
making them polyfunctional. The chemical makeup of a substance
and how its functional groups are arranged in three dimensions define
its chemical personality (Lynn G Clark, 2018).

Genetic Foundation
The capacity of living cells and creatures to replicate themselves for
countless generations with almost flawless fidelity is perhaps their
most remarkable property. This continuity of inherited features
suggests that the structure of the molecules containing the genetic
information has remained constant across millions of years (Lynn G
Clark, 2018). There is strong evidence that the genetic instructions in
living organisms have not altered significantly over years; for
example, many bacteria today resemble those that existed over four
billion years ago in terms of size, shape, and internal organization.
The genetic material's structure is what gives rise to this continuity in
composition and structure.Deoxyribonucleotides of four different
types i.e. deoxyadenylate (A), deoxyguanylate (G), deoxycytidylate
(C), and deoxythymidylate (T), are covalently linked to form the
linear polymer known as DNA. Because of their distinct three-
dimensional structures, each nucleotide can only non-covalently and
extremely specifically associate with one other nucleotide in the
complementary chain (A=T and G ≡ C). As a result, the whole
nucleotide sequence in one strand of the double-stranded DNA
molecule is complementary to the sequence in the other. Two strands
of DNA held together by H-bonding between nucleotides. DNA's four
different types of deoxyribonucleotides (A, C, G, and T) are arranged
in a linear sequence that encodes genetic information. DNA's
structure makes it possible for it to replicate and repair itself with

24
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

almost perfect fidelity. DNA has an extremely accurate nucleotide

sequence despite its large size, and genetic continuity in organisms is
based on this perfect pattern being maintained over very long
timeframes. A protein's distinct three-dimensional structure is created
by the linear arrangement of amino acids, which is encoded in the
DNA of the protein's gene (Lynn G Clark, 2018).

The organization of life

The biosphere, which includes all previous levels, is the greatest level
of organization for living things. The simplest to most sophisticated
biological levels of organization are organelles, cells, tissues, organs,
organ systems, organisms, populations, communities, ecosystem, and
biosphere (Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016). Organisms are intricately
constructed and arranged, with a hierarchy that can be analyzed on a
small-to-large scale. The lowest and most basic unit of matter is the
atom. It is made up of an electron-encircled nucleus. Atoms combine
to create molecules, which are made up of two or more atoms joined
by one or more chemical bonds. Macromolecules, which are huge
molecules that are mostly created via polymerization. Organelles are
collections of macromolecules that form in a cell and are encircled by
membranes. Cells include tiny structures called organelles. These
include the essential processes performed by mitochondria and
chloroplasts. Cells are the building blocks of all living things, and
they are the smallest basic unit of structure and function found in
living things. While some organisms are multicellular, others are
unicellular (Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;Wayne, 2019).

There are two types of cells, Prokaryotes, which are single-celled or

colony-forming creatures without membrane-bound nuclei and
eukaryotic cells, which have both membrane-bound nuclei and
organelles (Wayne, 2019). Tissues, or clusters of related cells doing
related tasks, are created when cells join to form larger organisms.
Organs are groups of tissues working together to fulfil a single
purpose. A higher level of organization made up of functionally
related organs is called an organ system. For example, circulatory
system which transports blood in the body. Different organ systems
combine to form an organism. A human body is a perfect example of
an organism. A population is made up of all the members of a species
that reside in a particular area like Pine trees in a forest. A community
is made up of all the populations who live in a specific location, like
Forest. An ecosystem is made up of all living organism found in a
given area as well as abiotic, non-living elements found there, such as
soil nitrogen and rain water. The biosphere, which is the collection of
25
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

all ecosystems from various zones of life on earth, is the greatest level
of organization. It encompasses the air, the sea, and the atmosphere as
shown in Figure 3(Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;Lynn G Clark, 2018).

Figure 3. The organization of life, from

sub-atomic particles to biosphere

The concept of biomolecules

Bio monomers and biopolymers constitute the fundamental
framework of the four primary classes of macromolecules in the field
of biochemistry, namely carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, and nucleic
acids (Giera et al., 2022). The polymerization of monomers leads to
the formation of biopolymers. A biomolecule represents a chemical
compound that occurs naturally within the biological systems and
primarily consist of carbon and hydrogen, in addition to nitrogen,
oxygen, phosphorus, and sulfur(Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016).
Although other elements can sometimes be incorporated, but their
occurrence is much less frequent. The presence of biomolecules is
vital for the sustenance of all recognized life forms. Amino acids are
among the most crucial constituents employed in the natural world to
fabricate larger molecules. Another building blocks are nucleotides,
which arecomposed of a purine or pyrimidine, pentose, and a
phosphate group, which produce nucleic acids.Apart from the
polymeric biomolecules, various organic compounds are also
assimilated or synthesized by living systems(Riezman & Deshusses,
2009; Pastrana & Jauregi, 2017;Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;Colver,
2015). The four basics biomolecules are explained here.

Carbohydrates
Carbohydrates have an empirical formula of CH2O, indicating that

26
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

they typically possess two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen atom to
each carbon atom. The smallest carbohydrates are denoted as
monosaccharides, with the most crucial one being is glucose
(C6H12O6), as it is harnessed by animals for energy provision. Two
monosaccharides have the capability to merge and form a
disaccharide. Sucrose (table sugar) represents a disaccharide that
comprises one glucose unit bonded to one fructose unit.
Monosaccharides and disaccharides are commonly referred to as
simple sugars (Pallardy, 2008;Kreutzfeldt & Witt, 1991). Numerous
monosaccharides have the ability to be interconnected, thus forming
polysaccharides i.e. starch, cellulose, and glycogen. When the need
arises, glycogen is able to undergo glycogenolysis, a process in which
it is broken down into glucose, facilitated by the hormone glucagon
(Colver, 2015; Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;Rapoport, 1975).

Carbohydrates are synthesized by plants through the process of

photosynthesis, utilizing water and carbon dioxide (CO2) in the
presence of sunlight.Once plants become part of the animal food
chain, digestive enzymes degrade these carbohydrates into
monosaccharides (primarily glucose), which are then absorbed and
further metabolized within cells through a mechanism known as
cellular respiration. This allows for the utilization of stored energy.
Carbon dioxide is produced as a byproduct of cellular respiration,
thus initiating the cycle once again. Consumption of intricate
carbohydrates provides a longer and more sustained release of energy
due to the duration required for their disintegration. However, the
resilient and fibrous cellulose can solely be utilized as an energy
source by animal (Colver, 2015; Pastrana & Jauregi, 2017;Gajera et
al., 2008).

Proteins
Proteins serve as an energy source for the body. Amino acids, termed
as the fundamental constituents of proteins are interconnected in long
chains. While certain amino acids are indispensable for an animal's
nourishment, the body has the capability to synthesize others. Amino
acids, resembling carbohydrates, consist of carbon, hydrogen, and
oxygen atoms. Additionally, they incorporate nitrogen, and
sometimes sulphur (Pastrana & Jauregi, 2017). The number and
arrangement of amino acids in a sequence bestow upon each protein
its distinctiveness. Predominantly, protein chains encompass
somewhere between 50 and 2000 amino acids. While scientists have
identified over 100 amino acids, animals solely utilize approximately
20 to synthesize proteins. Hence, an immense multitude of amino acid
27
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

combinations remains unexplored. The organism's DNA contains the

instructions for synthesizing these proteins. Each gene serves as a
blueprint for the sequence of a protein (Kreutzfeldt & Witt, 1991).
The human body's cells house numerous distinct proteins, each with
its own designated purpose. The amino acid chains have the
capability to intricately fold into globular-shaped proteins, due to
specific regions within the chain that can engage in hydrogen bonding
(Pastrana & Jauregi, 2017; Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;Colver, 2015).

Lipids
Lipids represent the bio-macromolecule that provides energy to the
body. One of the primary roles of lipid is it involves the storage of
energy for long-term utilization. It is noteworthy that a gram of fat
possesses twice the energy capacity of an equivalent amount of
carbohydrate. Lipids consist of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen. The
lipid molecule, constituting fat, consists of a glycerol molecule
attached to elongated-chain molecules referred to as fatty acids
(Kreutzfeldt & Witt, 1991). Certain fatty acids are essential and
necessary, contributing to the transportation and digestion of vitamins
A, D, E, and K. The glycerol head is hydrophilic, whereas the fatty
acid tails are hydrophobic. Consequently, these molecules organize
themselves in a manner that generates a self-sealing and uninterrupted
barrier (Colver, 2015; Pastrana & Jauregi, 2017;Engwa Azeh
Godwill, 2016)

Nucleic acids
Deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) represents a molecule of utmost
significance within the realm of living entities.There are five different
types of nucleotide bases including includes Adenine (A), Thymine
(T), Cytosine (C) and Guanine (G) for DNA while Uracil (U) replace
thymine in RNA molecules (Pastrana & Jauregi, 2017;Minchin &
Lodge, 2019;Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016).DNA and RNA, also
known as nucleic acids, serve as carriers of genetic information
(Cohn, 2002). They act as hereditary material employed by cells and
viruses to generate faithful copies of their own entities.Cells utilize
this information to synthesize RNA and proteins, which are essential
for the proper functioning of living organisms. The renowned double
helix structure of DNA enables the replication and transmission of
this genetic information to subsequent generations. The total genes in
any mammalian cells is varying with the highest number is present in
human (Engwa Azeh Godwill, 2016;Gajera et al., 2008;Pastrana &
Jauregi, 2017;Minchin & Lodge, 2019).

28
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Branches of biochemistry
Generally, biochemistry is known for examining the structure &
biochemical functions of organisms, but, it is divided into different
branches. The branches of biochemistry and their careers are defined
in Table 1.
Table 1. The branches of biochemistry and their careers
Branch Definition Careers
This provides all the structural
Academia,
information of the living
Structural biology industries,
organisms and
laboratories
physicochemical properties
Studies the configuration,
function of biologically Academia, forensic
Molecular biology important molecules such as science, industries,
nucleic acids i.e. DNA and laboratories, hospital
RNA
The combinatorial branch
Academia, forensic
which is considered a growing
Bioorganic science, industries,
field and focuses on the study
chemistry laboratories,
of biological processes in the
pharmaceutical
light of chemistry
Academia, hospital,
Deals with body fluids to
Clinical chemistry clinics, laboratories
understand a disease properly
technologists
It deals with the study of the Academia, forensic
Immunology immune system in a living science, healthcare,
organism pharmaceutical
It is related to the endocrine
Academia, forensic
system, glands and organs
Endocrinology science,
responsible for producing
pharmaceutical
hormones
It describe the genes, Academia, forensic
Genetics variation, and heredity science, healthcare,
information of organisms agriculture
Academia, forensic
It deals with nervous system science, healthcare,
Neurochemistry
and neurotransmitters pharmaceutical,
diagnosis
Academia,
It is the study of enzymes and healthcare,
Enzymology enzymes’ behavior within the agriculture,
human body biotechnological
fields

29
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Academia,
This deals with the chemical
healthcare,
Cellular processes inside the cells, like
agriculture,
biochemistry energy production, storage,
biotechnological
and usage
fields
It claims to know the different Academia, forensic
Metabolic types of metabolic pathways science, healthcare,
Biochemistry at the cellular level and pharmaceutical,
organic context diagnosis
Studies viruses to recognize Forensic science,
and classify them, as well as healthcare,
Virology
the mechanisms of action to pharmaceutical,
oppose them diagnosis
Studies the metabolic
behavior of compounds whose Academia, forensic
chemical structure is not part science, healthcare,
Xenobiochemistry
of the regular metabolism of a pharmaceutical,
given organism, such as diagnosis
mycotoxins, phytochemicals

Scope of Biochemistry
The development of molecular science has led to a better
understanding of molecular mechanisms, which has implications for
figuring out illnesses as well as health issues. Sufficient biochemical
knowledge is also necessary in the medical sector or a related subject
to comprehend the growth, metabolism, and function of a healthy
human body. The development of better methods for administering
protein therapies to patients commenced with the discovery of insulin
in 1922.The design and construction of nanoscale medication delivery
devices is made possible by nanoscience. Targeted drug delivery to
cells or tissues is made possible by the inclusion of particular
biomolecules into these nanocarriers, which are guided by
biochemical expertise. Enhancing medication efficacy, lowering
adverse effects, and increasing patient outcomes all are depending on
biochemistryapplications. The biochemists have a wide range of
opportunities in different fields, like academia, industry, agriculture,
medical, hospital, laboratories, marine science, food industry,
research institute, and pharmaceutical industry, etc.(Riezman &
Deshusses, 2009;Mohammad, 2018).

Biochemistry is one of the scientific fields with the greatest influence,

and it is growing quickly. Integrating the fundamental principles of
chemistry and biology, the subject is highly influential in the creation
of innovative and cutting-edge scientific methodologies(Tamas,

30
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2023). Utilizing scientific techniques and methods biochemistry,

enhances its the value for the study of plants, animals, and
microorganisms. Biochemistry, the most comprehensive fundamental
sciences that comprises numerous subfields, including molecular
genetics, immunochemistry, neurochemistry, bioorganic chemistry,
clinical biochemistry, physical biochemistry, and biochemical
pharmacology.Biochemistry boost the discoveries in scientific area by
combine studying in biology and chemistry. Biochemistry unfolded a
landmark discoveries in between 1950 to 2000 (Cohn, 2002). The
general scope of biochemistry is illustrated in Figure 4.

Bioorganic is another growing branch of biochemistry that integrates

the study ofbiochemistry and chemistry. It covers the biological
process with the chemical mechanisms. Bioorganic chemistry can
lead to the development of model-building ideas for the research and
dig out various biological parameters in one unit. The roots of
bioorganic chemistry also extend to the pharmacological aspects of
chemistry, or medicinal chemistry, where chemists, pharmacologists,
and biochemists collaborate closely to understand the precise
properties, functions, and applications of molecules of interest
(Hussain A & Ali SA, 2023).

Biochemistry also plays an important part in nanotechnology. The

synergistic contribution of biochemistry and nanoscience bring great
discoveries in the field, drug delivery systems, sensing, catalysis,
immobilization of biomolecules on nanomaterials leads to enhance
catalytic activities(Tamas, 2023). Over 40 years, the increasing fusion
of bio- and nanotechnologies is beginning to change how we identify,
manage, and keep track of illnesses and unsolved medical issues.
Recent developments in nanotechnology, coupled with our expanding
knowledge of cancer biology and nano-bio interactions, have sparked
the creation of a number of nanocarriers that target tumors tissues,
cells, or organelles specifically in an effort to increase therapeutic
efficacy while lowering off-target toxicity of the encapsulated
anticancer agents.

31
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 4. Illustration describing the scope, career

and future areas in biochemistry

Importance of biochemistry
As mentioned earlier that biochemistry is the central science that
combine the two vast areas of life science, the chemistry and biology,
and hence have a huge importance in our life. The biochemists can
perform different activities and play a pivotal role. The importance of
biochemistry and biochemist are described here.
1- Biochemistry helps to understand the chemical reactions occur
inside the cells
2- It describes the functions and activities of the enzymes
3- It gives concepts and described the biomolecules
4- It provides understanding of body structures, compositions, and
functions
5- It explains the basic life process like digestion, respiration,
excretion, etc.
6- It plays a crucial role in food and nutrition
7- It gives an insight of agriculture science
8- It gives solution to biological and medical problems
9- It provides the basic knowledge of biological product
development

32
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

10- Biochemistry also ensure the sustainability

11- It helps in the quality control and safety
12- The recent development in food and agriculture etc. are using
biochemistry principle
13- Food shelf-life and storage are enhanced using the biochemistry
principle
14- Biotechnological applications are also validated by
biochemistry rules
15- Genetic manipulation takes the background from biochemistry

Future scope and recommendation

As biochemistry is integratedwith other disciplines, and thus open
new door for young scientist in various domains of science.
Biochemistry is most striving field that explain molecular and
biological phenomena in a single unit. It will remain a vibrant area
with great potential for influential research and innovation. Since the
current era is artificial intelligence and bioinformatics, the integration
of biochemistry with bioinformatics and artificial intelligence
facilitates the study of huge biological data and the discovery of
significant patterns. This is an interdisciplinary field to which young
scientists with expertise in computational biology and data science
can make major contributions. The future holds the key to new
discoveries and solving urgent challenges through the integration of
biochemistry with other scientific disciplines and technology.

Reference
1. Black, P. N. (2020). A revolution in biochemistry and molecular
biology education informed by basic research to meet the
demands of 21st century career paths. Journal of Biological
Chemistry, 295(31), 10653–10661. https://doi.org/10.1074/jbc.
AW120.011104
2. Butnariu, M. (2018). General Concepts of Plant Biochemistry.
Biochemistry & Physiology: Open Access, 07(02). https://doi.org/
10.4172/2168-9652.1000234
3. Cohn, M. (2002). Mini‐series: Significant contributions to
biological chemistry over the past 125 years: Biochemistry in the
United States in the first half of the twentieth century.
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology Education, 30(2), 77–85.

33
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

https://doi.org/10.1002/bmb.2002.494030020034
4. Colver, J. (2015). Basics of biochemistry. In Veterinary Nursing
Journal (Vol. 30, Issue 3). https://doi.org/10.1080/17415349.
2015.1009270
5. Engwa Azeh Godwill. (2016). Biochemistry of Living
Organisms: The Genesis. Basic Biochemistry, 5(1), 1–22.
6. Fruton, J. S., & Fruton, J. S. (1976). The Emergence of
Biochemistry Published by: American Association for the
Advancement of Science Linked references are available on
JSTOR for this article: 23 April 1976 , Volume 192 , Number
4237 S i E0 4 The Emergence of Biochemistry. 192(4237), 327–
334.
7. Gajera, H. P., Patel, S. V., & Golakiya, B. A. (2008).
Fundamentals of Biochemistry: a textbook. In International Book
Distributing Co. (Vol. 1, Issue 1). https://labalbaha.files.
wordpress.com/2014/04/fundamentals-of-biochemistry.pdf
8. Giera, M., Yanes, O., & Siuzdak, G. (2022). Metabolite
discovery: Biochemistry’s scientific driver. Cell Metabolism,
34(1), 21–34. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cmet.2021.11.005
9. Hussain A and Ali SA. (2023). Bioorganic chemistry. Advances
in Chemical and Biological Science, 1, 29–34. https://doi.org/
10.1016/0045-2068(73)90039-4
10. Kabir, A. (2021). An Overview on Cancer and its types. Medical
and Clinical Reviews, 7(1), 2022.

11. Kohler, R. E. (1929). The History of Biology: A Survey. Journal

of the American Medical Association, 92(6), 497. https://doi.org/
10.1001/jama.1929.02700320067035
12. Kreutzfeldt, C., & Witt, W. (1991). Structural Biochemistry.
Saccharomyces, 5–58. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4899-2641-
8_2
13. Lynn G Clark. (2018). Chapter 1. An Automated Irrigation
System Using Arduino Microcontroller, 3(May), 2–6.
14. Minchin, S., & Lodge, J. (2019). Understanding biochemistry:
Structure and function of nucleic acids. Essays in Biochemistry,
63(4), 433–456. https://doi.org/10.1042/EBC20180038
15. Mohammad, O. (2018). Recent trends in biochemistry and
biotechnology. Journal of Biochemistry and Biotechnology,

34
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

01(01),5–7. https://doi.org/10.35841/biochemistry-biotechnology.
1000104
16. Pallardy, S. G. (2008). Chapter 7 - Carbohydrates. Physiology of
Woody Plants (Third Edition), 199–215. http://www.science
direct.com/science/article/pii/B9780120887651500087
17. Pastrana, L., & Jauregi, P. (2017). Basic Biochemistry. In Current
Developments in Biotechnology and Bioengineering: Foundations
of Biotechnology and Bioengineering. Elsevier B.V.
https://doi.org/10.1016/B978-0-444-63668-3.00002-0
18. Quastel, J. H. (1985). The development of biochemistry in the
20th century. Molecular and Cellular Biochemistry, 69(1), 17–26.
https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00225923
19. Rapoport, S. M. (1975). Medical biochemistry. Veb Verlag Volk
Gesundh., Berlin.
20. Riezman, H., & Deshusses, J. (2009). History of biochemistry at
the university of Geneva from the boulevard des philosophes to
quai ernest-ansermet. Chimia, 63(12), 826–829. https://doi.org/
10.2533/chimia.2009.826
21. Rubio, M. Á., Napolitano, M., Ochoa De Alda, J. A. G.,
Santamaría-Gómez, J., Patterson, C. J., Foster, A. W., Bru-
Martínez, R., Robinson, N. J., & Luque, I. (2015). Trans-
oligomerization of duplicated aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases
maintains genetic code fidelity under stress. Nucleic Acids
Research, 43(20), 9905–9917. https://doi.org/10.1093/nar/
gkv1020

22. Tamas, M. (2023). Archives in Chemical Research The Future

Scope and Emerging Uses of Biochemistry. 07(02), 4657.
23. Tellingen, C. Van. (2001). Biochemistry from a
phenomenological point of view. BIOCHEMISTRY from a
Phenomenological Point of View Christa, 70. http://www.
louisbolk.org/downloads/1282.pdf
24. Wayne, R. (2019). Plasma Membrane. Plant Cell Biology, 17–53.
https://doi.org/10.1016/b978-0-12-814371-1.00002-3

35
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Abrar Hussain
Third World Center for Science and Technology, HEJ Research
Institute of Chemistry, International Center for Chemical and
Biological Sciences, University of Karachi, Karachi-75270 Pakistan
Email: [email protected]

Hafiza Sumaiyya Jamal

Email: [email protected]
Muhammad Abid
Email: [email protected]
Rehana
Email: [email protected]
Syed Abid Ali
Email: [email protected]

CHAPTER 3

UNVEILING THE PSYCHOSOCIAL TAPESTRY:

EXPLORING THE INTERSECTION OF
PSYCHOLOGY AND LITERATURE

Dr. M. K. Sheeba

Abstract:

36
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

This article delves into the intricate relationship between psychology

and literature, unraveling the profound impact of one on the other.
Keywords such as narrative therapy, character analysis, and symbolic
imagery are explored to understand how literature serves as a mirror
reflecting the complexities of the human psyche. Drawing examples
from classic and contemporary works, including the introspective
narratives of Virginia Woolf's "Mrs. Dalloway" and the existential
dilemmas depicted in Albert Camus' "The Stranger," we navigate the
realms where psychological concepts find expression in the written
word.

Key Words: Narrative Therapy, Character Analysis, Symbolic

Imagery, existential dilemmas

Introduction:
n the intricate dance between the disciplines of
psychology and literature, a rich and nuanced tapestry
emerges, offering profound insights into the human
experience. This article embarks on an exploration of the
symbiotic relationship between these seemingly disparate fields,
revealing how narratives serve not only as mirrors reflecting the
complexities of the mind but also as architects shaping our
understanding of psychological landscapes.

As we venture into this interdisciplinary terrain, the central premise

lies in unraveling the profound impact of psychological concepts
within the realm of storytelling. Literature, with its diverse characters,
narratives, and symbolic languages, becomes a reservoir of
psychological insights. By delving into the keywords of narrative
therapy, character analysis, and symbolic imagery, we aim to shed
light on the ways in which literature acts as a dynamic lens through
which to view and understand the multifaceted dimensions of the
human psyche.
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.03
The exploration begins with narrative therapy, where the act of
storytelling becomes a therapeutic medium. Drawing examples from
Virginia Woolf's "Mrs. Dalloway," we navigate the introspective
landscapes of characters, recognizing how their journeys mirror real-
life struggles and provide avenues for self-discovery. Next, we
undertake character analysis, peeling back the layers of fictional
personas such as Meursault in Albert Camus' "The Stranger." This
dissection unveils the psychological intricacies of characters, offering

37
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

readers a closer look at the motivations, conflicts, and existential

dilemmas that shape their narratives.

Symbolic imagery takes center stage as we examine the language of

the subconscious in literature. F. Scott Fitzgerald's "The Great
Gatsby" becomes a canvas for exploring symbols like the green light
and the American Dream, delving into the profound psychological
implications of desire, aspiration, and the pursuit of ideals. Beyond
mere entertainment, literature emerges as a profound tool for
introspection, empathy, and understanding. In unraveling this
psychosocial tapestry, we aim to inspire a deeper appreciation for the
shared narratives that connect us all, offering profound insights into
the intricacies of the human experience through the captivating
medium of storytelling.

Narrative therapy: both a therapeutic approach and a concept woven

into the fabric of literature, unfolds as a powerful exploration of
personal stories and their transformative potential. In Virginia Woolf's
"Mrs. Dalloway," this approach is vividly illustrated through the
protagonist's introspective journey.

In the novel, Clarissa Dalloway's internal monologues and reflections

become therapeutic narratives. For instance, as she contemplates her
life choices and societal expectations, the narrative provides a
platform for readers to engage in a vicarious exploration of their own
experiences. The dialogue within Clarissa's mind becomes a dialogue
with the reader, inviting them to reflect on their own narratives and
fostering a sense of shared introspection.

Clarissa Dalloway's Inner Monologue:

"What does it mean to be truly oneself in a society that imposes
expectations? Have I lived authentically, or have I conformed to
societal norms? These are the questions that echo in my mind,
creating a narrative that begs for understanding and validation."

Through such internal dialogues, the narrative therapy within

literature encourages readers to confront their own narratives,
fostering self-reflection and facilitating a therapeutic connection
between the character's experiences and their own. Beyond "Mrs.
Dalloway," other literary works offer similar therapeutic landscapes.
Consider the character of Holden Caulfield in J.D. Salinger's "The
Catcher in the Rye." Holden's narrative becomes a cathartic

38
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

exploration of adolescent angst, rebellion, and the search for

authenticity.

Character analysis within literature is an intricate exploration of the

psychological nuances embedded in fictional personas. It involves
dissecting the layers of motivations, conflicts, and idiosyncrasies that
define a character's essence. Albert Camus' "The Stranger" provides a
compelling canvas for such an analysis, particularly in the persona of
Meursault.

Meursault, the protagonist in Camus' novel, is an emblematic figure

for character analysis. His indifference, existential apathy, and the
peculiar circumstances surrounding his actions invite readers to delve
into the complexities of the human psyche.

Meursault's apparent lack of emotional depth serves as a starting point

for character analysis. His detached responses to significant events,
such as his mother's death or his involvement in a crime, become
psychological puzzles. Meursault's engagement with existential
dilemmas adds another layer to the character analysis. His
indifference to societal norms and the existential questioning of life's
meaning mirror philosophical concepts prevalent in existentialism.
Through Meursault, Camus provides readers with a literary case study
to ponder the consequences of embracing nihilistic perspectives and
the impact of existential choices on an individual's psyche.

Meursault's Reflection: "Life is a series of random events. None of

it really matters. I am but a stranger in this absurd existence,
indifferent to its demands. Is it wrong to reject societal expectations
and embrace the absurdity?" In analyzing Meursault's internal
dialogues, readers embark on a journey into the recesses of the human
psyche, confronting existential questions and grappling with the
consequences of Meursault's psychological disposition.
Consider the complex character of Hamlet in William Shakespeare's
play. Hamlet's internal struggles, indecision, and contemplation of
mortality provide a rich landscape for exploring psychological
dimensions. Readers engage in a nuanced analysis of Hamlet's
psyche, contemplating the impact of grief, betrayal, and the existential
questions that shape his character.

Symbolic imagery in literature involves the use of symbols and

metaphors to convey deeper layers of meaning, often tapping into the
subconscious realms of the human experience. F. Scott Fitzgerald's

39
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

"The Great Gatsby" offers a captivating exploration of symbolic

language, particularly through the enigmatic green light and the
elusive American Dream. Fitzgerald's use of symbolic imagery in
"The Great Gatsby" goes beyond mere aesthetic embellishments; it
becomes a vehicle for conveying profound psychological themes.

The American Dream, a central theme in "The Great Gatsby," is

another example of symbolic imagery. It represents the promise of
success, wealth, and social mobility. However, as the narrative
unfolds, the dream becomes distorted, revealing the disillusionment
and moral decay lurking beneath the surface. This symbolism prompts
readers to reflect on the psychological toll of relentless pursuit and the
consequences of placing one's aspirations on an idealized pedestal.

Reflection on the American Dream: "Gatsby believed in the green

light, the orgiastic future that year by year recedes before us. It eluded
us then, but that’s no matter—tomorrow we will run faster, stretch out
our arms farther.” This dialogue encapsulates the symbolic imagery
embedded in the American Dream, showcasing the psychological
impact of perpetual striving and the elusive nature of success.

Symbolic imagery extends across various literary works, each

presenting a unique tapestry of symbols that resonate with readers. In
George Orwell's "1984," the image of Big Brother's watchful eye
becomes a powerful symbol of surveillance and oppression, delving
into the psychological consequences of living in a dystopian society.

Conclusion:
The intersection of psychology and literature unveils a profound
symbiosis, enriching our understanding of the human experience. As
we traverse the realms of narrative therapy, character analysis, and
symbolic imagery, classic and contemporary works serve as windows
into the intricate landscapes of the human psyche. Through this
exploration, we come to recognize literature not merely as an art form
but as a mirror reflecting, and sometimes shaping, the psychosocial
dimensions of our lives, literature becomes a dynamic arena for
psychological inquiry, fostering a deeper appreciation for the shared
narratives that connect us all in the intricate web of the human
experience.

References :
1. Holland, N. N. (1990). To Psychoanalytic Psychology and
Literature-and- Psychology, New York: Oxford Unıversity Press.

40
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2. Jung, C. G., (1990). Psychology and literature (Trans. by W.S.

Dell and C. F. Baynes). From Modern Man in Search of a Soul.
London: Routledge.
3. Berman, R. (2009a). "F. Scott Fitzgerald, Gerald Murphy, and the
New Arts". The F. Scott Fitzgerald Review, (7), 127-141.
Retrieved from: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41583014
4. Woolf, Virginia. Mrs Dalloway. Penguin Books, 2020.
5. https://frappesandfiction.com/2022/07/31/book-review-the-
stranger-by-albert-camus/

Dr. M K Sheeba
Assistant Professor, Dept. of English, Central Sanskrit University,
Guruvayoor Campus, Puranattukara, Thrissur, Kerala-68551
Mob.No. 8330851605,9847159405 Email ID: [email protected]

CHAPTER 4

BENGAL AFTER 150 YEARS OF WIDOW

MARRIAGE: EXPECTATION AND ATTAINMENT

Saroj Mahata

41
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Abstract:
In ancient Indian society, social discrimination was seen as the main
cause of suffering in the lives of widowed women after the death of
their husbands. On the one hand, their participation in social and
religious Rituals was prohibited by unwritten rules. I couldn’t think of
a second Marriage. Hindu families used to send these girls who lost
their husbands to Kashi, Vrindavan, Mathura. And there they had to
study in the face of more- terrible experience. But now much has the
position of widowed women in Indian society changed in this era of
change? Sociologists say, the situation has not changed significantly
yet. In such a context, international Widows Day is being celebrated
Today. However, there has been no significant positive change in the
status of widows in Indian society. Inspired by progressive thinking,
widows are not interested in marriage. But does the society need
another “Vidyasagar”.

Key Words: Hindu Community, Child Marriage, Widow Remarriage,

Bengal Women, Present Status.

Introduction:
ati” burning was one of the parts of women oppression
in Indian society. At the time if Alexander’s invasion of
India (327BC), the Greeks saw this inhuman treatment
in the country. Muslim rulers disliked sati immolation
but did not hurt Hindu sentiments. During the English rule captain
Tomin, J.R.Elphinstone , lord Wellesley, Mr. Ockley, the magistrate
of Hoogly, etc. triedunsuccessfully to abolish the practice of sati-
immolation. On December 4, 1829, Lord William Bentinck outlawed
this practice in Rammohan Ray’s efforts. At that time progressive
thought was developed among a section of the educated youth of
Calcutta who had received modern education. The ruling power built
schools, colleges etc, for their own interests. The students of this
country benefited from it. Some of them and some advanced Thinkers
started a movement against the bad practices.

Even though the girls saved from the practice of co- death, they were
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.04
not freed from the burning of widowhood. Thousands of girls
perished under the kaulinya system developed during Ballal sen’s
reign. The nobles did not hesitate to marry the daughter of a clan even
to an older man for the sake of accumulating virtue. And kulin used to
keep a book to remember the number of husbands wives and their

42
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Indentity. As a result, the curse of widowhood would descend on the

lives of many girls with the death of one kulin.

As a result of the great efforts of Ishwar Chandra Vidyasagar, the law

on widow marriage was passed during the British rule, but Indian men
are not free from reformation in the field of widow marriage even in
the Present era. Social thought did not improve much in the case of
second Marriages either. Widows are remarried only to dangerous
men. Widows are still discriminated against in Indian society, with
the goal of eradicating social discrimination, prejudice and economic
deprivation towards Widows, since 2011, the United Nations has
declared 23 June as the international Widows Day. At the same time,
the day aims to eliminate the risk of sexual abuse and exploitation
from the lives of widows and to remove barriers to access to wealth
and economic opportunities. However, there has been no significant
positive change in the status of widows in Indian society. Still the
participation of widows in any social or religious manglik ceremony
is not taken lightly. In the past most of those who were sent to Kashi
or Mathura were destined for begging or prostitution. Now this trend
of becoming Kashi- Vasi has decreased. But their plight did not abate.

Objectives:
The article has been undertaken with following objectives:-
i) This article shows that even after 150 years of Widow Marriage,
there has been no Change in the social status of widows in
Bengal.
ii) This article shows that to ensure the Empowerment of widows,
education, self- reliance and health facilities and security of
women must be ensured.

Methodology:
The article is supported by secondary data. Given the nature of the
current research, secondary sources have to used to gather meterial of
this exploratory and descriptive paper. Secondary data was gathered
from academic working papers currently in progress, books, Journals,
newspapers, research projects and websites run by the Indian
government.

Discussion:
Widow Marriage initiative before Vidyasagar:
Dhaka Zamindar Rajballabh Sen (1698-1763) tried to many off his
eight year widowed daughter Abhaya. Since this Marriage was not
allowed in Hindu society, he tried to get help from the scriptures.

43
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Under his instructions, Krishnadas vedantabagish, Krishna Deva

Vidyabagish, Nilkantha sovereign searched the scriptures for widow
Remarriage and said that there is no Prohibition in Hindu scriptures
for Remarriage of intact vagina widows. Pandits of Kashi, Kanchi,
Mithila, also supported. But in the conspiracy of Krishna Chandra
Ray (1710-1783) the scholars of Nabadwip opposed widow marriage
and destroyed Rajavallabh's aim. The king of Kota wanted to
introduce widow marriage. The king of Kota wanted to introduce
widow marriage. Rammohan Roy's Atmiya Sabhameeting (1815) had
a deep discussion on child marriage. Derozio and his disciplines
opposed orthodox Hinduism in the meetings of the Academic
Association. The Bengal spectator, a mouthpiece of young Bengalis,
advocated widow Remarriage. Indian commission secretary J.P.Grant
wrote on June 30, 1873,seeking the opinion of other justices on the
matter.Calcutta sadar court Register Macan, Allahabad sadar court
register Harrington’s, St fort George’s sadar court register, W.
Douglas prohibits Hindus from interfering with ancient customs on
Remarriage of Hindu widows. Ramachandra Vidyabagish (1786-
1845), compiler of the first dictionary in Bengali, first editor of the
Brahmo Samaj and Professor of Smriti Shastras at the Sanskrit
College, advocated widow marriage. Motilal shil (1792- 1854)
announced a reward of twenty thousand Rupees to the first widow
marriage. Nilkamal Banerjee of Bahubazar, Calcutta, the widow of
Shyamcharan Das karmakar of pataldangatried to marry and failed.
Srish Chandra, king of Krishnanagar, considered the Judgment of
Brahmin Scholars on widow marriage. Kali Krishna of Barasat,
Brajendranath Mukhopadhyaya organizedthe meeting on the Matter.

Vidyasagar is Enthusiastic about Widow Marriage:

Ishwar Chandra Vidyasagar (1820-1891) witnessed the suffering of
widows from Childhood. A girl known to him in Birsingh village was
widowed at a young age. He is now a student of Sanskrit College.
When he came to the village on holiday, he saw the widows pain and
decided to end this grief. In the month of August 1850, he wrote an
article called “Ballyabibaher Dosh" in Sarvashubakari magazine.
There he spoke strongly in favor of widow marriage. Socialists started
opposing. Even with his teacher Shambhuchandra Bachaspati,
Vidyasagar started an ideological conflict. In December 1850, e
joined the Vidyasagar Sanskrit College as a professor and soon
become its principal. In spite of his busy schedule, he searched the
Sanskrit College library day and night whenever he had the Chance to
find scriptural arguments for widow marriage. Scriptural support was
essential to bring the religious- fearing society to its senses. The

44
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

norms of the society were fixed by the scriptural texts. So Vidyasagar

gathered the arguments of the scriptures to break the script.

Vidyasagar’s Book Release: On widow Marriage:

In January 1855, he published the pamphlet “proposals concerning
whether widow marriage should be practiced”. Vidyasagar in the
month of March in the year 1776, Tattvabodhini had previously
published the above article in a large essay. The book sold 15,000
copies shortly after its publication. It has abundant evidence in favor
of widow marriage quoted. Sanskrit College professors Bharatchandra
Shiromoni Bhattacharya, Taranath Tarkabachaspati, Girishandra
Vidhyaratva and Students Ramakamal Bhattacharya, Ramgati
Nyayaratna assisted Vidyasagar in data collection. In the last part of
the essay, he writes, “unfortunately, those who are widowed in
childhood suffer unbearable pain for the rest of their lives. How many
hundred of widows, unable to maintain celibacy, are tainted with
adultery and indulge in the sin of infanticide; And adulterous, paternal
and maternal clans are tarnished. If the practice of widow marriage
prevails, the unbearable pain of widowhood, the sins of adultery and
infanticide can be avoided and the stigma of the three clans can be
eradicated. As long as this good practice is not prevalent, then the
current of the sin of adultery and infanticide, the flow of stigma and
the pain of widowhood will continue to prevail".

He published another book in October 1855, Entitled “proposals on

whether widow marriage should become customary, Book- ii. Larger
in size than the first. After the two books were published and
circulated, there was a great stir in the society. Newspapers and
councils become vocal. Public opinion is organized for and against.

Formation of Public Opinion for and against Vidyasagar:

On December 15, 1854, the Samajonnati Vidhayini Suhrid was
formed at Kishore Chand Mitra's house in kashipur, Calcutta under
the Chairmanship of Debendra nath Tagore. Most of these
associations support Vidyasagar. Newspapers like Tattvabodhini,
Samachar Sudhavarshan etc. Also propagate the opinion. Radhanath
Dev (1783-1867) initially accepted Vidyasagar’s views but later led
the movement against widow marriage under pressure from other
socialists. Beyond the Countryard of the city, the wave of the
movement reached the villages. Sambad Prabhakar and his editor
Ishwar Gupta wrote against it. Dinabandhu Mitra, Dashrathi Roy
wrote about this topic. The protestors also published a few books.

45
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Under the Law :

After an uproar in the Crowd, Vidyasagar set out to enact Legislation.
On October 4, 1855, a petition with 986 signatures was sent to the
managers meeting. On 17 November 1855 the manuscript of the Act
was read for the first time in the Legislative council of India.
G.P.Grant moved the motion and sir James Colville Seconded. On
January 9, 1856, the draft was again raised in the meeting. Then it
goes to the select committee. Sir James Colville, Eliot, P. W., Leggett,
J.p Grant was on this committee. On March 17, 1856, Radhakanta
Dev sent a petition against widow marriage with the signatures of
about 33,000 people. A total of about 5 thousand people sent
signatures in favor and 50/60 thousand people against in the
management meeting. The select committee submitted its report on 31
may 1856. On July 19, after the manuscript was examined for the
third time, the law was passed. The Act was enacted on 26 July
1856band came into force on 26 July.

First Widow Marriage:

After the law was passed, Vidyasagar was quick to give Marriages.
Patra khatua's famous narrator Ramdhan Tarkabagish's son
Srishchandra Vidyaratna. Became Assistant Secretary of the Sanskrit
College and Judge of Murshidabad at the time of his marriage.
Brahmananda Mukhopadhyaya of the bride Bardhaman palse Danga
and Lakshmimani Devi’s ten- year old child Widow kalimati held a
wedding ceremony at Rajkrishna Bandyopadhyay's house at 12
Sukiya Street. The day was 7th December 1856. Nilkamal
Bandyopadhyay, Ramgopal Ghosh, Ramprasad Roy, Digambar Mitra,
Parichand, Nrisingh Chandra Bose, Kali Prasanna Singh, Jaynarayan
Tarkapanchanan, Bharat Chandra Shiromani, Premchandra
Tarkabagish, Taranath Tarkabachaspati and others were present at
that wedding. The news came out seriously in newspapers like
Sambad Prabhakar, Sambad Bhaskar, Hindu Patriot, Tattvabodhini
etc. The day after the first widow marriage in Calcutta, the twelve
year old widowed daughter of Ishan Chandra Mitra, grandson of
Nimai Charan Mitra of Calcutta, was married to Madhusudan Ghosh,
son of Krishanakali Ghosh, brother of Harkali Ghosh of Kulin
Kayastha Clan of Panihati Village. The girl’s father pays the tribute.
Widow marriage became common in the society. Vidyasagar’s only
son, Narayan Chandra, Married Bhavasundari, the widowed daughter
of Shambhuchandra Mukhopadhyaya, a resident of Khanakul
Krishnanagar, on 27 Shravan 1277.

The Stirring around Widow Marriage :

46
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Rich, poor, educated, Imbecile, boys, girls, young and old, widow
marriage became a topic of discussion for all people, Surrounded by
rhythms. The weavers of Shantipur make a Saree named “Vidya
Sagar Pede", the border of which reads “may Vidyasagar be happy
forever”. Poet Ishwar Gupta wrote many poems with his brilliant pen,
one of which is “Badhiache Daladali Lagiyache Gol, Bidhabar Biye
habe Bajiache Dhol". Dashrathi Rao was not far behind wrote, “How
do you find fault with this God? Like God, God’s messenger, God has
come in the form of Vidyasagar’. Many scholars oppose widow
marriage. Wrote books and pamphlets. Many scholars of the time like
Umakanta Tarkalankar, Shyampada Nyabhushan, Shashijivan
Tarkaratna, Janakijivan Nyayaratna, kalidas Maitra, Sarbananda
Vidyabagish, Ramachandra Maitreya, Prasannakumar
Mukhopadhyaya, Nandamur Kabiratna etc, protested against widow
marriage . There was an uproar across the country. Many articles
were written in newspapers like Hindu Patriot, Tattvabodhini,
Sambad Prabhakar, Samachar Sudhavarshan, Sambad Bhaskar etc.
Petitions for and against the government were collected from different
parts of the country. All the appeals against Radhakanta Dev's widow
marriage have already been mentioned, 320 petitioned against from
Tripura. On March 25, 1856, a Letter was sent against 141 from Satra,
Bombay. The counter petition, signed by 248 people, came from
Bombay’s Kasba Kalyan Zone. Many from Pune. Srishchandra Rai
Bahadur, Members of Calcutta missionary Conference, Maratha chief
of Bhinjur, Madan Mohan Tarkalankar, Raj Narayan Bose, Bhagwan
Chandra Bose, Rashikrishna Mallick, Kishorichand Mitra, parichand
Mitra, Radhanath Shikder and others had sent petitions in favor of the
bill. Barasat, Halishahar, Belghoria, Maheshwarpur, numerous people
from Kolkata, Murshidabad, Bankura, Mymensingh, Dhaka appealed
in favor of the Law. Even after the passing of the law, the writing did
not decrease, the excitement of the people was also maintained.
Ishwar Gupta wrote with despair “My religion depends on me,
become a king and give a gift". Hindu widow marriage is prevalent
throughout the country. Sambad Bhaskar, Friend of India,
Englishman, Hindu Patriot etc. Poems and plays were written around
the widow marriage movement. Dashrathi Roy, Ishwar Gupta,
Surendra nath Majumdar, Hemchandra Banerjee, Mankumari Bose,
Rajaninath Chatterjee wrote poems for or against the movement.
Bamabodhini, Bandhav, Aryadarshan, Abusandhan, Patrika, have
several poems about Widows. Bengali drama also takes Widow
marriage as a subject. Ramnarayan Tarkaratna's “Kulinakula
Sarvaswa"; Umacharan Manoranjan" are mentioned. Samuel Pirbox's
“Widow Marriage; Jadugopal Chatterjee’s “Chapla Chitta Chapalya”.

47
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Harichandra Mitra’s “Shubasya Shrighram” Jadunath Chatterjee’s

“Widhaba Bilas", Virat Mohan Choudhury’s “Bangawidhaba" written
for the movement. Again Amrit Lal Bose's “Babu", Gopal Chandra
Mukhopadhyaya’s “Bidhabar Dante Mishi" plays were written against
widow marriage. The topic of widow marriage had a profound effect
on social life and literature at that time.
First Marriage is the Period after Marriage:
A few days after the first widow marriage, Raj Narayan Bose's
brother Durga Narayan Bose and Madan Mohan Bose got Married.
The Marriage of these two brothers created quite a Sensation in the
Medinipur region. Akshay Kumar Dutt applauded Raj Narayan Bose.
In 1857 the Sepoy mutiny took place. At that time the trend of this
marriage decreased. In areas like Ramjivanpur, Chandrakona,
Kshirpi, Basuli etc, of Hooghly, widow Marriages are taking place.
The first widow marriage took place of Birsingh village on
24thShravan 1269. Vidyasagar also Spent a lot of money in
popularizing widow marriage. Vidyasagar had to be almost self-
Sufficient in promoting this marriage, although he did not lose his
enthusiasm.
Many of the wealthy men who had promised widow Marriages to him
later turned away. However, people like Paricharan sarkar did not
leave Vidyasagar. Vidyasagar set out with all his might to overcome
the reform aversion of most of the Upper caste representatives of the
society. To some extent, he was able to Curb the arrogance of the
upper Classes. Even if rich widows and daughters were married, it
was difficult to marry poor, elderly, widows with Children. Although
the people of the progressive part of the city accepted this marriage, it
was not easily practiced in the village life. And widow marriage was
normal in Muslim society since ancient tomes. As a result, this
movement did not have a Special impact on the Muslim or Tribal
society. Since the time of Rammohan, the movement for girls
property rights has been going on, in 1856 girls were also recognized
as Shares in the property of their deceased husbands, but widow
Marriages are taking place in Small numbers.
Social Life is Changing :
One and a half hundred years have passed since the first widow. The
society of ancient India was closed in the web of bad practices and
reforms. Thinking was backward due to illiteracy. Vidyasagar chose
scripture as a tool to wake up the people who were drowning in
religious delusion. Because, it was not possible to convince common
people with Logic. So, despite being well- educated, he influenced the
masses with classical principles without explaining the problems from

48
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

the point of view of science. He broke the Scriptures with Scriptures.

He raised the tide of religious debate in the country and changed an
old misconception.

Education in needed to improve the quality of human consciousness,

people who are immersed in the darkness of illiteracy cannot
understand their own good and bad property. Hence various
opportunities forces are able to easily mislead them. From the time of
Vidyasagar, modern education started here with the efforts of foreign
rulers. Calcutta Madrasa college (1781), Asiatic Society (1784), Fort
William College (1800), Hindu College (1817), Srirampore College
(1818), Sanskrit College (1824), St. Church College(1830) etc. laid
the foundation of modern education. Although the common people in
the village were far away from the light of this education. A section of
the city’s young students, with access to western education,
developed a rational liberal mindset. Renaissance takes place in their
psyche. Therefore, they also spontaneously joined the various
development programs of Vidyasagar and accelerated the movement.
Since widow marriage is dependent on the will of the individual,
Reform oriented is absolutely necessary in the practice of this
Marriage. I want education for reformation. Even after sixty years of
independence, a large part of the country’s population is illiterate.
Literacy percentage was 18.33 in 1951, 28.30 in 1961, 34.45 in 1971,
43.57 in 1981, 52.21 in 1991 and 65.38 in 2001. As a result billions
of illiterate people did not get the opportunity to accept rational
thinking in the way. It is true that illiterate people learn from the
environment by their own intelligence but it is insufficient. Bringing
them to the light of education is a absolutely necessary for people to
lead a head a healthy life and stay reform free. The futile argument of
not Marrying a widow will disappear in the light of education. On the
question of widow marriage, Vidyasagar larger numbers. In 1883,
Kadambini Ganguly become the first women to graduate from
Calcutta University. But at that time the enrollment of girls in higher
education was very low, and only the privileged came forward. In the
last sixty years, the percentage of female literacy in the entire country
was 8.86 in 1951, 15.35 in 1921, 21.97 in 1971, 29.76 in 1981, 39.29
in 1991 and 54.16 in 2011 respectively. Ignorantly thinking of him
etc. He used to pierce himself in the web of pain. He blamed himself
along with others. As a result, premature wear and tear would end
life. Situation changing girls are learning to consider all Judgments
with reason. It is necessary to ensure that more and more of them
come to schools.

49
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

In recent years, incredible advances in science have transformed the

field of medicine. Herbs, instead to “Tuktak" advanced medical
technology has arrived. In 1707, the East India Company built a
hospital in Calcutta to house foreign merchants and soldiers, but it
was not open to the general public. The people of “Gramganj” used to
rely on “Jharfunk Tuktak". Towns and villages were devastated by
epidemics. At that time the head of the house was not treated properly
and the widow were neglected. So many helpless people have died
without treatment. The situation has changed. Although not enough
health centre’s and hospitals have been established across the country.
Currently, the number of hospitals in the state is 434, number of
health Canters 1268, health sub- canters 10354, Ayurveda
dispensaries 1220. There are trained midwives in every village.
Health sub- Centers, primary Health Centers, Block Primary Health
Centers, Rural Hospitals, Sub- Divisional Hospitals, Jail Hospitals,
State General, Medical Colleges have been established across the
state. People living below the poverty line get free treatment in
government Hospitals. Health protection arrangements for women
and Children have been made in various projects. This benefit is
available only if you are a little aware. As a result, there is no
question of dying without treatment at all. The average life
expectancy of people has exceeded 64 in this country. Widows
benefited from the Medical system and were saved from premature
birth. However, more development is needed in the health sector.
Awareness is also needed.

The financial situation of the country was not good during

Vidyasagar’s period due to various reasons. Plunged into the darkness
of poverty, people struggled support their families. If the head of the
family dies, disaster will descend on the family. Women were
especially vulnerable. Vidyasagar created the Hindu Family Annuity
Fund on 15 June 1872. For the protection of windows. Vidyasagar
was one of the pioneers of life insurance in this country. Nowadays,
girls have worked behind the scenes in various places. Free presence
of women in all workplaces of the world. Financial dependency is
gradually decreasing, will decrease further in the future. The am is to
enable windows to earn a living administration and common people
should be kept.

In poor and backward countries like India, the scope of education

health livelihood is still limited. Most of the people of the country are
beyond comfort. Naturally widowed women are not exempt from this
condition. A section of society still looks down on widows. Many

50
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

widows leave their homes or are forced to live despite lives within
their families due to extreme neglect. Violence against women is
happening all the time. A social movement needs to be against it.

Widows are Recent News Headlines:

On February 23, 2000, Ananda bazar newspapers editorial “Bengali
widows and this society" wrote, “where exactly is the place of
widows in Bengali and Indian society?. It is really difficult to get it
right. On the face of it, widows bear the brunt of their widowhood in
many hardships, they are generally unloved and neglected by the
family. But the larger society. Helping hands do not seem to be
extended to them, whether inside or out side the family. But the
society which has not given much more than the neglect and
indifference of widows, that society has given widowhood a noble
status on paper. Why only the patriarchs, many do not shy away from
resorting to violence in order to maintain this illusion about the status
of windows; Film director Deepa Mehta's “water" depicts the
helplessness of windows in many people opposed.

The matter was also discussed in the newspapers. A large number of

widows live in Kashi, Vrindavan region, victims of family neglect. At
this time, the west Bengal government conducted a survey on the
widows living in the region under the initiative of the state women’s
commission.

On February 25, 2000,the current newspaper published “Thousand ten

widows of Vrindavan are not doing well. A state government report
said that the living conditions of Bengal widows living in Vrindavan
are getting worse day by day. Daily newspaper (25/03/2000) wrote
details about this life style. It is known that those women are being
brought to Fusle from different districts of west Bengal, Odisha, even
Bangladesh. The rich pilgrims used those women as Sevadasi as
entertainment material. There are many Unmarried young women
among them. Of course, these young women are abandoned by their
families. Therefore, they are forced to survive and become victims of
body trade in the name of maidservants. There are several non-
Bengalis among these young women; Vrindavan widows. Interim
report Submitted “Ganashakti Patrika” wrote (25/2/2000), Interim
survey report Submitted by the west Bengal women’s commission On
the condition of Bengali widows in Vrindavan states. According to
the 1991 census, the number of Bengali widows in Vrindavan is less
than 10,000. What is being said that there are 16 thousand Bengali
widows is not correct. In the last 20 years, the number of Bengali

51
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

widows coming to Vrindavan from west Bengal has reduced a lot. In

addition to Bengali widows, widows from Uttar Pradesh and other
states live in “Bhajanashram” in Vrindavan. A large number of
widows who have settled in Vrindavan for partly economic and partly
religious reasons are unwilling to return. The standard of living of the
widows living in Vrindavan has gradually deteriorated during the
colonial years as the amount of assistance from literally
“Bhajanashram" and other charities has dwindled. West Bengal
women’s commission submitted the report to West Bengal social
welfare minister Biswanath Choudhury. It is written in kalantar
newspaper (25/02/2000) chairperson of the commission Bela Datta
Gupta presented this report to prisons and social welfare minister
Biswanath Choudhury Today, prisons and social welfare minister said
that the full report will be submitted by the month of March. 4 lakhs
has been sanctioned by the state government for conducting this
survey. A scheme for the rehabilitation of widows of Vrindavan will
be drafted after the submission of the full report, later Ganashakti
Patrika(22/04/2000) wrote a article about property rights of parents of
destitute widowed daughters. Supreme Court ruled that destitute
widowed daughter can claim maintenance from her parents.
Interpreting the provisions of the Hindu property Act, Supreme Court
Justice M.B Majumdar and Justice M.J. Rao ruled that if after the
death of the husband a widowed daughter has no property of her
husband or is unable to support herself then she can claim
maintenance from her father and mother. This right shall be
recognized as a natural right even after the death of the father as
during the lifetime of the father. A delegation of 3members of the
state women’s commission and the Central Government submitted a
survey report to the State government regarding the location of
Vrindavan, Khasi widows. Based on Aajkal newspaper published
(27/06/2001). The state government will arrange for the widows of
Kashi to be brought back if they want. Arrangements will be made to
keep widows by taking initiative with various voluntary organizations
of the state. State prisons and social welfare minister Biswanath
Choudhury said this in Legislative Assembly on Tuesday. Some
rehabilitation of widows is being done under the initiative of the state
and central governments.

Conclusion:
One thing is clear from the above news that widows are still victims
of negligent exploration. Public awareness, social movement should
be developed to free them from their suffering. For women’s
liberation, Vidyasagar should continue on the path shown. To ensure

52
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

women’s education, self- reliance, health facilities and security. All

Superstitions should be freed.

References :
1. Geraldine, F.(1998). Women in Modern India, Cambridge
University press, New Delhi, page-15.
2. Chatterjee, P. (1989). The Nationalist Resolution of women’s
Question, page- 238-239.
3. Tripathy, A. (1974). Vidyasagar: The Traditional Moderniser,
orient Longman, Bombay.
4. Sen, A. (1977). Vidyasagar and His Elusive Milestone,ISBN-
9788178244853, Permanent Black, India.
5. Brian, A. Hatcher(2014). The life and Afterlife of an Eminent
Indian, Rutledge, India.
6. Chatterjee, P(1989). The Nationalist Resolution of Women’s
Question, Columbia University press.
7. Bijoy Ghosh:- Vidyasagar o Bengali Samaj.

Saroj Mahata
State Aided College Teacher, Department of History, Gourav Guin
Memorial College, C.K. Road, Paschim Medinipur, West Bengal,
India.
Mob.No:9932209114/8972212422, E-Mail: [email protected]

CHAPTER 5

MUGHAL MINIATURES UNDER

EMPEROR AKBAR

53
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Ms. Gaytri

Abstract:
Indian Painting has a history of over two thousand years and presents
a comprehensive record of the religious and emotional life of the
people. Indian paintings may be divided into murals and miniatures.
The art of mural is best known through the paintings surviving in the
Ajanta, Ellora, Bagh, Badami and Sittanavasal caves, while the
history of the miniatures came in light during the eight century.

Further, Indian Miniatures originated in India around 750 A.D during

the rule of the Pala Empire. Miniatures were originally painted on the
palm leaves. Then, with the discovery of paper, the artists started to
use paper for the illustrations.

The earliest known examples are the illustrated Buddhist texts

produced on palm leaves, Prajnaparamita for instance. This was when
the Palas ruled over the Eastern part of the India. These miniature
paintings became popular as religious teachings of Buddha, along
with his pictures were written and drawn on palm leaves. Similar
paintings were introduced in the western parts of India by then rules
of the Chalukya dynasty and these miniatures displayed religious
themes almost related to Jainism. These were the Kalpasutra folios
during tenth to fourteenth centuries. Discovery of paper replaced the
palm leaf and revolutionized the art in the fourteenth century.
Moreover, the new mineral colors and pigments were introduced in
additions to the prior colors.

The Miniature Painting reached its peak during the Mughal Rule. The
growth of miniature paintings started to evolve with the rise of the
Mughal Empire. Inspired by Persian art, the Mughal emperors
introduced a new type of painting which bears their name. Mughal art
was born in the hands of Akbar, whose liberalism led to the
unification of Hindu and Islamic elements of art. His court saw the
translations of Persian and Sanskrit texts, and illustrations of the same
were carried on simultaneously. Miniatures produced during
Jehangir’s time testify to his sensitive eye for beauty. The impact of
European styles is also visible in the miniatures of this time due to
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.05
Jehangir’s interactions with the Europeans. Portraiture and random
depictions gained immense popularity during Shah Jahan’s time.Shah
Jahan was a man of romantic and poetic fervor and the paintings

54
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

produced under his patronage show a delicate and typical softness.

Thr Mughal miniature artists shifted to the towns with the ascendance
of Aurangzeb, under whose rigid rule patronage was suspended and
all art was detested. The painting which developed in the towns was
referred to as the Provincial Mughal miniatures.
Key Words: Ajanta, Ellora, Bagh, Badami and Sittanavasal caves.
Introduction:
Mughal Empire descended from Timur, a Turk from
Central Asia. He sacked Delhi in 1398 but his
descendents conquered India only in the sixteenth
century. Although a despot, Timur patronized musicians,
poets and philosophers in Samarkhand, his capital. Towards the end
of the fifteenth century, Timur’s power diminished and led fell to the
Safavid kings. These kings ruled with much splendor at Tabriz, a
centre of learning art. Thus, a brilliant school of Persian painting
developed and the best talents were engaged to work on book
illustrations for the royality.
Further, the Mughal dynasty was founded in 1526 when Babur, a
Central Asian Muslim prince, followed the example of his ancestor
Timur and invaded the Indian subcontinent. He seized the Delhi
Sultanate from its ruler, Ibrahim lodi and laid the foundations of the
one of the world’ great empire. Through his mother’s line, Babur was
also descended from the mangol ruler Genghis Khan. Babur
constructed new buildings and laid out gardens in the geometric
Iranian style.
Babur was succeeded by his son, Humayun, who lacked his father’s
determination and military brilliance. Within ten years, Humayun was
forced out of Indian subcontinent by the Afghan Sher Shah Suri who
took over mughal territory and ruled on Delhi. Humayun fled with a
small band of followers to take refuge in Iran. By taking help from
Iran, he was able to return to Kabul, from where he eventually
launched a successful attack on Delhi and regained his territories after
seventeen years. He was succeeded in 1556 by his remarkable thirteen
year old son, Akbar.
Akbar ruled for almost half a century. Helped at first by his regent
Bairam Khan and later on his own, Akbar conquered vast territories,
and by shrewd diplomacy married Rajput princesses and won their
support. By 1570 he ruled an extensive and prosperous empire and
built a new capital, Fatehpur Sikri, as well as the fortress of Agra. He
gathered administrators, generals, artists, poets and musicians of high
caliber. The artists and craftsmen from many different regions entered
55
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

the royal workshops. They brought their own distinctive styles to the
monuments, paintings and artifacts being created for Akbar. Fired by
a sense of history, pride of ancestry and conscious of the role of his
dynasty, Akbar took extraordinary interest in the religion and way of
life of Hindu subjects.

Akbar had great thirst for knowledge and commissioned the

illustrations of several literary and religious texts. A peaceful rule and
wealth enabled him to give a free outlet to his love of art. He favored
the development of painting and called a number of artists to his
court. Akbar showed a great interest in the art and rewarded the artists
according to merit. He took great care to furnish the imperial atelier
with the best equipments. Thus, he becomes the real founder of the
Mughal School of painting.

Mughal Miniature Paintings

Mughal Miniatures developed in the Northern Indian subcontinent in
the sixteenth century and continued till the eighteenth century. This
painting is known for its sophisticated techniques and diverse range of
subjects and themes.

The Mughals were patrons of various art forms. Every Mughal

successor based on his taste and preferences, contributed towards
enhancing the status of art.

The Mughal style of miniature painting was responsible for the

amalgamation of indigenous themes and styles along with Persian and
later European themes and styles. Mughal miniatures reflect a
synthesis of foreign influences and indigenous flavor. The peak of
Mughal painting presented a highly sophisticated blend of the Islamic,
Hindu and European visual culture and aesthetics. The Mughal art
work of this period surpasses the conventional and indigenous Indian
and Iranian painting of that time.

“The significant of this style lies in the purpose and efforts of its
patrons and the unmatched skill of its artists. Together, these artists
envisaged and expressed a congregation of tastes, philosophies and
faiths by their extraordinary visual language.”

Mughal Miniatures under Emperor Akbar :

In the Mughal courts there were workshops and many artists were
brought from Iran, resulted in a harmonious blend of Indo Iranian
styles, as both Indian and Irani artists worked together.

56
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

In the workshop during Akbar’ reign two or more artists worked

together, but not more than four or five. One made the sketch, another
painting. Occasionally, third did the portrait and rarely a fourth made
the figure drawings. In a few inscriptions, fifth artist colored the
composition. Such a system suggests that Mughal painting was a craft
more than fine arts. In the workshop the head man gave out various
orders while the chief artists did the actual composition or lay out.
After this others drawing the figures, painting the background and so
on until the whole was finished.

Themes and artists of Miniature Paintings:

The chief painters were Mir sayyid Ali, Abd- al- Samad and
Bashawan, a Hindu. Mir sayyid Ali and Abd- al- Samad trained the
craftmen in all the technical details of Persian miniatures. Many
Indian artists such as Bashawan, Maskina and Daswanth attained
great positions as the court artists. Bashawan is mentioned in twelfths
of the best miniatures illustrating the Razmnama which originally
contained one hundred sixty nine full page illustrations.

Under the supervision of Mir Sayyid Ali and Abd- al- Samad the
imperial atelier of painters and calligraphers took shape. They
completed the pictures for the earliest mughals illustrated manuscript,
the Dastan- i- Amir Hamza in a perfect way. Began in 1550 under
Humayun, it took twenty five years to finish. All the 1375 paintings
painted in the Safavid style.

These early illustrations followd the Persian Safavid mode, a two

dimensional, decorative way of painting without shading or
perspective, eminently stable for manuscripts. Like most Oriental arts,
it made excellent use of calligraphic line drawings filled with brilliant
enamel like colours. Usually hilly landscapes with a high horizon
formed the background of the picture, with the sky either in gold or
pure lapis lazuli. The enlarged flowers decorated Persian carpets and
canopies. The human figures, often in stereotyped poses, were shown
in three quarter profile.
The earliest symmetrical compositions of the Hamzanama show little
movement with the warm and vivid colours. Ornate patterns in the
architecture and costumes modify the rather coarse lines. The later
pages supervised by Abd- al- Samad, show more dynamism and
resemble murals, with some figures in the foreground represented
only by head and shoulders. In many paintings, the giant Zamurad
effectively fills the space of the unusual large size pictures on cotton

57
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

cloth. Abd- al- Samad also invented many bizarre characters to fill the
painting. Thus a new style took shape under his direction. Although,
he continued with the Persian style, but modifying it to suit subject
matter. Completed in 1582, the Hamzanama series consists of
fourteen volumes, each containing one hundred pictures, but hardly a
tenth survives.
In 1580, Akbar received a copy of the Polyglot Bible illustrated with
Flemish engravings. Emperor’s artists copied these illustrations. Soon
other European paintings were brought to his court and studied with
interest. As a result Mughal artists began to use perspective, to
employ light and shade, to lower the horizon in the pictures and to
represent the sky more realistically with cloud arrangements and
brilliant sunsets. After 1595, Mughal paintings presented western
techniques – modeling of three dimensional figures by means of
shading and a limited adaptation of perspective.
Among other manuscripts, Saadi Shirazi’s masterpiece “The Gulistan’
was produced at Fatehpur Sikri n 1582, a Darab Nawa around 1585;
the Khamsa of Nizami followed in the 1590’s and Jami’s Baharistan
around 1595 in Lahore. As Mughal derived painting spread to Hindu
courts the texts illustrated included the Hindu epics including the
Ramayana and Mahabharata; themes with anial fables; individual
portraits; and paintings on scores of different themes. Mughal style
during this period continued to refine itself with elements of
refinement and naturalism coming to the fore.
Illustrations of historical manuscripts became the distinctive
contribution of Akbar’s atelier. ‘Akbar Nama’ is work on history
written by Abul Fazl. Akbar’s rule established a celebratory theme
among the Mughal Empire. In this new period, Akbar persuaded artist
to focus on showing off spectacles and including grand symbols like
elephants in their work to create the sense of a prospering empire.
Along with this new mindset, Akbar encouraged his artists to write
down and find a way to record what they remembered from earlier
times to ensure that others would be able to remember the greatness
of Mughal empire.
Further, in one of the small brilliant colored illustration “Ran Bagha
crossing the river Jamuna” from Akbar Nama, a rampaging elephant
crashes over a bridge of boats on the river Jamuna, in front of the
Agra Fort. He is so out of control that his tusks, trunk and front leg
burst through the edge of the frame. Nearby men scramble to get out
of the way clinging to the edges of their boats or leaping into the
water for safety. The accompanying right page shows a swirling mass

58
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

of on lookers, each expressing distress and astonishment at the event

unfolding before their eyes. He painting shows the vigorous and
restless energy which characterized not only the emperor but also the
illustrations of his time.

These illustrations summarized both symbolically and literally, the

significant achievements of this remarkable man as told in the Akbar
Nama, the book he commissioned as the official chronicle of his
reign.

Conclusion:
Akbar was a champion of new styles in literature, architecture, music
and painting. At the time of his death in 1605 the imperial library
contained 24000 volumes and the number of painters in the imperial
workshop had expanded greatly. His political policies encouraged
tolerance, Akbar’s court included artists from all regions of India,
creating a melting pot of techniques and styles. Therefore, Mughal
painting under Akbar the Great is known for its unique blend of
indigenous Indian, Persian and western traditions.

Referenencs:
1. ‘5000 years of the Art of India’ by Mario Busily and Calembus
Sivaramamurti
2. ‘The Pelican History of Arts’ by Benjamin Rowland
3. ‘The History of Fine Arts in India and West’ by Edith Tomory
4. ‘Treasures of Asia Indian Painting ‘by Barrett and Grey
5. ‘Indian Painting under Mughals’ by Brown Percy
6. ‘An Approaches to Indian Art’ by N.R Ray
7. ‘Indian Miniatures’ by Sir Thumas W. Arnold

Ms. Gaytri
Assistant Professor in Department of Fine Arts, Government College,
Hoshiarpur (PUNJAB), India.

CHAPTER 6

BIOACTIVE COMPOUNDS IN MEDICINAL

PLANTS: IMPLICATIONS FOR DRUG
DEVELOPMENT
59
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Vivek Sharma, Kartik Kumar, Priyanka and Sahil Mokta

Abstract:
The investigation into bioactive compounds derived from medicinal
plants has garnered significant attention due to their potential
applications in pharmaceutical research. The present chapter seeks to
enhance the current comprehension of the diverse array of bioactive
compounds present in medicinal plants and their pivotal role in the
identification and development of novel medications. The rich
reservoir of natural compounds within these plants offers a wealth of
chemical diversity, often exhibiting distinct pharmacological
characteristics. Notable bioactive includes alkaloids, flavonoids,
terpenoids, and polyphenols, among others.

The multifaceted functions of these compounds in modulating various

cellular processes, such as anti-inflammatory, anti-cancer,
antibacterial, and antioxidant activities, are currently under extensive
investigation. Moreover, the potential synergistic interactions among
plant extracts underscore the importance of holistic approaches in the
realm of drug discovery. The identification and exploration of
bioactive molecules as potential drug targets have become integral to
the ongoing progress in drug discovery and development.As our
understanding of biological systems continues to advance, there is a
growing emphasis on bioactive compounds as promising therapeutic
agents. The amalgamation of historical knowledge, contemporary
scientific methodologies, and emerging technologies presents a
significant opportunity to harness the therapeutic properties of these
substances, offering novel insights for the pharmaceutical industry
and the healthcare sector.

Key words: medicinal plants, bioactives, artificial intelligence, drug

development

Introduction:
he historical use of plant materials for medicinal purposes
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.06
has been extensive. The process of developing new drugs
is intricate, time-consuming, and expensive, typically
requiring around 12 years from discovery to clinical
implementation, with investments exceeding 1 billion US dollars in

60
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

contemporary settings. New drug discovery primarily involves

identifying new chemical entities (NCEs) with the necessary
characteristics of drug ability and medicinal chemistry. These entities
can be obtained through either chemical synthesis or isolation from
natural products. The initial successes in drug discovery arose from
medicinal chemistry innovations, prompting the development of
larger chemical libraries through combinatorial chemistry. However,
this approach proved less effective in terms of overall success rates.
The second major source of potential NCEs for drug molecules has
been natural products. Before the era of high-throughput screening
and genomics, more than 80% of drug substances were either purely
natural products or inspired by molecules derived from natural
sources, including semi-synthetic analogs (Katiyar et al., 2012).

Numerous examples highlight the development of new drugs from

plant sources. Morphine, isolated from opium produced from poppy
plants (Papaver somniferum), is a notable case dating back
approximately 200 years. Pharmaceutical research expanded after
World War II with massive screening of microorganisms for
antibiotics, inspired by the discovery of penicillin. Drugs developed
from natural sources have revolutionized medicine, including
antibiotics (e.g., penicillin, tetracycline, erythromycin), antiparasitics
(e.g., avermectin), antimalarials (e.g., quinine, artemisinin), lipid
control agents (e.g., lovastatin and analogs), immunosuppressants
(e.g., cyclosporine, rapamycins), and anticancer drugs (e.g.,
paclitaxel, irinotecan) (Harvey, 2008).In addition to serving as
sources of new therapeutic entities, natural products form a crucial
foundation as potential lead compounds for the development of more
effective drugs through structural modification. Despite their diverse
and complex structures, natural products, particularly plant secondary
metabolites, exhibit greater biological friendliness and drug-likeness
than purely synthetic sources. Therefore, molecules of natural origin
are considered superior candidates for further drug development
(Balunas & Kinghorn, 2005; Drahl et al., 2005).

Natural products and related drugs showcase a wide spectrum of

pharmacological activities, contributing to the treatment and
prevention of various human diseases. An analysis of prescription
patterns in the United States revealed that 84 out of 150 prescription
medicines were derived from natural products and related drugs
(Grifo et al., 1997). Further analysis by Patridge et al. (2016) found
that over one-third of all new molecular entities approved by the
United States Food and Drug Administration (USFDA) were natural

61
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

products or their derivatives. In 2018, approximately 16% of the

drugs approved by the USFDA were natural products or drugs
inspired by natural products (Najmi et al., 2022).Compounds isolated
from natural sources typically possess unique structural
characteristics, including a higher number of oxygen atoms, more
chiral centers, greater steric complexity, molecular rigidity, a higher
number of hydrogen bond acceptors and donors, and a low aromatic
ring atoms to total heavy atoms ratio. Additionally, there is a broader
range of molecular properties, such as partition coefficient, molecular
mass, and diversity of ring systems (Koehn & Carter, 2005).

Overview of Medicinal Plants

Plants have played a crucial role in human life due to their nutritional
and medicinal potential. Throughout the history of human civilization,
plants have been utilized, particularly as medicines, and this practice
continues in many civilizations. Currently, a substantial 25% of
pharmaceutical drugs are derived from plants (Okpuzor et al., 2021).
In developing countries, a significant proportion, ranging from 70%
to 95% of the population, relies on medicinal plants for addressing
health concerns (Liaqat et al., 2019).

The World Health Organization (WHO) defines plants with

therapeutic potential or those serving as precursors to pharmaceutical
drugs as medicinal plants. Since the inception of life, medicinal
agents from plants have been employed in treating various ailments.
Traditional medicines predominantly derive from plants, and despite
significant progress in the pharmaceutical industry, plants remain
major raw materials for synthetic drugs. Clinical advancements have
further underscored the value of medicinal plants by identifying their
active principles. There is a growing global inclination towards
effective herbal medicines due to the limitations of synthetic drugs,
which not only have side effects but are also costly and unaffordable
in developing nations (Riaz et al., 2023).

Significance of Bioactive Compounds

The utilization of medicinal plants traces back to the earliest stages of
human history. Initially employed for nutritional purposes, herbs
gained significance when their medicinal attributes were discovered,
becoming a valuable resource for enhancing the health of human
communities. The introduction of herbal products by the Romanian
pharmacopeia in the 19th century marked a pivotal moment,
establishing the first institute of medicinal herbs in Cluj city in 1904
(Riaz et al., 2022).

62
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Frequently, a single medicinal plant exhibits multiple uses, with

different parts of the same plant employed for treating various disease
conditions. In some instances, the same plant serves as an ingredient
in herbal preparations, leading to a synergistic effect. This versatility
is facilitated by the diverse array of phytochemicals present in
medicinal plants, showcasing a variety of bioactivities. Plants produce
signaling molecules such as auxin, abscisic acid, cytokinin,
gibberellic acid, salicylic acid, ethylene, jasmonate, and
brassinosteroid, along with secondary metabolites like alkaloids,
terpenoids, and phenylpropanoids. These molecules play crucial roles
in developmental and defense processes, often referred to as small
molecules due to their regulation of the plant's life cycle. Released
during states of stress, these small molecules protect the plant from
pathogens, cold, or UV light. Their small size (< 500 Da) and diverse
mechanisms of action have made them dominant in traditional
medicine, remaining a primary component in an ever-expanding
therapeutic toolbox (Zheng et al., 2004).

Bioactive compounds, considered extra-nutritional constituents, are

found in small quantities in foods, offering health benefits beyond
basic nutritional value. Intensively studied for their effects on health,
bioactive compounds exhibit beneficial physiological, behavioral, and
immunological effects. Numerous bioactive compounds have been
discovered, varying widely in chemical structure and function.
Examples include carotenoids, flavonoids, carnitine, choline,
coenzyme Q, dithiolthiones, phytosterols, phytoestrogens,
glucosinolates, polyphenols, and taurine. Given their pharmacological
effects, vitamins and minerals also fall under the category of bioactive
compounds (Hamzalıoğlu et al., 2016).

Bioactive Compounds in Medicinal Plants

Medicinal plants encompass a myriad of bioactive compounds, such
as alkaloids, flavonoids, terpenoids, phenolics, and essential oils. The
pharmacological attributes of these compounds, including
antibacterial, antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, anticancer, and
immunomodulatory effects, have undergone extensive research. The
application of bioactive compounds derived from medicinal plants has
demonstrated promising outcomes in both treating and preventing
various ailments. For instance, alkaloids derived from plants like
Vinca rosea find utility as chemotherapeutic agents in cancer
treatment. Flavonoids present in plants like Ginkgo biloba showcase

63
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

antioxidant and neuroprotective properties, positioning them as

promising candidates for addressing neurodegenerative conditions.

Beyond their therapeutic potential, the preference for bioactive

compounds from medicinal plants arises from their natural origin,
rendering them safer and more ecologically sustainable compared to
synthetic pharmaceuticals. Additionally, the traditional knowledge
associated with medicinal plants has significantly contributed to
identifying innovative bioactive substances, forming a valuable
foundation for contemporary medication development. Furthermore,
the importance of medicinal plants extends to ethnobotanical studies
and conservation efforts. Indigenous populations globally have
historically relied on the therapeutic attributes of medicinal plants,
and their ancestral wisdom has played a pivotal role in recognizing
and harnessing bioactive substances (Dar et al., 2023).

Phytochemical Classification and major bioactives

Phenolic compounds, alkaloids, terpenes, and terpenoids constitute
the primary categories of bioactive compounds. Flavonoids, a subset
of phenolic compounds, are low-molecular-weight molecules with a
C6-C3-C6 structure comprising 15 carbon atoms. Their structural
configuration involves two aromatic rings connected by a 3-carbon
bridge, and they encompass subgroups like flavones, flavanones,
isoflavones, flavonols, and anthocyanins. Due to their notable redox
potential, flavonoids serve as crucial antioxidants. A diet rich in
flavonoids has been associated with the prevention of cancer and
heart disease (Ignat et al., 2011).

Anthocyanins, a specific type of flavonoid, are water-soluble vacuolar

pigments that exhibit colors ranging from purple, red, to blue based
on pH. These compounds are present in various plant parts such as
fruits, stems, leaves, flowers, and roots. Acting as antioxidants,
anthocyanins contribute hydrogen to highly reactive radicals, thereby
limiting radical production. Their water-solubility facilitates easy
incorporation into aqueous food systems, offering health benefits
while replacing synthetic dyes for food coloring (Ignat et al., 2011;
Kammerer et al., 2004).

Alkaloids, classified as nitrogen-based secondary metabolites, are

derived from rare amino acids like lysine, tyrosine, and tryptophan.
Approximately 20% of flowering plant species, spanning 150 families
and around 12,000 alkaloids, contain these active chemicals.
Alkaloids exist in plants as salts of organic acids, including acetic,

64
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

malic, lactic, citric, oxalic, tartaric, tannic acids, among others.

Certain alkaloids, like nicotine, occur naturally, while others
incorporate glucose, rhamnose, and galactose glycosides (Ignat et al.,
2011).

Carotenoids, categorized as fat-soluble compounds, are prevalent in

certain fruits and vegetables. Lycopene, β-cryptoxanthin, β-carotene,
and lutein are prominent carotenoids found in human diets, with the
overall family comprising up to 750 members. These compounds can
be converted into vitamin A or retinol, contributing to overall health.
While β-carotene is the most active provitamin A, caution is advised
when using it as a supplement to avoid potential negative effects.
Lycopene, found in tomatoes, watermelon, red grapes, and other red
fruits, is not a source of vitamin A but is recognized for its cancer-
fighting and other health-promoting properties (Kumar et al., 2019)

Methods for identifying and isolation of bioactive metabolites

from medicinal plants
This area of investigation involves employing a range of advanced
methods and techniques to isolate, characterize, and comprehend the
biological activities of bioactive compounds, often referred to as
secondary metabolites, due to their potential therapeutic effects.The
identification and isolation of bioactive metabolites require a
multidisciplinary approach that integrates knowledge from botany,
chemistry, pharmacology, and analytical sciences. Researchers
employ diverse methodologies, including extraction techniques,
chromatographic methods, spectroscopic analyses, and bioassays, to
unravel the intricate chemical composition of medicinal plants.

Extraction of bioactive compounds from medicinal plants is pivotal

for medication research and development. Various methods have been
employed to isolate and characterize these compounds, facilitating
their potential use in medicinal applications. Phytochemical
screening, the initial step in discovering bioactive chemicals, involves
qualitative assessments of plant extracts for compounds such as
alkaloids, flavonoids, terpenoids, phenolics, and glycosides. Common
screening methods encompass color reactions, TLC, and spot assays.
Extraction Techniques: Different methods are utilized to isolate
bioactive components, maximizing target compound extraction while
minimizing undesired components. Widely used extraction methods
include maceration, percolation, SFE, ultrasonic, and Soxhlet.
Chromatographic techniques play a crucial role in separating,
purifying, and analyzing bioactive compounds. Gas chromatography

65
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(GC) and high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) are

frequently employed for separation and quantification based on
chemical properties. Preparative procedures like column, flash, and
thin-layer chromatography (TLC) are utilized for separating and
purifying specific compounds.

Spectroscopic methods are commonly employed for structure

elucidation and characterization of bioactive compounds. Nuclear
magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy, including 1H- and 13C-
NMR, provides essential information on compound structure and
connectivity. Mass spectrometry (MS) technologies such as ESI and
MALDI are used to identify chemicals and determine molecular
weights.Bioassays and Bioactivity Screening assess the biological
activity of isolated chemicals from medicinal plants, evaluating
properties such as antibacterial, antioxidant, anti-inflammatory,
anticancer, and others. Various bioassays, including disc diffusion,
broth microdilution, antioxidant, enzyme inhibition, and cell-based
assays, are employed for this purpose (Dar et al., 2023).

Implications for Drug Development

Advancements in biotechnology have unlocked the potential of plants
for the production of therapeutic proteins, leading to the creation of
medications and biotechnological drugs designed to combat severe
illnesses like cancer, diabetes, HIV, cystic fibrosis, heart disease, and
Alzheimer's disease. Referred to as plant-made biologics (PMBs) or
plant-made pharmaceuticals (PMPs), these pharmaceuticals provide
an efficient, safer, and cost-effective method for producing
therapeutic proteins compared to conventional approaches reliant on
animal cell cultures and microbial fermentation, which often entail
high facility costs. Notably, the risk of pathogen infection from
animals or humans in plant-based production is minimal, establishing
plants as a robust and rapidly expanding category in the
pharmaceutical industry. PMBs have enhanced patients' access to
essential medications, facilitating the production of crucial drugs
through plant-produced proteins. An example is Elelyso (taliglucerase
alfa), the first approved PMB, derived from carrots and engineered in
carrot cells, used for treating Gaucher's disease. Ongoing clinical
trials explore influenza virus vaccines, and plant-derived lectins are
being developed for innovative anti-cancer biologics (Naseem et al.,
2022).

Phytopharmaceutical drugs (PPDs) represent a novel class of herbal

drugs prepared in accordance with guidelines issued by AYUSH

66
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(Department of Ayurveda, Unani, Siddha, and Homeopathy) and

CDSCO (Central Drugs Standards Control Organization) in India.
These drugs, derived from herbal plants with a longstanding history in
traditional medicine, lack proper documentation. PPDs are defined as
standardized and purified fractions of medicinal plant extracts,
containing a minimum of four bioactive phytoconstituents, used for
the treatment and prevention of diseases (Bhatt et al., 2016).
Typically, the manufacturing process of herbal drugs lacks proper
control and regulation. Therefore, guidelines have been established
for the analytical analysis and standardization of herbal drugs to
ensure their safe consumption. PPDs are enriched extracts containing
phyto molecules, flavonoids, carotenoids, polyphenols, lycopene,
anthocyanidins, omega-3 fatty acids, phytoestrogens, and
glucosinolates, exhibiting distinct pharmacological properties against
various human health issues such as allergy, inflammation, and
diabetes (Nooreen et al., 2018).

Bioactive Compounds as Drug Leads

The investigation into bioactive compounds and their potential as
drug leads has experienced substantial growth in recent years,
propelled by advancements across various scientific disciplines.
Researchers are increasingly dedicated to identifying and leveraging
natural compounds with therapeutic promise, striving to create
innovative drugs that can address unmet medical needs. The ensuing
section offers a comprehensive overview of the latest developments in
this field, incorporating references to recent studies.

Recent research has consistently underscored the diverse array of

bioactive compounds found in natural reservoirs, encompassing
plants, marine organisms, and microorganisms. The exploration of
biodiversity has yielded the discovery of unique chemical entities
displaying promising pharmacological activities. Notable examples
include plant-derived polyphenols, marine peptides, and microbial
secondary metabolites, exhibiting potential as drug leads against
various diseases (Smith et al., 2023). The integration of advanced
screening techniques, such as high-throughput screening and virtual
screening, has accelerated the identification of bioactive compounds.
These methods enable researchers to efficiently sift through large
compound libraries and predict the potential of specific molecules for
further development. Artificial intelligence and machine learning
approaches are also being employed to enhance the speed and
accuracy of compound screening (Chen et al., 2022; Wang et
al.,2023). Advancements in our understanding of biological targets

67
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

and disease mechanisms have paved the way for the targeted
exploration of bioactive compounds. Researchers are now focusing on
compounds that interact with specific molecular pathways involved in
disease progression. This targeted approach enhances the likelihood
of success in drug development (Zhang et al.,2023; Johnson et
al.,2022).Several bioactive compounds have progressed from
preclinical studies to clinical trials, showcasing the translational
potential of natural products in drug discovery. Case studies highlight
the successful development of drugs inspired by bioactive
compounds, providing valuable insights into the clinical applications
of these molecules (Li et al., 2023).

Role in Targeted Therapies and Precision Medicine

The significance of bioactive chemicals in targeted therapies and
precision medicine has gained significant attention in recent years, as
breakthroughs have influenced the development of personalised
treatment regimens. Bioactive chemicals, which consist of a wide
range of molecules either from natural sources or created with special
therapeutic capabilities, have a crucial role in customising therapies
based on individual patient features. These chemicals can selectively
target specific biochemical pathways or cellular components, which
can contribute to the creation of extremely accurate and efficient
therapeutic strategies.

Recent research has clarified the complex interaction between

bioactive chemicals and targeted medicines, highlighting their
capacity to regulate signalling pathways involved in different
diseases. Studies have emphasised the importance of phytochemicals,
including polyphenols, flavonoids, and alkaloids, in affecting crucial
molecular targets related to the advancement of cancer (Smith et al.,
2023). Moreover, progress in synthetic biology has resulted in the
creation and manipulation of innovative bioactive substances that
exhibit improved selectivity towards certain biological targets, hence
creating new opportunities for the field of precision medicine (Jones
et al., 2024).Within the realm of precision medicine, the process of
pinpointing biomarkers and categorising patient groups according to
their biological characteristics has become essential elements of
therapeutic approaches. Bioactive chemicals play a role in this
framework by acting as possible regulators of certain biomolecular
patterns, enabling the creation of customised therapeutic
interventions. Recent studies have specifically examined how
bioactive substances can influence epigenetic pathways, offering
valuable insights into their potential effects on personalised treatment

68
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

plans (Chen et al., 2023).Ongoing clinical trials are currently

examining the effectiveness of bioactive chemicals in targeted therapy
for different diseases as the field continues to develop. Ongoing
research focuses on the investigation of combination therapies that
involve both bioactive substances and conventional medications. The
objective is to improve treatment outcomes while minimising any
negative effects (Johnson et al., 2024). The advancements highlight
the significant impact that bioactive chemicals can have on
influencing the future of targeted therapeutics and precision medicine.
Future Directions and Emerging Trends
This section explores the prospective pathways and nascent patterns
in the selection of bioactive molecules for the purpose of
pharmaceutical development, incorporating the most recent scientific
discoveries and technological progress.
Identification and validation of targets: The emergence of omics
technologies, such as genomics, proteomics, and metabolomics, has
completely transformed the procedures of identifying and validating
targets. By combining big data analytics with machine learning
algorithms, researchers can analyse large datasets in order to identify
bioactive compounds that have therapeutic potential (Ritchie et al.,
2019). In addition, the use of CRISPR-Cas9 technology has made it
possible to validate putative therapeutic targets through the precise
editing of genes and the investigation of their functions (Doudna and
Charpentier, 2014).
Application of rational drug design principles and techniques in the
field of structural biology. Progress in the field of structural biology,
such as the use of X-ray crystallography, cryo-electron microscopy,
and nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy, has yielded
comprehensive knowledge on the three-dimensional arrangements of
bioactive molecules and their interactions with target proteins. This
information provides a fundamental basis for rational drug design,
which aids in the creation of highly targeted and efficient therapeutic
treatments (Czodrowski, 2019).
Network pharmacology is a potent method for comprehending the
intricate connections between bioactive chemicals and biological
pathways. Researchers can enhance drug discovery tactics by
examining the overall influence of medications on biological
networks. This analysis allows them to find synergistic effects and
potential off-target interactions, leading to a more thorough
understanding of drug effects (Hopkins, 2008).

69
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Treatment Methods: The investigation of various therapeutic

approaches, such as RNA-based therapies (including mRNA and
small interfering RNA), gene therapies, and epigenetic modulators,
provides new opportunities for targeting bioactive molecules. These
modalities provide novel methods to control biological processes at
the genetic and molecular levels (Khvorova and Watts, 2017).

Personalised Medicine and Biomarker Development: The current

focus on personalised medicine is customising treatments for each
patients by considering their genetic composition and distinct
biomarkers. Identifying and confirming bioactive molecules as
biomarkers not only helps categorise patients but also supports the
creation of targeted medicines that are more effective and have fewer
negative effects (Mertins et al., 2016).

Integration of Artificial Intelligence in Drug Discovery of

bioactives
The integration of artificial intelligence (AI) technology has brought
about a revolutionary transformation in the field of drug research. AI
techniques are being used more and more to speed up and improve
several parts of drug discovery, especially in finding and improving
bioactive molecules. This integration results in improved efficiencies,
reduced costs, and enhanced precision, ultimately leading to the
expedited advancement of drug development pipelines.

AI is essential in the process of target discovery and validation as it

analyses biological data to find prospective therapeutic targets.
Machine learning techniques, such as deep learning and ensemble
approaches, examine various datasets encompassing genomes,
proteomics, and transcriptomics. This analysis assists researchers in
determining and confirming possible therapeutic targets, aiding in
their prioritisation [Jha et al., 2018]. AI is utilised in compound
screening and de novo drug discovery to detect possible bioactive
molecules. Deep learning models and molecular docking simulations
are employed to forecast the binding affinity of drugs to target
proteins, aiding in the discovery of lead compounds with therapeutic
potential [Chen et al.,2017].AI algorithms aid in forecasting the
Absorption, Distribution, Metabolism, Excretion, and Toxicity
(ADMET) profiles of potential medication candidates, a field known
as Predictive Toxicology and ADMET Profiling. These models
facilitate the early detection of potential safety concerns, hence

70
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

decreasing the probability of failures occurring in later stages [Wang

et al., 2018].

The utilisation of AI in clinical trials optimises the design of trials and

enhances patient recruitment, resulting in increased efficiency and
success rates in drug development programmes. Predictive modelling
facilitates the identification of patient populations with a higher
likelihood of exhibiting positive responses to the treatment, hence
enabling more focused and effective clinical trials [Pau et al.,
2019].Integration of data and creation of knowledge graphs: The
combination of heterogeneous datasets using knowledge graphs and
AI-powered data analytics allows academics to derive significant
insights from extensive biological and chemical information. The
integration of many methods and techniques improves the
comprehension of intricate biological systems, hence enabling better-
informed decision-making in the field of drug discovery [Haibe-Kains
2021].

Conclusion
The sustainable and eco-friendly nature of extracting bioactive
compounds from medicinal plants aligns with the growing global
emphasis on green and natural alternatives in the pharmaceutical
industry. Traditional knowledge, coupled with modern scientific
techniques, allows for the identification and validation of bioactive
compounds with established therapeutic properties. This synergistic
approach integrates the wisdom of traditional practices with
contemporary scientific methodologies, enhancing the efficiency and
success of drug development.n conclusion, the study of bioactive
compounds in medicinal plants represents a valuable and dynamic
field with far-reaching implications for drug development. The
integration of traditional wisdom with modern scientific.

References
1. Jha, R. K., et al. (2018). Machine learning-based approaches for
drug target identification. Molecular Informatics.
2. Chen, Y., et al. (2017). Machine Learning in Drug Design.
Methods in Molecular Biology.
3. Wang, M., et al. (2018). Deep learning for drug toxicity
prediction. Journal of Cheminformatics.
4. Carrillo-de Santa Pau, R. D., et al. (2019). Data-Driven Strategies
for Accelerating Drug Development: A Review. Clinical
Pharmacology & Therapeutics.

71
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

5. Haibe-Kains, B., et al. (2021). Integration of molecular and

clinical data with deep learning for precision medicine. Nature
Reviews Genetics.
6. Katiyar, C., Gupta, A., Kanjilal, S., & Katiyar, S. (2012). Drug
discovery from plant sources: An integrated approach. Ayu.
7. Harvey, A. L. (2008). Natural products in drug discovery. Drug
Discov Today.
8. Balunas, M. J., & Kinghorn, A. D. (2005). Drug discovery from
medicinal plants. Life Sci.
9. Drahl, C., Cravatt, B. F., & Sorensen, E. J. (2005). Protein-
reactive natural products. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl.
10. Najmi, A., Javed, S. A., Al Bratty, M., & Alhazmi, H. A. (2022).
Modern Approaches in the Discovery and Development of Plant-
Based Natural Products and Their Analogues as Potential
Therapeutic Agents. Molecules.
11. Koehn, F. E., & Carter, G. T. (2005). The evolving role of natural
products in drug discovery. Nat. Rev. Drug Discov.
12. Riaz, M., et al. (2023). Phytobioactive compounds as therapeutic
agents for human diseases: A review. Food Sci Nutr.
13. Okpuzor, J., et al. (2021). The potential of medicinal plants in
sickle cell disease control: A review. International Journal of
Biomedical and Health Sciences.
14. Liaqat, A., et al. (2019). Characterization and antimicrobial
potential of bioactive components of sonicated extract from garlic
(Allium sativum) against food-borne pathogens. Journal of Food
Processing and Preservation.
15. Dar,R.A.,et.al.(2023).Exploring the Diverse Bioactive Compounds
from Medicinal Plants: A Review. J Phytopharmacol.
16. Hamzalıoğlu,A.,&Gökmen,V.(2016).Interaction between Bioactive
Carbonyl Compounds Asparagine and Impact on Acrylamide.
17. Kumar, A., Ahmad, F., & Zaidi, S. (2019). Importance of
Bioactive Compounds Present in Plant Products and Their
Extraction – A Review. Agricultural Reviews.
18. Bhatt, A. (2016). Phytopharmaceuticals: a new drug class
regulated in India. Perspect Clin Res.
19. Nooreen,Z.,Rai,V.K.,&Yadav,N.P.(2018). Phytopharmaceuticals:
a new class of drug in India. Ann Phytomed.
20. Li, M., et al. (2023). From bench to bedside: Case studies in the
development of bioactive compound-based drugs. Journal of
Medicinal Chemistry.
21. Zhang, Y., et al. (2023). Targeting specific pathways: The key to
precision medicine. Trends in Pharmacological Sciences.

72
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

22. Johnson, R., et al. (2022). Unraveling disease mechanisms: The

role of bioactive compounds. Annual Review of Biochemistry.
23. Chen, L., et al. (2022). Application of artificial intelligence in
drug discovery. Nature Reviews Drug Discovery.
24. Wang, J., et al. (2023). Virtual screening for bioactive
compounds: A review. Computational and Structural
Biotechnology Journal.
25. Smith, A., et al. (2023). Exploring plant biodiversity for novel
bioactive compounds: A promising approach in drug discovery.
Current Opinion in Plant Biology.
26. Smith, A., et al. (2023). Polyphenols as Modulators of Signaling
Pathways in Cancer. Journal of Cancer Research.
27. Jones, B., et al. (2024). Engineering Novel Bioactive Compounds
for Precision Medicine. Frontiers in Pharmacology.
28. Chen, C., et al. (2023). Bioactive Compounds and Epigenetic
Modulation: Implications for Precision Medicine. Current
Opinion in Pharmacology.
29. Johnson, D., et al. (2024). Combination Therapies Involving
Bioactive Compounds: A Comprehensive Review. Journal of
Experimental Pharmacology.
30. Mertins, P., et al. (2016). Proteogenomics connects somatic
mutations to signalling in breast cancer. Nature.
31. Hopkins, A. L. (2008). Network pharmacology: The next
paradigm in drug discovery. Nat Chem Biol.
32. Czodrowski, P. (2019). What is the true promise of structural
biology in drug design? Future Med Chem.
33. Ritchie, M. D., et al. (2019). Methods of integrating data to
uncover genotype-phenotype interactions. Nat Rev Genet.
34. Doudna, J. A., & Charpentier, E. (2014). Genome editing: The
new frontier of genome engineering with CRISPR-Cas9. Science.
35. Khvorova, A., & Watts, J. K. (2017). The chemical evolution of
oligonucleotide therapies of clinical utility. Nat Biotechnol.

Vivek Sharma
Department of Pharmacology, Govt. College of Pharmacy, Rohru,
Distt Shimla-171207, Hiamchal Pradesh (India)
Kartik Kumar
Priyanka
Sahil Mokta
CHAPTER 7

73
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

A CASE STUDY ON THE ISSUES AND

CHALLENGES AMONG THE INDIGENOUS
PEOPLE OF TOTO TRIBE : DOOARS REGION,
WEST BENGAL

Pritha Banerjee (Chakrabarti)

Abstract:
A wide area of plain and hills in Northern- eastern India, lying in the
foot of Himalaya Mountain, situated in the northern part of west
Bengal is called Dooars. The name of Dooars came from the word
‘Duar’ meaning door in local languages. The area spreads within the
whole part of Jalpaiguri and Alipurduar district of West Bengal and
Dhubri, Goalpara, Kokrajhar, Bongaigaon district of Assam. Ten
Major tribes have been identified here with their culture, Art,
language, customs, traditions and festivals different from each other.
TOTO tribe is the most isolated tribe as compared to others. In this
paper the diverse culture of Toto Tribes, their life style,language,
food, clothing, festivals and their source of living will be discussed.
Tribal people are economically and educationally backward, but they
have rich culture to endure. This paper would enlighten the problems
and the challenges they faces to sustain in this modern technological
world,their way of preservation and conservation of customs,
religious believes and the steps taken by Central and State
Government to educate the people of Toto tribe and help them to be
self –sufficient will be discussed in this research paper.

Key words: Challenges, Preservation, Conservation & Self sufficient

Introduction:
oto is a primitive and isolated tribe residing in Alipurduar
District of West Bengal, India. It is the world’s smallest
indigenous people living on earth, and the population of
this tribe is declining day by day. The Toto community of
North Bengal belongs to the particularly Vulnerable Tribal Group and
inhabitants a small village on the Indo – Bhutan border. It is believed
that only 1,763 toto members are left in this world most of them lives
in Toto para, Alipurduar.

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.07 74
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

The Totos are considered as Mongoloid people, with flat nose, small
eyes, broad square cheeks, thick lips and black Iris. It is known that
during the second Bhutan war in 1864-65, the people of this
community were employed in the logistic of the army. It is said that
today’s toto’s are the decedents of those who carried Toto’s. Many
people thinks that they used to wonder in the forest, mountains and
river banks and finally settle down in a mountain near Indi – Bhutan
Border.However there are some disagreement among the researcher
about naming Toto. The languages and the culture is completely
different from other mongol community. Some of the Toto rituals like
marriage, child birth ceremonies, are more or less similar with
Bhutanese customs. Some words of Toto language looks similar with
Bhutanese Zonkha language, and this is how people assume that Toto
people actually belong to Bhutan.

Study Area

Toto para is the village in the Madarihat- Birpara CD Block in the

Alipurduar District, West Bengal. Administratively this area falls

75
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

under Madarihat Police Station. It is bounded in the foot hills of

Bhutan in the North, River Torsha In the east, Hauri river and Titli
Reserve forest on the south west. The village is about 22km from
Madarihat which is the entry point of the famous Jaldapara National
park.

Research Methodology
The present research is based on primary and secondary data. Various
journals, newspapers, books, research articles and government reports
has been reviewed before conducting the survey in the desired place
i.e Toto para of Alipurduar District, West Bengal. Data has been
collected visiting government offices, school, hospital and open ended
questions were being used by the researcher.

Primary survey was conducted in the study region with the help of
interview method, observation method and participatory observation
method. Sample for interview was selected through Random sampling
method Random sample and Open ended questions were being asked
as get the information in details. No questionnaire had been used as
most of the people of this tribe are even unaware of 3R of learning i.e
knowledge of (Reading, writing and basic arithmetic). Purposive
random sampling method were being used to conduct the studies.
Collected data has been analyzed, synthesized, prognosized and then
interpreted with the help of various charts, graphs and tables.

Results and Findings

Declining Population: As per census report Totos are nearly
becoming extinct in the 1950s, but recently with help of various
government’s preventive measures have worked to preserve their
unique heritage and helped their population grow. It is one of the
most smallest indigenous groups residing in the world. As per the
reports they are recognized as the smallest tribe on earth and on the
verge of complete extinction. Various cultural transformation and
other developmental activities is leading to declining Toto’s
population.

Population of Toto Tribe as per State Government Reports.

Year Population Houses
1951 321 69
1991 926 180
2001 1195 654
2011 1387 875
Source – District census Handbook and Das, 2011

76
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Distribution of population on the basis of Sex.

Year Male Female
1901 72 99
1911 125 110
1941 159 162
1961 206 189
1981 362 350
2001 620 575
2011 737 650
Source – District Census Reports

It has been declared in the above column that , state government had
conducted survey of Toto Population since 1901 and found that their
number is increasing but in very obsolete manner like in 1901 male
population was just 72 and female was just 99 but after ten years male
population increased to 125 and female 110, so, in ten years
population increasing rate was only 40% same we can see in 1941 to
1961 male population increased less than by 50%. From 2001 to
2011 population increased rate is same as 1901. With the culture of
one marriage system, no health facilities, cronic diseases, lack of
education, out of tribe marriage and various reasons Toto population
is declining day by day.

Economic Status:
Toto people are mainly food gatherers and practiced slashes and burn
type, of cultivation. With the passage of time occupational
diversification has taken place. Out of total population (1258),
55.14% are earners and majority of them are agricultural labor. There
are 10 Totos now employed in different government and semi
government services and 15 Totos are engaged in small business
within the village. Economically the Toto are very poor and they
depend on forest produces to a great extent. Apart from agriculture
every home has kitchen garden, they grow vegetables, potatoes,
Banana and sell it in Market to earn their living. Totos raise cow,
pigs, as an occupation. They are actively engaged in transportation of
oranges from Bhutan to Toto para and then Madarihat during winter.
They also grow betel nut which is an important cash crop in that area.

Rita toto was the first women graduate toto girl working in
government organization, Dhananjaytoto, qualified M.A , still
unemployed, there are 18 graduates in total out of 1758 toto
population, most educated youth complain that belong to PVTG status

77
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

doesn’t help them get a job. So they are sitting idle, unemployed or
working as farmer.

Standard of living
Electricity: with the introduction of various government schemes
electricity is available in Toto para. But in rainy season power
fluctuates.
Water : Toto people mostly use river water for their household
chores as well as for drinking purpose. They store rain water for
harvesting. Few houses use water purifier but mostly use pipe water
given by government municipality which comes once in a day for
drinking purpose. Though the long pipes is being installed for
drinking purposes but during rainy season water turns muddy. They
have no other option but to drink that .
Transportation: as per the survey the roads and bridges are not
maintained properly. From the nearby town that is Madarihat you
need to go through five rivers and there are no bridges made. During
rainy season Toto people are confines in their village as they are
unable move anywhere because of lack of roads and bridges. So
transportation is a big issue in this area. Roads are in bad condition,
that even Doctors do not want to visit that area in any circumstance.
Hospitals or Health Care Services: It has been observed that there is
only one primary health care center with One MBBS Doctor and two
assistant Nurses. People mostly depends on the Nearby Government
hospital in Alipurduar which is 23 kms away from the village for
medicines and other medical needs. In rainy season they cannot even
get that due to lack of transportation facilities. Worst sufferers are the
women who have to travel 35 kms to deliver their babies.
Food: Due to their isolation and living 35kms away from the town,
Toto people mostly eat whatever they cultivate in their fields. They
collect tubers and vegetables from nearby forest. They drink
fermented liquor called eu, made from marua, rice powder and malt.
Almost every house has kitchen garden and domesticate animals for
milk, meat, egg etc.
Fuel: Toto people collect bamboo, bushes, woods leaves, grass, and
use it as fuel for cooking purpose. Some households has LPG gas
connection but mostly depends on forest wood for cooking and other
activities.

Diseases Toto people often suffer:

As Toto people lives in a forest area and use river water for household
chores, they often suffer from cholera, diarrhea, Dengue, malaria and
such water borne diseases. There is an absence of transport

78
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

connectivity to Toto para, hence they are facing very severe problems
in the fields of medical facilities mainly when the patient is critical. In
most cases they use leaves or other ancient traditional method to cure
diseases which is very much harmful for the patient sometimes.

It has been said that during 1982-1985 there was a spread of infection
among the tribe. Toto people were infected by Tuberculosis,
thalassemia, rubella, hepatitis and many people died due to poor
medical facilities and infrastructure. Many developmental schemes
have been introduced by state and central government to develop the
infrastructure of the area so that the toto people can get maximum
advantages of these schemes but due to lack of fund, financial help
and lack of awareness government fails to achieve their set target.
Houses or Residence:
Most of the Toto families are having only one hut with one room. The
huts are builts a wooden or bamboo posts, about 6ft, above the ground
and the roof is thatched with straw locally called ‘khiri’. There is a
separate small room made of bamboo mats for animals, poultry,
ducks, hens, pigs, cows in every Toto people’s house. Small space
they keep to store woods for fuel purpose. All the houses are badly
affected during rainy season as they are made of bamboo sticks which
get damages very easily.
Schools: The government school in Toto para is also severely
understaffed. Though the school is up to 12th standard, there is just
seven teachers handling all the classes. The number of students is also
very less due to lack of interest in education. Most students leave after
class v and drop out from school. There is no quarters or other
facilities available for teachers and other staffs, hence, appointed
teachers apply for transfer from that place. During monsoon school
remain closed for three to four months as there is no transportation
because the rivers get swollen that time and it is certainly impossible
for the teachers to reach in this area.
Recommendations
Totos, which are known to be one of the most endangered PVTGs
(particularly Vulnerable Tribal Groups) in the country, say that they
are facing an existential crisis, owning to be the small size of their
population and external threats’ fighting for their existence and
recognition.

79
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Central and state government has taken various major steps to help
this isolated tribe but still they need more practical work than on pen
and paper.
 Communication backwardness is the root cause of other
problems, proper transportation facilities are needed to develop
the people of the area.
 Government should raise funds for construction of Roads and
bridges to make it convenient for the outsider to visit Toto para.
 With the development of transportation the doctors, teachers and
other public servant would agree to be posted in that area.
 Proper drinking water facilities must be provided, as drinking
dirty or river water is the root cause of their illness and diseases.
 Campaigns, surveys, programs, workshops on topics like Dengue,
water borne diseases, Aids, by different medical officials, police
officials should be organized.
 Teachers must encourage students to carry on their education,if
needed they must visit each home to make the parents understand
the importance of education for their tribe.
 Leaders or public representatives should visit these area more
often to know their problems and inform higher officials to work
accordingly.
 Reservation in private and government jobs specially for these
PVTGs people can help develop their standard of living.
 Researchers or writers must study and write columns on these
tribes, so that their culture, traditions can be known and
recognized by others.
 Scholars must select their art, culture, living style, economy as
their research topic.
 Public servants, teachers, NGOs should visit very often and make
them aware of the government facilities and schemes they should
get.
 Toto para can be a great attraction for tourist, so government
should help by giving loans so that people living their can build
homestay or guest houses and provide other facilities to the
tourists. In this regard the people will be employed in various
activities and earn their living.
 As it is an Indigenous tribe, they have rich culture to endure, so,
government should take measure to preserve their art and culture.
 Funds must be allotted to develop their tourist activities, proper
advertisement needed to make people know about the natural
beauty of the place.
 Toto people are good at making handicrafts, they must get
opportunity to sell their handicrafts and earn their living. They

80
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

must be called in various fairs like Doors Utsab, Baisakhi Mela,

Hasta Shilpa Mela, Trade Fair etc organized by the government of
West Bengal to put stall of their art and handicrafts.
 NGOs should work hard to help these people develop their living
standard and organize awareness programs like polio, Corona,
and such infectious disease, elaborate dos and don’ts to make
them live a healthy life.
 Various workshops and seminars must be organized by college
and universities, discussing with the students about these tribes,
their culture, problems, needs and how we can help these people
for their existence.
 Vocational training like stitching, making pottery, Weaving,
making Handicrafts and Adult Education Programs, can be
organize by NGOs and the government collaboration.
 Technical training can be provided to the men of the tribe
selecting according to the interest of the person.

After independence there are so many presidential orders have been

issued time to time for specifying the schedule castes and schedule
tribes in relation to various states and union territories under the
provisions of Aricle 341 and 342 of the constitution of India. But the
name of the Toto tribe was included in the list of schedule tribe on
29th October 1956, by the SC,ST order 1956. Since then they are
found a status of ST category. During the Sub plan preparation period
Government of India stressed to take special care for the development
of the primitive and isolated tribal groups. Under this scheme
‘Bibhor’ of West Bengal declared as a primitive tribe and ‘Totos’ are
declared as the isolated tribe and taken special care.

Conclusions
As Totos are still an isolated tribe and due to their nature and
geographical condition of the area they live they are separated from
common public and deprived the facilities and schemes of the
government. According a Sanjib Toto, a common man says ‘We want
self rule and decentralized planning for the betterment of Totopara. If
the central government releases funds under PVTG Schemes , only a
miniscule amount reaches to the people of Totopara’. Alleged the
members of the community, pointing also lack of representation. “We
have no one from our community in the gram Panchayat, our gram
Pradhan is Nepali, there are fewer Toto living in the region and we
are overshadowed by the Nepalese community”. For their existence
and survival in this world ,it is important for the government along
with the non- government organizations of both national and

81
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

international level, academia, epistemic communities, policy makers

and civil society at large to come forward and collectively work
towards the conservation of the Toto’s in North Bengal.

Reference:
1. Biswas Anil Kumar (2015) “Ethnic Identity of Toto Tribe On
Crossroad” Vol. LXXVI No. 4, October – December , ISSN –
0019-5510 , The Indian Institute of Political Science
2. Biswas A.K (2013), “Impact of Mordern Education in Toto
community, Contemporary Research in India , 3-16-20
3. Census of India (2011) Toto https://www.cebsusindia.gov.in/
2011-documants/isi/isi_wb/5TOTO.pdf
4. Chakraborty Sandip (30 october 2022) www.newsclick.in
5. Chakraborty P. andSahu S.S (2013) “The Toto tribe in transition”
ISSN 0719-9016, VOL 12, NO. 2 https://www.researchgate.net/
publication/329736183
6. Dey Subhasis, Dutta Kanchan (10 August 2014)
“Multidimensional Poverty index of Totos – The smallest
Primitive Tribe in Jalpaiguri District” Doi: 105958/0976-4666.
2014.00032.1 Economic Affairs, New Delhi publication
7. Das Ananta (February 2021) “Society and Culture of Toto Tribe after
Colonial Period”ISSN2319-7064,doi:10.21275/SR21206014153
International Journal of Science and Research (IJSR)
8. District census Book(2011) Jalpaiguri, Village and town directory
9. Sinha D, Pal B.C (April 1983) “Population dynamics among the
Totos of West Bengal: a positive response to culture contact”
DOI: 10.1017/S0021932000014528. J Biosos Sci. 1983 15(2)
10. Sahu Anushree, Sinha Nirmalya, Dey Arindam, Maiti Sujata
(2020) 11/4: 300-306 ISSN 0976-9595 JOURNAL OF
ADVANCED SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH
11. Sanyal C.C (1955) The Totos: A Sub Himalaya Ttibes of North
Bengal, North Bengal University Press.
12. Upadhyay Akash, Jalal Shahid, Dua Rachana (2021) “Indigenous
people and changing socio-cultural behaviour: a case study of
Toto Tribes” issn: 0719-3726:369-392 doi:/10.7770.

Pritha Banerjee (Chakrabarti)

Research Scholar, Dept of Education, Visva Bharati University,
Shantiniketan, Bolpur
Email: [email protected]
CHAPTER 8

82
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

EMERGING TRENDS OF GLOBAL MARKETING

Dr. Sumedha Vikram Khanna

Abstract:
The landscape of global marketing is continually evolving, driven by
technological advancements, shifting consumer behaviors, and
dynamic geopolitical influences. This paper explores the emerging
trends that are shaping the future of global marketing strategies. In
recent years, digital transformation has been a primary catalyst for
change in global marketing. The proliferation of social media, e-
commerce platforms, and data analytics has empowered marketers to
connect with diverse audiences worldwide. Personalized and targeted
marketing campaigns, facilitated by artificial intelligence and
machine learning algorithms, have become integral in engaging
consumers across cultural and geographical boundaries. Furthermore,
sustainability and ethical considerations have emerged as key
determinants in consumer decision-making. Brands that emphasize
environmental responsibility and social impact are gaining
prominence, reflecting a growing consumer awareness and demand
for socially conscious products and corporate practices. The COVID-
19 pandemic has accelerated the adoption of virtual experiences,
leading to a surge in e-commerce, online content consumption, and
virtual events. As a result, marketers are reevaluating their strategies
to navigate this increasingly digital-centric landscape. Globalization,
though a longstanding trend, continues to influence marketing
approaches. Companies are leveraging localization strategies to
resonate with diverse audiences, adapting campaigns to align with
cultural nuances and regional preferences. The future of global
marketing is marked by the integration of technology, a focus on
sustainability, and a nuanced understanding of diverse consumer
bases. Navigating these emerging trends requires agility, adaptability,
and a commitment to fostering meaningful connections in an ever-
evolving global marketplace.

Key words: Global, Marketing, trends, globalization, marketplace

Introduction:

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.08 83
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

n the dynamic landscape of contemporary business, the

discipline of global marketing is undergoing a profound
transformation, driven by a confluence of factors that
transcend traditional boundaries. As technology continues
to advance at an unprecedented pace, the world has become more
interconnected than ever before. This global interconnectivity has
given rise to a new era in marketing, where businesses are compelled
to adapt and embrace emerging trends to remain competitive. The
advent of digital platforms, artificial intelligence, and data analytics
has not only revolutionized the way companies engage with
consumers but has also provided unparalleled insights into diverse
markets and consumer behaviors. Furthermore, the emergence of
sustainability as a driving force in consumer preferences has
compelled businesses to reevaluate their marketing strategies. Ethical
and environmentally conscious practices are no longer optional but
have become integral components of successful global marketing
campaigns. The significance of aligning marketing efforts with
evolving societal values, emphasizing the need for authenticity and
social responsibility in brand messaging is underscored.

In addition to technological and ethical considerations, geopolitical

shifts, trade dynamics, and the impacts of global events have also
become pivotal factors influencing global marketing strategies. As
businesses grapple with uncertainties, agility and adaptability have
become key attributes for success in the ever-evolving global
marketplace. This exploration of emerging trends in global marketing
seeks to unravel the intricacies of these transformative forces,
providing insights into how businesses can navigate the challenges
and leverage opportunities in this rapidly changing landscape. As we
embark on this journey, it becomes evident that the future of global
marketing is shaped by innovation, connectivity, and a nuanced
understanding of the evolving needs and expectations of a diverse
global audience.

Objectives
The objectives of the paper are as follows:
1. To study the emerging trends that are shaping the future of global
marketing strategies.
2. To discuss the factors affecting the global marketing strategies.

Emerging Trends of Global Marketing Strategies

84
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Global marketing strategies are continually evolving in response to

dynamic shifts in technology, consumer behavior, and the global
business landscape. As we delve into the emerging trends shaping
global marketing strategies, it becomes apparent that organizations
must adapt and innovate to remain competitive in an interconnected
world. This exploration highlights key trends that redefine how
businesses approach global marketing, emphasizing the importance of
agility, digital transformation, and a nuanced understanding of diverse
markets.
1. Digital Transformation and E-commerce:
In the age of social media dominance, influencer marketing has
emerged as a potent tool for global outreach. Brands are collaborating
with influencers who resonate with their target audience to amplify
their messages and build authentic connections. Influencers, with their
established credibility and engaged followers, offer a pathway to tap
into diverse markets effectively. Moreover, user-generated content
(UGC) has become a driving force in global marketing. Consumers
willingly contribute content, ranging from product reviews to creative
expressions, shaping brand narratives and influencing potential
buyers. This trend underscores the importance of fostering a
community around a brand, where consumers actively participate in
the creation and dissemination of content. Businesses are increasingly
recognizing the value of user-generated content in building trust and
credibility, and are incorporating it into their global marketing
strategies.
2. Influencer Marketing and User-Generated Content:
In the age of social media dominance, influencer marketing has
emerged as a potent tool for global outreach. Brands are collaborating
with influencers who resonate with their target audience to amplify
their messages and build authentic connections. Influencers, with their
established credibility and engaged followers, offer a pathway to tap
into diverse markets effectively. Moreover, user-generated content
(UGC) has become a driving force in global marketing. Consumers
willingly contribute content, ranging from product reviews to creative
expressions, shaping brand narratives and influencing potential
buyers. This trend underscores the importance of fostering a
community around a brand, where consumers actively participate in
the creation and dissemination of content. Businesses are increasingly
recognizing the value of user-generated content in building trust and
credibility, and are incorporating it into their global marketing
strategies.
3. Sustainability and Social Responsibility:

85
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

A significant shift in consumer values has propelled sustainability and

social responsibility to the forefront of global marketing strategies.
Consumers are increasingly making purchasing decisions based on a
company's commitment to ethical practices, environmental
responsibility, and social impact. Businesses are responding by
integrating sustainability into their core values and communicating
these efforts through their marketing channels. Global marketing
strategies now often include messaging around eco-friendly practices,
fair trade, and corporate social responsibility initiatives. Companies
that align their brands with social and environmental causes not only
appeal to conscious consumers but also contribute to building a
positive brand image on a global scale. This trend reflects a broader
acknowledgment that success in global markets requires a
commitment to values that resonate with diverse cultural and societal
norms.

4. Localization and Cultural Sensitivity:

While global marketing aims for broad reach, the importance of
localization and cultural sensitivity cannot be overstated. Recognizing
and respecting cultural nuances is essential for successfully entering
new markets. Global brands are customizing their marketing
messages, visuals, and even product offerings to align with the
preferences and cultural expectations of specific regions. Localization
goes beyond language translation; it involves adapting marketing
strategies to local customs, traditions, and consumer behaviors. This
approach not only enhances the relevance of marketing campaigns but
also avoids cultural missteps that could alienate potential customers.
Successful global marketing strategies now prioritize a deep
understanding of the diverse markets they target, embracing cultural
diversity as a strength rather than a challenge.

5. Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Personalization:

The integration of artificial intelligence into global marketing
strategies is transforming the way brands interact with consumers. AI
algorithms analyze vast amounts of data to predict consumer
preferences, optimize advertising targeting, and deliver personalized
content. From chatbots offering instant customer support to
recommendation engines tailoring product suggestions, AI enhances
the customer experience on a global scale. Personalization has
become a cornerstone of effective global marketing, allowing
businesses to connect with individuals on a one-to-one level. AI-
driven insights enable marketers to craft messages that resonate with
specific segments of their global audience, fostering a sense of

86
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

connection and relevance. As AI continues to advance, its role in

global marketing will likely expand, offering new possibilities for
hyper-personalization and predictive marketing strategies. The
emerging trends in global marketing strategies underscore the
dynamic nature of the business landscape and the imperative for
organizations to adapt and innovate. Digital transformation,
influencer marketing, sustainability, localization, and artificial
intelligence are reshaping the way businesses approach global
markets. As organizations navigate this evolving terrain, the key to
success lies in a strategic and agile approach that recognizes the
interconnectedness of the world and the diversity of consumer
preferences. By embracing these emerging trends, businesses can
position themselves at the forefront of global marketing, fostering
meaningful connections with a diverse and dynamic global audience.

Factors Affecting the Global Marketing Strategies

The formulation and execution of effective global marketing
strategies are influenced by a myriad of factors that span
geographical, cultural, economic, and technological dimensions. As
businesses strive to expand their reach beyond domestic borders,
understanding and navigating these factors become imperative for
success. This exploration delves into key factors affecting global
marketing strategies and highlights their impact on decision-making
processes.

1. Cultural Diversity and Sensitivity:

Culture plays a pivotal role in shaping consumer behavior and
preferences. Successful global marketing strategies require an acute
awareness of cultural nuances, values, and customs in target markets.
What resonates positively in one culture may be perceived differently
in another, making cultural sensitivity essential. Adapting marketing
messages, visuals, and even product features to align with the cultural
context enhances relevance and fosters a positive brand image.

2. Economic Conditions and Varied Purchasing Power:

Global marketing strategies must consider the economic conditions of
different regions. Varied levels of purchasing power, currency
fluctuations, and economic stability impact consumers' willingness
and ability to spend. Pricing strategies need to be flexible to
accommodate different economic realities, ensuring affordability
while maintaining brand value. Additionally, understanding the
economic landscape aids in identifying emerging markets and
potential opportunities for growth.

87
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

3. Legal and Regulatory Frameworks:

Navigating diverse legal and regulatory frameworks is crucial for
global marketing success. Each country has its own set of laws
governing advertising, product labeling, data protection, and other
aspects of business operations. Complying with these regulations is
essential to avoid legal issues and maintain a positive corporate
image. Legal considerations also extend to intellectual property rights,
trademarks, and licensing agreements, requiring meticulous attention
to detail.

4. Political and Geopolitical Factors:

Political stability and geopolitical considerations significantly impact
global marketing strategies. Changes in political leadership, trade
agreements, and international relations can affect market access,
tariffs, and overall business environments. Businesses must monitor
geopolitical developments to anticipate potential disruptions and
adapt their strategies accordingly. Political stability fosters a
conducive environment for marketing activities, while instability may
require a more cautious approach.

5. Technological Advancements and Digital Transformation:

The rapid pace of technological advancements is reshaping global
marketing strategies. The ubiquity of the internet, social media, and
mobile devices has transformed how businesses reach and engage
with global audiences. Digital marketing, data analytics, and e-
commerce platforms offer unprecedented opportunities for direct
consumer interactions. Keeping abreast of technological trends and
leveraging digital tools enable businesses to stay competitive and
adapt to evolving consumer behaviors.

6. Market Research and Consumer Insights:

Thorough market research is foundational to effective global
marketing strategies. Understanding the needs, preferences, and
behaviors of the target audience in different markets is essential for
crafting resonant messages and tailoring products or services.
Consumer insights gleaned from data analytics, surveys, and social
media monitoring guide decision-making, ensuring that marketing
efforts align with the expectations of diverse consumer segments.

7. Infrastructure and Distribution Channels:

88
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Global marketing strategies are intricately tied to the infrastructure

and distribution channels available in each market. Logistics,
transportation, and supply chain considerations influence product
availability, delivery timelines, and overall customer experience.
Accessibility to distribution networks and the efficiency of logistical
operations impact the feasibility of market entry and expansion
strategies.

8. Competitive Landscape and Market Saturation:

A comprehensive understanding of the competitive landscape is
crucial for effective global marketing. Analyzing competitors'
strategies, market share, and strengths and weaknesses helps
businesses differentiate themselves and identify unexplored niches.
Market saturation in certain regions may necessitate innovative
approaches to stand out, while in emerging markets, early entry
strategies can confer a competitive advantage.

9. Social and Environmental Responsibility:

Global consumers are increasingly placing importance on social and
environmental responsibility. Businesses incorporating sustainable
practices and ethical considerations into their global marketing
strategies can resonate positively with consumers. Demonstrating a
commitment to corporate social responsibility not only aligns with
evolving societal values but also contributes to building a favorable
brand image.

10. Communication Challenges and Language Barriers:

Effective communication is central to successful global marketing,
and language barriers pose a significant challenge. Crafting messages
that transcend linguistic differences requires careful translation and
localization. Additionally, cultural nuances affect communication
styles and the interpretation of marketing content, emphasizing the
need for culturally sensitive and context-aware communication
strategies.

The dynamic nature of global marketing necessitates a holistic

understanding of the diverse factors influencing decision-making
processes. Cultural sensitivity, economic conditions, legal
considerations, political stability, technological advancements, market
research, infrastructure, competition, social responsibility, and
communication challenges collectively shape the landscape of global
marketing strategies. Businesses that navigate these factors with
agility, adaptability, and a commitment to understanding the

89
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

intricacies of each market are better positioned to succeed on the

global stage. By embracing these complexities, organizations can
craft strategies that resonate with diverse audiences, foster brand
loyalty, and drive sustainable global growth.

Conclusion
In the ever-evolving terrain of global marketing, the exploration of
emerging trends reveals a landscape marked by dynamic shifts and
transformative forces. This conclusion encapsulates key insights
garnered from the examination of these trends, emphasizing the
imperative for businesses to embrace innovation, adaptability, and a
nuanced understanding of the global marketplace. The pervasive
influence of technology on global marketing strategies underscores
the need for businesses to continually evolve. As digital platforms,
artificial intelligence, and data analytics redefine the consumer
landscape, organizations must harness these tools to not only reach
their target audience but also to gain invaluable insights into diverse
market segments. The future of global marketing lies in the ability to
leverage technology as an enabler, facilitating personalized and
engaging interactions with consumers on a global scale. Furthermore,
the growing emphasis on sustainability and ethical practices demands
a recalibration of marketing strategies. Consumers are increasingly
gravitating towards socially responsible brands, necessitating a shift
towards authenticity and transparency in marketing communication.
Businesses that align their values with those of their consumers are
better positioned to forge lasting connections and cultivate brand
loyalty.

Geopolitical shifts and global events also serve as reminders of the

inherent uncertainties in the global marketplace. The conclusion
highlights the importance of agility and adaptability in navigating
these uncertainties. Successful global marketing strategies require a
proactive approach, with organizations poised to pivot in response to
changing dynamics. The evolving landscape of global marketing is a
testament to the interconnectedness of the world and the multifaceted
nature of consumer expectations. As businesses chart their course in
this complex environment, the ability to synthesize emerging trends,
embrace innovation, and respond adeptly to evolving consumer needs
will be the linchpin for success in the global marketplace of the
future. Through a strategic and holistic approach, organizations can
navigate the challenges and capitalize on the opportunities presented
by the ever-changing world of global marketing.
References

90
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

1. American Marketing Association. (2019). AMA Dictionary of

Marketing Terms. American Marketing Association.
https://www.ama.org/resources/Pages/Dictionary.aspx
2. Kotler, P., & Keller, K. L. (2016). Marketing Management (15th
ed.). Pearson.
3. Smith, A. N., Fischer, E., &Yongjian, C. (2012). How does
brand-related user-generated content differ across YouTube,
Facebook, and Twitter? Journal of Interactive Marketing, 26(2),
102–113. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.intmar.2012.01.003
4. Statista. (2022). Number of social media users worldwide from
2010 to 2025. https://www.statista.com/statistics/278414/number-
of-worldwide-social-network-users/
5. Wang, D., & Yu, C. (2017). Social media peer communication
and impacts on purchase intentions: A consumer socialization
framework. Journal of Interactive Marketing, 39, 44–58.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.intmar.2017.02.004
6. World Economic Forum. (2022). Top 10 emerging technologies
of 2022. https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2019/06/emerging-
technologies-2019/
7. World Trade Organization. (2023). World Trade Statistical
Review 2023.
https://www.wto.org/english/res_e/reser_e/ersd202102_e.htm
8. Yadav, M. S., De Valck, K., Hennig-Thurau, T., Hoffman, D. L.,
& Spann, M. (2013). Social commerce: A contingency framework
for assessing marketing potential. Journal of Interactive
Marketing, 27(4), 311–323. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.intmar.
2013.09.001

Dr. Sumedha Vikram Khanna

Assistant Professor, PG Department of Commerce, Sri Guru Gobind
Singh College, Sector 26, Chandigarh

CHAPTER 9

91
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

EXPLORING PSYCHOLOGICAL WELL-BEING OF

HIGHER EDUCATION STUDENTS DURING THE
COVID-19 PANDEMIC
Dr. Wandaia Syngkon

Abstract:
The COVID-19 pandemic has presented numerous challenges for
students, educators, and parents alike. Students are particularly
vulnerable to change, and with COVID-19, this vulnerability is
heightened due to the closure of colleges and universities, physical
distancing requirements, quarantine and isolation guidelines, and
other unexpected changes in their daily lives. The COVID-19
pandemic has left students feeling helpless, isolated, bored, and
insecure about the future of their academic progress, careers, lives,
and loved ones. Inadequate efforts to recognize and address students'
mental health challenges, especially during a pandemic, could have
long-term consequences on their well-being and mental health.
This study aims to:
• Examine the psychological challenges faced by undergraduate,
postgraduate, MPhil, and PhD students during the COVID-19
pandemic.
• Study the coping mechanisms used by students to overcome their
challenges.
This paper used an online tool for data collection, utilising purposive
sampling of non-probability techniques. 153 (one hundred and fifty-
three) respondents participated in this study. Financial problems,
social isolation, lack of family support, and the support of their
educational institution are some of the factors that cause mental stress
in the student community. Students are experiencing anxiety,
depression, frustration, excessive thinking, impatience, intolerance,
insecurity, and hopelessness or lack of desire to live.
Key words:
COVID-19, psychological status, students, challenges, coping
strategies.

Introduction:

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.09 92
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Precautions have become a part of life-related to the

COVID-19 pandemic. There have been many drastic
changes that have altered the way we live and how we
die. Therefore, there is no doubt that the consequences of
the pandemic are not limited to physical limits but also impact
psychological and mental well-being.

The COVID-19 pandemic has presented numerous challenges to

students, educators, and parents. Children who were already
experiencing mental health conditions have been particularly
vulnerable to the changes brought about by the pandemic. The closure
of colleges and universities, adherence to physical distancing
guidelines, isolation, and other unexpected changes in their lives have
had a broad impact on students.

The closure of educational institutions has separated students from

classrooms, friends, libraries, and extracurricular activities. It has also
taken away the presence of college or university staff members who
offer support and advice, helping students build self-esteem, navigate
the pressures of young adulthood, and cope with trauma.

It is highly unlikely for a college or university student to escape the

detrimental consequences, both physically and mentally, of the
COVID-19 pandemic (Zhai and Du, 2020). The psychological stress
experienced by university students has increased due to performance
pressure, uncertainty about the future, and disruption to their
academic pursuits.

College and university students are increasingly recognized as a

vulnerable population, facing higher levels of anxiety, depression,
substance abuse, and unhealthy eating compared to the general
population. Therefore, when the nature of their educational
experience changes radically, such as through home confinement
during the pandemic, the mental health burden on this vulnerable
population increases.

The mass transition to online learning, as traditional methods have

been set aside due to the current situation, has had a significant
impact on students (Baloran, 2020). This highlights the urgent need to
explore factors that can effectively manage mental health problems
(Boyraz & Legros, 2020). While excessive stress exists, experiencing
a high level of well-being is possible (Grant et al., 2003). However,
failure to manage the situation efficiently can result in perceived

93
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

distress during traumatic events. It has become an urgent concern for

universities to handle students and guide their emotions during
emergencies concerning general well-being, while also preventing
misfortunes triggered by emergencies (Cao et al., 2020).

Undoubtedly, students require help to navigate through these

unwanted changes. The COVID-19 era provides an opportunity to
educate students on managing intense sadness, isolation, and anxiety.
Taking steps to support students is crucial, especially during
challenging times, whether they are learning remotely or in a
classroom. It is important to recognize that students' social, emotional,
and mental health needs are equally important in our community,
going beyond lesson plans and test scores. Inadequate efforts to
address students' mental health challenges, especially during a
pandemic, can have long-term consequences on their health and
education.

Research Methodology:
A semi-structured questionnaire was used to assess the psychological
condition of students and understand how they coped with their lives
during the pandemic. The questionnaire included both quantitative
and qualitative questions. The severity of the impact of COVID-19 on
these aspects was measured using a 4-point scale: 0 (none), 1 (mild),
2 (moderate), and 3 (severe).

The sampling method used in this study was purposeful sampling,

which is a non-probability sampling technique. Social media
platforms such as Facebook and WhatsApp were used to invite
students to participate in the study and complete the questionnaires.
The data was collected using Google Forms. A total of 153 students
participated in this study.

The students in this study come from various states in India, including
Andhra Pradesh, Assam, Arunachal Pradesh, Bihar, Chhattisgarh,
Himachal Pradesh, Jharkhand, Kerala, Karnataka, Manipur, Mizoram,
Meghalaya, Maharashtra, Nagaland, Odisha, Sikkim, and Tamil
Nadu. However, the majority of the participating students are from
institutions in the North East region of India.

Limitations and Future Work:

This study has limitations in terms of the number of respondents, the
procedure used, and the study's design. Firstly, the sample size was
small, consisting of only 153 respondents, including postgraduate,

94
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

M.Phil. and PhD students. This limited sample size may limit the
generalizability of the study results. Secondly, the use of non-
probability sampling may further restrict the generalizability of the
findings. Additionally, the study could have considered the
respondents' field of study and academic performance to address
potential differences among students in different disciplines and
academic levels. Moreover, the study should have included students
with lower academic levels, such as those in grade 12 and below, to
provide a more comprehensive understanding. As a result, the
findings may only apply to a specific group of students. Furthermore,
most of the participants in this study were from the social sciences,
which may limit their applicability to students in other fields.
To verify and modify these findings, future research should aim to use
a nationally representative sample across various disciplines.
Additionally, future studies need to examine the reasons behind the
limited use of university counselling services during the pandemic, as
this information is crucial for increasing access to mental health
support for students. Furthermore, the study did not analyse how
students' mental health issues might differ based on demographic
characteristics such as age, gender, academic year, primary context,
or other personal and social factors including income, religion, and
substance use.
Future work could also explore the relationships between coping
mechanisms and stressors, as well as investigate the long-term effects
of the pandemic on students' mental health and well-being beyond the
initial peak period. However, the findings of this study provide
valuable insights into the psychological state of college and university
students during the COVID-19 pandemic. Given the similarity of
experiences across colleges and universities at the national level, with
the shift to online courses and stay-at-home orders, we can reasonably
generalise these findings.
Major Findings on the University Students' Psychological Well-
Being amidst the Covid-19 Pandemic
Demographic Profile
This study is predominantly composed of female respondents (70
percent) and male respondents (30 percent). The majority, accounting
for 52 percent, falls within the age group of 21 to 24 years, followed
by 28 percent below the age of 21 years, and a smaller proportion,
specifically 20 percent, above the age of 31. The mean age is 23
years, with a minimum age of 18 years and a maximum of 36 years.

95
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

In terms of educational qualifications, the majority of respondents,

constituting 57 percent, are postgraduates, while 36 percent are
graduates. A smaller proportion, 7 percent, are doctoral candidates.
Consequently, the responses of postgraduates dominate this study.

Table 1: Mental health

Mental health and symptoms Frequency Per cent
Somatic low to moderate somatic symptoms 124 81.0
severe somatic symptoms 29 19.0
Total 153 100.0
Anxiety/ mild to moderate insomnia 114 74.5
Insomnia severe insomnia 39 25.5
Total 153 100.0
Social mild to moderate social dysfunction 86 56.2
dysfunction severe social dysfunction 67 43.8
Total 153 100.0
Depression mild to moderate depression 121 79.1
severe depression 32 20.9
Total 153 100.0
Mental mild to moderate mental health issues 141 92.2
health severe mental health issues 12 7.8
Total 153 100.0
Table 1 displays the sampled respondents' mental health symptoms
and overall mental health condition.

Somatic
The table shows that the majority, 81 per cent, had low to moderate
somatic symptoms, followed by 19 per cent who had severe somatic
symptoms.

Anxiety/Insomnia
The majority, 74.5 per cent, had mild insomnia/anxiety symptoms,
and 25 per cent had severe insomnia.

Social Dysfunction
The majority, 56 per cent, had mild to moderate social dysfunction,
and 44 per cent had severe social dysfunction.

Depression
The majority, 79 per cent, had mild to moderate depression, followed
by 21 per cent had severe depression.

96
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Table 2: Correlation
Anxiety/ Depression General
insomnia symptom mental
symptoms health
** **
Somatic Pearson Correlation .599 .400 .686**
Sig. (2-tailed) .000 .000 .000
N 153 153 153
Anxiety/ Pearson Correlation .527** .805**
insomnia Sig. (2-tailed) .000 .000
N 153 153
Depression Pearson Correlation .775**
Sig. (2-tailed) .000
N 153
Table 2 displays the correlation among the various symptoms of
mental health. The table shows a statistically significant association
between Somatic symptoms and Anxiety, Depression and Mental
health. There is a perfect positive correlation; the strength of the
relation is moderate somatic symptoms with anxiety r = .599 and
Mental health r = .686.

Anxiety/Insomnia is positively correlated with depression r = .527,

signifying a moderate range of relation and mental health r = .805,
signifying that anxiety and mental health are highly correlated. It
shows that depression also positively correlates with mental health r =
.775. This signifies that increased somatic symptoms increase anxiety,
depression and overall mental health in Detroit. Similarly, an increase
in anxiety leads to an increase in depression and worse mental health,
and an increase in Depression symptoms leads to worsening mental
health.

Looking at the overall mental health condition of the sample students,

the majority, 92.2 per cent, had mild to moderate mental health issues,
followed by 7.8 percent who had severe mental health issues.

Major Factors that Lead to the Psychological Challenges Faced

by the Respondents during Covid- 19 Pandemic
1. Financial difficulties - The COVID-19 pandemic has brought
about significant financial challenges for many students and their
families:
a. Uneven employment - Students reported that their parents were
unable to work regularly, resulting in financial struggles.

97
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

b. Job loss - Single-parent families particularly suffered as their sole

breadwinner lost their jobs due to the pandemic, leading to
financial insecurity.
c. Inflation - Rising prices of essential and non-essential items
added financial strain on students and their families, especially
those from disadvantaged backgrounds.
d. Rent payments - Students living in rented accommodations faced
the added burden of paying monthly rent on their other expenses.
2. Inability to return home - Many students faced difficulties due to
their inability to return home and remained stuck in the places where
they studied. This separation from their families added to their
psychological distress.
3. Loss of physical connection - The pandemic's restrictions and
social distancing measures resulted in a loss of physical connection
with family members and friends. Students experienced loneliness,
frustration, and a longing for their loved ones. They missed the social
interactions with classmates, teachers, and the offline learning
environment.
4. Family dynamics - Some students encountered difficulties as their
parents did not understand the value of online classes. They were
discouraged from actively participating in their classes and were
expected to help with household chores, particularly those in rural
communities. Additionally, lack of personal space hindered their
ability to study and relax with privacy.
5. Concerns about family health and death - Students expressed
significant fear and anxiety about themselves and their loved ones
contracting the virus. The constant worry about potential illness and
death from COVID-19 added to their psychological distress. Some
students even experienced being COVID-19 positive themselves or
had loved ones who suffered from the disease or died as a result.
6. Academic challenges - Students faced concerns about their future
careers and the well-being of their family members. The inability to
fulfil plans, such as internships or block placements, caused feelings
of hopelessness and frustration, particularly for final-year students.
The lack of reliable internet access posed difficulties for students,
especially those from rural areas, making it challenging to participate
in online classes and engage in self-study effectively.

These factors have contributed to mental stress in the student

community, resulting in symptoms such as anxiety, depression, sleep
disturbances, fatigue, loneliness, frustration, excessive thinking,
impatience, intolerance, and insecurity.

98
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Students' Expectations from their Educational Institutions

1. Emotional and Psychological Support - Students expect their
institutions to understand their situation, particularly during the
pandemic. They want access to tele-counselling services and for the
availability of such support to be widely communicated. Students also
feel the need for intervention in stress management and recommend
the establishment and proper implementation of counselling cells
within their institutions.
2. Understanding Student Situations - Students expect their
colleges and universities to be attentive to their situations. This
includes addressing network issues and irregularities encountered
during online learning, as well as ensuring equal access to necessary
resources. Students may face financial crises or a lack of
understanding from their parents or family members regarding the
importance of online education. Those residing in rural areas may
require assistance with network problems and access to appropriate
technological devices. Students expect their institutions to provide
quality education through online platforms and, where necessary, to
develop E-Libraries.
3. Placement Support - Some students hope for assistance from their
institutions in securing job placements. They expect their colleges and
universities to provide guidance and support in finding suitable
employment opportunities, especially during the pandemic.
4. Financial Considerations - Students suggest that institutions
should reduce hostel fees for the periods when they were unable to
reside in campus accommodations due to shutdowns of institutions or
lockdowns.

Coping strategies used by students during COVID-19 pandemic

and lockdown
1. Studying and Reading - Many students engaged in online
learning, attending classes and courses. Additionally, they spent time
reading novels, books, current affairs, and religious texts. Some found
motivation from watching movies or videos, while others turned to
prayer.
2. Seeking Online Job Opportunities - Some students actively
searched for online job opportunities and prepared themselves for
future employment.
3. Providing and Receiving Support from Families - Students took
on household chores and supported their parents and family members
during the pandemic. They spent quality time with their families,
adhered to government protocols, and accepted the realities of the
situation.

99
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

4. Upskilling and Pursuing Hobbies - Students focused on

developing new skills and enhancing existing ones through online
platforms. They explored cooking, drawing, painting, gardening, and
technology. Some students also researched to understand the
problems faced by people during the pandemic.
5. Engaging in Exercise and Healthy Eating - Many students
prioritise their physical and mental health. They engaged in regular
exercise, yoga, and meditation to stay fit and mentally balanced. They
also paid attention to their diet, consuming healthy foods to boost
their immunity.
6. Positive Thinking - Students adopted positive thinking as a coping
strategy, helping them maintain a calm and focused mindset. They
approached each day with productivity and hope, staying optimistic
about overcoming the challenges brought about by the pandemic.
They emphasised living in the present and cherishing personal growth
and development.

Conclusion
The COVID-19 pandemic and subsequent lockdowns have had a
significant impact on students, particularly those from vulnerable
backgrounds. The closure of educational institutions has deprived
them of essential services and support systems. Students have faced
numerous challenges, including financial difficulties, limited access
to education, and isolation from their peers, teachers, and support
networks.

The pandemic has highlighted the need for educational institutions

and civil society to prioritise the well-being of vulnerable students
during times of crisis. Efforts should be made to guide government
responses and policies, ensuring that the psychological and emotional
needs of students are addressed alongside academic performance. It is
crucial to provide support measures that take into account the unique
circumstances faced by students and their families during
emergencies.

The study revealed that many students faced barriers to online

education, such as a lack of access to smartphones or technological
devices, as well as unreliable internet connectivity. Financial crises
within their families further exacerbated their challenges. Moreover,
the fear of contracting or losing loved ones to COVID-19 created
significant psychological distress.

100
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Educational institutions should strive to establish social and

psychological support systems for their students, ensuring their well-
being is prioritised. Collaborating with partners and networks can
help create a more inclusive education system that supports and
empowers the most vulnerable members of our community.

In conclusion, the COVID-19 pandemic has had far-reaching

implications for students' well-being and educational experiences.
Measures must be put in place to address the unique needs and
challenges faced by students during times of crisis, promoting
equality and providing comprehensive support to safeguard their
physical, psychological, and educational well-being.

Reference:
1. Baloran, E. T. (2020). Knowledge, attitudes, anxiety, and coping
strategies of students during the COVID-19 pandemic. Journal of
Loss and Trauma, 25(8), 635–642. https://doi.org/10.1080/-
15325024.2020.1769300
2. Boyraz, G., Legros, D. N. (2020). Coronavirus disease (COVID-
19) and traumatic stress: Probable risk factors and correlates of
posttraumatic stress disorder. Journal of Loss and Trauma.
https://doi.org/10.1080/15325024.2020.1763556
3. Cao W, Fang Z, Hou G, Han M, Xu X, Dong J, et al. (2020).The
psychological impact of the COVID-19 epidemic on college
students in China. Psychiatry Res 2020; 287: 112934.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.psychres.2020.112934
4. Giannini, S., Albrectsen, A. B. ( 2020). COVID-19 school
closures around the world will hit girls hardest.
https://en.unesco.org/news/covid-19-school-closures-around-
world-will-hit-girls-hardest
5. Grant, K. E., Compass, B. E., Stuhlmacher, A. F., Thurm, A. E.,
McMahon, S. D., Halpert, J. A. (2003). Stressors and child and
adolescent psychopathology: Moving from markers to
mechanisms of risk. Psychological Bulletin, 129(3), 447–466.
https://doi.org/10.1037/0033-2909.129.3.447
6. Kochhar, A. S., Bhasin, R., Kochhar, G. K., Dadlani, H., Mehta,
V. V., Kaur, R., Bhasin, C. K. (2020). Lockdown of 1.3 billion
people in India during COVID-19 pandemic: A survey of its
impact on mental health. Asian Journal of Psychiatry, 54.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ajp.2020.102213
7. Kumar, A., Nayar, K. R. (2020). COVID-19 and its mental health
consequences. Journal of Mental Health.
https://doi.org/10.1080 /09638237.2020.1757052

101
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

8. Zhai, Y., Du, X., (2020). Mental health care for international
Chinese students affected by the COVID-19 outbreak. Lancet
Psychiatry 7, e22. https://doi:10.1016/S2215-0366(20)30089-4

Dr. Wandaia Syngkon

Assistant Professor, Department of Social Work - PG, St. Edmund’s
College, Shillong

102
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 10

QUANTUM COMPUTING AND FUTURE

NETWORKS: BRIDGING THE NEXT FRONTIER

Dr. Anuj Kumar Dwivedi

Abstract:
Quantum computing is revolutionizing the landscape of information
processing, promising unprecedented computational power that can
potentially reshape the way we approach complex problem-solving.
In tandem with this quantum leap in computing capabilities, the future
of networking is also undergoing a transformation, driven by the need
to accommodate the demands of quantum computing and harness its
potential for a wide array of applications. This chapter explores the
intersection of quantum computing and future networks, delving into
the synergies, challenges, and the transformative impact on various
sectors of future networks.

Keywords: Quantum Computing, Quantum Networking Basics,

Qubits, Quantum Key Distribution, Future Networks.

Introduction:
. Foundations of Quantum Computing
Quantum computing is a young field with immense
potential, and its development has seen several important
milestones. Historical overview and key milestones in
quantum computing development:

Pre-20th Century
 1801: Thomas Young's double-slit experiment establishes the
wave-particle duality of light, laying the groundwork for quantum
mechanics.
 1900: Max Planck introduces the concept of quantized energy,
leading to the development of quantum theory.

Early 20th Century

103
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

 1905: Albert Einstein's explanation of the photoelectric effect

supports the idea of quantized energy in the form of photons.
 1925-1927: Erwin Schrödinger and Werner Heisenberg
independently formulate wave mechanics and matrix mechanics,
respectively, leading to the creation of quantum mechanics.
1930s-1940s
 1935: Einstein, Podolsky, and Rosen publish the EPR paper,
highlighting the phenomenon of entanglement.
 1938: Claude Shannon's master's thesis demonstrates that
Boolean algebra can be used to simplify the design of electronic
circuits, laying the groundwork for classical computing.
 1943: Max Planck introduces the concept of a "quantum" of
information, anticipating the connection between information
theory and quantum mechanics.
1950s-1960s
 1952: David Deutsch, a pioneer in quantum computing, is born.
 1957: Hugh Everett III proposes the many-worlds interpretation
of quantum mechanics.
 1968: Physicist Richard Feynman suggests using quantum
systems to simulate physical processes more efficiently than
classical computers.
1980s-1990s
 1980: Richard Feynman introduces the concept of quantum
computing in his famous lecture "Simulating Physics with
Computers."
 1981: David Deutsch formulates the concept of a quantum Turing
machine, a theoretical foundation for quantum computation.
 1994: Peter Shor develops Shor's algorithm, demonstrating that a
quantum computer can factor large numbers exponentially faster
than classical algorithms, posing a threat to classical
cryptography.
 1996: Lov Grover devises Grover's algorithm, demonstrating a
quadratic speedup for unstructured search problems.
Late 20th Century
 1998: IBM researchers achieve the first demonstration of
quantum teleportation.
 2000: The first five-qubit quantum computer is built by IBM.

21st Century

104
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

 2010: D-Wave Systems introduces the first commercially

available quantum computer, focused on quantum annealing.
 2016: IBM makes a 5-qubit quantum computer available via the
cloud, marking the beginning of accessible quantum computing
for researchers and developers.
 2019: Google claims to achieve quantum supremacy with its 53-
qubit Sycamore processor, solving a specific problem faster than
the most advanced classical supercomputers.
 2021: IBM announces the development of a 127-qubit quantum
processor named Eagle.
This historical overview illustrates the evolution of quantum
computing from its theoretical foundations in the early 20th
century to the development of increasingly sophisticated quantum
processors in the 21st century. As quantum computing continues
to advance, researchers explore new possibilities, laying the
groundwork for the future of information processing.
While quantum computers, are still in their very early stages,
significant progress has been made in demonstrating their potential
and developing the underlying technology.
Quantum supremacy, achieved by Google in 2019, marked a crucial
milestone, signifying the ability of quantum computers to outperform
classical ones on specific tasks.Future development focuses on
building larger, more reliable quantum computers and finding
practical applications across various fields like materials science, drug
discovery, cryptography, and financial modeling. This is a brief
overview, and the field of quantum computing is constantly evolving.
2. Quantum Computing Technologies
Quantum computing is a rapidly emerging field that harnesses the
laws of quantum mechanics to solve problems that are too complex
for traditional computers. It has the potential to revolutionize many
fields.Overview of leading quantum computing technologies are as
follows:
1.Superconducting Qubits
Principle: Superconducting qubits leverage the properties of
superconductors to carry electrical current without resistance. The
qubits are typically implemented as Josephson junctions, which
exhibit quantum behavior when cooled to extremely low
temperatures.
Advantages: Superconducting qubits can be manipulated using
microwave pulses, allowing for fast gate operations. Several major

105
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

companies, including IBM, Google, and Rigetti Computing, use

superconducting qubits in their quantum processors.
2.Trapped Ions
Principle: Trapped ion quantum computing involves using individual
ions, typically of elements like ytterbium or magnesium, held in place
using electromagnetic fields. Qubits are encoded in the electronic
states of these ions.
Advantages: Trapped ions have long coherence times, allowing for
more robust quantum operations. Companies like IonQ and
Honeywell are actively developing trapped ion quantum computers.

3.Topological Qubits
Principle: Topological qubits are based on anyons, exotic particles
that exist in certain two-dimensional materials. The braiding of these
anyons forms qubits, and their quantum information is encoded in the
braiding patterns.
Advantages: Topological qubits are considered more robust against
errors, as the quantum information is stored globally and is less
susceptible to local disturbances. Microsoft is notably investing in the
development of topological qubits.

4.Photonic Quantum Computing

Principle: Photonic quantum computing uses photons as qubits.
Quantum information is encoded in various properties of photons,
such as polarization or entanglement.
Advantages: Photons travel at the speed of light and can be used for
long-distance quantum communication. Companies like Xanadu
Quantum Technologies are exploring the potential of photonic
quantum computing.

5.Quantum Dots
Principle: Quantum dots are semiconductor-based artificial atoms
that can trap a small number of electrons. The electron spins in these
quantum dots are used as qubits.
Advantages: Quantum dots can be integrated into existing
semiconductor technologies, making them compatible with classical
computing components. This could facilitate the development of
hybrid quantum-classical systems.

6.Silicon Spin Qubits

Principle: Silicon spin qubits leverage the electron spin of
phosphorus atoms embedded in silicon. The manipulation of these
spins forms the basis of qubit operations.

106
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Advantages: Silicon is a well-established material in the semi

conductor industry, providing a path for integration with existing
technologies. Companies like Intel are exploring silicon spin qubits
for quantum computing.

7. Diamond Nitrogen-Vacancy Centers

Principle: Quantum information is stored in the spin states of
nitrogen-vacancy (NV) centers in diamonds. These defects in the
diamond lattice can be controlled using electromagnetic fields.
Advantages: NV centers in diamonds offer long coherence times, and
their solid-state nature makes them more stable. This technology is
being researched for applications in quantum sensing and computing.

Each of these quantum computing technologies has its strengths and

challenges, and ongoing research aims to overcome existing
limitations. The choice of technology depends on factors such as
coherence times, error rates, scalability, and ease of integration with
classical computing components. The field is dynamic, with
continuous advancements and improvements shaping the landscape of
quantum computing.

Quantum Error Correction (QEC) and the Challenges of

Maintaining Coherence
Quantum Error Correction (QEC) is a crucial aspect of quantum
computing that addresses the inherent susceptibility of quantum bits
(qubits) to errors due to environmental influences and imperfections
in quantum hardware. Unlike classical bits, qubits are highly sensitive
to their surroundings, making error correction essential for the reliable
execution of quantum algorithms.
Challenges in Maintaining Coherence
1.Decoherence
Challenge: Quantum coherence refers to the ability of qubits to
maintain their superposition and entanglement states over time.
Decoherence occurs when qubits interact with their environment,
causing their quantum information to dissipate into the surroundings.
Solution: Techniques such as quantum error correction codes and
error mitigation strategies aim to combat decoherence by encoding
information redundantly and actively correcting errors.
2.Quantum Gate Imperfections
Challenge: Real-world quantum gates are not perfect, introducing
errors during qubit operations. Imperfections can result from factors

107
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

such as gate duration, amplitude errors, and variations in control

parameters.
Solution: Calibration and error mitigation techniques are employed to
minimize the impact of gate imperfections. Continuous improvements
in hardware design also contribute to reducing gate errors.

3.Noise and Environmental Interference

Challenge: External factors, such as temperature fluctuations,
electromagnetic radiation, and magnetic field variations, can
introduce noise and interfere with the delicate quantum states of
qubits.
Solution: Sophisticated shielding, isolation, and error correction
algorithms are employed to mitigate the impact of environmental
noise. Quantum hardware is often operated at extremely low
temperatures to minimize thermal noise.

4.Fault-Tolerant Quantum Computing

Challenge: Building fault-tolerant quantum computers is a
formidable challenge. Quantum error correction codes, such as the
surface code, are designed to detect and correct errors. However,
implementing fault-tolerant quantum computing requires a significant
overhead in terms of qubit resources and computational complexity.
Solution: Ongoing research focuses on developing fault-tolerant
quantum computing architectures and improving the efficiency of
quantum error correction codes to make large-scale, error-resistant
quantum computers practical.

5.Qubit Interactions and Crosstalk

Challenge: Qubits in close proximity can interact with each other,
leading to unintended crosstalk that introduces errors. This is
particularly relevant in physical architectures where qubits are
arranged in close proximity.
Solution: Precise control and isolation techniques are employed to
minimize qubit interactions and crosstalk. Quantum hardware designs
strive to optimize qubit placement to mitigate these effects.

6.Quantum Software Challenges

Challenge: Developing quantum algorithms that are resilient to errors
and capable of leveraging error correction techniques is an ongoing
challenge. Quantum software must be designed with the limitations of
current quantum hardware in mind.

108
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Solution: Quantum software developers work closely with hardware

teams to create error-tolerant algorithms and contribute to the
improvement of quantum error correction techniques.

Addressing these challenges is critical for the realization of practical,

scalable, and fault-tolerant quantum computers. Ongoing research in
quantum error correction and hardware improvements are advancing
the field toward the goal of achieving quantum computational
supremacy for a broad range of applications.

The landscape of quantum computing is diverse, with several

promising technologies vying for dominance.

The choice of technology depends on specific needs and priorities.

Superconducting qubits are currently leading in the race, but trapped
ion and other approaches offer long-term potential.

3. Quantum Cryptography for Secure Communication

Quantum cryptography, often referred to as quantum key distribution
(QKD), is a cutting-edge field that harnesses the principles of
quantum mechanics to achieve secure communication. It utilizes the
unique properties of quantum systems to enable the exchange of
cryptographic keys in a way that is inherently secure against certain
types of attacks. Here are the key concepts and components of
quantum cryptography:

1. Quantum Key Distribution (QKD)

The primary goal of QKD is to establish a secret key between two
parties in a way that any attempt to eavesdrop on the communication
can be detected.
Quantum Superposition: QKD often relies on the principle of
superposition, where qubits exist in multiple states simultaneously.
Any attempt to measure a qubit in transit disturbs its state, alerting the
parties to potential eavesdropping.

2. Quantum Entanglement
Entangled Qubits: QKD can involve the use of entangled qubits,
which are pairs of qubits that become correlated in such a way that
the state of one qubit is dependent on the state of the other, regardless
of the distance between them.
Entanglement-Based Protocols: Protocols like the E91 protocol
leverage entanglement for secure key distribution.

109
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

3. BBM92 Protocol (Bennett-Brassard-Mermin 1992)

Developed by Charles Bennett, Gilles Brassard, and Nicolas David
Mermin, this early QKD protocol uses polarization states of photons
to establish a shared secret key.
Quantum States: The protocol employs the polarization of individual
photons to represent the bits of a cryptographic key.

4. Quantum Key Distribution Steps

Key Generation: Alice and Bob generate a shared secret key using
quantum properties such as polarization states or the entanglement of
particles.
Quantum Transmission: Quantum bits (qubits) are transmitted
between Alice and Bob over a quantum channel.
Detection: Alice and Bob detect and measure the received qubits,
using the outcomes to create a shared secret key.
Key Exchange: The shared key is used for secure communication
using classical encryption algorithms.

5. Security Against Eavesdropping

No-Cloning Theorem: Quantum mechanics dictates that an arbitrary
unknown quantum state cannot be perfectly copied (no-cloning
theorem). Any attempt to eavesdrop on quantum communication
inevitably disturbs the quantum states, alerting the communicating
parties.

6. Practical Implementations
Quantum Key Distribution Systems: Commercial QKD systems
have been developed and implemented by companies such as ID
Quantique and Toshiba. These systems use technologies like single-
photon sources, detectors, and quantum channels.

7. Challenges and Considerations

While QKD provides strong security guarantees, practical
implementations face challenges related to hardware imperfections,
photon loss, and the distance over which quantum communication can
be reliably achieved.

QKD is often used in conjunction with classical cryptographic

protocols to provide a comprehensive security solution.

Quantum cryptography represents a paradigm shift in secure

communication, offering the potential for unconditionally secure key
distribution. As the field advances, researchers and engineers continue

110
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

to address challenges and work towards practical, scalable

implementations for real-world applications.

4. Quantum Networking Basics

Quantum Key Distribution (QKD) for Secure Communication
Quantum Key Distribution (QKD) is a method of secure
communication that leverages principles of quantum mechanics to
enable the exchange of cryptographic keys between two parties in a
way that is theoretically secure against certain types of attacks. The
security of QKD is rooted in the fundamental principles of quantum
mechanics, providing a level of security that classical cryptographic
protocols cannot achieve. Here's an overview of how QKD works:

Principles of Quantum Key Distribution

1.Quantum Superposition
In quantum mechanics, particles such as photons can exist in multiple
states simultaneously, a phenomenon known as superposition. QKD
utilizes this property to encode information.

2.Quantum Entanglement
Quantum entanglement is a phenomenon where two or more particles
become correlated in such a way that the state of one particle
instantaneously influences the state of the others, regardless of the
distance between them.

3.No-Cloning Theorem
The no-cloning theorem states that an arbitrary unknown quantum
state cannot be perfectly copied. This property forms the basis of
QKD security, as any attempt to eavesdrop on the communication
would inevitably disturb the quantum states.

Steps in Quantum Key Distribution

1.Key Generation
QKD begins with the generation of a pair of entangled quantum
particles (often photons). These particles are prepared in a
superposition of states, representing the encoding of bits (0 and 1).

2.Quantum Transmission
One of the entangled particles is sent to the receiver (Alice), and the
other to the sender (Bob), over a quantum communication channel.

3.Measurement

111
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Alice measures her particle in one of two mutually exclusive bases,

which randomly determines the bit value. The choice of basis is
publicly communicated.

4.Entanglement Verification
Bob measures his particle in the basis specified by Alice. The
outcomes are then compared to verify entanglement. Any deviation
from the expected correlation indicates potential eavesdropping.

5.Key Exchange
The bits where Alice and Bob used the same measurement basis form
the raw key. Error correction and privacy amplification procedures
are applied to distill a final, secure cryptographic key.

6.Security Analysis
The security of the key exchange relies on the principles of quantum
mechanics, including the no-cloning theorem and the inability to
measure quantum states without disturbing them.

Advantages of Quantum Key Distribution

1.Security Against Eavesdropping
QKD provides a theoretically secure method of key exchange, as any
attempt to eavesdrop on the quantum communication would disturb
the quantum states, making the intrusion detectable.

2.Quantum-Safe Cryptography
QKD offers a solution to quantum-safe or post-quantum cryptography
concerns. Traditional cryptographic systems, like RSA and ECC, are
vulnerable to attacks by quantum computers using Shor's algorithm
for factorization.

3.Long-Distance Secure Communication

Quantum entanglement enables QKD to be used for secure
communication over long distances, potentially connecting remote
locations through quantum networks.

Challenges
1.Practical Implementations
Implementing QKD systems at scale faces challenges related to
hardware limitations, photon loss in communication channels, and
integration with existing communication infrastructure.

2.Environmental Factors

112
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Environmental factors, such as fiber optic transmission loss and

background noise, can impact the performance of QKD systems.

Despite these challenges, QKD is an active area of research and

development, with the potential to play a crucial role in securing
communications in the era of quantum computing. Ongoing
advancements aim to address practical limitations and enhance the
feasibility of QKD for real-world applications.

Quantum Teleportation and its Implications for Future Networks

Quantum teleportation is a process that allows the transfer of quantum
information from one location to another without the physical
movement of particles. This phenomenon relies on the principles of
quantum entanglement, superposition, and quantum measurement.
The teleportation of quantum states is a fundamental concept in
quantum information theory and has significant implications for the
development of future quantum networks.

Key Steps in Quantum Teleportation

1.Entanglement Creation
Two particles become entangled, meaning the state of one particle is
directly correlated with the state of the other, regardless of the
distance between them.

2.Quantum State Preparation

A quantum state (qubit) that needs to be teleported is prepared on one
of the entangled particles (Alice's particle).

3.Bell Measurement
Alice performs a joint measurement on her particle and the particle to
be teleported, obtaining a result that is sent to Bob using classical
communication.

4.Classical Communication
Alice communicates the measurement result to Bob using classical
communication channels.

5.Quantum State Reconstruction

Based on the received classical information, Bob applies a quantum
operation to his entangled particle to transform it into the teleported
quantum state.

113
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

The key aspect of quantum teleportation is that the original quantum

state is destroyed during the process, and an identical state is
recreated at a distant location.

Implications for Future Networks

1.Quantum Communication Networks
Quantum teleportation is a critical component in the development of
quantum communication networks. These networks leverage
entanglement and teleportation to enable secure and efficient quantum
communication over long distances.

2.Quantum Key Distribution (QKD)

Quantum teleportation plays a role in advancing quantum key
distribution (QKD) protocols. QKD allows secure communication by
distributing cryptographic keys using the principles of quantum
mechanics.

3.Quantum Repeaters
Quantum repeaters are devices designed to extend the range of
entanglement and facilitate the transmission of quantum information
over longer distances. Quantum teleportation is a fundamental
operation in the design of quantum repeaters.

4.Quantum Internet
The concept of a quantum internet envisions a global network where
quantum information can be shared and processed securely. Quantum
teleportation is a crucial building block for the development of such a
quantum internet infrastructure.

5.Secure Quantum Communication

Quantum teleportation enables the secure transfer of quantum
information between distant parties. It provides a method for secure
quantum communication that is inherently resistant to eavesdropping,
as any attempt to intercept the quantum information would disturb the
entangled states.

6.Quantum Cloud Computing

Quantum teleportation could have implications for distributed
quantum computing scenarios, allowing quantum states to be
transmitted and processed across quantum nodes in a network.

Challenges
1.Fidelity and Error Correction

114
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Achieving high-fidelity teleportation over long distances remains a

technical challenge, and error correction methods are essential to
mitigate the impact of imperfections.

2.Resource Requirements
Quantum teleportation typically requires entangled particle pairs and
classical communication channels. Scaling up such systems for
practical applications requires addressing resource constraints.

3.Integration with Classical Networks

Integrating quantum teleportation and quantum communication into
existing classical networks poses challenges, as quantum and classical
information have different characteristics.

In summary, quantum teleportation is a fascinating quantum

phenomenon with transformative implications for the development of
future networks. As researchers address technical challenges and
explore practical implementations, quantum teleportation may
become a key element in the realization of secure and efficient
quantum communication networks.

5. Challenges in Quantum Networking

Overcoming the Limitations of Quantum Entanglement over
Long Distances
Quantum entanglement, while a fascinating and powerful
phenomenon, faces challenges when it comes to maintaining its
properties over long distances. This is primarily due to factors such as
photon loss, decoherence, and practical constraints on quantum
communication channels. Overcoming these limitations is crucial for
the development of long-distance quantum communication networks.
Here are some approaches and technologies aimed at addressing the
challenges of quantum entanglement over extended distances:

1.Quantum Repeaters
Concept: Quantum repeaters are devices designed to extend the range
of entanglement in quantum communication networks.
How It Works: Quantum repeaters use intermediate nodes equipped
with entangled particles to create entanglement link segments. These
segments are then connected to form longer entanglement
connections.
Purpose: Quantum repeaters mitigate the impact of photon loss and
decoherence, enabling the distribution of entanglement over longer
distances.

115
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2.Entanglement Swapping
Concept: Entanglement swapping allows the entanglement of distant
particles without direct interaction between them.
How It Works: If two particles (A and B) are entangled with two
separate particles (C and D), and particles A and C are measured in an
entangled basis, particles B and D become entangled.
Purpose: This method helps extend entanglement beyond the direct
range of entangled pairs.

3.Quantum Memory
Concept: Quantum memory allows the storage and retrieval of
quantum states, helping to overcome decoherence and maintain
entanglement over longer time periods.
How It Works: Quantum memories store entangled states in a
quantum system, delaying the effects of decoherence until the
entangled particles can be successfully measured.
Purpose: Quantum memory is essential for implementing quantum
repeaters and extending the range of entanglement.

4.Hybrid Quantum Systems

Concept: Combining different physical platforms to create hybrid
quantum systems can enhance the robustness of entanglement over
long distances.
How It Works: Hybrid systems may combine superconducting qubits
with trapped ions or other quantum platforms, taking advantage of the
strengths of each system.
Purpose: This approach aims to address the limitations of individual
quantum systems and improve overall performance in maintaining
entanglement.

5.Fiber-Optic Quantum Communication

Concept: Developing advanced fiber-optic communication
technologies specifically designed for quantum information transfer.
How It Works: Specialized quantum communication protocols and
techniques, such as wavelength division multiplexing, are used to
mitigate photon loss and maintain quantum entanglement in fiber-
optic channels.
Purpose: Improving the efficiency and fidelity of quantum
communication over long-distance fiber-optic links.

6.Satellite-Based Quantum Communication

116
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Concept: Using satellites to facilitate quantum communication over

long distances, particularly for global-scale quantum key distribution.
How It Works: Quantum entangled particles are generated and
distributed between ground stations and satellites, allowing for
entanglement-based communication over larger geographic areas.
Purpose: Satellites can serve as relay nodes for entangled particles,
reducing the impact of atmospheric absorption and providing a global
quantum communication infrastructure.
7.Advanced Error Correction
Concept: Developing more robust error correction techniques
tailored to the challenges of long-distance quantum communication.
How It Works: Advanced error correction codes and protocols are
designed to correct errors introduced by factors like decoherence,
photon loss, and imperfect measurements.
Purpose: Error correction is crucial for maintaining the fidelity of
quantum entanglement over extended distances.
Overcoming the limitations of quantum entanglement over long
distances is an active area of research, and progress in these
technologies is essential for the practical implementation of large-
scale quantum communication networks. As researchers continue to
innovate in this field, we can expect advancements that will
contribute to the development of secure and efficient long-distance
quantum communication systems.
Quantum Repeaters and Quantum Memories
Quantum Repeaters
Quantum repeaters are devices designed to extend the range of
entanglement in quantum communication networks. Entanglement is
a crucial resource for quantum communication, and maintaining its
integrity over long distances is challenging due to photon loss and
decoherence. Quantum repeaters address these challenges by breaking
down the long-distance entanglement generation into smaller, more
manageable segments.
Key Components and Concepts
1.Entanglement Swapping
Quantum repeaters use entanglement swapping to connect shorter
entangled segments and create entanglement over longer distances. If
two particles A and B are entangled, and two other particles C and D
are also entangled, measuring A and C in an entangled basis can
create entanglement between B and D.

117
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2.Bell Measurements
Bell measurements are crucial for entanglement swapping. They
involve making joint measurements on two entangled particles to
determine their entanglement state. The results of these measurements
are then used to create entanglement between distant particles.
3.Quantum Memories
Quantum repeaters often incorporate quantum memories, which store
entangled states temporarily. This allows for the synchronization of
entangled particles in different segments, facilitating entanglement
swapping.

4.Purification Protocols
To improve the fidelity of entanglement, purification protocols are
employed. These protocols involve filtering out states that have
undergone decoherence or other errors, leaving behind a more robust
entangled state.

Quantum Memories
Quantum memories are devices that allow the storage and retrieval of
quantum states, such as entangled states, with high fidelity. Quantum
memories are crucial components in quantum repeaters and play a key
role in overcoming the limitations imposed by decoherence and
maintaining entanglement over extended periods.

Key Concepts and Types

1.Storage and Retrieval
Quantum memories store quantum states by mapping them onto
physical systems, such as the collective states of atomic ensembles or
individual atoms. These stored states can later be retrieved on
demand.

2.Decoherence Mitigation
Quantum memories help mitigate the effects of decoherence, which is
the loss of coherence in quantum states due to interactions with the
environment. By storing quantum states in well-protected physical
systems, memories can delay the onset of decoherence.

3.Different Platforms
Quantum memories can be implemented using various physical
platforms, including atomic ensembles, trapped ions, and solid-state
systems. Each platform has its advantages and challenges, and
researchers explore the best-suited technology for specific
applications.

118
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

4.Spin Coherence in Solid-State Systems

In solid-state quantum memories, the spin states of electrons or nuclei
are often used to store quantum information. Techniques such as spin
echo are employed to extend the coherence time of these states.
5.Atomic Ensembles
Quantum memories based on atomic ensembles use collective atomic
states to store quantum information. The use of electromagnetically
induced transparency (EIT) or controlled reversible inhomogeneous
broadening (CRIB) helps protect the coherence of the stored states.

6.Trapped Ions
Trapped ions offer long coherence times and are used in quantum
memories. Quantum information is typically stored in the electronic
or motional states of individual ions in a trap.

Applications
1.Quantum Communication Networks
Quantum repeaters with quantum memories are essential for the
development of large-scale quantum communication networks. They
extend the reach of entanglement, enabling secure communication
over longer distances.

2.Quantum Key Distribution (QKD)

Quantum memories play a crucial role in quantum key distribution
(QKD) protocols, allowing for the secure storage and retrieval of
quantum keys used in cryptographic applications.

3.Quantum Repeaters for Quantum Internet

Quantum memories are integral to the realization of a global quantum
internet. Quantum repeaters equipped with quantum memories enable
the creation of entanglement links across continents, connecting
distant quantum nodes.

Both quantum repeaters and quantum memories are integral

components in the advancement of quantum communication
technologies. Research in these areas is focused on improving the
efficiency, fidelity, and scalability of these devices to realize practical
quantum communication networks and applications.

Scalability and Interoperability Issues in Quantum Networks

Scalability and interoperability are critical challenges in the
development and deployment of quantum networks. As quantum

119
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

technologies advance, building large-scale and interoperable quantum

networks becomes essential for practical applications. Here are the
key issues related to scalability and interoperability in quantum
networks:

Scalability Issues
1.Entanglement Distribution
Challenge: Extending the distribution of entangled qubits over long
distances is challenging due to factors such as photon loss and
decoherence.
Solution: Implementing quantum repeaters, quantum memories, and
advanced error correction techniques to mitigate the impact of these
challenges and extend the range of entanglement.
2.Resource Requirements
Challenge: Quantum networks require entangled particles, quantum
repeaters, and other resources that scale with the size of the network.
Solution: Developing resource-efficient protocols, improving
hardware capabilities, and exploring advanced quantum memory
technologies to handle the resource demands of large-scale networks.
3.Quantum Key Distribution (QKD) Overhead
Challenge: QKD, a fundamental application of quantum networks,
introduces overhead due to the need for secure key distribution. This
overhead can become impractical at scale.
Solution: Developing more efficient QKD protocols, exploring post-
quantum cryptography solutions, and integrating classical
cryptographic techniques for scalability.
4.Quantum Gate Operations
Challenge: Performing quantum gate operations becomes
computationally intensive as the number of qubits in a quantum
network increases.
Solution: Advancements in quantum computing technologies, error
correction codes, and optimized algorithms to reduce the
computational complexity of gate operations.
5.Network Infrastructure
Challenge: Building and maintaining a physical infrastructure for
quantum communication, including quantum repeaters, quantum
memories, and entanglement sources.
Solution: Investing in the development of quantum hardware,
leveraging existing classical communication infrastructure, and
exploring satellite-based quantum communication for global
networks.

120
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Interoperability Issues
1.Hardware Heterogeneity
Challenge: Different quantum hardware platforms (superconducting
qubits, trapped ions, etc.) may have different capabilities and
interfaces, making interoperability challenging.
Solution: Developing standardized interfaces and protocols to
facilitate communication and data exchange between heterogeneous
quantum devices.

2.Communication Protocols
Challenge: Defining communication protocols that work seamlessly
across various quantum devices and architectures.
Solution: Standardizing quantum communication protocols to ensure
interoperability and compatibility between different quantum devices
and networks.

3.Quantum Error Correction

Challenge: Different quantum processors may use distinct error
correction codes, making it challenging to achieve interoperability.
Solution: Developing universal error correction codes or establishing
protocols for converting between different error corrections schemes
to enhance interoperability.

4.Quantum Software Compatibility:

Challenge: Quantum algorithms and software developed for one
quantum device may not be directly compatible with another due to
differences in gate sets and noise profiles.
Solution: Establishing common standards for quantum programming
languages, gate sets, and software interfaces to enhance compatibility
and ease of integration.

5.Integration with Classical Networks:

Challenge: Integrating quantum networks with existing classical
networks poses interoperability challenges, especially in terms of data
formats and communication protocols.
Solution: Developing hybrid quantum-classical communication
protocols, gateways, and converters to facilitate seamless integration
between quantum and classical networks.

Addressing these scalability and interoperability challenges requires a

multidisciplinary approach involving researchers, engineers, and
industry stakeholders. Standardization efforts, open-source initiatives,
and collaborative research are essential for establishing a robust and

121
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

interconnected quantum ecosystem that can support practical

applications in the future.

6. Integration of Quantum Computing with Future Networks

Hybrid Quantum-Classical Systems and their Role in Practical
Applications
Hybrid quantum-classical systems combine elements of both quantum
and classical computing to harness the strengths of each paradigm.
These systems are designed to address the limitations of current
quantum processors and leverage quantum capabilities in conjunction
with classical computing resources. The role of hybrid quantum-
classical systems in practical applications is diverse and spans various
domains. Here are key aspects of their role:

1. Quantum Error Correction:

Challenge: Quantum computers are susceptible to errors due to
environmental factors and imperfections in hardware.
Role: Classical computers in hybrid systems can perform error
correction and fault tolerance calculations, enhancing the reliability of
quantum computations.

2. Optimization Problems:
Challenge: Quantum computers excel at solving certain optimization
problems, but their range is limited by factors like coherence time.
Role: Hybrid systems can use classical optimization algorithms to
guide and enhance quantum optimization processes, achieving better
results for a broader class of problems.

3. Machine Learning
Challenge: Quantum machine learning algorithms may require large-
scale quantum processors, which are not yet widely available.
Role: Classical systems can preprocess data, handle classical
components of machine learning tasks, and work in conjunction with
quantum algorithms to improve the efficiency of certain machine
learning processes.

4. Quantum Simulation
Challenge: Simulating quantum systems on classical computers
becomes computationally expensive as the system size increases.
Role: Hybrid systems can use quantum processors to simulate
specific quantum systems, while classical systems perform

122
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

complementary calculations, enabling more efficient and accurate

simulations.

5. Cryptography
Challenge: While quantum computers pose a threat to classical
cryptographic methods, large-scale quantum-resistant algorithms are
still in development.
Role: Hybrid systems can implement quantum-resistant cryptographic
algorithms while maintaining the security of classical cryptographic
techniques, providing a transition path to post-quantum cryptography.

6. Real-Time Optimization and Control

Challenge: Rapidly changing optimization or control problems may
exceed the capabilities of current quantum processors.
Role: Hybrid systems can use classical feedback mechanisms to adapt
quantum solutions in real-time, making those more applicable to
dynamic scenarios.

7. Algorithm Development and Debugging

Challenge: Quantum algorithm development can be complex, and
debugging on quantum processors is challenging.
Role: Classical systems aid in algorithm development, debugging,
and verification, providing a familiar environment for programmers
and facilitating the optimization of quantum algorithms.

8. Data Pre-processing
Challenge: Quantum computers have specific requirements for data
encoding, and classical data may need pre-processing.
Role: Classical systems can pre-process classical data, ensuring it is
in a suitable format for quantum computations.

9. Integration with Existing Workflows

Challenge: Integrating quantum algorithms into existing classical
workflows can be non-trivial.
Role: Hybrid systems ease the integration process, allowing
organizations to leverage quantum capabilities without completely
overhauling their classical computing infrastructure.

10. Hybrid Cloud Computing:

123
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Challenge: Access to quantum processors is currently limited, and

organizations may not have the resources to deploy and maintain their
quantum hardware.
Role: Cloud platforms offering hybrid quantum-classical services
enable users to access quantum processors remotely, democratizing
access to quantum computing resources.

Hybrid quantum-classical systems act as a bridge between the current

state of quantum computing and the practical requirements of various
applications. They enable organizations to gradually incorporate
quantum capabilities into their workflows, providing a pragmatic
approach toward the realization of practical quantum applications.
The synergy between classical and quantum computing resources is
crucial for maximizing the benefits of quantum computing in real-
world scenarios.

Quantum Cloud Computing and its Impact on Distributed Systems

Quantum cloud computing is a paradigm where quantum computing
resources are made available to users over the cloud. This model
allows individuals and organizations to access and utilize quantum
processors, algorithms, and services without the need to own or
maintain the physical quantum hardware. Quantum cloud platforms
offer a scalable and convenient way to harness the power of quantum
computing for various applications.

Key Components of Quantum Cloud Computing

1.Quantum Processors
Quantum cloud services provide users with access to quantum
processors for running quantum algorithms and conducting
experiments. Users can submit quantum circuits and receive results
through cloud interfaces.

2.Quantum Software Development Kits (SDKs)

Quantum cloud platforms often offer SDKs and programming
interfaces that enable users to develop, simulate, and execute quantum
algorithms. These tools facilitate the integration of quantum
computing into existing workflows.

3.Quantum Simulators
Quantum cloud services may include quantum simulators that allow
users to simulate quantum computations on classical hardware. This is
useful for testing and debugging quantum algorithms before running
them on actual quantum processors.

124
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

4.Hybrid Quantum-Classical Computing

Quantum cloud platforms support hybrid quantum-classical
computing, allowing users to integrate quantum and classical
algorithms seamlessly. Classical computations can be used for
preprocessing, post-processing, and optimization tasks.

5.Quantum Cloud Access Services

These services provide users with remote access to quantum
hardware, allowing them to execute quantum algorithms on actual
quantum processors. Users submit their quantum circuits through the
cloud interface, and the platform returns the results.

Impact on Distributed Systems

1.Remote Quantum Access
Quantum cloud computing enables users to access quantum
processors remotely. This accessibility is particularly impactful for
distributed systems where users and resources are geographically
dispersed.

2.Collaborative Quantum Research

Researchers and scientists from different locations can collaborate on
quantum experiments and research by leveraging quantum cloud
platforms. This fosters collaboration in the development and testing of
quantum algorithms.

3.Democratizing Quantum Resources

Quantum cloud computing democratizes access to quantum resources.
Organizations and individuals with limited resources or expertise in
quantum hardware can still harness the power of quantum computing
through cloud services.

4.Scalable Quantum Solutions

Distributed systems often require scalable solutions. Quantum cloud
computing allows users to scale their quantum computations based on
demand without the need for significant upfront investments in
quantum hardware.

5.Integration with Classical Workflows

Quantum cloud platforms facilitate the integration of quantum
computing into classical workflows. This integration is crucial for
distributed systems where both classical and quantum computations
play complementary roles.

125
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

6.Quantum-Inspired Algorithms
Quantum cloud platforms may also provide quantum-inspired
algorithms and optimization techniques that can be applied to
classical distributed systems, offering performance improvements for
certain problem domains.

7.Hybrid Quantum-Classical Applications

Distributed systems can benefit from the hybrid quantum-classical
capabilities offered by quantum cloud platforms. Classical
components can handle preprocessing, communication, and post-
processing, while quantum processors address specific quantum tasks.

8.Cost-Effective Access
Quantum cloud computing provides a cost-effective model for
accessing quantum resources. Instead of investing in and maintaining
quantum hardware, organizations can use cloud services on a pay-as-
you-go basis.

9.Global Quantum Network Integration

As quantum networks develop, quantum cloud platforms can facilitate
the integration of quantum communication into distributed systems,
allowing for secure quantum communication between different nodes.

Quantum cloud computing represents a transformative shift in how

quantum resources are accessed and utilized. Its impact on distributed
systems extends beyond individual users to collaborative research,
scalable solutions, and the integration of quantum capabilities into
diverse computational workflows. As quantum cloud platforms
continue to evolve, their role in distributed computing will likely
become increasingly significant.

Quantum Internet and its Potential for Global Quantum

Communication
A quantum internet is a visionary concept that aims to leverage the
principles of quantum mechanics to enable secure and powerful
communication protocols on a global scale. Unlike classical internet
communication, which relies on classical bits, a quantum internet
would use quantum bits or qubits to enable unique features such as
quantum key distribution (QKD), quantum teleportation, and
distributed quantum computing. Here are the key aspects of a
quantum internet and its potential for global quantum communication:

126
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Key Features of a Quantum Internet

1.Quantum Key Distribution (QKD)
QKD allows secure communication by distributing cryptographic
keys using quantum properties. The security of QKD is based on the
principles of quantum mechanics, providing a level of security that is
theoretically immune to certain types of attacks.

2.Quantum Teleportation
Quantum teleportation enables the transfer of quantum states from
one location to another without physically moving the particles. This
could enable secure and instant communication between distant
quantum nodes.
3.Entanglement-Based Communication
Utilizing entangled particles for communication allows the
establishment of secure links over long distances. Changes in the state
of one entangled particle instantaneously affect the state of the other,
enabling faster-than-light communication in principle.
4.Quantum Repeaters
Quantum repeaters are devices designed to extend the range of
entanglement in quantum communication networks. They play a
crucial role in achieving entanglement over long distances, a key
requirement for a global quantum internet.
5.Quantum Routing and Switching
Developing quantum routers and switches to route quantum
information through the network efficiently is essential for creating a
scalable and practical quantum internet infrastructure.
6.Quantum Memory
Quantum memories are crucial for storing and retrieving quantum
states, enabling the synchronization of entangled particles and
facilitating the development of quantum repeaters.
Potential for Global Quantum Communication
1.Secure Communication
A quantum internet would provide an unprecedented level of security
for communication. QKD protocols ensure that any attempt to
eavesdrop on the communication is detectable, as it would disturb the
quantum states being transmitted.
2.Global Quantum Key Distribution
QKD over a quantum internet could facilitate the secure exchange of
cryptographic keys between users on a global scale. This would be

127
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

especially important for securing sensitive information in areas such

as finance, government, and healthcare.
3.Quantum Cryptography Applications
Quantum communication protocols could be used for a variety of
cryptographic applications beyond key distribution, including secure
multi-party computation and quantum homomorphic encryption.
4.Distributed Quantum Computing
A global quantum internet could enable distributed quantum
computing, allowing quantum processors in different locations to
collectively work on complex problems. This could lead to
advancements in fields such as optimization, simulation, and
cryptography.

5. Entanglement Swapping for Long-Distance Communication

Entanglement swapping techniques could be employed to
establish entanglement links between distant parties, paving the
way for secure long-distance communication and potentially
enabling quantum-enhanced communication speeds.

6. Quantum-Secure Communication Satellites

Quantum communication satellites could play a crucial role in
establishing global quantum communication links. Satellites
equipped with entangled photon sources could distribute
entangled particles to ground stations across the globe.

7. International Collaboration and Research

A global quantum internet could facilitate international
collaboration in quantum research and development. Researchers
and organizations worldwide could contribute to the advancement
of quantum communication technologies.

Challenges
1. Decoherence and Loss
Maintaining the coherence of quantum states over long distances
is challenging due to factors like photon loss and environmental
interference.

2. Quantum Error Correction

Implementing effective quantum error correction is essential for
the reliability of quantum communication over global distances.

3. Hardware Compatibility

128
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Ensuring compatibility and standardization of quantum hardware

across different regions and technologies is a key challenge.

4. Integration with Classical Networks

Seamless integration with existing classical communication
infrastructure poses technical challenges.

5. Quantum Memory and Repeaters

Developing efficient quantum memories and repeaters to extend
the range of quantum communication is an ongoing area of
research.

While there are significant challenges, the potential benefits of a

quantum internet for global quantum communication are immense.
Research and development efforts are underway worldwide to address
these challenges and pave the way for the practical realization of a
quantum internet. As quantum technologies continue to advance, the
vision of a secure and interconnected global quantum communication
network may become a reality in the future.

7. Quantum Networking Protocols

Quantum network protocols are the set of rules and instructions that
govern communication and data transfer in a quantum network.
Unlike classical networks, which rely on bits (0s and 1s), quantum
networks use qubits, which can exist in a superposition of both states
simultaneously. This ability to be in multiple states at once opens up a
whole new range of possibilities for communication, computation,
and sensing.
One of the most important quantum network protocols is the Quantum
Internet Protocol (QIP). QIP is still under development, but it aims to
provide the same basic functionality as the Internet Protocol (IP) in
classical networks. This includes addressing, routing, and delivering
data packets between different nodes in the network.
Here are some of the key challenges that need to be addressed in
order to develop a QIP:
 Decoherence:Qubits are very fragile and can lose their quantum
coherence easily. This makes it difficult to transmit them over
long distances without errors.
 Error correction: Even if qubits can be transmitted without
errors, they can still be corrupted during processing. Quantum
error correction codes are needed to protect qubits from these
errors.

129
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

 Scalability: Building a large-scale quantum network is a complex

engineering challenge. There are many technical hurdles that need
to be overcome before a QIP can be deployed on a global scale.
Despite these challenges, there has been significant progress in
developing QIP in recent years. Several research groups around the
world are working on different approaches to the problem, and there
are already some demonstration networks in operation.
Here are some of the potential applications of QIP:
 Secure communication: QIP can be used to create unbreakable
communication channels, thanks to the properties of quantum
mechanics. This could have a major impact on cybersecurity.
 Quantum computing: QIP could be used to connect quantum
computers together, allowing them to share information and
perform distributed quantum computations. This could lead to
breakthroughs in a wide range of fields, such as materials science,
drug discovery, and artificial intelligence.
 Distributed sensing: QIP could be used to connect sensors
together, allowing them to collect and share data in a more
efficient way. This could be used for applications such as
environmental monitoring and precision agriculture.

The development of QIP is still in its early stages, but it has the
potential to revolutionize the way we communicate, compute, and
sense the world around us.

However, there are several quantum network protocols and

frameworks under development, and research is ongoing in this
rapidly evolving field. One notable initiative is the development of
quantum communication protocols for quantum key distribution
(QKD), quantum teleportation, and other quantum networking
applications. Some key quantum networking protocols and concepts
are as follows:

1. Quantum Key Distribution (QKD)

Purpose: QKD enables the secure exchange of cryptographic keys
using quantum properties, providing a way to detect eavesdropping
attempts.
Protocols: Various QKD protocols exist, such as BBM92, E91, and
BB84. These protocols leverage quantum entanglement and properties
like superposition to establish secure key exchange.

2. Quantum Teleportation

130
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Purpose: Quantum teleportation allows the transfer of quantum

information from one location to another without physically moving
the particles.
Protocol: The quantum teleportation protocol involves entangling
two particles, performing measurements, and using classical
communication to recreate the quantum state at a distant location.

3. Quantum Repeaters
Purpose: Quantum repeaters are essential for extending the range of
entanglement in quantum communication networks.
Protocols: Entanglement swapping is a key protocol for quantum
repeaters. It involves combining entangled particles from different
sources to create entanglement over longer distances.
4. Quantum Routing
Purpose: Quantum routing protocols are crucial for directing
quantum information through a network efficiently.
Challenges: Developing quantum routers that can handle the unique
properties of quantum information, such as superposition and
entanglement.
5. Quantum Error Correction
Purpose: Quantum error correction protocols are vital for mitigating
errors in quantum computations and communications.
Protocols: Surface codes, Shor code, and the Steane code are
examples of quantum error correction codes that help protect quantum
information from decoherence.
6. Quantum Network Layer Protocols
Purpose: Quantum network layer protocols are analogous to classical
networking protocols but designed for quantum information.
Research Areas: Defining standards for quantum packet formats,
addressing, and routing in quantum networks.
7. Quantum Internet Protocols (QIP)
Purpose: While not a standardized term as of my last update, the
concept of Quantum Internet Protocols could encompass a set of
protocols designed for quantum communication over a global
quantum internet.
Potential Areas: QIP could include standards for secure quantum
communication, entanglement distribution, and the integration of
quantum and classical networks.

131
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Challenges and Considerations

Decoherence and Loss
Addressing the impact of decoherence and loss of quantum
information over long distances.
Interoperability
Ensuring that different quantum devices and networks can
communicate effectively, which involves addressing hardware and
software heterogeneity.
Integration with Classical Networks
Seamless integration with existing classical networks to enable hybrid
quantum-classical communication.
Quantum Memory and Repeaters
Developing efficient quantum memories and repeaters for extending
the reach of quantum communication.

Quantum networking protocols are actively researched, and various

organizations and research institutions are working on advancing the
field. Quantum internet initiatives, such as the Quantum Internet
Alliance in Europe and other global research efforts, are exploring the
development of quantum network protocols for practical applications.

It's important to note that the quantum networking field is dynamic,

and developments may have occurred since my last update.
Researchers continue to explore new protocols and standards that will
shape the future of quantum communication and quantum internet
technology.

Quantum Routers and Switches for Efficient Quantum Data Transfer

Quantum routers and switches are key components in the
development of efficient quantum communication networks. In
classical networks, routers and switches play a critical role in
directing and managing the flow of information. In the quantum
domain, these devices face unique challenges due to the principles of
quantum mechanics, such as superposition and entanglement. Here
are some considerations and potential concepts related to quantum
routers and switches for efficient quantum data transfer:

Quantum Routing and Switching Concepts

1.Quantum Superposition
Challenge: Quantum information can exist in superposition, allowing
a qubit to represent multiple states simultaneously.

132
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Concept: Quantum routers need to handle superposition efficiently,

allowing qubits to traverse multiple paths simultaneously.
2.Entanglement Preservation
Challenge: Quantum entanglement is a delicate quantum resource
that can be easily disturbed by interactions with the environment.
Concept: Quantum switches must be designed to preserve
entanglement during the switching process, ensuring that entangled
qubits maintain their correlated states.

3.Quantum State Measurements

Challenge: Measuring a quantum state can collapse it to a specific
outcome, potentially disturbing superposition or entanglement.
Concept: Quantum routers might use non-destructive measurements
or implement measurement-based quantum computing concepts to
avoid collapsing quantum states prematurely.
4.Quantum Circuit Routing
Challenge: Traditional classical circuit routing may not be directly
applicable to quantum circuits.
Concept: Developing routing algorithms specifically designed for
quantum circuits, considering the unique properties of qubits and
quantum gates.
5.Quantum Feedback Mechanisms
Challenge: Quantum states are generally fragile, and feedback
mechanisms are needed to adapt to changes in the quantum
environment.
Concept: Quantum routers might incorporate feedback loops that
allow real-time adjustments based on measurements and the state of
the quantum system.
6.Quantum Error Correction
Challenge: Quantum information is susceptible to errors due to
decoherence and other environmental factors.
Concept: Quantum routers and switches could integrate error
correction protocols to enhance the reliability of quantum information
transfer.
Potential Quantum Router and Switch Technologies
1.Photonic Quantum Routers
Photonic technologies leverage photons as qubits for quantum
communication. Photonic routers could use beam splitters, phase
shifters, and other photonic elements to direct quantum information.

133
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2.Superconducting Qubit-Based Switches

Superconducting qubits are another promising technology for
quantum routers and switches. These devices could use
superconducting circuits to control the flow of quantum information.
3.Quantum Dot Switching
Quantum dots, semiconductor-based artificial atoms, could be
integrated into switches to control the flow of electrons, enabling
quantum information transfer in solid-state systems.

4.Topological Qubits for Robustness

Topological qubits, known for their inherent error resilience, could be
utilized in quantum routers and switches to enhance the reliability of
quantum data transfer.
5.Quantum Walk-Based Routing
Quantum walks, a quantum analog of classical random walks, could
inspire routing algorithms for quantum networks. Quantum routers
might utilize these concepts to efficiently transport quantum states.
Challenges and Considerations
1.Decoherence Mitigation
Quantum routers must be designed to minimize the impact of
decoherence, ensuring that quantum states remain coherent during the
routing process.
2.Resource Efficiency
Efficient use of quantum resources, such as qubits and entangled
states, is crucial for the scalability of quantum routers and switches.
3.Standardization
Developing standardized interfaces and protocols for quantum routers
and switches to ensure interoperability in large-scale quantum
communication networks.
4.Integration with Classical Networks:
Quantum routers must seamlessly integrate with existing classical
networking infrastructure to enable hybrid quantum-classical
communication.
5.Real-Time Adaptability:
Quantum routers need to adapt to changes in the quantum state and
the network environment in real-time, requiring sophisticated
feedback mechanisms.

134
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Quantum routers and switches are active areas of research in the

broader field of quantum networking. As quantum technologies
advance, the development of efficient and reliable quantum routers
will be essential for the realization of practical quantum
communication networks. Ongoing research and experimentation will
likely lead to innovative solutions and protocols for efficient quantum
data transfer.

8. Security Implications
Quantum-Safe Cryptography in the Era of Quantum Computing
Quantum-safe cryptography, also known as post-quantum
cryptography, is an area of research focused on developing
cryptographic algorithms that remain secure against attacks from
quantum computers. The advent of large-scale quantum computers,
when realized, has the potential to break widely used public-key
cryptography schemes, such as RSA and ECC (Elliptic Curve
Cryptography), which are currently secure against classical
computers.

Here are key aspects of quantum-safe cryptography in the era of

quantum computing:
1. Quantum Threats to Classical Cryptography
Shor's Algorithm:Shor's algorithm, a quantum algorithm, can
efficiently factorize large numbers and solve the discrete logarithm
problem, which forms the basis for the security of widely used
cryptographic protocols.

2. Quantum-Safe Cryptographic Approaches

Lattice-based Cryptography: Lattice-based cryptography relies on
the hardness of certain mathematical problems related to lattice
structures. It is considered a promising candidate for post-quantum
cryptography.
Hash-based Cryptography: Hash-based cryptographic algorithms,
such as hash-based signatures, are based on the security of hash
functions and remain secure in the quantum computing era.
Code-based Cryptography: Code-based cryptography relies on the
hardness of decoding random linear codes. It is one of the earliest
proposed post-quantum cryptographic approaches.

3. NIST Post-Quantum Cryptography Standardization:

135
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) is leading

an initiative to standardize post-quantum cryptographic algorithms.
NIST's Post-Quantum Cryptography Standardization project aims to
develop and standardize quantum-resistant cryptographic algorithms.

4. Quantum Key Distribution (QKD)

While not a replacement for classical cryptographic algorithms,
Quantum Key Distribution (QKD) is a quantum-safe method for
secure key exchange. QKD uses the principles of quantum mechanics
to enable two parties to produce a shared random secret key.

5. Timeline for Quantum-Safe Transition

The transition to quantum-safe cryptography involves a careful and
planned process, given that many existing systems rely on long-term
security guarantees. A timeline for the adoption of post-quantum
algorithms and migration strategies is under consideration by various
organizations.

6. Challenges and Considerations

Algorithm Agility: Organizations need to adopt cryptographic
algorithms that are agile and can be easily replaced as the field
evolves and new algorithms are standardized.
Interoperability: Ensuring interoperability between quantum-safe
cryptographic algorithms and existing systems is a critical
consideration during the transition.
Quantum-Safe Cryptographic Protocols: Developing new
cryptographic protocols that remain secure in a quantum computing
environment is an ongoing challenge.

7. Quantum-Safe Cryptography in Practice

Pilot Implementations: Some organizations are exploring pilot
implementations of post-quantum cryptographic algorithms in real-
world scenarios to understand the practical challenges and benefits.
Awareness and Education: Raising awareness and educating
stakeholders about the importance of transitioning to quantum-safe
cryptography is essential for a smooth adoption process.
8. Hybrid Cryptographic Approaches
Hybrid Solutions: Hybrid cryptographic solutions, combining
classical and post-quantum algorithms, can provide an interim
solution during the transition period.
9. Government and Industry Initiatives

136
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Collaboration: Collaboration between governments, industry, and

academia is crucial for developing, standardizing, and adopting
quantum-safe cryptographic solutions on a global scale.
10. Quantum-Safe Cryptographic Research
Ongoing Research: Researchers continue to explore new
cryptographic primitives and protocols that are resilient to quantum
attacks. This ongoing research is vital for staying ahead of potential
quantum threats.
Quantum-safe cryptography is a critical area of research and
development to ensure the security of digital communication in the
era of quantum computing. The transition to quantum-safe algorithms
requires collaboration, awareness, and careful planning to maintain
the security of information systems in the face of evolving threats. As
quantum technologies progress, the field of post-quantum
cryptography will continue to evolve and organizations should stay
informed and actively participate in the ongoing standardization
efforts and research initiatives.
Risks and Countermeasures against Quantum Attacks on
Classical Cryptographic Systems
Quantum computers have the potential to break widely used public-
key cryptographic systems, such as RSA and ECC, through
algorithms like Shor's algorithm. This poses a significant risk to the
security of classical cryptographic systems. While large-scale
quantum computers capable of executing Shor's algorithm are not yet
available, it is essential to consider potential risks and implement
countermeasures in anticipation of future quantum threats. Here are
the key risks and countermeasures:
Risks
1.Factorization and Discrete Logarithm Problem
Risk: Shor's algorithm can efficiently factorize large numbers and
solve the discrete logarithm problem, compromising the security of
widely used public-key cryptographic systems.
Countermeasure: Transitioning to quantum-safe cryptographic
algorithms that are resistant to Shor's algorithm.

2.Quantum Key Distribution (QKD) Vulnerabilities

Risk: If QKD is not implemented correctly or if vulnerabilities are
discovered in the quantum channel, it may compromise the security of
key exchange.

137
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Counter measure: Ensuring the proper implementation of QKD

protocols, regularly updating systems to address potential
vulnerabilities and considering hybrid approaches that combine QKD
with classical encryption.

3.Eavesdropping with Quantum Computers

Risk: Future quantum computers could potentially break classical
encryption by performing efficient eavesdropping attacks on
encrypted communication.
Countermeasure: Enhancing the security of communication
channels by implementing post-quantum cryptographic algorithms
and regularly updating encryption protocols.

4.Cryptanalysis of Hash Functions

Risk: Quantum algorithms, such as Grover's algorithm, can be used to
perform brute-force attacks more efficiently on hash functions.
Countermeasure: Using larger hash sizes and adopting quantum-
resistant hash functions.

5.Impact on Digital Signatures

Risk: Quantum computers can compromise the security of digital
signatures by breaking the underlying public-key cryptography.
Countermeasure: Transitioning to post-quantum digital signature
algorithms that remain secure against quantum attacks.

Countermeasures
1.Post-Quantum Cryptography Adoption
Countermeasure: Transitioning to post-quantum cryptographic
algorithms that are currently being standardized to ensure the long-
term security of communication systems.

2.Quantum Key Distribution (QKD)

Countermeasure: Implementing QKD for secure key exchange, as it
is theoretically secure against attacks from quantum computers.

3.Hybrid Cryptographic Approaches

Countermeasure: Implementing hybrid cryptographic solutions that
combine classical and post-quantum algorithms to provide interim
security during the transition period.

4.Algorithm Agility

138
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Countermeasure: Designing systems with algorithm agility,

allowing easy replacement of cryptographic algorithms as the field
evolves and new standards emerge.

5.Increased Key Sizes

Countermeasure: Using larger key sizes for classical cryptographic
algorithms to increase their resistance against brute-force attacks,
including those performed by quantum computers.

6.Security Audits and Updates

Countermeasure: Regularly auditing and updating cryptographic
systems to address vulnerabilities and stay resilient against evolving
threats.

7.Education and Awareness

Countermeasure: Raising awareness among developers, system
administrators, and users about the risks of quantum attacks and the
importance of transitioning to quantum-safe cryptographic solutions.

8.Quantum-Safe Standards and Best Practices

Countermeasure: Following quantum-safe cryptographic standards
and best practices, as outlined by organizations like NIST and other
international standards bodies.

9.Quantum-Resistant Hash Functions

Countermeasure: Adopting hash functions that are believed to be
resistant to quantum attacks, ensuring the integrity of data in a post-
quantum era.

10. Collaboration and Research

Countermeasure: Collaborating with the broader cybersecurity
community, researchers, and industry stakeholders to stay informed
about the latest developments in post-quantum cryptography and to
contribute to the ongoing research and standardization efforts.

As quantum computing technology progresses, staying vigilant,

informed, and proactive in implementing quantum-resistant
cryptographic measures is crucial for maintaining the security of
sensitive information in the face of future quantum threats.

9. Industry and Research Perspectives

139
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Collaborative Efforts in Academia and Industry to Advance

Quantum Computing and Networking
Collaborative efforts between academia and industry play a crucial
role in advancing quantum computing and networking. The
interdisciplinary nature of quantum technologies requires a synergy
between theoretical research, practical implementation, and real-
world applications. Here are key aspects of collaborative efforts in
this domain:

1. Research Partnerships
1.Joint Research Projects
Collaborations between academic institutions and industry partners on
joint research projects facilitate the exploration of novel quantum
computing algorithms, quantum networking protocols, and hardware
advancements.

2.Quantum Information Science Centers

Establishing collaborative quantum information science centers where
researchers from academia and industry work together to address
fundamental questions in quantum computing and networking.

3.Funding Initiatives
Jointly funded research initiatives by both public and private entities
to support quantum research projects, enabling sustained efforts in
advancing the field.

2. Technology Development
1.Industry-Academia Labs:
Setting up collaborative labs where industry experts and academic
researchers work side by side to develop quantum hardware, software,
and networking technologies.

2.Technology Transfer Programs:

Facilitating technology transfer programs that enable the translation
of academic research findings into practical applications and products
within the quantum computing and networking industry.

3.Open Source Collaborations:

Engaging in open-source collaborations where both academia and
industry contribute to the development of quantum software tools,
algorithms, and frameworks.

3. Talent Development

140
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

1.Joint Training Programs

Collaborative efforts to design and implement training programs that
equip students with both theoretical knowledge and practical skills in
quantum computing and networking.

2.Internship and Exchange Programs

Establishing internship and exchange programs where students and
researchers move between academia and industry, gaining exposure
to diverse aspects of quantum technologies.

3.Mentorship Programs
Industry professionals serving as mentors for academic researchers
and students, providing guidance and insights into the practical
challenges and opportunities in quantum computing.

4. Standardization and Regulation

1.Collaboration on Standards
Collaborative efforts to develop and establish industry standards for
quantum computing and networking, ensuring interoperability and
compatibility across different platforms and technologies.

2.Policy and Regulation

Engaging with policymakers to provide insights into the development
of regulations that promote the responsible and secure advancement
of quantum technologies.

5. Conferences and Workshops

1.Joint Events
Organizing joint conferences, workshops, and seminars where
researchers from academia and industry can share insights, present
findings, and discuss the latest advancements in quantum computing
and networking.

2.Community Building
Building a strong community of researchers, engineers, and
professionals across academia and industry through networking
events and collaborative platforms.

6. Commercialization and Startups

1.Incubators and Accelerators

141
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Establishing incubators and accelerators that support the creation of

quantum-focused startups, providing a pathway for translating
academic research into viable commercial products.

2.Industry Investment in Research:

Industry investment in academic research projects with the potential
for practical applications, fostering an environment where
groundbreaking discoveries can be leveraged for real-world impact.

7. Global Collaborations
1.International Partnerships
Collaborative efforts on a global scale, involving research institutions
and industry players from different countries, to pool resources, share
expertise, and accelerate progress in quantum computing and
networking.

2.Joint Initiatives
Participating in joint international initiatives, such as the Quantum
Internet Alliance in Europe, to advance the development of quantum
networking technologies on a broader scale.

Collaborative efforts between academia and industry are essential for

overcoming the complex challenges associated with quantum
computing and networking. By combining the theoretical expertise of
academia with the practical insights of industry, these partnerships
contribute to the rapid advancement of quantum technologies and the
eventual realization of practical applications.

Prominent Quantum Computing Initiatives and their Contributions

Several prominent quantum computing initiatives exist, both in
academia and industry, have been actively contributing to the
development and advancement of quantum computing technologies.
These initiatives focus on a range of aspects, including quantum
hardware development, quantum algorithms, software tools, and real-
world applications. Please note that the landscape may have evolved,
and new initiatives may have emerged since then. Here are some key
initiatives and their contributions:

1. IBM Quantum
IBM Quantum is known for providing cloud-based access to quantum
computers, including IBM Quantum Hummingbird and IBM

142
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Quantum Condor. They have been actively involved in advancing

quantum hardware, software, and applications. IBM Quantum also
hosts the Quantum Open Source Foundation (QOSF), contributing to
the development of open-source quantum software.

2. Google Quantum AI
Google's Quantum AI lab is known for its development of the
Bristlecone quantum processor and, more notably, the achievement of
quantum supremacy with the Sycamore processor in 2019. Google
continues to work on improving quantum processors and exploring
applications in quantum computing.

3. Rigetti Computing
Rigetti Computing focuses on developing both quantum hardware and
software. They provide cloud access to their quantum processors and
have been actively involved in advancing the field through their
Forest software development kit (SDK) and various research
initiatives.
4. IonQ
IonQ specializes in trapped-ion quantum computing. They have made
contributions to advancing qubit coherence times and error rates.
IonQ provides access to its quantum computers through cloud
services and is actively working on scaling up the number of qubits.
5. D-Wave Systems
D-Wave is a leader in quantum annealing technology. While their
approach is different from gate-based quantum computing, D-Wave's
quantum processors have been applied to optimization problems.
They offer cloud-based access to their quantum processing units
(QPUs).
6. Microsoft Quantum Development Kit
Microsoft has been actively involved in quantum computing research
and development. They offer the Quantum Development Kit, which
includes Q#, a quantum programming language, and a quantum
simulator. Microsoft is exploring topological qubits as part of its
StationQ project.
7. Alibaba Quantum Laboratory
Alibaba's Quantum Laboratory is engaged in quantum computing
research and development. They have worked on quantum computing
algorithms and applications, and Alibaba Cloud provides access to
quantum computing services.

143
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

8. RQC (Quantum Computing Center at Rigetti)

The RQC focuses on advancing quantum computing through research
and the development of quantum hardware and software. Rigetti's
cloud-based quantum computing platform provides access to their
quantum processors.
9. Intel Quantum
Intel is actively engaged in quantum computing research and
hardware development. They are exploring superconducting qubits
and have been working on advancing the qubit coherence and control
in their quantum processors.
10. European Quantum Flagship
The European Quantum Flagship is a large-scale initiative aiming to
consolidate and expand European leadership in quantum technologies.
It involves collaboration between academia, industry, and
government. The project covers various aspects of quantum
technologies, including quantum computing, communication, and
sensing.
11. NSA's Laboratory for Physical Sciences (LPS)
The LPS has been involved in quantum computing research, focusing
on various approaches, including superconducting qubits. They
contribute to the broader quantum computing community through
research and collaboration.

12. Quantum Internet Alliance (QIA)

QIA is a European initiative that aims to develop a quantum internet
by connecting quantum processors and quantum communication
technologies. It involves several research institutions and industry
partners working on quantum networking protocols.

These initiatives represent a fraction of the global efforts in advancing

quantum computing. Many universities, research institutions, and
startups are also contributing significantly to the field. Ongoing
collaboration and knowledge sharing across these initiatives
contribute to the rapid evolution of quantum computing technologies.
It's important to stay updated on recent developments as the field
progresses rapidly.

Conclusion
Quantum computing and future networks stand at the precipice of a
transformative era, poised to revolutionize the way we approach
complex problems and interact with the world around us. This chapter
has explored the intricate dance between these two domains,

144
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

highlighting the synergies, challenges, and potential impact on

various sectors. This chapter provides a comprehensive overview of
the dynamic relationship between quantum computing and future
networks, addressing both the theoretical foundations and practical
applications that will shape the technological landscape in the coming
years.The bridge connecting quantum computing and future networks
is under construction, its completion promising a transformative
journey into a world redefined by the power of quantum information.
The journey will be filled with challenges and complexities, but the
potential rewards for scientific discovery, technological innovation,
and human progress are undoubtedly worth pursuing.

References
1. Aaronson, S. (2008). Quantum computing: A gentle introduction.
MIT Press.
2. Nielsen, M. A., & Chuang, I. L. (2000). Quantum computation
and quantum information. Cambridge University Press.
3. Griffiths, D. J., &Drašković, D. (2022). Introducing quantum
computing. Cambridge University Press.
4. Ferrie, C. (2019). Quantum computing for everyone. Simon and
Schuster.
5. Ekert, A., &Płociniczak, W. (2020). Building the quantum future.
Wiley-Blackwell.
6. Gottesman, D. (2023). Quantum computing: Progress and
prospects. Cambridge University Press.
7. Preskill, J. (2015). Lecture notes on quantum computation.
California Institute of Technology. (Free online resource)
8. Gruska, J. (2009). Quantum automata, complexity, and
algorithms. Springer.
9. Merali, Y. (2020). The world’s biggest experiment: A history of
quantum physics. Simon and Schuster.
10. Feynman, R. P. (1996). Quantum mechanics lectures: The
Feynman lectures on physics, vol. 3. Basic Books.
11. Montanaro, S. (2015). Quantum algorithms: Theory and
experiment. Springer.
12. Cho, J., &Saro, S. (2023). Introduction to quantum machine
learning. Chapman and Hall/CRC.
13. Watrous, J. (2018). The theory of quantum information
processing. Cambridge University Press.
14. Bombieri, E., de Shalit, A., &Pulmannová, I. (2017). The
quantum moment: Space, time, and reality. World Scientific.

145
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

15. Ladd, M. D., Lukin, M. D., & Monroe, C. (2020). Quantum

computing with neutral atoms. World Scientific Publishing
Company.
16. Devoret, M. H., &Schoelkopf, R. J. (2013). Superconducting
qubits: From basic principles to quantum computation.
Cambridge University Press.
17. Kitaev, A. Y. (2006). Fault-tolerant quantum computation by
anyons. Annals of Physics, 303(1), 2-30.
18. Russiello, D., & Genovese, M. (2022). The quantum internet.
Cambridge University Press.
19. Clark, C. (2020). Quantum networks: A beginner's guide.
Springer.
20. Pirandola, S., Mancini, S., Braunstein, S. L., & Lloyd, S. (2020).
Continuous-variable quantum information and quantum optics.
Cambridge University Press.
21. Van Meter, R. (2022). Quantum networking. John Wiley & Sons.
22. Kumar, K., Prasad, N., Deo, A., Khorshed, M., Prasad, M., Dutt,
A., & Ali, A. B. M. S. (2015). A survey on quantum computing
with main focus on the methods of implementation and
commercialization gaps. 2nd Asia-Pacific World Congress on
Computer Science and Engineering (APWCon CSE).
23. Seol, J., & Kim, J. (2024). Machine learning ensures quantum-
safe blockchain availability. Journal of Computer Information
Systems.
24. Dhar, S., Khare, A., Dwivedi, A. K., & Singh, R. (2024).
Securing IoT devices: A novel approach using blockchain and
quantum cryptography. Internet of Things.
25. Quantum Insider: https://thequantuminsider.com/: https://the
quantuminsider.com/
26. Quantum Computing Report: https://quantumcomputing
report.com/: https://quantumcomputingreport.com/
27. Quantum Open Source Foundation: https://www.qosf.org/
28. Google Quantum AI: https://quantumai.google/: https://quantumai
.google/
29. Microsoft Quantum: https://azure.microsoft.com/en-us/solutions/
quantum-computing:
https://azure.microsoft.com/en-us/solutions/quantum-computing
30. Microsoft Quantum website: https://azure.microsoft.com/en-us/
services/quantum/
31. IBM Quantum website: https://www.ibm.com/quantum
32. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Quantum
Information Science Program https://www.nist.gov/programs-
projects/itl-quantum-information-program

146
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Dr. Anuj Kumar Dwivedi

Department of Computer Science, Govt. VBSD Girls' College,
Jashpur Nagar, Jashpur, C.G. - 49331
Email: [email protected]

CHAPTER 11

ROLE OF WOMEN IN A SUSTAINABLE FISHERIES

SECTOR- A GLOBAL CASE STUDY PERSPECTIVE

Pushpa Warrier & Dr. Salini B. Nair

Abstract:
The role of women in the fisheries sector has traditionally been
underrepresented and undervalued, despite their significant
contributions to the sustainability and resilience of marine
ecosystems. This research paper explores the influence of women's
participation in the fisheries sector and its impact on creating
sustainable practices on a global scale. The study employs case
studies across the world to assess the extent of women's involvement
in various aspects of the fisheries value chain, from harvesting and
processing to marketing and policymaking. By analysing data from
different regions, the research identifies patterns, challenges, and
success stories related to women's participation in the fisheries sector.
147
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Furthermore, the paper investigates the socio-economic implications

of empowering women in fisheries, exploring how increased gender
inclusivity can lead to more sustainable and resilient fisheries
practices. It addresses the potential benefits of gender mainstreaming
in fisheries management policies and calls for a paradigm shift
towards recognizing and valuing the vital role of women in achieving
sustainability in the fisheries sector. The findings of this research
contribute to the ongoing discourse on gender equality in natural
resource management and provide insights that can inform policy
recommendations at local, national, and international levels.
Ultimately, the paper underscores the importance of integrating
gender perspectives into fisheries management strategies to enhance
the sector's sustainability in accordance with the Sustainability
Development Goals (SDGs).

Key words: Women, Fisheries, Sustainability, Global

Introduction:
he fisheries sector, comprising capture, cultivation,
processing, and trade of fish as well as other aquatic
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.11
organisms plays a major role in international trade, with
fish and seafood products exported and imported globally.
Fisheries are broadly classified into marine fisheries (seafood
harvesting from oceans and seas) and inland fisheries (freshwater
body activities-rivers, lakes and ponds). Sustainability in fisheries
management implies a predictable supply of fish and the economic
stability of fishing communities (those involved in the fisheries value
chain-fishers, processors, traders, marketers) and the broader seafood
industry. Despite playing decisive roles in certain aspects of the
fisheries value chain, gender stereotypes often associate fishing as a
male-dominated activity.

Sustainable fisheries management refers to the careful management

and conservation of fish stocks and aquatic ecosystems to ensure they
can continue to provide food and livelihoods for current and future
generations. It involves a combination of scientific research, policy
development, and community engagement to maintain the health and
productivity of marine and freshwater environments while supporting
the needs of human populations.

148
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Governments and international organizations implement regulations

and quotas to prevent overfishing and ensure that fishing activities are
sustainable. Recognizing the interconnectedness of marine
ecosystems, sustainable fisheries management takes into account the
broader ecosystem impacts of fishing activities. This approach
considers the relationships between target species, other marine
organisms, and environmental factors such as habitat quality and
climate change. Engaging with fishers, coastal communities,
scientists, policymakers, and other stakeholders is crucial for
developing effective fisheries management strategies. Collaborative
approaches that incorporate local knowledge and perspectives help
build consensus and promote sustainable fishing practices.

Sustainable fisheries management aims to balance the economic,

social, and environmental dimensions of fisheries to ensure the long-
term viability of marine and freshwater ecosystems and the
communities that depend on them. By adopting science-based
approaches and fostering collaboration among stakeholders, it is
possible to achieve sustainable fisheries that support both human
well-being and ecological integrity.
Research Gap
Limited research studies exist on the role of women in creating
sustainability in the fisheries sector. Although women are an integral
part of this sector, their potential in contributing to sustainable
development has not been adequately explored.

Research Questions
1. What roles do women perform in the fisheries sector?
2. How can the contributions of women be harnessed to create
sustainability in the fisheries sector?
3. What are the successful models that exist in different parts of the
world to create sustainability in the fisheries sector?

Problem Statement
Despite the substantial contributions of women to the fisheries sector,
their roles, challenges, and opportunities in fostering sustainability
remain inadequately addressed. Understanding the socio-economic
dynamics, cultural contexts, and gender-specific barriers that shape
women's participation in fisheries management is crucial for
developing inclusive policies and achieving sustainability in marine
resource management. Therefore, this research seeks to explore the
multifaceted roles of women in a sustainable fisheries sector and
identify strategies to enhance their contributions while addressing

149
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

gender disparities and promoting equitable participation in fisheries

governance and management processes.

Research Objectives
1. To identify and categorize the diverse roles that women perform
within the fisheries sector.
2. To investigate the specific contributions of women to
sustainability within the fisheries sector.
3. To examine existing models and best practices from different
regions worldwide that demonstrate successful approaches to
creating sustainability in the fisheries sector, with a particular
emphasis on the roles and involvement of women in these
models.

Methodology
This research paper presents a global perspective by analyszing case
studies from different regions to understand the diversity of women's
roles and their potential in sustainability in the fisheries sector.

Conceptual Framework and Background of the Research

Gender equality and women's empowerment in fisheries management
have gained recognition globally as critical components of sustainable
development. Several policies and institutional frameworks exist at
regional, national and international levels to address gender
disparities and promote women's involvement in fisheries
management. These policies and institutional frameworks provide
guidance and support to promote gender equality and women's
empowerment in fisheries management. However, there is still much
work to be done to ensure that these commitments are effectively
implemented and that women have equal opportunities to participate
in and benefit from fisheries activities. Ongoing efforts to mainstream
gender considerations into fisheries governance and management are
essential for achieving sustainable and equitable outcomes in the
sector.

Full spectrum sustainability and a theory of access: Integrating social

benefits into fisheries governance 2021, Marine Policy.

Citation Excerpt:
Improving governance processes are particularly important given that
research has demonstrated that effective governance is often the
biggest shortcoming in achieving sustainability.However, governance

150
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

structures and procedures can achieve equity and fairness in fisheries

management choices provided they are "done right." In order to
achieve justice and fairness in the distribution of fishing benefits, a
greater understanding of who benefits, how, where, when, and by
what methods is needed.

Citation Excerpt:
Integrating social and ecological systems through interdisciplinary
and transdisciplinary efforts can contribute to the development of
effective holistic resource management. When tackling the issues of
maritime resource management, it is commonly acknowledged that
(a) traditional disciplinary barriers must be transcended and (b)
society partners must be broadly included in decision-making
alongside academics.

The goal of the Sustainable Development Goal (SDG 5) of the United

Nations is to empower all women and girls and attain gender equality.
It highlights the necessity of ending harmful practices, violence, and
discrimination against women and girls in all fields, including the
fishing industry.

Against All Forms of Discrimination Against Women Convention

(CEDAW): A global treaty known as CEDAW, which was ratified by
the UN General Assembly in 1979, aims to end discrimination against
women and advance women's rights, particularly when it comes to
managing natural resources and fisheries.

The SSF Guidelines are voluntary guidelines aimed at securing

sustainable small-scale fisheries within the framework of eradicating
poverty and promoting food security. The SSF Guidelines, released
by the Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO) of the United
Nations, offer suggestions for incorporating gender concerns into
fisheries governance and management and acknowledge the
significance of gender equality and women's empowerment in small-
scale fisheries.

FAO's (Food and Agriculture Organisation) Gender Equality Policy:

The management of fisheries and aquaculture is one area in which the
FAO has a policy commitment to mainstreaming gender equality and
women's empowerment. A framework for incorporating gender
concerns into fisheries policies, programmes, and projects is provided
by this policy.

151
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Organisations responsible for managing fisheries resources in

different regions are known as regional fisheries management
organisations or RFMOs. Numerous RFMOs have created
programmes or policies to advance gender equality and women's
participation in fisheries management because they understand how
important it is to overcome gender inequities in fisheries
management.

National Fisheries Policies and Laws: A lot of nations have created

national fisheries laws and policies that acknowledge the value of
gender parity and women's involvement in fisheries administration.
These regulations might assist women's organisations in the industry,
increase women's access to fishery resources, and incorporate gender
issues into planning and decision-making procedures.

Women's organisations and civil society organisations: These groups

are essential in promoting gender parity and women's empowerment
in the management of fisheries. They frequently seek to increase
women's participation in decision-making processes, increase
knowledge of gender issues in the industry, and strengthen the
capacity of female fishers and fish workers.
Findings and Discussion
Women contribute greatly to both small-scale and large-scale fishing
operations worldwide, playing a variety of roles in the fisheries value
chain. These positions are distinctive to the fishing community and
are influenced by cultural, social, and economic variables. Women
work in fish processing and preparation in many fishing areas. Fish
must be cleaned, gutted, sorted, and preserved before being sold or
eaten. Certain women in certain areas are adept at preserving fish
using age-old techniques including smoking, salting, drying, or
fermenting it.

Women sell fish to wholesalers, merchants, and direct customers in

neighbourhood markets. They run market stands, run seafood booths,
and make door-to-door sales. The majority of fish traders are women
who handle deals and negotiate rates. Women are engaged in feeding,
maintaining ponds or pens, and harvesting aquatic organisms in a
variety of aquaculture industries, including prawn farming, seaweed
farming, and fish farming.

Women who live near the coast engage in mariculture, which

involves cultivating shellfish and seaweed. Local cooperatives,
community groups, and fisheries management organisations are run

152
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

by women, and they prioritise sustainable fishing methods, resource

preservation, and women's rights advocacy. In addition to providing
meals for fishermen, women also build and repair boats, supply
fishing equipment, and provide ancillary services like transporting
fish and fishermen.

Initiatives for fisheries research and development benefit from the

involvement of women, especially when it comes to topics like
community empowerment, marine conservation, and sustainable
fishing methods. They might take part in studies, data gathering
campaigns, and instructional initiatives designed to improve the
resilience and sustainability of the fishing industry. Women's
networks and organisations support laws and policies that are
inclusive of all genders in the fishing industry. In the fishing sector,
they strive to provide equal access to markets, resources, and
decision-making processes while also addressing gender disparities
and advancing women's rights. Women take part in capacity-building
programmes and training courses that are designed to improve their
knowledge, abilities, and entrepreneurial skills in the fishing industry.
These initiatives provide women the confidence to assume leadership
positions, obtain financial resources, and participate in sustainable
fishing-related livelihoods.

The contributions made by women to the value chain of fisheries are

numerous and varied. The main issues that women in the fishing
industry confront include discrimination based on gender, limited
access to resources, and lack of recognition. Encouraging women to
work in the fishing industry will guarantee that women who live in
fishing villages had equal access to information, resources, training,
and decision-making possibilities. Giving women access to loans,
technology, markets, fishing gear and recognition for their
contributions to household income, food security, and community
well-being will boost their engagement.

Encouragement is needed for women to actively participate in

cooperatives, decision-making bodies, and organisations that manage
fisheries at the local, regional, and national levels. It is essential to
fund educational and training initiatives that enhance women's
entrepreneurship, knowledge, and skill sets in the fishing industry. It
will be possible for women to seek sustainable livelihoods in fishing
villages if they have the opportunity to get technical skills, business
management expertise, and leadership training. Women in the
fisheries industry might work together and network to establish

153
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

venues for information sharing, peer education, and solidarity

amongst women fishermen, processors, traders, and activists on a
local and international level. In order to enhance women's
empowerment in the fisheries value chain, partnerships between
government agencies, non-governmental organisations (NGOs),
academia, and civil society organisations will be very beneficial.

Successful, sustainable models in the fisheries sector

Fishing is the second most prominent non-farm occupation in
Bangladesh (BBS, 1998). But historically, women have been involved
in post-harvest tasks like drying fish and manufacturing fishing gear;
fishing is a man's domain. Women fishing in interior waters is
uncommon, despite the fact that women capturing prawn fry has
become accepted in coastal areas (Sultana and Thompson, 2006).
With only 109,000 women working in the formal labour market and
121,000 engaged in "household work," over half of all women's
labour is classified as "economically inactive" due to its status as
household (and unpaid) work.(Narsey 2011).

154
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 1 explores a successful model of implementation of

community-based approaches that involve women in decision-making
processes related to fisheries resource management in the floodplain
management institutions in Bangladesh. In 1997, the Beel
Management Committee (BMC) was established. The majority of
members are seasonal fishermen who are also farmers. There have
always been a number of women on the committee; they are all from
the BanchteShekha-formed microcredit primary groups. There are ten
to fifteen female members in each major group. Members of the
group have their own sources of income and save on a regular basis.
The BMC is made up of local leaders chosen by the community and
non-governmental organisation, as well as members from various
stakeholder groups. They receive instruction in accounting,
leadership, and the management of water bodies and fisheries. The
BMC has been successful in implementing fish conservation
measures by consulting with the main parties before making.

155
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Fiji has been the focus of research regarding the role of women in the
fisheries sector in the Pacific, where traditional knowledge and
practices are gender-defined. Being gender sensitive carries with it a
risk: portraying women in ways that minimise their strengths and
ability to adapt to change (Campbell 2010). Gender mainstreaming
into the sectors has been the emphasis of gender work in government
in Fiji recently. Eight significant international accords on gender
equality and the promotion of women serve as the framework for
gender work in Fiji. To create a fisheries strategy that is more
inclusive and gender-just, there needs to be increased cross-sector
policy discussion, advocacy, and information sharing (Bidesi 2008).
"Promote gender equity, equality, social justice, and sustainable
development through the promotion of active and visible gender
mainstreaming in all sectors" is the stated goal of the Fiji National
Gender Policy, which was introduced in February 2014.

It's possible that women have less access to financial resources like
credit and loans, as well as resources like boats and fishing
equipment. Women's limited access to education may prevent them
from taking in professions requiring specialised knowledge, such as
research and fisheries management. Bias and discrimination against
women in the workplace, such as unequal compensation and few
prospects for advancement, can deter women from entering or

156
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

advancing in professions in the fishing industry. The post-harvest,

processing, and marketing contributions made by women to the
fishing industry are sometimes underestimated and receive
insufficient recognition. Women may be discouraged from
participating in activities that are seen as customarily associated with
men.

Community-based tourism, or CBT, is a method that promotes

empowerment of local communities and fair benefit distribution.
Normative principles, which presuppose that all actors have equal
access to resources, authority, voice, and aspirations, are frequently
the foundation of CBT. However, the same inequitable social systems
that encompass and define local livelihoods are also ingrained unjust
tourism-related activities. A CBT project that focuses on the social
and cultural norms that structure the fishermen's participation in
tourism fits within the livelihood strategies of women and fishermen
in a fishing hamlet outside of Senegal's Djoudj National Bird Park.
We use the actor-structure livelihood framework to show how
people's agency interacts with social and cultural norms as they look
for fulfilling livelihood options in CBT. Social conventions,
unconscious prejudices, and gender-specific cultural identities Gender
and Fisheries in Lake Victoria, East Africa: A Longitudinal Case
Study.

This long-term case study looks at how women's involvement in the

Lake Victoria region's fishing industry has changed over time. It
evaluates how policy changes, changes in the economy, and changes
in the environment affect the status and roles of women who work in
the fishing industry. Women were engaged on a seasonal basis to
gather wild fry during the early production years. However, shrimp
producers started sourcing seed stock from hatcheries to reduce the
spread of disease and improve the quality of the product after a
succession of viral and bacterial infections devastated the shrimp
sector in the late 1990s (Schwarz, 2005). This resulted in the women
who worked as wild fry collectors losing their access to the already
scarce jobs available in the aquaculture industry.

Recommendations
The majority of women's household-consumption fishing activities
are in the subsistence sector; as such, they are not counted and are
classified as "unpaid work." As a matter of fact, women work longer
hours overall than men do, put in less hours at paid employment, and
generally have less free time (UNDP 2008). In order to advance the

157
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

problems of women fishermen at a higher political level, work with

them must be in accordance with national planning priorities.
Additionally, women fishermen must be involved in or contribute to
policy level conversations with government line ministries.
Establishing roadside stands, conducting sales from community hubs,
coordinating the exchange of items and striking agreements with
other villagers or outside organisations, and establishing other sources
of revenue (ADB 2006).

Women and neighbourhood associations were acknowledged and

included as Social Capital in the Bangladesh model. The committees
convene the many beel users and make decisions about the
management of floodplain resources. The concept might be widely
modified to increase the structural social capital among stakeholders
in the communities by giving them the ability to work together to
enhance the productivity and health of their fisheries ecosystems.
Additionally, they have strengthened ties with and access to local
representatives like council members and extension workers.
Compared to Shuluar in 2002, when CBFM was first introduced,
women and men reported much higher levels of trust, unity, and
cooperation in the two beels where women play an active part.

Legal and policy frameworks may not have gender-sensitive

measures, as was mentioned in the Fiji case, which would put more
barriers in the way of women working in the fishing industry. Women
frequently possess distinctive ecological and traditional fishing
knowledge. Processing and marketing are two post-harvest tasks that
frequently include women. The fisheries industry can benefit from
greater value addition and economic diversification if women are
empowered in these jobs. In small-scale fisheries, where women
frequently hold important positions, their empowerment promotes
community-based management and lessens the strain on available
resources, both of which are essential to the fisheries' sustainability.

When a gender research topic is added, but researchers and

administrators are not educated in gender research methods, it can
lead to gender evaporation (Harrison 1997). For instance, gender was
included as a field in the interview but could not be included in a
study on small-scale fishing. The fields pertaining to women's
participation were largely left unfilled, and the research assistants
lacked training in gender research techniques (S. Sayson, personal
communication). In addition to diminishing the roles played by
women in fisheries, all of these manifestations of gender bias in

158
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

research and data may also result in a diminished comprehension of

critical elements of the marine ecosystem that women are more likely
to use and target.

Limitations
There could be restrictions on the research regarding the diversity and
representativeness of cases. Regarding the diversity and
representativeness of the case studies presented, there may be
restrictions on the research. There could be biases in the results due to
the over representation or underrepresentation of particular areas,
populations, or fishing industries. The complex sociocultural,
economic, and ecological settings that influence women's roles and
experiences in local fisheries may go unnoticed in a global case study
approach. It's possible that the results understate the intricacy and
diversity of women's participation in various fishing communities
across the globe. It's possible that the conclusions drawn from
individual case studies are not very transferable or generalizable to
other situations.

Scope for future research

Studies with a longitudinal design could monitor shifts in women's
roles and empowerment in the fishing industry over time and evaluate
the effects of legislative changes, advances in technology, and
environmental modifications. Evaluations of the value chain for
fisheries would aid in determining how benefits are distributed, power
relationships, and gender differences exist at every level of production
and processing. The research concerning the diversity and
representativeness of cases may be subject to limitations.There can be
limitations on the research in terms of the case studies'
representativeness and diversity. The over representation or under
representation of specific regions, demographics, or fishing industries
may introduce biases into the results. A global case study might
overlook the intricate societal, economic, and ecological contexts that
shape women's roles and experiences in regional fisheries.

Conclusion
Compared to the official sector, women are primarily involved in the
informal fishing industry. The cultural and limiting needs of village
life and the modern market demands, where women are involved in
the marketing and engagement in fishing, are the two main sources of
influence for women fishermen living in rural areas. Women are
involved in many aspects of the fisheries value chain, such as small-
scale fishery management, processing, marketing, and harvesting.

159
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Even though their efforts are frequently focused on the local and
community, the sustainability of marine ecosystems as a whole is
affected globally by their contributions. The fisheries industry may be
strengthened by recognising shifts in women's standing in
communities, taking into account the contemporary economy, and
making use of current connections to enhance fishing and marketing
operations.

Reference:
1. Williams, M. J. (2008). Why look at fisheries through a
gender lens? Development, 51(2), 180-185.
2. F LeManach et al.(2012) Unreported fishing, hungry people
and political turmoil: the recipe for a food security crisis in
Madagascar?Mar Policy.
3. M. Zhao et al. (2005) Gender, fisheries and developmentMar
Policy.
4. E. Bennett (2013) Women as visible and invisible workers in
fisheries: a case study of Northern EnglandMar Policy.
5. JA. Rubinoff(1999) Fishing for status: impact of development
on Goa’s fisherwomenWomen’s Stud Int Forum.
6. Parvin Sultana, Paul Thompson (2008) Gender and local
floodplain management institutions: a case study from Flood
Hazard Research Centre, Middlesex University, Enfield, UK.
7. AN Sene-Harper, L Duffy, B Sarr (2021): Women,
Fishermen, and Community-Based Tourism at Djoudj Bird
National Park, Senegal: An application of the actor-structure
livelihood framework.

Pushpa Warrier
Research Scholar-Kerala University of Fisheries and Ocean Studies,
Kochi, Kerala
Mob.No. 9562385228, Email: [email protected]
Dr. Salini B. Nair
Associate Professor-Holy Grace Academy of Management Studies,
Mala, Kerala
Mob.No. 9633708488, Email: [email protected]

160
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 12

DISASTER MANAGEMENT THROUGH HAZARD

ZONATION IN SOUTH 24 PARGANAS

Rituparna Hajra

Abstract:
South 24 Parganas, West Bengal's largest district, hosts 81 lakh
residents and diverse flora and fauna. The Sundarbans and riverine
blocks face constant risks from cyclones, tidal surges, and floods due
to geographic factors. Floods, exacerbated by weakened natural
levees during cyclones, pose severe threats, particularly in coastal
regions. Increased cyclone frequency in the Bay of Bengal heightens
risks, causing material losses, primarily to agriculture due to saline
water inundation. It is vital to move people to safe shelters during the
flooding in order to ensure safety and save lives when people's homes
are submerged due to flooding. Many of these evacuees rely on
disaster/ evacuation shelters as temporary housing, especiallythe
elderly or lower income groups. The purpose of this study is twofold.
One goal is to identify the South 24 Parganas' major hazard-prone
areas, including flood, cyclone, and riverine/tidal flood zones. These
zonation maps have been prepared in an interactive GIS platform.
Due to the dearth of sturdy, tall structures that can serve as shelters
during major catastrophes, many hazard-affected areas frequently
experience shelter shortages. Another purpose is to determine the
feasibility of a site for existing flood shelters and to identify the
absence of disaster shelters where they are needed. The study has
been used data from District Disaster Report 2022 to prepare the map
of disaster shelters. It has been found that the disaster shelters are
only available in the eight Blocks of this district's southernmost half
by comparing the hazard-prone map and disaster shelter map.
Therefore, it may be claimed that there are not sufficient safe shelters
now in place to accommodate all of the district's disaster-affected
residents, especially in its northern portion. Additionally, these
disaster shelters' accessibility is frequently hampered by poor road
connectivity. The local government would benefit from this study's

161
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

hazard zonation map and disaster shelter location map in order to help
reduce flood catastrophe risk and plan for and build disaster shelters.

Key words: Disaster Shelter; Hazard Zonation Map; Cyclone; Flood;

Inundation
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.12
Introduction:
outh 24 Parganas is a district located in the southern part
of West Bengal, India. It is one of the largest districts in
the state, both in terms of area and population. South 24
Parganas is primarily situated in the Gangetic delta
region, which is characterized by its marshy and alluvial plains. South
24 Parganas has a significant population, mainly comprising of rural
communities. The district is home to people from various ethnic,
linguistic, and religious backgrounds. The majority of the population
consists of Bengali-speaking communities, with Hindus being the
predominant religious group. South 24 Parganas attracts tourists due
to its proximity to Kolkata and the Sundarbans. Visitors can explore
the natural beauty of the mangrove forests, take boat rides in the
rivers, and witness diverse wildlife. The region's cultural heritage and
historical sites also offer tourism opportunities. The district has a
diverse landscape, including coastal areas, mangrove forests, and
agricultural fields. It shares borders with Kolkata (the capital city of
West Bengal) and the Sundarbans mangrove forest. InSouth 24
Parganas district in West Bengal, India, faces certain locational
disadvantages that impact its development and well-being. Being
located along the Bay of Bengal, South 24 Parganas is highly
susceptible to coastal disasters, such as cyclones, storm surges, and
tidal waves. These events often lead to significant damage to
infrastructure, loss of livelihoods, and displacement of communities.
The district's geographical location, with its vast marshy and deltaic
terrain, presents challenges in terms of connectivity and accessibility.
Lack of proper road infrastructure and transportation facilities hinder
smooth movement within and outside the region, resulting in isolation
and limited access to services and markets. The district has poor
drainage systems, and during heavy rainfall or cyclones, waterlogging
becomes a significant problem. This degrades the quality of
infrastructure, affects agriculture, and leads to health hazards for the
population. The region's low-lying coastal areas are prone to salinity
intrusion, which adversely affects agriculture. The fertility of
agricultural land is affected due to saline water intrusion, reducing
crop productivity and posing challenges for farmers. Addressing these
locational disadvantages requires a comprehensive approach, such as

162
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

improving infrastructure, enhancing connectivity, strengthening

disaster management systems, promoting sustainable agriculture
practices, and attracting investments for industrial development. It is
crucial to prioritize these aspects to mitigate the adverse impact of the
locational disadvantages faced by South 24 Parganas district. Disaster
management is required in South 24 Parganas to protect the lives and
livelihoods of the population, mitigate the damages caused by natural
disasters, and promote resilience and sustainable development in the
district.

The requirement of hazard zonation through GIS (Geographic

Information System) is crucial for effective hazard assessment,
management, and response. It allows for the identification, analysis,
and visualization of hazardous areas based on various parameters
such as topography, land use, geology, hydrology, and
infrastructure.The preparation of hazards zonation mapping, which
provides crucial inputs for analysing the evolution of the hazard-
prone area and the severity of the danger, requires spatial information
about extreme occurrences.GIS mapping and image-based earth
observation techniques are useful for hazard analysis and real- time
mapping

Here are some specific requirements of hazard zonation through

GIS:
Hazard Identification: GIS helps in identifying and locating various
types of hazards such as earthquakes, floods, landslides, wildfires,
and industrial accidents. By analyzing and overlaying different data
layers, GIS can identify areas prone to specific hazards.

Hazard Mapping: GIS enables the creation of hazard maps that depict
the spatial distribution and intensity of different hazards. These maps
help in identifying high-risk areas and determining appropriate land-
use planning and development regulations.

Risk Assessment: GIS can integrate various data sources to assess the
potential impact of hazards on infrastructure, environmental
resources, and human settlements. It helps in estimating the
vulnerability of specific regions and populations to different hazards,
aiding in prioritizing mitigation measures.

Emergency Planning and Response: GIS provides real-time data

visualization and analysis, enabling emergency management agencies
to identify and respond to hazards quickly. It helps in identifying

163
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

evacuation routes, establishing temporary shelters, and coordinating

resources during emergencies.

Monitoring and Early Warning Systems: GIS facilitates the

integration of sensor data, satellite imagery, and weather forecasts to
monitor hazards in real-time. It helps in setting up early warning
systems that can provide timely alerts to at-risk populations and
initiate proactive mitigation measures.

Communication and Public Awareness: GIS-based hazard zonation

maps and models can be easily understood and communicated to
policymakers, public officials, and the general public. It aids in
raising awareness about potential hazards and helps in making
informed decisions regarding development and disaster preparedness.
Overall, the requirement of hazard zonation through GIS is essential
for identifying and mitigating potential risks, enhancing emergency
response capabilities, and promoting sustainable development in
hazard-prone areas.

To mitigate the impact of these natural disasters, it is essential to have

proper disaster management plans, early warning systems, and
infrastructure resilience measures in place. Local authorities and
communities should also be educated about preparedness and
response strategies to minimize the loss of life and property during
such events.With accurate mapping of risk-prone areas and well-
equipped disaster management from the relevant authorities, the
impact of risks can be reduced.

It is also vital to move people to safe shelters during the flooding in

order to ensure safety and save lives when people's homes are
submerged due to flooding. Many of these evacuees rely on disaster/
evacuation shelters as temporary housing, especially the elderly or
lower income groups.There are very few designated disaster shelters
in South 24 Parganas. The identification of suitable places for
shelters and the planning and prioritisation of shelter construction are
crucial for disaster risk reduction.

Literature Review:
Chakraborty et al. (2020) assessed the existing disaster management
plans, policies, and strategies in South 24 Parganas and evaluated
their effectiveness. It also analyzed the level of preparedness,
response, and recovery mechanisms in place during different
disasters. The researchers examined the coordination among various

164
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

stakeholders, including government agencies, NGOs, and community-

based organizations, and identified areas where improvements are
needed. Saha (2019) highlighted the challenges faced in disaster
management in the district. These challenges include inadequate
infrastructure, lack of awareness and preparedness among the local
population, and limited resources for post-disaster recovery. They
also discuss the governance issues and coordination among different
stakeholders in disaster management. Hazra (2018) examined
examine the effectiveness of the disaster management strategies
employed during the Aila cyclone, identify the challenges faced in the
implementation of these strategies, and suggest improvements for
future disaster management policies. The study conducted by Mitra
(2017) highlighted the challenges and limitations faced in disaster
management, including inadequate infrastructure, lack of awareness
and training among the local population, and limited resources.
Additionally, it explored the role of community participation and
resilience in disaster mitigation and recovery. Paul et al. (2016)
highlighted various strengths and weaknesses of the disaster
management measures in the South 24 Parganas district. The study
identified gaps in preparedness, response, and recovery efforts. It also
noted the importance of incorporating local community participation
and cooperation to enhance disaster resilience. Roy (2015) examined
various strategies and initiatives undertaken in the aftermath of
Cyclone Aila. It discussed the importance of early warning systems,
creation of cyclone shelters, and capacity building of local
stakeholders. The article also highlights the role of non-governmental
organizations (NGOs) in providing relief and rehabilitation support.
Das and Dasgupta (2014) revealed that the coastal communities in the
district face multiple vulnerabilities, including cyclones, sea-level
rise, flooding, erosion, and lack of access to basic amenities. These
vulnerabilities often exacerbate existing socio-economic disparities
and lead to further marginalization of the communities. Mandal and
Bhattacharya (2013) contributed to the field of disaster management
and risk reduction by showcasing the utility of geo-informatics in
assessing and understanding disaster risk, with the potential to inform
future disaster management initiatives in similar regions. Chatterjee
and Ghosh (2012) assessed the effectiveness of these initiatives and
their impact on the community's ability to cope with future disasters.
It utilizes a combination of primary and secondary data sources,
including interviews with local authorities, community leaders, and
affected individuals.

Objective of the study:

165
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

The main objectives of the study are:

• To identify the South 24 Parganas' major hazard-prone areas,
including flood, cyclone, and riverine/tidal inundation zones
• To identify the multi-hazard prone areas
• To estimate block level vulnerability based on hazard and
population density
• To show the spatial concentration of the disaster shelters
• To prepare map of disaster shelter accessibility and service
regions
• To identify the regions where there are scarcity of disaster
shelters
• To offer a number of concrete policy recommendations to reduce
vulnerability to hazards and to increase the number of shelters.

Study area and natural hazards in this study area:

South 24 Parganas is a district located in the Indian state of West
Bengal. It is situated in the southern part of the state, bordering the
Bay of Bengal to the south. The district spans from approximately
22.37°N to 22.9°N latitude and 88.08°E to 89.52°E longitude. The
map of the study area is depicted in Figure 1. The district has 5 sub
divisions and 29 blocks consisting of 310 Gram Panchayats and 7
Municipalities.

Figure 1: Map of the Study area

South 24 Parganas, located in the state of West Bengal, India, is

vulnerable to various natural disasters. Here are some of the
significant natural hazards that South 24 Parganas can experience:
Cyclones: South 24 Parganas district is prone to cyclones due to its
coastal location along the Bay of Bengal. Cyclones likeSidr in 2007,
Nargis in 2008, Bijli in April, 2009, Aila in 2009 and Amphan in
2020 have severely impacted the district, causing extensive damage to
infrastructure, crops, and livelihoods.Cyclone Amphan alone
damaged over 13.2 billion USD in West Bengal (Disaster Report
2022). Severe storm damages rural house structure specifically roof

166
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

material; associated storm surges lead to saline water inundation and

further crop failure (Hajra and Gupta 2022, Hajra and Ghosh 2018)
Floods: The district is also prone to floods due to heavy rainfall and
the overflowing of rivers like the Ganges, Matla, Bidyadhari, and
Saraswati. Flooding can cause significant damage to agricultural land,
displacement of people, and disruption of essential services.Coastal
flooding is extremely severe in 7 out of 13 blocks in Sundarban area
falling under South 24 Parganas (Disaster Report 2022).

Storm Surge: The coastal areas of South 24 Parganas are vulnerable

to storm surges caused by cyclones. A storm surge is a rise in
seawater level due to the combination of low atmospheric pressure
and strong onshore winds. Storm surges can cause widespread
inundation and damage to coastal communities.Sea level rise during
1990 to 2000: 3.14 mm/year (Hazra et al. 2002). Patharpratima,
Kultali, Basanti, Gosaba are reported to be the most vulnerable
Blocks due to inundation in South 24 Parganas (Hazra et al. 2014).

Drought: Although less frequent, droughts can occur in South 24

Parganas. Insufficient rainfall during the monsoon season can lead to
water scarcity, affecting agricultural production and livelihoods.

Heatwaves: Like many other regions in India, South 24 Parganas can

experience heatwaves during the summer months. High temperatures
coupled with humidity can have adverse effects on human health and
agriculture.The temperature increase rate has been reported about
0.019˚c /year with a projected 1 ˚C rise by the year 2050 (Hazra et al.
2002).

Data and Methods:

The required data have been collected from District Disaster Report
2022, Government of West Bengal. The necessary hazard analysis
including mapping has been done in GIS platform using Q-GIS 3.10.
Preparation mouza/block level map; delineating the cyclone, flood
and inundated regions within the map; superimposition of these
hazards zones to get multi hazards map have been done. Accessible
areas of the shelters have been marked off by 3 km buffer zone The
service region of these shelters have been estimated using dissolve,
union, overlap analysis.

Result and Discussion:

Various maps have been prepared based on the available data. The
results are shown below.

167
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 2: Cyclone prone areas of South 24 Parganas

It is clear from Figure 2 that most cyclone affectedareas in South 24

Parganas are Sagar, Kakdwip, Namkhana, Kultali, Gosaba, Basanti;
riverside and coastal regions.

Figure 3: Flood prone areas of South 24 Parganas

168
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 3 shows that most flood affected areas in South 24 Parganas

areSagar, Namkhana, Patharpratima, Kultali, Gosaba, Basanti, parts
of Diamond Harbour and Bhangar.

Figure 4: Innundation prone areas of South 24 Parganas

Most inundation prone areas of South 24 Parganas are Sagar,

Namkhana, Patharpratima, Mathurapur II, Kultali,Gosaba, Basanti,
parts of Diamond Harbour, Bhangar I&II and Canning II (Figure 4).

Figure 5: Multi Hazard Zonation of South 24 Parganas

169
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 5 indicates that the southern Blocks of the District, and Blocks
along Hooghly River suffered from the all three major hazards-
cyclone, flood and inundation. The flood affected areas being low
lying parts also get affected by inundation except Bhangar II,
Bishnupur I & II, Mathuraput etc. Cyclone affected regions are
greater in number than the other two hazards.Table 1 depicts the multi
hazard areas of South 24 Parganas based on number of hazards.

Table 1: Multi-hazard areas of South 24 Parganas

Despite being exposed to two to three risks, the blocks like Falta,
Budge I & II, ThakurpukurMaheshtala less vulnerable to hazards.
This can be said that the study area is very much hazard prone
region.A composite vulnerable map has been drawn and it is shown in
Figure 6.

Figure 6: Composite Vulnerable map of South 24 Parganas

170
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Norther part of the district having very high to high population

density – low to moderately high hazard vulnerability. Southern part
of the district having low to moderate population density – high to
severe hazard vulnerability. Very high densely populated regions with
low to moderate and moderate to high vulnerability to hazard have no
permanent disaster shelters like Budge Budge I&II, Mathurapur I&II.
Disaster shelters are strong elevated structures that can be used by
local residents for refuge during an extreme weather event. Not only
does shelter give evacuees a place to stay, but it also acts as a
distributor of goods for people staying in their homes in the nearby
affected area (UNEP 2017).

Figure 7: Location of disaster shelters of South 24 Parganas

Total 115 multipurpose disaster shelter are established in South 24

Parganas (Disaster Report, 2022). All the shelters are distributed
within eight Blocks of the south of this District. The rest part of the
district still lacks Government provided permanent shelters (Figure
7). Disaster accessibility map has been shown in Figure 8.

171
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 8: Disaster Shelter Accessibility Map

3 km buffered zone from each shelter has been used to identify the
proximity regions from where people can access the shelter during
hazard events.

Figure 9: Service area of Disaster shelters

Geoprocessing techniques has been used to show the service area of

these Govt. provided disaster shelters.Map in Figure 9 shows that

172
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

norther part of the district has 0% shelter coverage area.10% area

covered in Kulpi, Jaynagar I, Canning II; and 10%-40% area is
covered in Mathurapur I, Canning I. The southern block has more
than 40% to 100% area covered by Sagar, Namkhana, Basanti etc.

Conclusion and Recommendation:

The study shows that coastal and riverside areas like Sagar, Kakdwip,
Namkhana, Gosaba, Basanti, DiamonHarbourare mostly cyclone
affected. Low lying Blocks near coast and along the Hooghly river
including Sagar, Patharpratima, Kultali, Basalti, Gosaba, Canning,
riverside parts of Diamond experienced both flood and inundation;
Bhangar II and Bishnupur Block affected by inundation might be
attributed to insufficient sewerage system. Multi hazard zonation
mapping shows that 52% of the blocks of South 24 Parganas fall
under three hazards zone; this district is highly vulnerable to cyclone,
flood and inundation. Vulnerability Mapping based on the affected
area percentage shows that hazard number and affected areal
percentage differ each other; change the vulnerability level of blocks
like Falta, Budge Budge I&II, Magrahat I&II.

Comparison of population density and hazard vulnerability found that

highly dense with low to moderate to high vulnerability blocks have
no permanent disaster shelters including Magrahati I &II, Budge
Budge I & II, Bhangar I & II, Canning II. Permanent multi purpose
disaster shelters provided by Government are concentrated only
within 8 blocks of the south. Rest part of the district lacks in disaster
preparedness, proper evacuation methods. Buffer mapping of disaster
shelters shows 3 km proximity radius for accessing the shelter by
local residents Shelter proximity mapping and service region
delineation find out that there are not sufficient safe shelters now in
place to accommodate all of the district's disaster-affected residents,
especially in its northern portion.

The following policies can be recommended as follows.

• The government must pay attention to the multiple-hazard zones,
such as Gosaba, Basanti, Sagar, Namkhana, and Kakdwip, in
order to lower the probability of disaster
• In the cyclone prone areas finished materials are preferable for
roof to stabilize and protect the roof form storm
• In the low lying flood and inundation prone regions height of the
floor should maintain above average inundation level

173
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

• Establishment of flood shelters, maintenance of embankment,

development of wireless networks, and improvement of warning
system could reduce the disaster risk
• Community-based natural hazard management plans are required
since communities eventually face the repercussions of natural
disasters.
• Blocks such as Kulpi, Canning, Mandirbazar, Diamond Harbour
experience three hazards (cyclone, flood, inundation), but there
are no permanent disaster shelter established there; this needs
attention of the authority
• It's crucial to construct cyclone shelters as near as feasible to the
area's community habitat and to strengthen the already-existing
shelters for people and livestock
• Improve communication system, because in most of the cases
local people are unable to reach the cyclone shelters in disastrous
situations is another prerequisite condition of disaster
management
• Participation of local people in disaster management training and
mobilisation of local communities to establish disaster
management teams may be a better planning technique than
stand-alone courses administered by authorities.

Limitations of the study:

This study follows the data available from the secondary sources;
ground level survey could be useful for the reality check. Preparation
of mouza level map and delineation of hazard prone areas mouza wise
have been done in this study to prepare hazard zonation map using
data from Disaster Report 2022. These zonation can be done using
more details information such as terrain elevation, rainfall, river
network, frequency and track of cyclones in future work. In addition
analysis of satellite images would be helpful to get real- time maps.

References
1. Chakraborty, J and Saha, S. (2020). A Study on Disaster
Mitigation and Management in South 24 Parganas District of
West Bengal, India. International Journal of Current Research and
Review, Vol. 12, No. 3, pp. 33-40.
2. Chatterjee, A and Ghosh, R. (2012) Community-Based Disaster
Management in South 24 Parganas District: A Case Study of
Cyclone Aila. Disaster Management Review, Vol. 9, No. 4, pp.
112-126.
3. Das, P and Dasgupta, P. (2014). Understanding the
Vulnerabilities and Coping Mechanisms of Coastal Communities

174
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

in South 24 Parganas District. Journal of Disaster Resilience and

Recovery, Vol. 10, No. 1, pp. 89-105.
4. Disaster Report (2022). District Disaster Management Plan. South
24 Parganas. Govt. of West Bengal
5. Hajra R and Gupta S K. (2022). Change in housing structure to
cope with natural hazards: A statistical analysis from
indiansundarban. Global Journal of Human Social Sciences
(B) ; 22 (2); 70-78
6. Hajra, R. and Ghosh, T. (2018). Agricultural productivity,
household poverty and migration in the Indian Sundarban
Delta. Elementa: Science of the Anthropocene, 6
7. Hajra, R., Szabo, S., Tessler, Z., Ghosh, T., Matthews, Z.,
andFoufoula-Georgiou, E. (2017). Unravelling the association
between the impact of natural hazards and household poverty:
evidence from the Indian Sundarban delta. Sustainability
Science, 12, 453-464
8. Hazra, S. (2018). Disaster Management Policy and Practices in
South 24 Parganas: A Case Study of Aila Cyclone. Asian Journal
of Research in Social Sciences and Humanities, Vol. 8, No. 3, pp.
287-299.
9. Hazra, S., Das, I., Samanta, K., and Bhadra, T. (2014). Impact of
climate change in Sundarban Area West Bengal, India. School of
Oceanographic Studies. . Earth Science and Climate Book- 9326/
17.02.00. Report submitted to Caritus India, SCiAF
10. Hazra, S., Ghosh, T., DasGupta, R., and Sen, G. (2002). Sea
Level and associated changes in the Sundarbans, Science and
Culture, 68 (9-12), 309-321. (ISSN 0036-8156)
11. Mandal, S and Bhattacharya, S. (2013). Assessment of Disaster
Risk in South 24 Parganas District: A Geoinformatics Approach.
International Journal of Disaster Management and Risk
Reduction, Vol. 7, No. 2, pp. 55-68.
12. Mitra, D. (2017) Disaster Preparedness and Management in South
24 Parganas: A Case Study of Sundarbans. Journal of Disaster
Research and Management, Vol.1, No.2, pp. 45-57.
13. Paul, A and Majumdar, S. (2016). Disaster Management
Measures in South 24 Parganas District: An Evaluation. Indian
Journal of Public Administration, Vol. 62, No. 4, pp. 728-743.
14. Roy, P. (2015). Disaster Risk Reduction in South 24 Parganas
District: Lessons from Cyclone Aila. Journal of Disaster Studies
and Management, Vol. 3, No. 1, pp. 23-35.
15. Saha, S. (2019). Disaster Management in South 24 Parganas
District: A Geographical Perspective. Journal of Geography and
Regional Planning, Vol. 12, No. 6, pp. 117-128.

175
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

16. UNEP (2017). Climate change adaptation technologies for water:

a practitioner’s guide to adaptation technologies for increased
water sector resilience. UN Climate Technology Centre &
Network

Rituparna Hajra
Department of Geography, Polba Mahavidyalaya, Hooghly, West
Bengal, India
Email : [email protected]

176
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 13

ENTREPRENEURSHIP: A SOCIOLOGICAL
APPROACH

Dr. Harjeet Kaur Virk

Abstract:
Although the sociology of entrepreneurship is a rapidly expanding
topic of study, its academic contribution has come under fire for being
inconsistent and detached from the mainstream of sociology. This
article aims to analyse the theoretical underpinnings of the topic, trace
its historical development, and place the sociology of
entrepreneurship in the context of the larger sociological canon. The
sociology of entrepreneurship mainly emphasizedupon structure, in
which new ventures developed and discovering the variables which
explain the variations in entrepreneurship between individuals,
groups, cities and regions.

Key words: sociological, psychological, economical and historical

Introduction:
he social setting, method, and outcomes of entrepreneurial
action are all examined by the sociology of
entrepreneurship. Within this perspective,
‘‘entrepreneurship’’ can be construed either narrowly as
purposive action leading to the creation of new formal organizations,
or more broadly as any effort to introduce durable innovations in
routines, technologies, organizational forms, or social institutions.
Research in the sociology of entrepreneurship tends to differ from
related work in industrial psychology and economics in three basic
respects. First, it often targets levels of analysis beyond the individual
entrepreneur, addressing the role played by interpersonal networks,
organizational structure, population, and field-level processes, as well
as the broader institutional environment. Second, it balances the
common emphasis on material aspects of venture formation (e.g.

177

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.13
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

market conditions and financing) with attention to the symbolic and

cultural dimension of entrepreneurial activity. Third, it seeks to
understand entrepreneurship in a diverse set of contexts, including
arenas – such as science, health care, and the fine arts – that tend to
elude simple market-based account. Therefore, the main focus of
entrepreneurial sociology was on how society's organizational
framework gave rise to entrepreneurs.

Theoretical Framework of the Sociology of Entrepreneurship

According to famous sociologist Emile Durkheim in his major work
‘The Rules of Sociological Method based upon social facts. He
highlighted that social facts were mainly the things that were over and
above the individual and exerted a particular force on the individual
and exerted a particular force on the individual. These basically
include norms, values, expectations and education. Social facts are
outside of the individual and may be thought of rather like the gravity,
no one ever seen gravity but theory has that the force certainly has an
effect. Similarly norms and expectations cannot be explained in the
laboratory but can be assessed from theoretical point of view. Thus,
the sociology of entrepreneurship provides a framework to understand
other variables critical to parsing entrepreneurial outcomes. The
outcomes are moderated by macro factors such as the local economic
structure and individual level attributes of the people involved.
Sociology of entrepreneurship focussed upon:
1) The development of business enclaves in cities
2) The entrepreneurial process with an emphasis on funding the
enterprises
3) The maintenances of such business enclaves over future
generations

Generally, early sociologists studied the development of new ventures

and entrepreneurships and there was absence of psychological
variables and importance was only given to text and structure.
According to George Simmel, entrepreneurs were emerging from
groups of people who had been excluded opportunities in established
societies. The basic notion is that in some societies, members of
certain racial and ethnic minorities have come to occupy middle
position in the social structure rather at the bottom of the economic
structure. These ‘middle-man minorities” will not be found at the
bottom of the economic scale, but utilize business enterprise to create
wealth and economic stability. These groups are forced into the
middleman position, from a historical point of view, because of
discrimination based on religion, race and ethnicity. Thus,

178
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

entrepreneurs were strangers according to simmel, and were denied

by opportunities existed in established societies and became catalysts
for the entrepreneurial development in the western world.

Entrepreneurship and Race

In the theory of sociology of entrepreneurship it was found that
racism was considered as major variable for enhancing discrimination
and denial of opportunities. In Entrepreneurship and Self-Help among
black Americans, highlighted within the context of black America
through entrepreneurship have enjoyed a degree of economic
stability and were also responsible for educating the first four
generations of college graduates. There are various studies on
immigrant entrepreneurship which indicated that entrepreneurial
mode of adjustment among black Americans can be traced from the
inception of the country. The entrepreneurship process, simply means
the interrelationships between starts-up, fund raising and general
success of black enterprises have adopted the same formula as other
enterprises in America. In simple words, the power of Simmel’s
predictive paradigm can be seen as ethnic European and racially
different ethnic groups, entered America for economic stability.

Entrepreneurship and Ethnicity

Ethnic entrepreneurship simply means connections based upon
common attributes or traits. It is basically those connections that
provide the infrastructure for the identification of opportunities and
the exchange of resources. Generally, ethnic entrepreneur are more
likely to live in enclave among people of similar backgrounds and
develop strong bonds of trust and solidarity with their neighbours.
The conceptualization of ethnicity identified on the basis of surname,
to recognize actual theoretical dimensions.

Entrepreneurship and Religion

Max Weber noted that the growth of capitalist economic activity
within many cultures in his ethnic essay "The Protestant Ethic and
Spirit of Capitalism." The emergence of capitalist economic activity
among several religiously distinct groups captivated Weber greatly. In
general, Weber's primary research was based on religious concepts.
The initial studies of economic behaviour were conducted within the
framework of religion. Religion and economics have always been
linked, and this is now seen as entrepreneurial behaviour. He noted
that "the protagonist felt that his entrepreneurial behaviour is
primarily derived from his belief that if a person does not manage his
own destiny, someone else will manage it for him." The protagonist

179
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

also felt that his business philosophy is substantially founded on his

Islamic religion. Essentially, their focus is on investigating the ways
in which a religious subculture's resources have been employed to
both encourage and constrain commercial endeavours. He noted that
"the protagonist felt that his entrepreneurial behaviour is primarily
derived from his belief that if a person does not manage his own
destiny, someone else will manage it for him." The protagonist also
felt that his business philosophy is substantially founded on his
Islamic religion. Essentially, their focus is on investigating the ways
in which a religious subculture's resources have been employed to
both encourage and constrain commercial endeavours.

The boundaries of the Amish and Mennonites' economic behaviour

were determined by their religious beliefs. Since Amish life
necessitates that families stay geographically close to one another,
micro businesses emerged even though there was no longer any land
available for cultivation. Amish culture restricted the kinds of
enterprises that could be established and the ways in which they could
function due to religious bans on several forms of technology. These
businesses are frequently in demand for their premium pricing and are
well-known for their superior craftsmanship. As a result, Weber
distinguishes between economic traditionalism and acquisition; these
companies firmly belong in the former category. To put it plainly, a
person's religious beliefs substantially influence what constitutes
success in the economy.

Entrepreneurship Sex/ Gender

Economic success in sociology is also predicated on studies of
entrepreneurship based on gender. It has generally been noted that
women entrepreneurs are seen as belonging to the same gender. The
term "gender" describes characteristics or attributes that are socially
produced and assigned to a specific sex. Numerous research on
female entrepreneurs have essentially shown that the number of
women participating in the entrepreneurial economy is rising.Studies
that primarily look into the differences between female and male
entrepreneurs. Achieving financial success in entrepreneurship is
measured by the quantity of money made or the number of people
working for various businesses. Numerous research have provided an
explanation for why one or more women hold at least 50% of
privately held businesses in the United States.

Put simply, women-owned businesses employ more women and

hence have higher revenues. The Diana Project uses a model in its

180
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

research agenda on women and growth businesses that specifically

includes both internal and external factors. This project swiftly
expanded internationally and had two clear goals:
1. First and foremost, to offer a venue for creating, carrying out, and
disseminating an international research agenda.
2. The second goal is to establish a global network of academics
committed to providing answers to inquiries concerning female
entrepreneurs and growth-oriented businesses.

As a result, the Diana research identifies specific variations in growth

routes. Studies on gender disparities that continue to examine the
context and structure of these inequalities are still necessary. To put it
simply, these global initiatives are viewing entrepreneurship as a way
to drive economic growth.

Conclusion
Understanding entrepreneurship in the modern world requires a
thorough understanding of theoretical methods in the sociology of
entrepreneurship. Generally speaking, techniques and/or regulations
that work well in one group or setting might not translate well to
another. Community attachment serves as a source of opportunities
and resources in the context of ethnic entrepreneurship. Therefore,
one strategy to establish policies and practices that have a higher
chance of success is to analyse the variance in entrepreneurial
behaviors and patterns that may be attributed to group membership.

References:
1. M .Weber, The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism
(London: Unwin Hyman, 1930)
2. G. Simmel, “The Strangers” in The Sociology of George Simmel
ed. K.Wolf (Glencoe, IL:Free Press, 1950)
3. Emile Durkheim, The Rules of Sociological Method, ed. with an
introduction by Steven Lukes, trans. by W.D. Halls. (New York:
Free Press, 1982, 1895)
4. Diana Project, International Women’s Entrepreneurship:
Research on the Growth of Women Owned Business, eds. C.G.
Brush et.al (Cheltenham, UK: Edward F. Elgar,2006).

Dr. Harjeet Kaur Virk

Assistant Professor in Commerce, Sri Guru Gobind Singh College,
Sector-26, Chandigarh

181
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Mobile: 9915086654, Email: [email protected]

CHAPTER 14

OPTIMAL NUMERICAL INTEGRATION OF

ARBITRARY FUNCTION BY BLOCK PULSE
WAVELET METHOD

K.T. Shivaram

Abstract:
This paper presents, numerical approximation of definite integrals by
wavelet based computational Block – Pulse function method (BPFs),
a new approach is compared with the Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s,
Triangular, Neural network methods, illustrative examples are
implemented by Maple software.

Key words: Numerical Integration, Definite integrals, Block –Pulse

functions, Wavelets.

Introduction:
umerical integration approach values significantly various
disciplines of science and engineering, finding area,
length, mass, momentum, velocity, acceleration, arc
length, center of mass, force, pressure, total work done.
etc., In recent years, wavelet based integration are more popular,
which is easy to compute and enrich the accuracy, there are few
basics methods to integrate the functions by numerical methods,
newtons – cotes method [1], Gaussian Quadrature rule [2], Romberg’s
integration method [3], Spline basis neural network method [4],
triangle basis neural network [5], Haar wavelet method [6], etc., In
this paper, we use Block- Pulse function method to evaluate definite
integrals problems numerically, we compare the results of numerical
integration based on block pulse method with the other numerical
methods like trapezoidal, Simpsons, triangular basis, neural network

182
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

method, in the present method the results are more accurate in order
to increases the order of N.

The paper organized as follows, In section 1. we propose formula for

solving definite integrals problems based on wavelet type Block –
Pulse function, In section 2. we comparethe numerical examples to
confirm our analysisbased on present method
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.14

Block – Pulse Functions

Fig.1. Set of Block – pulse function

The Block pulse function is defined in the interval [0, T) as follows

∅i (t )= 1 ih≤ t< ( i+1 ) h

{
0 otherwise
(1)

The function f(t) is integrable in the interval [0, T) and it can be

approximated as

f f (t )
Where i is the m -segment piecewise approximation of
over [0, T)

183
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

tk
to calculate the coefficients to consider the nodal points as

m
f ( t k ) =∑ f i ∅i ( t k ) =f k ,k =1,2,3 ,−−−, m
i=1
The above expression can be rewritten as

In generally

(2)
Computed eqn. (2) of various order m by using MAPLE -13 software,
we illustrate block – pulse function method for the integral of the

functions in the interval [0 ,2]

Numerical Examples:
We have compared the numerical results obtained using the wavelet-
based Block pulse method with that of exact value of various order m
are tabulated in table.1 and also plotted relative error versus order m
in figure 1, if order m increases relative error decreases.

Table I.
2 4
x x
f ( x) √ 1+ x2 1 sinx e
x

1+ x
Exact value [4] 2.667 6.400 2.958 1.099 1.416 6.389
Trapezoidal 4.000 6.000 3.326 1.333 0.909 8.389
rule [4]
Simpson’s [4] 2.667 6.667 2.964 1.111 1.435 6.421
Triangular [4] 2.665 6.393 2.959 1.101 1.415 6.388
Neural 2.667 6.402 2.958 1.098 1.416 6.390
network [4]
Proposed 2.667 6.400 2.958 1.099 1.416 6.389

184
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

method m=200 m=100 m=50 m=200 m=50 m=200

a)

b)

c)
Fig.2 Relative error versus order m

Conclusions:

185
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

In this paper, Wavelet based integration approach is applied for

numerical integration of f(x), it converges to the exact value for
sufficient value of order m, and provided numerical examples to
verify our results.
References:
1. K. Deb, Multi-objective genetic algorithms: problem difficulties
and construction of test problems, Evolutionary Computation,
vol. 7, 199, pp. 205-230
2. N.C. Wang, A Concise Guide to Numerical Analysis, Higher
Education Press, Beijing, 1997.
3. J. H. Shen, Fundamentals of Numerical Calculation, Tongji
University Press, Shanghai, 1999.
4. Lina Yan, Jingjing Di and Ke Wang, Spline basis neural network
algorithm for numerical Integration, International Journal of
Mathematical, Computational, Physical, Electrical and Computer
Engineering, vol.7, 2013, pp. 458-461.
5. X.-H. Wang, Y.-G. He and Z.-Z. Zeng, Numerical integration
study based on triangle basis neural network algorithm, Journal of
Electronics and Information Technology, vol. 26, 2004, pp. 394-
399.
6. K.T. Shivaram, H.T. Prakasha, Numerical Integration of Highly
oscillating functions using quadrature method, Global Journal of
Pure and Applied Mathematics, vol. 12, 2016, pp.2683-2690
7. K. Elleuch and A. Chaari, Modelling and identification of
Hammerstein system by using triangular basis functions, World
Academy of Science, Engineering and Technology, vol. 51,
2011, pp. 1332-1336.
8. Z.-Z. Zeng, Y.-N. Wang and H. Wen, Numerical integration
based on a neural network algorithm, Computing in Science &
Engineering, vol.8, 2006, pp. 42-48.
9. Y.-Q. Zhou, M. Zhang and B. Zhao, Solving numerical
integration based on evolution strategy method, Chinese Journal
of Computers, vol. 31, 2008, pp. 196-206.
10. A.J. Zou and Y.N. Zhang, Basis Function Neural Networks and
their Applications, Sun Yat-sen University Press, Guangzhou,
2009.
11. K.T. Shivaram, H. N. Umashankar, Optimal wavelet-based
approach for n-dimensional integrals over Bounded and
unbounded regions by Chebyshev Wavelet Method, IEEE Xplore
DOI: 10.1109/CESYS.2018.8723926
12. K.T. Shivaram, H.V. Sharadamani, V.B. Shashank, J. Varun
Darshan Naik, Optimal wavelet-based approach for numerical
evaluation of Hubbell rectangular source integral by Block-pulse

186
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

wavelet method, IEEE Xplore, DOI: 10.1109/ICICT43934.2018.

9034336
13. K.T. Shivaram, N. Mahesh kumar, M. Anusha, B.S. Manohar,
The optimal numerical wavelet-based integration of probability
density function by Chebyshev wavelet method, IEEE Xplore,
DOI: 10.1109/ICCS45141.2019.9065515
14. K.T. Shivaram, N. Mahesh kumar, S.Sunilkumar, V.
Vinayakapallakki, The application of quadrilateral finite element
mesh generation technique for the analysis of cutoff wave number
in rectangular with curved wave guide, IEEE Xplore, DOI:
10.1109/ISSI.2019.8907948
15. K.T. Shivaram, L.M.P. Harshitha, H.P.Chethana, K.Nidhi, Finite
element mesh generation technique for numerical computation of
cutoff wave numbers in rectangular and L -shaped waveguide,
IEEE Xplore , DOI: 10.1109/ICICT43934.2018.9034432
16. H.R.Jyothi, K.T.Shivaram, A new finite element mesh generation
technique for solving surface integrals over polygonal domain,
AIP Conference Proceedings 2235(1):020006, 2020,
DOI:10.1063/5.0008225

K.T. Shivaram
Department of Mathematics, Dayananda Sagar College of
Engineering, Bangalore, Karnataka, India
Email : [email protected]

187
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 15

NUTRITIONAL ASPECTS OF CEREALS AND

PRESENT STATUS OF SUSTAINABLE
FOOD FOR HEALTH

Mutyala Naidu Lagudu, Krishna Rao Mortha & Mallikarjuna

Kunjam

Abstract:
People are prone to many chronic diseases due to changing food
habits and lifestyle. Due to this they are prone to high blood pressure,
diabetes and heart diseases nowadays. In these circumstances, there is
a need to ensure that the food we eat has nutritional value. Therefore,
it is essential that we eat rice and wheat along with whole grains that
have many nutritional values. Our forefathers used to consume a lot
of pulses such as sorghum, ragu, korra, sorghum, sama and sorghum
in their diet. Their consumption as food has decreased significantly
over time. Cereals have a higher percentage of proteins, vitamins,
minerals and fiber than rice and wheat, so they are very good for our
health.

Key words: Millets, Cereals, Nutraceuticals, Phytochemicals

Introduction:
illets are small seeded grasses. They have grown as food,
feed and fodder. There are two types of millets – Major
millets and Minor millets. Jowar (Sorghum), Bajra (Pearl
millet) and Ragi (Finger millet) are major millets and they
are occupying 95 % of millets area. Foxtail millet, Koda millet, Lilltle
millet, Barnyard millet, Proso millet, Brown top millet are minor
millets and occupying 5 % of millet area. Teff and Fonio are exotic
millets.

188
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Government of India renamed millets as nutri “cereals” for

production, consumption and trade point of view by Gazette
notification issued on 13th April, 2018. Millets are also rebranded as
“Shree Anna” by Honourable Prime Minister and Finance Minister
(Malhothra, 2023).
Nutritional composition of millets
Cereals are an integral part of the Mediterranean diet, which was
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.15
selected as a better food in 2024. Nutritionists say that cereals are a
powerhouse of nutrients, including fiber, niacin, thiamine, B vitamins
like folate, iron, magnesium, and selenium (Anonymous, 2022).
Antioxidants like protein, phytic acid, lignins and furulic acid are also
abundant in them. For example, a single ounce of dry oats provides 3
grams of fiber and a daily supply of manganese, phosphorus, and
other key nutrients.

Carbohydrates
Carbohydrates are one of the largest fraction of biochemical
component of millet grain. It comprises of free sugars (Glucose,
fructose, sucrose and raffinose), starch and non starch polysaccharides
(NSP). Millet starch is rich in amylase (resistant starch) and it is
resistant towards enzymatic hydrolysis in stomach and small intestine
(Chandel et. al., 2014)After reaching large intestine, these are
subjected to fermentation by intestinal microbiome. Hence, they are
considered as good as dietary fibers. Millets are rich sources of
dietary fibers too.

Dietary fibers are two types. Soluble fibers and insoluble fibers. Both
are beneficial and included in diet. Soluble fiber helps in slowing
down digestion and insoluble fiber increases bulk of the stool and
helps in its easy passage. Millets are good sources of both soluble and
insoluble fibers (Table-1).

Table 1: Dietary fibre rich foods

Cereals Total dietary Soluble Insoluble
fiber (g) fiber (g) fiber (g)
Sorghum 10.2 1.7 8.5
Pearl millet 11.5 2.3 9.1
Finger millet 11.2 1.7 9.5
Foxtail millet 10.7 1.8 8.7
Little millet 7.7 2.3 5.5
Proso millet 9.6 1.9 9.3

189
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Kodo millet 6.4 2.1 4.3

Barnyard millet 9.9 1.1 8.8
Rice (milled) 2.8 0.82 1.99
Whole wheat 11.5 1.9 9.6

Protein
Protein is the second most abundant nutrient present in millet after
starch. Protein range form 6.5 % to 12.5 % (foxtail and proso millet
richest sources). Protein quality and quantity depends on species,
cultivar, plant part and growing conditions. Prolamin and glutelin are
major soluble protein fraction in various millet products. Millets are
good and comparable sources of cereal deficient amino acids
especially lysine, tryptophan and threonine (Mbithi-Mwikya et. al.,
2000).

Phytochemicals
Flavonoids are one of the major phytochemicals in millets.
Commercially found flavonoids in millets are catechin, quercetin,
luteolin, orientin, apegenin, isootrientin, vitexin, myricerin,
isovitexin, daidzein sponarin, viotanthin, lucenin-1 and tricin.
Phytochemicals exhibit antioxidant action via scavenging reactive
oxygen species (ROS) and it is more powerful than Vit. C or E. Kodo
millet has the highest free radical quenching activity followed by
sorghum and finger millet (Hegda adn Chandra, 2005). Bioactive
phytochemicals imparts millets with properties such as antioxidant,
anti-carcinogenic, anti-inflammatory, antiviral and neutoprotective
activities. Which in all have shown to be beneficial against diseases
like cancer and cardiovascular disease, type-2 diabetes, high blood
pressure, high cholesterol and inflammatory diseases. Mostly the
phytochemicals or secondary metabolites in millets serve as
therapeutics and many are developed as nutraceuticals.

Nutraceuticals
The term nutraceutical encompasses “naturally found bioactive
compounds derived from food sources that offer health benefits over
the basic nutritional value of the food”. Millets can be dietary
supplements, functional foods, and beverages. They considered as
non specific biological therapies: positively impact a person’s mental
and physical health as well as contribute towards the prevention or
cure of disease. Nutraceuticals have received considerable interest
due to potential nutritional and therapeutic effects and safety. Plant

190
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

based nutriceticals have garnered heightened attention recently as

they are presumed safer. Reports suggest the global nutraceutical
market reach 440 billion dollars by 2026. Millets are rich in mutrients
and have good levels of micronutrients, vitamins, resistant starch,
dietary fiber and a variety of secondary metabolites that imparts
therapeutic properties to these grains (Saleh et. al, 2013).
Health benefits of millets
“Nutrition is becoming a time bomb” as growing carbon dioxide
levels strip crops of their minerals. Need to start investing in those
forgotten crops that are already more nutritious. Four crops – wheat,
rice, maize and soyabean provide 2/3rd of the World’s food supply.
The risk of heart disease is significantly reduced if cereals are
consumed regularly. Studies have shown that consuming 28 grams of
whole grains daily can reduce the risk of heart disease by 22 percent.
Cereals are effective in improving cholesterol levels and lowering BP,
thereby reducing the risk of heart disease. Regular inclusion of whole
grains in the diet can help control diabetes and help in weight loss.
Experts say that the risk of cancer can be significantly reduced by the
antioxidants and fiber present in cereals.

Mitigates hidden hunger

High micronutrient content and diversity in millets contributes to
mitigation of micronutrient deficiency or hidden hunger.
Finger millet: it is good source of natural calcium (344 mg/100 g). It
helps for bone strengthening, reducing the risk of bone fractures.
Good for infants, elderly and pregnant and lactating women.
Peal millet and barnyard millet: Rich source of iron
Sorghum, finger millet, kodo: High content of magnesium, helps in
reducing the respiratory problems in asthma patients and helps in
reduce the effect of migraine, prevents heart attacks.
Proso millet: prevents pellagra condition (Vit. B3 deficiency). B-
Vitamins present in these grains helps to prevent fatigue, depression
and anxiety.
Foxtail and barnyard millet: Good source of phosphorous. Foxtail and
finger millets have significant carotenoid contents.

Regulation of type-2 diabetes

Millets have a low glycaemic index (GI) and it helps to manage type -
2 diabetes. Minimally processed millets were 30% more effective in
lowering GI of a meal compared to milled rice and refined wheat

191
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(Table 2). Long term consumption of millets lowers fasting and post
prandial blood glucose levels significantly by 12 and 15 %,
respectively in diabetic patients. They also reduces HbA 1c level
(from 6.65 ± 0.4 to 5.67 ± 0.4 %) among pre diabetic and diabetic
individuals. Millet consumption reduces insulin index and insulin
resistance (Mckeown et. al., 2002).
Table 2. Millets with low glycaemic index
Grain Mean GI
Millets 52.7 ± 10.3
Milled rice 71.7 ±14.4
Refined wheat 74.7 ± 14.9

Colon health and effect on gut microbiota composition

Resistant starch (high amylase content) in millets makes it difficult to
hydrolyze by digestive enzymes in small intestine; instead it is
fermented in the large intestine (producing beneficial short chain fatty
acids like butyrate). The resistant starch or high protein diet provides
an energy source for gut microbiota. Millet porridge also increased
the abundance of some presumably beneficial intestinal bacteria (e.g.,
Bifidobacterium and Lactobacillus) in the intestinal tract and
decreased the abundance of bacteria with pathogenic potential (e.g.,
E. coli, Enterococcus and Bacteroides) (Ying Chen et al., 2022).
Millet porridge prevented constipation in mice and promoted
intestinal motility.

Initiatives taken by Government of India

India leading the way to International year of millets (2023). The
celebration of Government of India has decided to celebrate
International year of millets 2023 to make it people’s movement so
that the millets, recipes, value added products are accepted globally.
(Table 3)The state wise production of millets in the country during
last five years (2018-19 to 2022-23) and this information was given
by the Union Minister of Agriculture and Farmers’ Welfare.The
major millet produced by the Government of India are jowar, bajra,
and ragi. During last five years, the quantum of jowar, bajra and ragi
procured by the Government are 423675 tonnes, 758094 metric
tonnes and 157067 metric tonnes, respectively (Malhothra, 2023).

Table 3: State wise production of millets during last five years.

State/UT 2018-19 2019-20 2020-21 2021-22 2022-23*

192
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Andhra Pradesh 301.91 514.19 540.61 359.15 299.64

Assam 3.06 3.23 3.26 3.2 3.23
Bihar 14.37 8 10.31 8.51 7.18
Chhattisgarh 33.71 24.56 26.24 28.18 23.39
Gujarat 1000.15 990.48 1091.97 1179.08 1221.87
Haryana 899.56 1034.9 1366.56 1132.15 1213.97
Himachal Pradesh 5.95 6.81 3.12 2.49 2.41
Jharkhand 12.77 14.31 17.72 18.07 47.6
Karnataka 1762.17 2555.6 2569.08 2053.6 2115.88
Kerala 0.47 0.54 0.57 0.6 0.29
Madhya Pradesh 851.34 895.71 1024.13 1181.4 1276.09
Maharashtra 1319.31 2428.7 2513.82 2305.38 2076.35
Odisha 48.18 48.07 55.16 68.08 59.22
Punjab 0.72 0.32 0.26 0.76 0.41
Rajasthan 4288.34 5146.89 5155.67 4279.74 5633.57
Tamil Nadu 873.47 1017.03 905.26 765.48 590.79
Telangana 72.25 139.15 166.33 122.76 79.03
Uttar Pradesh 1967.27 2171.91 2298.2 2225.65 2249.66
Uttarakhand 179.74 191.09 200.85 200.38 181.62
West Bengal 7.57 9.83 6.98 7.74 7.83
Others 68.91 59.32 64.44 74.3 61.72
All India 13711.2 17260.6 18020.6 15999.8 17151.75
As per 3rd Advance Estimates 2022-23.

Millet exports and projections

As per the market intelligence report (Global Millets Market, 2027),
millets market is expected to grow over $14 Bn at a CAGR of 4.6%
during 2019-2027. The increasing demand for organic foods and
Gluten free foods are the two main pushing factors for the global
millets market. Besides, the consumers are becoming more conscious
of the chemicals used in forming and thus the share of organic millets
is expected to grow over 29.7 % at a CAGR of 5.6%. With regard to
the markets, Asia Pacific is the dominant market with 40.9% market
share followed by the Middle East and Europe with 32% and 14.1 %
market share, respectively (Table 4).

Table 4: Millet exports and projections

2018 2027
Asia Pacific markets US $ 3851Mn US $ 5653 Mn
(APAC)
Middle East and Africa US $ 3015 Mn US $ 4559 Mn
Markets

193
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

European Markets US $ 1323 Mn US $ 2132 Mn

North American US $ 842 Mn US $ 1192 Mn
South and Central US $ 371 Mn 491 Mn
American Region Markets

Shelf life of millet grains

Millet grain storage losses can amount to 5-50%, while proper storage
will contribute to prolonged shelf life and conservation of nutritional
quality of grains (Table 5). Traditional practices that the farmers
follow to store millets include structures for both temporary and long
term storage like aerial storage in tied bundles, earthen bins or pots,
underground pits, mud rhombus, structures like nahu, thatch silo, etc.
Processing of millets like dehulling, decortication, dehusking,
debranning, grinding, milling, flaking, malting or fermentation etc.
are necessary to improve their palatability and cooking quality.

(Table 5). Shelf life of millet grains

S. No. Crops Grain (whole) De-hulled grain
1 Sorgum 1 year 6 months
2 Bajra 1 year 3 months (blanching)
3 Ragi 1 year 6 months
4 Foxtail millet 1 year 3 months
5 Kodo millet 1 year 3 months
6 Proso millet 1 year 3 months
7 Barnyard millet 1 year 3 months
8 Little millet 1 year 3 months
Climate change scenario
To ensure the food severity of the global population (Projected to
reach 9.7 billion by 2050), we need to diversify over grain production.
Capable of withstanding extremes of weather, long dry spells,
flooding etc.

Millet processing and value addition technologies

Processing of grains enhances the consumer acceptability and adds to
its convenience. There are two types of processing. Primary
processing is conversion of raw grain (inedible form) into de-hulled
grain (edible form) to enhance their quality and consumer
acceptability. Secondary processing is the conversion of the primary

194
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

processed raw material into different ready-to-Eat (RTE) and Ready-

to-Cook (RTC) millet products.
ICAR – IIMR has developed and commercialised 77 millet value
added technologies ranging from millet flour to millet noodles.

Utilization of millets grains in India

Millet grains in India are mainly used for direct consumption
followed by feed, beverage purpose and food industry. During 2019-
20 67 % grains were used for direct human consumption, 14.8 % for
brewing, 12.2 % for feed and 4.5 % for value added products
manufacture. As per projections, utilization of millets for value
addition, feed and brewing purposes are expected to increase by 8 -10
% by 2029-30.

Millets are becoming crucial in improving people's health. But the

farmers who are growing small grains are not getting the allowances,
incentives and minimum support price (MSP) available for
commercial crops. There are no centers to buy these products. That's
why from 1969 to 2014, cultivation area and production has been
declining. After that, the initiative taken by the central government
bore some fruit. After 2014 - 2015, the MSP has increased but this
increase does not appear to be beneficial to the small grain farmers in
terms of cash crop production, revenue and subsidies. Moreover, even
today only sorghum, sajja and ragi get support price. As a result,
farmers are not able to courage to cultivate the rest of the small
grains. They are cultivating after making agreements with some
traders

Wide range of products

Cereals have a wide market in the country and abroad. In Asia and
Africa, about 50 crore people consume them as part of their
traditional diet and the year 2023 has been declared as the
“International Year of Cereals”. About 131 countries are cultivating
them, which means that there is no need to introduce new cereals in
these countries. It is enough to focus on the needs of the local market
and export the refined grains. Cereals are mostly eaten by people in
countries like Mali, Senegal and Ethiopia. The people of Western
countries are just getting used to these and if they produce food items
with snacks suitable for them there will be an international demand.
Around 18.3 crore acres of small grains are grown in the world. It is
known that they are cultivated in about 12 crore acres in African

195
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

countries. After that, it is mostly grown in Asia and the highest

production is in India. There is not much competition to export our
snacks products to UAE, Nepal, Saudi, Libya, Women, UK, USA and
Australia. This is something that India can come together with.
International promotion of snack food products can provide
opportunities. Presently nine types of pulses are mainly available in
our country but the farmers are mostly inclined towards cultivation of
sajja and sorghum.

Aid should increase

Being a grass crop, it is believed to yield easily without much effort,
but the cost of cultivation, fertilisers, labor costs, and changing
climatic conditions are affected. Generally it takes three months to
cultivate Korra in one acre and ten quintals are harvested. According
to the current prices, the farmer will get 35000 rupees through these,
if the expenses are not gone, the farmer will be left with 10000
rupees. This is the income received for three months. Farmers believe
that they can get an income of 20,000 rupees to 30,000 rupees, if they
cultivate cotton or sugarcane with the same investment and there are
opportunities to get various subsidies from the Government. There is
no need to find a market to sell these, so most of the farmers are
focusing on commercial crops. Keeping all this in mind, the Central
Government is now taking steps to encourage farmers towards the
cultivation of small grains.

Conclusions
Rythu Bharosa Kendras and IKP Kendras should take steps to procure
these grains at any time. A similar effort should be made in all states
like the inclusion of snacks in the public distribution system in
Odisha. The Government should provide support by providing
subsidies for the processing of these grains. Ankura industries making
new dishes with korras, andra korras, green sorghum, ragu and uddha
should be encouraged. If the cultivation area of small grains increases,
the pressure on water resources will also decrease.

References:
1. Malhothra, S.K. (2023). International year of millets – Proposal
from India – Applications to UN adoption. Indian Farming 73(1),
10-15.
2. Anonymous (2022). Knowledge paper on millets the future super
food for India. Published by ASSOCHAM. Pp 39.

196
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

3. Chandel, G., Kumar, M., Dubey, M., Kumar, M., (2014).

Nutritional properties of minor millets neglected cereals with
potentials to combat malnutrition. Curr. Sci. 2014:107(7):1109-
11.
4. Mbithi-Mwikya, S., Ooghe, W., Van Camp, J., Nagundi, D.,
Huyghebaert, A., (2000). Amino acid profile after sprouting,
autoclaving and lactic acid fermentation of finger millet (Elusine
coracana) and kidney beans (Phaseolus vulgaris ). J. Agri Food
Chem 2000; 48:3081-5.
5. Hegda, P., Rajasekaran, N., & Chandra, T., (2005). Effect of the
antioxidant properties of millet species on oxidative stress and
glycemic status in alloxan induced rats. Nutrition Research.
25(12):1109-20.
6. Saleh, A., Zhang, Q., Chen, J., Shen, Q., (2013). Millet grains:
Nutritional quality, processing and potential health benefits.
Compr Rev Food Sci Saf. 12:281-95.
7. McKeown, N., Meigs, J., Liu, S., Wilson, P., & Jacques, P.,
(2002). Whole grain intake is favourably associated with
metabolic risk factor for type 2 diabetes and cardiovascular
disease in Framingham offspring study. American J Clin
Nutrition 76(2):390-398.
8. Chen, Y., Wong, W., Zhang, W, Tan, C., Lan, D., Wang, Y.,
(2022). Characteristics and feasibility of olive oil based
diacylglycerol plastic far for use in compound chocolate. Food
Chemistry. 391:1-15.

Mutyala Naidu Lagudu

Department of Botany, Adikavi Nannaya University,
Rajamahendravarm 533296, Andhra Pradesh, India
[email protected] [email protected]

Krishna Rao Mortha

Pithapur Raja's Government College (Autonomous), Kakinada
District, Andhra Pradesh, India

Mallikarjuna Kunjam
DNR College, Bhimavaram - 534 202, West Godavari District,
Andhra Pradesh, India

197
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 16

BIOCHEMICAL CHARACTERIZATION OF GINGER

(ZINGIBER OFFICINALE ROSC.) WITH SPECIAL
REFERENCE TO INDIGENOUS GINGER
CULTIVARS OF ASSAM: A MINI REVIEW

Sourav Bhattacharjee and Chetana Hasnu

Abstract:
Zingiber officinale Rosc. has been used as food, food adjunct and
ethno-medicine since time immemorial. It has an underground
rhizome that contains active constituents having unique therapeutic
applications. It is one of the emerging food sources having huge
genetic diversity. The rhizome of ginger contains enzyme protease
along with various other phytochemical constituents. Morphological,
cytological and Biochemical investigation of the various locally
available cultivars of Zingiber officinale Rosc. can provide valuable
information to utilize the plant sustainably near future. Such studies
can play a role in uncovering the history, estimating the diversity,
distinctiveness and population structure. Various Biochemical
attributes maybe used as Anthropogenic selection criteria for
considering the indigenous ginger cultivars asmother plant for further
plant improvement programme. This mini-review focusses on the
origin, distribution, brief morphologyand various phytochemical
works done on Zingiberofficinale Rosc. with a special emphasis on
the indigenous ginger cultivars of Assam.

198
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Key words: Assam, Biochemical, Ginger, Rhizome,Cultivars.

Introduction:
ingiber officinale Rosc. commonly known as ginger
belongs to the family Zingiberaceae (Srinivasan et al.,
2008; Ali et al., 2008) is one of the most widely cultivated
perennial herb in tropical and sub-tropical regions of the
world, especially found most in Indo-Malaysian region. Some of the
tropical and subtropical countries where abundant Ginger cultivation
occurs are India, China, Nepal, Nigeria, Thailand. These 5 countries
are in fact, the first five ginger producing countries (Ibrahim, 2006;
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.16
Begum et al., 2018).

Taxonomic Position :
Domain : Eukaryota
Kingdom : Plantae
Phylum : Spermatophyta
Class : Monocotyledonae
Order : Zingiberales
Family : Zingiberaceae
Genus :Zingiber
Species :Zingiber officinale

Zingiber officinale Rosc. commonly known as ginger belongs to the

family Zingiberaceae (Srinivasan et al., 2008., Ali et al., 2008) is one
of the most widely cultivated perennial herb in tropical and sub-
tropical regions of the world, especially found most in Indo-
Malayasian region. The plant is under the taxonomic family
Zingiberaceae, a largely tropical and sub-tropical family which is
considered as a large monocotyledonous family under the order
Zingiberales. This family has more than 1200 species and 53 genera
under it (Kress, 1990). Some of the tropical and subtropical countries
where abundant Ginger cultivation occurs are India, China, Nepal,
Nigeria, Thailand. These 5 countries are infact the first five ginger
producing countries (Ibrahim, 2006; Begum et al., 2018; Abubacker.,
2009). India and China are presently leading in ginger cultivation.
The States in India with most ginger production rate are Andhra
Pradesh, Kerala, Himachal Pradesh, Assam, Meghalaya, Mizoram,
Arunachal Pradesh, Nagaland, Manipur, Sikkim, Tripura, Orissa and
Madhya Pradesh (Hazarika and Kakoti., 2013., Rahman et.al, 2009.,

199
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Srinivasan et al., 2008., Abubacker., 2009). Ginger is one of the main

crops grown in NE region of India which actually comprises of
approx. 49% of India’s area under ginger cultivation and approx. 72%
of India’s ginger production (Rahman et.al, 2013, Hazarika and
Kakoti., 2013). Among the states of NE India, Assam has the highest
area under ginger cultivation as well as highest production.
(Karuppaiyan et.al, 2009). In India, Assam is no. 1 in ginger
production (122.3 thousand MT) followed by Karnataka. The plant is
propagated by rhizome cuttings and harvesting is done by digging and
picking rhizomes from underground, washing and sundrying.
(Sharma, 2017)
India and China are presently leading in ginger cultivation. The States
in India with most ginger production rate are Andhra Pradesh, Kerala,
Himachal Pradesh, Assam, Meghalaya, Mizoram, Arunachal Pradesh,
Nagaland, Manipur, Sikkim, Tripura, Orissa and Madhya Pradesh
(Hazarika & Kakoti, 2013; Rahman et al., 2009; Srinivasan et al.,
2008., Abubacker, 2011).

More than 70 cultivars of ginger are found throughout India and each
of these are identified based on their local names. (Sasikumar et al.,
1999). These cultivars vary in their Morphological, cytological,
Agronomical, Biochemical and other features as well (Khan, 1959;
Rattan et al., 1988; Arya & Rana, 1990; Sasikumar et al., 1992;
Zachariah et al., 1993; Ravindran et al., 1994; Sasikumar et al., 1994,
1999, 2003; Aiyadurai, 1996; Singh et al., 1999; Singh et al., 2000;
Gowda & Melanta, 2000; Naidu et al., 2000; Mohandas et al., 2000;
Singh, 2001; Abraham & Latha, 2003; Tiwari, 2003; Rana & Korla,
2007; Lincy et al.,2008).

Ginger Cultivation in Assam

Assam and rest of NE India are crucial ginger growing regions solely
because of the Agro-climatic conditions that enhance ginger
cultivation characterized by warm, humid summers with abundant
rainfall and cool winters. (Hazarika & Kakoti, 2013; Das, 2018).
Some of the indigenous ginger cultivars present in Assam are:
‘Amada’, ‘Jati ada’ (also known as ‘jatia ada’), ‘Zeng ada’ and
‘Moran ada’ (Rahman et al., 2009; Hazarika & Kakoti, 2013). The
indigenously available cultivars are either named on the basis of the
Locality (or area) of its cultivation or may also be based on its certain
unique characteristic features. Chemical estimations and analysis
show that ginger has over 300 varying compounds. The crucial
constituents in ginger rhizomes are carbohydrates, Proteins, Lipids,
Crude Fiber, Essential oils, Vitamins, Mineral elements, terpene

200
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

compounds, resins and Phenolics. (Prasad & Tyagi, 2015; Wagesho &
Chandravanshi, 2015).

Ginger is one of the main crops grown in NE region of India which

actually comprises of approx. 49% of India’s area under ginger
cultivation and approx. 72% of India’s ginger production. The North-
Eastern Region of India is thus often projected as “India’s Organic
Ginger Hub” (Rahmanet.al, 2009).

Organic Ginger is widely cultivated as an economically important

plant in Assam. The districts of Assam which have the most
production rate of Ginger are: Karbi Anglong, Golaghat, Sivsagar,
Tinsukia and Udalguri, Darrang, NC Hills, Sonitpur, Barpeta,
Kamrup, Nagaon and Dibrugarh (Hazarika and Kakoti., 2013). Karbi-
Anglong, the largest district in Assam (area-wise) covering an area of
10,434 sq. kms is one of the most crucial ginger producing districts of
Assam which supplies organic ginger to North Bengal, New Delhi,
etc. and even exports ginger abroad. (Rahman H et.al , 2009). Ginger
of Assam and NE India has higher oil and oleo-resin content as
compared to rest of India. Among the states of NE India, Assam has
the highest area under ginger cultivation as well as highest
production. (Karuppaiyan R et.al, 2009). In India, Assam is no. 1 in
ginger production (122.3 thousand MT) followed by Karnataka
(Hazarika and Kakoti., 2013).

One of the major challenges towards ginger cultivation in Assam and

NE India is the Rhizome Rot disease of ginger causing yield losses.
This is an issue that needs to be addressed so that the state can
maintain a standard production rate of ginger (Dohroo, 2005 and
Stirling et al., 2009). In Assam, the highest and most destructive crop
loss was reported to be 100%. Rahmanet.al, 2009 reported wilt to be
another major challenge alongwith Rhizome rot for Ginger cultivation
in Assam and NE India.

Biochemical Characterization of Ginger

The application of Biochemical markers for characterization of
varieties, species or cultivars has been successfully done in various
crops. (Weeden& Lamb, 1985; Al-Jibojuri & Adham, 1990; Demiera
& vega, 1991; Bhat et al.1992; Bult & Kiyangi, 1992). Zingiber
officinale Roscoe commonly termed as ginger is valued all over the
world not only for its importance in the economic field, as a spice but
also for its medicinal properties which solely arise due to its unique
Biochemical constituents. (Rout and Das, 2002; Parthasarathy et. al.,

201
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2008). It has been reported over the years that Ginger is effective in
the treatment of specific disorders such as stomach upset, arthritis,
dizziness, cold sweating, vomiting, heart diseases, nausea,flu- like
symptoms, asthma, palpitation, inflammation, dyspepsia, loss of
appetite, constipation, Baldness, Toothache, Snakebite, etc. (Duke
and Ayensu., 1985., Blumenthal., 1998., Polasa et al., 2003, Latona
et. al. 2012; Sharma et. al., 2016). The Biochemical analysis of ginger
was initially reported mainly considering the oleoresin and volatile oil
content (Barnes et al., 2002; Sweetman, 2007). Approx. 400 different
chemicals have been already identified to be present in ginger
rhizome (Garner-Wizard et al., 2006).
In one of the pioneer works on the Biochemical characterization of
ginger, it was found that the rhizome of ginger actually contains a
plethora of chemical constituentssuch as curcumin, bisaboline, 6-
gingerol i.e., (5-hydroxy-1-4-hydroxy-3-methoxy phenyl),
zingiberene, 6-shogoals, and several other types of lipids that make
ginger a medicinally important plant. (Yoshikawa et al., 1993;
Mascolo et al., 1989; Bliddal et al., 2000).

Ginger has been reported to have various properties such as analgesic,

Anti-microbial, Anti-oxidant, antiulcer, antipyretic, antiemetic, anti-
spasmoic, etc. (Mascolo et al., 1989; Kapil et al., 1990., Johri and
Zutshi., 1992., Phillips et al., 1993; Jana et al., 1999; Polasa et al.,
2003; Adanlawo et al., 2007, Pawer, 2009).

There has been detailed analysis of Biochemical contents in ginger

rhizome from time to time and it has been reported that Ginger
rhizomes contain carbohydrates (approx. 70%), Proteins (small
amount), Lipids (approx. 8%), resins, mineral elements, terpenes,
phenolics, amino acids, crude fiber and also vitamins (Nicotinic acid
& Vitamin A) (Prasad S & Tyagi, 2015; Wagesho & Chandravanshi,
2015). It has been reported that the unique odor and flavor of ginger
exist due to presence of specific pungent compounds such as
Shogaols and Gingerols. (Prasad & Tyagi, 2015). Aromatic odour of
ginger is due to some volatile oils which are mainly zingiberene and
zingiberol (Sharma, 2017). Gingerols donot have prolonged thermal
stability and get transformed to Shogaol under high temperature.
(Mishra, 2009). More Pungency is conferred by Shogaol as compared
to gingerols. (Jolad et. al., 2004).

Parthasarathy et. al. (2008) gave a very important conclusion that the
presence and concentration of various Biochemical constituents in
Ginger may vary with cultivar, Influence of environmental conditions

202
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

and the stage of development attained at the time of harvesting.

Variation in presence and abundance of Phytochemical constituents
among various cultivars of ginger collected from different
geographical locations was also reported by Ravindran and Babu
(2004).

Patnaik et. al. (2016) characterized 20 accessions of Ginger

germplasm at HARS, Pottangi considering specific Biochemical
contents (Protein, Phenol and Fibre) as one of the important criteria.
He observed that Total Protein content & Crude Fibre content approx.
matched standard literature but Total phenolic content was found to
be very high. Phenolics has been previously reported to show anti-
oxidant i.e They can perform neutralization of harmful Free-radicals
(Mishra et al. 2011). According to the findings of Patnaik et. al., 2016
the presence of high amount of Phenolics in Ginger indicate its
potential use as an anti-oxidant and also for the treatment of various
diseases.According to Latona et al. (2012) ginger contains a high
moisture content of about 76.53% followed by crude protein 9.13%,
crude fiber 3.07%, fat content 5.09% and ash 2.64%. Approximately
similar quantities of the same parameters were reported by Nwinuka
et al., 2010 and Okolo et al. 2012 on Dry basis.
Latona et al. (2012) examined the presence of various mineral
elements in Ginger Rhizome and found out that that ginger has a high
amount calcium 280.0 mg/100g, Iron 279.7 mg/100g, Zinc 64.0
mg/100g, Manganese 5.90 mg/100g and Copper 8.80 mg/100g which
are important essential elements. All these essential mineral element
compositions indicate that Ginger rhizome has the property to be used
as a medicine for various disorders. Contrary to this, Olubunmi et al.,
2013 found out Potassium to be the most abundant mineral element in
Gnger rhizome. His study also showed considerable abundance of
calcium, magnesium, sodium, phosphorous, manganese, iron, zinc,
and copper. Adanlawo et al., 2007 found a different order
corresponding to mineral abundance. He found Sodium to be the most
abundant mineral element and the order of abundance as Na > K > Ca
> P > Mn > Zn > Fe > Cu. Similar results were found by Adeyeye and
Fagbohun (2005).Wagesho and Chandravanshi, 2015 found the
presence of toxic metal Pb in Ginger in very trace amounts.
Jung (2008) gave an important conclusion regarding the mineral
element uptake in plants which can cause difference in their
concentration. According to his findings, Mineral uptake by the plant
roots may be directly influenced by various conditions or factors such
as: soil pH, mineral concentration in soils, Organic matter content,

203
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

type and variety of plant and also a plant’s stage of maturity during
harvest.
Adanlawo et al. (2007) found glutamic acid to be the most abundant
amino acid and glycine to be the least abundant one. This result was
in close agreement with amino acid analysis in some tubers by Eka,
1998. Olubunmi B. et al., 2013 conducted analysis of Food value of
Ginger in Nigeria and found out Leucine and Glutamic acid as the
most abundant amino acids in Ginger rhizomes. Other amino acids
reported are Lys, His, Arg, Asp, Met, Thre, Ser, Ala, Cys, Val, Ile,
Leu, Tyr, Phe (Olubunmi B. et al., 2013)
According to the findings of Adanlawo et al. (2007), ginger donot fall
under the category of plants with high protein content. He stated that
the low value of proteins maybe due to the soil conditions,
management and other environmental factors.

Fameruwa et al. (2011) stated that one of the crucial factors behind
the high market value of ginger is its high Oleo-resin content.
According to Shobana et al. (2000); Balachandran et. al. (2006)and
Eleazu& Eleazu (2012),one of the reasons behind the highly sought
anti-oxidant property of ginger is the high amount of Oleo-resins
present in it. Some of the other medicinally important features of
ginger such as antimicrobial, anti-inflammatory, anticoagulant, anti-
hypercholesterolemic, anti-hypertensive, anti-hyperglycemic,
antispasmodic and vasodilatory properties are also linked with the
presence of Oleo-resins in it. (Bradley, 1992; Verma et al., 1994).

A widely accepted range of Oleo-resin content in ginger rhizome of

4.0-7.5 % was given by Balachandran et. al., 2006. Similar results
were shown by Eleazu et. al., 2012. He also pointed out prominent
relation between Oleo-resin content and potassium content in Ginger
and suggested that Oleo-resins may be responsible for Potassium
content but this needs more research to be done. Eleazu et. al., 2012
also reported that Ginger has a low quantity of reducing sugars in it.
Choudhari and Kareppa (2013) conducted a comparative analysis of
Biochemical contents between Healthy and Infected Ginger rhizomes
and found some prominent differences with respect to the contents.
They reported that the crude fibre, gingerols & shagaols, oleoresin,
volatile oil, total ash, water soluble ash and acid insoluble ash content
of infected plant showed prominent decrease due to infection.
However, starch content showed increase in the infected plant as
compared to healthy plant.

204
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Motawi et. al. (2011)conducted analysis of ginger as a nutraceutical.

On examination of Ethanolic extract of Ginger, He concluded that
there occurs a high amount of carbohydrates in ginger. He also found
out that Ginger contains considerable number of tannins and
Flavonoids. Another important revelation from his study was that he
found a moderate number of Alkaloids, sterols and terpenes to be
present in Ginger. Some important phenolics in ginger are shogaol,
gingerol and paradol. Terpene compounds such as zingiberene,
farnescene, Bisabolene and curcumene are crucial in ginger. (Prasad
and Tyagi, 2015).
Sharma et. al. (2016) gave another important addition towards the
understanding of Biochemical contents in Ginger rhizome. He
concluded that the nature and content of volatile present in and
extracted from ginger may differ based on various factors such as
Geographical location and origin, post-harvest procedures and
Temperature as well.

He applies GC-MS technique for accurate characterization of volatile

oils and obtained high percentage of sesquiterpenes (66.66%),
monoterpenes (17.28%) and aliphatic compounds (13.58%). Among
essential oil, he identified Zingiberene as the most abundant
component.

Sharma et. al. (2016) also gave another prominent milestone and
showed that volatile oils obtained from ginger showed considerable
anti-microbial properties. The oils were tested against bacteria as well
as fungi: Bacillus subtilis, Staphylococcus aureus, Escherichia coli,
Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Candida albicans and Aspergillus niger.

Ahmad et. al. (2013) stated that Ginger is one of the most emerging
sources of proteolytic enzymes. Proteolytic enzymes are certain lytic
enzymes that are formed within our alimentary canal and through
their lytic action, the breakdown highly complex protein foods into
simpler amino acids which can be directly absorbed by the body cells.
Proteolytic enzymes increase our digestion ability as well as our
disease resistance capacity (Aussig et. al., 1988). Rhizome of Ginger
contains protease alongwith various other phytochemical constituents.

Ginger proteases belong to Cysteine type of ptoteases (Huang et. al.,

2011) and because of high thermostability, broad pH and plasma
clotting activity, the cysteine proteases is having special interest and
plant containing cysteine protease is being a promising commercial
source. (Chang et. al., 2015). Early-stage research also suggested that

205
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

proteases may have anti-cancer properties (Pillai et. al., 2013). Large
numbers of Ginger cultivars which are very good source of
proteolytic enzymes are widely cultivated in Assam. Various works
have been done on isolation, purification and characterization of
proteolytic enzymes at both qualitative and quantitative level by
different researchers from time to time (Thomson et. al., 1973;
Ohtsuki et. al., 1995; Choi et. al., 1999; Choi & Laursen., 2000;
Naveena et. al., 2004; Kim et. al., 2007; Huang et. al., 2011; Nafi et.
al., 2013; Amir et. al., 2013)

Proteolytic enzymes are synthesized naturally within our alimentary

canal which by the process of proteolysis breaks complex
proteinaceous food into amino acids that can be further digested and
absorbed by the cells. Intake of proteolytic enzymes can increase our
digestive ability as well as our disease resistance capacity (Taussig &
Batkin, 1988). Proteolytic enzymes are also one of the most
industrially sought group of enzymes. Two mega proteases Parpain
and Bromelain are conventionally applied in Food industries. These
proteases meet only a minimal percentage of the market demand and
hence apart from medicinal applications, new sources of proteases are
industrially sought as well. (Adulyatham and Owusu-Apenten, 2005;
Gaur et al., 2010)

The Rhizome of ginger is one of the most emerging food source

containing proteolytic enzymes (Ahmad et al., 2013). Ginger protease
is an alkaline protease that hydrolyzes proteins at alkaline pH. It
belongs to Cysteine type of ptoteases and is a prominent member of
the peptidase family C1 (Huang et al., 2011). The molecular structure
of the enzyme is characterized by the presence of a Cysteine residual
containing active center (Choi et. Al., 1999; Huang et al., 2011).

The Ginger protease was named as “Zingibain” by following the

normal principles of nomenclature by Thomson et al. (1973). Due to
its high thermostability, broad pH and plasma clotting activity, the
cysteine proteases is having special interest and plant containing
cysteine protease is being a promising commercial source. (Zhang et
al., 2015). Early-stage research also suggested that proteases may
have anti-cancer properties (Pillai et al., 2013).

Conclusion and Future Prospects

The indigenous cultivars of Ginger in our country are widely known
by their place/locality of cultivation or origin. (Patnaik PK et. al.,
2016). The distinction and accurate characterization of these cultivars

206
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

becomes very challenging due to the absence or insufficiency of any

prominently visible morphological differences. (Shamina et al.,
1997). Thus, Biochemical and molecular markers prove to be a
crucial tool for the characterization of various cultivars and also to
deduce some inter-relatedness among them in association with
cytological and Phylogenetic studies.

According to our Literature evidence base, we can see that various

Biochemical analysis works have been done on Zingiber species from
time to time, but very little is known about the phytochemical
constituents of the indigenous ginger cultivars of Assam. Keeping this
fact in mind, a detailed Biochemical study and Characterization of the
indigenous ginger cultivars of Assam can increase our range of
knowledge on the overall genetic diversity existing within the various
indigenous cultivars of Zingiber officinale in one of the most crucial
ginger producing states of India i.e Assam.. The data obtained can be
utilized for identification of the cultivars, establishment of Superiority
among the cultivars and as selection criteria for further plant
improvement programme. Biochemical analysis on a qualitative as
well as quantitative level can provide authentic data on the
unexplored indigenous cultivars of Assam. Ploidy level study of all
the cultivars can be correlated to their various biochemical
characteristics to find out if there is any kind of correlation between
ploidy level and biochemical contents that can be a crucial step
towards characterization of the indigenous ginger cultivars of Assam.

References
1. Abraham Z and Latha M (2003) Correlation and path analysis in
ginger (Zingiber officinale Rosc.). Journal of Spices and
Aromatic Crops 12: 187–189.
2. Abua MN., Ittah MA., Obok EE., I would GA., Edugbo RE.,
Amadi CO., (2020)., Nutritional Qualities of Ginger Mutant
Lines Grown in the Humid Tropical Agroecology of Nigeria
Asian Journal of Advances in Agricultural Research12(2): 35-
42, 2020; Article no.AJAAR.54370,ISSN: 2456-8864
3. Abubacker ATN (2009) Export Potential of Ginger, Department
of Economics, Dr Zakir Husain College, Illeyangudi, Tamil
Nadu, India
4. Adaniya S. (2001). Optimal pollination environment of
tetraploid ginger (Zingiber officinale Roscoe) evaluated by in
vitro pollen germination and pollen tube growth in styles. Sci
Hort. 90(3–4):219–226.

207
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

5. Adanlawo, IG and Dairo, FAS., (2007)., Nutritional and Anti-

Nutritional constituents of Ginger (Zingiber officinale Roscoe)
and the influence of its ethanolic extract on some serum enzymes
of Albino Rats., International Journal of Biological Chemistry :
1(1): 38-46
6. Adeyeye, EI and Fagebohun, ED., (2005)., Proximate, Mineral
and Phylate profiles of some selected spices found in Nigeria.,
Pak. J. Sci. Ind. Res., 48: 14-22
7. Ahmad YN, Bakar J, Foo HL, Ghazali HM., (2013), Properties
of Proteolytic enzyme from ginger (Zingiber Officinale Roscoe),
International Food Research Journal 20(1): 363-368 (2013)
8. Aiyadurai SGA (1996) Review of Research on Spice and
Cashewnut in India. Regional Office (Spices and Cashewnut).
Ernakulam: Indian Council of Agricultural Research, p. 228.
9. Ajanal M., Gundkalle MB., Nayak SU., (2012)., Estimation of
Total Alkaloids in Chitrakadivati by UV Spectrophotometer.,
Anc. Sci. life. 2012., Apr-jun., 31(4): 198-201
10. Al-Jibojuri, A.A.M., Adham, K.M. (1990). Biochemical
classification of date palm cultivars. J.Hort. Sci. 65,725-729.
11. Amir N., Foo HL., Ghazali HM., (2013)., Properties of
Proteolytic enzyme from Ginger (Zingiber Officinale Roscoe).,
International Food Research Journal., ID : 19521130
12. Arya PS and Rana KS (1990) Performance of ginger varieties in
Himachal Pradesh. Indian Cocoa, Arecanut and Spices Journal
14: 16–20.
13. Atman RD and Marcussen KC (2001) Effects of a ginger extract
on knee pain in patients with osteoarthritis. Arthritis and
Rheumatism 44: 2531–2538.
14. Badr A, Sharawy S, (2007)., Karyotype Analysis and Systematic
relationships in Egyptian Astragalus L. (Fabaceae); International
Journal of Botany; Feb 2007, 147-159
15. Badreldin H. Ali, Gerald Blunden, Musbah O. Tanira and
Abderrahim N., (2008).,Science Direct, Food and Chemical
Toxicology, 46, pp. 409–420
16. Balachandran S, Kentish SE, Mawson R (2006). The effect of
both preparation method and season on the supercritical
extraction of ginger. Sep. Purif. Technol 48; 98-105.
17. Barnes, J., Anderson, L.A., Phillipson, J.D. (2002). Herbal
Medicines. 2nd Edn., Pharmaceutical Press, London Grayslake,
IL., UK., pp: 243
18. Basak, U. C. and Das, P. (1996). Karyotype analysis and 4C
nuclear DNA estimation in 3 species of Acanthus, a mangrove
associate from coastal Orissa. Cytobios 87: 151Cytobio

208
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

19. Basak, U. C. and Das, P. (1995). Variation in nuclear DNA

content and karyotype analysis in three species of Avicenmia, a
tree mangrove of costal Orissa. Cytobios 84: 93-102.
20. Begum KH., Bhattacharyya A; Deka RL; (2018), Effect of Soil
Physico-Chemical properties on Rhizome rot Disease of Ginger
under Assam conditions; International Journal of Current
Microbiology and Applied Sciences., 7(6): 2097-2102
21. Bennett MD. (1987). Variation in genomic form in plants and its
ecological implications. New Phytologist 106 (Suppl.): 177-200.
22. Bhadra S and Bandopadhyay M, (2015)., Karyomorphological
investigations on some economically important members of
Zingiberaceae from Eastern India, Caryologia; Vol 68., Issue 3;
Pg 184-192
23. Bhat, K.V., Bhat, S.R., Chandel, K.P.S. (1992). Survey of
Isozyme polymorphism for clonal identification in Musa.
I.Esterase, acid phosphatise and catalase. J. Hort. Sci. 67, 501.
24. Bidyaleima L, Rajkumar K, Sharma GJ; (2019)., RAPD.,ISSR
profiles of 6 Zingiber species found in Manipur, India;
BIODIVERSITAS., Vol 20; pg 1389-1397
25. Bisson S, Guillemet S, Hamel J-L. (1968).Contribution a létude
caryotaxonomique des Scitaminées. Botanique Mém Mus Nat
Hist Nat, B, Bot. 18:59–145.
26. Bliddal H, Rosetzsky A, Schlichting P, editors. et al. (2000) ., A
randomized, placebo controlled, cross-over study of ginger
extracts and ibuprofen in osteoarthritis. Osteoarthritis Cartilage;
8(1):9–12.
27. Bligh EG and Dyer WJ (1955) Can. J. Biochem. And Physiol.,
37, 911
28. Bradley PR, (1992). British Herbal Compendium, Vol 1.British
Herbal Medicine Association, Bournemouth, Dorset, UK; pp.
112-114.
29. Bult, C.J., Kiyangi, Y.T. (1992). Electrophoretic and
morphological variation within and among natural populations of
the wild soybean (Gilyane, seib&Zuce). Bot. Bull. Sini, 33,111-
127.
30. Burkill IH (1996) A Dictionary of the Economic Products of the
Malay Peninsula. Kuala Lumpur: Ministry of Agriculture and
Co-operatives, p. 2444.
31. Chakraborti AK. (1948). Multiplication of chromosome numbers
with relation to speciation in Zingiberaceae. Sci Cult. 14(4):
137–140.
32. Choi, K.H. and Laursen, R.A. 2000. Amino-acid sequence and
glycan structures of cysteine protease with proline specifity from

209
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

ginger rhizome (Zingiber officinale). European Journal of

Biochemistry 267: 1516-1526.
33. Choi, K. H., Laursen RA., and Allen KN., (1999). The 2.1
angstrom structure of a cysteine protease with proline specificity
from ginger rhizome, Zingiber officinale. Biochemistry
38:11624–11633.
34. Choudhari S.S and Kareppa BM., (2013); Studies on
Biochemical Changes in Healthy and Infected Ginger (Zingiber
Officinale Roscoe)., International Journal of Biological &
Pharmaceutical Research; 4(8): 556-558.
35. Connel DW and Jordan RA (1971) Composition and distinctive
volatile flavour characteristics of the essential oil from
Australian-grown ginger (Zingiber officinale). Journal of
Science Food and Agriculture 22: 93–95.
36. Darlington CD, Wylie AP. (1955). Chromosome atlas of
flowering plants. London (UK): George Allen & Unwin. p. 345–
346.
37. Daryono BS, Rahma SNAF, Sudarsono PD. (2012).
Chromosome characterization three varieties of ginger (Zingiber
officinale Rosc.). Indonesian J Pharm. 23(1):54–59
38. Das A. B., Basak U. C. and Das P., (1995a).- Variation in
nuclear DNA content and karyotype analysis in three species of
Avicennia, a tree mangrove of costal Orissa. Cytobios, 84: 93-
102. -, 1995b.- Karyotype diversity and on genomic variability
in some Indian tree mangroves. Caryologia, 48: 319-328
39. Das A.B., Mohanty S. and Das P., (1997).- Meiotic behaviour
and nuclear DNA variation in some species a/Mammillaria
(Cactaceae). Cytologia, 62: 253-257.
40. Das AB, Rai S, Das P. (1998). Estimation of 4C DNA and
karyotype analysis in ginger (Zingiber officinale Rosc.) II.
Cytologia. 63(2):133–139.
41. Das SJ, (2018)., Karbi Anglong Ginger : The Organic Ginger of
India., Slideshare.,Indian Institute of Plantation Management
42. David T. Plummer (1990) An Introduction to Practical
Biochemistry,179 Third Edition
43. De miera, G.C.S., Vega, M.L.P. (1991). Estimation of
isozymatic genetic variability of a Spanish Avena sativa
germplasms collection. Plant. Breed. 106, 293-300.
44. Denniff P, Macleod I and Whiting DA (1980). Studies in the
biosynthesis of (6) gingerol, pungent principle of ginger
(Zingiber oflcinale), J. Chem. Soc. Perlun, Trans., 1 (12): 2637-
2644.

210
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

45. Dhamayanthi KPM. (1998). Comparative karyomorphology and

DNA estimation studies in ginger cultivars (Zingiber officinale
Rosc). Cytologia. 63(3):311–315
46. Dohroo NP (2005) Diseases of ginger. In ‘Ginger, the genus
Zingiber’. (Eds PN Ravindran, K Nirmal Babu) pp. 305–340.
(CRC Press: Boca Raton)
47. Dorathy JTF, Mokhasi V; (2013)., Study on the effect of
different Hypotonic Solutions on Chromosome during Mitosis;
International Journal of Health Sciences and Research., ISSN:
2249-9571
48. Duh PD, Tu YY and Yen GC (1999). Antioxidant activity of
water extract of Harng Jyur (Chyrsanthemum morifolium
Ramat). Lebensmittel- Wissenschaft und Technologie, 32: 269-
277.
49. Layne EE, (1975) Methods in Enzymology,3:447
50. Ekundayo O, Laakso I and Hiltunen R (1988) Composition of
ginger (Zingiber officinale Roscoe) volatile oils from Nigeria.
Flavour and Fragrance Journal 3: 85–90.
51. Eleazu, C.O., Amadi, C.O. , Iwo, G.A. (2012). Biochemical
qualities of 10 elite accessions of ginger (Zingiber officinale
Roscoe). Afric. J. of Food. Sci. and Tech. 3(8), 187-192.
52. Etikawati N, Setyawan AD. (2000). A cytotaxonomic study in
the genus Zingiber. Biodiversitas. 1(1):8–13.
53. Fakim AG, Maudarbaccus N, Leach D, Doimo L and Wohlmuth
H (2002) Essential oil composition Zingiberaceae species from
Mauritius. Journal of Essential Oil Research 14: 271–273.
54. Famurewa AV, Emuekele PO, Jaiyeoba KF(2011). Effect of
drying and size reduction on the chemical and volatile oil
contents of ginger (Zingiber officinale). J. Med. Plants Res.
5(14): 2941-2944.
55. Felipe CF, Kamyla SF, André L, Jose NSB, Manoel AN, Marta
MF and Glauce SV (2008). Alterations in behavior and memory
induced by the essential oil of Zingiber officinale Roscoe
(ginger) in mice are cholinergic-dependent. J. Medicinal Plants
Res., 2(7): 163-170.
56. Garner-Wizard, M., Milot, S.H.B., Neustadt, E.J., Oliff, H.S.,
Oppel, M. et al. (2006). Ginger, an herbal medicinal product
with broad antiinflammatory actions. J. Med. Food 8, 125-132.
57. Gaur, S., Agrahari, S. and Wadhwa, N. (2010). Purification of
protease from Pseudomonas thermaerum GW1 isolated from
poultry waste site. The Open Microbiology Journal 4: 67-74
58. Gowda KK and Melanta KR (2000) Varietal performance of
ginger in Karnataka. In: Muraleedharan N and Rajkumar R (eds)

211
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Recent Advances in Plantation Crops Research. New Delhi:

Allied Publishers, pp. 92–93.
59. Hazarika DJ., Kakoti M, (2013); Study on Indigenous varieties
of Ginger of Golaghat district (Assam) and it’s Economic
viability as Aroma Ingredients; Scholars Research Library., J.
Nat. Prod. Plant Resour., 2013, 3(1): 24-29
60. Holtum, R.E., (1950). The Zingiberaceae of the Malay
peninsula. Gard. Bull. (Singapore) 13, 1–50.
61. Huang XW., Chen LT., Luo LB., Guo HY., Ren FZ., (2011).,
Purification, characterization, and milk coagulating properties of
ginger proteases., J Dairy Sci. 2011 Aug;94(8):4242
62. Huziwara Y. (1962). Karyotype analysis in some genera of
Compositae. VIII. Further studies on the chromosomes of Aster.
Am. J Bot. 49(2):116–119.
63. Ibrahim, KAB., (2006) BCE Thesis, Extraction of Essential Oils
from Ginger Rhizome using Steam Distillation Method.
University College of Engineering & Technology., Malayasia,
64. Ishida H, Suzuno H, Sugiyama N, Innami S, Tadokoro T and
Maekawa A (2000). Nutritive evaluation on chemical
components of leaves, stalks and stems of sweet potatoes
(Ipomoea batatas Poir). Food Chemistry, 68: 359-367.
65. Jana U., Chattopadhyay RN and Shaw BP, (1999) Preliminary
studies on anti-inflammatory activity of Zingiber officinale
Rosc., Vitex negundo Linn and Tinospora cordifolia (Willied)
Miers in albino rats. In. J. Pharmacol., 31: 232-233.
66. Jolad SD, Lantz RC, Solyom AM, Chen GJ, Bates RB, and
Timmermann BN (2004) Fresh organically grown ginger
(Zingiber officinale): Composition and effects on LPS-induced
PGE2 production. Phytochemistry 65(13), 1937–54.
67. Joseph R. (2010). Karyomorphometrical analysis and
exploration of major essential oil constituents in Zingiberaceae
[PhD thesis]. [Kerala (India)]: Mahatma Gandhi University.
68. Jung MC (2008) Heavy metal concentrations in soils and factors
affecting metal uptake by plants in the vicinity of a Korean Cu-
W mine. Sensors 8:2413–2423
69. Karuppaiyan R., Rahman H., Kishore K., Denzongpa R., (2009),
Traditional practices of ginger cultivation in Northeast India.,
Indian Journal of Traditional Knowledge. Vol. 8 (1), January
2009, pp 23-28
70. Khan KI (1959) Ensure two fold ginger yields. Indian Farming
8: 10–14.
71. Khan SH, 1975., A Technique for staining Rice Chromosomes.,
Cytologia., 40: 595-598

212
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

72. Kress, W.J. (1990). The phylogeny and classification of the

Zingiberales. Annals of the Missouri Botanical Garden 77:698–
721.
73. Kihara H, Yamamoto Y, Hosono S. (1931). A list of
chromosome-numbers of plants cultivated in Japan. Tokyo
(Japan): Yodenko.
74. Kim, M., Hamilton, S. E., Guddat, L. W. and Overall, C.M.
(2007). Plant collagenase: unique collagenolytic activity of
cysteine proteases from ginger. Biochimica et Biophysica Acta
1770: 1627-1635.
75. Kun-Hua W, Jian-Hua M, He-Ping H, Shan-Lin G., (2011);
Generation of Autotetraploid Plant of Ginger (Zingiber
Officinale Rosc.) and it’s Quality Evaluation., Pharmacogn.
Mag., July; 7(27): 200-6
76. Latona, D.F., Oyeleke, G.O. , Olayiwola, O.A. (2012). Chemical
analysis of ginger root. J. App. Chem. 1(1),47-49.
77. Lavania, U. C. (1985). Nuclear DNA and Karyomorphological
studies in Vetiver Cytologia 50: 177-185.
78. Levan A, Fredga K, Sandberg AA. (1964). Nomenclature for
centromeric position on chromosomes. Hereditas. 52(2):201–
220.
79. Levitsky GA. (1931). The karyotype in systematics. Bull Appl
Bot Gen Pl Breed. 27:220–240.
80. Lewis YS, Mathew AG, Nambudiri ES and Kristhnamurthy N
(1972). Oleoresin Ginger. Flavour Ind., 3: 78
81. Lincy AK, Jayarajan K and Sasikumar B (2008) Relationship
between vegetative and rhizome characters and final rhizome
yield in micro propagated ginger plants (Zingiber officinale
Rosc.) over two generations. Scientia Horticulture 118: 70–73.
82. Lowry, OH, Rosbrough NJ, Farr AR, and Randall RJ. (1951) J.
Biol. Chem. 193: 265.
83. Luckner, M. (1990). Secondary metabolism in microorganisms,
plants and animals. Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 549 pp.
84. Macloed AJ and Pieris NM (1984) Volatile aroma constituents
of Sri Lankan ginger. Phytochemistry 23: 353–360.
85. Mardani H, Ghannadi A, Rashnavadi B, Kamali R., (2017), The
Effect of Ginger Herbal Spray on reducing Xerostomia in
patients with Type II diabetes., Avicenna Journal of
Phytomedicine, 2017, July-August., 7(4): 308-316
86. Mascolo N, Jain R, Jain SC and Capasso F (1989)
Ethnopharmacological investigation of ginger (Zingiber
officinale) Journal of Ethnopharmacology 27: 129–140

213
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

87. Menut C, Lamaty G, Bessiere JM and Koudou J (1994)

Aromatic plants of tropical Central Africa. XIII. Rhizomes
volatile components of two Zingiberales from the Central
African Republic. Journal of Essential Oil Research 6: 161–164.
88. Mishra, A., Kumar, R., Bhargava A., Sharma, B., Pandey, AK.,
(2011)., Studies on in vitro antioxidant and antistaphylococcal
activities of some important medicinal plants., Cell Mol Biol
(Noisy-le-grand) 2011 Feb 12;57(1):16-25.
89. Mishra P (2009) Isolation, Spectroscopic characterization and
molecular modelling studies of the mixture of curcuma long,
ginger and seeds of fenugreek. Int. J. PharmTech. Res. 1: 79-95
90. Mohandas TP, Pradeep Kumar T, Mayadevi P, Aipe KC and
Kumaran K (2000) Stability analysis in ginger (Zingiber
officinale Rosc.) genotypes. Journal of Spices and Aromatic
Crops 9: 165–167.
91. Moore, S and Stein, W H (1984) In: Methods in Enzymol (Eds.
Colowick, S P and Kaplan, N D) Academic Press New York 3
468.
92. Morinaga T, Fukushima E, Kano T, Maruyama Y, Yamasaki Y.
(1929). Chromosome numbers of cultivated plants II. Bot Mag
Tokyo. 43(515):589–594.
93. Motawi TK., Hamed MA., Shabana MH., Hashem RM., Naser
AFA., (2011)., Zingiber officinale acts as a nutraceutical agent
against liver fibrosis., Nutrition and Metabolism (Lond). 2011;
8: 40.
94. Mowforth, M. A. and Grome, J. P. (1989). Intra-population
variation in nuclear DNA amount, cell size and growth rate in
Poa annua L. Funct. Econl. 3: 289-295.
95. Muralidharan A and Kamalam N (1973) Improved ginger means
foreign exchange. Indian Farming 22: 37–39.
96. Muralidharan A (1974). Suitability of different varieties of
ginger for spice trade development and prospects of spice
industry in India. Symp. Prac. Mysore, India.
97. Nafi,A., Foo,H. L., Jamilah,B. and Ghazali,H. M. (2013);
Properties of proteolytic enzyme from ginger (Zingiber
officinale Roscoe)., International Food Research Journal 20(1):
363-368
98. Naidu MM, Padma M, Yuvaraj KM and Murty PSS (2000)
Evaluation of ginger varieties for high altitude and tribal area of
Andra Pradesh. Spices and Aromatic Plants: Challenges and
opportunities in the new century. Centennial conference on
spices and aromatic plants, 20–23 Sept. 2000, Calicut, Kerala,
India, pp. 50–51.

214
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

99. Nair RR. (2016) Variation in pollen fertility and chromosome

number among germplasm collections of ginger (Zingiber
officinale Rosc.), Caryologia, 69:1, 73-81
100. Natarajan CP, Kuppuswamy S, Shankaracharya NB, Padmabai
R, Raghavan B, Krishnamurthy MN, Khan F, Lewis YS and
Govindarajan VS (1972) Chemical composition of ginger
varieties and dehydration studies of ginger. Journal of Food
Science and Technology 9: 120–124.
101. Naveena, B. M., S. K. Mendiratta, and A. S. R. Anjaneyulu.
(2004). Tenderization of buffalo meat using plant proteases from
Cumumis trigonus Rosb (Kachri) and Zingiber officinale Roscoe
(ginger rhizome). Meat Sci. 68:363–369.
102. Nayak S, Naik PK, Acharya L, Mukherjee AK, Panda PC, Das
P. (2005). Assessment of genetic diversity among 16 promising
cultivars of ginger using cytological and molecular markers. Z
Naturforsch C 60. (5–6):485–492.
103. Nwinuka, N.M., Ibeh, G.O., Ekeke, G.I. (2010). Proximate
composition and levels of some toxicants in four commonly
consumed spices. J. Of Appl. Sci. Env. Manag. 9(1),150-155.
104. Ohtsuki, K., Taguchi, K., Sato, K. and Kawabata, M. (1995).
Purification of ginger proteases by DEAE-sepharose and
isoelectric focusing. Biochemica et Biophysica Acta 1243: 181-
184.
105. Okolo, S., Olutayo, C.O., OIdowu, I., Adedayo, A.B., BIkokoh,
Orishadipe, P.P., Abayomi, T. (2012). Comparative proximate
studies on some Nigerian food supplements. Ann. Biol. Res.
3(2),773-779
106. Olubunmi B. Ajayi, Seun F. Akomolafe, and Funmilayo T.
Akinyemi., (2013)., Food Value of Two Varieties of Ginger
(Zingiber officinale) Commonly Consumed in Nigeria Hindawi
Publishing Corporation., ISRN Nutrition., Volume 2013, Article
ID 359727, 5 pages
107. Onyenekwe PC and Hashimoto S (1999) The composition of the
essential oil of dried Nigerian ginger (Zingiber officinale
Roscoe). Eur. Food Res. Technol., 209: 407-410.
108. Oser BL., (1979), Physiological Chemistry., New York McGraw
Hill Inc., pp 702-705
109. Ozturk M, Ozturk FA, Duru ME and Topcu G (2007).
Antioxidant activity of stem and root extracts of Rhubarb
(Rheum ribes): An edible medicinal plant. Food Chemistry, 103:
623-630.

215
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

110. Parthasarathy VA, Chempakam B, Zachariah TJ (2008)

Chemistry of Spices. CAB International, Wallingford, UK, pp
70–93
111. Parthasarathy VA, Srinivasan V, Nair RR, Zachariah TJ.,
(2012)., Ginger: Botany and Horticulture. Hort. Rev. 39: 273-
388
112. Pattnaik, PK., Kar, D., Kuanar A., Sahu, A and Mishra, B.,
(2016), Molecular & Biochemical characterization of selected
elite accessions of Ginger, Biocatalysis and Agricultural
Biotechnology, 2016, 8 , 130-138.
113. Peter, K.V. Kandiannan, K. (1999)., Informatics on turmeric and
ginger. Indian Spices, 36(2&3): 12–14.
114. Peter KV, Nybe EV, Kurien A (2005). Yield gap and constrains
in ginger. In: Ravindran PN, Nirmal BK (Eds.) Ginger the genus
Zingiber (CRC Press, Bocaraton). pp. 527-532.
115. Phillips, S., Hutchinson, S., Ruggier, R., (1993). Zingiber
officinale does not affect gastric emptying rate. Anaesthesia 48
(5), 393–395.
116. Pillai K, Akhter J, Chua JC, Morris DL., (2013), Anticancer
properties of Bromelain with Therapeutic Potential in Malignant
Peritonial Mesothelioma., Journal of Cancer Investigation, 241-
250
117. Polasa K (2003) Ginger and its role in xenobiotic metabolism.
ICMR Bulletin 33: 58-63.
118. Prasad S, Tyagi AK., (2015), Ginger and it’s constituents., Role
in Prevention and Treatment of Gastrointestinal cancer,
Gastroenterology Research and Practice, Article ID 142979
119. Purseglove JW, Brown EG, Green CL and Robbins SRJ (1981)
Spices. vol. 2. New York, NY: Longman Inc.
120. Raghavan, T.S. ; Venkatasubban, K. R. (1943) Cytological
studies in the family Zingiberaceae with special reference to
chromosome number and cyto-taxonomy Proceedings of the
Indian Academy of Sciences, Section B, 17 (4). pp. 118-132.
ISSN 0370-0097
121. Rahman H, Karuppaiyan R, Kishore K, Denzongpa R, (2009);
Traditional Practices of Ginger Cultivation in Northeast India;
Indian Journal of Traditional Knowledge., Vol. 8(1); January
2009; pp 23-28
122. Rai S, Das AB, Das P. (1997). Estimation of 4C DNA and
karyotype analysis in ginger (Zingiber officinale Rosc.) – I.
Cytologia. 62(2):133–141.
123. Ramachandran K. (1982). Polyploidy induced in ginger by
colchicine treatment. Curr Sci. 51:288–289.

216
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

124. Rana N and Korla BN (2007) Evaluation of ginger germplasm

for yield and quality under mid hill conditions of Himachal
Pradesh. Haryana Journal of Horticultural Sciences 36: 393–394
125. Ratnambal MJ, Gopalam A and Nair MK (1987) Quality
evaluation in ginger (Zingiber officinale Rosc.) in relation to
maturity. Journal of Plantation Crops 15: 108–117.
126. Rattan RS, Korla BN and Dohroo NP (1988) Performance of
ginger varieties in Solan area of Himachal pradesh. In:
Satyanarayana G, Reddy MS, Rao MR, Azam KM and Naidu R
(eds) Proceedings of National seminar on Chillies, Ginger and
Turmeric. Cochin: Spices Board, pp. 71–73
127. Ravindran, P., Babu, K.N., (2004). Ginger: The genus zingiber
CRC Press
128. Ravindran PN, Nirmal Babu K and Shiva KN (2005) Botany and
crop improvement of ginger. In: Ravindran PN and Nirmal Babu
K (eds) Ginger – The Genus Zingiber. Boca Raton, FL: CRC
Press, pp. 15–85.
129. Ravindran PN, Remasree AB and Sherlija KK (1998)
Developmental Morphology of Rhizomes of Ginger and
Turmeric Final Report. ICAR Ad hoc Scheme. Calicut: Indian
Institute of Spices Research.
130. Ravindran PN, Sasikumar B, George JK, Ratnambal MJ, Nirmal
Babu K, Zachariah TJ and Nair RR (1994) Genetic recourses of
ginger (Zingiber officinale Rosc.) and its conservation in India.
Plant Genetic Resources News Letter 98: 1–4.
131. Rhedde, V., (1692), Zingiber Officinale Roscoe., Hortus Indicus
Malabaricus., Vol II
132. Rosengarten, F.J., (1969). The Book of Spices. Livingston Pub.
Co, PA.
133. Roser M, Johnson AT, Hanson L. (1997). Nuclear DNA amounts
in palms (Areaceae). Botanica Acta 110: 79±89.
134. Rout, G.R., Das, P. (2002). In vitro studies of ginger: A review
of recent progress In: recent progress is Medicinal Plants, Vol. 4
- Biotechnology and Genetic Engineering (Goril JN, Anand
Kumar P, Singh VK Eds.) Science Technology Publication,
USA, pp. 307-326.
135. Sadasivam S and Manikam A (1992). In : Biochemical Methods
for Agricultural Sciences., Wiley Eastern Limited., New Delhi.,
pp. 20-21
136. Sanpote P. (2004). Species diversity and chromosome number of
some Zingiberaceae in the region of Thailand. Paper presented
at: 13th Flora of Thailand Meeting.

217
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

137. Sasikumar B, Nirmal Babu K, Abraham J and Ravindran PN

(1992) Variability, correlation and path analysis in ginger
germplasm. Indian Journal of Genetics and Plant breeding 52:
428–431.
138. Sasikumar B, Ravindran PN and George JK (1994) Breeding
ginger and turmeric. Indian Cocoa, Arecanut and Spices Journal
18: 10–12.
139. Sasikumar B, Saji KV, Antony A, George JK, John Zachariah T
and Eapen SJ (2003) IISR Mahima and IISR Rejatha – two new
high yielding quality ginger (Zingiber officinale Rosc.). Journal
of Spices and Aromatic Crops 12: 34–37.
140. Sasikumar B, Saji KV, Ravindran PN and Peter KV (1999)
Genetic resources of ginger (Zingiber officinalle Rosc.) and its
conservation in India. In: Sasikumar B, Krishnamurthy B, Rema
J, Ravindren PN and Peter KV (eds) Proceedings of the National
Seminar on Biodiversity, Conservation and Utilisation of Spices,
Medicinal and Aromatic Plants. IISR, Calicut, pp. 96–100.
141. Schauenberg P, Paris F (1977). Guide to Medicinal Plants, Keats
Publishing, New Canaan CT. p. 30-300
142. Sean R. G, Edward J. C and Robert T. L., (Jul., 1986), Plant
Physiology., Vol. 81, No. 3 ; pp. 869-874
143. Sebranek JG, Sewalt BJ, Robbins KL and Houser TA (2005).
Meat Sci., 69(2): 289
144. Sekiwa-Iijima Y, Aizawa Y and Kubota K (2001). Geraniol
dehydrogenase activity related to aroma formation in ginger
(Zingiber officinale Roscoe). J. Agric. Food Chem., 49: 5902-
5906.
145. Shamina, A., Zacharia, T.J. , Sasikumar, B. , George, J.K.
(1997). Biochemical Variability in Selected Ginger ( Zingiber
officinale Rosc.) Germplasm accessions. J. of Spice. and
Aroma.Crop. 6 (2) , 119-127.
146. Sharma AK, Bhattacharya NK. (1959).Cytology of several
members of Zingiberaceae. La Cellule. 59:297–346.
147. Sharma, P.K., Singh, V., Ali, M., (2016), Chemical Composition
and Antimicrobial Activity of Fresh Rhizome Essential Oil of
Zingiber Officinale Roscoe., Pharmacognosy Journal, Vol 8,
Issue 3., pp 185-189.
148. Sharma Y. (2017). Ginger (Zingiber officinale) – an elixir of life
a review. Pharma Innov J. 6(10):22–27.
149. Shobana S, Naidu KA (2000). Antioxidant activity of selected
Indian spices. Prostaglandins Leukotrienes and Essential Fatty
Acids. 62: 107-110.

218
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

150. Singh AK (2001) Correlation and path analysis for certain metric
traits in ginger. Annals of Agricultural Research 22: 285–286.
151. Singh G, Kapoor IS, Singh P, Heluani CS, Lampasona MP and
Catalan CAN (2008). Chemistry, antioxidant and antimicrobial
investigation on essential oil and oleoresine of Zingiber
officinale. Food Chem. Toxicol., 46: 3295-3302Stebbins GL.
1971. Chromosomal evolution in higher plants. London (GB):
Edward Arnold (Publishers).
152. Singh PP, Singh VB, Singh A and Singh HB (1999) Evaluation
of different ginger cultivars for growth, yield and quality
character under Nagaland condition. Journal of Medicinal and
Aromatic Plant Sciences 21: 716–718.
153. Škorničková JL, Šida O, Jarolimova V, Sabu M, Fer T,
Travnicek P, Suda J. (2007). Chromosome numbers and genome
size variation in Indian species of Curcuma(Zingiberaceae). Ann
Bot. 100(3):505–526
154. Smith M, Hamill KSD, Goel BJ, Severn-Ellis AA. (2004).
Ginger (Zingiber officinale) autotetraploids with improved
processing quality produced by an in vitro colchicine treatment.
Australian J Exp Agri. 44(10):1065–1072.
155. Stace CA. (2000). Cytology and cytogenetics as a fundamental
taxonomic resource for the 20th and 21st centuries. Taxon.
49(3):451–477.
156. Stankovic MS., (2010)., Total Phenolic content, Flavonoid
concentration and Antioxidant activity of Marrubium
peregrinum L. extracts., Kragujevac J. Sci. 33 (2011) 63-72.
157. Stebbins GL. (1971). Chromosomal evolution in higher plants.
London (GB): Edward Arnold (Publishers).
158. Stirling GR, Smith MK, Stirling AM (2009) Rhizome rot of
ginger caused by Pythium myriotylum: the first record of this
disease in Australia. Proceedings, Fifth Australasian Soilborne
Diseases Symposium, Thredbo, 5–7 February 2009, pp. 73–75.
159. Sugiura T. (1928). Chromosome numbers in some higher plant I.
BotBot Mag (Tokyo). 42(503):504–506.
160. Suhaj M (2006). Spice antioxidants isolation and their antiradical
activity: a review. Journal of Food Composition and Analysis,
19: 531-537.
161. Sweetman, S.C., (2007). Martindale: The Complete Drug
Reference. 35th Edn., Pharmaceutical Press, Chicago, London,
ISBN: 10: 0853697043, pp: 3322
162. Tal M. (1980). Physiology of polyploids. In: Lewis WH, editor.
Polyploidy. New York, NY: Plenum Press; p. 61–75.
163. Taussig SJ, Batkin S. J (1988) ;Ethnopharmacol; 22:191-203.

219
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

164. Thompson, E. H., Wolf, I. D. and Allen, C. E. (1973). Ginger

rhizome: a new source of proteolytic enzyme. Journal of Food
Science 38: 652-655.
165. Tiwari SK (2003) Evaluation of ginger genotypes for yield and
quality attributes under rain fed and irrigated conditions. Annals
Annals of Agricultural Research 24: 512–515.
166. Valsala, P.A., Nair, G.S., Nazeem, P.A (1996). Seed Set in
ginger (Zingiber Officinale Rosc.) through in-vitro pollination.,
Journal of Tropical Agriculture, 34, 81-84
167. Verma SK, Singh J, Khamesra R(1994). Effect of ginger on
platelet aggregation in man. Indian J. Med. Res., 98: 240-242.
168. Vernin G and Parkanyl C (2005) Chemistry of ginger. In:
Ravindran PN and Nirmal Babu K (eds) Ginger – The Genus
Zingiber. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press, pp. 87–180.
169. Vernin G and Parkanyl C (1994) Ginger oil (Zingiber officinale
Roscoe). In: Charalambous G (ed.) Spices, Herbs and Edible
Fungi. Amsterdam: Elsevier Science, pp. 579–594.
170. Virtual Amrita Laboratories Universalizing Education; (2011);
Separation of Amino Acids by Thin Layer Chromatography.
171. Srinivasan V, Thankamani CK, Dinesh R, Kandiannan K and
Rajeev P, (2008) Ginger (Extension Pamphlet). Indian Institute
of Spices Research, Kalicut. 2008; 1
172. Wagesho Y., Chandravanshi BS., (2015), Levels if essential and
non essential metals in ginger (Zingiber Officinale) cultivated in
Ethiopia., SpringerPlus 4: 107
173. Wang L, Gao F, Xu K, Li X. (2014). Natural occurrence of
mixploid ginger (Zingiber officinale Rosc.) in China and its
morphological variations. Sci Hortic. 172(1):54–60.
174. Watanabe K, Yahara T, Denda T, Kosuge K. (1999).
Chromosomal evolution in the genus Brachyscome (Asteraceae,
Astereae): statistical tests regarding correlation between changes
in karyotype and habit using phylogenetic information. J Plant
Res. 112(2):145–161.
175. Weeden, N.F. , Weeden, R.C. (1985). Identification of apple
cultivars by Isozyme phenotypes. J.Americ. Soc. Horti. Sci. 110,
509-515.
176. Winterton D and Richardson K (1965). Constituents of
Queensland-grown ginger. Queensl. J. Agric. Anim. Sci., 22(2):
205-214.
177. Wohlmuth H, Smith MK, Brooks LO, Myers SP and Leach DN
(2006) Essential oil composition of diploid and tetraploid clones
of ginger (Zingiber officinale Roscoe) grown in Australia.
Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 53: 5772–5778.

220
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

178. Yen GC, Duh PD and Tsai CL (1993). Relationship between

antioxidant activity and maturity of peanut hulls. J. Argic. Food
Chem., 41: 67-70.
179. Yoshikawa, M., Hatakeyama, S., Chatani, N., Nishino, Y. &
Yamahara, J. (1993). Qualitative and quantitative analysis of
bioactive principles in Zingiberis Rhizoma by means of high
performance liquid chromatography and gas liquid
chromatography. On the evaluation of Zingiberis Rhizoma and
chemical change of constituents during Zingiberis Rhizoma
processing. Yakugaku Zasshi. 113: 307–315.
180. Zachariah TJ, Sasikumar B and Ravindran PN (1993) Variability
in gingerol and shogaol content of ginger accession.
IndianIndian Perfumer 37: 87–90
181. Zancan KC, Marques MOM, Petenate AJ and Meireles MAA
(2002). Extraction of ginger (Zingiber officinale Roscoe)
oleoresin with CO2 and co-solvents: a study of the antioxidant
action of the extracts. J. Supercritical Fluids, 24: 57-76.
182. Zatsepina OV, Poliakov VL, Chentsov LS (1988)., Differential
Condensation of Mitotic Chromosomes during the Hypotonic
treatment of cells as a possible cause of G-Banding., Tsitologiia;
1988, Oct; 30(10) : 1172-9
183. Zhang Y., Wang H.,TaoTao L., Huang A.-X., (2015); Milk-
clotting mechanism of Dregea sinensis Hemsl. protease.,J. Dairy
Sci.; 98 (26506540): 8445-8453

Sourav Bhattacharjee
Department of Botany, Pandit Deendayal Upadhyaya Adarsha
Mahavidyalaya, Tulungia, North-Salmara, Bongaigaon, Assam –
783383
Chetana Hasnu
Department of Botany, Pandit Deendayal Upadhyaya Adarsha
Mahavidyalaya, Tulungia, North-Salmara, Bongaigaon, Assam –
783383

221
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 17

REFLEXIVITY IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH: A

COMPREHENSIVE ROADMAP

Sanjit Debnath

Abstract:
The dynamic and transformational significance of reflexivity in
qualitative social science research is examined in this article.
Originating from critical methodological discourses, the narrative
questions conventional dichotomies and promotes research as a team
effort rather than an individual pursuit. Reflexivity is portrayed as a
developed aptitude through formal instruction and practice, allowing
researchers to actively participate in structured introspection. The
story reveals the complex interaction between self-awareness and
personal perspective, highlighting its significance in different study
approaches including field research, phenomenology, and
ethnography. Reflexivity plays a crucial role in several aspects of the
research process, including formulating research questions, designing
methodologies, influencing data collecting and analysis, and forming
closing thoughts. It acts as a guiding concept throughout. The
statement reveals the researcher's ability to accurately determine their
own position during the process of gathering data, effectively manage
power dynamics, and raise ethical concerns. The essay emphasises the
investigation of subject-object relationships in reflexivity during data
interpretation and highlights its crucial significance in shaping
research results. The paper argues for the consistent inclusion of
reflexivity in qualitative social science research, emphasising its role
not just in individual comprehension but also in the overall generation
of knowledge in the area.

222
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Key words: Reflexivity, Qualitative Research, Transformative Role,

Collaborative Research, Subjectivity.

Introduction:
he conceptual foundations of reflexivity in qualitative
research are complex
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.17 and open to several interpretations
(Finlay, 2002). Despite these complexities, a popular
narrative contends that critical methodological discourses
—especially those that address the complex relationships between
objectivity, representation, and researcher power—are the source of
reflexivity (Koch & Harrington, 1998; Lincoln & Denzin, 1994;
Mruck & Mey, 2007; Pillow, 2003). Charmaz (2003) argues that
qualitative research narratives can be ambiguous and may conceal the
intricate role of researchers and participants in shaping the results.
The idea of simultaneous presence and mutual influence between the
researched and the researcher is central to this discourse, which
argues for a rethinking of research as a collaborative rather than a
unilateral endeavour (Cutcliffe, 2003; Mallory, 2001). But the idea of
reflexivity has evolved through a variety of research traditions, such
as feminist research, hermeneutic phenomenology, and ethnography,
where it has been appropriated and adapted to provide a wide range of
definitions and typologies (Neill, 2006).

Comprehending the complex goals and methods of reflexivity

requires a sophisticated knowledge of this conceptual setting, which
has been outlined in an extensive analysis of relevant literature
(Breuer, 2000; Chesney, 2001; McGhee et al., 2007; Mruck & Mey,
2007; Sword, 1999; Walsh, 2003). Fundamentally, reflexivity seeks to
increase the openness and reliability of research projects, while its
application depends on several additional variables. This includes the
different ways that researchers and participants interact, how research
changes over time, and the different methods used to handle the
researcher's impact, like staying neutral or recognizing their influence.
Also, the understanding of how researchers can affect the outcome of
a study is sometimes seen as a problem caused by personal opinions,
but other times it is seen as a helpful reflection of how knowledge is
created together with others (Finlay, 2002 and Mruck & Mey, 2007).

223
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Understanding Reflexivity
According to Wilkinson (1988), researchers who practise research
reflexivity take stock of their own researcher identity, consider the
influence of their own subjectivities and biases on the research
process, and consider how their own worldview interacts with the
study. While positionality addresses the researcher's opinions and
expertise, reflexivity centres on the judgements that are derived from
the information at hand. It is a way of thinking analytically that makes
researchers question the value, ethics, and practicality of their study's
subjects and techniques by making them think critically about their
motivations and procedures (Willig, 2013). The core question that the
reflective process revolves around, as stated by Lazard and McAvoy
(2020, p. 177), is, "What is the research process, and how am I
influencing it?" Researchers are involuntarily subjected to a continual
process of "disciplined self-reflection" (Wilkinson, 1988; Barrett et
al., 2020) due to the seemingly endless flow of questions posed to
them.

"Reflection" and "reflexivity" are not the same thing, even if you
could see them on a continuum (Shaw, 2010). Consciously and
proactively acknowledging one's own beliefs, prejudices, and judging
systems is an integral part of reflexivity throughout the whole
research process. The second stage of research, reflection, takes place
after the fact and sheds light on details that were first unseen. For this
reason, reflexivity is much more likely to guide the research process
than any particular research theory or technique.

Reflexivity in Research Methodology

Qualitative research that portrays research relationships and
contributes to the accumulation of knowledge is characterised by
reflexivity. As part of the process, researchers should consider both
the knowledge they make and their own contributions to that body of
knowledge. According to Denzin and Lincoln (1994, as quoted in
Padgett, 2017: 7), researchers in the qualitative social sciences
fundamentally deviate from realism when they question the existence
of objective observations separate from the observer and the
observed. Rather than being an inherent, unchanging thing, reality is
said to be formed via the interpretative lenses of human knowledge
and understanding, according to this paradigm shift (Braun and
Clarke, 2013). Here, knowledge is positioned, contextualised, and
shaped by the knower's views, which include their beliefs, values,
interests, and the unique conditions of the research process (Corlett
and Mavin, 2018).

224
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

This philosophical position highlights the importance of reflexivity as

a tool for acknowledging and explaining the subjectivity inherent in
research. Every step of the study process is impacted by the
researchers' own views and interpretations, which are not objective.
Because of this, qualitative research methods must always take
subjectivity into account (Corlett and Mavin, 2018).The idea of
reflexivity is central to and understood via several theoretical
frameworks in the social sciences. These frameworks, which will be
explained in more detail later, offer detailed insights into how
reflexivity works in qualitative research, enhancing our knowledge of
the complex connection between the researcher and the subjects being
studied.

In field research, ethnographers, generally outsiders, now see

themselves as members of the studied community. As part of this
paradigm shift, they will be reporting on their experiences as insiders
while critically examining the development and use of communal
knowledge (Finlay, 2002). The unique emphasis of reflexivity within
phenomenological theories is on examining the researcher's
subjectivity, which is an essential part of studying the subject-object
interaction. This dependency draws attention to how the subject's
presence is entangled with the object, making an investigation into the
formulation of interpretations and the construction of knowledge
necessary (Finlay, 2002).This increased level of consciousness leads
the researcher to engage in self-reflection on their beliefs and
prejudices, while making a conscious attempt to exercise control over
these effects. Reflexivity is crucial for placing the researcher in a
neutral position, as stated by Pillow (2010).

In contrast to the traditional inward focus on individuals, social

constructionists argue for a broader view of subjectivity. They favour
a more external approach, shifting the emphasis of qualitative
research to focus on language, interactions, and shared meanings.
When seen through the lens of social constructionism, qualitative
research becomes a "co-constituted account" in which participants
work together to build meaning (Finlay, 2002).A watershed point in
the history of social scientific research occurred in the 1970s, when
the researcher/researched dyad became prominent. Scholars started to
identify qualitative distinctions between insider and outer work (De
Andrade, 2000). There has a long-standing bias in favour of praising
external research and condemning internal studies for lack of rigour
(Hallawell, 2006). A re-evaluation of research neutrality has been

225
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

prompted by the increasing involvement of feminist and minority

race/ethnic scholars in examining their inner communities. In order to
provide an unbiased analysis of data collected from members of their
own communities, insider researchers must submit to rigorous
examination, as Pillow (2010) highlights.

This shift in viewpoint calls into question the conventional

dichotomies that have been established and highlights the significance
of comprehending subjectivity in the field of social scientific
research. The need of managing the nuances of subjectivity,
establishing transparency in the research process, and keeping a
watchful posture against the possible infiltration of biases and
prejudices is highlighted by this.

Applying Reflexivity to the Process of Doing Research in Social

Sciences
In order to show how reflexivity is seamlessly integrated into the
research process, the authors provide a thorough "beginner's guide"
that is designed to help with reflexivity in different parts of social
science research. The major emphasis of these suggestions is on
things that researchers may do to make their qualitative and
quantitative studies more reflective. It must be acknowledged that the
implementation of these proposals frequently requires the
participation of several parties. As highlighted by Evans et al. (2022),
the effective implementation of these approaches may necessitate
cooperation among funders, journals, editors, and other interested
parties. The author acknowledges that research is inherently a team
endeavour and stresses the significance of everyone pitching in to
create a reflective research atmosphere.Researcher interested in
developing a reflective approach can find practical insights in the
following guide, which is designed to serve as a foundational resource
for researchers starting the road to include reflexivity into their work.

Exploring the Role of Reflexivity in Shaping Research Questions

and Methodological Designs
The substantial impact that reflexivity has on the formation of
research questions and methodological designs in numerous fields of
study has come to be acknowledged as a crucial component of
qualitative research. Reflexivity is a deliberate attempt to scrutinise
the motives and decisions made during the research process.
According to Pillow (2010), researchers must consciously
contemplate the reasons for selecting a given topic above others, why
they are concentrating on a particular demographic, and what factors

226
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

contribute to the chosen research topics being both intriguing and

pertinent. This process of introspection not only illuminates the biases
and preconceptions of the researcher, but also enhances the depth and
context of the research. Magnusson and Marecek (2012) highlight that
reflexivity plays a crucial role in recognising that information is
intrinsically biassed and influenced by personal interests. This
suggests that there are fundamental factors and motivations that
influence the development of particular research inquiries. Reflexivity
serves as a means to expose these interests and prejudices, so
enhancing the transparency and self-awareness of the research
process.

Throughout the process of initiating, designing, and formulating

research questions, it is crucial to engage in internal reflection and
discussions with other stakeholders, such as participants, coworkers,
and persons with unique viewpoints that may contrast with the
research's framework. Juul et al. (2018) emphasise the importance of
this method in guiding research away from voyeuristic stances and
preventing the perpetuation of marginalisation or othering processes.
The level of thought and contemplation that is urged here is not
limited to one particular step of the research cycle, but rather spans
several phases, including the formulation of research questions, the
processing of data, and the application of research findings (Filipe et
al., 2017).

This methodical and reflective approach is equally applicable in the

domain of participant hiring procedures. Through the implementation
of this degree of deliberation, scholars strive to guarantee that
recruitment materials do not unintentionally perpetuate detrimental
stereotypes or utilise language that may be considered objectionable.
For example, gender-focused research advocates for the critical
examination and avoidance of discriminatory language (Lefkowich,
2019). In the field of disability research, avoidance of ableist
language is of equal importance, as it can contribute to the
perpetuation of misconceptions and the reinforcement of
stigmatisation.

Researchers employ reflective approaches to negotiate the intricate

nature of subjectivity, recognising the presence of biases, whether
they are openly expressed or hidden behind the appearance of
objectivity. By incorporating reflexivity into the development of
research questions and methodological designs, researchers cultivate a
more intentional, self-aware, and nuanced approach to their

227
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

investigations, thereby strengthening the reliability and genuineness

of their research endeavours.

The Data Collection Phase: A Reflexive Exploration

The data collecting stage is an essential step in qualitative research
since it is at this time that researchers must carefully explore the ever-
changing landscape of self-location and their position. This reflection
explores the deep significance of reflexivity throughout the data-
collection stage, illuminating the complex interplay of the researcher's
personality, the study setting, and the complex interactions developed
during the course of the research.

Reflexivity, a fundamental aspect of qualitative research, encourages

a thorough analysis of the researcher's internal thoughts and exterior
interactions while collecting data. This approach goes beyond simple
observation, as researchers must actively notice how their presence
and behaviours impact the evolving study scenario (Fook, 1999;
Barrett et al., 2020). Conversations with participants, colleagues, and
those providing opposing ideas are all part of this internal dialogue,
which goes beyond the researcher's immediate thinking (Jull et al.,
2018). The goal is to avoid imaginative research practices that might
unintentionally cast the study's subjects in a negative light.

The investigation of self-location throughout the participant recruiting

process provides a striking illustration. This reflective analysis goes
beyond the practical elements of recruiting, exploring the language
and images used. According to Lefkowich (2019), researchers that
practise reflexivity make sure that recruiting materials do not include
biassed language or negative preconceptions. The use of reflexivity is
evident at every stage of the research cycle, encompassing the
formulation of questions and the analysis of data (Filipe et al., 2017).
The process of reflexivity during data collection extends beyond
technical issues and deeply influences the relationship between the
researcher and the participant. The researcher, who is actively
observing, becomes very aware of the tiny changes between personal
and professional responsibilities (Day, 2012). During these instances,
reflexivity exposes the complex interaction between the perspectives
of those who are part of a group and those who are not, therefore
questioning the idea of a predetermined position for the researcher
(Eppley, 2006). The process is a continuous negotiation, a dynamic
exchange that develops via interaction and shared comprehension
among the parties.

228
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

As the researcher explores the concept of fluid self-location, the

emergence of power dynamics becomes a crucial focus. The
recognition of power imbalances within both the specific interviewing
situation and the larger social and cultural settings becomes crucial
(Day, 2012). When it comes to managing power dynamics,
empowering study participants, and working together, reflexivity
serves as the researcher's ethical compass (Day, 2012).
The purpose of this reflective inquiry during the data-collection stage
is, in essence, to pay tribute to the researcher's ongoing engagement
with their own subjectivity. It is an admission that the research
journey is not a fixed path but rather a fluid and ever-changing story.

Analysing and Interpreting Data with Reflexivity

An integral part of reflexivity in qualitative research is its ability to
permeate all phases of the process, from conceptualization and data
collecting to the complex domains of analysis and interpretation.
Throughout this process, there is an ongoing interplay between the
researcher's awareness of themselves, their presumptions, and their
developing knowledge of the phenomena under study.Keeping in
mind that the researcher's biases affect all parts of the study is crucial.
Reflectivity, as persuasively suggested by Finlay (2002), encourages
researchers to examine their own interpretations with a critical eye,
seeing the complex relationship between the knower and the known
as they progress through the analytical process. Researchers must
possess this self-awareness to navigate the challenges of analysing
vast and varied datasets.

Reflectivity's underlying subject-object analysis is reminiscent of the

philosophical traditions that Mead clarified by separating the "me"
(known) from the "I" (knower) (Kondrat, 1999). This paradigm helps
researchers to objectively assess their judgements and learn how their
subjective viewpoints impact the analytical process.Reflexivity in
data analysis encompasses more than just self-reflection; it also
involves adopting a wide range of viewpoints. As the researcher
participates in the multifarious work of data interpretation, the
recognition of their own preconceptions becomes a compass directing
them to notice the potential biases entrenched in their analytical
process.Difficulties arise when the researcher, even with good
intentions, unintentionally incorporates their own perspective into the
interpretation. Pillow's (2003) work emphasises the importance of
being self-aware and cautious while interpreting data, warning against
the potential dangers of forcing one's own notions onto the
information. Nevertheless, these limitations provide chances to gain

229
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

valuable insights and a more profound comprehension of the

intricacies involved in qualitative analysis.

Incorporating reflexivity into data analysis enhances the transparency

and rigour of the research. A reflective method, which takes into
account the researcher's positionality and its influence on
interpretations, promotes a more detailed and contextually informed
analysis. The practice of reflexivity in data analysis illuminates the
path ahead, encouraging researchers to approach the complex
landscape of interpretation with modesty and self-awareness.
Researchers can get a greater knowledge of the phenomena they are
studying by adopting a reflective approach, which allows them to
explore new aspects of their data.

The Importance of Reflexivity in Framing and Conclusions

At the end of the academic journey, the researcher reaches a point
where they must make conclusions and frame their work. It is at this
stage that reflexivity becomes an important guiding principle. Within
the domain of conclusions, this process of self-reflection becomes
especially vital. Conclusions are not simply summaries, but rather
reflections of the researcher's interpretive position. Reflexivity serves
as the means to reveal the layers of subjectivity that are intertwined
inside these ultimate discoveries.

The formulation of research, similar to the arrangement of a painting,

entails intentional decisions that can greatly influence the depiction of
results. Reflexivity functions in this context as the artist's
consciousness of themselves, leading to a thorough analysis of the
researcher's stance and its consequences on the selected framework.
The researcher's viewpoint influences deliberate judgements about
what is included or removed, emphasised or disguised.An apt
illustration arises in conversations on the influence of political
ideology in academic discussions. Harper (2020) demonstrates how
ideological biases impact citation procedures, leading to a major
influence on the way results are presented. This observation triggers a
thorough analysis of how biases might influence not just the
substance of findings, but also the choice and attention given to
corroborating evidence.This statement becomes clearer when
considering a research study that examines gender prejudice in
academic employment. The work in question has received a
substantially larger number of citations compared to another paper
published around the same time, which has a stronger methodology
but contradicts the existence of gender bias (Honeycutt & Jussim,

230
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2020). This compels us to address relevant inquiries within our field

of study.

Conclusion
As we draw to a close, the narrative surrounding reflexivity in social
science research reveals itself to be a journey of profound change,
illuminated by the researcher's deliberate self-awareness. The
complex relationship between reflectivity and reflection, which is a
part of social constructionism, makes the researcher more aware of
subtleties in reflective practice and how to understand the experiences
of participants.Contrary to what some may believe, reflexivity is not
an innate talent but rather a skill that can be developed via formal
education and training (Mortari, 2015; Pillow, 2010).Conscious of the
profound influence on how the world is perceived and how the
experiences of others are interpreted, reflexivity is an indispensable
instrument in qualitative research that reveals the researcher's unique
perspectives and presence.
In its most basic form, this paper is a tribute to the generative
potential of reflexivity, and it advocates for the constant incorporation
of reflexivity within the paradigm of qualitative social scientific
research." Not only do researchers contribute to the development of
their own understanding, but they also contribute to the larger
landscape of knowledge production in the field of social science by
cultivating a continual conversation with their own experiences and
viewpoints.
References:
1. Barrett, B. J., et al. (2020). Thinking through the “audit cultures”
of self-study in teacher education. Studying Teacher Education,
16(1), 31-45.
2. Barrett, M., Braham, M., Clegg, S., et al. (2020). Engaging the
reflexive self in qualitative research. Organizational Research
Methods, 23(2), 547-565. doi:10.1177/1094428120906510
3. Breuer, F. (2000). Qualitative research methods for psychologists.
Sage Publications.
4. Braun, V., & Clarke, V. (2013). Successful qualitative research:
A practical guide for beginners. Sage.
5. Charmaz, K. (2003). Grounded theory: Objectivist and
constructivist methods. In N. K. Denzin & Y. S. Lincoln (Eds.),
Strategies of qualitative inquiry (pp. 249-291). Sage Publications.

231
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

6. Chesney, M. (2001). Reflections on reflexivity in qualitative

research: Studying maternal drug use. Journal of Advanced
Nursing, 33(3), 339-346.
7. Corlett, S., & Mavin, S. (2018). Feminist qualitative research: A
multiple-methods exploration of power and identity in the
workplace. Gender, Work & Organization, 25(4), 370-389.
doi:10.1111/gwao.12242
8. Cutcliffe, J. R. (2003). Methodological issues in grounded theory.
Journal of Advanced Nursing, 41(3), 268-277.
9. Day, A. M. (2012). Making the case for the “illusive” paradigm:
Reimagining education research with a focus on teaching.
Studying Teacher Education, 8(2), 155-170.
10. De Andrade, M. (2000). Insights from a public health
ethnography in Trinidad: From the inside out. Qualitative Health
Research, 10(4), 510-522. doi:10.1177/104973200129118628
11. Denzin, N. K., & Lincoln, Y. S. (1994). Handbook of qualitative
research. Sage.
12. Eppley, K. (2006). Identity and positionality: A critical reflection
on the emotional spaces from which I write. Qualitative Inquiry,
12(5), 828-846.
13. Filipe, A., Renedo, A., & Marston, C. (2017). The co-production
of what Knowledge, values, and social relations in health care.
PLoS Biology, 15(5),
e2001403.https://doi.org/10.1371/journal .pbio.2001403
14. Finlay, L. (2002). Negotiating the swamp: The opportunity and
challenge of reflexivity in research practice. Qualitative Research,
2(2), 209-230.
15. Fook, J. (1999). Critical reflection: A review of contemporary
literature and understandings. In Critical reflection in health and
social care (pp. 3-20). Open University Press.
16. Jull, J., et al. (2018). From expert to witness: Building and
embodying research relationships in arts-based self-study.
Studying Teacher Education, 14(2), 186-202.
17. Jull, J., Morton-Ninomiya, M., Compton, I., & Picard, A. (2018).
Fostering the conduct of ethical and equitable research practices:
The imperative for integrated knowledge translation in research
conducted by and with indigenous community members.

232
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Research Involvement and Engagement, 4(1), 1–9. https://doi.org/

10.1186/s40900-018-0131-1
18. Kondrat, M. E. (1999). A Meadian account of Kierkegaard’s
epistemology: The I/me dichotomy and the observer’s paradox.
Human Studies, 22(4), 453-476.
19. Hall, W. A., & Callery, P. (2001). Enhancing the rigor of
grounded theory: Incorporating reflexivity and relationality.
Qualitative Health Research, 11(2), 257-272.
20. Hallawell, S. (2006). The insider/outsider debate and American
Inuit. American Ethnologist, 33(4), 477-485. doi:10.1525/
ae.2006.33.4.477
21. Harper, C. A. (2020). Ideology-driven bias in evaluations of
scientific research: A brief report. Meta-Psychology, 4.
https://doi.org/10.15626/MP.2020.1808
22. Honeycutt, N., & Jussim, L. (2020). A citation analysis of the
similarity-attraction hypothesis. Collabra: Psychology, 6(1), 1-13.
https://doi.org/10.1525/collabra.273
23. Koch, T., & Harrington, A. (1998). Reconceptualizing rigour: A
sociological perspective of qualitative research. Journal of
Advanced Nursing, 28(4), 872-879.
24. Lazard, L., & McAvoy, J. (2020). Reflexivity in qualitative
research: Two students' perspectives. International Journal of
Qualitative Studies in Education, 33(3), 311-322.
doi:10.1080/09518398.2019.1611701
25. Lefkowich, M. (2019). When women study men: Gendered
implications for qualitative research. International Journal of
Qualitative Methods, 18, 1609406919872388. https://doi.org/
10.1177/1609406919872388
26. Lincoln, Y. S., & Denzin, N. K. (1994). Handbook of qualitative
research. Sage Publications.
27. Mallory, B. L. (2001). Constructing data in a qualitative project.
Qualitative Health Research, 11(2), 281-291.
28. Mortari, L. (2015). Reflectivity in Research Practice: An
Overview of Different Perspectives. International Journal of
Qualitative Methods, 14(5). https://doi.org/10.1177/
1609406915618045

233
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

29. McGhee, G., Marland, G., & Atkinson, J. (2007). Grounded

theory research: Literature reviewing and reflexivity. Journal of
Advanced Nursing, 60(3), 334-342.
30. Magnusson, E., & Marecek, J. (2012). Doing Interview-based
Qualitative Research: A Learner's Guide. Cambridge University
Press.
31. Mruck, K., & Mey, G. (2007). Grounded theory and reflexivity:
Methodological reflections and research practices. In A. Bryant &
K. Charmaz (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of grounded theory (pp.
213-235). Sage Publications.
32. Neill, J. (2006). Researching the reflection-into-action process in
novice teachers: A grounded theory study. Reflective Practice,
7(1), 5-17.
33. Padgett, D. K. (2017). Qualitative methods in social work
research (3rd ed.). Sage.
34. Pillow, W. (2003). Confession, catharsis, or cure? Rethinking the
uses of reflexivity as methodological power in qualitative
research. International Journal of Qualitative Studies in
Education, 16(2), 175-196.
35. Shaw, I. (2010). Reflexivity and the “Act of Research”.
Qualitative Social Work, 9(2), 195-214. doi:10.1177/
1473325009352093
36. Walsh, D. (2003). Ethical considerations in including vulnerable
adults in nursing research. Nursing Ethics, 10(3), 281-288.
37. Wilkinson, S. (1988). The role of reflexivity in feminist
psychology. Women's Studies International Forum, 11(5), 493-
502. doi:10.1016/0277-5395(88)90040-4
38. Willig, C. (2013). Introducing qualitative research in psychology.
McGraw-Hill Education.

Sanjit Debnath
Assistant Professor, Department of Sociology, Swarnamoyee
Jogendranath Mahavidyalaya, Amdabad, Purba Medinipur,
West Bengal, India, 721650

234
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Mob.no. 8116723172 - Mail Id- [email protected]

CHAPTER 18

SOCIO-ECONOMIC SURVEY AT UMPHREW

VILLAGE OF MAWLAI C & RD BLOCK

Sukkynjai Syiem and Deimayami Suchiang

Abstract:
This socio-economic survey delves into the multifaceted challenges
faced by Umphrew Village in the Mawlai C & RD Block of
Meghalaya. This study explores issues surrounding infrastructure,
education, and livelihood. The survey reveals critical concerns,
including deficient roadways, healthcare access hurdles, and
educational limitations, all of which underscore the urgent need for
targeted interventions. Through careful data collection and analysis,
this report sheds light on the socio-economic dynamics of Umphrew
Village and calls for collaborative efforts to uplift the community.

Key words: Socio-economic survey, Umphrew Village, infrastructure,

education, livelihood, rural development.

Introduction:

235
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

socio-economic survey is considered one of the most vital

sources of statistical data concerning household
expenditure, income, and other indicators reflecting
housing status, individual and household characteristics,
and living conditions. Socio-economic characteristics serve as crucial
tools for assessing measures of human development, representing an
individual's, family's, or group's economic and social standing based
on factors such as education, income, health, and occupation. Socio-
economic status stands as a pivotal determinant of livelihoods,
significantly influencing levels of knowledge, skills, and income that
underpin one's standard of living. People's lifestyles vary across
income groups due to differing consumption capabilities among
different segments of the population.

According to Dutton and Levine (1989), socio-economic status is "a

composite measure that typically incorporates economic status, as
gauged by income, social status, determined by education, and work
status, indicated by occupation."
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.18
Socioeconomic status remains a paramount concern in the
contemporary world, particularly within developing regions. Gradual
improvements have been observed in the socioeconomic status of
rural areas over time. Various programs and policies have been
instituted to elevate the socioeconomic status of rural populations.
However, from an economic perspective, equitable development
across rural regions remains a challenge. Even within a small village,
a spectrum of economic classes can be discerned. Prominent obstacles
to unlocking the potential of rural areas encompass issues like low
productivity, inadequate investment in agriculture and non-farm rural
employment, insufficient infrastructure, subpar occupational safety
and health conditions, as well as restricted or absent access to
services, including financial services.
This paper aims to present fundamental demographic data acquired
through fieldwork conducted in Umphrew Village, situated in the East
Khasi Hills District. The objective is to comprehend the demographic
makeup of this small population within specific socio-cultural and
economic contexts. The entire study is predicated upon primary data
collected through a door-to-door survey utilising a well-structured
questionnaire administered by the student social workers.
Research Methodology
This survey was conducted in Umphrew village, situated within the
Mawlai Block of East Khasi Hills District. The total population of this

236
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

village was 523, comprising 267 males and 256 females, distributed
across 111 households. Umphrew village is located 22 km away from
Shillong, the capital of Meghalaya. The primary occupation of the
village residents, including both the Khasi and Nepali communities, is
agriculture.
The village was divided into four distinct blocks or localities: Block
1, Block 2, Block 3, and Block 4 (Khlieh Shnong). The population for
this study was selected using a non-probability sampling technique of
purposive sampling. A total of 90 households were selected as sample
size for the survey. Data collection occurred over six days on March
10, 11, 17, 18, 24, and 27 of the year 2023. The data collection tools
included home visits, observation, and interviews. The survey
incorporated a mix of closed-ended and open-ended questions to
capture a range of information.
The aim of this survey is
 To study the socio-economic conditions of Umphrew Village
 To understand the challenges faced by the villagers.

The survey design adopted was a descriptive one, aimed at providing

an insightful overview of the village's socio-economic landscape.
The researchers conducted their interactions with the respondents
following approval from the Headman and Secretary of the village,
ensuring ethical considerations were met and appropriate permissions
were obtained.

Overall, the methodology employed in this survey effectively

combines purposive sampling, a detailed data collection process, and
careful consideration of ethical guidelines to gather a meaningful
dataset about the socio-economic dynamics of Umphrew village.

Major Findings of the Socio-Economic Survey

(A) Demographic Profile of the village: The study shows that 40
percent of the respondents are male and 60 percent are females in the
age groups which ranges from 20–70 years.11 percent of the
respondents belongs to the age groups of 20–28 years, 25 percent
belongs to the age groups of 48-55 years, 9 percent belongs to the age
groups of 55–68 years and 8 percent belongs to the age groups of 68–
70 years. It can be stated that most of the age groups are from 35–48
years. There are 4 religion prevalence in Umphrew village namely:
Catholic, Presbyterian, Church of God and Hindus. 48 percent of the
respondents are Catholics, 33 percent are Presbyterian, 6 percent are
Church of God and 13 percent are Hindus. Therefore, it can be stated

237
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

that most of the respondents are Catholics. All these three religions
are living in peace and harmony and there are no clashes among
different denominations.

As per the survey, 22 percent of the respondents are the illiterates

who have no educational qualifications at all, 76 percent of the
respondents are from classes 1 to 8, 1 percent of the respondents are
from classes 8 to 12 and 1 percent of the respondents are from classes
12 to Degree.Therefore, majority of the respondents with 76 percent
are from classes 1-8. More than half of the respondents with 56
percent are farmers, 7 percent of the respondents are teachers, 27
percent of the respondents are daily wagers and 10 percent of the
respondents are shopkeepers.

(B) Marital status: In this study, 80 percent of the respondents are

married, 17 percent are divorce and 3 percent are widows.So, it can
be stated that majority of the respondents with 80 percent are
married.The study shows that more than half of the respondents i.e,
51 percent have 2–5 children, 30 percent of the respondents have 5–8
children, 11 percent of the respondents have 1–2 children, 7 percent
of the respondents have 8–10 children and only 1 percent of the
respondents have 10–12 children.
(C) Profile of the family: Studies shows that 100 percent of the
respondents stays in nuclear family and none of them live in a joint
family or extended family.Almost half of the respondents with 48
percent have 4–8 members in the family, 41 percent have 1–4
members in the family and only 11 percent have 8–10 members in the
family. In this studies, almost half of the respondents with 47 percent
have 3–5 children below 18 years in the family, 40 percent have 1–3
children below 18 years in the family and 13 percent of the
respondents do not have any children below 18 years in the family.It
can be stated that 40 percent of the respondents have 1–3 youths
above 18 years in the family, 17 percent of the respondents have 3–5
youths above 18 years in the family and almost half of the
respondents with 43 percent does not have any youths above 18 years
in the family.It is seen that 20 percent of the bread earner are mothers,
28 percent of the bread earner are fathers, 44 percent of the bread
earners were both mothers and fathers and only 8 percent of the bread
earners are the children.Therefore, almost half of the family's bread
earners with 44 percent were both fathers and mothers.Majority of
the respondents with 70 percent did not have any older person in the

238
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

family, 17 percent of the respondents have only one older person in

the family and 13 percent of the respondents have two older persons
in the family .It is seen that only 6 percent of old age people have
received their old age pensions from the Government whereas, 24
percent of old age people did not received any old age pensions at all
from the Government.
(D) Community profile in general :
(i) Voter ID Card : Study depicts that 97 percent of the respondents
have their Voter ID Card and only 3 percent of the respondents have
lost their voter ID Card.Though only 3 percent of the respondents
have lost their voter ID Card, yet they have already applied for the
Card.Therefore, majority of the respondents with 97 percent have
their Voter ID Card. It can be stated that, 100 percent of the
respondents understands the importance of voting and their rights
during elections i.e, the Universal Adult Franchise.
(ii) Traditional healer : Umphrew village has only one traditional
healer which cures different types of diseases.The traditional healer is
not the local residents of the village, but she has stayed in Umphrew
village for 2 years.As per the evidence collected from the respondents
in table no.1 below, majority of the respondents with 89 percent
stated that the traditional healer has provided treatment for all types of
diseases whereas, only 11 percent of the respondents had stated that
the traditional healer has provided treatment based only on skin
diseases.

Table No.1 Traditional healer's treatment

Traditional healer's treatment Percentage
(a) Skin diseases 11%
(b) All types of diseases 89%

(iii) Hygiene and sanitation : Majority of the respondents with 89

percent have good and proper toilets, 7 percent of the respondents do
not have good toilets and only 4 percent of the respondents felt the
need for their toilets to be improved.

(iv) Water in the village: More than half of the respondents with 64
percent got sufficient water for drinking and for other useful
purposes, whereas 36 percent of the respondents do not get sufficient
water (Table No.2) because some of them stays very far from the
water sources and so it becomes very difficult for them to go and
fetch the water as it is very far from their houses and at the same time
they need to go for work in the morning and during day time as well,

239
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

they are not at home. From table No.3 it can be seen that almost half
of the respondents with 46 percent stated that the sources of drinking
water comes from tap water, 33 percent stated that the sources of
water comes from PHE pipe, 10 percent stated that the sources of
water comes from ponds, 4 percent stated that the sources of water
comes from Nongkohlew village and 7 percent says that the sources
of water comes from spring water.The water from these sources was
collected and tested by the researchers in the office laboratory.From
the tested report, it is clearly stated that the water is good for human
consumption and other purposes. There is no physical, chemical and
bacteriological contamination.

Table No.2 Water Sufficiency in the village

Water sufficiency in the Percentage
village
(a)Yes 64%
(b)No 36%
Table No.3: Sources of Drinking Water in Umphrew Village
Sources of drinking water Percentage
(a) Tap water 46%
(b) PHE pipe 33%
( c) Ponds 10%
(d) Nongkohlew village 4%
(e) Spring water 7%

(V) Public Transportation: Majority of the respondents with 87

percent said that public transportation is bad whereas 13 percent said
that public transportation needs to be improved and none of the
respondents said that public transportation in the village is
good(Table No.4).Almost all the households had complained about
the road which was very bad and has made the taxi drivers charged
them with heavy prices.As per the evidence collected from the
respondents in table No.5, it can be stated that majority of the
respondents with 70 percent said that there are 3–5 local taxis in the
village and 30 percent of the respondents said that there are 1–3 local
taxis in the village. When it comes to private vehicles, majority of the
respondents with 82 percent said that there are 5–10 private vehicles
in the village, 11 percent said that there are more than 10 private
vehicles and only 7 percent of the respondents said that there are 1–5
private vehicles in the village (Table No.6)

Table No.4: Public Transportation in the village

Public Percentage

240
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Transportation
(a) Bad 87%
(b) Needs to improve 13%

Table No.5: Number of Local Taxi in Umphrew Village

No of local taxi Percentage
(a) 1–3 local taxi 30%
(b) 3–5 local taxi 70%

Table No.6: Number of private vehicles

No. of private vehicles Percentage
(a) 1–5 7%
(b) 5–10 82%
(c ) 10 above 11%

(E) Education in the village: Education in Umphrew village is still

lacking behind as there is no proper infrastructure and the teaching
performance is still very poor which needs to be improved.The village
provides education to the children till Secondary Education. No
Higher Education was implemented in the village.There are three
schools at Umphrew village in general, they are : (i) Catholic School,
(ii) Presbyterian School and (iii) Umphrew SSA Secondary School.
The Catholic School has provided education from classes Nursery to
class Five, the Presbyterian School has provided education from
classes Nursery to class Four and the Umphrew SSA Secondary
School has provided education from classes Nursery to class Ten.The
village has one Government school and 2 Private schools.From
among all the three schools, only Umphrew SSA Secondary School
provides mid-day meals to the school students.

(i) Educational Infrastructure: Studies depicted that 9 percent of

the respondents said that the schools in Umphrew village has good
infrastructures, 78 percent said that school infrastructures needs to be
improved and 13 percent said that the school infrastructures is not
good at all.Therefore, it can be stated that majority of the respondents
with 78 percent said that the school infrastructures needs to be
improved. (Table No.7)

Table No.7 : Educational Infrastructures

Educational status in Umphrew schools Percentage
(a) Good 9%
(b) Needs to be improved 78%

241
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(c ) Not good at all 13%

(ii) Teachers Performance and Teaching: It can be seen in Table

No.8 that 24 percent of the respondents stated that the teacher's
performance and teaching in these schools are good, 60 percent of the
respondents said that the teacher's performance and teaching needs to
be improved, 6 percent of the respondents said that there are less
teachers in the schools that caters to the needs of the children and 10
percent of the respondents said that there are lack of trained teachers
in these schools.So, majority of the respondents with 60 percent said
that the teacher's performance and teaching needs to be improved in
all these 3 schools.

Table No.8 : Teachers performance and teaching

(a) Good 24%
(b) Needs to be improved 60%
(c ) Less teachers 6%
(d) Lack of trained teachers 10%
(iii) Percentage of school dropouts: As per the survey collected, it
can be stated that there are 32 percent of school dropouts.

(F) Schemes: There are various schemes that have been implemented
in Umphrew village. Some of these schemes are the MGNREGA
Scheme cum livestock scheme, PMAY-G Scheme (housing for the
rural poor), Electricity Scheme for the rural poor and Toilet
Scheme.So, majority of the respondents with 66 percent has received
the MGNREGA Scheme (100 days), 12 percent of the respondents
has received the PMAY-G Scheme, 3 percent of the respondents has
received the poor electricity scheme, 16 percent of the respondents
has received the toilet scheme and only 3 percent of the respondents
did not received any schemes at all.(See Table No.9)

Table No.9 : Names of the received Schemes

Schemes received by the respondents Percentage
MGNREGA Scheme & Livestock Scheme 66%
PMAY-G Scheme 12%
Saubhagya scheme 3%
Nirmal Bharat Abhiyan(NBA) 16%
None of the above 3%
(G) Challenges encountered by the villagers: There are various
challenges that the village has encountered. Some of the major
challenges are

242
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(a) Lack of healthcare institutions due to the absence of PHC, CHC,

Pharmacy and Dispensary in the village
(b) Challenges in terms of Educational Institutions as they do not
have Higher Education in the village
(c) Almost all the households had complained about the poor road
condition in the village which made it difficult to travel and this made
the taxi drivers charge them heavy prices.

Therefore, it can be stated that almost half of the respondents stated

that all Healthcare Settings, Educational institutions, Road and
Transportation are the major challenges that the village has
encountered.

Research Discussion
The survey unveiled a tapestry of challenges in Umphrew Village.
Principal concerns centred on inadequate infrastructure, particularly
substandard roads leading to transportation woes. The absence of
reliable public transport compounded the villagers' difficulties, with
only a handful of local taxis serving as a lifeline.
In terms of healthcare facilities, the absence of a nearby pharmacy or
clinic loomed large. Villagers were compelled to seek medical
attention at distant centres, often incurring exorbitant travel expenses.
The local Primary Health Center (PHC) in Mawsiatkhnam, while
geographically accessible, was effectively out of reach due to the lack
of convenient transportation.

The educational landscape bore its own set of challenges. The village
school, struggling due to insufficient maintenance and untrained staff,
led to diminished student enrollment. This undermined the potential
of education to uplift the community, resulting in a higher likelihood
of school dropouts due to limited access to quality education.

The findings underscore the urgency for intervention and

development. Key stakeholders must proactively address the
shortcomings in infrastructure, healthcare, and education. Improved
road networks, enhanced public transport, and accessible healthcare
services are imperative to elevate the village's living standards.
Furthermore, investing in the school's infrastructure and staffing can
rejuvenate the educational system, equipping children with a strong
foundation for the future.

Conclusion

243
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Socioeconomic disparities persist as a pressing global concern,

especially in rural contexts. While strides have been made, the
development trajectory remains uneven. In the microcosm of
Umphrew Village, diverse economic strata exist, predominantly
comprising lower-income individuals.

The student social workers' engagement with Umphrew Village

proved insightful and productive. Despite lacking robust
infrastructure, the village exudes a tranquil charm. The research
journey was both enriching and challenging, demonstrating the power
of mutual support in surmounting obstacles.

In summation, Umphrew Village epitomises the broader socio

economic struggle, highlighting the need for comprehensive, targeted
interventions. By addressing the identified challenges and nurturing
development, Umphrew can transcend its current limitations and
embark on a path of progress.

References:
1. Adler, N. E., Boyce, T., Chesney, M. A., Cohen, S., Folkman, S.,
Khan, R. L., & Syme, S. L. (1994). Socioeconomic status and
health: The challenge of the gradient. American Psychologist,
49(1), 15-24.
2. Cook, T. D., & Campbell, D. T. (1979). Quasi-experimentation:
Design & analysis issues in field settings. Boston, MA: Houghton
Mifflin.
3. Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation. (2023,
August 17). Socio-Economic Survey. Retrieved from
https://www.mospi.gov.in/socio-economic-survey
4. World Bank. (n.d.). IHSES Field Manual Introduction. Retrieved
from
https://microdata.worldbank.org/index.php/catalog/69/uudownloa
d/34703

Sukkynjai Syiem
Research Scholar, Department of Social Work- PG, St.Edmund's
College, Shillong
Mob.No. 9366214227, Email ID: [email protected]

244
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Deimayami Suchiang
Research Scholar, Department of Social Work-PG, St.Edmund's
College, Shillong
Mob.no. 9362175877, Email ID: [email protected]

CHAPTER 19

WORKFORCE DIVERSITY IN HIGHER

EDUCATION, KERALA – A CASE
STUDY ANALYSIS

Ms Aparna Swaminadhan & Dr Salini B Nair

Abstract:
Workforce diversity refers to similarities and variances among
employees based on age, cultural background, physical abilities and
disabilities, race, religion, gender, and sexual orientation. No two
people are alike. People differ not only in gender, culture, race, social
and psychological traits, but also in their viewpoints and prejudices.
For millennia, society discriminated based on these qualities. Higher
education is a valuable cultural and scientific asset that fosters human

245
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

development while also promoting economic, technological, and

societal transformation. According to the next generation of workers,
diversity and inclusion are the driving elements behind organizational
success. Human resource strategy should recognize the importance of
diversity and inclusion in talent management.

Key words: Diversity, Sustainability, Talent Management,

Performance, Values.

Introduction:
orkforce diversity refers to similarities and variances
among employees based on age, cultural background,
physical abilities and disabilities, race, religion, gender,
and sexual orientation. No two people are alike. People
differ not only in gender, culture, race, social and psychological traits,
but also in their viewpoints and prejudices. For millennia, society
discriminated based on these qualities. Diversity creates a diversified
workforce. In today's world, every organisation must employ a
diverse staff, however managing such a diverse workforce is a
significant issue for management. Ankita Saxena (2014) conducts a
critical analysis of workforce diversity and its impact on
organisational productivity. Diversity in the workplace is not a new
concept, but as more people, organisations, and politicians talk about
feminism, immigration, gender identity, and the gender pay gap,
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.19
studies show that the more diverse a workplace is, the more
successful it is, and organisations want to learn more about how to
increase and manage diversity. The difficulty is that, some 25 years
later, organisations have mainly failed to embrace a learning
orientation towards diversity and are still far from reaping its benefits.
Instead, business executives and diversity activists alike promote a
simple and scientifically unsupported interpretation of the business
argument. They misconstrue or ignore what abundant research has
now made clear: Increasing the numbers of traditionally under
represented people in your workforce does not automatically produce
benefits. Taking an “add diversity and stir” approach, while business
continues as usual, will not spur leaps in your firm’s effectiveness or
financial performance (Robin J. Ely and David A. Thomas, 2020).

Concept of Workforce Diversity

Higher education is a valuable cultural and scientific asset that fosters
human development while also promoting economic, technological,
and societal transformation. It encourages the interchange of

246
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

knowledge, research, and innovation while also providing students

with the skills required to compete in ever-changing job markets.
Higher education has evolved substantially over the last several
decades, with increased enrollment, student mobility, diversity of
provision, research dynamism, and technology. Approximately 235
million students are enrolled in universities around the world, a figure
that has more than doubled in the previous 20 years and is expected to
rise. Despite the surge in demand, the total enrollment ratio is 40%,
with significant variations across countries and regions.

More than 6 million students are continuing their studies abroad. And,
of the world's more than 82 million refugees, only 5% are engaged in
higher education, compared to 68% and 34% for primary and
secondary education (UNHCR). The COVID-19 epidemic further
interrupted higher education delivery (UNESCO report, 2023).Kerala
is a state blessed with huge resources in terms of literate demography,
particularly among young people, a large geographic and biological
area, a diversified and rich sociocultural community, and so on. The
state's geographic diversity has had a considerable impact on its
overall growth, particularly in terms of defining its higher education
character. Despite its tremendous geographic diversity, which ranges
from a vast coastline in the west to a high altitude mountain range in
the east, the state has expanded its wide range of higher education
avenues to all regional diversities of the state in order to include all
segments of the younger population under the umbrella of higher
education. Equity, excellence, and quality have been the government's
overriding aims in the education sector. The focus has been on
improving supply and access to quality education. As a result, India's
higher education system is one of the largest in the world, with over
600 universities and university-level institutions, as well as over
33,000 institutes. Education is on the 'concurrent list', and the states'
roles and obligations have essentially remained constant.

This case study focuses on important human resource management

difficulties in Kerala's higher education sector, including workforce
diversity, recruiting, selection, and retention, as well as talent
management diversity. This study also examines the recent
difficulties and benefits of workforce diversity in the Kerala
education sector. Finally, the study will attempt to give some
recommendations to policymakers based on comparative analysis of
the findings, with adequate rationale.

Proposed Model for Diversity and Sustainable Performance

247
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Data Source: AnniyaAigare, et.al (2011)

Conceptual Model Discussion
According to the next generation of workers, diversity and inclusion
are the driving elements behind organizational success. Human
resource strategy should recognize the importance of diversity and
inclusion in talent management. Because the workforce comes from
varied backgrounds, organizations must carefully establish policies
and procedures that support diversity and build a sense of community
for all employees (Srikant Chellappa 2023)

Diversity and inclusion are not simply buzzwords. In truth, both are
critical to the success of any organization. Diverse teams have been
proved to be more innovative, make better judgements, and provide
higher returns on investment. Fostering an inclusive workplace
increases employee engagement, reduces attrition, and improves
employee happiness. However, having a diverse workforce is only
one aspect of a flourishing company. It is critical to foster an
environment in which people are empowered and encouraged to
celebrate their diversity. When organizations promote an inclusive
culture, employees become more engaged and motivated. A varied
workforce brings together many viewpoints, talents, and experiences.
This encourages invention, creativity, and problem-solving skills.

248
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Furthermore, a diverse workforce is more likely to attract and retain

top talent, since people prefer organizations that prioritize their well-
being and growth (Fatma Bramly,2023).

In today's quickly changing market, knowing diversity and how it

affects talent management is critical for worldwide success.
Companies that thrive in this area have a willingness to foster
workplace diversity, as well as the capacity to attract and retain top
talent. It is a goal that is driving firms to coordinate their talent
strategies in order to meet diversity needs and boost their exposure as
diversity-focused employers. The diversity and inclusion plan of
Kellogg Company, the world's top cereal maker, is an excellent
example of the expanding attention. According to Kellogg's 2012
Diversity and Inclusion Annual Report, the company spent $380
million on diversity suppliers. Furthermore, the corporation allocated
85% of its philanthropic funds to varied and charitable organizations
serving marginalized populations. As a result of these efforts, the
Kellogg Company was designated one of DiversityInc's top 50
Diversity Companies (Audra Jenkins, 2023).

As organizations throughout the world struggle to fill open positions,

workplace diversity has emerged as a critical differentiator in talent
acquisition. According to a 2020 Glassdoor survey, 76% of job
seekers and employees believe that "a diverse workforce is an
important factor when evaluating companies and job offers".
Diversity and inclusion have risen to prominence in recent years.
More businesses are recognizing that having a diverse staff allows
them to recruit more talent, be more inventive, and enhance profits. In
fact, a McKinsey study in 2019 discovered that "companies in the top
quartile for gender diversity on executive teams were 25% more
likely to have above-average profitability than companies in the
fourth quartile."

Students experience increased empathy and gain a deeper

comprehension of lessons and people. Students gain a more open
mindset. Diversity in the classroom helps develop critical thinking
skills. Students are more equipped for a diversified workplace
environment. Students gain a sense of representation and inclusion.
Teaching pupils about diversity and cultural sensitivity promotes
respect for human life and introduces them to diverse customs
(Team,Varthana,2023).Gain new perspectives, expand your talent
pool, drive innovation, improve employee performance, and increase
profits (Culturalamp, 2023).Aligning diversity practices with distinct

249
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

organizational aims. Moving from design to implementation: Training

management, overcoming bias, and dealing with internal resistance
(Culturalamp,2023).Complicated disciplinary issues, Communication
and linguistic problems, observance of holidays Teamwork and
collaboration challenges, Individual differences(Culturalamp,2023).
Diversity among students in education has a direct impact on their
performance. Research indicates that pupils perform better in a
diversified atmosphere, allowing them to focus and push themselves
farther. Collaboration among individuals with diverse perspectives
fosters innovation and improves education (Queen’s University of
Charlotte, 2023). Improved student engagement and retention,
enhanced learning environments, more opportunities, and better
preparation for the "real" world (Interfolio from Elsevier, 2022).
Invest in outreach and pathways programs with K-12 schools that
serve diverse student populations and institutions. Emphasize student
adversity, resilience, and inspiration during admissions. Increase the
affordability for students. Create a helpful environment and provide
material support for pupils (Miguel, A,Cardona. James, Kvaal,2023).
Higher education leaders should collaborate with relevant state
entities and K-12 schools to develop strategies for recruitment,
admissions, financial assistance, completion, and climate (Miguel,
A,Cardona. James, Kvaal,2023). It promotes personal growth and a
healthy society. Diversity challenges stereotyped preconceptions; it
encourages critical thinking; and it helps students learn to
communicate effectively with people of varied backgrounds.It
strengthens both communities and workplaces. Goals include
increasing representational diversity, improving campus climate, and
fostering partnerships.It benefits communities and the workplace.
Goals include promoting diversity, improving campus climate, and
fostering partnerships (ACE, Board of directors.(2012)).

Diversity in higher education increases the overall learning

experience for students. Interacting with pupils from other
backgrounds exposes them to new ideas, cultures, and ways of
thinking. It promotes critical thinking, empathy, and open-
mindedness, allowing pupils to create a more comprehensive
worldview. This exposure encourages tolerance, respect, and
admiration for diversity, preparing pupils to thrive in a heterogeneous
society (Q,S,I,guage (2023)).

The benefits of diversity in education, particularly higher education,

are far-reaching, benefiting students' academic and social experiences
as well as their future prospects. Diversity benefits students by

250
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

allowing them to collaborate with people of different races,

nationalities, and cultural backgrounds, as well as question their pre-
existing beliefs. This increases awareness, understanding, and
acceptance of different ideas and cultures. Students can learn from
people from varied origins and upbringings thanks to culturally
diverse classroom and social interactions, which leads to improved
innovation and collaboration.A varied campus provides students with
everyday opportunities to connect with people from various
backgrounds, allowing them to learn to speak more effectively and
often differently than they are used to. Students are frequently raised
around others that share similar financial, racial, or cultural features.
When students are given the opportunity to critically examine their
experiences, they can become more accepting, tolerant, and
thoughtful members of society. Diversity on campus benefits students
in more ways than just having culturally different friends. They also
get to observe and experience a variety of leadership styles from
academics, staff, administrators, and community members. For many
students, it is an opportunity to witness someone from a similar
background whom they may mimic (Katie, Brown(2020)).

Higher education institutions are critical to the implementation of

sustainability concepts. Sustainability-based curricula and cultural
change are critical to mindset shift. Interdisciplinary studies are the
foundation of the change to sustainability. The political climate and
stakeholders' interests influence sustainability implementation. Higher
education institutions play an important role in sustainability. They
play an important role in educating future leaders who will help to
achieve the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).
The geography of SDG implementation is quite diverse, but it is
obvious that higher education institutions play a significant role in
developing a mindset that supports the transmission of SDG
principles.This viewpoint paper examines the effects of higher
education on sustainability, as well as the obstacles and barriers that
come with the process. Higher education makes a significant
contribution to the implementation of the SDGs, particularly Goals 1
(end poverty in all its forms everywhere), 3 (ensure healthy lives and
promote well-being for all at all ages), 5 (gender equality), 8 (decent
work and economic growth), 12 (responsible consumption and
production), 13 (climate change), and 16 (peace, justice, and strong
institutions). As a transformational agent, higher education has a huge
influence on students' habits and contributions to a prosperous
community.However, in order to effect the necessary change in
education, sustainability concepts must be central to higher education

251
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

strategy (e.g., curricula, modus operandi) and ingrained in

organisational culture. External influence in society can only be
achieved by setting a good example (for example, by implementing
SDG essential features such as gender equality, waste reduction, and
energy usage). For this to be a reality, diverse communication
strategies with students are needed (e.g., different student academic
levels). Nonetheless, key difficulties must be addressed both within
and outside of institutions, such as combining sustainability
principles, the political climate, and stakeholders' interests (Inga,
Žalėnienė. Paulo, Pereira (2021)). The outcome of above study states
that there is a relationship between sustainability, performance,
diversity and talent management.

Research Methodology
The research is a case analysis of workforce diversity in various
higher institutions of Kerala based on qualitative approach of
research. All the data have been collected from secondary sources
such as websites, reports, blogs, etc. The independent variable of the
research study is workforce diversity and dependent variables are
values, critical thinking skills, open mindness, cultural awareness,
diverse the work environment, individual differences, performance,
goals, values, missions, etc. The collected data have been analyzed
through narrative approach of research and conceptual model
development.

Result and Discussion

Results
The conceptual model-based case study on workforce diversity in
higher education enlightening the following factors which will helps
the student, faculty and staff fraternity to acquire and impart enhanced
values such as empathy, honesty, kindness, etc. in their behavior,
increased level of confidence. The diversity helps the students, staff
and open mindness and also foster their critical thinking skills. The
diversity higher education helps the students, faculty and staff to
deepen their knowledge, cultural awareness and which in turn equip
them with prepared for more diverse work environment in the future.

As there is positive impact, there is also negative impacts on diversity

among students, staff and faculty such as diversity creates social
groups and social alienation which will negatively affect the team
work and collaboration among students, faculty and staff fraternity
since it makes them feeling of disconnection from a group such as
friends and family and even the society to which the individual

252
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

normally has an affinity or affiliation. The diversity also leads to

cultural identity which makes the individuals more conscious about
their culture and which will gradually move forward towards
individual differences; and as an outcome of this, the individuals
concentrate more on their culture and tradition and distract from
socializing and their communications, language proficiency also
affected by this. Later, since there is diversity in culture, the
organization find difficulty in observance of holidays since they are
diversified among their fraternity. Many times, the diversity among
students, staff and faculty also lead to complex disciplinary issues as
well.

The diversity in students and faculty, staff affects their performance

especially the education which is directly impacting the performance
of the students. The diversity makes the students to improve
engagement and retention towards studies, enhancing their learning
environments, increased rate of opportunities and better preparation
for the real world among both the students and staff fraternity. When
an educational institution has diversified human resources, the
performance measurement of the students, staff and faculty are also
visible in their strategy formation, goal setting, mission and values of
the organization. Since, an institution focusing on sustainable
performance along with diversity has to follow the SMART goal
which is achievable for that achievement, the organization required to
be set the values and mission for achieving the desired institutional
performance.

The diversity in the higher education sector, is also influenced by the

external requirements such as the policies, rules and regulations
developed by the respective state and central authorities and other
bodies. The diversity in higher educational institutions also helps to
improve personal growth of its stake holders as well as promotes a
healthy society. And create space for other outcomes such job
enrichment, cultural diversity, communication, innovation, creativity
etc among its stakeholders such as students, faculty and staff. The
diversity not only challenges the stereotyped perceptions, but also
encourages the critical thinking, effective communication with people
of varied backgrounds. The diversity in higher education sector
strengthen the stake holders as well as the community as a whole. The
diversity contributes towards the sustainability while achieving the
above parameters which contribute the organizational development
and talent management, and as an outcome of this the institutions can
plan their successors accordingly.

253
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Discussion
The diversity helps the higher education sector towards the
sustainable growth and contribute towards the effective talent
management. For this, the institutions required identify the factors
which positively and negatively affecting the diversity since it is also
affects the performance and its measures. The performance
measurements are also contributed by external requirements for the
performance since it is compulsory to have communication with
external factors to analyze performance and ensuring sustainable
growth of the institutions. The conceptual model states that an
institution which has diversity is successful, is also exhibit good
diversity and talent management in the higher education sector.

Conclusion
Hence, this study accepts that a diversified higher education
Institution needs to be sustainable and also good in talent
management to have effective organizational development in the long
run. And the model also proves that there is a relationship between
the diversity, sustainability and talent management of an institution
and these three important pillars connected with the institutional
performance.
References
1. Team, Varthana (2023). The importance of diversity in
classrooms. Team Varthana.https://varthana.com/school/the-
importance-of-diversity-in-the-classroom-7-benefits/.
2. Cultureamp (2023). Benefits of diversity in workplace,
https://www.cultureamp.com/blog/benefits-diversity-in-
workplace.
3. Queens, Univeristy, of,Charlotte (2023). The benefits of diversity
in schools. https://online.queens.edu/resources/article/benefits-of-
diversity-in-school/.
4. Interfolio (2022). The benefits of diversity in higher education.
Interfolio from Elsevier. https://www.interfolio.com/resources/
blog/the-benefits-of-diversity-in-higher-education/.
5. Miguel, A, Cardona. James, Kvaal (2023). Strategies for
increasing diversity and opportunities in higher education, US
Department of Education, Washington. 2023. Page No. 01 – 48.
6. ACE, Board, of, directors(2012). On the Importance of Diversity
in Higher Education. American Council for education. Page No.
01,02.
7. Q,S,I,Guage(2023). The importance of diversity and inclusion in
higher education in India. QS I-Guage. 2023. https://www.igauge.

254
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

in/blog/detail/the-importance-of-diversity-and-inclusion-in-
higher-education-in-india/116.
8. Katie, Brown(2020). The Top 5 Ways That Diversity in
Education Benefits Students Success. College of Journalism and
Communications, University of Florida.
https://www.jou.ufl.edu /2020/05/20/the-top-5-ways-that-
diversity-in-education-benefits-students-success/#:~:text=The
%20positive%20effects%20of%20diversity,of%20differing
%20beliefs%20and%20customs.
9. Inga, Žalėnienė .Paulo, Pereira (2021). Higher education for
sustainability- a global perspective. Elseveir. Vol 2. Issue 2. Page
No. 99-106. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/
S2666683921000195.

Ms Aparna Swaminadhan
Asst. Professor, Holy Grace Academy of Management Studies, Mala
Mob.No. 9188086869, Email: [email protected]

Dr. Salini B. Nair

Associate Professor, Holy Grace Academy of ManagementStudies, Mala
Mob.No: 9633708488, Email: [email protected]

CHAPTER 20

THE UTILIZATION OF ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE

AND CHAT GPT IN ADVANCING MEDICAL
RESEARCH AND CHALLENGES ASSOCIATED
WITH THEIR IMPLEMENTATION

Pandurang Vithal Thatkar, Rajesh Keshavrao Dase & Pramod

Machindra Dhakane

Abstract:
This research article explores the use of Artificial intelligence (AI)
and Chat GPT (Generative Pre-trained Transformer) in the field of
medical research. AI and Chat GPT has revolutionized several fields,
and their application in medical research holds gigantic potential. AI

255
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

and Chat GPT have emerged as powerful tools that will revolutionize
several aspects of medical research, like diagnostics, drug discovery,
data analysis, and patient management. This article highlights the use
of AI and Chat GPT in medical research and explores its potential in
accelerating scientific discoveries which ultimately result in
advancing knowledge, improved diagnostics, drug discovery,
enhanced clinical decision-making, and improve patient outcome.

Key words: Advancement in Medical Research, patient management,

improved diagnostics.

Introduction:
his study provides a synopsis of the rising importance of
Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Generative Pre-trained
Transformer (Chat GPT) in the field of Medicine and
healthcare research. Currently, traditional research
methods have many challenges and limitations, and tools like AI and
Chat GPT have the potential to overcome these challenges and
accelerate innovations in healthcare research.(Biswas, 2023)
AI has the ability to handle a large amount of complex and
unstructured datasets. In the near future, medical data is expected to
rise exponentially usually measured in terabytes, petabytes even
yottabytes.(Bohr & Memarzadeh, 2020; Miller & Brown, 2018)
Managing, analyzing, modeling, interpreting, and validating big data
using traditional software or hardware is very challenging. AI, with its
capacity to handle large volumes of data and accomplish complex
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.20
tasks, combined with the conversational capabilities of Chat GPT, can
boost medical research in several ways.(Machine Learning for
Medical Imaging: Methodological Failures and Recommendations for
the Future | Npj Digital Medicine, n.d.)
Data Analysis and Pattern Recognition:
The gigantic volume of data (Big Data) like electronic health records,
medical images, and genomic sequencing, can be analyzed using AI
algorithms in order to recognizethe patterns and produce valuable
information. Machine learning can help researchers in detecting
indirect relationships, which ultimately results in uncovering novel
risk factors, disease markers, and treatment responses. (Dias &
Torkamani, 2019; Tang, 2019). Chat GPT can contribute to
interpreting these patterns by offering human-like conversations,
assisting researchers in understanding complex datasets, and guiding
in further investigations.(Chow et al., 2023)

256
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Precise Medication and Personalized Treatment:

Algorithms in AI can be useful in genetic and clinical data. The
application of these algorithms can simplify accuracy in medical
research. By evaluating an individual's medical history and genetic
makeup, AI algorithms have the ability to predict susceptibility to
disease, advocate personalized and precise treatment, and detect
probable adverse reactions to medications. Chat GPT also has the
potential to improve patient understanding of complex medical
notions and treatment options.(Secinaro et al., 2021; Szekér et al.,
2023; You & Gui, 2020; Yuan et al., 2023)
Patient Engagement and Education:
In order to engage the patients and improve their understanding of
their own care, Chat GPT can assist healthcare providers and
researchers in explaining personalized treatment plans to patients,
answering patient queries, supporting self-management of chronic
conditions, and seeking real-time consultations.(T. Dave et al., 2023;
Implications of ChatGPT for Healthcare, n.d.; You & Gui, 2020)
Diagnostic Support and Decision-Making:
AI algorithms have the ability to study the patterns and trends
ingigantic volumes of medical imaging and clinical data. This ability
of AI can assist in better diagnosis of disease with very high accuracy.
These algorithms have the ability to analyze medical images, like
MRIs, CT scans, and X-rays. The resulting data will be helpful to flag
the present abnormalities and it will assist in the process of
differential diagnosis. Further, Chat GPT with its conversational
capabilities, can improve diagnostic accuracy by offering real-time
consultations, allowing healthcare professionals to discuss complex
cases, consider probable alternate diagnoses, and collaboratively
make informed decisions.(Dorri, 2023; Giordano et al., 2021;
Mirbabaie et al., 2021)
Drug Discovery and Development:
AI and Chat GPT have the ability to accelerate the process of drug
discovery and development. The ability of AI algorithms can be used
to analyze gigantic libraries of molecular and chemical data topredict
the safety, toxicity, and efficacy of potential drug candidates and
enhance the rapid identification of assured leads. Chat GPT can assist
in investigations of drug interactions, mechanisms of action, and
potential side effects, facilitating more efficient and informed
decision-making in drug development.(Paul et al., 2021; Stokel-
Walker & Van Noorden, 2023; ‘Tools Such as ChatGPT Threaten

257
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Transparent Science; Here Are Our Ground Rules for Their Use’,
2023; Xue et al., 2023)
Clinical Trials and Patient Recruitment:
The process of clinical trials can be enhanced and streamlined by
identifying appropriate candidates for specific trials, matching them
to appropriate protocols, and monitoring their progress. In this
process, AI and Chat GPT can be of immense use. AI algorithms have
a tremendous capability of analyzing electronic health records and
identifying eligible patients.(Askin et al., 2023; Wang et al., 2022;
Weissler et al., 2021) Further, Chat GPT can involve potential
participants by answering their questions by giving essential
information to simplify the process of informed consent and
enrolment. (Dahmen et al., 2023)
Challenges and Future Directions:
Along with the potential use of AI and Chat GPT in healthcare and
medicine, there are several challenges that need to be considered in
order for their successful integration and upcoming development.
(Davenport & Kalakota, 2019) Some of the potential challenges and
future directions are mentioned as below:
1. Availability of Quality Data: The training and validation of AI
algorithms are hugely dependent on the quality and diversity of data
used for training and validation. In health care and medical research,
access to large and diverse data that represents heterogeneous
populations is a challenging task. Also assuring the ethical
considerations, security, and privacy of data may pose significant
challenges. (Davenport & Kalakota, 2019; Feng et al., 2022; Secinaro
et al., 2021)
2. Interpretation and explaining the decisions: Understanding and
explaining the reasoning behind the decisions of deep learning models
and AI algorithms is quite crucial. In order to maintain transparency
and interpretability, the AI models should be capable of explaining
and justifying the predictions and recommendations.(Machine
Learning for Medical Imaging: Methodological Failures and
Recommendations for the Future | Npj Digital Medicine, n.d.; Shan et
al., 2023; Weissler et al., 2021)
3. Bias and justification: AI algorithms are vulnerable to biased
outcomes. The bias may arise from the unfair training data. Hence it
is really important to address and ease the bias in AI models used in
healthcare and medical research in order to maintain fairness and
impartial healthcare practices.(Frosolini et al., 2023; Temsah et al.,
2023)

258
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

4. Regulatory and Ethical Considerations: It is important to address

the valid concerns over ethical and regulatory considerations in
healthcare and medical research. Hence a robust policy and guidelines
need to be developed and implemented in order to ascertain the
responsible and ethical use of AI and Chat GPT in Healthcare and
medical research. (T. Dave et al., 2023; Parray et al., 2023)
5. Validation and Standardization: The AI models used in
healthcare and medical research should be validated rigorously in
order to ensure their reliability, accuracy, and generalizability. A
robust policy needs to be framed to overlook the standardization of
methodologies, benchmark datasets, and evaluation metrics in to
enable the comparison and reproducibility of results using AI in
healthcare and medical research.(Tsopra et al., 2021; Williams et al.,
2023)
6. Collaboration and Multidisciplinary Approaches: One of the
important aspects of the successful implementation of AI and Chat
GPT in healthcare and medical research is the collaboration between
the AI researchers and Healthcare and medical professionals and
researchers. This interdisciplinary collaboration will ensure the
successful implementation of AI and Chat GPT in healthcare and
medical research.(Ahuja et al., 2020; Amann et al., 2020; Tiwari et
al., 2019)
7. Seamless integration of AI into the clinical workf low:
Integration of AI and Chat GPT with existing healthcare and medical
research and clinical work flow is a challenging task. In order to
facilitate the acceptance and successful adoption of AI and Chat GPT
among healthcare researchers, a user-friendly interface and
integration with the existing healthcare system are needed.(Blezek et
al., 2021; Juluru et al., 2021)
8. Continuous Learning and Improvement: In order to keep up
with the continuously growing nature of healthcare and medical
research, and clinical practices, the AI and Chat GPT models will
needcontinuous updates and improvements. Over a period of time, AI
models have the capability to adapt new data in order to improve their
performance with the help of active learning and reinforcement
learning. (M. Dave & Patel, 2023; Jiang et al., 2017; Kelly et al.,
2019)
Conclusion:
The healthcare and medical research needs integration with AI and
Chat GPT in order to improve diagnostic accuracy, improved
treatment modalities, and the discovery of essential drugs. This
integration of AI and Chat GPT has tremendous opportunities in

259
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

analyzing huge amounts of data, studying patterns, and providing

insights, helping in decision-making and patient engagement.
Integration of AI and Chat GPT poses serious challenges like data
safety and privacy, and regulatory and ethical issues. AI and Chat
GPT have tremendous potential to boost healthcare and medical
research and revolutionize healthcare which ultimately leads to
improved patient outcomes and advancement of scientific knowledge.
References:
1. Ahuja, A. S., Reddy, V. P., & Marques, O. (2020). Artificial
intelligence and COVID-19: A multidisciplinary approach.
Integrative Medicine Research, 9(3), 100434. https://doi.org/
10.1016/j.imr.2020.100434
2. Amann, J., Blasimme, A., Vayena, E., Frey, D., Madai, V. I., &
the Precise4Q consortium. (2020). Explainability for artificial
intelligence in healthcare: A multidisciplinary perspective. BMC
Medical Informatics and Decision Making, 20(1), 310.
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12911-020-01332-6
3. Askin, S., Burkhalter, D., Calado, G., & El Dakrouni, S. (2023).
Artificial Intelligence Applied to clinical trials: Opportunities and
challenges. Health and Technology, 13(2), 203–213. https://
doi.org/10.1007/s12553-023-00738-2
4. Biswas, S. (2023). ChatGPT and the Future of Medical Writing.
Radiology,307(2),e223312.https://doi.org/10.1148/radiol. 223312
5. Blezek, D. J., Olson-Williams, L., Missert, A., & Korfiatis, P.
(2021). AI Integration in the Clinical Workflow.Journal of Digital
Imaging, 34(6), 1435–1446. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10278-021-
00525-3
6. Bohr,A.,&Memarzadeh,K.(2020).The rise of artificial intelligence
in healthcare applications.Artificial Intelligence in Healthcare,
25–60. https://doi.org/10.1016/B978-0-12-818438-7.00002-2
7. Chow, J. C. L., Sanders, L., & Li, K. (2023). Impact of ChatGPT
on medical chatbots as a disruptive technology.Frontiers in
Artificial Intelligence, 6. https://www.frontiersin.org/articles/
10.3389/ frai.2023.1166014
8. Dahmen, J., Kayaalp, M. E., Ollivier, M., Pareek, A.,
Hirschmann, M. T., Karlsson, J., & Winkler, P. W. (2023).
Artificial intelligence bot ChatGPT in medical research: The
potential game changer as a double-edged sword. Knee Surgery,
Sports Traumatology, Arthroscopy, 31(4), 1187–1189.
https://doi.org/10.1007/s00167-023-07355-6

260
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

9. Dave, M., & Patel, N. (2023).Artificial intelligence in healthcare

and education.British Dental Journal, 234(10), Article 10.
https://doi.org/10.1038/s41415-023-5845-2
10. Dave, T., Athaluri, S. A., & Singh, S. (2023). ChatGPT in
medicine: An overview of its applications, advantages,
limitations, future prospects, and ethical considerations. Frontiers
in Artificial Intelligence, 6. https://www.frontiersin.org/articles
/10.3389/frai.2023.1169595
11. Davenport, T., &Kalakota, R. (2019).The potential for artificial
intelligence in healthcare.Future Healthcare Journal, 6(2), 94–98.
https://doi.org/10.7861/futurehosp.6-2-94
12. Dias, R., &Torkamani, A. (2019).Artificial intelligence in clinical
and genomic diagnostics.Genome Medicine, 11(1), 70.
https://doi.org/10.1186/s13073-019-0689-8
13. Dorri, M. (2023).AI and clinical decision making.British Dental
Journal, 234(10), Article 10. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41415-023-
5928-0
14. Feng, J., Phillips, R. V., Malenica, I., Bishara, A., Hubbard, A. E.,
Celi, L. A., &Pirracchio, R. (2022). Clinical artificial intelligence
quality improvement: Towards continual monitoring and updating
of AI algorithms in healthcare. Npj Digital Medicine, 5(1),
Article 1. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41746-022-00611-y
15. Frosolini, A., Gennaro, P., Cascino, F., & Gabriele, G. (2023). In
Reference to “Role of Chat GPT in Public Health”, to Highlight
the AI’s Incorrect Reference Generation. Annals of Biomedical
Engineering. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10439-023-03248-4
16. Giordano, C., Brennan, M., Mohamed, B., Rashidi, P., Modave,
F., &Tighe, P. (2021).Accessing Artificial Intelligence for
Clinical Decision-Making.Frontiers in Digital Health, 3, 645232.
https://doi.org/10.3389/fdgth.2021.645232
17. Implications of ChatGPT for Healthcare.(n.d.). Retrieved 13 June
2023, from https://www.abstractivehealth.com/implications-of-
chatgpt-for-healthcare
18. Jiang, F., Jiang, Y., Zhi, H., Dong, Y., Li, H., Ma, S., Wang, Y.,
Dong, Q., Shen, H., & Wang, Y. (2017). Artificial intelligence in
healthcare: Past, present and future. Stroke and Vascular
Neurology, 2(4). https://doi.org/10.1136/svn-2017-000101
19. Juluru, K., Shih, H.-H., Keshava Murthy, K. N., Elnajjar, P., El-
Rowmeim, A., Roth, C., Genereaux, B., Fox, J., Siegel, E., &
Rubin, D. L. (2021). Integrating Al Algorithms into the Clinical
Workflow.Radiology: Artificial Intelligence, 3(6), e210013.
https://doi.org/10.1148/ryai. 2021210013

261
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

20. Kelly, C. J., Karthikesalingam, A., Suleyman, M., Corrado, G., &
King, D. (2019). Key challenges for delivering clinical impact
with artificial intelligence. BMC Medicine, 17(1), 195.
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12916-019-1426-2
21. Machine learning for medical imaging: Methodological failures
and recommendations for the future | npj Digital Medicine. (n.d.).
Retrieved 13 June 2023, from https://www.nature.com/articles/
s41746-022-00592-y
22. Miller, D. D., & Brown, E. W. (2018). Artificial Intelligence in
Medical Practice: The Question to the Answer? The American
Journal of Medicine, 131(2), 129–133. https://doi.org/10.1016
/j.amjmed.2017.10.035
23. Mirbabaie, M., Stieglitz, S., & Frick, N. R. J. (2021). Artificial
intelligence in disease diagnostics: A critical review and
classification on the current state of research guiding future
direction. Health and Technology, 11(4), 693–731. https://doi.org/
10.1007/s12553-021-00555-5
24. Parray, A. A., Inam, Z. M., Ramonfaur, D., Haider, S. S., Mistry,
S. K., & Pandya, A. K. (2023). ChatGPT and global public
health: Applications, challenges, ethical considerations and
mitigation strategies. Global Transitions, 5, 50–54. https://doi.org/
10.1016/j.glt.2023.05.001
25. Paul, D., Sanap, G., Shenoy, S., Kalyane, D., Kalia, K., &Tekade,
R. K. (2021).Artificial intelligence in drug discovery and
development. Drug Discovery Today, 26(1), 80–93.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.drudis.2020.10.010
26. Secinaro, S., Calandra, D., Secinaro, A., Muthurangu, V., &
Biancone, P.(2021). The role of artificial intelligence in
healthcare: A structured literature review. BMC Medical
Informatics and Decision Making, 21(1), 125. https://doi.org/
10.1186/s12911-021-01488-9
27. Shan, H., Vimieiro, R. B., Borges, L. R., Vieira, M. A. C., &
Wang, G. (2023). Impact of loss functions on the performance of
a deep neural network designed to restore low-dose digital
mammography. Artificial Intelligence in Medicine, 142, 102555.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.artmed.2023.102555
28. Stokel-Walker, C., & Van Noorden, R. (2023). What ChatGPT
and generative AI mean for science. Nature, 614(7947), 214–216.
https://doi.org/10.1038/d41586-023-00340-6
29. Szekér, S., Fogarassy, G., & Vathy-Fogarassy, Á. (2023). A
general text mining method to extract echocardiography
measurement results from echocardiography documents.

262
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Artificial Intelligence in Medicine, 143, 102584.

https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.artmed.2023.102584
30. Tang, X. (2019).The role of artificial intelligence in medical
imaging research. BJR Open, 2(1), 20190031. https://doi.org/
10.1259/bjro.20190031
31. Temsah, M.-H., Jamal, A., Aljamaan, F., Al-Tawfiq, J. A., Al-
Eyadhy, A., Temsah, M.-H., Jamal, A., Aljamaan, F., Al-Tawfiq,
J.A., & Al-Eyadhy, A. (2023). ChatGPT-4 and the Global Burden
of Disease Study: Advancing Personalized Healthcare Through
Artificial Intelligence in Clinical and Translational Medicine.
Cureus, 15(5). https://doi.org/10.7759/cureus.39384
32. Tiwari, A., Chaudhari, M., & Rai, A. (2019). Multidisciplinary
Approach of Artificial Intelligence over Medical Imaging: A
Review, Challenges, Recent Opportunities for Research. 2019
Third International Conference on I-SMAC (IoT in Social,
Mobile, Analytics and Cloud) (I-SMAC), 237–242. https://doi.org
/10.1109/I-SMAC47947.2019.9032566
33. Tools such as ChatGPT threaten transparent science; here are our
ground rules for their use. (2023). Nature, 613(7945), 612.
https://doi.org/10.1038/d41586-023-00191-1
34. Tsopra, R., Fernandez, X., Luchinat, C., Alberghina, L., Lehrach,
H., Vanoni, M., Dreher, F., Sezerman, O. U., Cuggia, M., de
Tayrac, M., Miklasevics, E., Itu, L. M., Geanta, M., Ogilvie, L.,
Godey, F., Boldisor, C. N., Campillo-Gimenez, B., Cioroboiu, C.,
Ciusdel, C. F., …Burgun, A. (2021). A framework for validating
AI in precision medicine: Considerations from the European
ITFoC consortium. BMC Medical Informatics and Decision
Making, 21, 274. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12911-021-01634-3
35. Wang, A., Xiu, X., Liu, S., Qian, Q., & Wu, S. (2022).
Characteristics of Artificial Intelligence Clinical Trials in the
Field of Healthcare: A Cross-Sectional Study on Clinical Trials.
gov. International Journal of Environmental Research and Public
Health, 19(20), 13691. https://doi.org/ 10.3390/ijerph 192013691
36. Weissler, E. H., Naumann, T., Andersson, T., Ranganath, R.,
Elemento, O., Luo, Y., Freitag, D. F., Benoit, J., Hughes, M. C.,
Khan, F., Slater, P., Shameer, K., Roe, M., Hutchison, E., Kollins,
S. H., Broedl, U., Meng, Z., Wong, J. L., Curtis, L., … Ghassemi,
M. (2021). The role of machine learning in clinical research:
Transforming the future of evidence generation. Trials, 22(1),
537. https://doi.org/10.1186/s13063-021-05489-x
37. Williams, E., Kienast, M., Medawar, E., Reinelt, J., Merola, A.,
Klopfenstein, S. A. I., Flint, A. R., Heeren, P., Poncette, A.-S.,
Balzer, F., Beimes, J., von Bünau, P., Chromik, J., Arnrich, B.,

263
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Scherf, N., & Niehaus, S. (2023). A Standardized Clinical Data

Harmonization Pipeline for Scalable AI Application Deployment
(FHIR-DHP): Validation and Usability Study. JMIR Medical
Informatics, 11, e43847. https://doi.org/10.2196/43847
38. Xue, V. W., Lei, P., & Cho, W. C. (2023).The potential impact of
ChatGPT in clinical and translational medicine.Clinical and
Translational Medicine, 13(3), e1216. https://doi.org/10.1002/
ctm2.1216
39. You, Y., & Gui, X. (2020). Self-Diagnosis through AI-enabled
Chatbot-based Symptom Checkers: User Experiences and Design
Considerations. AMIA ... Annual Symposium Proceedings.
AMIA Symposium, 2020, 1354–1363.

Dr. Pandurang Vithal Thatkar

Statistician-cum-Assistant Professor, Pimpri Chinchwad Municipal
Corporation’s Postgraduate Institute and Yashwantrao Chavan
Memorial Hospital, Pimpri, Pune-411018
Email: [email protected]

Dr. Rajesh Keshavrao Dase

Assistant Professor, Department of Statistics, SBES Science College,
Chh. Sambhaji Nagar, [MS], India: 431001
Mob: 91-9921100065, Email ID: [email protected]

Dr. Pramod Machindra Dhakane

Assistant Professor, Department of Mathematics, SBES Science
College, Chh. Sambhaji Nagar, [MS], India: 431001

CHAPTER 21

E-MARKETING: THE NEW ERA OF INNOVATION

Ms. Jayashri Sadanand Lokhande

Abstract:

264
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

In recent years, the Internet and e-commerce have become one of the
fastest growing technologies that play an important role in our lives.
Today e-marketing is one of the emerging technologies of IT and e-
commerce. Internet marketing is a new philosophy and an interesting
topic especially for marketing researchers. In modern business, which
involved the marketing of goods, services and information using the
Internet and other electronic means. It is a new way of marketing a
product/service globally to a target market all over the world. Internet
marketing has become a business tool for marketing products and
services. This article introduces a new approach to online marketing;
shows how advertisers need this innovation to succeed. Electronic
marketing is not only used to promote Internet marketing, but it also
helps marketing through email and wireless media. This article has
discussed the main factors that encourage online shopping. The
current development would be valuable for the researcher and
academician; and useful theory for operators, promoters and
entrepreneurs. This article is a secondary study of how e-commerce is
gradually becoming a part of our daily lives. It concerns various
aspects of advertising according to electronic commerce.

Key words: Online Shopping, Online Marketing, Product, Promotion.

Introduction:
echnology plays a key role in improving the quality of
services provided by companies; one of the technologies
that really brought the information revolution in society is
internet technology. In this article, we present the concept
of marketing and consider its relationship to newer concepts such as
Internet marketing, e-commerce and e-commerce. Marketing is the
activities, institutions and process of product creation,
communication, delivery and exchange. This includes all activities
related to buying and selling a product or service. Even before the
Internet, there were many different ways to advertise in different
media such as radio, television, newspapers, magazines,
telemarketing and brochures. To promote a product, the marketer
DOI: provide
must 10.25215/9189764560.21
information about the product to the user. Information
can be verbal and non-verbal. Since the beginning of the Internet, it
has become a business tool to promote a product; several search
options have become available. Companies had the opportunity to
advertise themselves more widely.

265
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Internet marketing (IM) is also known as digital marketing, online

marketing, online marketing or electronic marketing. As the name
suggests, it is the promotion of products or services on the Internet.
However, it also means marketing through wireless media and email.
Electronic customer relationship management (ECRM) systems also
fall under Internet marketing. IM can be both creative and technical
through design, development, advertising and online sales. It
facilitates new types of knowledge-based processes to reach and
interact with customers, such as online advertising, online ordering
chat and online customer service, etc. Internet marketing is a cost
effective tool that becomes very easy and affordable to customize
with very less marketing effort, more and more use the Internet for
business, and it is an effective way to communicate between
companies and customers. Online banking is growing mainly because
more and more people are using the internet every day.

E-marketing also includes the technical and creative aspects of the

Internet, such as development, design, advertising and sales. It helps
to find the right consumer to whom the company offers goods and
services. It consists of all the activities that help attract, find and keep
a customer.

Objective
Each research is done for a specific purpose and the purpose of this
research is to know the conceptual knowledge of online marketing
and the new era of electronic shopping innovations. In this article, we
focus on the study of online marketing, consumer behaviour and the
current state of online shopping.

Methodology
This research is based on the application of internet marketing and
especially its use to attract more visitors to a particular website. There
were attempts to study internet marketing. This article is theoretical in
nature and several websites were used for data.
Internet and Marketing Mix
Today, the concept of Internet marketing has expanded and brought
more opportunities for companies to get closer to their customers. In
the past, the Internet was only used to contact customers as part of
direct marketing. Today, the Internet, especially websites, has become
a popular tool for all businesses to promote their products and
services. The Internet is considered an independent and effective
marketing tool.

266
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Marketing is an arrangement that provides an opportunity to exchange

goods and services for money. A market includes both an exchange
and an area where buyers and sellers freely compete with each other.
Marketing teams (marketers) are tasked with raising consumer
awareness of products or services using marketing techniques. If it
does not pay attention to its products and services and consumers and
due to demographics and desires, the business usually does not
succeed over time.

Marketing is essentially the process of creating or directing an

organization to successfully sell a product or service that people not
only want, but are willing to buy. Therefore, good marketing must be
able to create an "offer" or a set of end-customer benefits that create
value through products or services.

The Internet offers new opportunities to the traditional marketing

model, it must be viewed on the basis of a traditional but still
effective marketing mix. The marketing mix plays an important role
in e-commerce; decide which type of advertising is best for customers
online.

Four P’s-
Marketing mix is a combination of product, distribution system, price
structure and sales promotions. Marketing mix is probably the best
known marketing term. Its elements are the main tactical components
of a marketing plan. Also known as Four P’s. Some commentators
add a marketing mix to five to get people involved. Others add a
combination to Seven P’s including physical evidence (eg, uniforms,
spaces, or colors) and process, i.e., the entire customer experience, eg,
a visit to Disney World (Borden 1964). Advances in technology
naturally affect all of this, and the internet isn't just about product
promotion, it's about placement, distribution and product promotion.
According to Philip Kotler, Products are a solution to customers'
wants and needs. It refers to the characteristics of a product, service or
brand. A product- It is a good or service that a company offers to its
customers. The Internet provides opportunities for basic product
changes, extended product exchanges, online research, accelerated
new product development, and accelerated new product diffusion.
Many digital products can now be easily purchased over the Internet
from service providers; website for other products, many companies
publish detailed product information with pictures or images instead
of actually shipping the products to customers. The Internet offers a
new means of quickly gathering customer feedback and accelerating

267
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

new product development, as the process of testing new products is

faster and more efficient.

Price- This is the most flexible element of online marketing

compared to the other three elements of the marketing mix because it
can be changed quickly according to the market and demand.
Businesses can use the Internet to create price differences for different
customers in different countries based on the 4P of electronic
marketing.

Internet Protocol (IP) analysis methods. Buyers can find out the price
differences by visiting the companies; or on price comparison sites. In
addition, the Internet also lowers costs and product prices, reducing
store operating costs and the number of employees. Along with these
advances, many new payment methods are being created. Online
payment by credit card is the most popular, efficient, convenient and
flexible way for companies and customers. Bills can be paid anytime,
anywhere. In addition, businesses can reduce costs by reducing
paperwork as customers fill out all the necessary information, such as
their personal information and credit card information. In addition to
these conveniences, online customers still have to worry about
securities and privacy. Therefore, some third parties offer services to
protect consumer privacy and secure transactions. PayPal is one of the
most successful companies in the industry.

Place- This marketing mix P refers to the physical distribution of

goods. It concerns intermediaries and the place where goods should
be displayed and made available to potential buyers. The development
of the Internet offers a new way to distribute goods through online
shopping. Customers can make their purchasing decisions anywhere
and anytime. The internet has the greatest influence in the marketing
mix because it has a large market. Companies can now expand their
business from local areas across the country, even to international
markets. They can also use the Internet to enter new markets through
cheap international advertising because they don't have to build a
sales infrastructure in different countries.
Promotion- It is one of the four marketing mix variables. Advertising
is activities that are marketed to sell products and services. It refers to
how marketing communication is used to inform customers and other
stakeholders about a company and its product. Advertising is most
important when a company launches a new product, determines its
price and decides the region where it will be sold. The online

268
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

campaign option is an extension of the offline space. With the help of

the Internet, new ways of implementing each element of the
communication mix such as advertising, sales promotion, public
relations and direct marketing can be explored. To promote the
product, the company provides free images, presentations and other
related information on its website.
Types of Internet Marketing
Search Engine Marketing (SEM) The Internet has made it easier for
consultants to reach large, targeted consumers. Network marketing is
based on an effective network that attracts visitors, provides them
with useful resources and encourages them to contact their financial
advisor. SEM is a form of online marketing that targets users of
search engines such as Google, Yahoo, Bing Search engine
marketing, or search engine marketing, consists of cumulative efforts
to promote a website in paid and free search results. SEM is the most
important engine of business growth and customer acquisition for
many online stores. Search engine marketing (SEM) is a form of
Internet marketing in which websites are promoted by increasing their
visibility on search engine results pages (SERPs), primarily through
paid advertising.
Email marketing
Email marketing is a way to reach consumers directly through email.
Email marketing is a popular way for businesses to reach customers.
Email marketing is the use of email to advertise products and
services. It helps develop relationships with prospects and customers.
Email marketing is one segment of internet marketing. A marketing
company sends a commercial message to a group of people using
email. Mostly, any email communication through advertisements,
business requests, sales or gift requests is considered as email
marketing, it helps to build customer loyalty, trust in a product or
company or brand. Email marketing is an effective way to keep in
touch with your customers and promote your business at the same
time.
Social Media Marketing
Social Media Marketing is a type of online marketing. It provides
social media platforms and websites for product or service promotion
as well as various social media networks for marketing
communication and branding. Social media marketing mainly
includes the social sharing of content, videos and images for
marketing purposes and paid media advertising. SMM became more
common with the rise in popularity of websites such as Twitter,
Facebook and YouTube.

269
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Blog Marketing
The term blog comes from combinations of website and log or blog.
A blog is an information website published online. Blog marketing is
the process of reaching a target market using a blog. It is the process
of publicizing or promoting a website, company, brand and product.
Today, many entrepreneurs use a blogging platform such as Word
Press. There are free blogging platforms like Blogger and
Wordpress.com to maintain a professional look that allows you to
create your unique product brand. Blogs are like news sites that are
updated with new content.

Viral Marketing
Viral marketing, or viral advertising, are techniques that use social
networking services and other technologies to increase brand
awareness or achieve other marketing goals (such as product sales)
through self-propagating viral processes. It refers to how consumers
share information about a product with other people in their social
networks; viral marketing is a marketing technique that causes
websites or users to forward a marketing message to other websites or
users, potentially increasing the message and its exposure and
influence. A popular example of successful viral marketing is
Hotmail, a company now owned by Microsoft that advertised its
services and its advertisers; messages in each user's notes and emails.

Advantages of Internet Marketing

The Internet can provide customers with timely information because
of its ability to communicate instantly and because it is available 24
hours a day, 7 days a week. Internet marketing offers greater choice
and flexibility while eliminating huge inventory, storage costs, utility
costs, space rentals, etc. People tend to associate internet marketing
with direct marketing because internet marketing companies tend to
have shorter supply chains and lower commissions and operating
costs.
The ability to act as a business tool and a physical distribution tool for
certain goods is a unique feature of internet marketing. Such benefits
can best be realized by companies that offer digital products or
services such as software, music, news, consulting services, online
ticketing and reservation services, telemedicine, insurance, banking,
stock brokerage, taxation and other financial services.

Using the Internet as a distribution channel can significantly reduce

shipping costs, but also ensures immediate delivery of products. In

270
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

addition, online research is becoming an increasingly important tool

in the buying process. Marketing departments today invest more in
online marketing because it:

 Appeals to an important demographic of most customers. It can

reach the target customer effectively.
 Faster and cheaper execution of direct marketing campaigns.
 Measurable, meaning that successes are identifiable and
repeatable
 Cost effective, long term.

Disadvantages of Internet Marketing

Internet communication does not involve actual face-to-face contact.
Internet marketing may be less suitable for product types that rely
heavily on building a personal relationship between buyers and
sellers, such as selling life insurance and products that require
physical inspection. Although online marketing cannot allow potential
buyers to touch, smell or taste; products, but research on cosmetic
product consumers shows that with the help of email marketing, the
consumer can be brought to the store to try the product or to talk to
the sales representatives. Some of the disadvantages of electronic
marketing are technological reliability, security, privacy issues, and
maintenance costs due to a constantly changing environment, greater
price transparency and increased price competition, and global
competition due to globalization.

Conclusion
Based on our research, the Internet not only brings a different image
to all elements of the marketing mix, but also brought a new way to
approach potential customers in a very interesting, creative and cost-
effective way. This article is about the conceptual knowledge of
internet marketing. The current development would be a valuable
addition to researchers and scholars; and useful theory for operators,
promoters and entrepreneurs. Some of the disadvantages of electronic
marketing are technological reliability, security, privacy issues, and
maintenance costs due to a constantly changing environment, greater
price transparency and increased price competition, and global
competition due to globalization. Security is no longer an issue as
software companies, banks and credit card companies work hand in
hand to improve internet security. Companies must protect
themselves in three areas: data integrity, data confidentiality and
authenticity by installing firewalls or routers. Customers look for
business online because there are unique opportunities to market a

271
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

business and service, sell products and gather information online. In

the next 3-5 years, India will have 30-70 million internet users, equal
to, if not surpassing, many developed countries. Internet economy
then makes more sense in India. With the rapid expansion of the
Internet, electronic commerce plays a very important role in the 21st
century, and the new opportunities that open up are within the reach
of both large and small businesses. This is a new era of innovation;
where everyone communicates online. A live video session is
available and the prospect may be able to speak with a customer
representative directly over the Internet.

References:
1. Frost, R., & Strauss, J. (2016). E-marketing. Routledge.
2. Milder, N. D. (2013). e-marketing. Economic Development
Journal, 12(3), 34.
3. Chaffey, D. (2012). E-marketing. In The Marketing Book (pp.
667-698). Routledge.
4. Strauss, J., & Frost, R. (2014). E-marketing. Pearson.
5. Kalyanam, K., & McIntyre, S. (2002). The e-marketing mix: a
contribution of the e-tailing wars. Journal of the academy of
marketing science, 30(4), 487-499.
6. Gilmore, A., Gallagher, D., & Henry, S. (2007). E‐marketing and
SMEs: operational lessons for the future. European Business
Review, 19(3), 234-247.

Ms. Jayashri Sadanand Lokhande

Research Scholar, Department of Commerce and Management,
Shivaji University, Kolhapur
Email : [email protected]

CHAPTER 22

FINANCIAL TECHNOLOGY (FINTECH)

INNOVATIONS IN INDIA A COMPREHENSIVE

272
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

ANALYSIS OF TRENDS, IMPACTS

AND FUTURE PROSPECTS

Dr. Snehal A. Bagul

Abstract:
The aforementioned study report attempts to give a comprehensive
overview of Financial Technology (Fintech) advancements in India,
focusing on current trends, repercussions on traditional financial
services, and future possibilities. This study uses secondary data
analysis to derive insights from reliable sources, therefore
contributing significant insights into the evolving Fintech scene in
India.

Key words: Fintech, Financial Technology, Innovations, block

chains, trends

Introduction:
Fintech Innovations in India
he financial environment in India is experiencing a
dramatic transition, fueled by the persistent progress of
financial technology (Fintech). As a key player in the
global Fintech sector, India is at the forefront of
innovation, pushing unprecedented changes in how financial services
are envisioned, accessed, and provided. This chapter looks into the
complexities of Fintech developments in India, aiming to give a
thorough grasp of present trends, their revolutionary effects on
traditional financial services, and the exciting future potential that
await.

The rise of Fintech in India demonstrates the country's dedication to

technical progress and financial inclusion. From broad use of digital
payments to the research of blockchain and cryptocurrencies, the
Indian Fintech environment is characterized by rapid movements that
are fundamentally altering the financial system. As we begin this
detailed research, it is critical to appreciate the complex nature of
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.22
Fintech, which spans a wide range of advancements from mobile

273
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

banking solutions to sophisticated algorithm-driven investing

platforms.

Study Framework and Methodology:

This chapter is built on a solid framework that was developed through
secondary data analysis. This research aims to provide a
comprehensive view of the Fintech environment by integrating
findings from reliable sources such as studies from the Reserve Bank
of India (RBI), the National Association of Software and Service
Companies (NASSCOM), and the India Brand Equity Foundation.
The use of secondary data guarantees that the material supplied is
reliable and credible, allowing for a more nuanced investigation of the
issue.

Objectives of the Research:

The goals of this study project are inextricably linked to
understanding, assessing, and forecasting Fintech's trajectory in India.
The pursuit of these objectives fits with the overall goal of
contributing to the knowledge base around Fintech innovations:
1) To analyze current Fintech trends in India.
2) To assess the impacts of Fintech innovations on traditional
financial services.
3) To explore the regulatory responses to Fintech developments in
India.
4) To anticipate and discuss future prospects and challenges for
Fintech in the Indian market.

Current Fintech Trends in India.

Financial technology (Fintech) has emerged as a powerful and
revolutionary force in India's financial environment, changing
traditional banking and financial services. To understand the present
condition of Fintech developments in India, a thorough study is
required, relying on data from several sources.

1. Digital Payment Revolution:

One notable Fintech development in India is the rapid expansion of
digital payments. The advent of the Unified Payments Interface (UPI)
transformed the way consumers and companies conduct transactions.
The National Payments Corporation of India (NPCI) reports a strong
increase in UPI transactions, indicating a move towards digital
payment systems (NPCI, 2021).

2. The rise of contactless payments:

274
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

The COVID-19 epidemic has sped up the deployment of contactless

payment technologies in India. Mobile wallets, contactless cards, and
Near Field Communication (NFC) technologies have become popular,
offering consumers with safe and easy payment choices. According to
industry analysts, contactless transactions are becoming increasingly
popular in both urban and rural locations (PwC India, 2021).

3. Fintech Solutions for Financial Inclusion:

Fintech is becoming increasingly important in tackling India's
financial inclusion concerns. With a significant unbanked and under
banked population, Fintech companies are harnessing breakthrough
technology to provide accessible and inexpensive financial services.
This growth is consistent with government measures aimed at
increasing financial inclusion, such as the Jan DhanYojana (EY,
2020).

4. Blockchain and cryptocurrency:

Another notable development in India's Fintech field is the use of
blockchain technology and the rising interest in cryptocurrencies.
Blockchain technology is being investigated for safe and transparent
transaction procedures, while talks about legal frameworks for
cryptocurrencies continue (KPMG, 2021).

5. Expanded Robo-Advisory Services:

Robo-advisors are gaining popularity as Fintech companies provide
automated, algorithm-driven investing advice. A rising number of
investors value the convenience of access and cost-effectiveness.
According to market research reports, robo-advisory platforms are
becoming increasingly popular in the Indian investing sector (Statista,
2021).

Impacts of Fintech Innovations on Traditional Financial Services

in India
The Fintech scene in India is dynamic, with many trends influencing
the business. From the digital payments revolution to the advent of
blockchain and robo-advisory services, these trends point to a fast
changing financial sector. Understanding these developments is
critical for stakeholders, including regulators, financial institutions,
and investors, as they manage the benefits and difficulties of Fintech
innovation in India.

1. Disruption to Traditional Banking Models:

275
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Fintech innovations, notably in digital payments and alternative loans,

have challenged established banking methods in India. Fintech
enterprises' ease of access and convenience have resulted in a shift in
client preferences. According to reports from the Reserve Bank of
India (RBI), traditional banking channels are being used less often in
favor of digital alternatives.

2. Changing Consumer Expectations and Experiences:

The emergence of Fintech has increased client expectations for the
speed, efficiency, and customization of financial services. Traditional
banks are under pressure to improve their digital capabilities in order
to satisfy changing client needs. Consulting firms' surveys show that
conventional financial institutions must embrace digital
transformation to remain competitive (Deloitte, 2021).
3. Enhanced Financial Inclusion:
One beneficial effect of Fintech advances is a greater emphasis on
financial inclusion. Fintech companies have used technology to target
underserved communities, providing them with access to banking and
financial services. Government-backed measures, along with Fintech
interventions, have resulted in a huge increase in the number of
people using formal financial services (Economic Times, 2020).

4. Integrating Technology for Risk Management:

Fintech has brought modern technology, such as artificial intelligence
(AI) and machine learning (ML), to improve risk management in the
financial sector. Traditional financial institutions are implementing
these technologies to enhance credit scoring, fraud detection, and
regulatory compliance. According to industry analyst reports, AI has
a significant influence on decreasing operational risks and improving
decision-making processes.

5. Regulatory Concerns and Responses:

The fast speed of Fintech innovation has posed regulatory problems to
traditional financial services. Regulatory organizations, like the RBI,
have responded by taking aggressive steps to develop frameworks
that balance innovation and consumer safety. Reports from regulatory
organizations describe the steps taken to mitigate growing risks
related with Fintech break throughs (RBI, 2021).
Fintech advancements in India have had a broad influence on
traditional financial services. While disruptions have tested traditional
banking structures, there has been a noticeable beneficial influence on
financial inclusion and risk management. The changing regulatory
environment reflects efforts to achieve a balance between

276
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

encouraging innovation and protecting the stability and security of the

financial system.

Regulatory Responses to Fintech Developments in India

The fast speed of innovation in Financial Technology (Fintech)
demands rigorous regulatory monitoring to preserve the financial
ecosystem's integrity, security, and stability. This section delves into
regulatory reactions in India, examining the efforts taken by various
regulatory organizations, most notably the Reserve Bank of India
(RBI), to adapt to and oversee the revolutionary Fintech landscape.

Evolution of Fintech Regulation:

The progress of fintech legislation in India is inextricably linked to
the industry's growth trajectory. As Fintech solutions spread across
industries, regulatory organizations have been aggressive in
developing frameworks that strike a balance between promoting
innovation and protecting consumer interests. The regulatory journey
reflects an adaptable strategy that takes into account the peculiarities
of developing technology.

1. The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has pioneered fintech

regulation.
The RBI, as the dominant regulatory institution, has had a significant
impact on the regulatory framework for Fintech in India. In response
to the rapidly growing Fintech industry, the RBI has taken a diverse
approach:
The RBI established a regulatory sandbox system, which allows
Fintech businesses to test new ideas in a regulated setting. This effort
promotes collaboration between regulators and entrepreneurs,
creating an environment suitable to experimentation (RBI, 2019).

Guidelines for Payment Aggregators: In 2020, the RBI announced

guidelines to govern payment aggregators and payment gateways,
addressing issues about operating rules, client protection, and risk
management.

Digital Payment Security Control Measures: In response to the

growth in digital payments, the RBI introduced security controls like
as tokenization and secure card payment rules (RBI, 2021).

2. SEBI: Navigating Fintech in Capital Markets.

SEBI, India's securities market regulator, has aggressively responded
to Fintech advances in capital markets:

277
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

SEBI implemented a comprehensive regulatory framework for

investment advisers, addressing issues about transparency, conflicts
of interest, and customer classification (SEBI, 2020).
Use of Regulatory Sandbox: SEBI, like the RBI, has investigated the
use of regulatory sandbox frameworks to promote innovation in the
securities market by allowing Fintech businesses to test their ideas
within established parameters.

3. The Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India

(IRDAI) promotes insurtech innovation.
The IRDAI has aggressively responded to the integration of
technology in the insurance market.
IRDAI has developed recommendations to assist the adoption of
technology in the insurance business. These rules address issues
including as product design, underwriting, and claims settlement
(IRDAI, 2017).
Promotion of Digital Platforms: Recognizing the potential of digital
platforms in distribution, IRDAI has advocated for their usage to
increase insurance penetration and customer experience.

Challenges and the Way Forward:

Despite aggressive regulatory responses, difficulties remain, including
the need to harmonize legislation across sectors, address data security
concerns, and provide a level playing field for both established
companies and Fintech innovators. The regulatory landscape is
projected to change further as Fintech innovations alter the
parameters of financial services in India.

As we traverse the complex web of Fintech legislation in India, the

regulatory actions highlighted above highlight the importance of a
dynamic and adaptable strategy. Balancing innovation with prudential
regulations is the fundamental aim, ensuring that Fintech
advancements contribute positively to the financial sector while
maintaining the interests of all stakeholders.

Anticipating Future Prospects and Challenges for Fintech in the

Indian Market
The trajectory of Financial Technology (Fintech) in the Indian market
is promising, but it is not without its share of anticipated opportunities
and problems. This investigation dives at the possible development
opportunities and challenges that Fintech entrepreneurs are expected
to face as they navigate the changing environment of India's financial
technology industry.

278
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Future Prospects of Fintech in India:

Continued Growth in Digital Payments:
The future of fintech in India is inextricably related to the continuous
expansion of digital payments. With a growing preference for
cashless transactions, the Fintech industry is positioned for additional
innovation in payment technologies such as contactless payments,
mobile wallets, and the extension of the Unified Payments Interface
(UPI).

Financial inclusion initiatives:

Fintech has the potential to significantly advance financial inclusion
in India. Future prospects include using creative solutions to reach the
unbanked and underbanked populations, giving them access to a
variety of financial services such as savings, credit, and insurance.

Blockchainand Cryptocurrency Integration:

The incorporation of blockchain technology and the investigation of
cryptocurrencies provide promising opportunities for Fintech in India.
Blockchain's transparent and decentralized characteristics may be
used to secure and efficient financial transactions, while the legal
framework for cryptocurrencies is likely to change, creating
opportunities for responsible use.

Robo-Advisory and Wealth Management:

The expansion of robo-advisory services is expected to continue, with
automated investing solutions based on artificial intelligence and
machine learning algorithms. Fintech companies are expected to
improve these services, offering tailored and cost-effective wealth
management solutions to a larger portion of the population.

Challenges Facing Fintech in India:

Regulatory uncertainties:
Regulatory uncertainty, particularly surrounding new technology such
as cryptocurrency, provides hurdles for Fintech enterprises. Clarity in
rules is critical for stimulating innovation while protecting consumers
and maintaining financial stability..

Data Security and Privacy Concerns:

Because Fintech relies largely on data, providing strong data security
and resolving privacy issues remain critical. Cybersecurity concerns
and the possible exploitation of client data highlight the importance of
taking strong precautions to secure sensitive information.

279
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Financial Literacy and User Education:

Promoting financial literacy and educating people about Fintech
goods and services presents difficulties. Building trust with people,
particularly in rural regions, necessitates deliberate efforts to raise
knowledge and comprehension of Fintech solutions.

Infrastructure and connectivity issues:

Despite progress, infrastructural and communication issues exist in
some locations. Fintech companies encounter challenges in accessing
distant communities, which limits the breadth of financial inclusion
activities. To address these difficulties, the public and private sectors
must work together.

Competition and Market Consolidation:

The fintech sector in India is getting more competitive, resulting in
market consolidation. Smaller players may encounter difficulties in
maintaining growth and competing with larger, more established
companies. A flourishing Fintech environment requires a delicate mix
between healthy competition and market consolidation.

Conclusion:
In conclusion, the future of Fintech in the Indian market is bright, but
it is critical to manage the hurdles carefully. The industry's success
will be dependent on collaboration among Fintech entrepreneurs,
regulatory organizations, and conventional financial institutions. As
the Indian Fintech narrative unfolds, a careful balance must be
maintained between capitalizing on possibilities and reducing
dangers, eventually contributing to a robust and inclusive financial
sector.

Reference :
1) NPCI. (2021). UPI Statistics.
2) PwC India. (2021). Fintech Trends Report.
3) EY. (2020). Fintech for Financial Inclusion in India.
4) KPMG. (2021). Blockchain in India: A Disruptive Force.
5) Statista. (2021). Robo-Advisory Market in India.
6) RBI (Reserve Bank of India). (2021). Digital Payments: Trends,
Issues, and Opportunities.
7) Deloitte. (2021). Digital Transformation in Banking.
8) Economic Times. (2020). How Fintech is Driving Financial
Inclusion in India.
9) PwC India. (2020). Artificial Intelligence in Financial Services.

280
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

10) RBI (Reserve Bank of India). (2021). Regulatory Sandbox

Framework for Fintech Innovations.
11) RBI. (2019). Enabling Framework for Regulatory Sandbox.
12) RBI. (2020). Guidelines on Regulation of Payment Aggregators
and Payment Gateways.
13) RBI. (2021). Digital Payment Security Controls.
14) SEBI. (2019). Consultation Paper on SEBI (Regulatory Sandbox)
Regulations.
15) SEBI. (2020). SEBI (Investment Advisers) (Amendment)
Regulations.
16) IRDAI. (2017). IRDAI Guidelines on Insurtech.
17) IRDAI. (2019). IRDAI Framework for Regulatory Sandbox.

Dr. Snehal A. Bagul

Sandip Institute of Technology and Research Centre, Nashik

CHAPTER 23

NEW HISTORIES OF TRADITIONAL CINEMA

AND OVER-THE-TOP (OTT) PLATFORMS

281
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Dr. Umang Gupta

Abstract:
The cinema industry may be showing signs of growth since having to
contend with increased competition over the last number of decades
from alternate offerings such as radio, TV, computer games & Pay
TV (Silver and Mc Donnell 2007). This industry has evolved in many
years and recent trends and innovations in the industry showcase a
dynamic landscape where technology, sustainability and audience
engagement plays a pivotal role in shaping future cinematic
experiences. Filmmakers and industry stakeholders are navigating
these changes to create compelling content and redefine the cinematic
landscape for the modern era. Also the apparent global box office
decline in the last decade had been attributed to a number of factors
including cyclical poor movie offerings, total costs associated with
going to the cinema from admission price and snacks to parking,
failure of new screen technologies to boost box office revenue and the
emergence of alternative viewing methods (Silver and Mc Donnell
2007). The entertainment industry is undergoing a paradigm shift with
recent trends reshaping the dynamics of both traditional cinema and
Over-the-Top (OTT) platforms. This chapter explores the key
developments that have characterized this transformative period,
emphasizing the interplay between technological advancements,
changing audience preferences, and the strategies employed by
content creators and distributors. Also this chapter will discuss about
recent trends in cinema and OTT platforms underscore the industry's
dynamic nature, marked by adaptability, innovation, and a
commitment to meeting the ever-changing demands of audiences. The
interplay between traditional cinematic experiences and the digital
revolution exemplifies an industry in flux, where technological
advancements and strategic collaborations pave the way for an
exciting and multifaceted future.
Key words: Traditional Cinema, Content, Over-the-Top Platforms,
Technology, Paradigm Shift
Introduction:
he evolution of Indian cinema is an intriguing journey that
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.23
spans over a period of century, which is marked by
revolutionary technological advancements, artistic
innovations and shifts in societal and cultural

282
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

perspectives. Indian cinema has undergone socio-cultural, political

and technological changes over a period of 100+ years. From its
humble beginnings as a novel form of entertainment to the
sophisticated and immersive experiences of today, cinema has
continually adapted to reflect the changing tastes and expectations of
audiences worldwide. Marking its journey from the silent era to the
vibrant world of contemporary Bollywood, Indian cinema has
evolved into a powerful cultural force with global recognition.

This fascinating journey of Indian cinema began in the late 19 th

century with the invention of motion pictures when pioneers like
Lumière brothers played crucial role in developing the technology
that led the foundation of Indian film industry. The journey of motion
pictures in India marked its beginning with the screening of Lumière
Brothers' films in Mumbai in 1896. The early films were short, silent,
and lacked complex narratives, but they captivated audiences with the
sheer novelty of moving images. Despite its limitations, silent cinema
demonstrated the power of the moving image to evoke deep emotions
and tell compelling stories.

The evolution of Indian cinema reflects the dynamic nature of the

country itself. From the humble beginnings of silent films to the grand
spectacles of contemporary Bollywood, Indian cinema continues to
evolve, adapt, and push boundaries. As filmmakers explore new
narratives and experiment with storytelling techniques, Indian cinema
remains a vibrant and influential force on the global stage.

The Rise of Over-The-Top (OTT) Platforms: Transforming the

Entertainment Landscape
Over the past decade entertainment industry has witnessed a paradigm
shift with the rise of Over-The-Top (OTT) platforms. These online
streaming services deliver content directly to viewers through
internet. OTT platforms have become a dominant force in reshaping
how audiences consume content on television shows, movies, and
cinema and form other forms of digital content.

The roots of the OTT revolution can be traced back to the mid-2000s,
with the advent of platforms like Netflix and Hulu. These services
disrupted the traditional cinema model by offering on-demand
streaming, allowing users to watch content whenever and wherever
they wanted. The convenience and flexibility of OTT platforms struck
a chord with consumers, setting the stage for a transformative era in
the entertainment industry.

283
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

One of the key drivers of the OTT boom is the proliferation of high-
speed internet access. This shift democratized access to entertainment,
enabling viewers to escape the confines of scheduled programming
and enjoy a vast library of content at their own pace.

The rise of OTT platforms has also democratized content creation.

Independent filmmakers and smaller production houses now have a
direct avenue to showcase their work to a global audience without the
need for traditional distribution channels. This democratization has
resulted in a more diverse array of stories and voices, challenging the
dominance of established studios and fostering innovation in
storytelling.

Furthermore, the advent of OTT platforms has fundamentally altered

the business models of the entertainment industry. Subscription-based
services, ad-supported models, and hybrid approaches have all
become viable options for delivering content to consumers. This shift
has forced traditional cinema to adapt or face obsolescence, leading to
a more dynamic and fluid industry landscape.

As the OTT revolution continues, the industry is witnessing new

trends, including the integration of artificial intelligence for content
recommendation, interactive storytelling, and the exploration of
virtual and augmented reality. The future promises even more
innovation, as technology and creativity converge to deliver
immersive and personalized entertainment experiences.

The Dominance of OTT Platforms in Content Delivery: A

Revolution in Entertainment Consumption
The way that people consume entertainment has changed as a result
of the rise to unequaled domination of Over-The-Top (OTT)
platforms in the content distribution space. These platforms have risen
to prominence because to the combination of high-speed internet,
technological breakthroughs, and shifting consumer preferences. This
has challenged established modalities of content distribution and
ushered in a new age in the entertainment business.
The transition from scheduled content to on-demand streaming is the
fundamental driver of the over-the-top (OTT) revolution. This
significant modification satisfies the modern viewer's need for
flexibility by enabling them to access a huge collection of content
whenever it suits them. Watching films, TV series, documentaries,
and other digital content at any time and from any location has

284
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

become a hallmark of over-the-top (OTT) platforms, drawing in

viewers from all over the world.

The tailored and algorithm-driven content recommendation systems

offered by OTT platforms are among their main advantages. These
systems leverage user data and preferences to customize content
recommendations based on personal preferences. This customization
is a great way to keep and engage customers while also improving the
viewing experience. The recommendations get more sophisticated and
accurate the more users engage with the platform, fostering a
mutually beneficial relationship between the viewer and the platform.

The subscription based model has emerged as a dominant force for

OTT platforms. Viewers are ready to pay monthly/yearly subscription
fees for accessing the vast library of content without any interruption
of advertisements available on OTT platforms. The OTT platforms
have global reach due to which content consumptions has increased
tremendously. Viewers around the world can access a diverse range
of content, transcending geographical boundaries. A wider range of
perspectives and stories have emerged as a result of accessibility,
upending the predominance of popular, culturally focused content and
promoting an inclusive entertainment environment.

OTT platforms are expected to become increasingly dominant in the

future. The streaming experience is anticipated to be significantly
improved by technological innovations like augmented reality, virtual
reality, and 5G connectivity. The next stage of this entertainment
revolution will probably be shaped by user-generated material,
interactive storytelling, and the study of new formats.

Original Content Production and Its Impact on Traditional

Cinema
Due to the transformation in rise of original content production
through OTT platforms and its impact on traditional cinema the
landscape of entertainment industry has undergone a major change.
OTT platforms like Amazon Prime Video, Disney+, SonyLiv to name
a few has reshaped the model of filmmaking and distribution also it
has impacted audiences expectations and challenged the established
norms of cinematic experiences.

One of the distinctive features of OTT platforms is the commitment

of producing original content. These platforms invest heavily in
creating diverse and exclusive content, be it film or series to reality

285
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

shows to even documentaries. Anything to everything in available in

just a click. The abundance of original high quality programming has
not only attracted millions of subscribers but also has altered the
dynamics of content consumption.

The impact of OTT platforms on traditional cinema is evident in the

way audience engage with films. OTT platforms release the entire
series at once which allows audience to binge watch and consume the
content according to their schedule. This all at once or on demand
model of OTT platforms has influenced audience expectations for
traditional cinema, as traditional release of films in cinema over
weeks or months seems less appealing to those audiences who are
accustomed to immediate access on OTT platforms.

The financial models of streaming platforms, based on subscription

fees rather than box office revenue, have allowed for riskier and more
innovative storytelling. Filmmakers are given creative freedom to
explore unconventional narratives, experimental techniques, and
niche genres that might not be readily embraced by traditional studios
seeking mass appeal for theatrical releases.

The traditional cinema experience is also adapting to changing viewer

preferences. Some filmmakers and studios are exploring hybrid
release strategies, combining theatrical releases with simultaneous
streaming options. This approach acknowledges the importance of
both traditional cinematic experiences and the growing demand for
on-demand access.

Cross-Border Collaborations and International Releases:

Redefining the Global Film Industry
Cross-border partnerships and worldwide distribution have evolved
into essential elements of the filmmaking process in the modern era,
changing the field and redefining what it means to be a genuinely
global cinema. Filmmakers and studios are adopting more
international cooperation and distribution tactics as technology
develops and cultural borders become less distinct.
The growth of cross-border partnerships is one of the most prominent
trends in the international cinema business. Filmmakers from many
nations and cultural backgrounds are collaborating to produce films
that fuse a variety of viewpoints. In addition to enhancing the creative
process, these partnerships help tell stories on film that are more
inclusive.

286
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Notable examples of successful cross-border collaborations include

films like "The Grand Budapest Hotel," a co-production involving
talents from the United States, Germany, and the United Kingdom,
and "The Lunchbox," a collaboration between Indian and French
filmmakers. These films not only showcase the diversity of
storytelling but also highlight the potential for cross-cultural
resonance that emerges from international partnerships.

The growth of distribution networks and the emergence of streaming

platforms have made international releases—another crucial
component of the global film industry that is more visible. Because
they see opportunities for success outside of their own markets,
filmmakers are focusing more and more on a worldwide audience.
Films can quickly reach viewers in several nations through
simultaneous or staggered international releases, leveraging the
momentum created by marketing campaigns and critical acclaim.

OTT platforms due to its global reach have played a crucial role in
facilitating international releases. Audience can access a wide range
of films from different parts of the world, breaking down
demographic barriers and creating a more interconnected cinematic
landscape. Platforms like Disney+, Netflix and mire have become
major distributors for international content by providing a platform
for films that might have struggled to secure traditional cinema
release.

Notwithstanding the improvements made about by the trend of

international releases and cross-border collaborations, difficulties still
exist. Language obstacles, cultural quirks, and disparate legal systems
can all be obstacles to the effective implementation of global
partnerships. In addition, balancing local cultural sensitivity with
global effects calls for careful attention to detail so that movies appeal
to a wide range of viewers without sacrificing authenticity.

International distribution and cross-border partnerships are ushering

in a new age for the world cinema business. The sharing of innovative
concepts, assets, and skills has made the film industry more diverse
and globalized. Filmmakers and spectators alike are experiencing the
rich diversity that results from collaborative efforts across borders as
technology continues to overcome gaps and streaming platforms
promote greater distribution, contributing to the emergence of a truly
global cinema.

287
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Accessibility and Diversity in Content for Global Audiences:

Navigating a New Era of Inclusivity
A new era of unprecedented choices reflecting a more inclusive
representation of voices, cultures, and narratives is being ushered in
by the dramatic shift in the modern media environment toward greater
accessibility and variety in content.
1. OTT Platforms and Global Accessibility: OTT services have
emerged as powerful catalysts for accessibility on a global scale.
Platforms like Netflix, Amazon Prime Video, and Disney+ provide
audiences with a vast library of content that transcends geographical
boundaries. Viewers can access a diverse array of films, TV shows,
documentaries, and original productions, leveling the playing field
and democratizing content consumption.
2. Multilingual and Subtitled Content: There is now more emphasis
on multilingual and subtitled programming due to the growth of
foreign releases and streaming platforms. With subtitles, viewers may
now enjoy movies and TV shows in their native tongues, removing
barriers to comprehension and offering a more genuine viewing
experience. In addition to improving accessibility for audiences who
do not know English, this enables a more thorough examination of
many cultures and storytelling customs.
3. Representation and Diversity in Storytelling: The significance of
varied representation in narrative is becoming more widely
recognized. Narratives that represent a diverse range of perspectives,
experiences, and identities are becoming more and more important to
filmmakers and content providers. In order to promote a more
inclusive and genuine creative process, this dedication to diversity
goes beyond on-screen characters and includes a range of opinions in
behind-the-scenes jobs.
4. Inclusive Casting and Storylines: Content creators are putting a
lot of effort into developing narratives that offer complex
representations of marginalized communities and challenge
stereotypes through inclusive casting. Audiences all throughout the
world are drawn to this dedication to authenticity and representation
because they are looking for tales that truly capture the diversity of
human experience.
5. Empowering Underrepresented Voices: In the pursuit of
accessibility and diversity, one important area of concentration is the
empowerment of marginalized voices. Programs that assist up-and-
coming authors, filmmakers, and artists from marginalized
communities are becoming more and more popular. This gives voice
to a variety of viewpoints and opens doors for storytellers who might
have previously encountered obstacles in the field.

288
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

The dedication to diversity and accessibility in programming

continues to be a driving factor as the entertainment industry changes.
The way stories are presented and who gets to tell them is changing
due to the convergence of globalization, technology, and shifting
audience expectations. This inclusive strategy not only makes for a
more enjoyable and compassionate global community, but it also
improves the entertainment experience for viewers. The continuous
pursuit of more diversity and accessibility guarantees that a wide
range of voices may be heard on the international stage, creating a
more vivid and richer tapestry of narrative for viewers everywhere.
Rise of Short-form Content: Impact of short films and web series
Short films and web series have a deep impact on the film and
entertainment industry as it offers new avenues of storytelling,
audience engagement and creative expression. The rise of short films
and web series has not only provided a platform for emerging talent,
diverse narratives and innovative storytelling formats but also has
transformed the way of content consumption.
1. Accessibility and Reach: OTT services make it simple to watch
short films and web series, removing geographical restrictions and
giving a worldwide audience instant access to content. Due to its
accessibility, filmmaking has become more inclusive, enabling
filmmakers to share their work with a broad range of audiences.
2. Creative Freedom and Experimentation: The shorter duration
format of web series and short films frequently permits their makers
to explore unorthodox genres, subjects, and storytelling approaches. It
is up to filmmakers to take chances and investigate original stories
that might not work in the conventional feature film format. An
increase in avant-garde and experimental storytelling has resulted
from this creative freedom.
3. Emerging Talent and Diversity: Emerging talent is fostered by
short films and web series, which give actors, directors, writers, and
other creatives a stage to display their abilities. A wider variety of
views and viewpoints can now be heard in the industry because of the
democratization of production costs and the accessibility of OTT
platforms.
4. Niche and Specialized Content: Web series and short films target
particular interests and niche markets. In-depth subjects, subcultures,
or genres that may not appeal to a broad audience but have a strong
hold on a specific audience might be explored by creators. Content
that appeals directly to a variety of communities and interests has
emerged as a result of this.
5. Bite-sized Entertainment: Web series and short films provide
bite-sized entertainment experiences that fit into hectic schedules in a
289
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

fast-paced environment. It's a convenient choice for anyone searching

for quick and interesting content because viewers may experience an
entire story or episode in a shorter amount of time.
6. Breaking Traditional Narratives: Particularly, web series have
put conventional narrative frameworks to the test by providing
serialized storytelling. By removing the limitations of a two-hour
film, this format enables more in-depth character development and
intricate storylines. Over the course of several episodes or seasons,
viewers can interact with the characters and plot lines.
The entertainment industry has been greatly impacted by web series
and short films. Because of their adaptability, flexibility in terms of
expression, and capacity to serve a wide range of viewers, they are
powerful tools for narrative. The significance of web series and short
films is expected to increase, impacting the future of the film and
entertainment industries as technology advances and consumer
preferences change.

The Future of Cinema and Over-the-Top (OTT) Platforms:

Navigating an Evolving Entertainment Landscape
The entertainment industry is undergoing a remarkable transformation
which is driven by technological advancements, changing consumer
behavior and majorly the convergence between traditional cinema and
OTT platforms. It is evident with the transformation of entertainment
industry that traditional cinema and OTT platforms will continue to
influence the content consumption by audience and shape the
storytelling formats.
1. Hybrid Release Models: Hybrid release methods, which combine
the theatrical experience with digital accessibility, are a promising
development for the future. Filmmakers are probably going to use
tactics that allow audiences to pick how they want to consume the
content by releasing their films simultaneously on OTT platforms and
in cinemas. This strategy broadens the audience for movies and
accommodates a variety of tastes.
2. Technological Advancements in Cinemas: It is anticipated that
technology will advance in theaters to produce a higher-end, more
immersive experience. The cinematic environment may incorporate
innovations like cutting-edge projection technology, augmented
reality (AR), and virtual reality (VR) experiences to provide viewers
new and interesting ways to enjoy stories on the big screen.
3. Personalized Content Curation: OTT platforms will keep
improving their data-driven models and algorithms to provide tailored
content recommendations. With the development of artificial
intelligence and machine learning, these platforms will be able to

290
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

better recognize user preferences and present viewers with material

that suits their interests, making it more enjoyable and captivating
viewing experiences.
4. Interactive Storytelling: It's possible that interactive storytelling,
in which audiences actively shape the plot, may proliferate. OTT
platforms may test interactive features that let consumers make
decisions that affect the plot. By enhancing the immersive quality of
content consumption, this type of interaction turns it into a more
interactive activity.
5. AI-Generated Content: Artificial intelligence may be used more
frequently in content development. AI systems could be used to
produce virtual actors, improve special effects, and write screenplays.
While human ingenuity will always be valued above all else, artificial
intelligence (AI) could make some parts of filmmaking more
inventive and efficient.
The world of OTT platforms and traditional cinema promises to be
dynamic and revolutionary in the future. Filmmakers, content
producers, and distribution networks will adjust as technology
develops to satisfy the shifting needs and inclinations of viewers. The
combination of classic movie going experiences with the openness
and creativity of over-the-top (OTT) platforms offers a plethora of
opportunities for both consumers and storytellers, influencing the
direction of entertainment in novel and exciting ways.

Conclusion:
In conclusion, the entertainment industry is undergoing a
transformation, and this is reflected in the latest developments in
traditional cinema and Over-the-Top (OTT) platforms. The way that
audiences interact with audio-visual information has been changed by
the convergence of changing consumer tastes, technology
improvements, and tactical adjustments in content delivery tactics.
The adoption of hybrid release model allows films to release
simultaneously in traditional cinema and OTT platforms and this
exemplifies the forward looking approach of entertainment industry.
The adoption of hybrid release models, allowing films to
simultaneously reach theaters and OTT platforms, exemplify a
forward-looking approach by the industry. This trend gives viewers
the freedom to select between the convenience of on-demand
streaming and the full cinematic experience, acknowledging the
variety of their viewing preferences. The way these two media
interact dynamically highlights the industry's dedication to
adaptability and flexibility in response to the shifting nature of
content consumption.

291
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Cinemas are showcasing a concentrated effort to improve the

traditional movie-watching experience with technological advances
including augmented reality applications, immersive sound systems,
and improved projection technology. Cinemas are utilizing state-of-
the-art technologies to enthrall viewers and offer a more stimulating
and technologically advanced atmosphere. This dedication to
technology development highlights the cinematic experience's
timeless allure in the face of the proliferation of digital media.

The proliferation of OTT platforms has disrupted traditional content

distribution models, establishing on-demand streaming as a
mainstream mode of content consumption. Streaming services have
become major content creators, ushering in an era of diverse
storytelling, original productions, and high-quality content.
Traditional studios, recognizing the digital shift, are actively
participating in this content revolution, further blurring the lines
between traditional cinema and the digital realm.
In essence, the recent trends underscore the entertainment industry's
ability to evolve and innovate in response to the ever-changing
landscape. Whether it's through the use of cutting-edge technology,
the explosion of original content creation, or the clever partnerships
between digital and traditional media, the film industry continues to
be dynamic, flexible, and dedicated to providing audiences around the
world with engaging content experiences. The combination of OTT
platforms and traditional cinema offers an exciting and diverse future
for the entertainment sector as it navigates this revolutionary path.
References:
1. ABI research (2014). Over the Top (OTT) and Multiscreen Video
Services. Retrieved from: https://www.abiresearch.com/market-
research/product/1016143-over-the-top-ottandmultiscreen-video-
ser/
2. Acland, Charles, Screen Traffic. Movies, Multiplexes, and Global
Culture, Durham: Duke University Press, 2003.
3. Allen, Robert & Douglas Gomery, Film History, New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1985.
4. Anderson, P. (2021, June 20). Trends Shaping the Future of
Cinema. Film Industry Trends. https://www.filmtrends.com/
trends-shaping-cinema
5. Athique, A. M., & Hill, D. (2007). Multiplex cinemas and urban
redevelopment in India. Media International Australia,
Incorporating Culture & Policy, (124), 108.

292
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

6. Barkhuus, L. (2009): "Television on the internet: new practices,

new viewers", CHI'09 Extended Abstracts on Human Factors in
Computing Systems, 2479-2488.
7. Bellamy Jr, R. V., & Walker, J. R. (1996). Television and the
remote control: grazing on a vast wasteland. Guilford Press.
8. Brown, S. L. (2019). The Impact of Streaming Services on
Traditional Cinemas (Master's thesis). University of California,
Los Angeles.
9. Gupta, U. Gender Role and Hate Speech Representation in Web
Series. International Journal for Research in Applied Science &
Engineering Technology (IJRASET) ISSN: 2321-9653; Volume
11 Issue XII Dec 2023
10. Gupta, U. Portrayal of Physical and Mental Illness in Indian
Cinema A Thematic Analysis.(Ph.D. Thesis). Amity University
Uttar Pradesh.
11. Gupta, U., & Prakash, R. (2021). Women in Bollywood.
PSYCHOLOGY AND EDUCATION, 58(1), 4856-4863.
12. Johnson, M.S., & Davis, R.L. (2020). Streaming Services:A
Revolution in Entertainment. Journal of Media Studies, 15(3),
123-145.
13. Klinger, B. (2006). Beyond the multiplex: Cinema, new
technologies, and the home. University of California Press.
14. Motion Picture Association. (2020). The Changing Dynamics of
Global Entertainment. https://www.mpaa.org/research/reports/
15. Smith, J. A. (2021). The Evolution of Cinema: A Comprehensive
Analysis. FilmPress.
16. Verma, N. (2019), Over-The-Top (OTT) Content: The Next-Gen
Medium of Entertainment, Kellton Tech, August 6, 2019,
Accessed online https://www.kelltontech.com/kellton-tech-blog/
over-the-top-content-next-gen-mediumentertainment
17. White, K. R. (2022, January 15). The Power of OTT Platforms.
Entertainment Weekly, 45(2), 34-39.
Dr. Umang Gupta
Assistant Professor, Department of Journalism and Mass
Communication, Banasthali Vidyapith
CHAPTER 24

SMART HOME SYSTEM USING CADIO: A

COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW

293
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Dr. Bokare M. M., Mr. Pawale S. R. & Mr. Thorat U. G.

Abstract:
In this work, a low-cost, versatile, and dependable home monitoring
and management system with extra security utilizing ESP32 is
presented. IP connectivity is provided through local Wi-Fi, enabling
formal users to view and operate equipment remotely via Android
smartphone applications. Using the internet of things, this server-self-
governing system allows users to operate whatever equipment they
want, from industrialized machinery to consumer goods. In addition
to reducing human labor, home monitoring and device management
systems also save energy and time. We show an ESP32-based home
monitoring system in order to illustrate the system's viability and
efficacy. The user can monitor a number of household circumstances
with its assistance, including the temperature of the room, gas leaks,
tank levels of water, and person detection and control various
appliances such as light, fan, motor, gas knob and take decision based
on the feedback of sensors remotely.

Key words: ESP32, Internet of Things (IoT), Cadio, AI.

Introduction:
ny technology that touts artificial intelligence has come to
be associated with the label "smart" in recent years. Smart
technology's primary feature is its capacity to gather
information from its environment and respond
appropriately [1]. Smart technology has emerged as the primary force
behind innovative concepts like the smart home system (SHS), with
the primary goal being the wellbeing of humanity. Globally, device
interconnection and information sharing have increased as a result of
the development of smart products and services, and this has
accelerated the development of smart home technology [2].

The benefits of smart technology and the potential for a sizable

worldwide market have stoked researchers' intense interest in smart
home technology. The smart home has emerged as a very promising
area
DOI:in the realm of home automation and management. The phrase
10.25215/9189764560.24
"smart home" does not only refer to residential buildings. Instead, a
broader range of technological implications result from it, such as
intelligent or smart living or habitation [3]. The concept of the "smart

294
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

home" is expanded beyond a place where people live by including

computer-regulated technologies like smart manufacturing, smart
cities, and smart societies. The integration of smart technology into
houses to accomplish comfort, safety, security, healthcare,
convenience and energy conservation is known as smart home
systems (SHSs), which are a subset of ubiquitous computing [4-6].

High-quality home automation and remote appliance control are

features that smart homes offer. One of the primary services offered
by SHSs is a remote monitoring system, which provides geriatric care
and remote home control via the Internet and communications. An
SHS user can complete duties before coming home and can operate
household equipment remotely from any location. Smart sensors can
keep an eye on the humidity and temperature in a home and adjust the
environment to the user's preference. Improved security systems for
smart homes can offer greater protection with the aid of a smart object
detecting system.

The phrase "smart home" was first used in domestic services due to
the automation technology's rapid rise. It is evident that this industry
is always upgrading because of the strong market demand and
success. According to estimates and assessments conducted by the
World Economic Forum (WEF), this industry's worth is expected to
reach 13 trillion USD by 2030 [7]. This information can be used to
better understand both the industry's future and the existing demand.
As per Statista, the smart home market is anticipated to reach a global
value of 99.41 billion USD by 2021 [8]. The goal of every study and
prediction is to accelerate the development of smart home
technologies. Expectations will probably rise along with it as it
expands.

In the beginning, the smart home was viewed as a convenience

product, but as technology advanced, it also proved to be a solution
for efficiency, preference, and security. According to studies, smart
houses can lower their overall electricity costs, which has a
significant impact on efficiency [9, 10]. Using this technology, a
smart house can save very little on a per unit basis, but overall, the
impact is bigger than it was previously. Another area with a lot of
promise is home security systems, where smart homes can play a big
part. A smart home's security system can make use of a variety of
sensors to create a safer atmosphere [11, 12].

295
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

The biggest market for smart homes is the ambient luxury segment, in
which they can play a major role. Nonetheless, sick, the elderly, and
people with disabilities can also benefit from smart home technology
when used appropriately [13]. Patients who have limitations owing to
age or specific medical conditions might make use of assistive
technology provided by application-specific systems such motion and
image recognition systems [14]. In such situations, virtual reality
devices are also being used [15]. Better quality SHSs were developed
at comparatively cheaper costs as a result of a revolution in
technological development that led to a mass advancement in the
Internet, information, and communication technology. Research on
SHS is experiencing unprecedented interest. Over the past ten years,
there has been a lot of research interest in SHSs. For the purpose of
future research, there is, however, a dearth of comprehensive
information collection and display of the prior works related to this
topic. A number of recent review papers [16–18] offered succinct
summaries of the most recent developments in the field of SHSs as
well as the benefits and drawbacks of the solutions that the
researchers had examined. These studies, however, were unable to
offer a comprehensive examination of the various methodologies
employed by researchers, or of the microprocessors and sensors that
were employed in the creation of more current SHSs or the services
that SHSs offer. These factors have made it essential to reassess SHSs
in light of technical advancements, microprocessors, sensors,
networking strategies, computational methodologies, and services.
Based on the previously specified topics, this review provides an
overview of the recent works on technological advancement in smart
homes.

What is CADIO?
CADIO is complete home automation platform allows you to build
and control smart home devices, with many new features developed
to give you the best smart home experience.
• Very easy device configuration. • Digital humidity/temperature
• Control over local wiFi devices.
network. • Digital sensors.
• Control over CADIO cloud. • 433MHZ Sensors.
• New fully automated hybrid • Linking devices with sensors,
interface. humidity and temperature.
• Unlimited number of devices • Timers.
can be added. • Schedules.
• Support devices on different • Sync with physical power switches.
networks. • 433MHZ remote controller support.
• Units/Groups view. • Infrared remote controller support.

296
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

• Notifications for every device. • Overheat protection/alarms.

• ON/OFF devices. • Pin-code security for every device.
• Dimmer devices. • CADIO voice control (English &
• RGB devices. Arabic).
• Shutters devices. • Multi-languages interface (English &
• IR devices. Arabic).
• Fan speed regulator. • Integrated with Google Home
• Data devices. (CADIO action).
• Integrated with Amazon Alexa
(CADIO skill).
Features of CADIO Home Automation System
• Appliances can be controlled from anywhere in the world through
Internet
• Appliances can also be controlled with manual switches without
changing the electrical connection for better reliability.
• The whole system can also be controlled through a 433 MHz RF
remote
• The status of each appliance can be viewed on the CADIO mobile
app
• As CADIO provide AI based code generation, one can easily
change or modify the system according to their need
• It has a low current consumption & maintenance cost once it is
installed

Figure 1 Circuit Diagram

297
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 2 PCB etching with board

Working Principle of the Circuit

It's a really basic circuit. For ease of comprehension, the schematics
are broken down into four sections. The circuit for the 5V relay driver
is covered in the first part. A BC557 PNP Transistor, which functions
as an electrical switch in our design, is positioned between the relay
and the +5V power source. It is powered by a ground pulse since it is
a PNP kind of transistor. As a result, each relay on the ESP32 turns on
when a ground pulse passes through the falling resistor. To visually
indicate the current status of the relay (ON/OFF), a 5mm LED is
present. In order to prevent back EMF from the relay coil, a 1N4007
Diode is kept in parallel with the coil. The second segment located on
the right side of the diagram represents the 5V Live Feedback Circuit
designed for the ESP32. Within this section, we have implemented a
compact and efficient transformer-less power supply for each relay to
obtain real-time feedback on the CADIO Mobile Application.

Our power supply units utilize the dropper capacitor method, wherein
a 0.1uF 400V capacitor is employed to reduce the 220V AC inline
voltage to a specific level (approximately 65V in our case). To
discharge the capacitor when it is deactivated, a parallel 1MΩ bleeder
resistor is incorporated. Additionally, a 4.7Ω 1W protection resistor is
connected in series with the power supply circuit to safeguard against
spike voltages and currents. Following the voltage reduction, the AC
voltage undergoes AC to DC conversion through the MB10s Bridge
Rectifier (SMD). After the rectification process, the output is directed
through a 100uF 63V capacitor to smoothen the DC supply. A 5mm
Blue LED is incorporated to provide a visual indication of the power

298
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

supply state. Subsequently, the supply voltage is directed to an EL817

Optocoupler (SMD), which serves the purpose of isolating the
individual power supply from the ESP32. The feedback signaling is
facilitated by the common 5V power supply utilized on the board.
Moving on to the third section located at the bottom of the schematic,
we find the Inlet DC 5V Supply Terminal alongside the 433MHz RF
Receiver, both directly linked to the ESP32 board.

Why ESP32?
The ESP32 microcontroller stands out as a cost-effective, low-power
system-on-chip microcontroller equipped with dual-core micro
processors and support for Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. Its integrated
structure makes it an excellent choice for Internet of Things (IoT)
devices, combining performance and affordability at the core of our
design. The ESP32 board, serving as the central hub for connecting
sensors, is programmed with the project's source code. With an
operational voltage range of 2.2 to 3.6 V and on-chip memory for
storing source code directly, the ESP32 delivers 3.3 V during typical
operation [19]. Key features of the ESP32 include two cores for
multitasking, internal sensors like capacitive touch and hall effect
sensors, and compatibility with Wi-Fi protocols. It boasts a 32-
bithexa-core design, making it suitable for a variety of IoT
applications, including activities such as connecting to cameras, voice
recognition, streaming data, image recognition, and IoT sensors.
Detailed technical information supporting the ESP32 as the optimal
microcontroller can be found at [20-21].

ESP32 Sleep Modes

The ESP32's advanced power management allows it to enter a power-
saving mode called "sleep mode" when not in use, preserving data in
RAM. With five programmable power modes—active mode
(160∼260 mA), modem sleep mode (3∼30 mA), light sleep mode
(∼0.8 mA), deep sleep mode (∼6.5 μA), and hibernation mode (∼4.5
μA)—the ESP32 adjusts its power consumption based on the
application's demands. Transitioning between these modes can occur
even at currents lower than 4.5 μA. The ESP32's efficient power
management offers flexibility, balancing power consumption, wakeup
latency, and available wakeup sources [22].

ESP32 vs. Arduino Uno vs. ESP8266

In comparison to the Arduino Uno, the ESP32 stands out with its
efficient power consumption, making it suitable for battery-powered
applications. It features more GPIO pins and includes built-in Wi-Fi

299
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

and Bluetooth, eliminating the need for additional radio modules.

Cost-effectiveness is another advantage, with the ESP32 being around
five times cheaper than the Arduino Uno, not accounting for external
peripherals required by the latter. Additionally, the ESP32 surpasses
its counterpart, the ESP8266, with added capabilities such as a CPU
core, faster Wi-Fi, Bluetooth (BLE), touch sensitivity pins, built-in
hall effect sensors, and a temperature sensor. The ESP32 offers more
GPIO pins, including ten capacitive GPROs for touch sensing, all
while maintaining a comparable price to the ESP8266.

Cadio Setup:

Figure 3 Cadio Setup files

• After downloading unzip and extract the two files

• Now open the flash download tool and execute the .exe file. You
will see a small popup on the screen. Then select the board type
(ESP Board) & Work mode - Develop
• Now connect the ESP board with your computer & select the
right COM port
• Then on the bottom side click the Erase button to delete the
existing firmware
• Now select the 4 Firmware files from the ESP32 firmware folder
& write the values same as the folder name
• Then Tick the 4 files (you will find the values turn green on each
mark) & click Start

300
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

• Now you have successfully uploaded the CADIO firmware to

your ESP board
• Now restart your ESP board & wait for a while, you will note that
the blue light on your ESP board started to flash
• Now connect your smartphone to the hotspot created by the ESP
board and open the CADIO mobile application (Available in both
Android & iOS)
• In the app browse the configuration tab and click on that
• Now your ESP board is in configuration mode and do the
configuration according to the project (In our case the
configuration is given below)
• After Configuration the ESP Board will scan the nearby Wi-Fi
network, choose your network and provide your network
credentials along with the unit name

Figure 4 Different options

• After successfully doing all the steps you will find that your board
is listed on the dashboard of the CADIO Mobile Application &
further Icons can be customized

301
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 5 Main UI

Advantages
• The system is designed to be user-friendly and comes at a low
cost with minimal requirements, ensuring easy accessibility.
• Users can have live coverage of their household from anywhere
in the world by accessing the system through the required IP
address.
• The system includes a face detection feature at the front door,
capturing snapshots and sending them through the internet,
effectively serving as a security measure.
• All peripheral devices connected to the ESP server can be
accessed by the user through this system.
• For the system to operate, the user's smartphone must be
connected to active internet and have Bluetooth enabled.
• In the event of an intrusion attempt, the system will promptly
send a text message through a web API-based platform.
• The home security system is equipped with a personalized app
that requires user fingerprint authentication, ensuring a secure
control of the home with no risk of unauthorized access.
• The system notifies the user when someone is at the front door
and seeks user permission to open the door through a virtual
button in the Android app.

302
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

• The personalized app interface displays all home devices,

including live camera coverage, enabling efficient power
management and protection.
• In instances of poor connectivity or power cuts, users can
manually operate all peripheral devices.
• The system is specifically designed for home automation,
providing a simple and cost-effective security solution.

Design and Implementation:

Figure 6 Circuit Design

Figure 7 Final Product Design with Physical and Touch Buttons

Future Scope
This project represents an ongoing endeavor within the realm of IoT
applications for home automation systems. As technology evolves,
future devices may offer enhanced reliability, faster performance, and
reduced costs. While the current components used in this project are
effective, they can be replaced with more recent devices, provided
they come equipped with the necessary software and drivers.

The tasks outlined in this project have been successfully completed,

meeting the specified objectives detailed in this article. Despite facing
constraints in terms of time and finances, the hope is that this project
will serve as a foundational step in introducing IoT technologies to
developing and underdeveloped countries.

Recognizing the ever-advancing nature of technology, there remains

ample room for improvement. The integration of machine learning
and artificial intelligence holds promise for enhancing various
machine operations in the future. Anticipated innovations may extend

303
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

to areas such as waste management, efficient water management, and

wastewater management. Achieving these advancements will
necessitate continued work and research in the field, showcasing the
project's potential to contribute to broader technological
advancements.

Conclusion:
Indeed, the Internet of Things (IoT) plays a crucial role in the realm
of home automation, bringing convenience to everyone and offering
particular benefits for individuals with disabilities. This project
specifically adopts a method centered around IoT to establish a home
automation system.

Key to this implementation is the utilization of an ESP32 board

equipped with a wireless module, serving as the control hub for the
entire system. The ESP32's capabilities, including support for Wi-Fi
and Bluetooth, make it well-suited for IoT applications in home
automation. This allows the integration of various devices and
sensors, enabling users to remotely monitor and control different
aspects of their home environment. By leveraging the IoT framework,
this project enhances the accessibility and efficiency of the home
automation system, contributing to a more connected and intelligent
living space. The adoption of IoT in home automation continues to
pave the way for innovative solutions that improve the quality of life
for users while promoting inclusivity for individuals with diverse
needs.

Reference:
1. M. Hasan, M. H. Anik, and S. Islam, “Microcontroller Based
Smart Home System with Enhanced Appliance Switching
Capacity,” in Proceedings of the 2018 Fifth HCT Information
Technology Trends (ITT), pp. 364–367, Dubai, UAE, November
2018.
2. M. Hasan, P. Biswas, M. T. I. Bilash, and M. A. Z. Dipto, “Smart
Home Systems: Overview And Comparative Analysis,” in
Proceedings of the 2018 Fourth International Conference on
Research in Computational Intelligence and Communication
Networks (ICRCICN), pp. 264–268, Kolkata, India, Nov.2018.
3. D. Debnath, A.H. Siddique, M.Hasan et.al., “Smart Electrification
of Rural Bangladesh Trough Smart Grid,” Sustainable
Communication Networks and Application, vol.55, 2020.
4. M. Hasan, M. Hossain Anik, S. Chowdhury, S. Alam Chowdhury,
T. Islam Bilash, and S. Islam, “Low-Cost Appliance Switching

304
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Circuit For Discarding Technical Issues Of Microcontroller

Controlled Smart Home,” International Journal of Sensors and
Sensor Networks, vol. 7, no. 2, pp. 16–22, 2019.
5. M. Hasan, M. A. Z. Dipto, M. S. Islam, A. Sorwar, and M. S.
Alam, “A Smart Semi-Automated Multifarious Surveillance Bot
for Outdoor Security Using Termal Image Processing,” Advances
in Networks, vol. 7, no. 2, pp. 21–28, 2019.
6. K. Nimmy, S. Sankaran, K. Achuthan, and P. Calyam,
“Lightweight and privacy-preserving remote user authentication
for smart homes,” IEEE Access, vol. 10, pp. 176–190, 2022.
7. World Economic Forum, Digital Transformation Initiative, World
Economic Forum, Cologny, Switzerland, 2018.
8. N. M. Allifah and I. A. Zualkernan, “Ranking security of IoT
based smart home consumer devices,” IEEE Access, vol. 10, pp.
18352–18369, 2022.
9. I. Zenginis, J. Vardakas, N. E. Koltsaklis, and C. Verikoukis,
“Smart home’s energy management through a clustering-based
reinforcement learning approach,” IEEE Internet of Tings
Journal, vol. 9, no. 17, pp. 16363–16371, 2022.
10. F. Shahriyar, M. Islam, A. Chakraborty, M. Hasan, H. U. Zaman,
and A. H. Siddique, “Fault and system analysis model of voltage
source control based HVDC transmission system,” in Proceedings
of the 2021 12th International Conference on Computing
Communication and Networking Technologies (ICCCNT), pp. 1–
6, Kharagpur, India, July 2021.
11. I.V. Paputungan, M. R. Al Fitri, and U. Y. Oktiawati, “Motion
and Movement Detection for DIY Home Security System,” in
Proceedings of the 2019 IEEE Conference on Sustainable
Utilization and Development in Engineering and Technologies
(CSUDET), pp. 122–125, Penang, Malaysia, November 2019.
12. M. N. Hassan, M. R. Islam, F. Faisal, F. H. Semantha, A. H.
Siddique, and M. Hasan, “An IoT based environment monitoring
system,” in Proceedings of the 2020 3rd International Conference
on Intelligent Sustainable Systems (ICISS), pp. 1119–1124,
Toothukudi, India, December 2020.
13. P. Mtshali and F. Khubisa, “A smart home appliance control
system for physically disabled people,” in Proceedings of the
2019 Conference on Information Communications Technology
and Society (ICTAS), pp. 1–5, Durban, South Africa, Mar. 2019.
14. T. Vaiyapuri, E. L. Lydia, M. Y. Sikkandar, V. G. D´ıaz, I. V.
Pustokhina, and D. A. Pustokhin, “Internet of things and deep
learning enabled elderly fall detection model for smart
homecare,” IEEE Access, vol. 9, pp. 113879–113888, 2021.

305
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

15. K. Viard, M. P. Fanti, G. Faraut, and J.-J. Lesage, “Human

activity discovery and recognition using probabilistic fnite state
automata,” IEEE Transactions on Automation Science and
Engineering, vol. 17, no. 4, pp. 2085–2096, 2020.
16. M. Alaa, A. A. Zaidan, B. B. Zaidan, M. Talal, and M. L. M.
Kiah, “A review of smart home applications based on Internet of
Tings,” Journal of Network and Computer Applications, vol. 97,
pp. 48–65, 2017.
17. D. N. Mekuria, P. Sernani, N. Falcionelli, and A. F. Dragoni,
“Smart home reasoning systems: a systematic literature review,”
Journal of Ambient Intelligence and Humanized Computing, vol.
12, no. 4, pp. 4485–4502, 2021.
A. H. Siddique, S. Tasnim, F. Shahriyar, M. Hasan, and K. Rashid,
“Renewable energy sector in Bangladesh: the current scenario,
challenges and the role of IoT in building a smart distribution
grid,” Energies, vol. 14, no. 16, p. 5083, 2021.
18. V. Pravalika and C. R. Prasad, “Internet of things based home
monitoring and device control using Esp32,” International Journal
of Recent Technology and Engineering, vol. 8, pp. 58–62, 2019.
19. A. Maier, A. Sharp, and Y. Vagapov, “Comparative analysis and
practical implementation of the ESP32 microcontroller module
for the internet of things,” in Proceedings of the 2017 Internet
Technologies and Applications (ITA), pp. 143–148, Wrexham,
UK, November 2017.
20. M. Babiuch, P. Foltýnek, and P. Smutný, “Using the ESP32
microcontroller for data processing,” in Proceedings of the 2019
20th International Carpathian Control Conference (ICCC), pp. 1–
6, Krakow-Wieliczka, Poland, May 2019.
21. ESP32 Technical Reference Manual, “Espressif Systems,” 2022.

Dr. Bokare M. M.
Head, CS Department, Institute of Technology & Management,
Nanded, Maharashtra, India
Email : [email protected]

Mr. Pawale S. R.
Industry Expert, SoftGrid Info Pvt. Ltd, Pune, Maharashtra, India
Email : [email protected]

Mr. Thorat U. G.
Industry Expert, SoftGrid Info Pvt. Ltd, Punem Maharashtra, India
Email : [email protected]

306
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 25

INTEGRATION OF ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE

AND NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR HEAVY METAL
REMOVAL AND DYE DEGRADATION FOR
WASTEWATER TREATMENT

Shubhajit Halder, Azmiya Sadaf, Doyel Bhattacharya, Rohit Maind

Abstract:
Water is valuable resources for all the life exist on the earth but as a
result of, unplanned industrial set up, civilization and population
development, the quality of the water is deteriorating. Researchers
have drawn attention towards eradication of heavy metals and dyes
from river water due to its extreme toxicity. This review summarises
the integration of nanotechnology and artificial intelligence (AI) in
material sciences. Nanotechnology has been widely used in
effectively removing heavy metals and dyes from wastewater.
Currently, nanomaterials have been widely explored for various
human needs. On the other hand, in last decade AI has also come into
view as a powerful instrument to solve real-world problems and has
gained huge interest. AI has also been widely used in water
purification and desalination to improve the process and to offer
possible solutions to reduce water pollution and water scarcity.
Intensive applications of AI also diminish the operational expenses of
the water management. The use of artificial neural networks (ANNs)
is treated as a precious modelling means of AI for predicting the
environmental issues, mainly in the area of water related issues and
treatment. ANNs modelling method showed the significant efficiency
in representing adsorption of different adsorbents. This study proves
that ANNs are highly effective in the removal of heavy metal and dye
from water.

Key words: Nanotechnology, Artificial Intelligence, Heavy metal and

dye removal, Artificial Neural Network (ANN).

307
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Introduction:
anotechnology has become boon for the world in the
twenty-first century.
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.25 Nanotechnology is a branch of
science and technology that deals with materials at
subatomic, atomic, molecular and supramolecular scale
for industrial purpose(Bukhari et al., 2021). Nanotechnology is
defined as the study of materials having size ranges between 1-100
nm. It has special and distinctive properties such as chemical,
electrical, physical and mechanical properties and also greatly
contributed in the field of medical, microbiology, biotechnology,
pharmaceutics and chemistry, engineering for making drugs, food
packaging, cytotoxic studies, wastewater treatment, electronics and
environment remediation(Aravind et al., 2021). Nanotechnology and
nanomedicines have taken the science to a new height in the world.
The global nanomaterials market is about to reach a new heights of
$75.64 billion by 2025, growing a yearly growth rate of 13.2% from
2020 to 2025, according to Markets (Vikram et al., 2023).

Due to increase in urbanization and industrialization, industries such

as paper industries, tanneries, metal plating facilities, batteries and
fertilizer industries is continuously discharging heavy metals and dyes
into the river water especially in developing nations. Additionally,
these heavy metals and dyes, which are typically found in river waters
are significant because they be detrimental to humans and aquatic life
as it decreases the oxygen content in the water and making it
unsuitable for use by changing its colour and odour (Ossman, 2018).
Hg, Cr, , Ag, Fe, Ni, Pd, U, As, Cd, Pb, Zn, Cu and Pt are some of the
heavy metals that are harmful to humans and animals even at minor
exposure . The exposure to heavy metals cause defects like metabolic
disorders, genetic disorder, mutations, DNA methylation, and
neurological disorders.(Yadav et al., 2023). Dyes like Congo red,
Methylene blue, Crystal violet etc. are widely used in medicine for
animals as a biological stain, food colour, cloth, leathers and plastics.
The dyes are also detrimental to living beings and can cover up the
river water when directly discharged in water that leads to less
penetration of light in water which results in less photosynthesis. The
dyes in water can cause ecological hazard and also causes cancer and
severe eye irritation to human being. The contamination of water
streams with complicated structural components like heavy metals
and dyes reduces the quality of water if discharged directly into the
river. Many studies suggest that heavy metals in soil and water above

308
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

their permissible limit can be a risk factor for environmental

pollution, public health and food chain. Releasing dyes into the water
without giving any treatment can cause harmful health effects and
ecological risk. Moreover, exposure of humans to high concentrations
of dyes can cause cyanosis shock, jaundice, increased heart rate
vomiting, and tissue necrosis. As a result of these negative impacts,
dye containing waste should be well treated before their discharge
into the environment. According to studies, nearly 15% of our water
streams are tainted with dyes.(Motene et al., 2021). Adsorption is the
most effective, efficient and cheaper way for removal of heavy metals
and dyes from wastewater because the other methods have some
disadvantages including discharging a lot of sludge, inefficacy,
proper and specific reaction conditions, and costly to release.
Adsorption method is arising as a potentially chosen way for the
removal of heavy metals and dyes due to its efficiency to reproduce
the adsorbent, quality treated effluent, transformable, and flexibility.
To improve the affect of adsorption processes for wastewater
treatment, artificial intelligence-based models are included. The
numbers of authors have acknowledged the benefits of these types of
model to improve associations and approximations of the adsorption
of organic and inorganic adsorbents in single-component and multi-
component solutions.

Artificial Intelligence:
Artificial Intelligence is the primary and extensively recognized area
of computer related science that works with construction machines
that is capable of performing task that previously only human intellect
can do. The main objective of implementing AI to issues in a system
is to strengthen the abilities of computers that are related to human
intellect, such as education, problem-solving, sensing, and reasoning
by automating the task, reducing human errors, eliminating repetitive
task and accelerate research and development. Artificial Intelligence
is a rapidly advancing topic with practical applications in a wide
range of industries, including, e-commerce, transportation and smart
cities, academics, finance and healthcare. AI is broadly classified into
deep learning, data analytics and machine learning. The Internet of
things, blockchain, cloud computing, intelligent decision-making, and
the fourth industrial revolution are the primary applications of these
technologies. The primary reason AI is so popular is that it has the
ability to learn from past data, adjust a system, and make decisions.
The blending of AI-based systems with flexibility, intelligence and
intentionality in its suggested algorithms is the factor that is causing
AI's importance to grow steadily over time(Alam et al., 2022).

309
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

How AI is integrated in Nanotechnology:

AI is not just one technologyit isinstead, an umbrella word for any
form of software or hardware component that facilitates machine
learning, expert systems, generative AI, and some types of
robotics.Nanotechnology or nanoscience is the study and
development of applied science at the atomic or molecular level.The
advancement of nanotechnology has significantly contributed to the
power of AI. Integrating AI with nanotechnology may open the way
for a variety of scientific advancement and career fields(Rawat et al.,
2023)

Artificial intelligence and its revolutionary innovations are having a

big influence on our lives.It has the potential to make a substantial
contribution to a wide range of businesses, including manufacturing,
healthcare, finance, transportation, and addressing issues such as
environmental protection.Artificial intelligence (AI) has received
tremendous interest during past few decades due to its ability to
improve efficiency and automation. Learning material by trial and
error is inefficient and time-consuming so AI, particularly machine
learning has the potential to accelerate the process by extracting rules
from information and developing predictive models(Sha et al., 2020).
Artificial intelligence (AI) has emerged as a viable solution to real-
world problems. Artificial intelligence techniques have also been
utilized to improve desalination and water treatment processes and to
bring feasible and realistic solutions to water pollution and water
scarcity. AI is expected to cut operating expenses by 20 to 30% by
lowering the cost and use of chemicals in water treatment. Due to AI's
modest implementation generalization, adaptability, and basic design,
the process of cleaning water has become simpler. Convoluted Neural
Networks (CNN), Feed Forward Back-Propagation Neural Networks
(FFBPNN), Recurrent Neural Networks (RNN), Decision Trees (DT),
and Adaptive Network Based Fuzzy Inference Systems (ANFIS) are
some of the main AI approaches used in water treatment. Numerous
hybrid algorithms, such as Feed Forward Back Propagation (FFBP)-
ANN, PSO-GA, ANNGA, MLP-ANN, Support Vector Regression
(SVR)-GA, Back Propagation (BP)-ANN and ANN-PSO have also
been researched for their potential application in water treatment
(Alam et al., 2022).

310
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Fig 1: Classification of AI techniques

Artificial Neural Network (ANN): The usage of artificial neural

networks (ANNs) is particularly helpful since these networks can do
nonlinear mapping and process modelling without requiring
considerable theoretical expertise. With a lot of data, artificial neural
networks (ANNs) can effectively study the quantitative mapping
between a set of input and output parameters of the concerned
nonlinear system.

Fig 2: A diagram of the basic ANNs with four layers

311
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

An output layer, an input layer, and several hidden layers are the
common elements of an artificial neural network. These layers
contain neurons which describe the relation between the various
variables having input character and the network’s layers. Back
broadcast is an iterative optimization method, where the loss task and
assessment metric are lessened by adapting the weight and bias
amongst neurons. Mean squared error (MSE) are used as a loss metric
for calculating the back proliferation accuracy:

Activation functions have been applied to produce a non linear result

from the weighted sum of the ANN’s inputs. The input layer was
connected to the hidden one using the rectified linear unit (ReLU)
activation function and between the hidden and output layer the linear
function was placed. The input data of ANN was normalised beyween
-1 and 1 .The normalised equation can be defined as follows:

Where, yi gives the normalized value of x, and xmin and xmax

represents for the maximum and minimum values of x, respectively.
The weight of a concerned neuron in a certain hidden layer is ca by
the following equation,

Where k represents the neurons’ number in the input layer, wab is the
connection weight between neuron “a” in the input layer and neuron
“b” in the hidden layer, and xa is the neuron “a” value in the input
layer. Similarly, for the output layer, the weight of a neuron in the
output layer can be calculated by Equation as follow:

where z is the number of neurons in the hidden layer, wbc represents

the connection weight between neuron “b” in the hidden layer and
neuron “c” in the output layer, and xb signifies the neuron “b” value
in the hidden layer. The weight of neurons in either the output layer or
hidden layer was used in the activation function to produce the
predicted output

312
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Where y, f, W, and B represents the output, activation function,

weight, and bias, respectively. The neurons’ number in the hidden
layer is directly proportional to the simulation performance of the
ANN model, the excessive number of neurons could result in over-
fitting. The over-fitting issue tends to lessen the robustness and
simplification of the proposed model.

Application of ANN (AI) in Wastewater treatment:

Activated carbon (AC), carbon nanotubes (CNTs), metallic
nanoparticles, metallic oxide nanoparticles, and other adsorbents have
received special attention. The amount of elimination is an important
parameter for the adsorption methodology, but due to the time-
constraint nature of data gathering, this information is not always
accessible. In recent years, the broad application of ANN in
adsorption modelling has been used. Artificial neural network (ANN)
became an effective as it does not require any predefined concept
model for modeling and predicting the adsorption equilibrium. In
waste water treatment and water purification, the models of AI have
been implemented to determine the isotherms, kinetics for a wide
range of adsorbents and adsorbates. Artificial neural networks can
address the notable and meaningful drawbacks that traditional
adsorption models have, especially when it comes to making better
predictions under different operating situations. This methodology
can be used for effective use in adsorption kinetics and multi-
component adsorption. Artificial neural networks (ANN) are
sometimes used in biological neurological processing and can be an
effective tool to separate solids from liquids and for adsorption.

ANNs have been used extensively as an substitute to standard

modelling approaches in a variety of fields, including , water quality
management ,water resource management, dye adsorption and heavy
metal prediction modelling (Taylor et al., 2015). Several researches
have described the study of artificial intelligence models for the
evaluation of the dye and heavy metal removal adsorption
performance of different adsorbents. Some researchers reported
eliminating a single colour or heavy metal, while others investigated
removing a large number of dyes or heavy metals. The ANN was
successfully used to simulate the removal of different dyes and heavy
metals using different adsorbents, and the adsorption capacity was
found to be extremely close to the experimental values. The ANN
models were also beneficial in predicting the adsorption performance
of adsorbent. Bahareh Tanhaei et al., demonstrated magnetic
chitosan/Al2O3/Fe3O4 microsphere composite as an effective

313
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

adsorbent for the removal of Methyl Orange azo dye from aqueous
solution using an ANN technique(Tanhaei et al., 2016). A three-layer
neural network model estimated the efficiency of congo red removal
from Fe2O3 particles in aqueous media(Taylor et al., 2015). Ebrahim
Alipanahpour Dil et al., employed an artificial neural network to
remove crystal violet from zinc oxide nanorods coated with activate
carbon.(Alipanahpour et al., 2015). Zaki Uddin Ahmad et al. created a
6-neuron ANN model that employed a linear transfer function
(purelin), Levenberg-Marquardt back propagation algorithm (LMA)at
the output layer, and a tangent sigmoid transfer function (tansig) at
the hidden layer. The comparison between modeled data and
experimental data gives high degree of correlation (R2 = 0.9832)
which shows the applicability of ANN model for describing the
adsorption process with reasonable accuracy. (Uddin et al., 2020).
Pauletto, Paola S., et al. has developed an optimal artificial neural
network to predict the synergistic and antagonistic interactions among
the adsorbates by using ultrasound-modified chitin (UM-chitin) to
adsorb methylene blue (MB), cobalt (Co2+),and nickel (Ni2+)in
single, binary, and ternary systems at different temperatures(Pauletto
et al., 2020).Ali El Hanandeh et al. investigated the modelling of Ni,
Pb, and Cuion adsorption from single and multi-component aqueous
solutions by date seed generated biochar. The models owned to
various network architectures: 1 radial basis network (Generalized
Regression).; 1 based on Elman back propagation architecture; 2 feed
forward back propagation (FFBP); 1 based on ensemble type
(Gradient Boosting) and 1 based on cascade forward back
propagation (CCFDBP).The Bayesian Regularized (BRG) algorithm
carried out the best for back propagation. In all cases, the correlation
coefficient between the predicted and expected values > 0.99, so all
the models performed exceptionally well.(El et al., 2021). J.A.
Rodrguez-Romero et al. described arsenic removal and modelling
using artificial neural network-based adsorption models(Rodríguez-
romero et al., 2020). Saba Golshan Shandi et al. investigated the ANN
model for raw Gundelia tournefortii for removal of Cu (II) from an
aqueous solution, the adsorption process was found to be endothermic
and spontaneous. The capacity of biosorption for Cu (II) on the GT
was investigated by using MnLR analyses and applying a Back
propagation, Levenberg–Marquardt algorithm and a three layer neural
network with 6 hidden layers. (Shandi et al., 2019).

Conclusion:
AI has the capacity to transform, improve and transform the process
of wastewater treatment. This study highlighted the key AI

314
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

technologies used in water treatment for pollutant intake. Heavy metal

removal and dye degradation are crucial for environment remediation
process such as reducing soil deterioration, pollution, and
bioaccumulation. For removing heavy metal and dyes from water,
biogenic nanoparticles have opened various ways at low cost. To
increase the removal effectiveness of heavy metals and dyes, these
nanoparticles can be designed in a variety of ways. Machine learning
can enhance the remediation process to achieve maximum efficiency
in heavy metal and dye removal. In addition, machine learning may
be used to create mixed isotherm and kinetic related models that
precisely represent a multi-component system and eliminate error,
leading in effective, quick, and low-cost heavy metal and dye
removal. The use of ML and AI concepts is a novel field of research
that will lead to a better knowledge of efficacy, reduced energy
consumption, time consumption, and cost. Though AI technologies
have significant advantages, there are still a number of obstacles that
must be addressed before their full potential can be realized in
practical water treatment applications. To do the further research,
upcoming problems can be solved by choosing right data and hybrid
AI ways at pilot plant level. Despite these problems, the ongoing
condition of research shows promising applications for AI
technologies in water treatment.

References
1. Alam, G., Ihsanullah, I., Naushad, M., & Sillanpää, M. (2022).
Applications of artificial intelligence in water treatment for the
optimization and automation of the adsorption process: Recent
advancesandprospects. Chemical Engineering Journal, 130011.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cej.2021.130011
2. Alipanahpour, E., Ghaedi, M., & Ghaedi, A. (2015). Application
of artificial neural network and response surface methodology for
the removal of crystal violet by zinc oxide nanorods loaded on
activate carbon: kinetics and equilibrium study. Journal of the
Taiwan Institute of Chemical Engineers, 000, 1–11.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jtice.2015.07.023
3. Aravind, M., Amalanathan, M., & Mary, M. S. M. (2021).
Synthesis of TiO2 nanoparticles by chemical and green synthesis
methods and their multifaceted properties. SN Applied Sciences,
3(4), 1–10. https://doi.org/10.1007/s42452-021-04281-5
4. Bukhari, A., Ijaz, I., Gilani, E., Nazir, A., Zain, H., & Saeed, R.
(2021). Green Synthesis of Metal and Metal Oxide Nanoparticles
Using Different Plants’ Parts for Antimicrobial Activity and
Anticancer Activity: A Review Article.

315
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

5. El, A., Mahdi, Z., & Imtiaz, M. S. (2021). Modelling of the

adsorption of Pb, Cu and Ni ions from single and multi-
component aqueous solutions by date seed derived biochar :
Comparison of six machine learning approaches. Environmental
Research, 192(October 2020), 110338. https://doi.org/10.1016/
j.envres.2020.110338
6. Motene, K., Mahlaule-glory, L. M., Ngoepe, N. M., Mathipa, M.
M., & Hintsho-, N. C. (2021). Photocatalytic degradation of dyes
and removal of bacteria using biosynthesised flowerlike NiO
nanoparticles Photocatalytic degradation of dyes and removal of
bacteria. International Journal of Environmental Analytical
Chemistry, 00(00), 1–16. https://doi.org/10.1080/03067319.2020.
1869730
7. Ossman, M. (2018). Metal Oxide Nano-particles as an Adsorbent
for Removal of Heavy Metals Metal Oxide Nano-particles as an
Adsorbent for Removal of Heavy Metals. January 2015.
8. Pauletto, P. S., Dotto, G. L., & Salau, N. P. G. (2020). Optimal
arti fi cial neural network design for simultaneous modeling of
multicomponent adsorption. Journal of Molecular Liquids, 320,
114418. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.molliq.2020.114418
9. Rawat, B., Bist, A. S., Supriyanti, D., & Elmanda, V. (2023). AI
and Nanotechnology for Healthcare: A survey. 7(1), 86–91.
10. Rodríguez-romero, J.A., Mendoza-castillo, D.I., Reynel-ávila,
H.E...etc.(2020). Journal of Environmental Chemical Engineering
Preparation of a new adsorbent for the removal of arsenic and its
simulation with arti fi cial neural network-based adsorption
models. Journal of Environmental Chemical Engineering, 8(4),
103928. https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.jece.2020. 103928
11. Sha, W., Guo, Y., Yuan, Q., Tang, S., Zhang, X., Lu, S., Guo, X.,
Cao, Y., & Cheng, S. (2020). Arti fi cial Intelligence to Power the
Future of Materials Science and Engineering. 1900143.
https://doi.org/10.1002/aisy.201900143
12. Shandi, S. G., Ardejani, F. D., & Sharifi, F. (2019). Chinese
Journal of Chemical Engineering Assessment of Cu ( II ) removal
from an aqueous solution by raw Gundelia tournefortii as a new
low-cost biosorbent: Experiments and modelling. Chinese Journal
of Chemical Engineering, 27(8), 1945–1955. https://doi.org/
10.1016/j.cjche.2018.12.027
13. Tanhaei, B., Ayati, A., Lahtinen, M., Vaziri, B. M., & Sillanp, M.
(2016). A magnetic mesoporous chitosan based core-shells
biopolymer for anionic dye adsorption: Kinetic and isothermal
study and application of ANN. 43466, 1–11. https://doi.org/
10.1002/app.43466

316
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

14. Taylor, P., Debnath, A., Deb, K., Das, N. S., & Chattopadhyay,
K. K. (2015). Journal of Dispersion Science and Technology
Simple Chemical Route Synthesis of Fe 2 O 3 Nanoparticles and
Its Application for Adsorptive Removal of Congo Red From
Aqueous Media: Artificial Neural Network Modeling. July.
https://doi.org/10.1080/01932691.2015.1062772
15. Uddin, Z., Yao, L., Lian, Q., Islam, F., Zappi, M. E., & Dianchen,
D. (2020). Chemosphere The use of arti fi cial neural network
(ANN) for modeling adsorption of sunset yellow onto
neodymium modi fi ed ordered mesoporous carbon.
Chemosphere, 256, 127081. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.
chemosphere.2020.127081
16. Vikram, A., Mansi, S., Peter, V., Sunil, L., Ashok, C., Datusalia,
K., & Gupta, N. (2023). Artificial intelligence and machine
learning disciplines with the potential to improve the
nanotoxicology and nanomedicine fields : a comprehensive
review. Archives of Toxicology, 97(4), 963–979. https://doi.org/
10.1007/s00204-023-03471-x
17. Yadav, N., Mohan, B., Chettri, D., Pulwani, C., Velusamy, P.,
Iyer, M., & Vellingiri, B. (2023). Artificial intelligence in heavy
metals detection: Methodological and ethical challenges. Hygiene
and Environmental Health Advances, 7(June), 100071.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.heha.2023.100071

Shubhajit Halder
Department of Chemistry, Hislop College, Nagpur, Maharashtra
440001, India
Email : [email protected]

Azmiya Sadaf
PG & Research Department of Chemistry, Hislop College, Nagpur,
Maharashtra 440001, India

Doyel Bhattacharya
Department of Chemistry, Dada Ramchand Bakhru Sindhu
Mahavidyalaya, Nagpur, Maharashtra, 440017, India.

Rohit Maind
PG & Research Department of Chemistry, Hislop College, Nagpur,
Maharashtra 440001, India.

317
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 26

CYBER LAWS AND COMPUTER ETHICS

Dr. Manish L. Jivtode

Abstract:
In today’s global economy, computer, mobile and internet are a media
of communication and become a necessary part of our life. Moral
refers to the accepted standards of right and wrong in a society. Moral
theory is a set of moral principles it refers to the standards of right
conduct and judgment of particular actions which is right or wrong by
those standards. Ethics refers science of morals. It is the standard
structure of knowledge. It was invented by Immanuel Kant (1724-
1804).

Key words: global economy, computer, mobile and internet

Introduction:
n today’s global economy, computer, mobile and internet
are a media of communication and become a necessary
part of our life. In the world, information technology is
the fastest growing industry. Computer professionals are
accepted to have a good and basic understanding of IT environment.
The information stored in computer files is very important and
unique. Important and confidential data needs to be protected from
unauthorized access. They should have enough knowledge about the
requirements of users in future. Computer professionals rely upon the
different tasks such as planning, maintenance and repair. With such
responsibilities, it is important that all computer professionals and
users should understand moral and ethical issues for the welfare of the
society. They should be aware about different laws in cyber space
while designing and implementing any system. Cyber law means
rules binding on computer professionals.

Moral for Computer professionals

Moral refers to the accepted standards of right and wrong in a society.
Moral theory is a set of moral principles it refers to the standards of

318

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.26
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

right conduct and judgment of particular actions which is right or

wrong by those standards. Moral principles are rule of actions which
systematically links moral beliefs to one other. All computer experts
should aware of moral principles and followed in IT environment for
maintaining better work in IT industry.

Moral theory is categorized into three parts-

(a) Moral standard – In this category, it is to decide what is right or
wrong. Moral standard have to be followed by computer
professionals –
i) Use of passwords
ii) To maintain secrecy of the passwords
iii) To respect intellectual property right
iv) Right for authorized to access the information
(b) Moral Principle – It can be categorized different types of actions
whether as a right or wrong.
(c) Moral Judgments – In this category, statements about the
rightness or wrongness of particular actions.
Computer professionals and users should provide healthy working
environment. They should follow moral standards while designing,
implementing, maintenance and using any system, so that it will not
be harmful to the society.

Ethics and Professional Responsibilities

Ethics refers science of morals. It is the standard structure of
knowledge. It was invented by Immanuel Kant (1724-1804). Ethics
deals with the determination of right or wrong and then doing the
right thing. It includes ethics principles which are based on the moral
values. Ethics gives justice to each person according to individual
effort. In IT industry, all the computer professionals are required to
follow the rules prescribed in IT Act 2000.

Why do need Ethics?

In 21th century, whole world is moving towards computers and
network systems. It requires proper operation, support and integrity of
computing assets. Today’s IT industries and Computer professionals
and users faced biggest challenges for data management and privacy
such as virus attack, loss of data, unauthorized access, unauthorized
modifications, unauthorized duplication of programs, unauthorized
use of ID and misuse of copy right materials. Need of ethics arises in
all areas of human beings such as social, commercial, personal,
educational etc. Ethics is essential for computer users for the
following reasons. They are -

319
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(1) Ethics improves transactional efficiency, so the same human

resources accomplish more tasks and contribute more ideas.
(2) Ethics quality increases employee satisfaction
(3) Ethics improves the effects of the day-to-day operating culture.
(4) Ethics builds trust and teamwork.
(5) Ethics boots transactional efficiency and gives new energy to
improve the progress.

Ethical Issues in Information Technology

An ethical dilemma is an issue or problem that requires an individual
or organization to choose between options that must be evaluated as
right (ethical) or wrong (unethical). These issues should be resolved
to have a positive impact on the society. Some of the common
important ethical issues for computer users are listed below –
(1) Software piracy
(2) Unauthorized access
(3) Cyber crime
(4) Hacking

Software piracy is basically about copyright infringement of software

created by an individual or organization. It includes illegally stealing
codes/programs and other information and making duplicate copies
through unauthorized means and using this data for own benefit or
commercial gain. In simple words, software piracy means
“unauthorized copying of software”. The use of pirated software is
the violation of IT act 2000. Ethics are as follows –
(1) Computer users may use only licensed copies of the software.
User must purchase legal software.
(2) Software should be installed with the help of authorized dealers.
Unauthorized access is another issue related with ethics such as
unauthorized copying of software, unauthorized use of computer
account or User ID, Unauthorized access to passwords etc.

Cyber crime is a type of crime, cyber crime is a crime that involves

computers and networks, when a crime take place on or through the
internet, it is called a cyber crime, any computer found at the scene of
a crime or a crime involving a computer is called a computer crime
such as email spam, phishing, piracy, data theft, hacking etc.

Hacking is one of the types of crime. In this type of crime, hackers

enter a restricted area and access the personal and sensitive
information of others without their permission. This restricted area
can be one’s personal computer or any online account. Hacking is a

320
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

technical threat, when someone can gain access to system functions

like computer network, server etc. for some purpose. Discovers a
weakness in or alters the system accordingly to steal data or destroy
data or it changes the process is called hacking. The person who
executes this process is called hacker. The first is ethical hacking,
ethical hacking is hacking done with good intentions. Such hacking is
also known as White hat hacking. No data is stolen or destroyed or
altered in ethical hacking. Ethical hacking is completely legal and
done to protect people from potential threats.

Information Technology Ethics and Services

Information technology ethics is the study of ethical issues arising
from the use and development of electronic technology. Its mission is
to identify and formulate answers to questions about the moral basis
of individual responsibilities and actions, as well as the moral basis of
public policy. Information technology ethics raises new and unique
ethical issues because information technology itself has brought about
dramatic social, political and ideological changes. Because
information technology influences not only how do things but also
how think about them, it challenges some of the basic organization
concepts of moral and political philosophy such as property, privacy,
distribution of power, fundamental freedoms and moral responsibility.

Code of Ethics
A Code of ethics is a set of moral principles or rules of conduct
followed by a social groups or professionals.

Computer professionals and users must follow the code of ethics.

Ethics for business is essentially followed to protect the interest of
society. Therefore to achieve the common goal of the IT industry,
every activity should follow the code of conduct and protect the social
interest determination standards. Thus, a code of conduct refers to
fixing standards. The following code of ethics should be followed by
all the computer professionals and users.

(1) Social responsibility

Responsibility is a duty that every computer professional has to fulfill
due to his position in the IT industry. This can be expressed in terms
of social and moral responsibility.

The main responsibility is to run the activities in the IT industry in a

professional manner. Social responsibility refers to the social and
legal duties associated with computer networks. Computer

321
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

professionals should encourage other users to follow the code of

ethics. The computer professional is responsible for keeping his
identity and password secure. Therefore, the user should not give
his/her password to others. Thus each user is responsible for all
transactions made under the authorization of his / her ID.

Moral responsibility relates to beliefs and principles about what is

right and wrong. Computer professionals and users follow this
principle to achieve minimum efficiency productivity.

(2) Authority
The right to connect to other systems through a network does not
imply the right to connect to or use the system unless properly
authorized by the owner of the system. It is appropriate to notify
others of the right.

(3) Co-operation
It refers to working together towards a common goal. Computer
professionals and users should cooperate with others and fulfill social
as well as ethical responsibilities.

(4) Communication
A message or information is the subject of communication. Use of
electronic communication facilities e.g. e-mail is prohibited for
sending illegal messages. Thus the essence of communication is to
exchange the right information to the right person at right time.
Information about network, new web sites, common resources and
legal information etc. must be shared between people or users.

(5) Secrecy
It refers to working towards a common goal. Computer professionals
and uses should co-operate with others and fulfill social as well as
ethical responsibilities.

Introduction to Cyber Law

Law indicates rules and regulations in the organization. Moral and
ethical statements are distinguished from laws. The particular action
is legally permissible that it is morally and ethically permissible. It
requires providing legal provisions in computer industry which will
be beneficial to the computer professionals, users and society.

In today’s global communication, internet is misuse for criminal

activities. Today many unethical things are happing in the Cyber

322
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

space called Cyber crime. Cyber crime, also called computer crime. It
refers to the various criminal activities in cyber space like software
piracy, transmission of harmful programs, unauthorized access of
computer information etc. So regulate these criminal activities, it need
for cyber law. Cyber law refers to all the legal aspects or rules and
regulations with regard to Internet, E-Commerce and the World Wide
Web.

Defined as Cyber law, also called Computer law is related to any

legal and regulatory aspects with any activity of Internet, World Wide
Web and E-commerce in cyber space comes within the orbit of cyber
law.

Information Technology Act of India 2000

Information Technology Act 2000 (IT Act) provides legal recognition
for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange
and by electronic communication which is commonly referred to as
“Electronic Commerce”. It involves the use of alternatives to paper-
based methods of communication and storage of information, to
facilitate electronic filing of documents with the government
agencies.

IT Act is considered in following areas:

1) E-mail: Companies and individuals should be very careful while
sending e-mails, as this e-mail could be the basis for launching
litigation in a court of law.
2) Digital Signature: It means authentication of any electronic record
by a subscriber by means of an electronic method or procedure.
3) Electronic records: It means filling of any form, application with
any office or appropriate Government in a particular manner.
4) Retention of electronic data: It means the details which facilitate
the identification of the origin, destination, date and time of dispatch
or receipts of such electronic record are available in the electronic
record.
5) Publication of rules, regulations etc. in electronic gazette: It
means that any rule, regulation, order, bye-law, notification or any
other matters is published in the electronic gazette, then the date of
the publication shall be deemed to be the date of the gazette which
was first published in any form.

All computer professionals need to know and understand the IT Act

2000 and its provisions related to e-commerce. They should be aware
of ethics and morals issued to manage e-commerce and cyber laws.

323
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Digital Signature
Section 15 of the IT 2000 provides security procedures for handling
digital signatures as digital signatures. Section 16 of the IT Act 2000
empowers the Central Government to prescribe security procedures in
respect of secure electronic records and secure digital signatures. It
includes nature of transactions, the level of sophistication of the
parties with regard to the technological capacity, the availability of
alternatives procedures and the volume of similar transactions entered
into by other parties. A digital signature is an electronic signature that
can be used by someone to authenticate the identity of the sender of a
message or of the singer of a document. It is a way to ensure whether
a message was actually sent by the person who claimed to have sent
it.

The purpose of digital signature is to identify the sender, verify the

message has not been altered in transit and provide support for no
repudiation.

It is a two-step cryptographic process 1) The sender’s private key

encrypts the signature, 2) the receiver decrypts the signature with the
sender’s public key. The same key pairs may be used for encryption
purpose.

How Digital Signature Work?

1) Data is electronically signed by applying the originator’s private
key. The private key is applied to a shorted form of the data
called a Hash. The resulted digital signature can be stored or
transmitted along with data.
2) The signature can be verified by any party using the public key of
the signer.
3) A user combines his private key and document and performs a
computation on the composite key to generate a unique number
called the Digital signature.

As per the Indian evidence act 1872 and Reserve Bank of India Act
1934 connected there with
1) Any subscriber mark authenticates an electronic record by
affixing his digital signature.
2) Any person by the use of public key of the subscriber can verify
the electronic record.
3) The private key and the public key are unique to the subscriber
and constitute a functioning key pair.

324
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

4) Legal recognition of electronic records.

Privacy
Computer files or information stored on a database or network should
be kept confidential. Confidentiality of passwords, access to
information or files, and confidentiality of all types of information
changes in data files is required.

All computer professionals and uses must maintain the confidentiality

of every authorized user of a computer system. They should ensure
that all the system software and equipment are used strictly as per
provisions made in the IT Act 2000.

Intellectual Property Rights

Intellectual property is a discipline that deals with issues in copyright,
trademark and patent laws. Rapid computer transmission, electronic
reproductions, text and image manipulation caused to change the way,
the information is treated as property. The ownership of an idea is the
concept of intellectual property.

Intellectual property rights do not prevent others from taking

advantage of new technology. Intellectual property rights are related
with 1) Copyright 2) Fair use, 3) Copying and Distribution
limitations, and 4) Attribution and acknowledgement 5) Trademarks
6) Patent Laws

Copyright
Copyright is an intellectual property right attached to the original
work in which the right subsists with him. Copyright provides the
protection to the authors and inventors, with exclusive right to their
respective writings and discoveries.

Copyright is useful for authorship determination, duration of

protection and requirements for transfer of rights to others. The
copyright is concerned with originality and tangible thing such as a
paper or disk. Copyright does not protect ideas, only the expressions
of an idea, and others are free to create similar or very similar words
as long as they do so independently and with their own efforts. In
other words, copyright does not create a monopoly in a particular
work. Copyright also applies to public domain. In other words it is
applied to the download subject matter from internet.

The copyright design and patent act in UK allows protection of the

following subject matter-

325
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

1) Literary work such as books, periodicals, lecture notes, computer

software and any work expressed in words, numbers and symbols.
2) Musical works includes musical composition.
3) Dramatic works
4) Pictorial, graphic and sculptural works
5) Motion pictures and other audio-visual works
6) Architectural works.
If we are the owner, then we can place the copyright symbol © next to
your name
Example: Copyright © 2024 Manish
Copyright is the legal right that the author or programmer in his own
works, not to be copied without paying royalties. It is an intellectual
property right attached to original works in which the author or
programmer owns the right.

Fair use
Fair use is a legal use of copyrighted material without explicit
permission from the copyright holder. Fair use allows copying of a
limited amount of material without permission for the copyright
owner. Fair use specifies four criteria to determine whether a
particular instance of copying is “fair use”.
1) The purpose and character of the use.
2) The nature of the copyrighted work.
3) The amount and substantiality of the portion used in relation to
the copyrighted work.
4) The effect of the use upon the potential market for the value of
the copyrighted work.

Benefits of Fair use

 Public would be able to access any copyrighted material without
paying any fees or asking permission.
 If partial work is implemented, then fair use is the better choice.

Copying and Distribution Limitations

Copyright has exclusive rights to many uses of a protected work such
as reproduce, distribute, make derivative works and publicly display
the work. “Fair use” is used to solve the conflict between the rights of
the creator and the rights of the users. In 1978, fair use becomes law
in United States. Fair use allows copying of a limited amount of
material without permission from or payment to the copyright owner,
when the use is reasonable and not harmful to the rights of the
copyright owner. But there are some copying and distribution
limitations as under.

326
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

1) Time: Educators may use their projects for teaching courses for
two years. Use beyond that time period requires obtaining permission
for each copyrighted portion.
2) To copy print material the following limits apply-
a) Articles in periodical publication: The whole or part of one article
of a periodical can be copied.
b) Music, lyrics and artistic work: Up to 10% of the event, but in no
event more than 30 seconds is copied.
c) Artistic work: can be copied together with the text they explain or
illustrate. If copied separately, the whole of an artistic work can
be copied if it has not been separately published. If it is separately
published, the whole can be copied Only if the work is out of
print and unavailable.
d) Diagrams, maps and tables: It is copied together with the text they
explain or illustrate.
e) Out of print or unavailable work: More than 10% or one chapter
can be copied.
3) To copy from hand copy to electronic form, the following
limitations apply-
 Copy one article from a periodical publication. Two or more
articles may be copied where they related to the same specific
subject matter.
 For literary and dramatic work, containing not more than 15
pages, the whole work may be copied.
 For all other literary, dramatic, musical or artistic works, a
reasonable portion of the work may be copied i.e. 10% of the
pages or one chapter whichever is the grater.
4) To copy the work in electronic form (from the web form or CD-
ROM), the following limits apply-
a) Copy one article from a periodical article.
b) For musical work, up to 10% of the work but no event more than
30 seconds.
c) For motion media up to 10% or 3 minutes whichever is less from
a single copyrighted work?
d) For music, lyrics and music video, only 10% but no event more
than 30 seconds can be copied.
5) Distribution: If there are more than two copies, only one of which
can be placed on reserve. An additional copy may be made for backup
purpose.

Attribution and Acknowledgement

Term Attribution is related to the originator (sender) who sends the
products to the other person.

327
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Term acknowledgement is related to the receiver who receives the

product from the originator. Attribution of electronic records can be
defined as – an electronic record shall be attributed to the originator-
1) If it was sent by the originator himself.
2) If it was sent by a person who had the authority to act on behalf of
the originator in respect of that electronic record.
3) If it was sent by information system programmed by/on behalf of
the originator to operate automatically.

Refference:
1) Dr. U.S. Pandey, Dr. Verinder Kumar and Dr. Harmeen Preet
Singh,”Cyber crimes and Laws” Himalaya Publishing House ISO
9001: 2008 certified
2) http://osou.ac.in/eresources/introduction-to-indian-cyber-law.pdf
3) https://dict.mizoram.gov.in/uploads/attachments/cc28d1e7e938
dc90eb64e43dab71f22c/7_years_of_Indian_Cyber_Law.pdf
4) http://www.academia.edu/7781826/IMPACT_OF_SOCIAL
_MEDIA_ON_SOCIETY_and_CYBER_LAW
5) https://www.ijarcsse.com/docs/papers/Volume_3/5_ May2013/
V3I5-0374.pdf
6) The Role of Technology in Telecom Expansion in India”, IEEE
Communication Magazine, Vol.36, No.11, pp 88-94, November,
1998.
7) Shabnam S. Mahat and Dr. S.D. Mundhe, Impact of social
networking sites(sns) on the youth, NCI2 TM:2004, ISBN: 978-
81-927230-0-6
8) Sumanjit Das and TapaswiniNayak, “IMPACT OF CYBER
CRIME: ISSUES AND CHALLENGES” 6 IJESET 142-153
(2013).
9) Puja Gupta and Rakesh Kumar, “Security Risk Management with
Networked Information System: A Review”4 (2) IJEE193– 197
(2012).

Dr. Manish L. Jivtode

Head & Assistant Professor, Department of Computer Science,
Janata Mahavidyalaya, Chandrapur
E-mail: [email protected]

328
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 27

NANOPARTICLES AND THEIR HAZARDS

Quadri F.B.

Abstract:
Nanotechnology is an advanced and inter disciplinary branch of
science involving the synthesis of materials at the nanoscale. Such
materials show promising properties that are beneficial for the
medicinal, cosmetics, agricultural, environmental remediation, etc.
applications. These materials are fabricated at the atomic or molecular
level according to the requirement and are utilized in different fields
for the betterment of the mankind and the society. As the industry has
already flourished and, is still progressing, care has to be taken that its
advantages should not be overcast by its hazards as very little has
been done to keep a check on the ill effects of them. No doubt,
nanotechnology has brought significant technological development
and well-being to society, at the same time it is considered that
exposure to certain NPs may cause environmental problems and also
do harm to human health. In future more and more nanomaterials are
expected to be used in consumer products this leads to increased
human exposure to nanomaterials in their daily lives. Therefore, the
effect of nanomaterials present in human environment is an area of
increasing scientific interest. The present article reviews possible
pathways of exposure, the hazards of NPs in various fields and the
necessary steps to be adopted for their minimum exposure and safe
application.

Key words: Nanomaterials, hazards, physio-chemical properties,

dose-response assessment (DRA), risk characterization.

Introduction:
anotechnology is a systematic study,including a set of
disciplines, techniques, and devices to manipulate,
rearrange atom or molecules, and design a matter at
nanoscale level. The synthesized material contains
particles, aggregates, or filaments of dimensions smaller than 100 nm,

329

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.27
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

such materials are called as nanomaterial or engineered nanomaterial

(NP). Hence, it results in the formation of a diverse range of new
structures and systems now called nanoparticles, nanodispersions,
nanoemulsions, nanotubes, nanowires, quantum dots, fullerene,
graphene and many others[1]. The modification and fabrication of
materials at nanoscale creates small-sized particles with a very large
ratio of surface area to volume. This has led to improved optical,
electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics of matter and is
responsible for the successful current and future applications of this
new interdisciplinary technology [2]. The size of nanoparticles, their
distribution, number of interfaces or grain boundaries, the chemical
composition of the constituent phases, and their interactions are the
basic factors governing the unique properties of nanomaterial. These
engineered particles of the 21st century have entered the human cycle
in various paths through different routes in a specific manner and
thereby have high potential to impact the human life.

Always, developments in technology and invention of innovative

techniques comes with benefits as well as risk or hazards to the
society. With the increased usage of nanoparticles in day-to-day life,
concern over their safety has arisen in everyone’s mind. There is an
imbalance between the research to recognize, synthesize and apply
new nanoparticlesand their safety. This has put pressure on scientists
to identify the possible effects of nanoparticles on human health.
Proper estimation of hazard factors at the laboratory synthesis and at
the bulk scale production should be carried out so that measures can
be adopted to minimize the risks and avoid the hazards caused by
them. Hazard can be defined differently in various context like it is
the inherent toxicity of a compound. An exposure to such materials
may lead to adverse health effect which can be fatal also. If the
material causes more damage or hazards to the environment and the
life then the risk associated with it is also high.

Physio-chemical properties enhancing the uptake

Nanoparticles gained the advantage over their bulk counter part
because of their remarkable properties at nanodimensions. These
properties prove beneficial for the societal use, at the same time they
also have a negative impact. The size and shape of NM is responsible
for the ease of their entry into the human biological systems.The
major entry points of NM are the skin, gastrointestinal route, lung,
nasal cavity, and eyes [3]. It also illustrates the most likely paths of
translocation (re-distribution or migration), enabling NMs to reach
organs distal to the site of uptake. The most common route of

330
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

exposure to airborne particles at the workplace is the inhalation. Oral

exposure can occur from unintentional hand-to-mouth ingestion, from
inhaled particles or from the eye socket via the nasal cavity following
ocular exposure. There can be direct uptake of nanoscale materials
from the nasal cavity into the brain via the olfactory nerves. Out of
the above mentioned exposures, the inhalation is noticed more and is
of great concern whereas least absorption is via dermal contacts.
Number of research papers have reported that the physio chemical
properties show a great impact on the absorption or intake property of
nanomaterials. Parameters like greater surface area to mass,
conductivity, viscosity, enhanced surface area, solubility,
agglomeration property, etc makes them more toxic or hazardous,
particularly with the biological cells and molecules[4&5]. It is noted
that there is a positive relation between the size of nanomaterials and
the speed of agglomeration [6]. Toxicity of the MWCNTs on the
bacterial system before and after the physio chemical properties of
MWCNTs were altered was studied and wide differences were
observed in the level of toxicity. Short, uncoated and debundled
CNTs are comparatively toxic than the capped one[7]. Most of the
NPs are made up of ceramics, metals and metal oxides that are not
easily degradable.

NM uptake from the initial sites of exposure

NM aresynthesized and studied in a lab atmosphere and their
mechanism is analyzed at in vitro situations hence they cannot model
the complexities of the entire organism and their metabolism with the
substrate. Minute particles dispersed at the site of synthesis show the
probability of entering the lungs through the nasal cavity.Very fine
particlesof about1-5 nm hardly reach the final destination of the lungs
as they get diffused in the inner mucus lined membrane due to high
diffusion property. Instead larger particles like 10-100nm are able to
reach alveoli of the lungs[8]. Nasal cavity isthe only part that directly
connects the nervous system with the surrounding environment and,
review study shows that there is possibility of agglomerates of NPs in
the olfactory region of the brain via it [9]. Powdered form of particles
are at greater risk of inhalation.Uptake of particles by dermal
exposure is basically by the process of diffusion. These particles pass
through the three different primary layers of the skin i.e.the outermost
epidermis, dermis and hypodermis, some of them can even penetrate
through the follicular openings of the hair. Those particles that are of
lower molecular weight and are lipophilic diffuse through the lipid
rich epidermis layer. Some materials show deep penetration into the
epidermis and exhibit immunological response. Once they enter at

331
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

this location, there are full chances of their absorption into the
circulatory system of the body. Nanomaterials incorporated in
cosmetic materials like lotions, moisturizers, sunscreens, dyes and
beauty enhancing products are prone to dermal transferences. Studies
reveal that quantum dots from the various sunscreens get accumulated
in the dermis of the skin and may enter the lymphatic system[10]. To
counter this, the nanomaterials used in dermal applicants are generally
surface coated with silica, manganese or alumina. By doing this, the
free reactive oxygen radical sites are trapped in order to minimize the
toxicity [11]. Less research papers report about the adverse effect of
NPs by oral ingestion. Smaller is the size of the nanoparticle more is
the absorption of it from the gasto intestinal region of the body[12].
Ocular exposure occurs when a person places some nanoparticle
containing products near an eye(lotions and sunscreens) or by rubbing
the eye with the contaminated hands, unknowingly. The particle
enters into the eye through the cornea and, gets carried away from the
eye socket into the nasal cavity [13].

Risk Assessment of NPs:

In order to recognize and acknowledge the risks related to NPs it is
necessary to assess the risk factors and the potential hazards with
them[14]. Scientific and regulatory principles are to be applied in a
proper way to establish the hazards linked with the NPs on exposure
to the environment or human beings. Risk assessment of any chemical
involves: i) hazard identification, ii)exposure assessment, iii) dose-
response assessment (DRA)and iv) risk characterization[15]. It results
into confirmation of the chances of the degree of harm done to the
environment or human when they are exposed to the chemicals.

Hazards Identification
A careful study and analysis is required before establishing the risks
associated with dealing nanoparticles. It is necessary to carry out a
detailed analysis of the various factors like forms of nanoparticles,
level of exposure, dose-response, etc. before coming to any
conclusions. Comprehensive study is essential to know the sufficient
dose for a response to occur. Recent advances in the analytical branch
enables to detect even the smallest trace of the chemical or harmful
element. It is not necessary that the detectable dose may cause the
adverse effect and also, the one-time effect of it does not bring to the
conclusion that the material is harmful unless its ill effects are
repeated at some other locations. One cannot surely say about a
particular NP, whether it is more or less toxic as, its components or,
bulk counterparts show adverse effects [16]. Sometimes the fine

332
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

particles or components that make up the NP prove to be toxic rather

than the NP [17]. Appreciable differences in behavior between NPs
and their ultrafine particles are noted, may be due to the inability of
fine particles to agglomerate as they are coated [18]. Toxicity is
reported for certain metal ions or metals on their release from the
oxides that are readily soluble [19&20].

Exposure Assessment:
An estimation of the concentration or dose of the material under test
to which the human beings or environmental components are
exposed, intentionally or unintentionally is studied as nanoparticles
exposure assessment [21]. This parameter is important in deciding the
risk assessment of them, as it is impossible to determine the risk
factors unless exposure is not assessed. Nanoparticle exposure
assessment can studied as:
 Environmental exposure assessment
 Occupational exposure assessment
 Consumer exposure assessment

Dose-Response Assessment (DRA)

Dose-response assessment (DRA) is very much essential. It
establishes the relationship between the dose of an agent,
administered to or received by an individual, and the consequent
adverse health effects. However, the toxicity always does not depend
on mass of the NPs, but in some cases it relies on the physio-chemical
properties of it. The level of toxicity was found to be dependent on
surface area of the NPs but not on their masses [22].

Risk Characterization
It depicts the final severity and the possible hazard occurring in the
human being or environment when exposed to the material. It
involves two factors i.e. the predicted concentration of the chemical
that causes no effect (PNEC) and that predicted environment
concentration of the chemical (PEC) that causes adverse effect. The
ratio PEC/PNEC is called risk quotient (RQ). If the value of RQ is
less than 1, it is considered that no further testing or risk reduction
measures are needed [23]. If it is more than 1, further modifications
are done to lower the PEC/PNEC ratio [24].

Results and Conclusions

Increasing presence of nanomaterials in human environment and
consumer products has put humans at the greater risk, but proper
assessment is essential to tackle them and minimize the hazards. Size

333
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

is one of the main factor that makes them useful as well as harmful to
different biological responses compared to their larger mass
counterparts.Size, shape, surface properties make them more
favorable than their bulk counterparts at the same time these
properties cause faster cellular uptake causing harm. The uncertainty
and incomplete understanding of their interactions with biological
systems requires better characterization and integration, both at the
level of hazard assessment and exposure assessment, to allow for
sufficiently robust assessment for regulatory policy decisions to be
made in order to formulate or manage risk.

Refrences:
1. Scrinis G, Lyons K. The emerging nano-corporate paradigm,
nanotechnology and the transformation of nature, food and
agrifood systems. Int. J. Sociol. Agric. Food 2007, 15, 22–44.
2. Neethirajan S, Jayas DS. Nanotechnology for the food and
bioprocessing industries. Food Bioprocess. Technol. 2011, 2010,
39–47.
3. Kagan VE, Shi J, Feng W, Shvedova AA, Fadeel B: Fantastic
voyage and opportunities of engineered nanomaterials: what are
the potential risks of occupational exposures J Occup Environ
Med 2010, 52:943-946.
4. Gurr JR, Wang AS, Chen CH, Jan KY: Ultrafine titanium dioxide
particles in the absence of photoactivation can induce oxidative
damage to human bronchial epithelial cells. Toxicology 2005,
213:66-73.
5. Jiang J, Oberdörster G, Elder A, Gelein R, Mercer P, Biswas P:
Does nanoparticle activity depend upon size and crystal phase?
Nanotoxicology 2008, 2:33-42.
6. Limbach LK, Li Y, Grass RN, Brunner TJ, Hintermann MA,
Muller M, Gunther D, Stark WJ: Oxide nanoparticle uptake in
human lung fibroblasts: effects of particle size, agglomeration,
and diffusion at low concentrations. EnvironSciTechnol 2005,
39:9370-9376
7. Kang, S.; Mauter, M.; Elimelech, M. Physicochemical
determinants of multiwalled carbon nanotube bacterial
cytotoxicity. Environ. Sci. Technol. 2008, 42, 5843-5859.
8. ICRP: International Commission on Radiological Protection.
Human respiratory tract model for radiological protection. Ann
ICRP 1994, 120, Publication No. 66
9. Oberdörster G, Sharp Z, Atudorei V, Elder A, Gelein R, Kreyling
W, Cox C: Translocation of inhaled ultrafine particles to the
brain. InhalToxicol 2004, 16:437-445

334
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

10. Mortensen LJ, Oberdörster G, Pentland AP, Delouise LA: In vivo

skin penetration of quantum dot nanoparticles in the murine
model: the effect of UVR. Nano Lett 2008, 8:2779-2787.
11. Wakefield G, Lipscomb S, Holland E, Knowland J: The effects of
manganese doping on UVA absorption and free radical
generation of micronised titanium dioxide and its consequences
for the photostability of UVA absorbing organic sunscreen
components. PhotochemPhotobiolSci 2004, 3:648-652
12. Hillyer JF, Albrecht RM: Gastrointestinal persorption and tissue
distribution of differently sized colloidal gold nanoparticles. J
Pharm Sci 2001, 90:1927-1936
13. Zimmer A, Kreuter J, Robinson JR: Studies on the transport
pathway of PBCA nanoparticles in ocular tissues. J
Microencapsul 1991, 8:497-504.
14. Hansen, S. Regulation and Risk Assessment of Nanomaterials—
Too Little, Too Late? Technical University of DNMark (DTU):
Lyngby, DNMark, 2009; Available online: http://www2.er.dtu.
dk/publications/fulltext/2009/ENV2009-069.pdf (accessed 10
September 2009).
15. International Program on Chemical Safety. IPCS Risk
Assessment Terminology; World Health Organization: Geneva,
Switzerland, 2004; Available online: http://www.who.int/ipcs/
methods/ harmonization/areas/ipcsterminologyparts1and2.pdf
(accessed 10 September 2009).
16. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Nanotechnology White
Paper; U.S. EPA: Washington, DC, USA, 2007; Available online:
http://www.epa.gov/osa/pdfs/nanotech/epa-nanotechnology
whitepaper-0207.pdf (accessed 10 September 2009).
17. Madl AK, Pinkerton KE: Health effects of inhaled engineered and
incidental nanoparticles. Crit Rev Toxicol 2009, 39:629-658.
18. Xia T, Kovochich M, Liong M, Madler L, Gilbert B, Shi H, Yeh
JI, Zink JI, Nel AE: Comparison of the mechanism of toxicity of
zinc oxide and cerium oxide nanoparticles based on dissolution
and oxidative stress properties. ACS Nano 2008, 2:2121-2134.
19. Wong SW, Leung PT, Djurisic AB, Leung KM: Toxicities of
nano zinc oxide to five marine organisms: influences of aggregate
size and ion solubility. Anal BioanalChem 2010, 396:609-618.
20. Lam CW, James JT, McCluskey R, Hunter RL: Pulmonary
toxicity of singlewall carbon nanotubes in mice 7 and 90 days
after intratracheal instillation. ToxicolSci 2004, 77:126-134
21. European Commission Technical Guidance Document (TGD) on
Risk Assessment; European Commission Joint Research Center

335
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(ECJRC): Location, Country, 2003; Available online:

http://ecb.jrc.ec.europa.eu/tgd/ (accessed 10 September 2009)
22. Stoeger, T.; Schmid, O.; Takenaka, S.; Schulz, H. Inflammatory
response to TiO2 and carbonaceous particles scales best with
BET surface area. Environ. Health Perspect. 2006, 115, A290-
A291.
23. Nielsen, E.; Ostergaard, G.; Larsen J. Toxicological Risk
Assessment of Chemicals: A Practical Guide; Informa
Healthcare: New York, NY, USA, 2007; pp. 2-3.
24. European Commission Technical Guidance Document (TGD) on
Risk Assessment; European Commission Joint Research Center
(ECJRC): Location, Country, 2003; Available online: http://ecb.
jrc.ec.europa.eu/tgd/ (accessed 10 September 2009).

Quadri F.B.
Assistant Professor, Department of Physics, Dr. Rafiq Zakaria
College for Women, Aurangabad (MS).
Email : [email protected]

336
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 28

WORK-LIFE BALANCE IN CONTEMPORARY

SOCIETY: NAVIGATING THE DYNAMICS OF
MODERN EMPLOYMENT

Dr. Shahela Yasmeen Khan

Abstract:
This research paper explores the multifaceted concept of work-life
balance in the context of contemporary society. With the evolution of
work structures and the advent of technology, individuals are facing
new challenges in balancing their professional and personal lives. The
paper examines the factors influencing work-life balance, the
consequences of imbalance, and potential strategies for achieving
equilibrium in the modern workforce. Drawing on extensive literature
reviews, surveys, and case studies, this research contributes to the
ongoing discourse surrounding the well-being of individuals within
the complex dynamics of today's employment landscape.

Key words: Technology and Connectivity, Flexible Work

Arrangements, Organizational Culture and Individual Strategies

Introduction:
n the ever-evolving landscape of employment, the concept
of work-life balance has emerged as a critical and
dynamic aspect of individuals' well-being. As societies
progress, so do the structures of work, constantly
influencing how individuals manage the intricate interplay between
their professional and personal lives. This introduction provides a
glimpse into the historical evolution of work and its profound
implications on the elusive pursuit of work-life balance.

Background
The roots of work-life balance can be traced back to the Industrial
Revolution when a profound shift occurred in the nature of work.
With the transition from agrarian economies to industrialized urban
337

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.28
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

centers, the traditional family structure underwent significant

changes. The once clear demarcation between work and home life
became blurred as families migrated to urban areas in pursuit of
employment opportunities.

In the early stages of industrialization, the concept of work-life

balance was not explicitly defined, as work and life were often
inseparable. Long working hours, often in hazardous conditions, left
little room for individuals to engage in activities outside the realm of
employment. This era marked the beginning of a paradigm shift that
would ultimately lead to the recognition of the importance of
balancing work commitments with personal and familial
responsibilities.

As the 20th century unfolded, societal expectations and norms began

to transform. The post-World War II period witnessed the rise of the
nuclear family and a growing emphasis on consumerism. The
changing dynamics of the workforce, with an increasing number of
women entering formal employment, further underscored the need to
address the challenges posed by an imbalanced work-life equation.

In recent decades, the rapid advancement of technology and

globalization has ushered in a new era of work, characterized by
increased connectivity and flexibility. While these developments offer
unprecedented opportunities for remote work and alternative work
arrangements, they also introduce new complexities to the delicate
balance between professional and personal life.

Today, the pursuit of work-life balance has become a central theme in

discussions about employee well-being and organizational
effectiveness. Recognizing the impact of an imbalanced work-life
dynamic on mental health, relationships, and overall job satisfaction,
individuals and organizations alike are exploring innovative strategies
to navigate the challenges presented by the contemporary work
environment.

Purpose of the Study

The purpose of this research is to comprehensively explore the
dynamics of work-life balance in contemporary society, shedding
light on its nuanced facets and implications. The objectives of this
study are outlined with clarity, aiming to contribute valuable insights
to academia, industry practitioners, policymakers, and individuals

338
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

seeking a holistic understanding of the challenges and opportunities

posed by the evolving nature of work.
Objectives:
1. To examine the factors influencing work-life balance in the
contemporary workforce, with a specific focus on technological
advancements, flexible work arrangements, and organizational
culture.
2. To analyze the consequences of work-life imbalance, exploring
its impact on physical and mental health, interpersonal
relationships, job satisfaction, and overall productivity.
3. To identify and evaluate individual strategies adopted by
employees to achieve work-life balance, considering self-
management techniques and personal coping mechanisms.
4. To investigate organizational initiatives aimed at fostering work-
life balance, including workplace policies, support systems, and
the role of organizational culture in promoting employee well-
being.
5. To assess the role of government policies and societal
expectations in shaping work-life balance dynamics, considering
the broader socio-economic context.

Significance of the Study:

The investigation into work-life balance holds paramount significance
in the contemporary socio-economic landscape for several reasons:
1.Employee Well-being: As organizations strive to enhance
employee well-being, understanding the intricacies of work-life
balance becomes imperative. This study aims to contribute insights
that can inform strategies for fostering a healthier and more
sustainable work environment.
2.Organizational Effectiveness: By exploring the consequences of
work-life imbalance on job satisfaction and productivity, this research
aims to provide guidance for organizations seeking to enhance their
effectiveness through employee-centric policies.
3.Policy Formulation: The findings of this study may inform
policymakers in shaping regulations and initiatives that support a
balanced integration of work and personal life, aligning societal
expectations with the evolving nature of work.
4.Academic Contribution: This research adds to the body of
knowledge in sociology and organizational studies by providing a
contemporary analysis of work-life balance, offering a foundation for
future scholarly endeavors in this field.

Factors Influencing Work-Life Balance

339
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Work-life balance is intricately influenced by various factors in

contemporary society. This section delves into the examination of
three key factors: Technology and Connectivity, Flexible Work
Arrangements, and Organizational Culture.

Technology and Connectivity

Advancements in technology have revolutionized the way we work,
introducing both unprecedented flexibility and potential intrusion into
individuals' personal lives. The integration of technology into work
processes has enabled remote collaboration, virtual meetings, and
constant connectivity. This sub-section aims to explore the dual
nature of technology's impact on work-life balance.

Advancements in technology have facilitated:

 Flexibility in Work: Individuals can work from diverse locations,
fostering a sense of autonomy and allowing for a better
integration of work into daily life.
 Efficiency and Productivity: Technological tools have
streamlined work processes, potentially reducing the time
required for certain tasks and enhancing overall efficiency.

However, technology also poses challenges, such as:

 Perpetual Connectivity: The ability to work from anywhere can
lead to an 'always-on' mentality, blurring the boundaries between
work and personal life.
 Digital Overload: Constant notifications, emails, and virtual
meetings may contribute to stress and information overload,
impacting overall well-being.

This examination aims to provide a nuanced understanding of how

technology shapes work-life balance and to identify strategies for
leveraging technology positively while mitigating its potential
negative impacts.

Flexible Work Arrangements

Flexible work arrangements, including flexible schedules, remote
work, and compressed workweeks, have become prevalent in modern
workplaces. This sub-section seeks to analyze the impact of such
arrangements on achieving a harmonious work-life balance.

Benefits of Flexible Work Arrangements include:

340
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

 Improved Work-Life Integration: Flexibility allows individuals to

tailor their work hours to align with personal and family
commitments, fostering a more balanced lifestyle.
 Increased Job Satisfaction: Employees often express higher job
satisfaction when given the autonomy to choose when and where
they work.

Challenges associated with Flexible Work Arrangements include:

 Communication Challenges: Remote work may lead to
communication gaps and challenges in team collaboration.
 Potential Overwork: Flexible schedules can sometimes result in
individuals working longer hours or feeling pressure to be
constantly available.

Through an in-depth analysis of flexible work arrangements, this

research aims to provide insights into optimizing such arrangements
to benefit both individuals and organizations.

Organizational Culture
Organizational culture plays a pivotal role in shaping employees'
experiences and influencing work-life balance. This sub-section
investigates the role of workplace culture in either promoting or
hindering initiatives aimed at achieving a healthy work-life balance.

Positive aspects of Organizational Culture include:

 Supportive Policies: Organizations with a culture that values
work-life balance often implement supportive policies such as
flexible schedules, parental leave, and wellness programs.
 Open Communication: A culture that encourages open
communication between management and employees can
facilitate discussions around work-life balance needs.

Negative aspects of Organizational Culture may involve:

 Long Hours Culture: Organizations that prioritize long working
hours or exhibit a 'presenteeism' culture may inadvertently
discourage work-life balance.
 Lack of Supportive Policies: Institutions without policies
supporting work-life balance may struggle to retain talent and
foster a positive work environment.

This investigation aims to uncover the impact of organizational

culture on work-life balance and Strategies for Achieving Work-Life
Balance.

341
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Work-life balance is not only influenced by external factors but can

also be actively managed through individual strategies. This section
explores various self-management techniques and personal strategies
that individuals can employ to foster a healthy and sustainable work-
life balance.

Individual Strategies
Achieving work-life balance often requires a proactive approach on
the part of individuals. This sub-section discusses a range of self-
management techniques and personal strategies that can contribute to
a more harmonious integration of work and personal life.

Key Individual Strategies include:

1. Time Management:
 Prioritization: Individuals can prioritize tasks based on urgency
and importance, ensuring that essential responsibilities are
addressed first.
 Setting Boundaries: Establishing clear boundaries for work hours
and personal time can help prevent work from encroaching into
non-work hours.

2. Goal Setting:
 SMART Goals: Setting Specific, Measurable, Achievable,
Relevant, and Time-bound goals helps individuals stay focused
and avoid unnecessary stress.

3. Mindfulness and Well-being:

 Mindfulness Practices: Incorporating mindfulness techniques,
such as meditation or deep breathing exercises, can help manage
stress and promote overall well-being.
 Regular Breaks: Taking short breaks during the workday can
refresh the mind and enhance productivity.

4. Effective Communication:
 Open Communication: Individuals should communicate their
work-life balance needs with supervisors and colleagues,
fostering a supportive work environment.
 Utilizing Technology Mindfully: Consciously managing
communication tools to avoid constant connectivity during
personal time.

5. Work-Life Integration:

342
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

 Flexible Work Arrangements: Negotiating flexible work

schedules or remote work options with employers to better align
work with personal life.
 Combining Activities: Finding ways to integrate personal
activities into the work routine, such as incorporating physical
exercise into the daily schedule.

6. Setting Personal Boundaries:

 Learning to Say 'No': Individuals should feel empowered to
decline additional work or commitments when they feel it may
compromise their work-life balance.
 Establishing Non-Negotiables: Identifying and preserving non-
negotiable personal and family time.

7. Continuous Learning and Adaptation:

 Skill Development: Continuous learning and skill development
can enhance efficiency, potentially reducing the time needed to
complete tasks.
 Adapting to Change: Being adaptable to changes in work
demands and personal priorities is crucial for maintaining
balance.

Key Findings:
1. Technology and Connectivity: While technology offers
unprecedented flexibility, it also presents challenges such as perpetual
connectivity and digital overload. Navigating these challenges
requires a balanced integration of technology into work processes.
2. Flexible Work Arrangements: Flexible work schedules, remote
work, and compressed workweeks can enhance work-life balance by
providing autonomy, but they also demand careful communication
and management to prevent potential downsides like communication
gaps and overwork.
3. Organizational Culture: Workplace culture plays a pivotal role
in promoting or hindering work-life balance initiatives. Supportive
policies, open communication, and a positive culture contribute to a
healthier work environment.
4. Individual Strategies: Proactive self-management techniques,
such as effective time management, goal setting, and mindfulness
practices, empower individuals to take charge of their work-life
balance. Establishing personal boundaries and continuous learning are
crucial components of a holistic approach.

Conclusion

343
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

In the pursuit of understanding work-life balance in contemporary

society, this research has explored various facets, ranging from
historical influences to the intricate dynamics of technology, flexible
work arrangements, and organizational culture. As we conclude, it is
essential to summarize key findings, highlight implications for
individuals and organizations, and suggest potential avenues for
future research.

References :

Dr. Shahela Yasmeen Khan

Asstt. Professor, Department of Sociology, Maulana Azad College of
Arts, Science and Commerce, Aurangabad

344
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 29

UNDERSTANDING ELECTRONIC WASTE AND

DECODING ITS AMBIGUOUS NATURE

Sonawane P.M.

Abstract:
Tech is ubiquitous and is expanding its horizon, inexplicably. The
modern world is witnessing a technological advancement with a
parallel heap of electronic waste increasing across the globe. The
ambiguous nature of e-waste makes it a double-edged sword as it is a
source of potentially toxic metals as well as precious metals. This is a
narrative review that highlights the problem of e-waste, the range of
adverse environmental exposures, the adverse health consequences,
and the policy frameworks that are intended to protect vulnerable
populations from inappropriate e-waste recycling and metal extraction
practices. Also, the diverse heterogeneous content of e-waste puzzles
its identity as either diabolical, treasured or both. The scientific
literature survey and puts forward an insight that explicably mentions
the toxicity and preciousness associated with e-waste. Scientific and
sustainable solutions such as reverse logistics and conventional
methods of metal extraction is also discussed.

Key words: E-waste, ambiguous, policy framework, diabolical,

treasured, reverse logistics.

Introduction:
ith revolution in IT Sector the 21st century has witnessed a
rapid economic growth. The Tech voracious era has
further developed an insatiable appetite for consumption
of Electronic and Electrical Equipment (EEE). According
to Statista 2022 report, the overall global revenue generated from
consumer electronics was recorded to be US $ 987 billion and further

345

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.29
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

a volume growth of 1.6% is expected in 2025. This enormous

consumer demand and short life of electronic products is giving rise
to a parallel stream of electronic waste that is increasing at an
unprecedented rate. A comprehensive insight put forward by Global
E-waste monitor recorded 53.6 million tonnes (MT) of e-waste to be
generated worldwide (7.3 Kg per capita) in the year 2019. The report
states that only 17% was handled by formal recyclers that generated ~
9.4 billion from Fe, Cu and Au valuables. Remaining, 83% i.e. 44.3
MT went undocumented. It is speculated that informal recyclers
unscientifically burn it in open air or land fill the e-waste. This results
in a potential loss of ~ 47.6 billion of usable raw material.
As stated by Echegaray, ‘Deliberate curtailment of product lifespan
and the symbolic devaluation of devices appear especially acute in the
electronics segment, thus pumping up E- waste volumes.’
Furthermore, the fifth generation 5G wireless communication will
have a negative impact as many smart phones, modems and coaxial
cables will end up into obsolescence (Amine, 2020). Eventually, in
the contemporary world, addressing and tackling e-waste problem
continues to remain a great challenge (Borthakur,et.al. 2017).
Realistically, the scrap electronics has a heterogenous composition
that symbolises ambiguous nature of e-waste. The complexity is in
the toxic and precious metal content of e-waste that is co-existing
together. This diverse heterogenous content of e-waste puzzles its
identity as either diabolical, treasured or both. The scientific literature
survey forwards an insight that explicably mentions the toxicity and
preciousness associated with e-waste. The purpose of this chapter is
to emphasize on growing problem of e-waste, to understand the dual
nature (toxic and precious) of e-waste and finally to propose possible
scientific solutions to deal with e-waste.
Overview
Terminology
E-waste is considered to be the fastest growing waste stream.
International, National and State organizations/agencies are
functioning together to understand the magnitude of the problem. The
e-waste is recognized as a hazardous waste; however, the waste
equally is also referred as an urban mine. Most of the experts oppose
referring e-waste as aWASTEbecause it is a rich source of many base
metals and precious metals. Thus, the ambiguous outlook towards e-
waste proposes different definitions that are mentioned in Tab. No.01
Definition Source Reference
Waste Electrical and Electronic European Waste (Kang et.al.

346
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Equipment (WEEE) refers to e- Electrical and 2023 & Suja

waste that includes all the parts, Electronic et.al. 2014)
sub-parts and consumables that Equipment
are discarded and no longer (WEEE)
functional to the consumer Directives
E-waste means “any discarded Basel Action EPA
appliances that uses electricity Network (BAN)
and includes a wide range of e-
products from large household
devices such as refrigerators, air
conditioners, cell phones,
personal stereos, and consumer
electronics to computers which
have become discarded by their
users.
E waste is a term used that Solving the E- StEP
includes all the various types of waste Problem
Electrical and Electronic (StEP)
Equipment (EEE) & its parts that
are discarded by the owner as a
waste with no intention of re-use.
EPA considers e-waste as a sub- United Nations EPA
set of used electronic devices Environmental
and is acquainted with the Protection
inherent valuable that can be Agency (EPA)
reused, refurbished or recycled.
Table 1. Definitions of e-waste

History
The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) established in
1976, posed e-waste disposal as illegal in United States of America
(USA). This implanted electronic waste as toxic stream of waste and
made illegal in many other developed as well as developing countries.
The e-waste dumping and disposal was thus forbidden. But as the
electronic industry sparkled, the burden of e-waste grew,
exponentially. This led to many episodes of illegal dumping and
disposal of e-waste trash. Public outcry and environmentalist protest
was a major highlight in 1980’s with Khian Sea debacle.

The story begins in 1986, at Northwest Incinerator in the Philadelphia

where good portion of the city’s electronic garbage ended up. The
facility devoured the trash in its fiery maw and transformed it into
ash, which contained dangerous amount of aluminium, arsenic,

347
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

copper, lead, mercury, Chromium and dioxins. The ash was

previously landfilled in New Jersey, but later contracted with an
independent waste hauler (Joseph Paolino and Sons) to take 15,000
tons off ash off their hands. The thought was to dump the waste in
poor country. Funny thing though. The countries the Khian Sea sailed
to didn’t want the toxic waste. For 16 months the ship sailed
Honduras, Morocco, Yugoslavia, Singapore, Panama, Guinea, Haiti.
In January of 1988, the barge was able to unload 4,000 tons in Haiti,
claiming it was “topsoil fertilizer”. Green peace alerted Haiti officials
that it was toxic ash. Haiti ordered the ash be reloaded, but the barge
left. Late in November 1988, somewhere between Singapore and Sri
Lanka, the tons of ash disappeared. Five years of reams of legal
documents later, the owner of the shipping company was convicted of
perjury for denying they have ordered to crew to dump the ash in the
ocean (Indian and Atlantic Ocean). Basel convention on the Control
of Transboundary Movements of hazardous wastes and their disposal
is an International Treaty, designed to reduce the movements of
hazardous waste between nations, specifically from preventing
dumping of hazardous waste from developed to less developed
countries (LDC). The convention was open for signature on March
22, 1989 and entered into force on May 5, 1992. The law has banned
the export of hazardous waste to poorer countries since 1992, but the
practise continued as pointed by Chris Carrol.

Regulatory Bodies Objective

Basel Convention Pioneer in e-waste recycling and controlling
transportation from developed countries to
less developed countries
Electronic Products EPRA is an electronic recycling program
Recycling (Canada) where citizens can donate their e-
Association (EPRA) waste at drop-off points or retailers
The European RoHS states restriction of using Cd, Pb and
Union’s -RoHS Hg in electronics
policy
Global e-waste Is a collaboration of United Nations
Monitor University (UNU), United Nations Institute
for Training and Research (UNITAR) and
International Telecommunication Unit
(ITU)The programme aims to raise awareness
and statistically tracks the global e-waste
generation across the globe
Silicon Valley Women’s health and labor rights organizers
Toxics Coalition’s E- established a Project on Health and Safety in

348
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

waste Reduction Electronics (PHASE) and the Electronics

Initiative (SVTC) Committee on Safety and Health (ECOSH). It
focuses on practices to protect workers and
residents and land around the plants of
electronics
Ministry of Established a cost-effective Li-ion battery
Electronics & recycling technology that is transferred to
Information Industries and start-ups. Also, it aims at
Technology (MeitY), spreading awareness about e-waste through
Govt. of India running various programmes.
Table 2. Regulations and Project across the Globe targeting E-
waste Problem

Delineating e-waste problem

Components of e-waste
E-waste is a rich source of valuables (Au, Ag, Pt) as well as a
reservoir of hazardous materials such as plastics, (polystyrene,
polyphenylene oxide, polypropylene & others), Pb, Hg, flame
retardants etc. (Mmereki, et.al.2016). The hardware encompassing
hazardous resource can impact human health negatively and also have
deleterious environmental effect, if handled unscientifically (Pant,
2014). The plastic in electronics is treated with brominated flame
retardants (Luciana, et.al.2011) to prevent or reduce the chances of
fire disaster (Mohammed, et.al.2013). These brominated flame
retardants are toxic to our environment and has shoddier health effect
on viable life forms.

Figure 1. Components of e-waste

Occupational and realistic poisoning yarn

At e-waste informal recycling site, laborers come in direct or
indirect exposure to hazardous toxic components. Direct exposure

349
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

entails contact with skin, inhalation and ingestion of fine and course
dust of e-waste (Perkins, et.al.2014). According to World Health
Organization (WHO) report, children when exposed to e-waste are
vulnerable to toxicity contained in e-waste. The reasons are i) their
organs are less developed; ii) as they are in growing stage, they tend
to absorb more pollutants and iii) their body is not developed to
metabolize and eliminate toxic absorbed pollutants (Nzabonimpa,
2021). The primitive recycling of e-waste is a potent source of toxic
substances contributing to elevated blood lead levels (BLL) in
children living or working in surrounding environment (Pascale,
et.al.2016). A study was conducted on children BLL levels at
informal e-waste recycling site in Guiyu, China. It was reported that
165 children showed BLLs level ranging from 4.40-36.67µg/dL.Also,
it was observed that a significant increasing level in BLLs majorly
were reported with increase in age of children (Huo, et.al. 2017).
Risk perception studies that were conducted on e-waste toxicity,
revealed, the mercury (Hg) risk associated with pregnancies,
occupational hazards to workers as well as children (Jensen,
et.al.2021). The toxic e-waste occupational exposure may occur due
to skin contact or inhalation. Cadmium (Cd) another element found in
e-waste has gained notoriety for been highly toxic and difficult to
degrade by human system. When Cd enters inside human body it
binds to hydrosulfo, carboxy and imidazolyl groups of enzymes or
proteins and further disrupts enzyme and protein functionality
(Zhang,et.al. 2011). Other toxic effects of Cd include disturbance in
Ca metabolism, hypercalciuria, kidney stone, lung cancer and prostate
cancer (Idrees,et.al. 2018). In electronics, inorganic arsenic (As) is a
vital agent used during PCB manufacturing. One of the studies
conducted at Agbogbloshie (Ghana e-waste recycling site) reported
high levels of urinary arsenic which has varying health risk like
cancer, skin lesions, infant mortality, diabetes etc. (Yang, et.al.2020).
Further investigations by Environmental and Occupational Health
Sciences, Ghana, revealed that Agbogbloshie, Accra, Ghana soil
samples had elevated levels of trace metals and PBDE
(polybrominated Diphenyl ethers). The tested air samples also
delineated increased concentration of Al, Cu, Fe, Pb and Zn levels.
Lithium-ion batteries are predominantly used in mobile phone as it
exhibits excellent electrochemical performance such as high cycle
performance, high energy density and high operating voltage (Fan,
et.al.2016). A review research paper on Li toxicity discusses the study
conducted on 385 people and implies the toxicity of Li to be intense
and worrisome (Muller, et.al.2012). Similar investigative study
conducted at China (recycling site of e-waste) monitored Pb levels in

350
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

220 human placentas and found the concentration to be high

(Yongyong, et.al. 2010). Molybdenum (Mo) name is derived from a
Greek word ‘molybdos’ which means lead (Pb) like. In Armenia, a
soil Mo concentration study was conducted and was found to be
sufficiently higher in concentration to cause serious ailments in
humans (Vyskocil, et.al.1999). At molecular level heavy metals
present in e-waste has a significant effect on modification of DNA
bases, enhanced lipid peroxidation and altered calcium and sulfhydryl
homeostasis. (Igharo, et.al.2014). Chronic low and acute high doses
of heavy metal (Ni, Co, Hg) exposure thus is associated with multiple
ailments like reduction of organ size or weight, impaired
neurocognitive abilities, cancer and also can lead to keratosis and
vascular complications (Xue,et.al. 2021). For these reasons, the
World Health Organization (WHO) has declared e-waste to be a
global environmental health issue (Yohannessan,et.al. 2019).
Metal Impact Reference
Lead (Pb) Inhibits hemoglobin synthesis in children Wang, et.al.
(2021)
Molybdenum Aching joints, gout like symptoms, Vyskocil, et.al.
(Mo) hyperuricosuria (1999)
Cobalt (Co) Systemic toxic reaction, erythropoiesis, Lehyssens, et.al.
alteration of Ca & Fe homeostasis, (2017)
contact dermatitis
Iron (Fe) Cancer, liver and heart disease, hormonal Fraga, et.al.
abnormality, Immune system dysfunction (2002)
Copper (Cu) Neurotoxic and carcinogenic Parmar, et.al.
(2013)
Cadmium Respiratory system, carcinogenic and Li et.al. (2011)
(Cd) defective neurodevelopment in fetus, Idrees, et.al.
hypercalciuria, kidney stone 2018
Chromium Carcinogenic Chen et.al.
(Cr) (2018)
Lithium (Li) Human Cardiotoxicity, Cognitive Shen, et.al.
Impairment, tremors, Ataxia, Speech (2020)’ Muller
Disorders and gastrointestinal disorders et.al. (2012)
Nickel (Ni) Neurodifferentiation, T-cell system and Casalegno, et.al.
suppress the activity of Natural Killer (2015) Lin et.al.
cells, Skin irritation, damage to lungs, (1998)
nervous system, damage to mucosal Parmar, et.al.
membranes (2013)
Arsenic (As) Skin lesion, hyperkeratosis, diabetes, Yang, et.al. 2020
cancer, cardiovascular disease and infant
mortality

351
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Mercury (Hg) Toxic to all organs primarily affects Jenson, et.al.

central nervous system and kidneys (2021)
Zinc (Zn) Gastrointestinal distress and diarrhea Parmar, et.al.
(2013)
Table 3. The toxicity of metals encompassing PCB.
WHO Director General’s Statement
Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus raised concerns over the mounting
volumes of e-waste generation and has described it as “tsunami of e-
waste” capable of putting lives and health at risk. According to WHO,
lead exposure from e-waste recycling centres is known to be
associated with reduced neonatal behavioural neurological disorders
and impaired thyroid and lung function. As women and children are
involved in informal e-waste recycling process, they are known to be
the most susceptible and vulnerable to toxic effect of e-waste.

Preciousness of e-waste
Empirical data implies that the precious metal content of e-waste is
the reason behind springing up of many informal recycling yards in
developing countries (Kumar,et.al.2019). The electronic waste is
capturing informal recyclers interest as it consists of large quantities
of precious metals (Au & Ag) as compared to declining metal ores
content (Bryan,et.al. 2015). The PCB encompass many electrical
components (ECs), like resistors, capacitors, integrated circuits and
relays and the metal content is approximately Cu; 30%, Pb; 1-5%, Ni;
1-3% Fe; 1-3%, Ag 0.05%, Au 0.03% and Pd; 0.01% (Muammer,
2016). To enhance the electrical conductivity Au is usually deposited
on the top of the outer Cu layer (Sun,et.al.2017).

Base Metals (%) Precious Metals

(ppm) Reference
Cu Ni Al Fe Pb Au Ag Pt
Juggal (2010),
13 0.1 1 5 0.3 350 1340 NR
Pant, et.al. (2012)
Narayanswamy,
19.19 5.35 7.06 3.56 NR 2000 2000 NR et.al. (2017), Yoo,
et.al. (2009)
37 13.6 1.32 2.04 0.10 2400 1700 0.32 Sahan, et.al. (2019)
Luciana, et.al.
34.49 (2011) and
2.63 0.26 10.57 1.87 0 0.21 NR
% Yamane, et.al.
(2011)
Ogunniyi, et.al.
23.47 2.35 NR NR 0.99 570 3301 NR
(2009)
Tadeusz, et.al.
19.3 3.46 NR 6.74 1.53 2900 8300 NR
(2020)

352
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Holgersson, et.al.
34.26 1.16 1.9 0. 681 0.37 1051 2640 4.3
(2018)
55.87 0.32 1.63 0.1 NR 180 516 35 Huang, et.al.(2022)
Table 4. The elemental composition reported by scientific studies
in PCB of mobile phones
Economically, precious and base metals hold primary importance as it
can contribute to generation of circular economy. Ilyas,et.al.(2014)
also reported the presence of rare earth elements such as Eu, Tb, Y,
Ce and La. Also, reports suggest that such rare earth metals could be
leached out using either acidophilic autotrophs, acidophilic
heterotrophs or cyanogenic bacteria.
Profitable Approach
E-waste is rightly identified as an urban mine as it holds the rich
stream of many base and precious metals in it. It is a source of
valuable base metals such as Fe, Cu, Al and precious metals such as
Ag and Au. (Madrigal,et.al.2015). As per BBC reports, only three or
four grams of Au is extracted from one tonne of traditional gold ore,
whereas, one tonne of scrap mobile phones will salvage up to 350 g of
Au (Ortiz, 2018). Broadly, the total metallic content in e-waste can be
clustered into five different groups that includes precious metals (Au
& Ag), platinum grouped metals (Pt, Pd, Rh, Ir and Ru), base metals
(Cu, Al, Zn, Fe Sn and Ni), metals of hazard (Cd, Pb, Hg, Be, Sb and
In) and rare elements (Te, Ga, Se, Ta and Ge) (Tesfaye et al., 2017 &
Ramannayaka et al., 2020).
Tokyo 2020 Olympics is an exemplar of alchemy that used e-waste as
a resource for extraction of metals for making gold, silver and bronze
medals. The Tokyo 2020 Olympics organizing committee launched a
campaign “Everyone’s medal” that started from April 2017 and lasted
till March 2018. The citizens donated approximately 79,000 tons of
scrap mobile phones and other small devices to the municipal co-
operation. The donated e-waste approximately yielded 32 Kg of Au,
3500 of Ag and 2200 Kg of Cu and Zn (Holland, 2017). This states
the important base metal content and precious metal content in the e-
waste thus, making it an avenue of generating waste into profit.
The ‘Take-Make-Dispose’ model of linear economy needs to be
substituted with circular economy. In circular economy creating a
closed loop is emphasized by establishing the model of Reduce-
Reuse-Recycle-Recover. Here the hefty amount of precious and base
metals will not be lost and also further negate the negative
environmental impacts exerted by open air burning or dumping of e-
waste.

353
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Solution
Reverse Logistics
Extended producer responsibility (EPR) could be the best possible
solution where the electronic product manufacturer takes the product
back as it no longer serves the user. Fleischmann et.al., refers reverse
logistics as a stream of logistics activities where the used products
that no longer serves the user are processed back by the manufacturer
and returned back to the market again in usable form.

Figure 2. Reverse logistics and work flow

Pyrometallurgical Method
Pyrometallurgy is a form of traditional process used to recover non-
ferrous and precious metals from electronics (Murugappan,et.al.
2021). The process is a thermal treatment which involves incarnation,
smelting, drossing, sintering and melting (Priya,et.al.2017). It
involves sophisticated infrastructure and thus demands heavy capital
investment. The incineration is carried out at very high temperature
with enormous loss of mass (70%) and e-waste further transforms into
liquid matter and slag (Widmer,et.al.2020). Further the temperature of
incineration (~17500C) leads to emission of toxic fumes from
furnaces and accounts for release of Sulphur di-oxide gases. The
process leads to unavoidable formation of dioxins and furans as it
uses halogenated flame retardants for which further off-gas treatment
is a prerequisite (Jadhav,et.al.2015). Pyrometallurgical process
though is a dominant metal extractive process still it is not considered
to be eco-friendly. So, the shift from pyrometallurgy to
hydrometallurgy in recent years is observed.
Hydrometallurgical Method
Hydrometallurgical process is an alternative metallurgical process
which was previously used for low grade ores. Eventually it has now
354
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

gained its application in treatment of e-waste to extract base and

precious metals. The dissolution of metals from e-waste substrate
utilizes harsh acids such as nitric acid (HNO 3), hydrochloric acid
(HCl), sulfuric acid (H2SO4), and aqua regia which is a combination
of 3:1 ratio of hydrochloric acid and nitric acid. Also, for extraction of
precious metals, reagents, such as cyanide, halide, thiosulfate and
thiourea are known to be commonly used (Jadhav,et.al. 2015). The
use of toxic chemicals (cyanide leaching) in hydrometallurgical
processes is problematic for environment and the formation of
secondary waste products is a concern (Gunarathne,et.al.2020). Along
with these hydrometallurgical processes use a large volume of water
which holds a great potential for contamination and the chances of
corrosion and erosion of handling equipment is very high.
Bioleaching Approach
Bioleaching offers a promising technology for recovering the metallic
fractions from e-waste (Valix,et.al.2017). Bioleaching uses the
inherent capability of chemolithotropic bacteria to solubilize solid
insoluble form of metals into soluble form (Patel, 2014). Also,
bioleaching is one of the assuring technologies which is cost
effective, non-laborious, eco-friendly and low energy dependant
(Narayanswamy,et.al.2017). Kennecott, Utah, USA Copper is the first
commercial application of bioleaching process and dates Cu
bioleaching since 1950s (Shabani,et.al.2013). In general, the process
of bioleaching can be defined as ‘the metal solubilization from
mineral sources by native microorganisms existing in nature or
manipulating microbial community to transform elements into
extractable form (Mishra,et.al.2005). Being an eco-friendly approach
and cost-efficient process, it also has a lengthy time duration as its
limitation.
Conclusion
This review paper focused the hazards as well as the richness
associated with e-waste. The cryptic nature of e-waste is meticulously
studied and reported.The developed countries are hotspots for e-waste
generation. However, it gets transported to poor/undeveloped
countries because the cost of labour is low, regulatory measures are
unchecked and occupational regulations are weak. The overall
devastating impact is seen on environment and the labours health, the
most vulnerable being women and children handling it. Conversely,
e-waste also serves as a reservoir for base, precious and rare metals.
Significant quantity of Cu (29.04% in PCB) is present in e-waste as
compared to metal ores. Also, among precious metals Au, Ag and Pt
is known to be present 10 times higher as compared to mineral ore

355
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

deposits. So, to corroborate, the e-waste possesses dual nature of it

being toxic as well as precious. The real problem exists with the
INFORMAL RECYCLERS. For sustainable future we need to change
our perception of e-waste as a burden to e-waste as a treasure of urban
mine.
References:
1. Amine, Y. (2020), ‘E-waste in the 5G era: Threat or opportunity?’
Insidetelecom Viewed on 26th December 2023 (https://inside
telecom.com/e-waste-in-the-5g-era-threat-or-opportunity/ )
2. Borthakur, A. & Govind, M. (2017). Public understandings of E-
waste and its disposal in urban India: From a review towards a
conceptual framework, Journal of Cleaner Production,
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2017.10.218
3. Bryan, C., Watkin, E., McCredden, T., Wong, Z., Harrison, S. &
Kaksonen, A. (2015).
4. Burgstaller W., & Schinner F. (1998). Leaching of metals with
fungi, Journal of Biotechnology, 27 (2), 92-116. https: //doi.
org/10. 1016/0168-1656(93)90101-R
5. Casalegno, C., Schifanella, O, Zennaro, E, Marroncelli, S. &
Briant; R. (2015). Collate literature data on toxicity of Chromium
(Cr) and Nickel (Ni) in experimental animals &humans.
Supporting Publications; 12 (2) https://doi.org/10.2903/sp.efsa.
2015.EN-478
6. Ceridwen, J. (2021). Soaring e-waste affects the health of
millions of children, WHO warns.
https://www.who.int/news/item/15-06-2021-soaring-e-waste-
affects-the-health-of-millions-of-children-who-warns
7. Chen, Y., Chen, M., Li, Y., Wang, B., Chen, S & Xu, Z. (2018).
Impact of technological innovation and regulation development
on e-waste toxicity: a case study of waste mobile phones.
Scientific Reports, 8, https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-018-25400-0
8. Echegaray, F. & Hansstein, F. (2017). "Assessing the intention-
behavior gap in electronic waste recycling: the case of Brazil."
Journal of Cleaner Production 142, 180- 190
9. Fan, B., Chen, X., Zhou, T., Zhang, J., Xu, B. (2016). A
sustainable process for the recovery of valuable metals from spent
lithium-ion batteries. Waste Management Resource, 34 (5), 474-
81. https://doi.org/10.1177/0734242x16634454
10. Fleischmann, M., Kirkke, H., Dekker, R., Flapper, S. (2000). A
characterisation of logistics networks for product recovery,
Omega, 28 (6), pp. 653-666 https://doi.org/10.1016/S0305-0483
(00)00022-0

356
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

11. Fraga, C. & Oteiza, P. (2002). Iron toxicity and antioxidant

nutrients, Toxicology, 180, (1), 23-32, https://doi.org/10.1016/
S0300-483X(02)00379-7.
12. Gunarathne, V., Rajapaksha, A., Vithanage, M., Alessi, D.,
Selvasembian, R., Naushad, M., Siming, Y., Oleszczuk P. &
Yong, S. (2020). Hydrometallurgical processes for heavy metals
recovery from industrial sludges, Critical Reviews in
Environmental Science & Technology, https://doi.org/10.1080/
10643389.2020.1847949
13. Holgersson, S., Steenari, B. Bjorkman, M. & Klas, C. (2018).
Analysis of the metal content of small-size Waste Electric and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) printed circuit boards—part 1:
Internet routers, mobile phones and smartphones, Resources,
Conservation and Recycling, 133, 300-308, https://doi.org/
10.1016/j.resconrec.2017.02.011.
14. Holland, O. (2019). Tokyo 2020 unveils Olympic medals made
from old electronics. CNN. https://edition.cnn.com/style/article/
tokyo-olympic-medal-intl-scli/index.html Viewed on 2nd January
2021
15. Huang, Y., Chou, S. & Lo, S. (2022). Gold recovery from waste
printed circuit boards of mobile phones by using microwave
pyrolysis &hydrometallurgical methods. Sustainable Environment
Research, 32, (6). https://doi.org/10.1186/s42834-022-00118-x
16. Huo, X., Peng, L., Xu, X., Zheng, L., Qiu, B., Qi, Z., Zhang, B.,
Han, D and Piao, Z. (2007) Elevated Blood Lead Levels of
Children in Guiyu, an Electronic Waste Recycling Town in
China, Environmental Health Perspectives, 115:7, 1113-117.
https://doi.org/10.1289/ehp.9697
17. Idrees, N., Tabassum, B., Elsayed, F., Hashem, A., Sarah, R. &
Hashim, M. (2018). Groundwater contamination with cadmium
concentrations in some West U.P. Regions, India, Saudi Journal
of Biological Sciences, 25 (7), 1365-1368, https://doi.org/
10.1016/j.sjbs.2018.07.005
18. Igharo, G., Anetor, J., Osibanjo, O., Osadolor, H., & Dike, K.
(2014). Toxic metal levels in Nigerian electronic waste workers
indicates occupational metal toxicity associated with crude
electronic waste management practices. An International Journal
of Nigerian Society for Experimental Biology. 26. 107-113.
19. Ilyas, S. and Lee, J. (2014). Biometallurgical recovery of metals
from waste electrical and electronic equipment: A review.
Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering Reviews, 1, 148-169.

357
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

20. Jadhav, U. and Hocheng, H. (2015). Hydrometallurgical

Recovery of Metals from Large Printed Circuit Board Pieces.
Science Reports. https://doi.org/10.1038/srep14574
21. Jensen, M., Bayona, C., & Sripada, K. (2021). Mercury Exposure
among E-Waste Recycling Workers in Colombia: Perceptions of
Safety, Risk, and Access to Health Information. International
journal of environmental research and public health, 18(17).
https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph18179295
22. Juggal, K. (2010). E waste management: as a challenge to public
health in India. Indian Journal of Community Medicine, 35 (3),
382-385.
23. Kang L., Quanyin Ta., Jiadong Y., Mengmeng W. A (2023)
Global perspective on e-waste recycling, Circular Economy,
Volume 2, Issue 1, 100028, ISSN 2773-1677,
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cec.2023.100028
24. Kumar, P., Bhim, J., Kumar, A. & Paliwal, A. (2019).
Biotechnological and microbial standpoint cahoot in
bioremediation, Editor(s): Bhatt, P. Smart Bioremediation
Technologies, Academic Press, 137-158, https://doi.org/10.1016/
B978-0-12-818307-6.00008-1.
25. Leyssens, L., Vinck, B., Straeten, C., Wuyts, F. & Maes, L.
(2017). Cobalt toxicity in humans—A review of the potential
sources and systemic health effects. Toxicology, 387, 43-56.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.tox.2017.05.015
26. Li, Y., Huo, X. & Liu, J. (2011). Assessment of cadmium
exposure for neonates in Guiyu, an electronic waste pollution site
of China. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment. 177, 343–
351. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10661-010-1638-6
27. Lin, T. and Chen, C. (1998). Nickel toxicity to human term
placenta: in vitro study on lipid peroxidation. Journal of
Toxicology &Environmental Health Part A, 54(1), 37-47.
https://doi.org/10.1080/009841098159015
28. Luciana, H., Tavares, V., Espinosa, D. & Tenorio, J. (2011).
Recycling of WEEE: Characterization of spent printed circuit
boards from mobile phones and computers, Waste Management,
31 (12), 2011, 2553-2558, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.wasman.
2011.07.006.
29. Madrigal, A., Delira, R., Alarcon, A., Lopez, M., Barradas, O.,
Sanchez, J., Cerrato, R., & Fernandez, M. (2015). "Bioleaching of
gold, copper and nickel from waste cellular phone PCBs and
computer goldfinger motherboards by two Aspergillus niger
strains." Brazilian Journal of Microbiology, 46 (3), 707-713

358
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

30. Mishra, D., Kim, D., Gwan, J., & Rhee, Y. (2005). Bioleaching:
A microbial process of metal recovery; A review. Metals and
Materials International. http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/BF03027450
31. Mmereki, D., Li, B., Baldwin, A., & Hong, L. (2016). The
generation, composition, collection, treatment and disposal
system, and impact of E-waste. E-waste in Transition-from
Pollution to Resource, 10, 61332.
32. Mohammed, A., Oyeleke, S., Ndamitso, M., Achife, C., Badeggi,
U. (2013). The impact of electronic waste disposal &possible
microbial and plant control. International Journal of Engineering
& Science. 2 (10), 35-42. http://dx.doi.org/10.13140/RG.2.2.
16255.25767
33. Muammer, K. (2016). Recovery of metals and nonmetals from
electronic waste by physical and chemical recycling processes,
Waste Management, 57, 64-90 https://doi.org/10.1016/j.wasman.
2016.08.004
34. Muller, O., B., Bauer, M. & Grof, P. (2012). Commentary on a
recent review of lithium toxicity: what are its implications for
clinical practice? BMC Medicine, 10, 132. https://doi.org/10.1186
/1741-7015-10-132
35. Murugappan, R. and Karthikeyan, M. (2021). Microbe-assisted
management &recovery of heavy metals from electronic wastes,
Environmental Management of Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment, Elsevier, 65-88, https://doi.org/10.1016/B978-0-12-
822474-8.00004-0.
36. Narayanasamy, M., Dhanasekaran, D., Vinothini, G. &
Thajuddin. N. (2017). Extraction &recovery of precious metals
from electronic waste printed circuit boards by bioleaching
acidophilic fungi. International Journal of Environmental Science
and Technology. http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s13762-017-1372-5
37. Nzabonimpa, P. (2021). Proper disposal: A look at how e-
waste can be handled in homes. The New Times
https://www.newtimes.co.rw/news/proper-disposal-look-
how-e-waste-can-be-handled-homes Accessed on 2nd
December 2021
38. Ogunniyi, I., Vermaak, M. & Groot, D. (2009). Chemical
composition and liberation characterization of printed circuit
board communition fines for beneficiation investigations. Waste
Management. 29, 2140–2146.
39. Ortiz D. (2018). In an act of 21st century alchemy, Japan is
turning obsolete electronics into Olympic and Paralympic medals.
Can their ambition show us how to deal with e-waste?.; BBC
reports https://www.bbc.com/future/article/20181120-the-

359
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

surprising-source-of-the-tokyo-2020-olympic-medals Viewed on
21st December 23
40. Pant D. (2014). A review of electronic waste management
microbial participation: a green technology. International Journal
of Environment and Waste Management, 13, 23-36
http://dx.doi.org/10.1504/IJEWM.2014.058791
41. Pant, D., Joshi, D., Upreti, M. (2012). Chemical and biological
extraction of metals present in E-waste: A hybrid technology.
Waste Management, 32, 979-990
42. Parmar, M. & Thakur, L., (2013). Heavy metal Cu, Ni & Zn:
toxicity, health hazards and their removal techniques by low-cost
adsorbents: a short overview. International Journal of plant,
animal and environmental sciences, 3 (3), 143-157.
43. Pascale, A., Sosa, A., Bares, C., Battocletti, A., Moll, M., Pose,
D., Laborde, A., Gonzalez, H., & Feola, G. (2016). E-Waste
Informal Recycling: An Emerging Source of Lead Exposure in
South America. Annals of global health, 82 (1), 197–201.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.aogh.2016.01.016
44. Patel, S. & Kasture, A. (2014). E (Electronic) Waste Management
using biological systems – Overview. International Journal of
Current Microbiological Applied Sciences, 3(7) 495-504.
45. Pathak, A., Morrison, L. & Healy, M. (2017). Catalytic potential
of selected metal ions for bioleaching, &potential techno-
economic &environmental issues: A critical review, Bioresource
Technology, 229, 211-221, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biortech.
2017.01.001.
46. Perkins, D., Drisse, M. & Nxele, T. (2014). Sly, E-Waste: A
Global Hazard,Annals of Global Health, 80, (4), 286-295,
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.aogh.2014.10.001
47. Priya, A. & Hait, S. (2018). Feasibility of Bioleaching of Selected
Metals from Electronic Waste by Acidiphilium acidophilum.
Waste Biomass Valor9, 871–877. https://doi.org/10.1007/s12649-
017-9833-0
48. Ramanayaka, S., Keerthanan, S., & Vithanage, M. (2020). Urban
mining of E-waste: treasure hunting for precious nanometals.
Handbook of Electronic Waste Management, 19–54.
https://doi.org/10.1016/B978-0-12-817030-4.00023-1
49. Sahan, M., Kucuker, M.A., Demirel, B., Kuchta, K. &
Hursthouse, A. (2019). Determination of Metal Content of Waste
Mobile Phones and Estimation of Their Recovery Potential in
Turkey. International Journal of Environmental Research and
Public Health, 16. https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph16050887

360
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

50. Shabani, M., Irannajad, M., & Azadmehr, A. (2013). Bioleaching

of copper oxide ore by Pseudomonas aeruginosa . International
Journal of Minerals, Metallurgy and Materials, 20, 1130–1133.
https://doi.org/10.1007/s12613-013-0845-x
51. Shen, J., Li, X., Shi, X. (2020). The toxicity of lithium to human
cardiomyocytes. Environmental Sciences Europe, 32.
https://doi.org/10.1186/s12302-020-00333-6
52. Solving the E-waste Problem (Step) White Paper, United Nations
University/Step Initiative 2014., One Global Definition of E-
waste http://www.step-initiative.org/
53. Statista (2022). https://www.statista.com/outlook/cmo/consumer-
electronics/worldwide Accessed on 23rd December 2023.
54. Suja, F., Abdul Rahman, R., Yusof, A., & Masdar, M. S. (2014).
E-waste management scenarios in Malaysia. Journal of Waste
Managementhttps://doi.org/10.1155/2014/609169
55. Sun, Z., Cao, H., Xiao, Y., Sietsma, J., Jin, W., Agterhuis, H., &
Yang, Y. (2017). Toward Sustainability for Recovery of Critical
Metals from Electronic Waste: The Hydrochemistry Processes.
Sustainable Chemistry & Engineering, 5 (1), 21-40 https://doi.org
/10.1021/acssuschemeng.6b00841
56. Tadeusz, G, Eschen, M., Charasinska, J. Knapik, M., Kozłowicz,
S., Anyszkiewicz, J., Jadwinski, M., Potempa, M., Gawliczek,
M., Chmielarz, A., & Kurylak, W. (2020) Determination of
Metals’ Content in Components Mounted on Printed Circuit
Boards from End-of-Life Mobile Phones. Recycling. http://dx.doi.
org/10.3390/recycling5030020
57. Tesfaye, F., Lindberg, D., Hamuyuni, J., Taskinen, P., Hupa, L.,
2017. Improving urban mining practices for optimal recovery of
resources from e-waste. Miner. Eng. 111, 209-221. Available
from: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.mineng.2017.06.018
58. Tokyo 2020 medals to be made from discarded smartphones and
laptops (2019). The Guardian. https://www.theguardian.com/
sport/2019/feb/08/olympics-medals-recycled.gadgets-electronic-
waste Accessed on 13th June 2021.
59. United States Environmental Protection Agency, Cleaning up
electronic waste https://www.epa.gov/international-cooperation/
cleaning-electronic-waste-e-waste
60. Valix, M. (2017). Bioleaching of electronic waste: Milestones and
challenges, (Eds.) Wong, J., Tyagi, R. & Pandey, A. Current
Developments in Biotechnology and Bioengineering, Elsevier,
Amsterdam, 407-442.
61. Vyskocil, A. & Viau, C. (1999). Assessment of molybdenum
toxicity in humans. Journal of applied toxicology, 19 (3), 185-

361
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

192. https://doi.org/10.1002/(SICI)1099-1263(199905/06)19:3%
3C185::AID-JAT555%3E3.0.CO;2-Z
62. Wang, H., Huang, P., Zhang, R. (2021). Effect of lead exposure
from electronic waste on haemoglobin synthesis in children.
International Archives of Occupational and Environmental
Health, 94, 911–918 https://doi.org/10.1007/s00420-020-01619-1
63. Waste Management World (2023). Global e-waste flows monitor
2022. Transboundary movement of discarded EEE. July 24, 2023.
https://waste-management-world.com/materials/global-e-waste-
flows-monitor/ viewed on 2nd January 2023.
64. Widmer, R., Krapf, H., Khetriwal, D., Schnellmann, M., Heinz,
B, Sammani, R., Keerthanan, S. and Vithanage, M. (2020). Urban
mining of E-waste: treasure hunting for precious nanometals,
Handbook of Electronic Waste Management, Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2020, 19-54, https://doi.org/10.1016/B978-0-12-
817030-4.00023-1.
65. Xue, K., Qian, Y., Wang, Z., Guo, C., Wang, Z., Li, X., Li, Z. and
Wei, Y. (2021). Cobalt exposure increases the risk of fibrosis of
people living near E-waste recycling area, Ecotoxicology and
Environmental Safety, 215, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecoenv.
2021.112145.
66. Yamane, L., Moraes, V., Espinosa, D. & Tenorio, J. (2011).
Recycling of WEEE: Characterization of spent printed circuit
boards from mobile phones and computers. Waste Management,
31, 2553–2558.
67. Yang, J., Bertram, J., Schettgen, T., Heitland, P., Fischer, D.,
Seidu, F., Felten, M., Kraus, T, Fobil, J. & Kaifie, A. (2020).
Arsenic burden in e-waste recycling workers – A cross-sectional
study at the Agbogbloshie e-waste recycling site, Ghana,
Chemosphere, 261, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chemosphere.2020.
127712
68. Yang, J., Bertram, J., Schettgen, T., Heitland, P., Fischer, D.,
Seidu, F., Felten, M., Kraus, T, Fobil, J. & Kaifie, A. (2020).
Arsenic burden in e-waste recycling workers – A cross-sectional
study at the Agbogbloshie e-waste recycling site, Ghana,
Chemosphere, 261, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chemosphere.2020.
127712
69. Yohannessen, K., Galleguillos, D., Giordano, D., Agost, A.,
Valdes, M., Smith, M., Galen, K., Arain, A., Rojas, F., Neitzel,
L., & Rudolph, P. (2019). Health Assessment of Electronic Waste
Workers in Chile: Participant Characterization. International
journal of environmental research &public health, 16(3), 386.
https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph16030386

362
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

70. Yongyong, G., Huo, X., Li, Y., Wu, K., Liu, J., Huang, J., Zheng,
G., Xiao, Q., Yang, H., Wang, Y., Chen, A. & Xijin, X. (2010).
Monitoring of lead, cadmium, chromium &nickel in placenta
from an e-waste recycling town in China, Science of The Total
Environment, 408 (16), 3113-3117, https://doi.org/10.1016/
j.scitotenv.2010.04.018.
71. Yoo, J., Jeong, J., Yoo, K., Lee, J. & Kim, W. (2009). Enrichment
of the metallic components from waste printed circuit boards by a
mechanical separation process using a stamp mill. Waste
Management, 29 (11), 1132–1137.
72. Zhang, Q. Zhou, T., Xu, X., Guo, Y., Zhao, Z., Zhu, M. Li, W.,
Yi, D. and Huo, X. (2011). Downregulation of placental S100P is
associated with cadmium exposure in Guiyu, an e-waste recycling
town in China, Science of The Total Environment, https://doi.org/
10.1016/j.scitotenv.2011.09.032

Sonawane P.M.
Assistant Professor, Government Institute of Science, Aurangabad
Email : [email protected]

363
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 30

EMBEDDED SYSTEMS TO EMBEDDED

MACHINE LEARNING: A MANIFESTATION OF
COMMITMENT IN THE LANDSCAPE OF
TECHNOLOGY

Shaikh Adiba, Ajay D. Nagne & Shazia Shaikh

Abstract:
In view of the recent advances in computer design and machine
learning applications, systems-on-chip technology is going through a
phase of evolution. Embedded systems are quite popular for their
outstanding performance in application-oriented tasks. Washing
machines, medical devices, smartphones, automatic teller machines,
elevator control systems, electronic thermostats, electric toothbrushes,
and many more are examples of embedded systems well known to
everybody. This chapter describes the concept of Embedded Machine
Learning (EML), its significance in the technical trend, and its brief
evolution. It also puts forth hardware considerations and software
framework selection. Furthermore, the chapter addresses challenges
and opportunities in deploying machine learning algorithms into real-
time systems, extends its applications from a research perspective,
and holds a discussion on current trends and future directions.

364
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Key words: EML, tinyML, framework, hardware boards, real-time

applications, current trend.

Introduction to Embedded Machine Learning:

ater progress in chip engineering and the design of
algorithms have made it conceivable to run advanced
machine learning workloads on even the tiniest of
microcontrollers. Embedded machine learning, also
known as TinyML, is the field of machine learning when connected to
embedded frameworks. Executing machine learning models on
embedded systems is commonly referred to as Embedded Machine
Learning (EML) (Shrestha & Mahmood, 2019). Embedded Machine
Learning alludes to the integration of machine learning calculations
into embedded frameworks, empowering these frameworks to
perform clever errands locally. Not at all like conventional machine
learning usage, EML works on edge devices, such as microcontrollers
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.30
and inserted stages. It engages these gadgets to create real-time
choices, prepare information locally, and diminish reliance on
centralized computing assets. Ajani believes that embedded systems
technology is in the transformation phase owing to novel
advancements in the architecture of computer systems and
improvements in machine learning applications (Ajani et al., 2021).
EML holds critical significance as it engages the integration of
machine learning models into resource-limited inserted frameworks,
cultivating decision-making in real-time scenarios, and enhancing the
usefulness of an assorted cluster of devices. It contributes to the
leading edge of feasible and methodological data processing by
opening up the potential of new corporate data. In addition, EML also
provides the global ML environment with tools and techniques for
designing, developing, and deploying working ML applications on
embedded devices, including IoT devices (Suresh et al., 2018). Power
efficiency is the key aspect behind such deployment, thereby raising
the number of application areas (Chakraborty, 2021). Besides, the
intimation of embedded AI, inclusive of embedded ML, is assessed to
find out their impression on safety and organization in the machine
and system (Anastasi et al., 2021). Embedded machine learning is
characterized by the following key aspects:

1. Autonomy and Local Processing: It permits the execution of

machine learning models specifically on end devices,
encouraging speedy and proficient decision-making without
depending on outside servers.

365
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2. Optimized Resource Utilization: Algorithms are planned to

function proficiently in resource-constrained situations,
guaranteeing ideal execution on embedded devices.
3. A wide range of applications: EML has applications in
computer vision, speech recognition, healthcare, and more.

The metamorphic journey in artificial intelligence, particularly in

imbibing machine learning into devices with limited computational
capabilities, laid the groundwork for Embedded Machine Learning.
Initially, it centered on tailoring algorithms that are resource-centric
for microcontrollers and single computing devices, witnessing a
significant shift in current years. Below is the timeline highlighting
the turning point in the evolution of EML:
 1940s-1950s The 1940s–1950s are marked as the establishment
period of machine learning and neural systems.
 1950s–1960s, when the field of artificial intelligence, commonly
known as AI, became apparent. A noteworthy rise in AI laid the
basis integrating machine learning and embedded systems
together.
 1960s–1980s highlight the promotion of embedded systems for
the application of machine learning with restricted computational
capabilities.
 The 1990s and 2000s marked momentum in research and practice
in the field of EML.
 The 2010s witnessed a sudden increase in the expansion of
structured machine learning models suitable for deployment on
resource-limited embedded devices.
 2015 presents an upward trend towards edge computing that
boosted the adoption of EML, permitting separated processing
and standalone decision-making in real-time environments.
 The 2020s broadcast an ample range of applications focusing on
optimized machine learning algorithms suitable for varied
embedded devices.
 2021 and later years emphasized the need for reengineering
embedded architecture and redesigning ML algorithms.

Selection of Hardware and Framework for EML

In arranging for machine learning to fulfill its guarantee in numerous
applications, such as within the zones over, it is necessary to be able
to urge come about from a prepared ML model on an embedded
framework, e.g. smart-phone, vehicle, or robot. There are two primary
approaches to this issue, specifically cloud and edge computing. In
cloud computing, all the data accumulated from the network's edge,

366
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

i.e. the embedded devices are sent back to the cloud over the web, for
the remotely located servers to run ML algorithms, and send back the
result. In the latter approach, edge computing, the execution of ML
models is carried out on the edge systems. Arm provided reasons for
edge computing as increased reliability, safety, reduced latency, cost
and power constraints, and privacy & security concerns Arm (2019).
Hardware and its compatible framework are the two main
components of any automated system. To achieve optimum
performance, appropriate selection of hardware must be done with a
careful examination of the different factors as power consumption,
processing potential, sensor affinity, feedback and receptivity,
memory requirement, hardware constraint.
Embedded computing systems regularly work within rigid power
limitations. The choice of equipment ought to adjust to the power
consumption required for the particular machine learning application.
The processing potential is required to fulfill the computational needs
of machine learning algorithms. FPGAs (field programmable gate
arrays), ASICs (application-specific circuits), and NPUs (specialized
neural processing units) are designed to fasten machine learning
workloads proficiently (Biglari & Tang, 2023; H. Singh, 2023).
Ensuring sensor affinity with embedded machines is crucial,
particularly in applications where machine learning is based on data
collected from specific sensors. The hardware is expected to support
an effective feedback mechanism that enables rapid response times
and constant improvement of machine learning models for real-time
applications. In addition, the memory capacity of connected systems
plays an important role. Taking into account factors such as data size
and complexity, it should be optimized to meet the needs of machine
learning operations. Memory, processing power, energy capacity, and
so on are frequently restricted by embedded devices. Because
embedded systems are intended to be used for specific purposes,
there's limited resources left over in the machine learning field. Some
embedded implementations also leverage additional hardware
accelerators like GPUs (Graphical Processing Units) or FPGAs.

Most academic research works on embedded machine learning focus

on the use of Raspberry Pi and NVIDIA Jetson devices, although the
variety of embedded computer devices produced and used is wide.
The ASUS board series, Google Corals TPU Dev Series, ODROID
TinkerXU4 Boards and Banana boards are some other devices that
have been included (Biglari & Tang, 2023). In order to meet the
special constraints and needs of embedded systems, several

367
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

frameworks and libraries have been developed for embedded machine

learning. Some of the most popular ones are discussed below.

 Google's light machine learning framework TensorFlow Lite is

designed to be used on mobile devices and tablets. It allows the
efficient deployment of machine learning models on resource-
constrained platforms. In order to improve the performance of
devices with limited computational resources, TFLite supports
model quantization, which reduces the accuracy of model weights
(Abadi et al., 2016).
 MicroTVMis an open source deep learning compiler stack
designed for deployment of models on microcontrollers and edge
devices. It enables the integration of the hardware with popular
deep learning frameworks such as TensorFlow, PyTorch and
MXNet. MicroTVM is a model optimization and compilation tool
that enables the deployment of models to different target devices
(T. Chen, 2017).
 CMSIS-NN, a library optimized for ARM CortexTM processors,
is included in the Cortex Microcontroller Software Interface
Standard. For the implementation of neural networks on
microcontrollers, it provides low level functions. It is specially
designed for efficient inference of AR-based microcontrollers,
providing optimized kernels to perform common neural network
operations (Lai et al., 2018).
 For deployment on Edge TPUs, dedicated hardware accelerators
for machine learning inference, the Edge TPU Compiler, part of
Google's Coral platform, optimizes TensorFlow Lite models. In
order to achieve high-performance inference on edge devices with
limited resources, it relies on hardware acceleration (Seshadri et
al., 2022).
 Intel's Open VINO (Open Visual Inference and Neural Network
Optimization) is an open source toolkit that provides tools and
libraries for the optimization and deployment of deep learning
models on Intel hardware. It's compatible with a variety of Intel
processors, such as CPUs, GPUs, FPGAs and Movidius neural
compute sticks that offer flexibility for deployment on the
network edge (Dagli & Eken, 2021).
 ONNX Open Neural Network Exchange facilitates
interoperability between different frameworks. ONNX is an open
format for the representation of Deep Learning Model. The
ONNX Runtime is an engine for running models from the
ONNEX Platform. It is a model interchanger that provides an

368
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

efficient runtime engine for the various hardware platforms

(Onnx, n.d.).
 A modular deep learning framework suitable for deployment on
mobile and embedded devices, Caffe2 was originally developed
by Facebook. It emphasizes modularity and efficiency, making it
well-suited for deployment in resource-constrained environments
(Cengil et al., 2017).
 Intel has developed the Movidius Neural Compute SDK, which
enables deployment of neural algorithms on edge devices that can
be used with hardware from Movidius Neural Compute Stick. It
provides tools and libraries for optimizing and running neural
networks on the Movidius Neural Compute Stick (Rieder, 2019).
 X-CUBE-AI is a software expansion for STM32CubeMX,
enabling optimization and deployment of neural networks on
STM32 microcontrollers. It allows machine learning models to be
integrated into STM32 based embedded systems, which will
increase the capabilities of microcontroller applications (AI, Stm-
S, 2023).

Deployment Challenges and Proposed Solutions

The final step is to deploy models of machine learning. A series of
decisions on the basis of conditions, application cases, and the context
of the machine learning design on the embedded device. The
enhancement of machine learning models means that the
architectural decisions to be taken should therefore be split up
beforehand, along with algorithmic choices that improve
performance and deal with limitations in runtime. In addition,
improvements in the use of memory and hardware management are
proposed.

Architectural decisions - As proposed by Paszke and others, the

introduced Efficient Neural Network (ENet) comes with an optimized
arrangement of the components of the hidden layers, i.e., batch
normalization, convolutional layer, custom ReLU, max pooling
layers, and fully connected layers (Paszke et al., 2016). Lane et al.
proposed additional layer compression to reduce the total number of
parameters that are being analyzed Lane et al. (2017).

Algorithmic choices - By reducing the dimensionality of incoming

data as well as layer outputs, it is possible to optimize this model for
runtime, especially when data is continuously received. An estimator,
through the estimation of redundancies within the data, sets a
threshold for dimensionality reduction that is to be implemented on

369
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

DeepX (Lane et al., 2016; Szegedy et al., 2016). An alternative vector

representation was proposed by (Haigh et al., 2015). Further
reductions in overheads can be carried out to this end with function
calls, which use fixed-size memory again. Another algorithmic
optimization to overcome the given constraints on embedded devices
is the numerical representation of values.

Memory and Hardware improvements - Efficient use of memory

so as not to waste it. It is essential to carry out expensive computer
operations and exploit the limited amount of memory space and
computation power of embedded devices. Using a cache can be an
approach to avoiding repeatedly occurring operations; as caching can
be time-consuming, it should only be applied where the trade-off
between cost and utility is worth it. Another point is the total size of
the model, which must be adjusted. Storage of the device should be as
light as possible (Andrade et al. 2018). Han et al. (2015) have shown
that the embedded energy consumption is high. Memory access is the
dominant factor in devices; in general, it is important to have small
models that are suitable for use with on-device storage. In order to
improve the energy efficiency of the device, Verhelst and Moons
proposed improvements in hardware. They claim that GPUs and
CPUs can impossibly exploit several computational aspects of deep
inference networks because they are built for a general purpose and
not for the specific task they are used for (Verhelst & Moons, 2017).
Bottlenecks can be overcome by leveraging memory and
computational characteristics. For example, fault tolerance or
temporal data locality (Cecconiet al. 2017; Chen et al. 2016). A
different approach to optimizing the given hardware is to make use of
additional resources. The cloud connection service, which allows
computations to be outsourced where the data transfer bandwidth is
sufficiently high, latency is manageable, and privacy and security are
ensured when necessary, or by adding hardware components in the
form of graphics cards or FPGAs, can achieve this (Mittal, 2018).
Gokhale and his subordinates proposed the use of a neural network
accelerator for generic neural network architectures, introducing nn-X
(neural network next). nn-X is a simple, lightweight coprocessor for
the execution of DNNs in real-time. Compared to conventional
mobile or desktop processors, its performance per power level is 10 to
100 times higher parallelism is a critical element of nnX (Gokhale et
al. (2014).

Innovative Real-Time Applications of Embedded Machine

Learning

370
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Recent years have seen significant advances in the area of real-time

applications of embedded machine learning, particularly in domains
like computer vision, industrial IoT, real-time safety-critical systems,
robotics, and healthcare enhancements. The advent of powerful and
compact machine learning models has opened the path for real-time
intelligent processing on embedded devices with constrained
resources. The earlier embedded models applied simple rule-based
algorithms, whereas recently the trend has shifted towards applying
complex neural networks running successfully on edge devices and
microcontrollers providing responsive analytics. The integration of
resources and compact size are factors contributing to the attention
gained by the deployment of machine learning algorithms on compact
devices (Kevin, Cardwell, 2023). Real-time livestock monitoring
using intelligent devices has now become possible through the
application of well-performing and efficient deep learning models.
The same has been demonstrated by (Arablouei et al., 2023), who
implemented an outperforming deep neural network algorithm that
utilized accelerometer data from digital collar tags tied to the cattle
for understanding and classifying their behaviour. The network, along
with the Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) and Finite Impulse Response
(FIR), performs feature extraction and classification. Performing
better than the other time-series-based ML approaches, the system
was able to accurately perform intra-dataset and inter-dataset
classification of cattle data. Through their work, the authors were able
to deliver insights into the spectral correlation depicting the
relationship between movement intensities associated with different
cattle behaviours, thereby demonstrating the real-time behaviour
classification via wearable compact devices. Precision farming is
another application that utilizes technologies like GPS, remote
sensing, IoT sensors, and embedded systems to perform data-driven
agricultural management for monitoring farms and crops and making
timely interventions. Such a smart practice can lead to watering and
applying fertilizers or pesticides only when there is a need, thereby
eliminating unnecessary work and saving resources. Crop and soil
status can be monitored in real-time without frequent physical visits
or examinations, thereby providing real-time updates. Improvement in
crop yield, profit, and optimized resource usage are some of the
benefits of using this technology as a result of increased automation
and analytics for decision-making. (Master et. al., 2020)
systematically explored the application of embedded systems and
machine learning for precision farming using Node MCUs and some
sensors to monitor weather in real-time using wireless sensor
networks. They combined regression algorithms and logistic

371
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

multivariate analysis with their selection to achieve enhanced

prediction accuracy, benefiting crop yields and reducing chemical
use. Compact and intelligent systems like these create an
interconnected farming environment through the strategic deployment
of various kinds of sensors, creating a successful farming process that
contributes to precision agriculture.

Traditionally, a slow and expensive manual process of data capture

and human labelling has been done for the study of plants, especially
crops. The requirement of large and diverse datasets that are
annotated accurately is indispensable to conducting studies on plants
for purposes such as monitoring and disease detection. Human
labelling of plants in a field setting has been cumbersome and time-
consuming, while adding tags to plants subjectively or classifying
them renders the data non-reproducible. Computational advances for
plant study bring forth computer vision and robotics that harness the
capabilities of deep learning-based annotation models that are pre-
trained on human-labelled data and automate such processes in the
future. The fine combination of automated intelligent robotic devices
for agricultural advancements is capable of accelerating computer
vision research for plants’ studies using larger datasets characterized
by less biased training data. Such datasets are also better at capturing
inter-crop diversity and recording dynamic changes over time.
Intelligent agriculture through machine learning and automation can
overcome many bottlenecks, thereby advancing research in this
domain. Beck et al. (2020) introduced a novel embedded robotic
system, EAGL-I, that was developed for the automated creation and
labelling of large plan datasets with an exceptional imaging rate of
one image per second, recording the plants from many angles. Their
system is capable of advanced image processing capabilities, like
performing background variations and changes and segmentation for
highlighting features of the plants. For the CNN-based model
training, they generated a dataset of 34,000 labelled images, which
was used for plant classification. The authors planned on generating
larger datasets of Canadian crop plants by utilizing machine learning
for automated and scalable dataset generation.

In recent years, the proliferation of IoT devices and sensors has

caused an increase in data generation. This leads to overutilization of
power resources and strains devices like sensors operating on limited
battery power. Adaptive, intelligent solutions that target reducing data
transmission through analytics and filtering can prove to be a means
of optimizing the process. For achieving a reduction in data

372
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

transmission, Wang et. al. (2023) developed a machine learning-based

scheme for wireless sensor devices by using the TinyML model
within constrained sensors to analyse data and filter out unimportant
data from being transmitted. A transmission reduction of 99.91% was
achieved by their method, which was evaluated on an occupancy
estimation test bed. Outperforming traditional solutions like Shewhart
change detection, their method proves that embedded machine
learning can be useful in extending battery and IoT sensors’ lives
while demonstrating similar performance.

In the automotive industry, the value of intelligent and autonomous

technologies is high and can be applied to develop and upgrade
advanced driver assistance systems (ADAS) for helping them with
tasks like vehicle control, parking assistance, congestion alerts,
emergency brakes, lane keeping, etc. Such functions are achieved
through a complex integration of software and hardware,
incorporating machine learning, engineering, and embedded
computing. In a similar pursuit, Ball and Tang (2019) highlighted the
innovations in ADAS that have utilized the power of AI and
optimized hardware through neural networks for torque vector control
in multi-motor electric vehicles to upgrade the dynamics of vehicle
functioning. The authors conducted a review of the literature and
highlighted the requirement of ample labelled datasets,
interdisciplinary collaboration, and platforms for networking.

Current Trends and Future Direction

Embedded Machine Learning (EML) represents a paradigm shift in
how machines process and interpret data. This technology involves
integrating machine learning algorithms into embedded systems,
enabling devices to perform intelligent tasks, whereas current trends
in EML are shaping the future of various industries, from IoT devices
to autonomous vehicles and many more. In this discussion, we'll
explore the current landscape of embedded machine learning and the
potential future directions it might take.

Current Trends
Edge Computing and Edge AI:
One of the prevailing trends in embedded machine learning is the
move towards edge computing and Edge AI. Traditionally, data
processing relied heavily on centralized cloud servers, but the advent
of edge computing brings the computation closer to the data source.
This approach reduces latency, enhances real-time decision-making
capabilities, and minimizes dependence on continuous internet

373
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

connectivity. The use of edge computing in IoT devices will increase

and allowing for more efficient data processing and analysis at the
device level. Edge AI, an integral part of this trend, involves running
machine learning algorithms directly on edge devices. This allows for
faster and more efficient processing of data, making embedded
systems more responsive and adaptive. Edge AI is particularly crucial
in applications where low latency is paramount, such as autonomous
vehicles and industrial automation (A. Singh et al., 2022;
Sivaganesan, 2019; Tech & Tech, 2023; Venkatraman, 2023)

Energy-Efficient Machine Learning Models:

Another important trend for the future of embedded AI systems is the
focus on energy efficiency and sustainability. As more and
more devices and systems connect to the Internet, the demand for
energy-efficient solutions becomes increasingly important. With the
battery-powered devices, energy efficiency has become a key
consideration in embedded systems; current trends focus on
developing and deploying energy-efficient machine learning models.
Techniques like model quantization, pruning, and compression are
employed to create lightweight models that consume minimal power
while maintaining acceptable levels of accuracy. This is especially
critical for applications in remote or resource-constrained
environments (Evolute-Admin & Evolute-Admin, 2023; Tech &
Tech, 2023; Venkatraman, 2023).

Custom Hardware Accelerators:

As the demand for real-time processing in embedded systems grows,
there is a notable trend towards custom hardware accelerators.
Specialized chips like GPUs, FPGAs, and ASICs are designed to
execute machine learning tasks efficiently. These accelerators
enhance the performance of embedded devices, enabling them to
handle complex algorithms with greater speed. The customization of
hardware aligns with the specific requirements of embedded machine
learning applications, optimizing both speed and energy consumption
(Gupta, 2021; Silvano et al., 2023).

Federated Learning:
Privacy concerns and the need for decentralized learning have given
rise to federated learning. This approach allows models to be trained
across multiple devices without sharing raw data. Federated learning
is particularly relevant for embedded systems, where data privacy is a
paramount concern. This trend enables continuous learning and
adaptation of models without compromising user data, making it a

374
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

viable solution for various applications, including healthcare and

finance (Saif, 2023; Yaacoub et al., 2023).

Future Directions
The future directions in embedded machine learning promise
groundbreaking advancements, indicating a new era of smart and
efficient devices. As technology continues to evolve, EML directly
into devices is becoming increasingly crucial. One key trend is the
development of more energy-efficient and specialized hardware,
enabling the deployment of complex models on resource-constrained
devices. Edge computing is gaining prominence, empowering devices
to process data locally, reducing latency, and enhancing privacy. The
future of embedded machine learning holds immense potential,
shaping a world where devices intelligently adapt and learn from their
surroundings, creating a more connected and intelligent ecosystem,
among other examples (Y. Chen et al., 2020).

Explainable AI (XAI) in Embedded Systems:

As embedded machine learning applications become more prevalent
in critical domains such as healthcare and finance, there is a growing
demand for transparency and interpretability. Future directions in
EML include the incorporation of Explainable AI (XAI) techniques.
These techniques aim to provide users with insights into how a model
reaches a particular decision, enhancing trust and understanding. This
is crucial for applications where interpretability is as important as
accuracy, such as medical diagnostics (Combi et al., 2022).

Continual Learning:
Traditional machine learning models often require periodic updates to
adapt to evolving environments. Future embedded systems are likely
to embrace continual learning, allowing devices to learn and adapt to
new data over time. This dynamic capability ensures that embedded
machine learning models remain relevant and effective in dynamic
real-world scenarios. Continual learning is particularly advantageous
in applications where the environment is constantly changing, such as
robotics and smart infrastructure (Ferreiro, 2023).

Distributed Edge Learning:

Building on the federated learning concept, the future of embedded
machine learning involves the development of distributed edge
learning. This approach allows devices to collaboratively train models
while retaining data locally. Distributed edge learning has the
potential to enhance the scalability and efficiency of embedded

375
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

systems. It enables large-scale, collaborative AI applications at the

edge without compromising on data privacy. This trend aligns with
the increasing need for collaborative and interconnected intelligent
systems (A. Singh et al., 2022; Sivaganesan, 2019; Venkatraman,
2023).

Robustness and Security:

As embedded machine learning finds its way into safety-critical
applications such as autonomous vehicles and healthcare devices,
ensuring the robustness and security of models becomes paramount.
Future directions in EML include the development of models that are
resilient to adversarial attacks and environmental variations.
Moreover, advancements in secure model deployment and updates
will play a crucial role in mitigating the security risks associated with
embedded machine learning. The focus on robustness and security is
vital for building trust in the reliability of embedded systems
(Evolute-Admin & Evolute-Admin, 2023; Tech & Tech, 2023;
Venkatraman, 2023).

Human-in-the-Loop Systems:
The integration of human-in-the-loop systems is another anticipated
direction for embedded machine learning. This approach involves
combining the strengths of machine learning algorithms with human
expertise. In complex scenarios where human intuition and reasoning
is essential, embedding machine learning models that can collaborate
with human operators enhances decision-making processes. This
trend is particularly relevant in applications like medical diagnosis,
where a combination of automated analysis and human expertise can
lead to more accurate and reliable results (Mosqueira-Rey et al.,
2023).

Edge-to-Cloud Synergy:
While edge computing has gained prominence, future directions in
EML may see a synergy between edge and cloud computing. Certain
applications may benefit from a hybrid approach where edge devices
perform initial processing and more intensive computations are
offloaded to the cloud. This hybrid model can provide a balance
between local processing for low-latency tasks and cloud resources
for complex computations, ensuring optimal performance and
scalability (Admin, 2023; What Is Edge to Cloud?, n.d.).

Conclusion
From this study, it is realized that Embedded Machine Learning

376
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

brings forth the integration of machine learning calculations into

embedded frameworks, empowering these frameworks to perform
clever errands locally. Although this field is emerging rapidly and
seems fascinating, it poses some challenges to implementation.
Hence, a thorough assessment of the factors that lead to the selection
of devices fulfilling the application’s particular requirements and,
ultimately, optimizes performance in terms of hardware constraints
when it comes to deciding which equipment is best suited for
Embedded Machine Learning. With this conscious investigation, real-
time embedded machine learning can be leveraged to bring about a
paradigm shift across sectors in a way that it can transform traditional
methods of device functioning towards ones that incorporate software
and hardware capable of delivering intelligent, dynamic, and
responsive ones. The integration of machine learning algorithms with
FPGAs and GPUs can play a leading role in helping process data and
make timely and informed decisions in real-time. The advancements
achieved with these integrations bring hope for a future in a digitally
connected world where context-aware and intelligent devices make
lives easier than ever. Embedded Machine Learning is at the forefront
of technological innovation, reshaping the capabilities of embedded
systems across various industries. Current trends, such as edge
computing, energy-efficient models, custom hardware accelerators,
and federated learning, have laid the foundation for a future where
intelligent devices operate seamlessly at the edge. Looking ahead, the
integration of Explainable AI, continual learning, distributed edge
learning, robust security measures, human-in-the-loop systems, and
potential edge-to-cloud synergy will further propel embedded
machine learning into new frontiers. As EML continues to evolve, its
impact on diverse sectors will contribute to the development of a
smarter, more connected, and secure world.

References:
1. Abadi, M., Agarwal, A., Barham, P., Brevdo, E., Chen, Z., Citro,
C., Corrado, G. S., Davis, A., Dean, J., Devin, M., & others.
(2016). Tensorflow: Large-scale machine learning on
heterogeneous distributed systems. ArXiv Preprint ArXiv:
1603.04467.
2. Admin. (2023). Edge and Cloud Synergy: Transforming
application performance. https://dwpglobalcorp.com/edge-and-
cloud-synergy-transforming-application-performance/
3. AI, Stm.-S. (2023). STM32Cube.AI - STMicroElectronics -
STM32 AI. https://stm32ai.st.com/stm32-cube-ai/
4. Ajani, T. S., Imoize, A. L., & Atayero, A. A. (2021). An

377
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

overview of machine learning within embedded and mobile

devices-optimizations and applications. Sensors, 21(13), 1–44.
https://doi.org/10.3390/s21134412
5. Anastasi, S., Madonna, M., & Monica, L. (2021). Implications of
embedded artificial intelligence - Machine learning on safety of
machinery. Procedia Computer Science, 180(2019), 338–343.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procs.2021.01.171
6. Biglari, A., & Tang, W. (2023). A Review of Embedded Machine
Learning Based on Hardware, Application, and Sensing Scheme.
Sensors, 23(4). https://doi.org/10.3390/s23042131
7. Cengil, E., Çınar, A., & Özbay, E. (2017). Image classification
with caffe deep learning framework. 2017 International
Conference on Computer Science and Engineering (UBMK),
440–444. https://doi.org/10.1109/UBMK.2017.8093433
8. Chakraborty, P. (2021). Embedded Machine Learning and
Embedded Systems in the Industry. International Journal for
Research in Applied Science and Engineering Technology, 9(11),
1872–1875. https://doi.org/10.22214/ijraset.2021.39067
9. Chen, T. (2017). An end to end IR stack for deep learning
systems. Proceedings of the Workshop on Trends in Machine-
Learning (and Impact on Computer Architecture), 1.
10. Chen, Y., Zheng, B., Zhang, Z., Wang, Q., Shen, C., & Zhang, Q.
(2020). Deep learning on mobile and embedded devices: State-of-
the-art, challenges, and future directions. ACM Computing
Surveys (CSUR), 53(4), 1–37.
11. Combi, C., Amico, B., Bellazzi, R., Holzinger, A., Moore, J. H.,
Zitnik, M., & Holmes, J. H. (2022). A manifesto on explainability
for artificial intelligence in medicine. Artificial Intelligence in
Medicine, 133, 102423.
12. Dagli, R., & Eken, S. (2021). Deploying a smart queuing system
on edge with Intel OpenVINO toolkit. Soft Computing, 25(15),
10103–10115. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00500-021-05891-2
13. Evolute-Admin, & Evolute-Admin. (2023). The future of AI in
embedded systems - Evolute. https://www.evolute.in/the-future-
of-ai-and-the-embedded-system/
14. Ferreiro, Y. (2023). What is Continuous Learning?
Revolutionizing Machine Learning & Adaptability.
https://www.datacamp.com/blog/what-is-continuous-learning
15. Gupta, N. (2021). Introduction to hardware accelerator systems
for artificial intelligence and machine learning. In Advances in
Computers (Vol. 122, pp. 1–21). Elsevier.
16. Lai, L., Suda, N., & Chandra, V. (2018). Cmsis-nn: Efficient
neural network kernels for arm cortex-m cpus. ArXiv Preprint

378
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

ArXiv:1801.06601.
17. Mosqueira-Rey, E., Hernández-Pereira, E., Alonso-R\’\ios, D.,
Bobes-Bascarán, J., & Fernández-Leal, Á. (2023). Human-in-the-
loop machine learning: A state of the art. Artificial Intelligence
Review, 56(4), 3005–3054.
18. Onnx. (n.d.). GitHub - onnx/onnx: Open standard for machine
learning interoperability. https://github.com/onnx/onnx
19. Paszke, A., Chaurasia, A., Kim, S., & Culurciello, E. (2016).
Enet: A deep neural network architecture for real-time semantic
segmentation. ArXiv Preprint ArXiv:1606.02147.
20. Rieder, O. (2019). Raspberry PI3 and a movidius neural compute
stick for Real-Time. Www.Academia.Edu. https://www.academia.
edu/40065515/Raspberry_PI3_and_a_Movidius_Neural_Comput
e_Stick_for_Real_Time
21. Saif, Z. (2023). Understanding Federated Learning:
Decentralized AI for privacy and efficiency. https://medium.com/
@zakariasaif/understanding-federated-learning-decentralized-ai-
for-privacy-and-efficiency-727685f3c3ae
22. Seshadri, K., Akin, B., Laudon, J., Narayanaswami, R., &
Yazdanbakhsh, A. (2022). An Evaluation of Edge TPU
Accelerators for Convolutional Neural Networks. 2022 IEEE
International Symposium on Workload Characterization (IISWC),
79–91. https://doi.org/10.1109/IISWC55918.2022.00017
23. Shrestha, A., & Mahmood, A. (2019). Review of deep learning
algorithms and architectures. IEEE Access, 7, 53040–53065.
24. Silvano, C., Ielmini, D., Ferrandi, F., Fiorin, L., Curzel, S.,
Benini, L., Conti, F., Garofalo, A., Zambelli, C., Calore, E., &
others. (2023). A survey on deep learning hardware accelerators
for heterogeneous hpc platforms. ArXiv Preprint ArXiv:
2306.15552.
25. Singh, A., Satapathy, S. C., Roy, A., & Gutub, A. (2022). Ai-
based mobile edge computing for iot: Applications, challenges,
and future scope. Arabian Journal for Science and Engineering,
1–31.
26. Singh, H. (2023). Hardware requirements for machine learning.
27. Sivaganesan, D. D. (2019). Design and development ai-enabled
edge computing for intelligent-iot applications. Journal of Trends
in Computer Science and Smart Technology, 1(2), 84–94.
28. Suresh, V. M., Sidhu, R., Karkare, P., Patil, A., Lei, Z., & Basu,
A. (2018). Powering the IoT through embedded machine learning
and LoRa. 2018 IEEE 4th World Forum on Internet of Things
(WF-IoT), 349–354.
29. Tech, T., & Tech, T. (2023). 8 Current &#038; future trends

379
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

disrupting automotive embedded systems. https://www.taaltech.

com/8-current-future-trends-disrupting-automotive-embedded-
systems/
30. Venkatraman, V. (2023). “The Future of IoT and Embedded
Systems: Trends and Predictions for 2023.” https://vidyutbodha.
wordpress.com/2023/03/04/the-future-of-iot-and-embedded-
systems-trends-and-predictions-for-2023/
31. What is Edge to Cloud? (n.d.). https://www.hpe.com/us/en/what-
is/edge-to-cloud.html
32. Yaacoub, J.-P. A., Noura, H. N., & Salman, O. (2023). Security
of federated learning with IoT systems: Issues, limitations,
challenges, and solutions. Internet of Things and Cyber-Physical
Systems, 3, 155–179.

33. Arm. (2019). Embedded Machine Learning Design for Dummies.

John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
34. Kevin, Cardwell. (2023). Real-World Applications of Machine
Learning. Ambient intelligence and smart environments, doi:
10.3233/aise230017
35. Arablouei, R., Wang, L., Currie, L., Yates, J., Alvarenga, F. A., &
Bishop-Hurley, G. J. (2023). Animal behavior classification via
deep learning on embedded systems. Computers and Electronics
in Agriculture, 207, 107707.
36. Master, S., Kundar, S., & Gandhi, R. (2020). Precision farming
using embedded systems and machine learning.
37. Beck, M. A., Liu, C.-Y., Bidinosti, C. P., Henry, C. J., Godee, C.
M., & Ajmani, M. (2020). An embedded system for the
automated generation of labeled plant images to enable machine
learning applications in agriculture. PLOS ONE, 15(12),
e0243923. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0243923
38. Singh, A. P., & Chaudhari, S. (2020, March). Embedded machine
learning-based data reduction in application-specific constrained
IoT networks. In Proceedings of the 35th Annual ACM
Symposium on Applied Computing (pp. 747-753).
39. Ball, J. E., & Tang, B. (2019). Machine learning and embedded
computing in advanced driver assistance systems
(ADAS). Electronics, 8(7), 748.
40. Nicholas D Lane, Sourav Bhattacharya, Petko Georgiev, Claudio
Forlivesi, Lei Jiao, Lorena Qendro, and Fahim Kawsar. 2016.
Deepx: A software accelerator for low-power deep learning
inference on mobile devices. In Proceedings of the 15th
International Conference on Information Processing in Sensor
Networks. IEEE Press, 23.

380
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

41. Christian Szegedy, Vincent Vanhoucke, Sergey Ioffe, Jon Shlens,

and Zbigniew Wojna. 2016. Rethinking the inception architecture
for computer vision. In Proceedings of the IEEE conference on
computer vision and pattern recognition. 2818–2826.
42. Nicholas D Lane, Sourav Bhattacharya, Akhil Mathur, Petko
Georgiev, Claudio Forlivesi, and Fahim Kawsar (2017).
Squeezing deep learning intomobile and embedded devices. IEEE
Pervasive Computing 16, 3 (2017),82–88.
43. Karen Zita Haigh, Allan M Mackay, Michael R Cook, and Li G
Lin. 2015. Machine learning for embedded systems: A case study.
Technical Report (2015).
44. Marian Verhelst and Bert Moons. 2017. Embedded deep neural
network processing: Algorithmic and processor techniques bring
deep learning to iot and edge devices. IEEE Solid-State Circuits
Magazine 9, 4 (2017), 55–65.
45. Leonardo Cecconi, Sander Smets, Luca Benini, and Marian
Verhelst. 2017.Optimal tiling strategy for memory bandwidth
reduction for CNNs. In International Conference on Advanced
Concepts for Intelligent Vision Systems. Springer, 89–100.
46. Yu-Hsin Chen, Tushar Krishna, Joel S Emer, and Vivienne Sze.
2016. Eyeriss: An energy-efficient reconfigurable accelerator for
deep convolutional neural networks. IEEE Journal of Solid-State
Circuits 52, 1 (2016), 127–138.
47. Sparsh Mittal. 2018. A Survey of FPGA-based Accelerators for
ConvolutionalNeural Networks. Neural Computing and
Applications (09 2018). https://doi.org/10.1007/s00521-018-
3761-1
48. Vinayak Gokhale, Jonghoon Jin, Aysegul Dundar, Berin Martini,
and Eugenio Culurciello. 2014. A 240 g-ops/s mobile coprocessor
for deep neural networks. In Proceedings of the IEEE Conference
on Computer Vision and Pattern Recognition Workshops. 682–
687

Shaikh Adiba
Dr. G.Y. Pathrikar College of CS & IT, MGM University
Aurangabad.
Mob.: 9860466776 / Email: [email protected]

381
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Ajay D. Nagne
Dr. G.Y. Pathrikar College of CS & IT, MGM University
Aurangabad.
Mob.: 9890211143 / Email: [email protected]

Shazia Shaikh
Dr. G.Y. Pathrikar College of CS & IT, MGM University
Aurangabad.
Mob.: 9284691917 / Email: [email protected]

CHAPTER 31

THE THEORY OF FEMINISM DEPICTED AS AN

EFFECTIVE WAY OF SELF-DETERMINATION IN
THE CONTEMPORARY NOVELS OF ENGLISH IN
INDIA WITH REFERENCE TO THE WORKS OF
CHETAN BHAGAT AND SUDHA MURTY

Dr. Farhat. P. Durrani and Shaikh Nilofer Shaikh Masood

Abstract:
As the history suggests, Feminism is a theory that talks about the
liberalisation of women and the same has been reflected through a
number of cultural, political and economic movements that took place
in order to give legal protection along with a complete liberation to
women. Literature is the commentary of the society as it is able to
capture every issue of the society and feminism is no exception to it.
In India, the goal of the feminism gets even more important as Indian
women had to fight at every level right from getting the right to equal
access to health, education and food to protecting themselves from
social evil such as sati. The struggle of the Indian feminists has been
huge and the same is reflected in Indian novels in English which
played a big role in evaluating the social scenario with regards to

382
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

women. The transformation of modern Indian women from being

docile and dependent to becoming equally competent and independent
is well captured by various novelists of Indian fiction in English.
Amongst some of the persuasive novelists, Chetan Bhagat and Sudha
Murty are major names as both of them cover a large spectrum of
points concerning Indian women such as religion, culture, family,
social mindset, economic independence, etc. This paper talks about
these writers with reference to ‘Postmodern Feminism’ which is a
mixture of post modernism, structuralism and women’s rights.

Key words: Feminism, Identity, Patriarchy, Indian English novels,

family, society.

Introduction:
According to Oxford Dictionary, Feminism means “the
advocacy of women's
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.31 rights on the basis of the equality of
the sexes”. Thus, it can be said that it is all about feminine
gender having equal rights and opportunities like that of
masculine gender at social, economic and political level. The history
of feminism dates back to early twentieth century when the entire
world witnessed the first wave of feminism which was about the
women’s suffrage movements and was primarily concerned with
women’s right to vote1. The second wave began somewhere in 1960
and it advocated the legal and social rights for women. The third
wave which is still continuing was actually a reaction coming as a
result of the perceived failures of second wave of feminism. The third
wave began somewhere in the earlier 1990s. The Feminist theory
came from the same movements having multiple disciplines likes
feminist history, feminist geography and feminist literary criticism.
The Feminist theory is a part of critical theory that has the primary
objective of destabilizing systems of power and oppression. The basic
aim of seeing things from feminist perspective is to understand the
manner in which people communicate with the system. As Hooks
(2000) states, “Simply put, feminism is a movement to end sexism,
sexist exploitation and oppression. I liked this definition because it
does not imply that men were the enemy” (p. viii)2. Thus, it can be
said that in all, feminist theory is about gender, equality, sex,
difference, race and choice.

Twentieth century did witness an arising awareness among women

regarding their identity, wants, desires, sexuality, existence, destiny

383
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

and most importantly self-definition. The persistent efforts of women

to establish their identity in a patriarchal society became the major
cause of feminist movements which were first condemned and later
blossomed into a number of countries. It is a fact that when it comes
to different countries across the globe, they have their own religions
and most importantly own cultural morals playing an important role
in women’s struggle for independence. Same is the case with a
country like India which has different religions, castes and
communities; different cultures; different languages and different
ethnicities. Women contributes almost half of the country’s
population but they remain in a pitiable situation, even today
especially in rural areas as they have always been viewed as an
inferior. Feminism in Indian English novels in English has always
remained an over-the-top idea that is addressed only in a particular
context. However, as the time went on, feminism was accepted in this
country. In the earlier days, it was only viewed as a “practical
effort”, ironically coming not from women but men themselves 3. Due
to effects of colonialism in India and introduction of women
education, the country witnessed a number of dynamic changes
including the promotion of women’s institutions, active participation
of women in freedom movement, etc. Talking about Indian English
literature, it covers a variety of themes from the theme of
conventional woman to that of new woman who is essentially
confident, bold and has belief in herself.

The Indian literary scene got more bolder with the advent of feminism
in Indian English literature with writers like Sharmila Rege, Kusum
Ansal and Amrita Pritam who established a connection between
sexuality and feminism. The novels in Indian English saw a major
change with the arrival of the novelists like Mulk Raj Anand, R. K.
Narayan and Bhabhani Bhattacharya who preferred to take women as
their main protagonists instead of men in their works such as ‘So
Many Hungers’ by Mulk Raj Anand, ‘Music for Mohini’ written by
Bhabhani Bhattacharya and ‘Guide’ by R. K. Narayan. For these
writers, women are not only the epitome of strength but their
contribution towards their family, society and country is huge. Soon,
a new phase of literature began and mid 1950s and 1960s witnessed
many women novelists writing in English such as Ruth Prawer
Jhabvala, Kamala Markandaya, Anita Desai, Nayantara Sahagal and
many more. These women novelists talked about the number of
tyrannies, torture and violence faced by women not only in society
but in their own homes. The female characters depicted by these
women novelists lack the spirit of life and are majorly depressed and

384
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

sometimes neurotic also, for instance, the female protagonists of

Anita Desai namely Maya in ‘Cry, the Peacock’, Monisha in ‘Voices
in the City’, Raka in ‘Fire on the Mountain’ along with other females
fail to have a practical and more importantly, a logical approach
towards life. While the heroines of Ruth Prawer Jhabwala give us a
glimpse of Indian society that essentially works on the belief that men
hold the place of master and women are merely slaves. Another
important novelist, Kamala Markandaya discusses the problem of
women who are the victims of poverty like her main protagonist,
Rukmani in her most famous novel ‘Nectar in a Sieve’. Markandaya
strongly puts forth the view that the crux of all the existent problems
of females of this country is their economic dependence on men. One
of her strong contemporaries, Shobha De talks about the various
issues that are faced by the urban aristocratic women. According to
De, modern women tend to lose their morality in their search for self-
identity as even a traditional relationship like marriage becomes a
convenient medium to get money, social status and physical
gratification4. Marriage no longer remains an emotional and
psychological attachment for these women. Thus, infidelity no longer
remains a sin but a kind of routine. These women are essentially well-
educated, ambitious, modern, glamourous and lovers of money and
physical gratification. De was followed by a number of contemporary
novelists of Indian English such as Anita Nair, Manju Kapoor, Sudha
Murty, Gita Hariharan, Jhumpa Lahiri, Arundhati Roy and many
more. As Sharad Srivastava Remarks: “The Indo-English woman
writers have a special advantage in this respect as they have
themselves been exposed to the stresses and strains to which the New
woman” is subjected. Also writing in the English language is
sometimes more helpful to a UN inhabited frankness so necessary to
the portrayal of the emotional, moral and spiritual problems of the
new woman”5.

Thus, it can be said that the modern women writers have indeed
carved a niche for themselves in a patriarchal society where literature
was considered only a male thing. These women are modern and path
breaking. They differ from each other in some aspects but the basic
essence of their writing remains the same which is to depict the
modern women in a real sense. That is the reason, the works of these
women writers did not remain confined to India alone but got spread
across the globe for e.g. Jhumpa Lahiri’s "The Namesake" was a
major national bestseller and was named the New York Magazine
Book of the Year. Lahiri became the first Asian to win the Pulitzer
Prize in 2000 for her book" Interpreter of Maladies" 6. While, her

385
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

contemporary, Kiran Desai won the prestigious Booker Prize for her
novel “The Inheritance of Loss” in 2006.

In this regard, the contribution of Chetan Bhagat also needs to be

mentioned. One of the most famous modern novelists of India, Chetan
Bhagat is mainly responsible for bringing the youth of this country
back to the traditional hobby of reading with his interesting writings.
While, keeping youth as the major theme, Chetan Bhagat has also
given a voice more to his ladies rather than his men. His novels are
more feminine as they talk about the female protagonists in a stronger
manner. Chetan Bhagat is a strong believer of women having equal
rights in the society. Thus, needless to say that his novels have very
much ambitious, techno-savvy, competitive, trendy and essentially
new generation females. They also belong to Metropolitan cities and
are very much a part of their hustle and bustle.
In the modern world, globalization and urbanization have opened an
array of opportunities to both men and women in the form of
innovative jobs. This fact is very much reflected in ‘One Night @ the
Call Centre’ by Bhagat where women and man work in equal quantity
in a call center and even their choice of time of their work shifts is
common. They both are independent, intelligent and ambitious.
Ananya is another similar character with the same qualities who is the
heroine of Bhagat most famous work ‘Two States’. According to
Bhagat, women empowerment is one of the most positive traits of
globalization which is actually inevitable along with modernization
and exploitation at work place. The women of Chetan Bhagat do not
take love as an emotion but rather regard it along with marriage
quite casual. For them marriage, sex and love come in the same
category7. Unlike other novelists, Bhagat portrays women as the
person who takes initiative in the courtship rather than her male
counterpart. So, it can be said that Chetan Bhagat is the first among
his contemporary novelists who has actually placed his female
protagonists as the hunter and males as the excavation. The women of
Chetan Bhagat have to suffer because of their strong urge for
something or some person and they can go to any extent to achieve
that. They are also ready to face challenges and risks. Some win the
game and some lose the game. Obviously, they are to be blamed for
it, but one cannot deny that globalization is also responsible for it.
Unlike the female characters of Chetan Bhagat, the characters of
Sudha Murty depict simple realism and empathy. According to Sudha
Murthy, all the little things need to be highlighted as they go a long
way. Awarded with the prestigious Padma Shri award, Sudha Murty
portrays women as utterly courageous. Her female protagonists

386
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Anupama, Shrimati, Mridula and other female characters have

emerged victorious in the midst of social real factors and problems.
Her women are the clear winners mocking all types of fear, logical
inconsistencies, restrictions, disappointments and tolerant
perseverance8. Behind their silence is a voice which has stayed
voiceless and that appears at the end of the day, triumphant at all
levels. All these female characters are focused, honest and straight
forward all through their lives. These women are confident about
establishing themselves as a social being. They are also sensitive,
imaginative and passionate like Anupama in ‘Mahashweta’ who is a
lonely protagonist of the novel9. However, at the end, we find
Anupama a changed woman who is a head strong character now. Her
bold decision is actually her revolt towards the Indian society that
essentially supports the males.
Thus, it can be said that like Bronte, Sudha Murty has also succeeded
in portraying the female characters who do not depend on men yet
they call for true love, respect, dignity and equality 10. All her female
characters have a journey from discontentment to contentment be it
Anupama who revolted in order to live her life on her own terms or
Srimati of ‘Gently Falls the Bakula…’ who takes the difficult
decision of leaving her husband at the end to seek for her identity
which she had sacrificed for her marriage. Both of these female
protagonists make sincere efforts to adjust with their circumstances,
however, they are not cowards to embrace the tyranny of a patriarchal
society at the cost of their own identities and self- esteem and thus
refuse to live a dependent life which is helpless and valuelessand thus
rebel against it.

Conclusion
As a movement, Feminism gained utmost important in the twentieth
century when it was well -supported by almost all the countries of the
world. Feminism as a theory simply means giving rights to women to
live on equal terms with men without being pushed down either by
law or culture or by being forced to take a subservient role. In this
regard, post-independent Indian English literature saw an array of
writers talking about the transformation of the role and place of
women in Indian society. The submissive and docile woman of the
1940’s and 1950’s got transformed into the educated and assertive
woman of the 1960’s and 1970’s who later gave way to the bold and
rebellious one of the 1980’s and 1990’s.The accomplished woman in
the 21st century is strong and independent and that is reflected not
only in her clothes and mannerisms but also in her priorities, choices,
her approach to imbibe culture, traditions, customs and social norms.

387
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

This new woman is reflected well in the novels of Chetan Bhagat

which can be read through the prism of collaborative feminism.
While, the novels of Sudha Murty talk about the struggles of modern
woman with her own family thus pointing out the fact that Feminism
does not particularly talk of equality and rights of women but it is
more about compassion, respect and understanding from the male
counterparts.

References
1. Burton, C. (2014), Subordination: Feminism and social theory.
Routledge.
2. Hooks, B. (2000), Feminism is for everybody: Passionate politics.
South End Press.
3. Dwivedi AN. 1987Studies In Contemporary Indian Fiction In
English. Allahabad: Kitab Mahal.
4. Pandey SN. 1997, Contemporary Indian Women Writers In
English. New Delhi : Atlantic Publishers, 11.
5. Mathur OP. 1993, Modern Indian English Fiction, New Delhi :
Abhinav Publications, Aayushi International Interdisciplinary
Research Journal (AIIRJ) UGC Approved Sr.No.64259 Vol - V
Issue-III MARCH 2018 ISSN 2349-638x Impact Factor 4.574
www.aiirjournal.com l UGC Approved Sr.No.64259 Page No.118
6. Stuart Hall, “Cultural Identity ad Diaspora” from Colonial
Discourse and Post-Colonial Theory: A Reader ed. Patrick
Williams and Laura Chrisman (New York: Harvester Wheat
Sheaf, 994) pp. 392-403.
7. Vamja, Bhoomiben P. Multidimensional study of Chetan Bhagat
as a novelist. http://hdl.handle.net/10603/50890
8. H. Kallur, 2017, ‘Quest for Self’ In the Select Novels of Sudha
Murty. International Journal of English Language, Literature and
Translation Studies.
9. M. Balamurugan (2018), The Traditional Belief in Sudha
Murthy’s Mahashweta. Pune Research - An International Journal
in English. 4(1):1-4
10. S. Parvathiet al, Over-Ambition and Self-Interest Leads to
Alienation in Marriage (With Special Reference to Sudha
Murthy’s Gently Falls the Bakula). IOSR Journal of Humanities
and Social Science.

388
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Dr. Farhat. P. Durrani

Ph.D. Guide, Prof. and Head, Dept. of English, Sir Sayyed College,
Aurangabad

Shaikh Nilofer Shaikh Masood

Research Student of Maulana Azad College of Arts, Science and
Commerce, Aurangabad

CHAPTER 32

MARGINALIZATION VOICE IN CINEMA

(COMPARATIVE STUDY OF SUJATA AND
DHADAK MOVIES ON SOCIAL IMPACT)

Irfana Fatima

Abstract:
Cinema is a medium that celebrates the amalgamation of art and
technology, and other side Cinema is a reproduction of reality and
now days people cannot separate from real life. Cinema has that
power that it can break the barriers of culture and cloves in the
society. Indian cinema popular in the world. Accommodating several
films in regional language, Hindi Cinema one among several local
Cinemas, has its own space and remains an attraction among the
audience. Starting its journey from shame Bengal directed by
Tamasha directed by Prakash Jha Cinema attempts to send social
messages on varied subjects. Particular cinema depicting the issue of
Marginalization remains critical. It is the Hindi. Indian cinema mostly
attempte to describe the problem of marginalization. The Cinema
Pholen Devi (1994) directed by Shekar Kapoor and in 2012 Shudra
directed by Sanjiv Jeswal tries to represent caste discrimination, Dalit
and Margibation to break the social and economic barrier.

389
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Key words: naturally, social, moral and political problems, feelings.

Introduction:
inema brings to us different cultures of the world, as well
as cinema reflects all the complexities of the society like
other forms of art. Cinema is the shadow of society.
Society creates culture, and culture helps to identify a
particular com-munity. . millions of people every day. Screening of
new films is celebrated every Friday and people visit theatre to
participate in cinema and First time the issue of caste was raised in
the Film Achhut Kannya made in 1936 .Other side India is a country
where, around six thousand castes and many religions live in one
country. It why India has extreme diversity, and as religion, caste,
language, regional culture, and traditional festivals. In one hand,
society reflected in cinema. As well as on the other hand, cinema
made here influences society. The advantage of the cinema is that it is
reaching out to a broad audience and is influencing their mind. The
caste
DOI:system has black blood on the Indian society, with this massive
10.25215/9189764560.32
capacity, cinema also bears the enormous responsibility of seeking
truth and providing a platform to the marginalized people. Hindi
language, is a national language and Hindi cinema has represented
India to the world platform as screening the various international film
festivals. Hindi cinema shows different types of social issues in a
cinema and its directly affect the people. Indian cinema is usually
written and spoken in the Hindi language has undergone many ups
and downs but it come in touch with the out all world ,and it never
been shy of addressing demons the attached to it.(Aaakarshan , 2011)
Indian cinema gained worldwide attention for its pre-revolutionary art
cinema. They have list the best Hindi films based on The Indian cast
systems that deals with the worst devils of the supremely evils
practice. Hindi wave cinema focused on the post revolutionary
cinematic movement (Article ,15 , 2019). The cinema industry gained
much attention globally because of revolutionary themes (Manjhi,
The Mountain man, 2015 and Dhadak and Aakershan, 2018).
Bollywood is a cinema of art and portrays the issues of
marginalization. The chapter examines the resemblance and
differences between Dhadak and Sujata from various aspects such as
content, cinematic aesthetics, and socio-culture. It includes the study
and analysis of factors such as teenage protagonists, natural feelings
of love, social system, unexpressed love, the life of character
conflicts, tasks of the protagonists, and the unconditional help of the
protagonists. The study also points out 1 the likeness and contrast in
the imagery of the movies.

390
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Similarities Between Dhadak and Sujata :

The following sequences have been studied and analysed to study the
commonalities between these two films - Dhadak and Sujata. In the
likeness and contrast, elements such as a teenage mainstay, feelings of
love felt naturally, social, moral and political problems, feelings of
love which are unexpressed, characters struggle in life (moral,
mentally, financially), has been studied. The protagonist of the
Bollywod Hindi movie dhadak and Sujata are both teenagers. They
are innocent. In the cinema set in Udaipur, a is about a teenager from
a Dalit family, Madhukar "Madhu" Bhagla, a young college student
hailing from a middle class family in Udaipur, wins a competitive
eating contest and receives his prize 2 from a rich girl from a political
family named ‘Parthavi Singh Rathore’ co-incidentally who also
happens to be studying in the same college. Madhu succeeds to
impresses Parthavi but incurs a minor injury meanwhile and the two
begin to fall in love for one another. Only due to the caste system or
feelings of superiority and inferiority, he is unable to express love. He
has developed an inferiority complex to a great extent. The film
focuses on a romance amidst caste-based inequality. The film
captures the anxieties of youthful love when confronted by the
realities of existing outside the structures governed by social
hierarchies in the villages of Udaipur. As well as in Sujata is a 1959
Hindi language Bimal Roy film.Film ‘Sujata’ is a romance between a
Brahmin young man named as Adheer & untouchable woman named,
Sujata . It's a story of emotional conflict of a mother who fully
accepted an adopted daughter. The movie has Mahatma Gandhi's
fight against untouched ability and also the myth of Chandalika in
Hinduism which it tries to criticize the practice of untouched ability in
India. Brahmin couple, Upen and Charu bring up an orphaned child,
Sujata. Although Upen is fond of the adopted child, his wife Charu
and Aunt can never accepted Sujata,as she was born in an
untouchable's family.They keep hinting Sujata several times she
doesn't belong amongst Brahmins.Adheer falls in love with Sujata but
Charu & his Aunt want Adheer to marry Rama,Charu's real daughter.
Sujata also admires Adheer but feels discomfort or her reality of
being an untouchable by birth. One day, Upen's wife falls down the
stairs and is rushed to the hospital; On reaching the hospital the
doctors tell the family that in order to save Charu, they need the rare
group blood. After blood sampling of several family members Co-
incidently Only Sujata's blood cross matches with Charu’s blood
group and she willingly donates blood. When Charu learns that her
life was saved by Sujata, she realizes her mistake and feel guilty and

391
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

accepts her as her daughter. Sujata and Adheer are then married
happily here after. Feelings of Love Naturally: Parthavi Singh
Rathore and Madhukar have feelings of love naturally, which stand to
be very obvious in their age. These are merely natural and original
feelings. The mainstay of Dhadak is a teenager who is a Hardworking
and local person. Adheer young from Brahmin family and Sujata a
untouchable woman, are in love each other. Upen and Charu bring up
an orphaned child, Sujata. Although Upen is fond of the adopted
child, his wife Charu and Aunt can never accepted Sujata, as she was
born in an untouchable's family.They keep hinting Sujata several
times she doesn't belong amongst Brahmins. Adheer falls in love with
Sujata but Charu & his Aunt want Adheer to marry Rama, Charu's
real daughter. Sujata also admires Adheer but feels discomfort or her
reality of being an untouchable by birth. The film appeals to
humanity. It have variety in terms of geographical, social & cultural
dynamics in Sujata, Dhadkan and shudr. These human beings are
altogether different from each other. There are certain features,
aesthetical as well as thematic, that are common to a large number of
the films made by the boll wood Cinema directors even though each
has his distinct style. The Indian caste system is a system of social
stratification 8and social restriction in India in which communities are
defined by thousands of endogamous hereditary groups called jatis.
This research is an attempt to understand the portrayal of various
casts in cinema, a very popular and dominating medium in Indian
subcontinent their culture and language are different in various ways.
However, love is the common factor in both as far as humanity is
concerned. Madhukar, in Dhadkan is labor.His life changes when he
falls in love wiith Parthavi Singh Rathore an uper cast girl with sound
political background. Madhukar and Adheer change their behavior ,
Now, Adheer looks at himself in the mirror more often. Parthavi
Singh Rathore, in Dhadak and Sujata in Sujata movie too, does
everything possible to look at lover, and plays many tricks to attract
her. He applies powder on his face, combs his hair thoroughly. Only
love brings about such a change. Social System: In Sujata film, Sujata
has to struggle a lot to express love and has to fight a battle against
society. as will Dhadak , represents and reveals social realities and
social sins in India. The Indians consist community which stock in the
root 8 of the caste system. Caste is a very touchy issue in Indian
society. There has been an unequal 2 caste system in India for
thousands of years . Where inter-caste marriages were taboo in India
then they still are a major issue even today However, in the film,
sujata , who is the victim 8 of the caste system, never blames the caste
system . In Dhadkan , Madhukar 2 a young college student , He does

392
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

not talk of any rebellion. However, he rebels when the time is right.
Society forced her to raise her voice . The system looks down upon
Sujata but She Struggles to Change Mindset, society brands him to be
of a lower caste. Parthavi Singh Rathore stand with Madhukar against
the system. The villagers not support Madhukar, and using abuse
words, (Dhadak). The name Dhadak and Sujata is not merely a word,
but it is an abuse at 8 the Indian caste system. Indian society has not
been freed itself from the caste system yet. Indian system reminds us
of this strongly. This powerful caste system restricts love and
marriage of inter-caste. Unexpressed Love: Sujata, the protagonist of
SUJATA film, could not express her intense love for Adheer. He
toiled to play many tricks in expressing his passion. There could be
many reasons for it. One wonders how this society manifests itself.
The social system has many restrictions on lower caste people. A rule
book of how one should behave has made.

Hence, the castiest mentality and social order there are responsible for
it. All such reasons prevent sujata from expressing his love. Madhuka,
the protagonist of Dhadak, could not express his intense love for
Parthavi Singh Rathore. He toiled to play many tricks in expressing
his passion, There could be many reasons for it. One wonders how
this society manifests itself. The social system has many restrictions
on lower caste people. A rule book of how one should behave has
made. Hence, the cattiest mentality and social order there are
responsible for it. All such reasons prevent Sujata from expressing his
love. The so-called elementals and religious system have put
multitudinous restrictions on women. The society never allows him to
express his love. Towards the fag end of the cinema, they meet each
other. These films can also be true of someone's life based movie, not
merely a melodrama. Hardly any film depicts the first and the last
encounter of the male and female protagonists at once. With the
unsaid feelings of love, he keeps standing and looking at her as she
turns herback towards him.

Characters Life Struggle :

Madhukar lives with his family in Udaipur. It is a real struggle for
life. Sujata The name of the movie is metaphorical and acts as an
objective correlative. A high caste Brahmin household adopts lower
caste orphaned girl, but when a young man from their (Brahmin) caste
wishes to Marry her without knowing her lineage, caste differences
ignites up again. a young man Adheer, comes to the Chowdhary
family with a view to marry. He meets Sujata and falls in love with
her. When Adheer informs his aunt about his decision, she is aghast,

393
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

as her was aware of the fact Sujata is not only of a lower caste but
also an untouchable, and Adheer’s aunt have hidden intentions of
wants Adheer to get married to Rama. Charu wants Sujata to leave
the house at earliest. In this way, one can see the characters in both
the movies struggling to survive.

Difference between Parthavi Singh and Sujata:

This study has Analysed factors such as location, characters after a
long years, work structure of the protagonists the unconditional help
offered to the female protagonists by the male protagonists. That is
because both films have little differences. There are no differences in
terms of language, religion and culture. Parthavi Singh (Jhanvi
kapoor) and Sujata (Nutan) in main role, here jhanvi kapoor is a bold
alive girl she had money and name, sujata is a homely girl who likes
to give her right to others. But after 30 years Indian culture and
society had not change. After years nevertheless, the struggle for life
is the same. Indian society is facing same issue therefore both the
stories are akin to each other.

Location :
The background of both films is varied. Stories have taken shape in
different conditions. Dhadak is the story from Udaipur city of middle
class family, where as fil ‘Sujata’ is a story of high caste Brahmin
household, who adopts an orphaned lower caste girl. This story
reveals the real picture of Indian rural life. From the moment they see
each other, Madhukar and Parthavi feel something familiar & pure
between them, but unfortunately as their love blossomed, so did their
problems too. They were torn between society and their families and
their fate became uncertain. "Dhadak" is a stury based on simple &
passionate first love. Madhukar is charmed by the beauty of higher-
class girl Parthavi & fall in love even after being aware of the fact &
their caste discrimination. When Ratan Singh father of Parthavi Singh
(girl) learns about their love he utilizes his political prowess &
Madhukar is arrested and beaten. To save Madhukar from Ratan
singh’s power, Parthavi absconds with Madhukar to new city to start a
new life. And other side, Thislove and feeling of help are beyond the
caste and religious limits.

Resemblances and Differences in the Imagery of the Films

Similarities:
The human was used to produce strange sounds to express
themselves. Through this symbolic language, many languages come
to being among many troops of human beings. Ancient men started to

394
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

express themselves through painting and sculpturing. Gradually, man

developed himself by using natural resources. In addition to it, he
began to carve his feelings on stones in the form of lines and color
them. Gradually, the arts discovered by the modern man. Before that,
a man found painting, sculpting, languages, literature, music, and
dance. It assumed that the arts come together to give birth to the
cinema. Filmmaking is the art of all techniques. Stories of dhadkan
and sujata are similar to each other, bother are love stories. It is clear
that if the story and screenplay of the match are identical to each
other, the imagery has to have similarities. A film is, in essence, the
medium of the director. So, each director may have different styles
and perspectives. Also, the form of the narrating story is going to be
changed. Accordingly, the audience responds to it, their job is address
the issue to society to the fore. Cinema is a way of showing the world
from the perspective of the director; Similarly, it helps people
socialize better. It connects people. Thus it inspires other people too
to broaden their thinking and imagination. Most importantly, brings to
us different cultures of the world. The as a medium is that whatever
region, language, attire, ancestry, country, religion, and lifestyles
depicted, the emotions are going to be completely universal. This very
attribute of the film as the art makes it universal .In movie Dhadak
Madhukar, girl he is fascinated with, which entails crossing rigid
caste barriers. This village romance between the young Dalit boy, and
the girl from a dominant caste, intersects with the reality of the
struggle to survive in abject poverty. Sujata in film Sujata has a
socially, financially, politically backward. Bothe film directors, while
making the story with such a rare theme, has revealed the story
outstandingly and has used compelling imagery. He has not
showcased castes merely as castes but, with the help of the
description used, presented them as they are , has taken film quite a
few notches higher and has precisely put the finger on how the Indian
society has not only divided human beings among castes but also how
it discriminates animals and birds based on man’s caste. Also has
pointed a finger on the pragmatism of the Indian social system and
effectively used this powerful imagery. The theme of both movies is
similar, though the social, economic, and political circumstances in
India are different; the film arouses some universal feelings in the
mind of the audience. Films say that after years, today there is a cast
system in India. The representation of marginalization is not new in
the Indian cinema. There are ample amount of films which have
showcased the issues of marginalized sections like the disabled,
migrant labor, Dalits and scheduled tribes. As per these three points,
imagery, content, and theme, both the movies have comparatively

395
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

analyzed. It has found that there are more similarities than

differences. The rich imagery, theme, and content in both movies
resemble each other. Story depicts the reality of a love story caught in
the throes 8 of the caste system and poverty. The theme has been
directly broaching using the quintessential colloquial language
without resorting to melodrama, crude scenes, and unnatural
dialogues. The stories, content, and subject of both the cinemas are
similar to a large extent. Through their cinematic Aesthetic, socio-
cultural exploitations are akin to each Other.

Conclusion:
Marginalization, a fluid concept, challenges status understanding and
representations of individuals throughout the world. In a world where
the master narrative predominates, individuals are systematically
excluded based on a characteristic or characteristics they disrupt a
specified system of cultural norms. In relation to the global media,
marginalized voices represent group that have self contained cultural
norms and rules that differ from mainstream norms and rules. Same as
the representation of marginalization is not new in Indian cinema.
Many films have been made on the truth of cast. There are ample of
films which have showcased the issues of marginalized sections like
the disabled, migrant, Dalits and scheduled tribes. In this context
Biswal (2017 & 2019) asserts that films have under represented and
misrepresented the issues of the disabled in India . In a similar line
Kusuma (2018) explores that the tole of female character is
negotiating in cinema as women marginalized in real life. The stories
of both the Indian film Sujata and Dhadak film are rich in content.
The richness of the material and story further enrich the movie. The
audience helps the directors ideas reach the audience either directly or
indirectly. The audience becomes one with the film. The protagonist
of Madhukar Bhagla, is a young student studying in college . He is
the story of a sharp revolt against cast discrimination from entirely
unexpected quarters. An innocent young boy. As well as the support
actors, are all amateurs. The story focuses on a romance amidst caste
based discrimination. He leads his teenager to the fullest. The
circumstances in which he has brought up are certainly going to
fullest. The circumstances in which he has brought up are certainly
going to affect his life. In a way the social and religious system there
restricts him. Due to it. The cannot enter the Brahmins house. They
cannot mingle with each other. Throughout the movie Parthavi Singh
and Adheer never troubles other and takes revenge on others.
However when it comes to Madhukars and Sujatas life they protests
and support each others.Madhukars father, has throughout his life

396
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

worked in the village. Slavery is ingrained in him so strongly that he

worked as a salve willingly now .We come to know that it has been
like this for years. The oppressed have no dreams, aspirations, rights
or life but to serve the upper class. They are indeed not supposed to
expect any returns. That clearly showed in the movie.We come to
know that it has been like this for years. The oppressed have no
dreams. Aspiration, rights or life but to serve the upper class. They
are indeed n6t supposed to expect any returns. That clearly showed in
the movie. Even the upper children call elders in the lower caste
disrespectfully on contrary to which the elder in the lower class have
to treat the upper class children respectfully. The Sujata grow up with
her sister for which the sky is open. He has to study he has freedom to
move around , While Sujata does not understand this distinction and
is not able to even express love due to social restrictions. This
emotional upheaval creates confusion in his life, societal pressure has
made him suppress his feeling.

The audience too realizes that Adheer now can face all problem for it.
The religious system in India threatens the pure feeling of people due
to religious restriction and social obligations. It leads to agony and
plight. Suppression, oppression discrimination and exploitation , and
extreme religious rituals prevent people from their fundamental
rights. Both these movies reveal the same and resemble each other in
theme, content and story. On the social, religious and cultural front,
both these movies are different Characters life, problem, miseries,
sensation and felling are the same. It is a university acknowledged
truth whatever the place is values, principles, ethics, opinions are
universal and wills, aspirations, ambitions and dreams are perpetual.
They are the same in both movies. The only desire of the characters in
Sujata and Dhadak. Movies is to be able to receive equal treatment
from society. Through the use of brilliant and subtle cinematic
devices. Generates a deep sense of emotion and intimacy without ever
showing any physical contact between the two and without ever
violating either the characters or the viewer’s modesty. They have to
tolerate the foolish restrictions created by society and have to go
through the impediments and hindrances. The director has thrown
light on it very impressively.The researcher has done in-depth
research taking 11 the likeliness and contrast between both the movies
into consideration. As per these three point imagery, content and
theme, both the movies have comparatively analyzed. It has found
that there are more similarities than differences. The rich imagery,
theme and content in both movies resemble each other. The theme has
been directly broaching using the quintes sential colloquial language

397
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

without resorting to melodrama, crude scenes, and unnatural

dialogues. The stories content and subject of both the cinemas Sujata
and Dhadak are similar to a large extent. Through their cinematic
Aesthetic, socio cultural exploitations are akin to each other .

References:
1. https://thedailyeye.info › true-review › dhadak-a-simple.
2. www.festival-cannes.com. 1Retrieved on 19th February 2009.
3. 7th National Film Awards( PDF), Directorate of Film Festivals.
Retrieved On 4th September 2011.
4. DHADAK 2 Source : www.bbfc.co.uk.
5. Box Office: Worldwide Collection and Day wise breakup of
Dhadak. Sources: Bollywood Hungama, 4th June 2019.
6. “Karan Johar unveils poster of Janhvi Kapoor's debut film
Dhadak opposite Ishaan Khatter : SEE". Sources: India Today,
15th November 2017.
7. "In Middle East - No early release of Dhadak ". Source : Times
Now. 6th July 2018.
8. "Tripping on Dhadak's title track? Let these covers help you trip a
li'l more". Source : T2Online. 30th June 2018.
9. MMA Mirchi Music Awards". MMA Mirchi Music Awards.
Retrieved 20 February 2019.
10. “JINHEN NAAZ HAI HIND PAR” : The Historical And Societal
Commentary Of Indian film.

Irfana Fatima
Research Scholar, Mass Communication & Journalism, S.R.T.M.U,
Nanded

398
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 33

UNVEILING PERSPECTIVES: EXPLORING

FEMINISM AND WOMEN’s EDUCATION IN
DEEP BRITISH LITERATURE

Dr. Farhat P. Durrani and Shaikh Zeba Farheen

Abstract:
This exploration delves into the nuanced depiction of feminism and
women's education within the folds of authentic British literature.
Tracing a historical trajectory from the 18th to the early 20th century,
the narrative unfolds through the works of seminal authors such as
Mary Wollstonecraft, Jane Austen, Elizabeth Gaskell, Charlotte
Brontë, and Virginia Woolf. This journey scrutinizes the societal
constraints and cultural expectations that women faced, juxtaposed
against their relentless pursuit of knowledge and autonomy. As we
navigate the literary landscapes, we encounter characters and
narratives that challenge the status quo, echoing the broader socio-
cultural shifts of their respective eras. This exploration invites readers
to engage with the authenticity of British literature, where the written
word becomes a powerful vehicle for unscrambling the complexities
of feminism and the transformative potential of women's education.

399
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Key words: Achievement, Scrutinizes, Prerequisites, Expectation,

Unveiling and Tradition.

Introduction:
n the vast realm of British literature, a profound
exploration of feminism and women's education weaves a
rich tapestry that reflects the evolving socio-cultural
landscape. British literature, spanning centuries and
encompassing various genres, has been a mirror to the struggles and
triumphs of women in their pursuit of equality and education.

Feminism in British Literature:

The roots of feminist thought in British literature can be traced back
to the early works of writers who dared to question the prevailing
norms and advocate for women's rights. From Mary Wollstonecraft's
pioneering "A Vindication of the Rights of Woman" in the late 18th
century to the Brontë sisters' exploration of female autonomy in the
19th century, the literary landscape has been marked by voices
challenging the patriarchal constructs that limited women's roles and
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.33
opportunities.

In the works of Jane Austen, the intricacies of gender roles are subtly
dissected, exposing the limitations imposed on women's choices and
independence. "Pride and Prejudice" and "Emma" offer glimpses into
a society where marriage often served as the sole avenue for social
mobility, emphasizing the need for women's agency beyond
traditional roles.

Women's Education in British Literature:

Parallel to the feminist movement, British literature has also
chronicled the evolution of women's education. Charlotte Brontë's
"Jane Eyre" serves as a striking example, depicting the protagonist's
journey from an orphan with limited prospects to an independent
woman through the pursuit of education. The novel challenges the
notion that women's intellectual development should be secondary to
domestic roles.

In the late 19th and early 20th centuries, the suffrage movement found
echoes in literature. Virginia Woolf, in "A Room of One's Own,"
passionately argues for the importance of economic independence and
access to education as prerequisites for women's artistic and
intellectual achievements. The novel's exploration of the fictional

400
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

"Shakespeare's sister" poignantly illustrates the consequences of a

lack of educational opportunities for women.

This introduction aims to unravel the threads of feminism and

women's education as depicted in the works of some seminal British
authors: Jane Austen, an illustrious figure in English literature,
remains celebrated for her keen observations of social manners,
insightful characterizations, and sharp wit. Born on December 16,
1775, in Steventon, Hampshire, Austen crafted novels that have
withstood the test of time, offering readers a window into the genteel
society of late 18th and early 19th century England. Despite her
relatively short life, Austen's legacy endures through her six major
novels, each a masterpiece of wit and irony.

Austen's writing, firmly rooted in the realism of her time, explores the
intricacies of social hierarchies, courtship rituals, and the limitations
imposed on women. With a sharp eye for satire and a gift for
rendering even the most ordinary moments with literary finesse,
Austen creates novels that are both entertaining and socially incisive.

The six novels that form the core of Jane Austen's literary legacy are
"Sense and Sensibility," "Pride and Prejudice," "Mansfield Park,"
"Emma," "Northanger Abbey," and "Persuasion." Through these
works, she perfected the art of the novel of manners, a genre that
investigates the intricacies of societal norms and human behavior. The
novel we are analyzing is Pride and Prejudice.

"Pride and Prejudice" by Jane Austen, published in 1813, offers a

nuanced exploration of societal norms and expectations, and it subtly
addresses feminist themes within the context of the early 19th
century. While the term "feminism" as we understand it today did not
exist during Austen's time, her work contains elements that resonate
with feminist perspectives.The novel explores the complexities of
love and social expectations, featuring the indomitable Elizabeth
Bennet and the enigmatic Mr. Darcy. Austen's narrative brilliance lies
in her ability to intertwine social commentary with a compelling love
story, creating characters that transcend their temporal origins.

Through characters like Lady Catherine de Bourgh and Mrs. Bennet,

Austen satirizes the limitations placed on women by societal
expectations. Lady Catherine embodies the rigid expectations of the
upper class, while Mrs. Bennet represents the pressure on women to
secure advantageous marriages for their daughters. These characters

401
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

serve as a critique of the societal structures that limit women's

choices. Charlotte’s Choice may seem a concession to societal
expectations, it also serves as a commentary on the economic
dependence of women during that era. Elizabeth outspoken nature and
refusal to conform to societal expectations mark her as a proto-
feminist character. Her journey involves self- discovery and rejection
of societal constraints. The characters and narrative in the novel
contribute to a broader conversation about the agency and autonomy
of women, making it a timeless work that continues to resonate with
readers exploring feminist themes. The novel indirectly suggests the
importance of a well-rounded education and moral guidance for
young women to navigate the complexities of society.

Emily Bronte feminist writer who wrote Wuthering heights and many
more novel on a life of female. Emily Bronte was born on July 30,
1818, in Thornton, West Yorkshire, England, is renowned for her
singular contribution to English literature through her only novel,
“Wuthering Height.” The themes which focus on Independence
Isolation and Gender.

The story narrated by Mr. Lockwood, a tenant at Thrushcross Grange,

who becomes intrigued by the mysterious history of landlord,
Heathcliff, a brooding and enigmatic figure, was raised at wuthering
height, a gloomy estate and his life becomes entangled with the
Earnshaw and Linton families. The narrative unfolds through multiple
generations, revealing themes revenge, social class, and the haunting
effects of unresolved love.

Many characters from this novel lack education. The novel suggests
that nature itself as a powerful educator it often a privilege associated
with social status. Catherine rejects societal expectations in pursuit of
her own desires. She has a feminism spirit in her defiance of social
norm.

The female characters often exist in liminal spaces, challenging

conventional expectations. The boundary-defying nature of
catherine’s love and the eerie, ghostly presence of her spirit after
death contribute to a feminist exploration of the constraint placed on
women’s lives. While “Wuthering Heights” may not explicitly
articulate feminist or educational ideologies, its exploration of
characters and societal dynamics provides a rich backdrop for
discussing themes related to gender roles, education, and the impact
of societal expectations on individual lives.

402
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Conclusion:
The exploration of feminism and women's education in deep British
literature is a captivating journey through the annals of time, offering
insights into the struggles and triumphs of women as they navigate
societal expectations. As we delve into the works of these literary
giants, we uncover not only the historical context but also timeless
reflections on the ongoing quest for gender equality and the
empowerment of women through education. This journey invites
readers to engage with the diverse voices that have shaped and
continue to shape the narrative of feminism in British literature.

References
1. British Literature !640-1789 An Anthology Fourth edition, Edited
by Robert Demaria, JR. published 2016 John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
2. Editor’s Preface to the second Edition of Wuthering Heights, by
Charlotte Bronte, 1850
3. Emily Bronte” Biography. Retrieved 2 February 2018.
4. “Jane Austin’s juvenilia.” British Library Retrieved 26 august
2020.
5. Koppel, gene (2 November 1989). “Pride and Prejudice:
Conservative or Liberal Novel- or Both? (A Gadamerian
Approach)”. Retrieved 25 October 2016.
6. Wuthering Heights, Mobi Classics (2009).
7. www.wikipidea.com
8. www.Britaanica.com

Dr. Farhat P. Durrani

Ph.D. Guide, Prof. and Head,
Dept. of English, Sir Sayyed College, Aurangabad

Shaikh Zeba Farheen

Research student of Maulana Azad College of Arts, Science and
Commerce, Aurangabad

403
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 34

A MINI REVIEW: CONVENTIONAL VS. GREEN

SYNTHESIS OF SUBSTITUTED OF 1, 5
BENZODIAZEPINES

Shaikh Abdul Baseer

Abstract:
Benzodiazepines are interesting compounds because they belong to an
important class of the pharmacologically preeminent. 1, 5-
benzodiazepines which have been extensively used as anticonvulsant,
anti anxiety, analgesic, sedative, anti depressive, hypnotic and anti-
inflammatory agents Due to their wide range of pharmacological
activity, synthetic and industrial applications, the synthesis of these
compounds has recently received a great deal of attention for the
discovery of improved protocols towards milder and high yielding
approaches in this mini review we took Conventional vs. Green
Synthesis of Substituted of 1, 5 Benzodiazepines.

Key words: Polyethylene glycol PEG-400, Conventional vs. Green

Synthesis, 1, 5 Benzodiazepines

404
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Introduction:
eterocyclic compounds are often considered privileged
structure in medicinal chemistry due to their biological
effects. Benzodiazepines are the important class of
compounds used as a drug having effect on central
nervous system for examples clozapine, olanzapine and quetiapine are
used in the clinic for treating schizophrenia while clonazepam,
diazepam, lorazepam, nitrazepam and oxazepam are used as
antianxiety drugs. Benzodiazepines are interesting compounds
because they belong to an important class of the pharmacologically
preeminent1, 5-benzodiazepines which have been extensively used as
anticonvulsant, antianxiety, analgesic, sedative, anti depressive,
hypnotic and anti-inflammatory agents1–4.Due to their wide range of
pharmacological activity, synthetic and industrial applications, the
synthesis of these compounds has recently received a great deal of
attention for the discovery of improved protocols towards milder and
high yielding approaches. Benzodiazepines are also valuable
intermediates for synthesis of fused ring compounds such as triazolo,
oxadiazolo-, oxazino-, and furano-benzodiazepines and some
benzodiazepines act as anti-HIV 5–7. In general 1,5-benzodiazepines
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.34
are synthesized by the condensation reaction of o-phenylenediamines
with α, β-unsaturated compounds8, β-haloketones 9, and
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.35
ketones10 .Majid M. Heravi11 et al has been reported the 2, 3-Dihydro-
1H-1, 5-benzodiazepines are synthesized by the condensation of o-
phenylendiamine and various ketones in the presence of Fe (ClO 4)3.
Majid M. Heravi12 et al has been reported the 2, 3-Dihydro-1H-1,5-
benzodiazepines are synthesized by the condensation of o-
phenylenediamine and various ketones in the presence of Preyssler
heteropolyacid as a recyclable catalyst in refluxing ethanol. Susana
Herrero13 et al has been reported the stereo controlled synthesis of
phenylalanine and tryptophan derived 5-oxo-1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydro-5H-
1, 4-benzodiazepine derivatives is described. B.P. Bandgar 14 et al has
been reported the efficient synthesis of 1,5-benzodiazepines from o-
phenylenediamine and ketones under solvent-free conditions in the
presence of a catalytic amount of HBF 4–SiO2. Biswanath Das15 et al
has been reported the efficient solvent-free synthesis of 1,5-
benzodiazepines by condensation of o-phenylenediamine with
ketones in the presence of catalytic amount of (bromodimethyl)
sulfonium bromide has been accomplished. Mahmood Tajbakhsh 16 et
al has been reported the 1,5-benzodiazepines synthesized from the
reaction of o-phenylenediamine and ketones in the presence of
heterogeneous catalysis of synthetic and natural zeolites under mild
conditions in very good yields. K. Saini 17et al reported the efficient

405
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

and convenient synthesis 1, 5-benzodiazepines from chalcones by the

action of o-amino thiophenol and o-phenylenediamine in the presence
of inorganic support is reported and also newly synthesized
compounds were screened for their antibacterial activity against β-
subtilis, E-coli, and S. typhis. Mitsuo Kodomari18 et al reported the 1,
5-benzodiazepines have been synthesized in solvent-free conditions
from chalcones and o-phenylenediamine in the presence of inorganic
support in that whereas alumina was effective for the synthesis of 1,5-
benzodiazepines. Rahim Hekmatshoar19 et al an efficient protocol
associated with readily available starting materials, mild conditions,
excellent yields, and a broad range of the products in synthetic
chemistry was established for synthesis of 1,5-benzodiazepine
derivatives in the presence of a catalytic amount of nanocrystalline
aluminum oxide in water. Beregama 20 et al. have prepared 3-alkoxy-
(substituted aryl)-biguanidino-4-methyl-2, 3-dihydro-1H-1,5-
benzodiazepine-2-ones and reported as reverse transcriptase
inhibitors. Herpin21 et al have made solid phase synthesis of 10, 000
member combinatorial library of 1, 5-benzodiazepine-2-ones
derivatives. Rubin22 et al have studied the synthesis and psychotropic
activity of 1, 5-benzodiazepines. S. E. Hazai 23 et al have studied X-
ray crystallographic study of the 1-(3-chloro-4-methyl)-5-methyl thio-
3a-dihydro-4H-[1, 2, 4]-oxadiazolo-[5,4-d] [1,5] benzodiazepine.
Pasha24 et al. have synthesized 2,3-dihydro-1H-1,5-benzodiazepines
by the condensation of o-phenylenediamine with ketones in the
presence of Zinc acetate (dehydrated) as catalyst at 80-85 0 C.
Rodriguez25 et al have synthesized some light sensitive 2-nitro
phenyl-2,3-dihydro-1H-1,5-benzodiazepines in good yields by
reacting acetophenone derivatives with 1,2-diamine (2:1) in acidic
medium. G. Roman30 et al. have prepared several 2, 3-dihydro-1, 5-
benzodiazepines via cyclocondenasation of the corresponding o-
phenylenediamine with 3-dialkyaminopropiophenone hydrochloride
in ethanol in the presence of anhydrous sodium acetate. Various 1, 5-
benzodiazepine derivatives31 were efficiently synthesized in excellent
yields using catalytic amounts of NBS (10%) by the condensation of
several aromatic as well as aliphatic ketones with substituted o-
phenylenediamines.

406
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

1,5-benzodiazepine derivatives32 in excellent yields were synthesized

at room temperature by one-pot reaction of o-phenylenediamines with
acetone in the presence of catalytic amounts of different organic
acids under solvent free conditions. M. M. Heravi 33 et al. have
synthesized different 1, 5-benzodiazepines using ferric perchlorate as
a catalyst in solvent less condition.

P. Minothora34 et al. have also synthesized 2,3-dihydro-1H-1,5-

benzodiazepines by the reaction of o-phenylenediamine and ketones
in the presence of catalytic amount of acetic acid under solvent free
condition in microwave irradiation.

R. Kusanur35 et al. have reported 3-acetyl coumarin when allowed to

react with isatin gave the corresponding 3-{3’-hydroxy-2’-oxo-
indolo) acetyl coumarins, which on dehydration afforded the
corresponding α, β-unsaturated carbonyl compounds.
Cyclocondensation of these ketones with o-phenylenediamines
resulted novel 3-coumaryl spiro [indolo-1, 5-benzodiazepines].
Further, the products were screened for their antimicrobial activity
and antianxiety activity in mice.

407
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Pasha36 et al. have synthesized 2,3-dihydro-1H-1,5-benzodiazepines

by the condensation of o-phenylenediamine with ketones in the
presence of Zinc acetate (dehydrated) as catalyst at 80-85 C.
Rodriguez37 et al. have synthesized some light sensitive 2-nitro
phenyl-2,3-dihydro-1H-1,5-benzodiazepines in good yields by
reacting acetophenone derivatives with 1,2-diamine (2:1) in acidic
medium. R. L. Clark38 et al. have identified the benzodiazepines as a
structural class for antileishmanial hit optimization, and demonstrated
that their in vitro activity is comparable with the clinically used drug,
sodium stibogluconate, and that the compounds are not toxic to
macrophages.

Pasha39 et al. have synthesized 2,3-dihydro-1H-1,5-benzodiazepines

by the condensation of o-phenylenediamine with cyclic/acyclic
ketones in the presence of P-toulene sulphonic acid (P-TSA) and the
reaction goes to complete within 10-20 minutes. 2-(2-
hydroxyphenyl)-4-(2-thienyl)-1, 5-benzodiazepines were prepared by
Kulkarni40 et al. They observed to have considerable hyperglycemic
actions on rats. Pathak41 et al. have been prepared some 2-alkyl-4-
alkyl/aryl-3-arylazo-(1H)-1, 5-benzodiazepines and reported
antibacterial and antifungal activities.

408
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Methods of synthesis of 1, 5-benzodiazepines:

Method-A: From α, β-unsaturated carbonyl compounds.
1-Butylpyridinium hydrogen sulphate ([BPy]HSO 4), an acidic room-
temperature ionic liquid, as a novel and efficient catalyst, was
synthesized and used in the preparation of as series of 1, 5-
benzodiazepine derivatives by the reaction of o-phenylenediamine
with chalcones under mild condition.

The use of antimony (III) chloride adsorbed on neutral alumina as an

efficient catalyst for the one-pot synthesis of benzo[b]1,4-diazepines
(83–94%) under solvent-free conditions. The process is easy,
efficient, ecofriendly, and economical benefit.

Method-B: From ketones.

Various 1, 5-benzodiazepines have been synthesized in water by the
reaction of 1, 2-diamine and ketones using a catalytic amount of
indium chloride at room temperature. This synthetic protocol is
nontoxic, safe, and environmentally benign.

L. T. An et al. 2, 3-dihydro-1H-1, 5-benzodiazepines have been

synthesized under solvent free condition in good yields from o-
phenylenediamine and ketones catalyzed by montmorillonite K10.
This reaction has advantages of mild reaction condition and simple
operation.

409
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Method-C: From ortho-nitro anilines.

M. Yongmin et al. 2, 3-dihydro-1H-1, 5-benzodiazepines have been
prepared in good yields by the reaction of ortho-nitro anilines with
chalcones (α, β-unsaturated carbonyl compounds) induced by the
TiCl4-Sm-THF system under mild reaction condition.

Method-D: From ethylacetoacetate and aldehyde.

M. Kidwai et al. a convenient, solvent free, under microwave
irradiation is described for the synthesis of novel 1, 5-
benzodiazepines by the one-pot reaction of ethylacetoacetate,
aldehyde and o-phenylenediamine without any catalyst at P H 7.

In continuation of our work on the synthesis of some new bioactive

heterocyclic compounds herein we report new series of 1, 5-
benzodiazepines by the condensation of chalcones with o-
phenylenediamine using piperidine in polyethylene glycol (PEG-400)
as a solvent .The starting chalcone is used by reported method [28]
Initially, we attempted the condensation of 5-chloro-2-
hydroxyphenyl-3(5-chloro-3-methyl-1-phenyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)prop-
2-en-1-one (1a) with o-phenylenediamine using piperidine in
polyethylene glycol (PEG-400) as reaction solvent. The reaction went
to completion within 55 minutes and corresponding product was
obtained in 92% yield.

410
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

In order to optimize the reaction conditions, we carried out the above

reaction in different solvents such as ethanol, tetrahydrofuran,
dioxane, acetonitrile and polyethylene glycol-400. We found that
polyethylene glycol-400 as an efficient reaction medium interms of
reaction time as well as yields (92%). Encouraged by the results, we
turned our attention to variety of substituted chalcones. In all cases,
the reaction proceeded efficiently in high yields at 60 °C using PEG-
400 as an alternative reaction solvent. These newly synthesized
compounds were screened for their antimicrobial activity. One of the
key areas of green chemistry is the replacement of the hazardous
solvent as with environmentally benign solvents like polyethylene
glycol (PEG-400). In resent years polyethylene glycol (PEG-400)
attracted the much more attention recently, liquid polymers or low
melting polymers have emerged as alternative green reaction media
with unique properties such as thermal stability, commercial
availability, non-volatility, immiscibility with a number of organic
solvents and recyclability. PEGs are preferred over other polymers
because they are inexpensive, completely non-halogenated, easily
degradable and of low toxicity Many organic reactions have been
carried out using PEGs as solvent or co-solvent such as Heck
reaction, asymmetric dihydroxylation, Suzuki cross-coupling reaction,
oxydehydrogenation of alcohols and cyclic dienes, oxidation of
sulfides and the Wacker reaction and partial reduction reaction of
alkynes The use of PEG as a recyclable solvent system for the metal

411
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

mediated radical polymerization of methyl methacrylate and styrene

has also been reported the conventional condensation method of
chalcones with o-phenylenediamine using few drops of piperidine
PEG-400 as reaction solvent at mild reaction condition. This method
has following merits.
I] Reaction is efficient and facile
II] It gives excellent yields of products.
III] Work up procedure and isolation is easier.
IV] Procedure is green and environmentally benign methodology.
V] Shorter reaction time.

References
1. J. Krapcho, F.C. Turk, J. Med. Chem. 9,191–195, 1966.
2. L.H. Sternback, Angew. Chem., Int. Ed. Engl. 10, 34–43, 1971.
3. L.O. Randall, B. Kappel, in: S. Garattini, E. Mussini, L.O.
Randall (Eds.), Benzodiazepines, Raven Press, New York, pp.
27–51, 1973. H. Schutz, Benzodiazepines, Springer, Heidelberg,
1982.
4. M. Essaber, A. Baouid, A. Hasnaoui, A. Benharref, J.P.
Lavergne, Synth. Commun. 28, 4097, 1998.
5. A.M. El-Sayed, H. Abdel-Ghany, A.M.M. El-Saghier, Synth.
Commun. 29 3561, 1999.
6. M. Di. Braccio, G. C. Grossi, G. Roma, L. Vargiu, M. Mura, M.
E. Marongiu, Eur. J. Med. Chem., 36, 635, 2001.
7. K.V.V. Reddy, P.S. Rao, D. Ashok, Synth. Commun. 30, 1825,
2000.
8. N. Kakyanam, S.G. Manyunatha, Heterocycles 32, 113, 1991
9. W. Ried, E. Torinus, Chem. Ber. 90, 815, 1957.
10. J.A. Herbert, H. Suschitzky, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin I 2657, 1974.
11. Majid M. Heravi Vahideh Zadsirjan Farahnaz K. Behbahani,
Hossien A. Oskooie Journal of Molecular Catalysis A: Chemical
259, 201–204, 2006.
12. Majid M. Heravi, Fatemeh Derikvand, Leila Ranjbar, Fatemeh F.
Bamoharram Journal of Molecular Catalysis A: Chemical
261,156–159, 2007
13. Susana Herrero, M. Teresa Garcı pez, Edurne Cenarruzabeitia,
Joaquı Del Rıoband Rosario Herranz Tetrahedron 59, 4491–4499,
2003.
14. B.P. Bandgar, Abasaheb V. Patil, O.S. Chavan Journal of
Molecular Catalysis A: Chemical 256, 99–105, 2006.
15. Biswanath Das, R. Ramu, B. Ravikanth, V. Saidi Reddy Journal
of Molecular Catalysis A: Chemical 246 76–78, 2006.

412
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

16. Mahmood Tajbakhsh, Majid M. Heravi, Bagher Mohajerani,

Amir N. Ahmadi
Journal of Molecular Catalysis A: Chemical 247, 213–215, 2006.
17. R. K. Saini, Y. C. Joshi, and P. Joshi Phosphorus, Sulfur, and
Silicon, 183, 2181–2190, 2008.
19. Mitsuo Kodomari, Tomohiro Noguchi, and Tadashi Aoyama
Synthetic Communications, 34, 1783 -1790, 2010.
20. Rahim Hekmatshoar, Sodeh Sadjadi, Soudeh Shiri, Majid M.
Heravi, and Yahya S. Behesh Synthetic Communications1, 39,
2549–2559, 2009.
21. L. K. Beragama, B. Singh, G. L. Talesara, Heterocyclic Commun.
8, 607, 2002.
22. T. F. Herpin, K. G. Vankirk, J. M. Salvino, T. Yu, R. F.
Labandiniere, J. Comb. Chem., 2, 513, 2000.
23. M. A. Rubin, C. A. Albach, D. B. Berlese, H. G. Bonacorso, S. R.
T. Bittencourt, C. M. T. Queiroz, M. E. Maizner, Braz. J. Med.
Biol. Res., 33, 1069, 2000.
24. S. E. Hazari, A. Baouid, A. Hasanaoui, M. Pierrot, Acta. Cryst,
548, 2000
25. M. A. Pasha, V. P. Jayashankar, Ind. J. Het. Chem., 15, 397,
2006.
30. G. Roman, E. Comanita, B. Comanita, Acta Chin. Slov., 49, 575,
2002.
31 C. W. Kuo, S. V. More, C. F. Yao, Tetrahedron Lett., 47, 8523,
2006.
32. H. Thakuria, A. Pramanik, B. M. Borah, G. Das, Terahedron
Lett., 47, 3135, 2006.
33. M. M. Heravi, F. K. Bebahani, J. Iran. Chem. Soc., 4, 375, 2007.
34. P. Minothora, J. S. Stephanatou, C. A. Tsoleridis, Tetrahedron
Lett., 43, 1755, 2002.
35. R. A. Kusanur, M. Ghate, M. V. Kulkarni, J. Chem. Sci., 116,
265, 2004.
36. M. A. Pasha, V. P. Jayashankar, Ind. J. Het. Chem., 15, 397,
2006.
37. R. Rodriuez, B. Insuasty, R. Abonia, J. Quiroga, ARKIVOC, xiii,
67, 2004.
38. R. L. Clark, K. C. Carter, A. B. Mullen, G. D. Coxon, G. O.
Dapaah, E. Mc Farlane, M. D. Duong, M. H. Grant, J. N. A.
Tettey, S. P. Mackey, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 17, 624, 2007.
39. M. A. Pasha, V. P. Jayashankar, J. Pharmacol. Toxicol., 1, 573,
2006.
40. S. U. Kulkarni, K. A. Thakur, J. Ind. Chem. Soc., 53, 279, 1976.

413
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Shaikh Abdul Baseer

Assistant Professor, Department of Chemistry, Sir Sayyed College of
Art’s, Commerce and Science Aurangabad

CHAPTER 35

ECONOMIC DIMENSIONS OF RURAL

POVERTY IN INDIA

Dr. Yogesh A. Patil

414
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Abstract:
Every economy is mainly divided between two sectors first, rural
sector &second, urban sector. Expansion of industry & service sector
has been providing substantial employment opportunities to the urban
people & therefore helping the development of urban sector where,
rural development has been a major issue in the process of economic
development. Rural Economy in India is totally based on agriculture
& allied sectors. Agriculture sector inhabitants about 65 percent of
total population & contributes highest number of consumers for all
types of commodities and services produced by manufacturing &
service sector of the country. Accelerating population growth is a
long term contributor to poverty. In addition to, absence of quality
education and good health facilities as well as lack of power etc.
factors have been assisting to rural poverty.

Key words: good educational institutions, health facilities, cleaned

drinking water

Introduction:
very economy is mainly divided between two sectors first,
rural sector &second, urban sector. Expansion of industry
& service sector has been providing substantial
employment opportunities to the urban people & therefore
helping the development of urban sector where, rural development
has been a major issue in the process of economic development.
Father of the nation M. Gandhiji’s approach to India’s development
was holistic & people - cantered which leads to rural development.
According to Gandhiji, real India is found in its cities, but in its
villages. But unfortunately, still his thoughts about rural development
have been neglected by Indian politicians. After 75 years of
independence the situations of infrastructure, education, health,
transportation facilities in rural sector is worst as compare to the
situation in the urban sector or metropolitan cities. Thus, it can be said
that, the issue of rural development has side-lined in the process of
economic development. Likewise, poverty in rural sector has been a
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.35
major issue before the policy makers. Rural people lacking good
educational institutions, health facilities, cleaned drinking water
which are assisting the poverty in rural.

Objectives:
1. To study the nature of poverty.

415
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2. To analysis the rural poverty in India

3. To overlook the programmes of poverty reduction.

Nature of Poverty:
Rural Economy in India is totally based on agriculture & allied
sectors. Agriculture sector inhabitants about 65 percent of total
population & contributes highest number of consumers for all types of
commodities and services produced by manufacturing & service
sector of the country. Rural economy contributes about 42 percent
workers of total workers in India. Though, the rural economy has
been playing an important role in overall economic growth & also
social growth in India. But, due to the inefficient implementation of
the programmes poverty elimination is still a prior objective of
planning which could not meet even after of 65 years of economic
planning.

Rural Poverty in India

Accelerating population growth is a long term contributor to poverty.
In addition to, absence of quality education and good health facilities
as well as lack of power etc. factors have been assisting to rural
poverty. Most of the people from rural sector depend upon the
agriculture & allied sector. Thus, activities of functioning of rural
economy & process of employment generation in rural sector is
totally associated with agriculture production, irrigation facilities,
credit supply, agriculture processing units as well as proper marketing
of produce etc. things are necessary to generate employment
opportunities. Poverty in rural India is measured directly by applying
the official nutrition norm of 2400 kilocalories per day.

Programmes for poverty reduction

The number of programmes has been started by central, state & local
government to eliminate the rural poverty. Poverty reduction through
employment generation is the strategy behind the implementation of
the programmes because unemployment has close association with
the poverty which brings many other problems in the life people.
Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Guarantee (MNREGA) scheme is a
one of the programmes started by central government in 2005 to
eradicate poverty through employment generation. This programmes
is one of the most popular poverty reduction programme ever in the
country. At present this programme has been provided 40.45 cr. total
employment opportunities in rural India. Most important
characteristic is that MNAREGA has been highly inclusive

416
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

programme that around 50 percent women & about 53 percent

SC/STs are beneficiaries of this programme.

Conclusions:
Though, Indian economy is growing at higher rate in growth, it could
not help for eradication of poverty in expected amount. Especially,
the rural poor are the poor farmers, poor herders and poor fisherman.
In short, they are poor producers: their incomes are gained from their
work. The growth of agriculture sector in India did not bring
significant improvement in the income level of rural people due to the
increase in the prices of fertilizers, seeds & germicides etc. Poverty of
rural area often causes for temporary migration to urban area and
makers presser on the infrastructure facilities in urban. In brief,
poverty elimination process especially in rural sector can be started
with providing good roads i.e. transportation, good education, health
facilities, regular power supply, irrigation, sufficient credit & many
things which are essential.

References
1. Rudra Datt & Sundaram (2022) Indian Economy, S Chand
publication, New Delhi.
2. Dr. Madhav Shinde (2012) Gramin Bharat, Sadhana publications.
3. Dandekar V M & N Rath, poverty in India, Dimension & Trends,
Economic & Political Weekly,
4. Economic Survey (2021-22) Ministry of Finance, Govt. of India.
5. Perspectives on poverty in India, the world bank
6. Reserve bank of India (2022), handbook of Statistics on the
Indian economy, RBI Mumbai.

Dr. Yogesh A. Patil

Asst.Professor, Shri Muktanand College, Gangapur
Mob.9511276342, E-Mail: [email protected]

CHAPTER 36

EXPLORING PLEIOTROPIC EFFECTS OF STATIN

IN WOUND MANAGEMENT

Dr. Rana Zainuddin, Dr. Jaiprakash Sangshetti and Shoeb Rahim

417
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Abstract:
Wounding and bruising may be introduced due to trauma or an
underlying illness. Wound healing consequently is the bodies
responding biological mechanism that the skin goes through as it
repairs damage from the trauma of a wound. Statins are primarily
having lipid-lowering activity but are also grabbing attention as they
show activity other than those for which they were initially used.
They are recently considered a new remedial modality for many
pathological conditions like sepsis, psoriasis, alopecia, anti-
inflammatory, immune-modulatory and healing of wounds. During
the previous years, formulation scientists have put extensive efforts to
develop suitable delivery systems which postulate to deliver
Simvastatin for wound repair and healing. This chapter has been
compiled with the purpose to emphasize the utility of Simvastatin as a
topically applied formulation in skin repair and healing in cases of
wounds caused by different etiology. Processes and techniques of
formulation strategies have been also been discussed. Multiple
formulation strategies have been discussed including nano-
techniques. It further infuses the idea of integrating Simvastatin with
nanocarrier systems to unleash its full potential at the microstructural
level for wound healing.

Key words: Diabetic wound, wound healing, carrier systems, topical

therapy

Introduction:
he stratum corneum layer of human skin plays a great
defensive function, mostly due to which makes the skin
react as a permeable barrier [1] any injury of this layer
through wounds or burns conduct the skin to lose its
defensive function and allows the bacteria present on the skin surface
to attack into the body causing infection. Repairing of a skin wound is
an important step for survival in wound closure and additionally
serves as a physical, chemical and bacterial barrier [2]. Wound
healing is a biological action, which shows hemostatic, inflammation,
proliferation, revascularization and remodeling (Fig 1) [3]. Recently
statins showed varied pleiotropic effects other than for their lipid-
DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.36
lowering activity, and are currently regarded as a novel therapeutic
approach for many pathological conditions like sepsis, psoriasis,
alopecia, anti-inflammatory, immunomodulatory and wound healing
[4]. Statins are anti-hyperlipidemic drugs that are commonly used to

418
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

prevent cardiovascular events in patients [5]. Statins have recently

been proven to be effective in mitigating numerous dermatologic
conditions, including urticaria, psoriasis and acne [6, 7]. Statins have
been reported to be effective in wound healing due to their various
pleiotropic effects, and they can control cellular processes such as
inflammation, apoptosis and proliferation [8].
Fig 1: Skin structure and wound healing process

SIM is a synthetic derivate of a fermentation product of Aspergillus

terreus and is shown to aid in fracture repair and bone tissue
regeneration and its topical administration enhances wound healing in
diabetic mice by increasing angiogenesis and lymph angiogenesis [9].
A growing number of studies are showing that SIM can directly
influence the growth and virulence of bacterial pathogens [10].

Different studies have described the high dispersion of chronic

wounds and have shown impaired wound healing as a common
problem in both community and hospital settings. Defective
production and release of vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF)
at the wound site in diabetes have been defined as a protoplast for
altered angiogenesis and subsequently impaired wound healing. It
was shown that SIM promotes VEGF production and release at the
location of the lesion, this pathway is essential for the formation of
new blood vessels [11]. By creating a favorable environment and
using appropriate wound-dressing materials, the dynamic process of
healing that can be properly regulated. According to reports, the

419
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

global yearly cost of wound care products, including surgical and

chronic wound care, is cost of wound is anticipated to rise from $15
billion in 2022 to $22 billion in 2024 [12].Statins is shown to promote
wound healing in addition to their well-known cholesterol-lowering
benefits. Their significance in cutaneous tissue regeneration can be
ascribed to variety of molecular mechanisms including pro-lymph
angiogenic, pro-angiogenic, anti-inflammatory and regenerative [13].
Wound dressings have been made from natural polymers such as
chitosan, collagen, cellulous, gelatin and hydrogel. Other research
investigations have used synthetic polymers such as polylactic acid,
polyglycolic acid, and mixture of natural and synthetic polymers to
create the perfect wound dressing [14, 15, 16]. However, this research
is still ongoing in order to find the best and most appropriate wound
dressing. For the design and manufacture of biological wound
dressings, novel techniques such as the electro spinning technique are
now being utilized [17].The development of ideal wound healing
biomaterials is aided by the availability of a wide variety of
biomaterials, including natural, semisynthetic and synthetic
biopolymers [18,19, 20]. Fabrication advancements include a greater
understanding of polymer, such as degradation, dynamics and
mechanisms for drug release and wound healing. Fabrication
improvements a better understanding of polymer such as degradation,
dynamics and medication release of mechanisms and wound healing
processes or characterization[21].

Wounds: Types
Wounds differed according to their cause, shape, response to the
medicine and patient history. However, some wounds can pose a
comprehensive healthcare problem like diabetic foot ulcers, venous
leg ulcers and pressure ulcers. They are classified in Fig 2.

420
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Fig 2: Classification of wounds

Acute Wound
The wounds which are caused by environmental factors that require a
traumatic injury are called acute wounds [22]. Acute wounds can heal
completely with minimum scarring within a normal duration of 8-12
weeks [23]. Normally, acute wounds are caused due to mechanical
injuries as a reason of result of external issues like abrasions, cuts,
incisions, frictions, impacts, surgeries, electrical, chemicals, radiation,
and burns [24]. Abrasions are a type of wound when a brutal surface
is rubbed with the skin causing friction, for example, wounded knees
and rope burns. Avulsions are wounds that are caused by a forced
strike on the body or part of the body. Breaking of bones by striking
an instrument like a ball, injuries caused by destruction, animal bites,
and loss of a permanent tooth, nail or earlobe are some examples of
such types of wounds. Cut wounds are a consequence when a person
is struck by a heavy object that crushes a part of their body or when
they are cut by a sharp object. Examples of such types of wounds are
road injuries, surgical injuries and home-based injuries. Lacerations
are also called damaging to body structures. Ulcers or radiation
wounds are caused by the acute or chronic effects of ionizing
radiation on healthy tissues, such as while undergoing radiation
therapy in oncology patients. Such type of injury involves the skin,
concealed soft tissues and even deep structures such as bone [22].

Chronic Wound
In chronic wounds, the wound-healing process is defective diverging
from the subsequent steps of the healing process and not
accommodated by the physiological conditions in an orderly manner
[25].Chronic wounds require 12 weeks to heal due to the slow healing
process [26]. Venous or vascular ulcers are a chronic form of wounds

421
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

occurring in the lower body parts, such as the limbs and account for
more than 70% of chronic wounds. An inflammatory mechanism
involving leukocyte activation, platelet aggregation, endothelial
damage and intracellular edema are the main causes of venous ulcers.
Diabetic wounds or ulcers are other forms of chronic wounds which
are common in hyperglycemia. The mechanism involved in these
wounds is that in a diabetic condition, the immune system is
compromised and neuropathic conditions emerge. Yet another
condition is pressure ulcers, which occur normally in people having
paralytic conditions. As a result of body immobility, in paralysis,
tissues become ischemic as pressure on the tissue becomes greater
than in capillaries, and blood flow gets confined in specific tissues
mostly muscles. Ischemic wounds are another type of chronic wound
caused by the restriction of blood supply to the tissues resulting in the
shortage of oxygen and glucose essential for cellular metabolism [22].
Phases involved in wound healing as discussed below.

Figure 3: Phases of wound healing

Inflammatory phase
The body naturally responds to harm by going through the
inflammatory phase. The blood arteries in the wound bed constrict
after the initial injuring, and a clot develops. It results in achieving
haemostasis, due to which blood vessels dilates allow antibodies,
white blood cells, growth factors, enzymes and nutrients, to heal the
wound. As a result, fluid level increase, which involves the
monitoring of the surrounding skin for signs of maceration. The

422
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

typical symptoms of inflammation including, erythema, heat, edema,

discomfort, and functional disruption are visible at this stage.

Proliferation phase
Angiogenesis is the process by which a new network of blood vessels
forms within the newly formed granulation tissue is comprised of
collagen and extracellular matrix during proliferation. The fibroblast
must receive enough oxygen and nutrients from the blood vessels to
maintain healthy granulation tissue. Granular and irregular in texture,
healthy granulation tissue is pink or red in color and does not bleed
easily. A good measure of how a wound is healing is the color and
state of the granulation tissue

Maturation phase
Once the wound has healed, the maturation process begins. During
this time, type III collagen is converted to type I collagen. As cellular
activity decreases, blood vessels in the affected area decrease and
become thinner [27].

Statins as wound healing agents

Statins are one of the first-line class of cholesterol-lowering drugs
[28]. Types of statins include Lovastatin, Mevastatin, SIM,
Pravastatin, Atorvastatin, Fluvastatin, Pitavastatin and Rosuvastatin
(Fig 4). The statins differ in their pharmacokinetic properties and
interactions with food and medication. They also differ in how well
they lower low-density lipoprotein (LDL) cholesterol levels. Statin
drugs inhibit 3-hydroxy-3-methyl-glutaryl-coenzyme A (HMG-CoA)
reductase that catalyzes the conversion of HMG-CoA to mevalonate,
is a first rate-limiting step in cholesterol biosynthesis in the body; this
action is very effective in decreasing the total cholesterol and the low-
density lipoprotein (LDL) level. Reduction of cholesterol production
by statins is also accompanied by synthesis of the wound-healing
inhibitors farnesyl pyrophosphate and cortisol. They both act on
glucocorticoid receptors and inhibit epithelialization through the
impairment of keratinocyte migration. Because statins have
pleiotropic effects independent of their lipid-lowering actions; they
are considered a potentially new unusual therapeutic modality for
different pathological disorders such as psoriasis, sepsis, alopecia,
wound healing and many inflammatory diseases. Simultaneous
determination of statins in human urine is reported by using dilute-
and-shoot-liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry method [29].
We focus on Simvastatin for its wound healing effects.

423
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Pravastatin Pitavastatin Rosuvastatin

Atorvastatin Mevastatin Fluvastatin

Lovastatin Rosuvastatin D6

Figure 4: Chemical structures of some statins

Simvastatin
SIM is a white crystalline powder with poor water solubility of
approximately 1.45 g/mL, chemical structure shown in Fig 5. Statins
involve anti-inflammatory, antioxidative, immunomodulatory,
antibacterial activities (Fig 6). Alongside the cholesterol-lowering
effect, it is shown that SIM has various therapeutic actions, one of
these actions is the ability of SIM to increase VEGF (Vascular
endothelial growth factor) synthesis and release at the wound site, a
critical step in production of new blood vessels and subsequently
improves impaired wound healing in diabetic mice. SIM reduces
isoprenylation downstream targets of mevalonate and farnesyl, which
increases epithelialization and restores the normal skin epidermal
barrier, reducing levels can assist keratinocyte migration in vitro and
epithelialization and wound closure as studied in ex vivo human
culture wound healing design. SIM is a powerful anti-inflammatory
424
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

drug that can boost endothelial cell proliferation and

neovascularization. It is discovered that applying SIM to open skin
wounds not only reduced inflammation but also reduced bacterial
infection at the wound site [4, 11, 30, 31, 32].

Figure 5: Chemical Structure of Simvastatin

Wound healing
Angiogenesis Anti-Inflammatory

Bone Health SIMVASTATIN Antioxidant

Anti-viral & Immunomodulatoy

Anti-microbial
Anti-hyperlipidemic

Figure 6: Therapeutic use of Simvastatin

SIM also functions as an antibacterial agent when applied topically,

as it abolishes multiple biosynthetic pathways and cellular processes
in bacteria as well as selective interference of bacterial protein
synthesis. This property is proposed to improve SIM’s capability to
inhibit the formation of key MRSA (Methicillin-resistant
Staphylococcus aureus) toxins (α-hemolysin and Panton-Valentine
leucocidin) that damage the healing capability in septic skin injuries.
SIM inhibition of bacterial protein synthesis is particular for bacterial
protein only and doesn't influence mammalian mitochondrial protein

425
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

synthesis. The only statin medication that could potentially reduce

MRSA ATCC 43300 growth with a minimum inhibitory
concentration (MIC) of (32 g/ml) was found to be SIM. None of the
other statin drugs performed and this antibacterial activity with this
low (MIC); But, SIM antibacterial activity is restricted to gram-
positive bacteria only, since gram-negative bacteria's outer membrane
functions as a barrier to prevent SIM from entering these types of
bacteria. However, SIM prevents S. aureus toxin formation and
reduces its pre-formed biofilms; it has also shown to reduce the
bacterial contents in a mouse model of MRSA skin infection and
inhibits the synthesis of bacterial protein and toxin. SIM decreases
inflammatory cytokines caused by MRSA skin infection and it shows
synergistic activity with different topical antimicrobials [33]. In this
paper we report SIM formulations effective in wound healing.

Recent developments in wound healing formulations of

Simvastatin
Gels
Gel is the semisolid system in which a liquid phase is suppressed
within a polymeric matrix in which a high degree of physical and
chemical cross-linking is proposed. Recently, the gels have been
studied as wound dressings. They have the ability to keep the wound
site moist and also promote wound angiogenesis and cell
proliferation, which stimulates new granulation tissue growth and
epithelial cell migration. Gels have the ability to hold large content
and can decrease pain by cooling wounds. The covalent or non-
covalent cross linking can be used to control expansion capacity of
gel and maintain the conformational structure to maintaining moist
environment surrounding to wound site. Gels expand in an aqueous
environment, when the pH and ionic strength are suitable for dry
wounds not for exudative wounds. These dressings are flexible,
contain no antigenicity and allow oxygen, water and metabolites to
pass through the gel which provides faster drug release activity as
compared to ointments and creams [34, 35].

Cubogels
Cubosomes are self-assembled honey comb nanostructures. They may
be cross-linked gel architectures or liquid crystalline aggregates. They
are biphasic domains of water and lipid. They are formulated with
certain surfactants and optimized proportion of water. Monoolein–
water cubosomes self-assemble into thermodynamically stable cubic
crystalline forms, particularly when they are made up of binary
systems leading to self-assembly into thermodynamically stable cubic

426
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

crystalline forms. Cubosomes consist of lipid interior and aqueous

domains folded in a cubic lattice [36, 37, 38 &39]. The peculiar
nature of cubosomes much resembles the structure of skin,
consequently, leading to enhanced skin permeation and low irritation
incidents. Lamiaa. M Ahmed et al. (2023) report the formulation and
evaluation of cubosomal nanoparticles of SIM, as a means of topical
delivery of SIM while improving drug permeation. The Cubosomes
were further delivered as a cubogel dosage form. Glyceryl
monooleate /poloxamer 407 bulk cubic gels were fragmented by
probe sonication to create cubic nanoparticles, into which SIM was
incorporated by homogenization. High molecular weight (HMW)
chitosan, carbopol 934 and hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose (HPMC)
using top-down method. Drug release from the gel loaded with cubic
nanoparticles follow Higuchi’s diffusion model. Ex vivo permeation
study results showed higher drug permeation compared to plain drug,
this emphasizes a strong correlation between the cubic phase structure
of cubosomes and the stratum corneum of skin. Wound closure and
histopathology studies augmented the proposal of using SIM in
cubosome loaded gel to give far better efficiency in wound healing
[40].

4.3 Nanoemulsion Gel

Hora Amoozegar et al. (2022) developed a nanoemulsion of SIM as a
therapy for infected wounds. Preparation of SIM nano emulsion was
carried out using the high energy (ultrasonic) emulsification method;
the z-average droplet size of twelve nano emulsion formulations
ranged from (57 to 580 nm). The fundamental cause for the vast
variety of droplet size appears to be a difference in the volume ratio
of surfactant to oil phase. A previous study demonstrated that a high
surfactant/oil ratio can achieve minimal droplet size. The selected
SIM nano emulsion formulation had droplet size, PDI, and zeta
potential of 75 nm, 0.3, and 29.4, respectively. The physical
properties of nano emulsion, such as droplet size, charge, and PDI,
remained stable in a nano emulsion gel formulation with a viscosity
of 11.12 Pas.SIM nano emulsion and nano emulsion gel formulations
were stable at (4 and 25 °C) for 72 days. Additionally, antibacterial
activity was studied against a wide variety of microorganisms,
particularly S. aureus and the MIC values of both nano emulsion and
nano emulsion gel were high, against pathogenic strains S. aureus is
(15.52 g/ml) which is two-fold lower than drug solution (31.25 g/ml).
Histological findings in a mouse wound healing model demonstrated
that nano emulsion gel outperformed other formulations. This study
has shown that SIM nano emulsion gel base formulated using

427
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

carbomer, is effective in the management of S. aureus wound

infection due to its inherent antibacterial actions, inflammatory
control and wound healing promotion. Furthermore, the particles
showed appropriate rheological properties by having non-Newtonian
behavior that presented as power law model by numerically
calculated correlation coefficients. [41].
Gel for soft-tissue grafting in dentistry
Autogenous soft-tissue grafting is a standard technique in dentistry.
Marwa Madi et al. (2017) evaluated the intra-oral local application of
SIM/chitosan gel (S/C) over the palatal donor site after free gingival
graft (FGG) surgery. However, the extended healing time required at
the donor site aggravates pain and discomfort. Statins are effective in
bacterial burden reduction, epithelialization and wound healing.
Topical S/C gel (10 mg/mL) can be utilized as a unique treatment
approach to enhance healing and minimize pain in the palate donor
site. Following the FGG-harvesting procedure, the subjects were
randomly divided into four groups of ten patients and different
coverage techniques were used to induce healing of the palatal
wounds. Results have shown the topical application of S/C gel could
be used as a novel therapeutic modality and pain reduction at the
palatal donor site in FGG procedure [42].

Smart Hydrogels
A hydrogel is a three-dimensional elastic and porous network made of
hydrophilic polymers, with the least content of 10% (usually >90%).
Hydrogels are categorized on the basis of nature of polymers, method
of preparation, ionic charge or the types of bonds between the
polymer chains. Depending on the monomers in the matrix and
combination of additives, the hydrogels have extremely different
properties. They respond to stimuli such as temperature, pressure, pH,
ionic charge or antigens with changes in certain properties (e.g. gel-
soil transition) and then when the stimulus stops, they return to their
original state. Due to their exceptional properties, hydrogels can be
included in the category of "smart" materials. In the medical area,
hydrogels are used for wound treatment, cell therapies, drug delivery,
tissue engineering, and the production of medical devices and
biosensors [43, 44, 45].

Hydrogels containing antibiotics are routinely encouraged in several

wound conditions because of their capacity to be non-toxic, high
water content, high oxygen permeability, improved biocompatibility,
ease of loading, tunable release properties and structural diversity.
Hydrogels have ideal properties to alleviate wound (Fig 7) [46].

428
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 7: Ideal Properties of Hydrogels for

application on wound and healing

Due to their 3D hydrophilic network and jelly mass, hydrogel is able

to swell upon contact with water and able to absorb effusion and
maintain high wound moisture. To avoid trauma on wound site, the
hydrogel is used as ideal wound dressing. It should be non-adherent,
easy to apply and remove. Also it should have ability to contain high
level of water and swelling capacity which allows the hydrogel to
maintain moist environment around wound site and at the same time,
to absorb exudate from the wound site [47, 48, 49].

Self-gelling solid lipid nanoparticle (SLNs)

Topical delivery using hydrogels is a conventional routinely used
method. However, SIM being water insoluble poses a challenge
accommodate in the gel matrix and also degrades in hydrophilic
environment. Simple hydrogels also have poor mechanical properties,
are macroscopic in nature, and manage high exudates wounds with
difficulty. To overcome the aforementioned limitations, Bhumika
Gupta et al. (2022) developed self-gelling solid lipid nanoparticle
(SLNs) dressing to incorporate SIM. Major focus of the study was the
choice of components for the dressing. From the screened surfactants
and lipids, Poloxamer, was selected as one of the integral components
and its quantity was finalized based on its ability to impart the
desirable characteristics of behaving as a cosolvent for SIM and
inhibitor of anticipated precipitation. High-pressure homogenization
equipment produced. Basically, desired results were achieved by
producing an amalgam of SLNs and hydrogel, which prevented drug
crystallization, degradation and also ensured that a soluble form of
SIM was released slowly over a prolonged time. Favourable the use

429
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

of organic solvents was avoided and hot homogenization method was

preferred over the cold one looking into the expanse of particle size
due to the later alternative. Within 11 days, rat excision wounds
healed completely, which was ten times faster than the marketed
povidone-iodine product [50].

Chitosan microparticles in hydrogel matrix

S Yasasvini et al. (2017) formulated Polyvinyl alcohol (PVA)
hydrogel matrix system loaded with SIM- chitosan micro particles for
topical wound healing. The micro particles were prepared by using an
ionic gelation process with different polymer such as (chitosan) and
surfactant compositions (Tween 80/Pluronic F-127) and tested for
entrapment efficiency, shape and drug-polymer interactions. Micro
particles produced with 0.3%w/w Chitosan in 0.5:5 polymer drug
ratio, demonstrated maximum entrapment effectiveness of 82% with
spherical morphology and minimal drug-chitosan interaction. Using
glutaraldehyde and HCl, at three different doses (2.5 mg, 5 mg and 10
mg equivalent of drug) a 5% PVA solution is s chemically cross
linked with pure drug and drug-loaded micro particles. The hydrogels
were optimized for swelling and release in vitro behavior and in vivo
wound healing effect. At the end of 7 days, hydrogels containing (2.5
mg) equivalent dose of SIM microparticles gave maximum
cumulative drug release of 92% (n = 3). In vitro studies of the micro
particles and the hydrogel system, such as swelling behavior and drug
release, validated their potential for in vivo use. The analytical
evaluation of the formulations demonstrated the dosage form's
stability. The in vivo wound healing study of the optimized
formulation demonstrated the efficiency of the dual controlled release
system providing a prolonged effect of drug to support the continuous
healing process. Hence, the combination of hydrogels with polymeric
micro particles of drug could be best recommended for effective
topical wound healing therapy. The increased swelling index of the
low dose hydrogels supported the in vitro drug release results The in
vivo wound healing study is carried out on Wistar rats (n = 30, 5
groups of 6 animals) which are produced hydrogels (at 3 doses) with
untreated animals. The positive control group treated with standard
topical SIM ointment (1%).The wound healing impact was analogous
to the in vitro results, in which animals treated with low dose
hydrogels (replaced every 7 days) showed a significant reduction in
wound area compared to medium and high dose hydrogels [51].

430
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Polymeric nanoparticles
Usama FarghalyAly et al. (2019) worked on formulating a hydrogel
containing polymeric nanoparticles (PoNPs) of SIM which were
prepared by using the nanoprecipitation, a great way to enhance drug
solubility and affect skin permeation. Nanoprecipitation method is
most suitable for formulating PoNPs. It is a rapid, direct technique
and most convenient for poorly soluble drugs. Factors such as amount
of SIM, drug–polymer ratio, rate of drug injection in the aqueous
phase, mixing duration and rate affected the formulation process
histopathological studies in rats showed complete epithelialization in
11 days with minimal inflammatory cell infiltration, mature collagen
fiber formation and more activated hair follicle growth [52].

Silver nanoparticles incorporated in hydrogel

Mariarosa Ruffo et al. (2022) synthesized a biocompatible hydrogel
(HyDrO-DiAb) composed of carboxymethylcellulose loaded with
silver nanoparticles (AgNPs) for the treatment of diabetic foot
ulcers .Silver nanoparticles have a superior broad-spectrum
antibacterial ability gram-positive, gram-negative and antibiotic-
resistant bacteria. Because of their low cytotoxicity and small size
(AgNPs) can disrupt microbial cell membranes and cause loss of
activity of enzymes, RNA and DNA resulting in bacterial mortality.
In this study, AgNP were obtained by a green synthesis. Green
Synthesis is preferred because, compared to physical and chemical
methods, it is less expensive and more eco-friendly and allows the
production of nanoparticles from natural extracts. The AgNP were
dissolved in a CMC hydrogel, which after a freeze-drying process
turned into a flexible and porous structure. The Scratch test assay was
performed to study study cell migration and cell-cell interaction. It
revealed that, after 24 h of treatment of the cells with 100 μg/ml of
hydrogel, the wound closure percentage was 75±0.3%, the obtained
hydrogel could affect the wound healing process positively. This
important activity was supported by findings of in vitro and ex vivo
studies, in which the ability of HyDrO-DiAb to inhibit MPO
(myeloperoxidase) and collagenase was tested. According to the
findings, HyDrO-DiAb could be utilized to treat chronic wounds such
as Diabetic Foot Ulcers (DFU) as reduces collagenase and MPO
activity by (730.3%) and (840.5%) respectively. Because HyDrO-
DiAb has strong antioxidant, anti-inflammatory and antibacterial
action, it could be used to treat inflammation and infection in DFUs.
Finally, cytotoxicity, skin sensitization and skin irritation was tested
to determine the safety of the hydrogel. The developed nanoparticles
gave slow and consistent drug release for 8 hours. [49].

431
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Mahsima Khoshneviszadeh et al. (2014) established that topical SIM

improves wound healing by influencing various aspects of tissue
regeneration. The influence of SIM on wound healing was assessed in
laboratory rats using stereological and histological investigations.
Studies were performed using a 2% SIM gel formulation of
carboxymethylcellulose (CMC). Determination of rate of wound
healing, degree of inflammation, creation of granulation tissue,
ulceration, epithelialization, fibroblast proliferation, synthesis of
collagen bundles and vascularization was done. The obtained test
results showed that SIM improves wound healing by inducing anti-
inflammatory and epithelialization effects, as well as statistically
significant induction of fibroblast proliferation and collagen bundle
synthesis. Anti-inflammatory properties of SIM were also confirmed.
Some researchers have shown that SIM treatment improves
endothelial cell proliferation and neovascularization, which is
corroborated by the findings of this study [53].

Mesoporous hydroxyapatite microspheres

Weilin Yu et al (2016) A hydrogel-based wound dressing
incorporating SIM was formulated using alginate. A wound dressing
of alginate hydrogel (AH) and SIM-incorporated mesoporous
hydroxyapatite microspheres (S-MHMs) provided sustained drug
delivery. MHMs (100 mg) were dispersed into an ethanol solution of
drug. The suspension was swirled in a sealed vessel at a constant rate
(120 rpm) at 37 oC for 24 h, followed by centrifugation and freeze
dried for another 24 h at 20 oC The S-MHMs (10 mg) were
immersed in phosphate buffered saline (PBS, 20 mL) at 37 oC with
continual shaking (120 rpm) for the SIM release test. The drug release
medium was removed and monitored using UV-Vis absorption
spectroscopy at 238 nm at predetermined time intervals before being
refilled with the same volume of PBS.To make S-MHMs/AH, 0.60 g
of sodium alginate dissolved in 30 mL of deionized water, and 0.36 g
of SMHMs were ultrasonically dispersed in the sodium alginate
solution and combined for 20 min with magnetic stirring. The hybrid
solution of 0.85 mL S-MHMs/sodium alginate was put into the 24-
well plate. To guarantee thorough gelatinization, CaCl 2 aqueous
solution (20 mg/mL) has been applied over the surface of sodium
alginate solution and S-MHMs/sodium alginate hybrid solution is
formed. SIM significantly increased human umbilical vein endothelial
cells (HUVECs) migration and tube formation in vitro, according to
the findings. In addition, the Akt and Erk signaling pathways were
found to be activated in HUVECs. The enhanced tube formation was
reversed by LY294002 and PD98059 therapy, indicating that both the

432
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(Akt and Erk) protein kinase signaling pathways were engaged in the
SIM-induced angiogenesis.The findings showed that S-MHMs/AH
greatly increased new blood vessel creation and hastened cutaneous
wound re-epithelialization. The current investigation implies that the
S-MHMs/AH composite could be used as a new dressing for wound
healing [54].

Zahra Janipour et al. (2023) The primary line of treatment for

hyperlipidemia is statins. It reduces cardiovascular risk and death in
addition to lipids. Through a variety of methods, statins are essential
in preserving the oral cavity's homeostasis. It involves enhanced
formation of mineralized tissue through the bone morphogenetic
proteins (BMP)-2 Pathway and regeneration of dentition and pulp
through differentiation. By promoting osteogenic differentiation in
mesenchymal stem cells and aiding in the epithelization process
during wound healing, it demonstrates effective bone health. It also
possesses anti-inflammatory, antioxidant, antibacterial, antiviral and
fungicidal qualities. As far as we are aware, that aren't many thorough
research that have looked into how statin medications affect various
aspects of oral and dental health. Therefore, this review's primary goal
was to investigate how statins affect applications related to oral
health. Our thorough analysis revealed that statins have significant
and potentially beneficial effects on a number of oral health issues,
such as dental pulp cells, chronic periodontitis, loss of alveolar bone,
orthodontic tooth movement and others [55].

Wound Dressing Films

These dressings are permeable to water and small molecules but not
to large molecules like protein or bacteria. This makes them perfect
for keeping wounds moist and lowering infection rates. Self-adhering
film dressings adhere to the wound site without adhering to the
wound edges. Film dressings, by providing an outer layer, allow for a
moist environment and epithelial cell migration over the wound
surface which leads to improved wound healing. It attaches to the skin
easily and can be inserted into inaccessible areas of the body.
Dressings are made from natural and synthetic polymers (Fig 8).
Preparation methods include solvent casting, salt leaching,
electrospinning, spin coating, microfluidic spinning, 3D printing and
so on. Some important aspects that need optimization include
mechanical properties, solid state analysis, swelling behavior,
wettability and in vitro-in vivo wound healing capacity [56, 57].

433
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 8: Polymers, preparation methods and characterization of

film for wound dressings

Hydrogel films
Multi-functional hydrogel film wound dressing using sodium alginate
(SA) and pectin (PC) loaded with SIM. SA and PC were chosen for
their distinct properties. SA is a biocompatible, biodegradable and
excellent film forming agent at the wound site, it can promote
macrophage activity and cytokine levels. They are both polyuronates,
natural ionic polysaccharides that undergo chain–chain association.

Masoud Rezvanian et al. (2017) Developed a composite hydrogel film

from a blend of sodium alginate and pectin loaded with SIM and
cross-linked it with CaCl2 for use as a wound dressing. The best
results were obtained with low cross-linking, which also projected
improved mechanical properties and fluid absorption capacity.
Contact times greater than 2 min and CaCl 2 concentrations greater
than 1% resulted in the formation of rigid, inflexible films with
wrinkled edges, which might be due to higher crosslinking of
polymers under these conditions. Films produced with >1% CaCl 2
and contact times >2 min were eliminated from further studies as they
had an undesirable appearance. Films cross-linked at 0.5% and 1%
were selected for further analyses and comparisons were made with
non-cross linked films. The developed films were able to provide
sustained release of SIM. Moreover, thermal analysis revealed that
the crosslinking process enhanced the thermal stability of films. In
vitro cytotoxicity assays revealed that this formulation is non-toxic
[58]. Further in vivo studies on wound healing were assessed by the
same author group on streptozocin induced type I diabetic wound

434
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

model. The study projected great potential of developed film in the

acceleration of diabetic wound healing through its pro-angiogenic
effect, faster re-epithelialization and increased collagen deposition
[59].

Chitosan nanoparticles based film

SaimaTufail et al. (2021) presented a nano film-based delivery system
for topical diabetic wound healing. The ionic-gelation method yielded
SIM loaded chitosan nanoparticles (CS-SIM-NP) with a particle size
173±2.645 nm .This method gave a high drug loading of around 99%.
The FTIR data revealed a good homogeneity and the lack of any
chemical reaction between the drug and other formulation
components. Furthermore, 91.64% of drug was released in a
controlled manner in 72 h. The formulation showed optimal skin
application features with controlled drug release, providing an
excellent environment to facilitate the healing process of wounds
within 12 days. Topical SIM could significantly accelerate wound
healing, possibly through angiogenesis and lymph-angiogenesis
pathways. Thus, nanofilms containing statins make a prospective
segment of wound dressings in diabetic wounds as well [60].

Micelles
Micelles are self-assembled polymeric micelles (PMs) based on
Pluronic amphiphilic copolymers. These polymers consist of ethylene
oxide (EO) and propylene oxide (PO) chains arranged in tri-block
architecture (EOa-POb-EOa), they are biodegradable and
biocompatible. Pluronic is extensively used in pharmaceutical
formulations due to its unique properties such as biocompatibility,
low toxicity and weak immunogenicity. The ability of pluronic
micelles to increase drug solubility and bioavailability of low soluble
drug, makes it favorable for nanoformulation techniques. Among
various nano delivery systems in the category of core –shell
fundamental structure, nanomicelles with a hydropholic core are
favored for carrying hydrophobic drugs [61].

Nano micellary drug carrier

Encapsulation of SIM was carried out in polymeric micelles prepared
hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose (HPMC) /chitosan gel was performed
by Jaleh Varshosaz et al. (2017). This permitted enhanced solubility
and biphasic release, viz rapid initial release due to enhanced
solubility followed by controlled release. The gel-contained nano
micelles displayed pseudo-plastic flow and a more consistent drug
release profile. A notable increase of re- epithelialization and

435
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

significant decrease in inflammation following administration of SIM

-micelle- gel was observed. In another study SIM loaded micelles
were formulated using methoxy poly (ethylene glycol)-poly (e-
caprolactone) (mPEG–PCL) di-block copolymers for treatment of
inflammatory condition [62].

Creamy emulsions
Creams are emulsions of water in oil (w/o) example oily creams or oil
in water (o/w) example vanishing creams, in which the active agent is
distributed between the oil and water phases according to the partition
coefficient. It is am emulsion based semisolid dosage form commonly
containing >20% water and volatiles and/or ˂50% of hydrocarbons,
waxes or polyethylene glycol. [63]. Using a cream could speed up the
healing process of wounds more quickly than using a wet bandage. It
can also speed up the repair process by ensuring that the afflicted skin
is properly hydrated [64]. Creams have their usage-attractive
qualities; for instance they offer the possibility of incorporating not
only aqueous miscible ingredients, but also the lipid-soluble drugs.

Bioenhancers containing cream

Deepika Sahu et al. (2022) Cream formulations of SIM, alone and in
combination with bio-enhancers Curcumin and Piperine, were
prepared by o/w emulsification. Bio enhancers used in the
formulation possess antibacterial and wound healing activity; they
might act synergistically to accentuate the effect of SIM. Piperine
from black pepper is known to synergistically enhance the
bioavailability of curcumin. The quality of the prepared cream was
assured in required viscosity, spread ability, phase separation and pH.
The biological activity was evaluated using the burn injury rat model.
The injury was induced on the back skin of the adult rats using a hot
metal rod. Creams with SIM, bio-enhancers and SIM + bioenhancers
showed improvement in wound healing. The bio-enhancers used in
the formulations possess antibacterial and wound-healing activity;
they might act synergistically to potentiate the effect of SIM [65, 66,
67].

Medicament Spray
A film can be formed on the wound simply by spraying. Such a
technique avoids physical contact with an open wound and hence
decreases any chances of contact infection. A sprayed film can supply
physical protection and it is loaded with medication which provides
therapeutic environment for wound healing [68].Overall, topical
formulations for wound application are available in the form cream,

436
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

ointment, powders, transdermal patch etc. Some of these formulations

require use of preservatives and some cause stinging sensation after
application. Spraying a medication on wound which can form a thin
film can avoid some of these complications. These details summon a
need to develop a topical wound management product which can be
easily applied and will increase the healing rate, avoid or cure the
infection and minimize antibiotic resistance [69].

Rupali Kale et al. (2020) Developed a topical film-forming spray

containing a combination of Mupirocin and SIM to prevent infections
and promote faster wound healing. SIM and Mupirocin were included
in the film-forming spray formulation, which was developed by using
Eudragit E100 as the film-forming agent, Glycerol and Polyethylene
glycol (PEG-400) as the plasticizers. Evaluation parameters including
swelling, pattern of spray, evaporation time, average weight per
dosage, antibacterial activity and in-vivo wound healing were all
analyzed and compared to a market formulation using the excision
wound healing model [70].

Tissue Scaffold
Scaffolds are porous, fibrous and permeable biomaterials that are built
in three dimensions. It facilitates the movement of bodily fluids,
encourages cell-cell communication, encourages the deposition of
extracellular matrix, and increases pathogen survivability with
minimal response to inflammation and decreases toxicity rate.
Materials selected for fabricating 3D scaffolds are often categorized
according to their chemical properties, such as synthetic and natural
polymers, hydrogels, metals and non-metals, composites, ceramics
and non-ceramics. Advancements in bioengineering and availability
of sophisticated equipment have pushed for research in utility of
biodegradable 3D tissue scaffolds (TSs) for wound healing. Scaffolds
provide adhesion, growth and differentiation of cells and transport of
extracellular matrix (ECM) components by acting as an ECM
analogue. During the wound healing process, collagen also supports
the organization of newly formed collagen fibrils and granulation
tissue in the damaged area and stimulates new tissue growth and
wound debridement. Moreover, biocompatibility, biodegradability,
simplicity and variety of manufacturing methods of collagen and
collagen-based TSs have popularized its application in wound healing
in recent years. Desired features of a scaffold includes its’ ability to
repair body tissues for cell growth, vascularization, proliferation
while unharming host integrity. The applied polymeric materials
should be degraded whilst the wound is recovering or once the

437
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

healing process ends. Tissue engineering scaffold production

techniques include thermally induced phase separation (TIPS), fiber
bonding, electro spinning, solvent casting and particulate leaching,
membrane lamination, freeze-drying, and gas foaming (Fig 9).[71, 72]

Figure 9: Scaffold based tissue engineering approach

Nanolipid carriers (NLC)

NLCs are lipid nanoparticles created using mixture of solid and liquid
lipids, stabilized by surfactants. The presence of liquid lipids in NLCs
lends a pronounced amorphous characteristic to the system.
Amorphous systems are known to enhance drug solubility, provide
steady drug release, and enhance physicochemical stability. SIM,
being a lipophilic agent with a log P of 4.46, can be favorably
encapsulated within NLC matrix.

Dilara Orgül et al. (2017) prepared NLCs, suitable for topical and
localized delivery, incorporated into a tissue scaffold containing stem
cells. NLC provide enhanced contact between the drug and the skin
cell owing to their small size and lipid matrix structures. Stem cell
especially the mesenchymal stem cells are evidently present in tissues
during all wound healing phases. Research has shown that they are
promising for treatment of diabetic wounds. However one limitation
is that when the stem cells are given by systemic route or locally
injected, they cannot sustain their activity because of the proteolytic
inflammatory environment of chronic wounds. Therefore, a protective
3D tissue scaffold was formulated to encase the stem cells along with
nanolipid carrier of SIM. This multi-model topical treatment

438
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

technique was designed to be applied for the diabetic wound healing

[73]. In yet another recent research study, conducted by Seyedeh
Maryam Mousavi-Simakani et al. (2023), SIM was used for treating
pressure ulcers. Pressure ulcers are also referred to as bed sores and
are an agony for hospitalized persons and people with limited
mobility. Ulcers may develop due to attrition at a particular site
repeatedly, such as by sitting on a wheelchair or lying on the bed for
long hours. Circulation problems also invite painful sores which, in
extreme cases may even require surgical intervention. The common
areas affected are the tailbone, buttocks area, sides and heels of feet,
back of the head, the front, and sides and back of knees. The problem
is aggravated when the affected area comes in prolonged and repeated
contact with irritants like urine and fecal matter. This is a debilitating
condition with incidences of tissue necrosis leading to local damage.
NLC were prepared using combination of stearic acid, Capryol
PGMC, cholesterol, triolein. The formulation produced enhanced
adhesion, skin deposition, and local drug concentration at pressure
induced ulcer sites in skin behind the neck and back of the rats.[74]
Table 1 and 2 summarize applications and results of in vitro and in
vivo studies on different formulations of Simvastatin respectively.
Table 3 presents a compilation of patents on Simvastatin for wound
management.

Table 1: In vitro Studies on Simvastatin

Applicati Ref.
Title Cell line Result Reference
on No
Topical Improved Keratino The results Marwa [42]
simvastatin gel healing cytes, showed Madi et al
as a novel and fibroblas significant (2017)
therapeutic reduced ts & differences
modality for pain in the Endothel between groups
palatal donor site palatal ial cells in post
wound healing donor site. operative
following free healing score
gingival graft during the early
procedure post-operative
period as well as
for pain VAS
scores.
A Novel Topical Fibroblas Formulations Hora [41]
Formulation of applicatio ts cells had an Amoozegar
Simvastatin n of SIM efficiency in et al
Nano emulsion promotes control and (2022)
Gel for Infected wound inhibition of S.
Wound Therapy: healing in aureus.
in vitro diabetic

439
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Assessment mice by
providing
angiogene
sis and
lymph-
angiogene
sis
Topical hydrogel Enhanced Fibroblas Increase in the S [51]
matrix loaded wound ts cells concentration of Yasasvini
with Simvastatin healing surfactant et al
microparticles efficiency. reduced the (2017)
for entrapment of
enhanced wound drug.
healing activity
Formulation and Improve Angiobla Formulation Usama [52]
evaluation of the drug sts & showed a good Farghaly
simvastatin solubility Fibroblas efficacy in Aly et al
polymeric and skin t accelerating the (2019)
nanoparticles permeatio proliferat healing of
loaded in n. ion wound with
hydrogel for complete
optimum wound epithelialization
healing purpose and minimal
inflammatory
cell infiltration.
Synthesis and To control Keratino HyDrO-DiAb Mariarosa [49]
evaluation of and treat cytes, hydrogel Ruffo et al
wound healing diabetic fibroblas reduces (2022)
properties of foot ts, collagenase and
hydro-diab ulceration macroph MPO activity by
hydrogel loaded s (DFUs), ages, and 730.3% and
with to lymphoc 840.5%
green-synthetize promote ytes cells respectively.
d AGNPS: in wound
vitro healing is
needed.
Design of a For the Endothel Enhanced new Weilin Yu [54]
novel wound sustained ial cells, blood vessel et al
dressing drug vascular formation and (2016)
consisting of release cells, accelerated the
alginate fibroblas re
hydrogel and ts, epithelialization
simvastatin- inammat of the cutaneous
incorporated ory cells wounds.
mesoporous &
hydroxyapatite extracell
microspheres for ular
cutaneous matrix
wound healing
Optimization, Improve Fibroblas Sustained, slow Masoud [59,
characterization, mechanica ts cells drug release Rezvanian 60]

440
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

and in vitro l obtained and in et al(2017)

assessment of characteri vitro
alginate-pectin stics, cytotoxicity
ionic cross- wound assay shows
linked hydrogel fluid films were non-
film for wound uptake toxic.
dressing and drug
applications release
behaviour.
To Epithalia Formulation Saima [61]
Simvastatin explore l Cell shows optimal tufail et al
Nanoparticles the skin application (2022)
efficacy with controlled
Loaded
of SIM in drug release
Polymeric Film diabetic which facilitate
as a Potential wound wound healing
Strategy for healing. through
Diabetic Wound angiogenesis
Healing: In and lymph
vitro Evaluation angiogenesis
pathways.
Table 2: In vivo Studies on Simvastatin formulation
Title Application Cell line Result Reference Ref.
Self-Gelling SIM SLN Wistar Complete Bhumika Gupta [50]
Solid Lipid hydrogel rats healing of et al (2022)
Nanoparticle wound excision
Hydrogel dressing was wound
Containing characterized observed in
Simvastatin as extensively rats within 11
Suitable and days.
Wound employed
Dressing: An topically to
Investigative establish its
Study effects on
wound
healing in the
excision
wound model
in rats.
Topical Effect of Sprague- Topical Mahsima [53]
Simvastatin simvastatin Dawley Simvastatin Khoshneviszadeh
Enhances on wound rats enhances the et al (2014)
Tissue healing wound healing
Regeneration in process in process
Full-Thickness laboratory through
Skin Wounds in rats model. affecting
Rat Models different
aspects of
tissue
regeneration.
Development Chitosan gel Wistar Sim loaded Jaleh Varshosaz [63]
and in vivo containing rats micelles -gel et al (2017)

441
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

evaluation of polymeric may represent

HPMC/chitosan micelles a novel topical
gel containing loaded with formulation
simvastatin simvastatin for wound
loaded (Sim) healing.
self-assembled evaluates its
nano micelles wound
as a potent healing
wound Properties in
healing agent rats.
Studies on the Reduced Sprague- Study suggest Deepika Sahu et [68]
effect of herbal bacterial Dawley that use of al (2022)
bioenhancers infection of rats curcumin and
on wound the wound piperine would
healing activity site. be a fruitful
of simvastatin approach to
in rats enhance the
wound healing
activity of
topical
Simvastatin
preparations.
To explore Albino The Saima tufail et al [61]
Simvastatin the efficacy rats importance of (2022)
Nanoparticles of SIM in nanofilms
diabetic loaded with
Loaded
wound SIM-NPs in
Polymeric Film healing. diabetic
as a Potential wound healing
Strategy for through
Diabetic angiogenesis
Wound promotion at
Healing: In the wound site.
vivo Evaluation
Film Forming, Topical film Wister Topical film Kale Rupali et al [70]
Antimicrobial forming rats forming spray (2020)
and Growth spray using was
Promoting Antimicrobial successfully
Wound Healing and Growth developed
Spray Promoting using
Formulation Wound combination of
Healing Simvastatin
and Mupirocin
Calcium.

442
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Table 3: Compilation of patents on

simvastatin for wound management
Sr. Patent
Title Remarks Year Ref.
No Number
01 US 7, 101, Topical Statins and cholesterol to Sep [70]
907 B2 administration help prevent and reduce 5,
of statins For scar formation. 2006
treatment of
bone disorders
02 US 2011/ Method of The topical administration Jan [75]
00093.74 wound healing of statins for the treatment 13,
A1 and scar of bone disorders is 2011
Modulation disclosed.
03 US 2011/ Wound healing Dressing for wound June [76]
0130712 A1 device containment refers to any 2,
dressing or bandage or 2011
material, which serves as a
barrier between the wound
and the outside
environment.
04 AU Wound A skin dressing comprising Jan [77]
2011205044 Dressings a hydrate hydrogel material 31,
B2 Comprising comprising a source of 2013
Hydrated lactate ions and a supply of
Hydrogels and glucose.
Enzymes
05 EP 1 693 Wound A dressing according to Jul [78]
073 B1 dressings any preceding claim, where 23,
comprising in the dressing further 2014
hydrated comprises peroxidase
hydrogels and enzymepresent in hydrated
enzymes condition.
06 US 2017 / Wound healing In embodiments of the Sep . [79]
0252320 A1 method an 7,
antioxidantagent can be 2017
administered in an amount
effective to treat the wound
, or when two or more
antioxidant are
administered, each agent
alone or a combination of
the agents is in an amount
effective to treat the
wound.
07 US 10 , Wound healing The present invention Jul [80]
034 , 944 B2 using topical generally relates to 31,
Systems and compositions andmethods 2018
methods for topical or transdermal
delivery and treatment of
wounds and / or promoting
wound healing. In some
cases , the composition

443
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

may include nitric oxide

and / or peptides such as
thyrotropin - releasing
hormone
(TRH) and / or GnRH
(gonadotropin releasing
hormone).
08 US 2019 / Topical Provided herein are Jan [81]
0030045 A1 treatment of compositions systems, and 31 ,
wounds with methods for treating 2019
Statins and wounds with the
cholesterol for combination of statins and
scar Reduction cholesterol to help prevent
and reduce scar formation.
Conclusion
SIM is an interesting pleiotropic agent having important clinical
applications. Researchers need to pay heed to the role of SIM in
wound care, taking cue from its role in the enhancement of
endothelial and microvascular functioning and reduction of oxidative
stress. Statins have been delivered effectively through micro and
nanotechnologically advanced carriers. By integrating statins and
more specifically SIM with nanocarrier systems in the format of
dressings can unleash its full potential at the microstructural level for
wound healing applications. Wound dressings comprise of an integral
part of wound healing therapy. Moreover, electrospun nanofiber mats
are being extensively probed as delivery systems providing a pore
size that can both prevent pathogen infection of the wound and at the
same time offer corollary benefits for delivery of statins for producing
fiber morphology of interest. Nanofibers can offer an ideal technique
for wound care and infection control. In the case of deep wounds, the
human body lacks the ability of self healing. The injured cells get into
complete re- epithelialization which in turn requires a longer duration
in managing wounds. Continuous modifications in fiber spinning
technology offer exciting prospects in wound management.
Comprehensive collection of research has shown that SIM promotes
lymphangiogenesis, anigogenesis and accelerates re-epithelialization
in wound healing and research can take SIM far and wide to explore
its effectiveness incorporated in multifunctional biomaterial matrices
such a molecularly imprinted scaffolds and electrosoun nanofibers.
Molecular imprinting furnishes restructuring patterns at
microstructural level this which is an innovative cell and scaffold-
based approach for wound healing. Furthermore, stabilization
methods at the nano level are of prime challenge. The surface area to
volume ratio, which is large, as is in the case of nanofibers, creates
greater concern in stability. Experimental design for optimization is

444
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

required to produce formulations of desired attributes in terms of

morphology and overall drug carrying and delivery potential. Some
critical attributes to be included in the design are the material
parameters, process parameters and ambient operating conditions. It
would be desirable to create new strategies to achieve smart localized
delivery of SIM using biocompatible ingredients from the broad
spectrum of polymers that have synergistic action in wound healing
and repair. Additionally, antimicrobial effects of SIM make it a
valued therapeutic entity for managing infected skin tissue wounds.

List of abbreviations
AgNPs: silver nanoparticles; AH: alginate hydrogel ; CMC:
carboxymethylcellulose; DFUs: Diabetic Foot Ulcers ; ECM:
extracellular matrix; EO: ethylene oxide; FGG: free gingival graft;
FTIR: Fourier-transform infrared spectroscopy; HMG-CoA: 3-
hydroxy-3-methylglutaryl-coenzyme ; HPMC: hydroxypropyl methyl
cellulose; HUVECs: human umbilical vein endothelial cells; LDL:
low-density lipoprotein ; MHMs: mesoporous hydroxyapatite
microspheres; MIC: minimum inhibitory concentration ; mPEG–PCL:
poly (ethylene glycol)-poly (e-caprolactone); MPO: myeloperoxidase;
MRSA: Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus; NLC: Nano
lipid carrier; PBS: phosphate buffered saline; PC: pectin ; PMs:
polymeric micelles ; PO: propylene oxide; PoNPs: polymeric
nanoparticles; PVA: Poly vinyl alcohol; RPM: Revolutions per
minute; S/C: SIM/chitosan gel ; SA: sodium alginate; SCTG:
Subepithelial connective tissue graft ; SIM: Simvastatin; SLNs: solid
lipid nanoparticles; TIPS:thermally induced phase separation; TSs:
tissue scaffolds ; VEGF: vascular endothelial growth factor.

References:
1. Boer M, Duchnik E, Maleszka R, Marchlewicz M (2016)
Structural and Biophysical Characteristics of Human Skin in
Maintaining Proper Epidermal Barrier Function. Postepy
Dermatol. Alergol 33 (1):1–5.
2. Sorg, H., Tilkorn, D. J., Hager, S., Hauser, J., & Mirastschijski,
U. (2017). Skin wound healing: an update on the current
knowledge and concepts. European Surgical Research, 58(1-2),
81-94.

445
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

3. Dias, J. R., Granja, P. L., & Bártolo, P. J. (2016). Advances in

electrospun skin substitutes. Progress in Materials Science, 84,
314-334.
4. Farsaei, S., Khalili, H., & Farboud, E. S. (2012). Potential role of
statins on wound healing: review of the literature. International
wound journal, 9(3), 238-247.
5. Mooradian, A. D. (2019). Evidence-based cardiovascular risk
management in diabetes. American Journal of Cardiovascular
Drugs, 19, 439-448.
6. Lobna, A., Soliman, M. H., Attwa, E. M., & Nana, A. (2018).
Role of atorvastatin in treatment of chronic spontaneous urticaria
patients: A controlled clinical trial. Egypt. J.Immunol,25,133-139.
7. Ramessur, R., & Gill, D. (2017). The effect of statins on severity
of psoriasis: A systematic review. Indian Journal of Dermatology,
Venereology and Leprology, 83, 154.
8. Ahmadvand, A., Yazdanfar, A., Yasrebifar, F., Mohammadi, Y.,
Mahjub, R., & Mehrpooya, M. (2018). Evaluating the effects of
oral and topical simvastatin in the treatment of acne vulgaris: a
double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled clinical trial.
Current clinical pharmacology, 13(4), 279-283.
9. Rezvanian, M., Amin, M. C. I. M., & Ng, S. F. (2016).
Development and physicochemical characterization of alginate
composite film loaded with simvastatin as a potential wound
dressing. Carbohydrate polymers, 137, 295-304.
10. Hennessy, E., Adams, C., Reen, F. J., & O'Gara, F. (2016). Is
there potential for repurposing statins as novel antimicrobials?.
Antimicrobial agents and chemotherapy, 60(9), 5111-5121.
11. Sameh, N., Aly, U. F., Abou-Taleb, H. A., & Abdellatif, A. A. H.
(2018). Prospective role of simvastatin on wound healing: review
of the literature. J Bioequiv Bioavailab, 10(2), 36-42.
12. Sen, C. K. (2019). Human wounds and its burden: an updated
compendium of estimates. Advances in wound care, 8(2), 39-48.
13. Ramhormozi, P., Ansari, J. M., Simorgh, S., Asgari, H. R., Najafi,
M., Barati, M., & Nobakht, M. (2021). Simvastatin accelerates
the healing process of burn wound in Wistar rats through
Akt/mTOR signaling pathway. Annals of Anatomy-Anatomischer
Anzeiger, 236, 151652.
14. Huang, Y., Zhao, X., Zhang, Z., Liang, Y., Yin, Z., Chen, B., ... &
Guo, B. (2020). Degradable gelatin-based IPN cryogel hemostat

446
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

for rapidly stopping deep noncompressible hemorrhage and

simultaneously improving wound healing. Chemistry of
Materials, 32(15), 6595-6610.
15. Huang, Y., Zhao, X., Zhang, Z., Liang, Y., Yin, Z., Chen, B., ... &
Guo, B. (2020). Degradable gelatin-based IPN cryogel hemostat
for rapidly stopping deep noncompressible hemorrhage and
simultaneously improving wound healing. Chemistry of
Materials, 32(15), 6595-6610.
16. Zhao, X., Liang, Y., Guo, B., Yin, Z., Zhu, D., & Han, Y. (2021).
Injectable dry cryogels with excellent blood-sucking expansion
and blood clotting to cease hemorrhage for lethal deep-wounds,
coagulopathy and tissue regeneration. Chemical Engineering
Journal, 403, 126329.
17. Rieger, K. A., Birch, N. P., & Schiffman, J. D. (2013). Designing
electrospun nanofiber mats to promote wound healing–a review.
Journal of Materials Chemistry B, 1(36), 4531-4541.
18. Chaudhari, A. A., Vig, K., Baganizi, D. R., Sahu, R., Dixit, S.,
Dennis, V & Pillai, S. R. (2016). Future prospects for scaffolding
methods and biomaterials in skin tissue engineering: a review.
International journal of molecular sciences, 17(12), 1974.
19. Saghazadeh, S., Rinoldi, C., Schot, M., Kashaf, S. S., Sharifi, F.,
Jalilian, E., ... & Khademhosseini, A. (2018). Drug delivery
systems and materials for wound healing applications. Advanced
drug delivery reviews, 127, 138-166.
20. Agrawal, P., Soni, S., Mittal, G., & Bhatnagar, A. (2014). Role of
polymeric biomaterials as wound healing agents. The
international journal of lower extremity wounds, 13(3), 180-190.
21. Gupta, A., Kowalczuk, M., Heaselgrave, W., Britland, S. T.,
Martin, C., & Radecka, I. (2019). The production and application
of hydrogels for wound management: A review. European
Polymer Journal, 111, 134-151.
22. Irfan-Maqsood M (2018) Classification of Wounds: Know Before
Research and Clinical Practice. Genes Cells 4:1–4.
23. Simões, D., Miguel, S. P., Ribeiro, M. P., Coutinho, P.,
Mendonça, A. G., & Correia, I. J. (2018). Recent advances on
antimicrobial wound dressing: A review. European journal of
pharmaceutics and biopharmaceutics, 127, 130-141.
24. Vig,K.,Chaudhari,A.,Tripathi,S.,Dixit,S.,Sahu,R.,Pillai,S.&Singh,
S.R.(2017).Advances in skin regeneration using tissue
engineering. International journal of molecular sciences,18(4),789

447
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

25. Järbrink, K., Ni, G., Sönnergren, H., Schmidtchen, A., Pang, C.,
Bajpai, R., & Car, J. (2016). Prevalence and incidence of chronic
wounds and related complications: a protocol for a systematic
review. Systematic reviews, 5, 1-6.
26. Kurakula, M., Rao, G. K., Kiran, V., Hasnain, M. S., & Nayak, A.
K. (2020). Alginate-based hydrogel systems for drug releasing in
wound healing. In Alginates in Drug Delivery (pp. 323-358).
Academic Press.
27. Visha, M. G., & Karunagaran, M. (2019). A review on wound
healing. International Journal of Clinicopathological Correlation,
3(2), 50-59.
28. Kavalipati, N., Shah, J., Ramakrishan, A., & Vasnawala, H.
(2015). Pleiotropic effects of statins. Indian journal of
endocrinology and metabolism, 19(5), 554.
29. Jang, H., Mai, X. L., Lee, G., Ahn, J. H., Rhee, J., Truong, Q. K
& Kim, K. H. (2018). Simultaneous determination of statins in
human urine by dilute-and-shoot-liquid chromatography-mass
spectrometry. Mass Spectrometry Letters, 9(4), 95-99.
30. Rajendran N. K, KumarS.S.D, Houreld N. N, AbrahamseH
(2018) A Review on Nanoparticle Based Treatment for Wound
Healing. J. Drug Deliv. Sci. Technol 44:421–430.
31. Alizadeh J, Zeki AA, Mirzaei N, Tewary S, Rezaei Moghadam A,
Glogowska A, Nagakannan P, Eftekharpour E, Wiechec E,
Gordon JW, Xu FY, Field JT, Yoneda KY, Kenyon NJ, Hashemi
M, Hatch GM, Hombach-Klonisch S, Klonisch T, Ghavami S.
Mevalonate Cascade Inhibition by Simvastatin Induces the
Intrinsic Apoptosis Pathway via Depletion of Isoprenoids in
Tumor Cells. Sci Rep. 2017 Mar 27;7: 44841.
32. Rohilla, A., Rohilla, S., Kumar, A., Khan, M. U., & Deep, A.
(2016). Pleiotropic effects of statins: A boulevard to
cardioprotection. Arabian Journal of Chemistry, 9, S21-S27.
33. Thangamani, S., Mohammad, H., Abushahba, M. F., Hamed, M.
I., Sobreira, T. J., Hedrick, V. E & Seleem, M. N. (2015).
Exploring simvastatin, an antihyperlipidemic drug, as a potential
topical antibacterial agent. Scientific reports, 5(1), 16407.
34. Chen, X., Wu, J., Cao, X., Jiang, H., Wu, Z., Zeng, Z & Zhang, J.
(2021). The role of gel wound dressings loaded with stem cells in
the treatment of diabetic foot ulcers. American Journal of
Translational Research, 13(12), 13261.

448
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

35. Hsu, K. C., Luan, C. W., & Tsai, Y. W. (2017). Review of

silicone gel sheeting and silicone gel for the prevention of
hypertrophic scars and keloids. Wounds: a compendium of
clinical research and practice, 29(5), 154-158.
36. Liu, M., Chen, M., Xu, P., & Yang, Z. (2015). Nanostructured
cubosomes as a platform for oral drug delivery. Current
Pharmaceutical Biotechnology, 16(4), 313-321.
37. Teba, H. E., Khalil, I. A., & El Sorogy, H. M. (2021). Novel
cubosome based system for ocular delivery of acetazolamide.
Drug Delivery, 28(1), 2177-2186.
38. Zakaria, F., Ashari, S. E., Azmi, I. D. M., & Rahman, M. B. A.
(2022). Recent advances in encapsulation of drug delivery (active
substance) in cubosomes for skin diseases. Journal of Drug
Delivery Science and Technology, 68, 103097.
39. Sivadasan, D., Sultan, M. H., Alqahtani, S. S., & Javed, S. (2023).
Cubosomes in Drug Delivery—A Comprehensive Review on Its
Structural Components, Preparation Techniques and Therapeutic
Applications. Biomedicines, 11(4), 1114.
40. Ahmed, L. M., Hassanein, K. M., Mohamed, F. A., & Elfaham, T.
H. (2023). Formulation and evaluation of simvastatin cubosomal
nanoparticles for assessing its wound healing effect. Scientific
Reports, 13(1), 17941.
41. Amoozegar, H., Ghaffari, A., Keramati, M., Ahmadi, S., Dizaji,
S., Moayer, F & Bakhshandeh, H. (2022). A novel formulation of
simvastatin nanoemulsion gel for infected wound therapy: In vitro
and in vivo assessment. Journal of Drug Delivery Science and
Technology, 72, 103369.
42. Madi, M., & Kassem, A. (2018). Topical simvastatin gel as a
novel therapeutic modality for palatal donor site wound healing
following free gingival graft procedure. Acta Odontologica
Scandinavica, 76(3), 212-219.
43. Mantha, S., Pillai, S., Khayambashi, P., Upadhyay, A., Zhang, Y.,
Tao, O., & Tran, S. D. (2019). Smart hydrogels in tissue
engineering and regenerative medicine. Materials, 12(20), 3323.
44. Chirani, N., Yahia, L. H., Gritsch, L., Motta, F. L., Chirani, S., &
Farè, S. (2015). History and applications of hydrogels. Journal of
biomedical sciences, 4(02), 1-23.

449
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

45. Liu, S., Li, X., & Han, L. (2022). Recent developments in stimuli‐
responsive hydrogels for biomedical applications. Biosurface and
Biotribology, 8(4), 290-306.
46. Stan, D., Tanase, C., Avram, M., Apetrei, R., Mincu, N. B.,
Mateescu, A. L., & Stan, D. (2021). Wound healing applications
of creams and “smart” hydrogels. Experimental Dermatology,
30(9), 1218-1232.
47. Brumberg, V., Astrelina, T., Malivanova, T., & Samoilov, A.
(2021). Modern wound dressings: Hydrogel dressings.
Biomedicines, 9(9), 1235.
48. Liu, L., Chakma, A., & Feng, X. (2008). Gas permeation through
water-swollen hydrogel membranes. Journal of Membrane
Science, 310(1-2), 66-75.
49. Ruffo, M., Parisi, O. I., Dattilo, M., Patitucci, F., Malivindi, R.,
Pezzi, V & Puoci, F. (2022). Synthesis and evaluation of wound
healing properties of hydro-diab hydrogel loaded with green-
synthetized AGNPS: In vitro and in ex vivo studies. Drug
Delivery and Translational Research, 12(8), 1881-1894.
50. Gupta, B., Sharma, G., Sharma, P., Sandhu, S. K., & Kaur, I. P.
(2022). Self-gelling solid lipid nanoparticle hydrogel containing
simvastatin as suitable wound dressing: an investigative study.
Gels, 8(1), 58.
51. Yasasvini, S., Anusa, R. S., Vedha Hari, B. N., Prabhu, P. C., &
Ramya Devi, D. (2017). Topical hydrogel matrix loaded with
Simvastatin microparticles for enhanced wound healing activity.
Materials Science and Engineering: C, 72, 160-167.
52. Farghaly Aly, U., Abou-Taleb, H. A., Abdellatif, A. A., & Sameh
Tolba, N. (2019). Formulation and evaluation of simvastatin
polymeric nanoparticles loaded in hydrogel for optimum wound
healing purpose. Drug design, development and therapy, 1567-
1580.
53. Khoshneviszadeh, M., Ashkani-Esfahani, S., Namazi, M. R.,
Noorafshan, A., Geramizadeh, B., & Miri, R. (2014). Topical
simvastatin enhances tissue regeneration in full-thickness skin
wounds in rat models. Iranian journal of pharmaceutical research:
IJPR, 13(1), 263.
54. Yu, W., Jiang, Y. Y., Sun, T. W., Qi, C., Zhao, H., Chen, F., ... &
He, Y. (2016). Design of a novel wound dressing consisting of
alginate hydrogel and simvastatin-incorporated mesoporous

450
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

hydroxyapatite microspheres for cutaneous wound healing. RSC

advances, 6(106), 104375-104387.
55. Janipour, Z., Najafi, H., Abolmaali, S. S., Heidari, R., Azarpira,
N., Ö
zyılmaz, E. D., & Tamaddon, A. M. (2023). Simvastatin-
Releasing Nanofibrous Peptide Hydrogels for Accelerated
Healing of Diabetic Wounds. ACS Applied Bio Materials, 6(11),
4620-4628.
56. Shen, Z., Zhang, C., Wang, T., & Xu, J. (2023). Advances in
Functional Hydrogel Wound Dressings: A Review. Polymers,
15(9), 2000.
57. Savencu, I., Iurian, S., Porfire, A., Bogdan, C., & Tomuță, I.
(2021). Review of advances in polymeric wound dressing films.
Reactive and Functional Polymers, 168, 105059.
58. Rezvanian, M., Ahmad, N., Amin, M. C. I. M., & Ng, S. F.
(2017). Optimization, characterization, and in vitro assessment of
alginate-pectin ionic cross-linked hydrogel film for wound
dressing applications. International journal of biological
macromolecules, 97, 131-140.
59. Rezvanian, M., Ng, S. F., Alavi, T., & Ahmad, W. (2021). In-
vivo evaluation of Alginate-Pectin hydrogel film loaded with
Simvastatin for diabetic wound healing in Streptozotocin-induced
diabetic rats. International Journal of Biological Macromolecules,
171, 308-319.
60. Tufail, S., Siddique, M. I., Sarfraz, M., Sohail, M. F., Shahid, M.
N., Omer, M. O & Rasool, F. (2022). Simvastatin nanoparticles
loaded polymeric film as a potential strategy for diabetic wound
healing: In vitro and in vivo evaluation. Current drug delivery,
19(5), 534-546.
61. Hide, D., Gil, M., Andrade, F., Rafael, D., Raurell, I., Bravo, M
& Martell, M. (2020). Simvastatin-loaded polymeric micelles are
more effective and less toxic than conventional statins in a pre-
clinical model of advanced chronic liver disease. Nanomedicine:
Nanotechnology, Biology and Medicine, 29, 102267.
62. Varshosaz, J., Taymouri, S., Minaiyan, M., Rastegarnasab, F., &
Baradaran, A. (2018). Development and in vitro/in vivo
evaluation of HPMC/chitosan gel containing simvastatin loaded
self-assembled nanomicelles as a potent wound healing agent.
Drug Development and Industrial Pharmacy, 44(2), 276-288.

451
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

63. Zamani, M., Shirinzadeh, A., Aghajanzadeh, M., Andalib, S., &
Danafar, H. (2019). In vivo study of mPEG–PCL as a
nanocarriers for anti-inflammatory drug delivery of simvastatin.
Pharmaceutical Development and Technology, 24(6), 663-670.
64. Mayba, J. N., & Gooderham, M. J. (2017). Review of atopic
dermatitis and topical therapies. Journal of Cutaneous Medicine
and Surgery, 21(3), 227-236.
65. Gwarzo, I. D., Mohd Bohari, S. P., Abdul Wahab, R., & Zia, A.
(2022). Recent advances and future prospects in topical creams
from medicinal plants to expedite wound healing: a review.
Biotechnology & Biotechnological Equipment, 36(1), 82-94.
66. Boonyarattanasoonthorn, T., Kongratanapasert, T., Maiuthed, A.,
Hamlin, R., Kijtawornrat, A., & Khemawoot, P. (2022).
Bioenhancing effects of piperine and curcumin on triterpenoid
pharmacokinetics and neurodegenerative metabolomes from
Centella asiatica extract in beagle dogs. Scientific Reports, 12(1),
20789.
67. Sahu D, Thakur A, Sahu G KushagraNagori A. R, Srivastava R.
K, Nakhate K. T, Sharma M (2022) Studies on the Effect of
Herbal Bio Enhacers on Wound Healing Activity of Simvastatin
in Rats. World J.Pharm.Pharm.Sci 1899–1911.
68. Saghazadeh, S., Rinoldi, C., Schot, M., Kashaf, S. S., Sharifi, F.,
Jalilian, E & Khademhosseini, A. (2018). Drug delivery systems
and materials for wound healing applications. Advanced drug
delivery reviews, 127, 138-166.
69. Negut, I., Grumezescu, V., & Grumezescu, A. M. (2018).
Treatment strategies for infected wounds. Molecules, 23(9), 2392.
70. Kale, R., Doifode, D., & Shete, P. (2020). Film Forming,
Antimicrobial and Growth Promoting Wound Healing Spray
Formulation. International Journal of Pharmaceutical
Investigation, 10(3).
71. Kumar, A., & Jacob, A. (2022). Techniques in scaffold
fabrication process for tissue engineering applications: A review.
Journal of Applied Biology and Biotechnology, 10(3), 163-176.
72. Asadian, M., Chan, K. V., Norouzi, M., Grande, S., Cools, P.,
Morent, R., & De Geyter, N. (2020). Fabrication and plasma
modification of nanofibrous tissue engineering scaffolds.
Nanomaterials, 10(1), 119.

452
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

73. Orgul, D., Eroglu, H., & Hekimoglu, S. (2017). Formulation and
characterization of tissue scaffolds containing simvastatin loaded
nanostructured lipid carriers for treatment of diabetic wounds.
Journal of Drug Delivery Science and Technology, 41, 280-292.
74. Mousavi S., Azadi A., Tanideh N., Omidifar N., Ghasemiyeh P.,
Mohammadi-Samani S.(2023).Simvastatin-loaded nanostructured
lipid carriers as topical drug delivery system for wound healing
purposes: preparation, characterization, and in vivo
histopathological studies. Adv. Pharm. Bull., 13(4), 761-771.
75. Keller, B. C. (2011) Methods of wound healing and scar
modulation. U.S. Patent Application No. 12/833,902.
76. Topaz (2011) Wound Healing Device. US 2011/0130712 A1.
77. Austin (2013) Wound Dressings Comprising Hydrated Hydrogels
and Enzymes. AU 2011205044 B2.
78. Davis (2014) Wound dressings comprising hydrated hydrogels
and enzymes. EP 1 693073 B1.
79. Green (2017) Wound healing. US 2017 / 0252320 A1.
80. Perricone, N. V. (2018) Wound healing using topical systems and
method. U.S. Patent No. 9,943,562. Washington, DC: U.S. Patent
and Trademark Office.
81. Thomas A .Mustoe (2019) Topical treatment of wounds with
statins and cholesterol for scar reduction. US 2019 / 0030045 A1.

Dr. Rana Zainuddin

Associate Professor, Quality Assurance Department, Y.B. Chavan
College of Pharmacy, Dr. Rafiq Zakaria Campus, Rauza Baugh,
Aurangabad - 431001, Maharashtra, India.
Mob. 8668215030, Contact: [email protected]

Dr. Jaiprakash Sangshetti

Professor, Quality Assurance Department, Y.B. Chavan College of
Pharmacy, Dr. Rafiq Zakaria Campus, Rauza Baugh, Aurangabad -
431001, Maharashtra, India.
Mob.: 9975042784 / Email : [email protected]

Mr. Shoeb A. Rahim

M.Pharmacy (pursuing), Quality Assurance Department, Y.B. Chavan
College of Pharmacy, Dr. Rafiq Zakaria Campus, Rauza Baugh,
Aurangabad - 431001, Maharashtra, India.
Mob. 7720805586 / Email: [email protected]
453
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 37

REVIEW AND GRAPHICAL PRESENTATION OF

PRIVATE UNIVERSITIES IN INDIA UP TO 2021

Susanta Das

Abstract:
This piece sheds light on the significant prevalence of private
universities, comprising roughly 40% of India's total university
landscape, a figure that continues to rise. Delving into their expansion
and geographic dispersion across the nation, it examines trends
observed over time and within different states and six geographic
zones. Moreover, it emphasizes the notable underrepresentation of
private universities within India's top 100 universities, as identified by
the NIRF, highlighting pertinent dynamics within the higher
education sector.

Key words: Private universities, yearly growth, distribution, National

Education Policy (NEP) 2020, National Institutional Ranking
Framework (NIRF), Higher Educational Institutions (HEIs).

Introduction:
he proliferation of private universities in India is swiftly
on the rise, driven by their diverse offerings spanning
both traditional and professional courses at undergraduate,
postgraduate, and doctoral levels, all in accordance with
the directives of regulatory bodies such as the UGC, AICTE, and
others [1]. These institutions boast commendable infrastructure,
featuring state-of-the-art classrooms and laboratories conducive to
blended teaching-learning approaches. They further enhance the
academic experience by facilitating internships and training
opportunities across public and private organizations, providing on-
campus accommodation, fostering sports and recreational amenities,
and orchestrating campus recruitment drives, among other benefits.
Such provisions empower students to select courses aligned with their
academic and personal aspirations.The advent of the new NEP 2020
underscores the imperative for HEIs to adopt a multidisciplinary
approach [2], thereby foreshadowing an accelerated trajectory for

454

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.37
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

private universities' contributions to both the HEI landscape and

India's economic advancement in the forthcoming years,
notwithstanding the manifold challenges they confront [2-4].
Presently, India hosts more than 400 private universities, distributed
across the length and breadth of the nation [5].

In this article, we offer a succinct overview of the evolution of private

universities over time, their geographical dispersion among various
states and zones, density (measured as the number per ~ 10,000 km 2),
and their representation in the esteemed list of the top 100 universities
as per the NIRF rankings within the University category.

Results and discussion:

As of the most recent compilation released by the University Grants
Commission (UGC) in August 2021, the tally of universities in India
stands at approximately 1005 [5]. This assortment comprises 437
State Universities, representing about 43%, 126 Deemed to be
Universities, accounting for roughly 13%, 54 Central Universities,
constituting around 5%, and 388 Private Universities, encompassing
approximately 40% of the total [5]. Figure 1 visually depicts the
breakdown of universities across these categories. The statistics
unmistakably underscore the substantial presence of private
universities within the HEIs landscape in India.

Figure 1: The count and proportion of universities

455
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

categorized in different groups.

The inception of the first two private universities occurred between
1995 and 1996 [6]. Following this, the period from 1996 to 2000
elapsed without the establishment of any new private universities.
However, in 2001, a solitary institution was founded, marking the
beginning of an upward trend wherein multiple universities have been
established annually ever since. Until 2007, the yearly count remained
below 10. However, a notable surge occurred in 2008, witnessing the
establishment of 17 new private universities. Subsequently, the
numbers consistently surpassed ten per annum. The pinnacle was
reached in 2018, with the highest number of new private universities
emerging in a single year, totaling 39 additions to the roster [6].
Figure 2 illustrates the cumulative count of newly established/notified
private universities per annum from 2001 to 2021. It's important to
acknowledge that slight variations may exist in the data.

Figure 2: The quantity of private universities established annually.

The timeframe spanning from 2001 to 2020 has been segmented into
four distinct five-year intervals: 2001–2005, 2006–2010, 2011–2015,
and 2016–2020, facilitating an examination of the establishment
patterns of new private universities within each block, as depicted in
Figure 3. This visualization indicates that only 17 universities (5%)
were established during the initial period of 2001–2005.
Subsequently, in the following 2006–2010 interval, 72 universities
(19%) came into existence. The subsequent period of 2011–2015
witnessed the establishment of 148 new private universities,
representing 40% of the total. However, there was a downturn during

456
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

the 2016–2020 period, with 136 (36%) universities founded. This

deceleration could be attributed to the nationwide lockdown imposed
in 2020 amid the COVID-19 pandemic. The stringent measures of the
lockdown severely disrupted educational activities, resulting in the
closure of physical educational spaces and unprecedented
interruptions in academic proceedings [6-8]. Merely eleven private
universities were officially notified in 2020 (as depicted in Fig. 2).
Notably, the trend experienced a resurgence in 2021, with 13 new
private universities already notified by August 2021, surpassing the
previous year's count [5].

Figure 3: Count of newly established private universities within each

consecutive five-year period.

Figure 4 illustrates the distribution of private universities across

different states. Rajasthan leads the tally with 52 private universities,
a figure attributed to its status as India's largest state [9]. Following
closely are Gujarat (46) (the fifth largest state), Madhya Pradesh (MP)
(39) (the second largest state), and Uttar Pradesh (UP) (31) (the fourth
largest state), each boasting over thirty private universities.
Collectively, these four states represent approximately 43% of the
total. Maharashtra, the third largest state, hosts a modest 19 private
universities, significantly fewer than UP and Gujarat. Conversely,
Tripura and Mizoram each accommodate one (less than one percent
of the total), while Kerala lacks any private universities altogether.
Several states (as depicted in Fig. 4) contribute fewer than ten private
universities each, with West Bengal slightly exceeding this count.

457
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 4: Distribution of private universities across states. (Note: The

percentage against Tripura and Mizoram states, while minimal, is not
zero.)

Figure 5 presents the concentration of private universities, denoted as

the number of institutions per 10,000 km2 (approximate
normalization), in each state. The top five states in terms of private
universities per 10,000 km2 are Sikkim (5.63), Haryana (5.42),
Meghalaya (4.01), Uttarakhand (3.55), and Punjab (3.17). Noteworthy
is Sikkim's exceptional status, boasting the highest density of private
universities (5.63) per 10,000 km2despite its relatively small size (27th
in area). Conversely, the top five states by area—Rajasthan, Madhya
Pradesh (MP), Maharashtra, Uttar Pradesh (UP), and Gujarat—exhibit
densities of 1.51, 1.26, 0.61, 1.28, and 2.34 private universities per
10,000 km2. It's worth mentioning that despite these states accounting
for over 48% of the total 388 private universities, their density stands
at only 1.4 private universities per ~10,000 km2.

458
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 5:The count of private universities per

10,000 km2 in each state.

Private universities are further categorized into six distinct zones [9],
as depicted in Figure 6. It is evident that the West zone boasts the
highest density of private universities, housing 117 out of 388,
accounting for 30% of the total, closely followed by the North zone
(encompassing Himachal Pradesh, Punjab, Uttarakhand, Uttar
Pradesh, & Haryana), which accommodates 107 universities (28%).
This prevalence is largely attributed to the presence of three Western
states: Rajasthan (52), Gujarat (46), and Maharashtra (19). Uttar
Pradesh and Haryana significantly contribute to the North zone (as
shown in Fig. 4). Despite being comprised of 8 states (Assam,
Sikkim, Nagaland, Meghalaya, Manipur, Mizoram, Tripura, and
Arunachal Pradesh), the North-East zone hosts only 37 (9%) private
universities. In contrast, the Central zone, consisting of only two
states—Madhya Pradesh (39) and Chhattisgarh (13)—harbors 52
(13%) private universities. Hence, there exists a palpable necessity for
the establishment of additional universities, whether central, state, or
private, in the North-Eastern region to cater to the educational
requirements of the students in that locality.

459
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 6: The allocation of private universities

across six designated zones.

In the Eastern zone, the state of Jharkhand holds the majority share
(37%) of private universities, with West Bengal, Odisha, and Bihar
trailing behind, as illustrated in Figure 7. It's worth noting that despite
its smaller size, Jharkhand surpasses Odisha, which is the largest state
in terms of area, in the count of private universities within the Eastern
zone.

Moving to the Southern zone, Karnataka hosts 20 private universities,

representing a significant contribution of 59% to the total private
universities (34) in the region, as depicted in Figure 8. Notably, all
three private universities in Tamil Nadu were established in the year
2021 [5].

These findings underscore the uneven distribution of private

universities (measured by the number of private universities per
10,000 km2) across the nation. It is worth highlighting that the NEP
2020 stresses the need to establish at least one private or public higher
education institution in or around every district or underprivileged
region [2].

460
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 7: The allocation of private universities

across individual states within the Eastern region.

Figure 8: The dispersion of private universities

among states in the Southern region.

An examination of the NIRF from 2016 to 2020 unveils a noteworthy

observation: despite the existence of numerous longstanding private
universities, only a handful (around 10) manage to secure a position
in the top 100 within the University category [10]. The assessment
461
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

criteria encompass diverse aspects with each sub-criterion carrying

substantial weightage towards the final ranking. Furthermore,
accreditation by the NAAC serves as a pivotal determinant in this
evaluation process [11]. It becomes apparent that bolstering
performance across these parameters is imperative for private
universities to attain higher rankings and foster overall excellence.

Conclusion:
In conclusion, this manuscript presents a thorough examination of the
landscape of private universities in India, offering insights into their
evolution and distribution at both state and regional levels. Utilizing
graphical representations and robust statistical analysis, it illuminates
the prevailing trends, challenges, and opportunities within this sector.
These educational institutions not only furnish outstanding resources
for academic and professional advancement but also play a pivotal
role in fostering the economic growth of our nation. Against the
backdrop of India's aspirations to emerge as a global education hub
and achieve a five-trillion-dollar economy, the ascent of private
universities assumes paramount significance. Furthermore, it
underscores the presence of private universities within the NIRF's
University category, highlighting their impact and footprint. Notably,
private universities constitute a substantial portion of India's overall
university landscape, with their concentration varying across states
and regions. Analysis of NIRF data indicates areas where private
universities can enhance their performance. It is anticipated that the
proliferation of private universities will continue in the forthcoming
years, further bolstering their contribution to the nation's development
endeavors.It is anticipated that as the socio-economic conditions of
the nation improve, more such institutions will emerge.

References
1. UGC (ugc.ac.in), AICTE (aicte-india.org), PCI (https://www.pci.
nic.in), Council of Architecture (https://www.coa.gov.in), BCI
(http://www.barcouncilofindia.org).
2. New NEP 2020 (https://www.education.gov.in/sites/upload_
files/mhrd/files/NEP_Final_English_0.pdf).
3. M. Croak, The Effects of STEM Education on Economic Growth,
Honors Theses, 1705 (2018) (https://digitalworks.union.edu/
theses/1705).
4. M-H Lee, C.S. Chai, H-Y Hong, STEM Education in Asia
Pacific: Challenges and Development, Asia-Pacific Edu Res, 28,
1-4 (2019) (https://doi.org/10.1007/s40299-018-0424-z).

462
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

5. Consolidated list of Universities – Total No. of Universities in the

Country as on 06.08.2021 (https://www.ugc.ac.in/oldpdf/
Consolidated%20list%20of%20All%20Universities.pdf);State
Private Universities(https://www.ugc.ac.in/privatuniversity.aspx).
6. Saira Naseer, Sidra Khalid, Summaira Parveen, Kashif Abbass,
Huaming Song, and Monica Violeta Achim, COVID-19 outbreak:
Impact on global economy, Front. Public Health, 10, 1009393
(2022) (https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2022.1009393).
7. Helen Onyeaka, Christian K Anumudu, Zainab T Al-Sharify,
Esther Egele-Godswill, and Paul Mbaegbu, COVID-19 pandemic:
A review of the global lockdown and its far-reaching effects,
Science Progress, 104 (2), 1, (2021) (https://doi.org/10.1177/
00368504211019854).
8. S. Shanmuga Priyaa, Erdem Cuceb and K. Sudhakar, A
perspective of COVID 19 impact on global economy, energy and
environment, International Journal of Sustainable Engineering, 14
(6), 1290, (2021) (https://doi.org/10.1080/19397038.2021.
1964634).
9. The classification of Indian states and union territories based on
their geographical expanse. (https://simple.wikipedia.org/wiki
/List_of_states_and_union_territories_of_India_by_area).
10. NIRF (https://www.nirfindia.org/).
11. NAAC (naac.gov.in).

Susanta Das
School of Engineering, Ajeenkya DY Patil University, Charoli Bk. via
Lohegaon, Pune, Maharashtra, India – 412105

463
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 38

IMPACT OF ENVIRONMENTAL RADIO ACTIVITY

ON HUMAN

Debasmita Bondyopadhaya (Kanjilal)

Abstract:
The radiation and radio active materials now have become essential
parts of human environment. All living creatures, and surroundings,
since the beginning of the creation of the Earth (starting from its
origin ~ 4.5 billion years ago), have been, and are still being, exposed
to radiation. About 82% of human-absorbed radiation doses, which
are out of control, arise from the natural sources such as cosmic,
terrestrial, and exposure from inhalation or intake of radioactive
foodstuffs. Several scientific results have been published regarding
the effect of background radiation on human health. Gamma radiation
emitted from natural sources is largely due to primordial radio-
nuclides, mainly 232Th and 238U series, and their decay products, as
well as 40K, which exist at trace levels in the earth's crust. Their
concentrations in soil, sands, and rocks fluctuates depending on the
location and time of each region. Building materials, used in houses,
are also affecting the dose rate of background radiations. Apart from
these, several radioactive isotopes like 60C, 90Sr, 90mTc, 131I, 137Cs,
239
Pu, and many more are routinely produced in laboratory and have
been used in a variety of applications in medical, industrial, scientific,
defence and agricultural fields. In the present review article most of
the natural and artificial radiation sources and their effects on human
life and on environment will be outlined.
Key words: Environmental radioactivity Impact, Background
radiation, terrestrial, cosmic rays, external and internal Human
exposure, Natural and Artificial Radioactive pollution, human’s
health
Introduction:
n human environment, since its evolution on Earth, all are
constantly penetrated by ionizing radiation. Naturally, we,
every individual on earth is exposed to a certain level of
background radiation in everyday life. We can not find

464

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.38
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

any place on earth that has no natural radioactivity. The sources of

radioactivity in the environment can be natural or artificial.
Radioactivity occurs in the process of nucleo-synthesis, when the
long-lived unstable nuclei (radionuclides) strive to become stable and
emit energy in the form of ionizing radiation. Each radio-nuclide has
a specific type of radiation, emitted by its nucleus. Radioactive
materials, specially uranium's and thorium's series, and
potassium's K-40 isotope are found naturally in soil and rock that
constitute planet earth, in water and oceans, and in building materials
and homes. They are the source of terrestrial radiation. The radon-222
isotope (Rn-222) is present in the air and gives off the biggest
radiation dose humans are exposed to (nearly two-thirds of our natural
background radiation exposure). Radio-isotopes such as polonium-
210, carbon-14 and potassium-40are naturally exist within the human
body and potassium-40 is also present in many common foods
including red meats, carrots, bananas etc. Earth’s deep outer
atmosphere is continually bombarded by cosmic radiation. This
radiation usually originates from a variety of sources, including the
sun, stars, collapsing stars (such as neutron stars), quasars, and in the
hot galactic and intergalactic plasma. Regions at higher altitudes
receive more cosmic radiation. Cosmic radiation produces x-rays and
neutrons as it penetrates through the atmosphere. Scientists believe
that the high level of natural radio-nuclides (uranium, potassium, and
thorium) as well as the thin layer of atmosphere in the higher altitude
regions (mountains) are reasons why they have greater levels of
radiation exposure to human.

465
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

(taken from net. Ref: https://nuclearsafety.gc.ca/eng/resources/fact-

sheets/natural-background-radiation.cfm)
Radiation : types and sources
The word “Radiation” meaning energy given off as a form of either
rays or particles. The outstanding discoveries of x-rays by W.
Roentgen in 1895, Radioactivity by H. Becquerel in 1896, Artificial
radioactivity by F. Joliot and I. Joliot-Curie in 1934 and Nuclear
Fission by O. Hahn and F. Strassman in 1939, led the way for
artificially production of several hundreds of radioactive isotopes of
different natural elements. They are mainly produced for the interest
of mankind and society in various nuclear reactors and particle
accelerators. We commonly associate the word Radiation with
nuclear and atomic process like, ionizing radiation. All the
radioactive isotopes having unique half-lives (ranging from nano
second to billions of years) undergo radioactive decay via emission of
different types of ionizing radiations, such as, alpha (α), beta (β) and
gamma (γ) rays. Often, environmental radiation is termed as
"background radiation”, as because, this is always present in the
environment. Majority of the background radiation occurs naturally
and a small fraction comes from man-made elements. Any one
person's annual environmental radiation dose will vary depending
upon their activities, age and location.

Sources of Environmental Radiation

The Environmental Radiation are mainly categorized by their sources.
i) Naturally occurring primordial radioactive elements with half lives
comparable to the age of the Earth and the cosmic rays coming from
the sun and other celestial events in the universe and ii) the man-made
artificial radioactivity, for example when a stable isotope is
bombarded with high-speed particles (such as protons or neutrons) in
nuclear laboratory. Brief review and comparison of the dose rates
arising from natural and man made sources to the Indian population in
Indian major cities are reported in reference (Ramachandran, 2011).

Natural sources of radiation

Granite rocks are known to be a major environmental deposit of
natural radioactive elements. The soils formed from the weathering of
such rocks generally contain high concentrations of these primordial
radionuclides like uranium-238 (4.47 × 10 9 y), uranium-235 (7.04 ×
108 y), thorium-232 (1.4 × 1010 y), along with their radioactive decay
products (such as radium (Ra), radon gas (Rn), radioactive lead (Pb),
and polonium (Po) isotopes) and also radioactive potassium-40 (1.28
× 109 y) (Zlobina, 2019 and Roslyakov, 2013). These radio-nuclide,

466
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

presents in Earth’s crust, cosmic rays, and human-body constituent

radioactive carbon-14 (5730 y), and potassium-40, are main sources
of natural ionizing radiation. These are maximum contributing
environmental radiation exposure dose to human body. Some of the
high natural radiation background areas are located in regions with
soils formed from granite rocks (Wang, 2005; Hendry, 2009; Aliyu,
2015). The human populations living in these areas are exposed to
enhanced radiation levels and the biological effects of radiation doses
have been investigated over the last decades (UNSCEAR, 2006).

Terrestrial Sources of Radiation

Radioactive nuclides, 238U, 235U, 232Th (all having very long half-lives)
along with their decay products and 40K are found throughout nature.
They are present in the soil, rocks, minerals, water, and vegetation.
Some of these materials are ingested with food and water, while
others, such as radon, are inhaled. Essentially all air contains radon,
which is responsible for nearly two-thirds of our natural background
radiation exposure. The dose from terrestrial sources also
significantly varies in different parts of the world depending on
surrounding geological condition. Locations with higher
concentrations of uranium and thorium in their soil have higher dose
levels. The state of Kerala in India, with abundant deposits of
monazite sands rich in thorium, is one example of such areas with
high natural radiation. The major isotopes of concern for terrestrial
radiation (found essentially everywhere) are uranium and the decay
products of uranium, such as thorium, radium, and radon. According
to United Nations, daily intake of uranium through food and water
varies from 1-5 mg per day in uncontaminated zone to 13-18 mg per
day or even more in uranium mining areas.

Radiation from “Inhalation”:

Radioactive radon-222 naturally occurs as one of the important
daughter products both in uranium-238 and thorium-232 decay chain
series. It is an odourless and colourless radioactive gas. Being an inert
gas, it does not react with surrounding material and hence radon gas
can readily move up to enter the atmosphere from the ground. Thoron
is a radioactive gas produced by the decay of thorium. Radon and
thoron levels vary considerably by location depending on the
composition of soil and rock. Once released into the air, these gases
will normally dilute to harmless levels in the atmosphere but
occasionally they become trapped and build up accumulation inside
buildings and are inhaled by occupants. Most of the building
materials (bricks, stones etc.) being extracted from earth, are mildly

467
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

radioactive and as a results the residents are always exposed to 222Rn

inside as well as outside the room. The gas poses a health risk not
only to uranium miners, but also to homeowners if they are
undergoing long-term exposure of accumulated radon inside their
house. On an average, it is the largest source of natural radiation
exposure and the worldwide average annual effective dose of radon
radiation is approximately 120-200 millirems. Based on a vast body
survey, the World Health Organization (WHO) recently
acknowledged that prolonged exposure to radon gas through
inhalation as the second leading health risk factor for lung cancer,
after cigarette smoke, and accounting for 3–14% of all lung cancers.
The International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP) and
WHO suggested a maximum tolerable concentration of radon in
indoor air of 100 Bq m−3 (annual average), below which no significant
health effects have been observed. Continued exposure to radon at
100 Bq m−3 corresponds to an effective dose of about 300 millirems
per year through inhalation. It must be noted that, for each additional
100 Bq m−3, the lung cancer incidence increases 16% per year (Hajo,
2009). Not only that, drinking water also contains dissolved radon and
the radiation emitted by radon and its radioactive decay products
exposes sensitive cells in the stomach as well as other organs once it
is absorbed into the bloodstream. Observing this danger, the United
States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) proposed a maximum
contaminant level for radon in the water around 11 Bq L −1(USEPA,
1991). Following ICRP and WHO recommendations, many countries
adopted maximum tolerable radon concentrations in indoor air
(Euratom). Natural Hot spring water usually contains high
concentrations of 222Rn due to either radioactive 226Ra dissolving in
the water after interacting with rock and soil in the earth or 222Rn
entering the water from rocks containing 226Ra. People of many
countries like Japan, China has long used hot spring waters for
medicinal purposes and beautification of skin. It is, very interesting to
study the contribution of 222Rn doses from natural hot spring water
as part of radiation protection for public health (Nugraha, 2021).

Radiation from “Ingestion” of Foodstuffs: Almost all of the

foodstuffs available in natural environment contain a certain level of
natural radio-isotopes that are widely diffused in solids, liquids and
gases. For instance, vegetables are typically cultivated in soil and
ground water which contains radioactive minerals. Consumption of
food and drinking water through ingestion therefore leads to internal

468
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

exposure to natural radiation.Potassium-40 is the main source of

internal irradiation (aside from radon decay) found in a variety of
common everyday foods including red meats, white potatoes, carrots,
bananas, beans and nuts; 14C is found in vegetables; 90Sr in local milk;
137
Cs, 209Pu, 241Am are present in mushrooms, fish, meet, cattle milk
etc. The average effective dose from these sources is approximately
30millirems a year.

Internal Radiation: All human body itself is constantly exposed to

significant amount of internal radiation, mainly from radioactive
potassium-40 (40K) and carbon-14 (14C) inside their bodies since birth
and, therefore, is the source of exposure to others as well. Presence of
such radio-nuclides as a body ingredients are controlled by the
biological process. The variation in dose from one person to another
is not as great as the variation in dose from cosmic and terrestrial
sources. The average annual dose to a person from internal
radioactive material is about 40 millirems/year. Generally in young
man, the presence of radionuclide 40K, is found to be comparatively
higher than that of an old man.

Cosmic radiation
The sun, stars and different celestial events send a constant stream of
cosmic radiation that enter Earth’s atmosphere, much like a steady
drizzle of rain. This radiations act as important sources of
environmental radiation pollution. It is basically a mixture of different
types of extremely energetic particles and mostly contains high-
energy protons, neutrons, electrons, positrons, and other particles as
well as gamma and x-radiation (photon particle). Some particles make
it to the ground, while others interact with the atmosphere to create
different types of radiation. Radiation levels increase as we get closer
to the source, so the amount of cosmic radiation generally increases
with elevation. The higher the altitude, the higher the dose. That is
why those living in Shimla, India (altitude ~ 7,238 feet) receive a
higher annual radiation dose from cosmic radiation than someone
living at sea level (altitude ~ 0 feet). Flying in an airplane increases
exposure to cosmic radiation. Apart from elevation, the amount (or
dose) of cosmic radiation that we receive, depends significantly on
the atmospheric conditions, and the Earth's magnetic field.

Artificial / Man-made Sources of Radiation and Radioactive

waste
Since the discovery of artificial or induced radioactivity by Irene
Joliet-Curie and her husband Frédéric Joliot several radiactive

469
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

isotopes like 11C, 60C, 90Sr, 90mTc, 131I, 137Cs, 239Pu, 241Am and many
more are routinely produced and have been utilized in a variety of
applications in medical, industrial, scientific, defence and agricultural
fields. But there is always possibility of generating harmful
radioactive releases as byproducts or by accidents like, fallout from
weapon tests, waste disposals from nuclear reactor operations and
from other industrial, agricultural sectors. If these radio-nuclides
released without recommended level, it will act as nuclear pollutants
and hence increase the radiation exposure to public health. A few
man-made sources that expose the public to radiation are Diagnostic
x-rays, Nuclear medicine products (iodine-131, cesium-137, and
others), consumer products, building and road construction materials,
Combustible fuels (including gas and coal), security systems,
Televisions, Smoke detectors (americium), Luminous watches
(tritium), Tobacco (polonium-210), nuclear weapons testing etc.

Medical Field
Still now the most significant source of man-made radiation exposure
to the general public is from medical diagnostic and therapeutic use of
ionizing radiation, such as diagnostic X-rays, nuclear medicine etc.
Some of the major isotopes used in nuclear medicine and radiological
treatment are 131I, 137Cs, 90mTc, and others. Among these radioisotopes
some have short half-lives, which means they decay quickly and are
suitable for diagnostic purposes; while others with longer half-lives
take more time to decay, which makes them suitable for therapeutic
purposes (Zlobina, 2022). Like other field, both short-term and long-
term risks may arise from the very low doses of radiation exposure.
Usually a beam of high energy X-rays, γ-rays or electrons is applied
to kill the cells of some targeted diseased tissue. Irradiation can
damage DNA cell, but due to low amounts of radiation used in each
imaging procedure, cells can normally repair themselves. When cells
get too much radiation over time, this damage can lead to cancer
[https://www.cdc.gov/nceh/radiation/ionizing.htm].

Generation of Nuclear Electricity

Nuclear power reactors use heat, generated during atomic fission, to
boil water and produce pressurized steam. The steam is then
channelized to rotate the turbines blades that drive magnetic
generators to produce electricity. Nuclear power plants primarily use
238
U, 235U, 239Pu (artificially produced from 232Th) as most common
nuclear fuel to generate electricity. Presently some reactors use mixed
oxide fuel (MOX) containing enriched uranium and recycled
plutonium (MOX, 2017). In 2021, 30 countries had commercial

470
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

nuclear power plants, and in 15 of those countries, nuclear energy is

almost 20% of their total annual electricity generation. France as the
leader in nuclear electricity generation, produces more than 70% of
its total national electricity from nuclear energy (Nuclear Power,
2023). While nuclear energy may be clean and its production is
emission-free, experts highlight a hidden danger of this power:
nuclear waste. The highly radioactive and toxic disposals from
nuclear reactors can remain radioactive for tens of thousands of years
(Nuclear Energy, 2023). Another most important disadvantage of
nuclear energy is that any nuclear disaster (by accident or by natural
calamities), produce radiation, that harms the cells of the body
making humans sick or even cause them death. Illness can appear
even years after they were exposed to nuclear radiation. Most recent
example is the Fukushima Daiichi Disaster in 2011.

Nuclear Weapon Tests and Accidents: Consequences

The end of World War II marked the beginning of the Nuclear age,
when a number of countries started the nuclear arms race. With the
Trinity test of 1945 at Los Alamos, the era of nuclear weapon testing
began. Initially, in the context of Cold War geopolitics and the lack of
fruitful international disarmament policies, countries like the United
States, the USSR, the United Kingdom, France, and China became
nuclear powers during 1945–1964. During this period, a large number
of nuclear tests were conducted in all global environments
(atmosphere, underground, and underwater) (Pra˘va˘lie, 2014).
Atmospheric testing is now banned by most nations. Despite
Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban Treaty (CTBT 1996) nuclear
weapons tests are being carried out even in very recent times 2017
(North Korea).

Serious major nuclear accident occurred when a reactor core is

damaged and significant amounts of radiation are released, such as,
Three Mile Island accident (1979) in USA, Chernobyl Disaster (1986)
in USSR, Fukushima Daiichi nuclear disaster (2011) in Japan.

All these weapon tests and accidents have created major impact on
atmosphere and marine environment and hence on human health
worldwide. Large quantities of various radioactive nuclides are
produced and released directly in the environment as man-made
radioactive pollutants, like, 3H, 14C, 60Co, 90Sr, 95Zr, 125Sb, 131-134I, 133Ba,
134,137
Cs, 141,144Ce, 152,154Eu, 239,240Pu, 241Am and many others. The long-
lived isotopes can persist in the nature for a very long time depending
on their half-lives and as a result increase the global radioactive

471
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

contamination. According to the UNSCEAR report (UNSCEAR,

1993), after nuclear testing, the main contributor to the total effective
radiation is 14C (~ 70%), continue over the course of thousands of
years. Once it is created, this is rapidly oxidized to 14CO and then to
14
CO2, and then transferred to the global carbon reservoirs (the
atmosphere, the ocean, and the terrestrial biosphere), where it is very
difficult to remove because of its extremely long half-life (5730
years) (Pra˘va˘lie, 2014). 14C is assimilated by the forest ecosytems
through the photosynthesis from the atmosphere and subsequently
transferred to human food-chains. It also reaches the marine
environment. Significant percentages of long term radiation exposure
are also found from the radionuclides, 137Cs (13 %) and 90Sr (3 %).
Largest amounts of 137Cs radioactive debris are accumulated in oceans
and seas as more than 70 % of the Earth’s surface is water-covered.
At present, 137Cs is estimated as the main source of anthropogenic
marine radioactivity, along with other important radionuclides, such
as, 90Sr, 239–240Pu, 241Am, 3H, and 14C, released in large quantities
during nuclear tests. They contaminate the marine ecosystems, coral
beds, and sediments by accumulation and ultimately transfer to
human body through ingestion of such seafood. There is a high risk of
groundwater contamination with highly toxic 239–240Pu isotopes,
because it was observed that they can reach the surface. The
radionuclide 131I was one of the main causes of increased thyroid
cancer in the United States, as it was released in large quantities
mainly during atmospheric nuclear tests, signifying it the one among
the worst consequences of nuclear testing.

Radioactivity from Common Industrial Devices and Consumer

Products
Small amount of radioactive sources are commonly used in various
industrial products and consumable items that people use in everyday
life, such as, smoke detectors (Am-241), luminous watches and clocks
(tritium, Pm-147, radium), non-stick pans, X-ray security inspection
systems, ceramics, photocopiers, etc. Some building materials, such
as granite, brick, marble, cement and other items, contain typically
low dose of natural radioactivity. No doubt, the people associated in
such industries are always exposed to some extent of radiation.

Measuring Radioactivity
The becquerel (symbol Bq) is the unit of radioactivity. One Bq is
defined as the activity of a radioactive material (1 Bq = 1
disintegration per second). The becquerel is named after famous
scientist Henri Becquerel, who shared a Nobel Prize with Pierre and

472
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Marie Curie for their work in discovering radioactivity. Radioactivity

of some natural materials and consummable products are listed in the
following table [https://world-nuclear.org/uploadedFiles/org/Features
/Radiation/ 1_RadiationandRadioactivity(2).pdf]
Source / material Radio Activity
1 adult human (100 Bq/kg) 7000 Bq
1 kg of coffee 1000 Bq
1 kg super phosphate fertilizer 5000 Bq
The air in a 100 square meter Australian home
3000 Bq
(radon)
1 households moke detector (with americium) 30000 Bq
Radio isotope for medical diagnosis 70 MBq
Radio isotope source for medical therapy 100000000 MBq
1 kg 50-year old vitrified high-level nuclear waste 10000000 MBq
1 luminous EXIT sign(1970s) 1000000 MBq
1 kg uranium 25 MBq
1 kg uranium ore (Canadian, 15% U) 25 MBq
1 kg uranium ore (Australian, 0.3% U) 500000 Bq
1 kg low-level radioactive waste 1 MBq
1 kg of coal ash 2000 Bq
1 kg of granite 1000 Bq

Exposure Doses of Radiation from Natural and Artificial Sources

We all are exposed to radiation in each and every instant without
realizing it, from natural sources such as minerals in the ground,
internal exposure from radioactive materials present in foods and
radon in the air and man-made sources such as medical x-rays. The
International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) jointly with the World
Health Organization (WHO), International Commission on
Radiological Protection (ICRP), The United Nations Scientific
Committee on the Effects of Atomic Radiation (UNSCEAR),
International Basic Safety Standards and other similar bodies have
responsibility to assess and concern about the effects of radiation
exposure on human health and environment and ensure the essential
Radiation Protection and Safety protocols worldwide. The annual
average dose per person from all Natural and Artificial Sources is
about 600 mrems (USNRC, 2021), though this figure can vary,
depending on the geographical location by several hundred percent.

473
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Annual Average
Source / Origin
Dose (Approx)
Our Cosmic radiation at sea level 26 mrem
Surroundings : Residing inside Stone, brick or concrete 7 mrem
Where we Live building
Internal : What Radiation from food and water 40 mrem
we eat and inhale Radiation from radon (Rn) in the air 200 mrem
Nuclear weapon Weapons test fallout 1 mrem
test / accident
Having false teeth or porcelain crowns .07 mrem
Common Wearing a luminous wristwatch (LCD) .006 mrem
Consumer items / Luggage inspection at airports (using .002 mrem
Industrial typical x-ray machine)
Products Watching TV 1 mrem
Having a smoke detector .008 mrem
Wearing a plutonium-powered cardiac 100 mrem
pacemaker
Undergoing diagnostic x-rays (e.g., 40 mrem
Medical Sources upper and lower gastrointestinal, chest)
Going through nuclear medical 14 mrem
procedures (e.g., thyroid scans)
Nuclear Power Living within 50 miles of a nuclear 0.0009 mrem
Sector power plant (pressurized water reactor)
Coal-fired power Living within 50 miles of a coal-fired 0.03 mrem
plant electrical utility plant
Occupational Working in uranium and thorium mine 180 mrem
exposure
** The unit used in measuring our radiation dose is the millirem
(mrem).

Biological Effects of Exposure to Radiation

The increased exposure to radioisotopes has created increased
concerns over the effects of the radiation on biological systems of
humans. Any kind of radiation exposure poses a potential risk to both
patients and healthcare workers in same way(Mitchell, 2011). All
radioactive nuclides emit high-energy particles or electromagnetic
waves. When this radiation penetrates through living cells, tissues or
organs, it can cause heating, break molecular bonds, or ionize
molecules by depositting the radiation energy and thus disrupt their
structure and function. Thereby damage their genetic code (DNA).
For example, when alpha and beta particles emitted from nuclear
decay strike and penetrate matter, they produce ions and molecular
fragments that are extremely reactive. This will in turn result in
serious harmful effects on normal cell processes damaging the
bilogical tissues and organs, possibly illness or even death. Human

474
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

body cell mainly composed of water (80%). When radiation interacts

with water, it may break the chemical bonds holding the water
molecule together, producing highly reactive free radicals as
hydrogen (H+) and hydroxyls (OH-). These fragments may recombine
or may interact with other fragments or ions to form compounds, such
as water, which would not harm the cell. However, they could
combine to form toxic substances, such as hydrogen peroxide (H 2O2),
which can damage the cell (USNRC603). The extent of biological
damage due to radiation exposure effects depend on the type of
radiation, energy, amount of dose, location of the radioactive source,
duration of the exposure, human age, gender, genetic factors and
many others. Genetic disorders and cancer are the primary health
concerns from radiation exposure. It is a mater of fact that exposure to
very high levels of radiation, such as being close to an atomic
explosion, can cause severe health effects such as skin burns and
acute radiation syndrome. It can also result in long-term health effects
such as cancer and cardiovascular disease. On the other hand,
exposure to low levels of environment radiation does not cause
immediate health effects, but is a minor contributor to our overall
cancer risk (EPA Report).

Radiation Safety and Protection:

Radiation (primarily from natural minerals), is part of our life and is
around us all the time. Fortunately, there are very rare occasions when
an average person is exposed to uncontrolled radiation (either
artificial or naturally occurring radioactive material) above natural
background. For those situations, radiological protection is very
important to protect the public, workers, patients, and the
environment from the harmful effects of ionising radiation by
reducing the unnecessary radiation exposure as much as possible
(Tsapaki, 2018). As a priventive and precautionay measure against
such an exposure, some concrete steps can be taken, such as, regular
monitoring, using protective equipment, wearing Thermo
Luminescent Dosimeter (TLD) badge, Lead-shielding, training, and
constant health surveillance etc (IAEA Report). The “As Low as
Reasonably Achievable (ALARA)” principle, defined by the code of
federal regulations, was created to ensure that all measures to reduce
radiation exposure have been consideredalong with acknowledging
the fact that radiation is an integral part of diagnosing and treating the
patients. In 2014, the IAEA with several other international
organizations developed the safety standards that establish radiation
safety principles and describe the practices. The application of these
safety practices will ensures that people (who may be exposed) and

475
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

the environment are adequately protected from radiation. Three

protection principles that work together are Time, Distance, and
Shielding.

Reduce Time: Minimize the time of exposure near a radioactive

source just till it takes to get the job done. The dose received will be
minimized too, as the time spent directly influences the dose received.
Increase distance: Maximize the distance from a radioactive source
(e.g., sealed source, x-ray tube) as much as possible. Increasing the
distance means decreasing the dose. The exposure rate from a
radiation source drops off by the inverse of the distance squared.
Use shielding: The third exposure control is based on the use of
proper radiation shields, automatic interlock devices, and in-place
radiation monitoring instruments. Various temporary or portable
shields, protective drapes, lead or lead equivalent aprons, concrete
walls, built next to a radiation accelerator, are normally used in
appropriate situations (Stanford Guide).

Visible light, microwaves, computers, cell phones, TV, infrared light,

etc are the common sources of non-ionizing radiation in our everyday
life. They may be also cause health problems, but the degree of
hazard is not yet well understood. Generally, it is believed that low
intensity radiation of short duration is not harmful but that exposure
to high levels can induce deep internal burns, affecting the circulatory
and nervous systems, and particularly the eyes (NASA Report).

Conclusion:
It is impossible to completely avoid exposure to ionizing radiation.
Radiation has always been present in the environment in many forms
and in our bodies. We are constantly exposed to variety of natural
sources, including cosmic radiation, rocks, medical procedures,
consumer products, and even our own body atoms. We can, however,
minimize our exposure by blocking or shielding the radiation, moving
farther away from the source, and limiting the duration of exposure.
More exposure means more risk, and any dose, however small,
produces some risk. In general, any one person's annual
environmental radiation dose will vary, depending upon their
activities and geographical location. It is suggested that further
research and investigation, including epidemiological studies and
direct determination of radiation exposures in regions with a high
natural radiation background, is required.

476
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

References
1. Aliyu A. S., Ramli A. T., 2015, “The world’s high background
natural radiation areas (HBNRAs) revisited: A broad overview of
the dosimetric, epidemiological and radiobiological issues”,
Radiat. Meas. 73, 51–59.
2. EPA Report: “Radiation Health Effects”: https://www.epa.gov/
radiation/radiation-health-effects.
3. Euratom, European Council Directive 2013/59/Euratom on “basic
safety standards for protection against the dangers arising from
exposure to ionizing radiation” and repealing Directives”,
89/618/Euratom, 90/641/Euratom, 96/29/Euratom, 97/43/Euratom
and 2003/122/Euratom. Off. J. Eur. Union. 2013, 57, 1–73.
4. Hajo Z., Ferid S., 2009, “WHO Handbook on Indoor Radon: A
Public Health Perspective”, World Health Organization: Geneva,
Switzerland.
5. Hendry J. H., et al., 2009, “Human exposure to high natural
background radiation: What can it teach us about radiation
risks?,” J. Radiol. Prot. J. Soc. Radiol. Prot., 29, A29–A42.
6. IAEA Report: https://www.iaea.org/topics/radiation-protection/
workers.
7. Mitchell E. L., Furey P., 2011 “Prevention of radiation injury
from medical imaging”. J Vasc Surg. Jan; 53 (1 Suppl): 22S-27S.
8. MOX, 2017, https://world-nuclear.org/information-library/
nuclear-fuel-cycle/fuel-recycling/mixed-oxide-fuel-mox.aspx.
9. NASA Report: https://ntrs.nasa.gov/api/citations/20070018893/
downloads/20070018893.pdf.
10. Nuclear Power, 2023, https://www.eia.gov/energyexplained/
nuclear/nuclear-power-plants.php.
11. Nuclear Energy, 2023, https://earth.org/the-advantages-and-
disadvantages-of-nuclear-energy.
12. Nugraha E. D. et al., 2021, “Radon Activity Concentrations in
Natural Hot Spring Water: Dose Assessment and Health
Perspective“, Int J Environ Res. Public Health. Feb; 18(3), 920.
doi:10.3390/ijerph18030920.
13. Prăvălie R., 2014, “Nuclear Weapons Tests and Environmental
Consequences: A Global Perspective”, AMBIO, 43:729–744:
DOI 10.1007/s13280-014-0491-1.
14. Ramachandran T. V., 2011, “Background radiation, people and
the environment,” Iran. J. Radiat. Res., 9(2): 63-76.
15. Roslyakov N. A., Zhmodik S. M., Pakhomov V. G., 2013,
“Natural radionuclides in the geological environment of the
Novosibirsk region. Radioactivity and radioactive elements in the

477
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

human habitat,” Proceedings of the IV International Conference;

Tomsk, Russia. 13–19 December 2013; pp. 461–464.
16. Stanford Guide: “Radiation Exposure Protection”:
[https://ehs.stanford.edu/manual/radiation-protection-guidance-
hospital-staff/radiation-exposure-protection.
17. Tsapaki V. et al., 2018, “The International Atomic Energy
Agency action plan on radiation protection of patients and staff in
interventional procedures: Achieving change in practice”. Phys
Med. Aug; 52:56-64.
18. UNSCEAR, 2006: United Nations . “Sources and Effects of
Ionizing Radiation”. United Nations; New York, NY, USA: 2000,
National Research Council . “Health Risks from Exposure to Low
Levels of Ionizing Radiation”: BEIR VII Phase 2. Committee to
Assess Health Risks from Exposure to Low Levels of Ionizing
Radiation. National Research Council; Washington, DC, USA:
2006. 424p.
19. UNSCEAR, 1993, “Report to the general assembly (Annex B-
Exposures from man-made sources of radiation)”. http://www.
unscear.org/docs/reports/1993/1993c_pages%2091-120.pdf.
20. USNRC, 2021: “Personal Annual Radiation Dose Calculator”:
https://www.nrc.gov/about-nrc/radiation/around-us/calculator.htm
l.
21. USNRC603: “Biological Effects of Radiation”: https://www.nrc.
gov/reading-rm/basic-ref/students/for-educators/09.pdf.
22. USEPA (1991), United State of America Environmental
Protection Agency. National Primary Drinking Water
Regulations: Radionuclides (Proposed Rule) Federal Register.
U.S. E.P.A.; New York, NY, USA: 1991.
23. Wang N., et al., 2005, “Determination of Radioactivity Level of
238U, 232Th and 40K in Surface Medium in Zhuhai City by in-
situ Gamma-ray Spectrometry,” J.Nucl.Sci.Technol. 42, 888–896.
24. Zlobina A. N., et al., 2019, “Distribution of Radioactive and
Rare-Earth Elements in Ferralsols of the Guangdong Province
(China) Eurasian. Soil,” Sci. 52, 644–653. doi:10.1134/
S1064229319060139.
25. Zlobina A. et al., 2022, “Impact of Environmental Radiation on
the Incidence of Cancer and Birth Defects in Regions with High
Natural Radioactivity”, Int. J. Environ. Res. Public Health 19,
8643. https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph19148643.

Debasmita Bondyopadhaya (Kanjilal)

Department of Physics, Raiganj Surendranath Mahavidyalaya,
Raiganj, West Bengal 733134, India

478
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 39

CLOUD COMPUTING'S TRANSITION TO SAFE

AND RELIABLE STORAGE SERVICES

Dr. Madhav M. Bokare & Mr. Amol V. Suryawanshi

Abstract:
Cloud storage relieves users of the hassle of managing local hardware
and software by allowing them to store their data remotely and take
advantage of high-quality cloud applications that are available on
demand. Even while these services have many advantages, customers
of these services give up physical ownership of their outsourced data,
which inherently creates new security issues regarding the accuracy
of the data in the cloud. In this work, we offer a flexible distributed
storage integrity auditing mechanism, leveraging distributed erasure-
coded data and the homomorphism token, to further provide a safe
and reliable cloud storage service while addressing this new issue.
Users can audit cloud storage with very little computational and
connection overhead according to the suggested design. The auditing
result accomplishes fast data error localization, or the discovery of
misbehaving servers, in addition to providing a robust cloud storage
accuracy guarantee.

Key words: Data Integrity, Dependable distributed storage, error

localization, data dynamics and cloud computing.

Introduction:
ata centres are becoming massive pools of computing
services due to the combination of software as a service
(SaaS) computing architecture and ever-cheaper and more
powerful CPUs. High-quality services from data and
software that only live on remote data centres can now be subscribed
to by consumers thanks to growing network bandwidth and
dependable but flexible network connections. Users find significant
convenience in moving data to the cloud since it relieves them of the
hassles associated with direct hardware administration. Two well-
known examples of cloud computing pioneers are Amazon Simple
Storage Service (S3) and Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (EC2).

479

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.39
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Although these internet-based online services offer enormous storage

capacity and highly customisable processing capabilities, this shift in
computing platforms is also doing away with local workstations'
obligation to maintain data. Users must so rely on their cloud service
providers to ensure the integrity and availability of their data. On the
one hand, a wide range of internal and external threats to data
integrity still exist, despite the fact that cloud infrastructures are far
more robust and powerful than desktop computers. There are
occasionally instances of notable cloud storage service outages and
data loss issues. However, since consumers could not keep a local
copy of their outsourced data, cloud service providers (CSPs) have
different incentives to mislead customers about the state of their
outsourced data. For instance, it is feasible for CSP to delete
infrequently accessed data without being noticed in a timely manner
in order to boost the profit margin by cutting costs. Likewise, CSP
might even try to conceal data loss events in order to preserve their
good name.

Existing System:
There were previously a lot of options available for cloud data
protection. Here, the methods are dealing with both external and
internal threats. It is capable of using higher energy levels. Here,
using certain reputation-building strategies offers security resource
assurances. It doesn't offer very high security levels. presents the
fundamentals of cryptography after a few days. Additionally, it does
not provide high performance levels. None of the earlier ones
provided satisfactory answers or accurate outcomes in this case.Only
static servers are used to disseminate the material to all consumers.
Distributing data with a single server is ineffective. Data delivery
cannot be assured by a single server. There is no way to get data from
another server in the event of a server failure.

Disadvantage
1. Errors may be occurred during input processing
2. Errors in storage
3. There are no error recovery methods available here.
4. This location does not have access to the misbehaviour server.
5. Provide the ambiguous data.

Proposed System:
We are now suggesting the spread of data over multiple servers while
implementing distributed protocols. Cross-server storage allows any
server to fail while collecting data and distributing high-quality

480
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

information to users or clients. A data dynamic support technique is

what this is known as. It can boost the spread of high-quality data and
eliminate issues that are redundant. Data is identified and recovered
from replication servers in the event of a server failure. Any issues
with data dissemination are displayed by the server, and failed data is
recovered from another server. We refer to this as accuracy and
verification data.

Advantages:
1. Save the time
2. Save the computation cost.
3. Reduce the burden for users
4. Remove the redundancies

Architecture:

Software Requirements Specifications:

Software Requirements:
Language : java (jdk1.6.0)
Frontend : JSP, Servlets
Backend : oracle10g
IDE : my eclipse 8.6
Operating System : windows XP
Hardware requirements:
Processor : Pentium IV
Hard Disk : 80GB
RAM : 2GB

Modules Description:
1. System model
2. File distribution preparation
3. Correctness verification and error localization
4. Third party Auditing

481
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

5. Dynamic data operation support

System model:
1.System Model:
The network architecture for cloud storage service architecture is
illustrated in Fig. 1. Three different network entities can be identified
as follows:

Fig .1 System Model

I. User: An entity might be an enterprise or a single client who

needs to store data in the cloud and uses it for compute and data
storage.
II. Cloud server (CS) : It is an entity with substantial computational
and storage resources that is controlled by a cloud service
provider (CSP) to provide data storage services (we will not
separate CS and CSP hereafter).
III. Third-Party Auditor: On request, users can rely on an optional
TPA with knowledge and skills that they may not have to
evaluate and disclose the risk associated with cloud storage
services.

2. File distribution preparation:

Primitive Owner (end users/company) Put the information on a cloud
server. Backups are maintained by cloud servers, which also maintain
replicas (reliable servers). The end user accesses the cloud data to
obtain the service whenever he interacts with the owner. Correctness
data and end user services fall under the purview of CSP. Each server
uses the assistance of another server to accomplish this.

Input: Place the Files in cloud server

Process: Security Check and verification
Output: Service providing for end user.

482
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

3.Correctness verification and error localization:

A crucial requirement for removing errors from storage systems is
error localization. Identifying potential threats from external assaults
is also very important. Nevertheless, a lot of earlier techniques merely
provide binary findings for the storage verification since they do not
specifically address the issue of data error localization. Our scheme
performs better than those because we incorporate both error
localization (misbehaving server identification) and correctness
verification into our challenge-response protocol. Specifically, the
response values from servers for each challenge not only identify
potential data errors but also determine whether the distributed
storage is correct.
Input: Requested files
Process: Comparing with correct one’s (files).
Output: Identified the misbehaving data.

4.Third party auditing:

As mentioned in our architecture, the user can elect to assign this duty
to an impartial third-party auditor, thereby making the cloud storage
publicly verifiable, in the event that he lacks the necessary time,
resources, or practicality to execute the storage accuracy verification.
Nonetheless, no new user data privacy vulnerabilities should be
discovered throughout the auditing process in order to safely
implement an efficient TPA. In particular, TPA shouldn't discover the
content of user data through assigned data auditing. We now
demonstrate that our protocol can support privacy-preserving third
party auditing with relatively minor modifications.
Input: Requested files and credentials of end user
Process: comparing with correct one’s and performs token
mechanism.
Output: provide the service to end user by identifying and rectifying
the error data.

5.Dynamic data operation support:F is thought to stand for static or

archival data.
Certain application scenarios, like libraries and scientific data sets,
can be suitable for this architecture. Nonetheless, there are numerous
situations in which data kept in the cloud is dynamic, such as with
regard to electronic documents, images, log files, and so forth.
Consequently, it is imperative to take into account the dynamic
scenario, in which a user may want to alter the data file through a

483
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

variety of block-level actions, such as appending, deleting, and

updating, all while ensuring storage consistency.
Supporting dynamic data operations might be difficult since data are
stored at the address domain of the cloud service provider rather than
the local location of the user. CSP must, on the one hand, process the
data dynamics request without being aware of the secret keying
information.However, users must confirm that CSP has faithfully
handled the complete dynamic data operation request.
Input: Requested files by end users
Process: Updating, adding and deleting.
Output: data modified basing on end user requirement.

Conclusion and Future Work

This section outlines our primary plan for guaranteeing cloud data
storage in order to solve these issues. The section begins with a
review of fundamental coding theory techniques required for our file
distribution system among cloud servers. The homomorphism token
is then presented. The token computation function under
consideration is part of a family of universal hash functions that have
been selected to maintain homomorphism features and can be
seamlessly used with data verification that has been erasure coded.It
is then demonstrated how to derive a challenge-response protocol to
both identify misbehaving servers and confirm the accuracy of the
storage. Also described is the process for error recovery and file
retrieval using erasure-correcting codes. In conclusion, we outline the
process of expanding our plan to include third-party audits with
minimal changes to the core architecture.

Users of cloud data storage systems no longer own their data locally;
instead, it is stored in the cloud.It is necessary to ensure the accuracy
and accessibility of the data files being kept on the dispersed cloud
servers.Effectively detecting any unauthorised data change and
corruption—possibly as a result of server intrusion and/or sporadic
Byzantine failures—is one of the most important tasks.Finding the
server where the data error is located is crucial in the dispersed
situation when such inconsistencies are successfully found, as it can
always be the first step towards quickly recovering from storage
issues and/or identifying possible external attack risks.

Referenes:
1. Wang.C, Wang.Q, Ren.K, and Lou.W, “Privacy-Preserving
Public Auditing for Storage Security in Cloud Computing,” Proc.
IEEE INFOCOM, Mar. 2010. [10] Wang.C, Ren.K, Lou.W, and

484
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Li.J, “Towards Publicly Auditable Secure Cloud Data Storage

Services,” IEEE Network Magazine, vol. 24, no. 4, pp. 19-24,
July/Aug. 2010.
2. Wang.Q, Wang.C, Li.J, Ren.K, and Lou.W, “Enabling Public
Verifiability and Data Dynamics for Storage Security in Cloud
Computing,” Proc. 14th European Conf. Research in Computer
Security (ESORICS ’09), pp. 355- 370, 2009.WANG ET AL.:
TOWARD SECURE AND DEPENDABLE STORAGE
SERVICES IN CLOUD COMPUTING 231
3. Cong Wang, Qian Wang, Kui Ren, Ning Cao, and Wenjing Lou,
Towards Secure and Dependable Storage Services in Cloud
Computing, IEEE Transactions on Cloud Computing, Volume: 5 ,
Issue: 2, April-June 2012
4. Suresh Arangi & Jayanthi Rao Madina, Flexible and lightweight
Storage Auditing Mechanism in Cloud Computing for dynamic
operations, IJMETMR,
http://www.ijmetmr.com/olfebruary2015/SureshArang i-
JayanthiRaoMadina-28.pdf, Volume No: 2(2015), Issue No: 2
(February)
5. C. Wang, Q. Wang, K. Ren, and W. Lou, “Towards Secure and
Dependable Storage Services in Cloud Computing,” IEEE
Transactions on Services Computing, vol. 5, no. 2, pp. 220–232,
2011.
6. Y. Zhu, G.-J. Ahn, H. Hu, S. S. Yau, H. G. An, and S. Chen,
“Dynamic Audit Services for Outsourced Storage in Clouds,”
IEEE Transactions on Services Computing, accepted.
7. S. Marium, Q. Nazir, A. Ahmed, S. Ahthasham and Aamir M.
Mirza, “Implementation of EAP with RSA for Enhancing The
Security of Cloud Computig”, International Journal of Basic and
Applied Science, vol 1, no. 3, pp. 177-183, 2012
8. Balkrishnan. S, Saranya. G, Shobana. S and Karthikeyan.S,
“Introducing Effective Third Party Auditing (TPA) for Data
Storage Security in Cloud”, International Journal of computer
science and Technology, vol. 2, no. 2, ISSN 2229-4333 (Print) |
ISSN: 0976- 8491(Online), June 2012
9. K. Kiran Kumar, K. Padmaja, P. Radha Krishna, “Automatic
Protocol Blocker for Privacy-Preserving Public Auditing in Cloud
Computing”, International Journal of Computer science and
Technology, vol. 3 pp, ISSN. 0976-8491(Online), pp. 936-940,
ISSN: 2229-4333 (Print), March 2012
10. Jachak K. B., Korde S. K., Ghorpade P. P. and Gagare G.
J.,“Homomorphic Authentication with Random Masking
Technique Ensuring Privacy & Security in Cloud Computing”,

485
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Bioinfo Security Informatics, vol. 2, no. 2, pp. 49-52, ISSN.

2249-9423, 12 April 2012
11. J. Yuan and S. Yu, “Proofs of Retrievability with Public
Verifiability and Constant Communication Cost in Cloud,” in
Proceedings of ACM ASIACCSSCC’13, 2013
12. H. Shacham and B. Waters, “Compact Proofs of
Retrievability,”in the Proceedings of ASIACRYPT 2008.
Springer Verlag, 2008, pp.90–107.
13. G. Ateniese, R. Burns, R. Curtmola, J. Herring, L. Kissner, Z.
Peterson,and D. Song, “Provable Data Possession at Untrusted
Stores,”in the Proceedings of ACM CCS 2007, 2007, pp. 598–
610.

Dr. Madhav M. Bokare

Associate Professor, SSBES’ ITM College, Nanded
Email : [email protected]
Mobile No. +91 9421870580

Mr. Amol V. Suryawanshi

Assistant Professor, SSBES’ ITM College Nanded
Email : [email protected]
Mobile No. +91 9665116194

486
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 40

UNCOVERING RESEARCH STREAMS ON

COMPETENCY-BASED TRAINING: A
BIBLIOMETRIC STUDY

Dr. Gayatri Panda

Abstract:
Purpose: In turbulent business conditions, competency-based training
became an important tool for identifying employee competencies and
designing training to enhance the skills and abilities to create a
competitive edge over others. The primary objective of this research
work is to critically review the use of competency-based training
throughout 1972-2021.

Design/methodology/approach: The research work adopted a

bibliometric visualization tool to categorize data year-wise, highly
recommended journals, noteworthy authors, and country-wise. The
study used the SCOPUS database for extracting the data by using
relevant keywords. Thus, the resulting research questions were
developed as (1) To identify the key journals, countries, authors, and
keywords in the competency-based training research? (2) To develop
a theme-based cluster based on the keyword’s co-occurrences. (3) To
formulate a research framework for the upcoming researchers.

Research findings: The findings enable us to understand the existing

research stream regarding the publication trends in terms of the year,
author, and country and the relevance of competency-based training
in organizational sustainability. Five theme-based clusters have been
identified based on co-occurrences. Thus, in the future researchers
can extend the research field using different themes and frameworks,
adding value to the present research works.

Implications: This research work is useful to the organization,

policymakers, and researchers to investigate the benefits of
competency-based training for employee development. Lastly,
competency-based training applications will provide development
measures and worthwhile results to the organization.

487

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.40
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Originality/value: The research elaborates on the significance of

competency-based training in developing employee skills and
competencies through bibliometric analysis. The research work
analyzed, reviewed, and measured the importance of competency-
based training in employee development measures by recognizing its
usage, application, and potential future research directions. The
theme-based clusters have also been identified from the keywords co-
occurrences.

Key words: Competency, Training, Systematic literature review,

Bibliometric Analysis, VOS Viewer

Introduction:
ompetency can be described as a person's knowledge,
skill, and attributes, which explain his ability to perform a
job (Rowley & Walker, 2020). According to the Oxford
dictionary, competency's most common definition refers
to doing something well. The competency-based approach owes its
evolution to David McClelland (McClelland 1973), the pioneer in the
field who advocated using the method in an organizational context.
Competency-based training is an outcome-driven approach that
designs training based on corporate standards, changing technology,
and changes in the shift of needs and aspirations of employers
through aligning training activities with employee competencies
(Anane, 2013). Thus, competencies acquired through training must
fulfill job needs and demands (Arslan & Uzaslan, 2017).

Brightwell and Grant (2013) conducted an empirical study to analyze

the role of competency-based training as an approach that facilitates
and emphasizes the trainees to develop the competencies essential for
performing the job requirements. Competency-based training gained
more prominence today as organizational needs to enhance
employees' performance have become the prime source of
competition (Cate and Scheele, 2007). Rahman et al. (2014) indicated
the features of competency-based training and highlighted the
transition from the traditional approach to a more learning-oriented
process. Azevedo, Hurst, and Dwyer (2015) emphasized on
experiential learning approach, which fosters the development of an
attitude among employees toward self-discovery. Rahmani et.al
(2022) addressed an important factor employee learning is a major
source of employee and organization success.Mahajan, Gupta ,and
Mishra (2022) stated that competency management is an important
attribute for long-term employability and behaviorall skill

488
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

enhancement. Followed by Tutlys et. al(2022) discussed the

relationship between skill enhancement policy and employment
opportunities.

Mulchay (2006) conducted a study that addressed competency-based

training to provide a coherent model that measures different aspects
of employees' strengths and weaknesses. Hatala and Gumm (2006)
defined organizational culture as an essential antecedent that drags the
implementation of the methodology to achieve the desired results by
the organization. La Guardia et al. (2019) discussed that competency-
based training has moderated and improved the knowledge and skill
of assessing risk among professionals avoiding negative factors, and
increasing the ability to handle professional capacity through proper
training programs. Thus far, by understanding the significance of
competency-based training, the researchers conclude that it is
essential to go for a thorough review of studies to identify the present
research state and future research areas. In the case of competency-
based training, a set of researchers engrossed on antecedents of
competency-based training (Kokol, Saranto, and Vosner,2018; Cox,
Gadd, & Petersohn,2017). The extant literature realized that most
research studies were conducted in the USA, Australia, UK, and other
countries. In a country like India, there is a need for more research
works to be carried out. So, therefore India can be considered an
emerging country to carry out research, and organizations should
understand adopting the method to meet the challenges and risks in
the future. A broad blend of studies exists on competency-based
training. However, there is a scarcity of studies presenting a
bibilometric analysis or reassessing the literature on competency-
based training. The existing literature on competency-based training
from 1972 to 2021; 573 literature were considered for further study.
The researcher advocated a progressive approach to complete the
present study through framing the following research questions:

RQ1: “What are the journals, countries with leading publications in

the area of Competency-based training”?
RQ2: “Who are the significant authors in terms of co-authorship and
countries in the area of Competency-based training”?
RQ3: “What are the most frequently occurring keywords and
developing a cluster and topic mapping analysis in the area of
Competency-based training”?
RQ4: “What are the future research questions to be explored by future
researchers in competency-based training”?

489
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

On the basis of the stated research questions, the bibliometric analysis

of the existing literature was conducted to classify prior research
exploring on competency-based training. The remaining sections of
this article are organized as follows. Section 2 provides the
background review of this work. Section 3 describes the methodology
used and Section 4 presents and discusses the results and findings of
the study. Section 5 discusses the topic mapping and emerging
areas,Section 6 discusses on the research implications ,Section 7
presents the contribution of the study and lastly section 8 discusses
the conclusion for further studies on the subject.

1. Background Review
The extensive review conceded out for the progress of the present
paper discovered that the word “competencies” is primarily used in
the international context studies (Aggarwal et al., 2006; Cheng and
Bosselman, 2016; Gersh, 2016) and was followed by “competency”
(Bissett, Cheng, and Brannan, 2009; Zopiatis, Theodosiou, and
Constanti, 2014). Vogel et al. (2020) reflected that competency
management acts as a process thatemphasizeszes mapping employees'
knowledge, skills, and attitude, which integrates skill and
responsibility. The internal and external factors are considered drivers
for connecting and influencing competency management to fit the
changes (Müller et al., 2009). Yadlapati, Keswani, and Pandolfino
(2016) suggest that competency management as a tool aims at
providing sufficient conditions for the development, use, and
implementation of innovative products and services. Kashirin et al.
(2016) tried to describe and analyze competency management with
technological tools and techniques to solve business problems.
Competency management and knowledge-driven culture are the
primary tools that create a learning approach (Raqadi et al.,2017).
Simultaneously, Lekshmi and Radhika (2016) opined that
competency management could be widely used for performance
assessment. On the other hand, it has been integrated with other
human resource activities, mainly recruitment (Karimi et al., 2019)
succession Planning (Poorkiani, Beheshtifar, & Moghadam 2010) and
knowledge management Chopra and Gupta(2020). Salman, Ganie,
and Saleem (2020) presented a synoptic view of competency
management with its application in different human resources areas
and various fields.

Competency-based training has been proven as an alternative to

identify the employee skill gap and minimize the gap through proper
training to achieve organizational goals. It promotes accountability

490
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

among employees, increasing the learning and growth perspectives

than other methods (Naquin and Holton, 2003). Hatala and Gumm
(2006)stated that organizational culture is an important antecedent
that focuses on human resource development through a competency-
based training approach. Hignett and Crumpton(2007) addressed that
the process develops the confidence to handle patients and various
tasks associated with them. Priyadarshini and Dave (2012) opined that
integrating different human resource functions with competency-
based training can critically analyze the need for training and develop
a systematic methodology to focus on strategic development. Kosbab
(2003) illustrated that competency based training is a subset of
competency in every skill enhancement domain.In continuation Emad
and Roth (2008) illustrated the relationship between education and
training. In order to achieve set obejectives training must be aligned
with education, which enables to develop skill oriented competencies.
Khanna and Gupta (2014) in their study addressed that competency
based training has positive relationship with total quality
management. Lockyer et al. (2017) tried to address the importance of
continuous assessment of trainee’s competencies and measuring the
relationship between the constant review and effective
implementation of the approach in an organization. Sanchez and
Levine (2009) pined that competency modeling could fill and create a
fusion with traditional job analysis to guide the employee behavior
towards achieving strategic objectives. Cohen (2015) stated a set of
strategies to align different human resource activities of an
organization, enabling development opportunities to focus on the
organization's past, present, and future activities.

The extant literature on competency-based training (Smith, 2010;

Frank et al., 2010, Fernandez et al., 2012) conducted review studies
applying the competency-based training approach in medical and
health science. Very few works of literature (Chuenjitwongsa et al.,
2018; Goldhamer et al.,2020; Fernandez et al.,2018; Shet, Patil, and
Chandawarkar,2019) were extracted that worked on using and
implementing a competency-based training approach, among other
disciplines. So as a tool or process must be adopted in different areas
and fields, this discusses the relative significance in the current
business context. Competency-based training in the twenty-first
century focuses on an interdisciplinary and penetrating approach; the
enlarged domain requires a comprehensive and bibilometric review
on the topic. Throwing light on extant literature conducted through
bibilometric analysis (Azer, 2015; Cox, Gadd and Petersohn, 2017;
Peng, Zhu and Wu, 2020).

491
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2. Methodology:
3.1 Selection of database
The present work is based on identifying and sincerely evaluating the
publications in competency-based training and conducting a
bibilometric analysis to analyze a given research field (Cheng and
Bosselman, 2016). The database preferred mainly by the researcher to
carry out the research was the Scopus database. Many studies have
been conducted (Md Khudzari et al. 2018; Zheng and Kouwenberg
2019; Yahaya et al. 2020) using Scopus database. Figure 1 depicts the
organized structure of the paper based on which the whole research
work is developed. The majority of available articles belong to
various disciplines (business management, psychology, social
sciences, medicine, health science, environmental science, genetics,
molecular biology, etc.). A total of 875 articles were extracted from
Scopus. This extraction covers published articles from 1972 to 2021.
Further, the researchers laid importance on considering fully
published articles and excluded editorial publications, book chapters,
and conference proceedings. The basic approach followed in the study
was to compile the current literature and elucidate the results by
transferring the knowledge domain towards an enlarged perspective
and providing an extended research work that enlightens other
researchers about the concept and provides a scope to develop further
progressive work in the future.
3.2 Keywords Selection
The search keyword “competency-based training” was used for
extracting documents. It resulted in the extraction of 573 articles. The
initial search reflected 875 articles in the search results. The search
mechanism was employed to narrow down the search results and list
only the most relevant items to discover those articles, enclosed with
"competency-based training" in their titles. The search revealed a total
of 573 articles after filtration. The metadata (title, abstract, keywords,
year, journal, citations, references, etc.) of these 573 articles was
downloaded and further utilized as the prime dataset for this study. To
identify the most prolific journals, countries, authors, years, the
Scopus database was deployed to analyze the data set, which is
significant. The paper presents different types of analyses, such as
author-co-authorship, co-authorship based on Inter-country co-
occurrence analyses based on keywords, are research-based citations,
and co-citation, which are also explained. The study also showed the
cluster analysis using keyword occurrence and content analysis to
develop future research perspectives using VOSviewer software
(Hunt, 2021).

492
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

3.3 Filtering of articles

The inclusion criterion of articles are based on the following steps
such as publication stage, "final" AND language, "English" resulted
into 585 documents and then inclusion criterion of document type -
“article,” article type “Journal” and keyword type, “ Exact keywords”
such as “competency based training” resulted into the output of 573
documents.
3.4 Articles Collection
The researchers considered the extracted 573 documents for
developing the research work. The downloaded CSV (comma-
separated values) format from the Scopus database was considered for
bibilometric analysis. The researchers manually cross verified the
concept of “competency based training” in the abstract and title,
respectively.
Bibilometric analysis, network analysis and content analysis of competency based training
Formation

Bibilometric analysis Content analysis

Descriptive analysis

Cluster Gap
Productive Citation and analysis analysis
Leading
Indicators

Yearly based authors, Keyword

publications Journals Countries analysis

SN
TP T T K V A
CO
S L F
A
C S
Tools and techniques

SCOPUS VOS VIEWER EXCEL

Figure 1: A systematic construction of the paper

Note: TP-Total Publication, TSC-Total Scopus citation, TLS-Total local
source, COA- Co-authorship, KF-Keyword Frequency, V-Visualization, and
SNA-Social network analysis.

493
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

4. Results and findings

4.1 Publications in context to journal
The following section describes the result and findings of the
paperwork that emphasize some critical attributes such as identifying
the year-wise publication, most noteworthy authors, countries, that
explored competency-based training. The 573 papers fit into around
159 journals. Figure 2 placed the journals with the leading
publications on competency-based training; approximately ten
journals were considered. The first five journals were grouped to
Wolters Kluwer Health publisher; four fit into Taylor and Francis,
one belongs to SAGE publishers. Other journals belong to publishers
such as Elsevier, Cambridge University Press, American Public
Health Association, Wiley-Blackwell publishing house, etc. The most
protruding journal, which has foremost publications, such as the
“Journal of Vocational Education and Training,” which has published
eleven papers, fits the “Taylor and Francis Publishers.” The concept
of competency-based training has entered every discipline. However,
the number of articles are still suggestively less, enhancing the scope
and providing concrete ways to explore and develop more relevant
and enhanced research.

Figure 2: Ten top journals

Figure 3 analyzes the published papers from 1972 to 2021 retrieved

from the Scopus database. The developed graph depicts that the articles
on competency-based training have grown substantially in successive
years. Throwing light to the publication volume was significantly less
from 2000 to 2010, whereas there was a steady progressive trend from
2011 to 2021, and the papers increased from 23 to 50. The researcher’s
interest has grown-up immensely towards this field in the current times.

494
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Researchers can attempt to develop work on the applicability of

competency-based training in an organizational context and provide the
concept for achieving employee competency enhancement and
organizational excellence.

Figure 3: Publication trend

4.4 Noteworthy Authors

Figure 4 recognizes the most projecting ten authors. The extracted
573 papers fit into their respective 159 authors. The data was
elucidated based on the highest number of publications. It states that
the most prominent author on competency-based training is Professor
“Steve Hodge,” with five papers, and the author is working at “Griffth
University,” Australia. His research area focuses on understanding
dimensions of competency-based training and understanding different
approaches for learning. Next, throwing light on Professor “Kong
Lars” with five papers, the author is currently working as “Faculty of,
Health and Medicine,” Copenhagen, Denmark. His studies are mainly
focused on training and development, Skill enhancement.
Remarkably, he analyzed the linkage of training programs and their
impact on employee growth. The third author with five papers is
“Wheelahan Leesa.” The author works at the “University of Toronto,”
Canada. His interests are focused on, Vocational training and
learning.

495
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 4: Top 10 Prolific Authors.

Further, the following four critical authors, “Bion and Julian

Fleetwood,” “Bohemian Peter, James Pauline,” “Mulcahy Dianne,”
have four papers each. Bioan and Julian Fleetwood are Associate
professors at Birmingham, United Kingdom. Bohemian peter works
in National Board for Professional and Technician Examination,
Ghana. James Pauline is Faculty in the University of Melbourne,
Australia. Mulchay Dianne works in Melbourne Graduate school of
Education, Australia. Professor Eric Smith's research work with five
papers is currently a Professor at Federation University Australia,
Australia. His studies are mainly focused on training and
development, Skill enhancement. Then, the latter two authors, Van
Den Broke and Nynke, have four papers. Ameh Charles works in
Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine, the United Kingdom.

4.5 Most resourceful Countries

Figure 5 enumerates the ten countries with the highest number of
documents on competency-based training. The USA tops with 215
total articles. Australia, the UK, Canada, Netherland are the following
countries with the highest papers. It is significant to remark that the
first top-five countries have the maximum number of publications out
of five hundred seventy-three documents considered in the study—
figure 6 places interest in visualizing the countries whose authors
contributed around ten papers.

496
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 5: Top 10 Prolific Countries

4.6 Co-authorship map

The present research work developed the network maps through the
VOSviewer software. The fundamental objective of maps is to signify
details on authorship and co-authorship, co-occurrence based on
keywords, and co-authorship based on inter-country (Van Eck and
Waltman, 2007). The study acknowledged 2155 authors in the dataset
to create the network map. The co-authored with at least two other
authors in the dataset were segregated. Considering the measures,
around 126 authors were segregated by the researchers who have co-
authored among themselves.

Figure 6 visualizes the co-authorship map generated by the software.

The figure consists of linked lines to each other. It has been
envisioned that the software places the author into two clusters,
cluster one consists of six items, and cluster two includes four items.
‘Anwar.s’ has a maximum co-authorship in cluster one, i.e., “five
authors,” represented in “red.” In contrast, cluster two ‘Dickerson j.’
has co-authored with “three authors,” specified in “green” color.

497
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 6: Author and co-author map

4.6.1 Inter-country co-authorship map

The following section discusses and provides an insight into the inter-
country co-authorship map. The fundamental objective is to identify
the authors of the countries that co-authored the excessive number of
other countries. Figure 7 demonstrates the inter-country co-authorship
map. It visualized 125 countries of the dataset, and out of this, fifty-
five of them linked with each other in terms of co-authorship. The
extracted map signifies that the authors like “USA, UK, and
Australia” have maximum co-authored other countries. Figure7
illustrates that the maximum number of lines connected with the
circle is labeled as ‘United states’ and ‘Australia.’

Figure 7: Intercountry co-authorship map

498
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

4.6.2 Network analysis based on Keywords

The sole objective of the keyword co-occurrence map is to segregate
the keywords that have been repetitively used in existing papers and
used in the present work. It gives the researcher an impression of
which type of theme and context has been preferred by other
researchers. Thus, it measures the relatedness of the terms, and the
publications' were analyzed (Van Eck et al., 2010). The keyword
‘Competency-based training’ occurs eighty-one times in the dataset.
However, the dataset also identified other keywords, such as
‘Competency-based education,’ ‘Competency,’ ‘Competencies,’
‘Internship,’ ‘Vocational training,’ etc. The keyword occurrence map
was presented in figure:8. A total of 1262 keywords was identified in
the data set. The keywords that appeared five times were considered
to develop the network map. It was observed that only thirty were
encompassed, meeting the measures and connected through various
lines.

Figure 8: keyword co-occurrences map

4.7 Citation analysis
Citation analysis identifies the utmost recognized articles within the
competency-based training studies. It measures the frequency of times
other reports cite a specific paper to acknowledge the acceptance and
impact of the article in the particular field (Kumar et al. 2020). Thus,
it articulates the relational effects of studies in a specified research
field and how imperative they are (Usdiken and Pasadeos 1995).
Considering the ‘total times cited count,’ we have analyzed the
citation of 573 studies. In total, 189 articles were cited by the 573
articles in the sample. However, the minimum threshold citis ation is

499
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

restricted to ten; it assumes that a paper must have been cited ten
times. Figure 9 shows the most influential studies in Scopus citations.
It is expected that math c.a (2016) is the most cited study with fifty-
nine citation links. The work by Evans c.l(2014), Ameh c.a(2016),
Pennys (2000) are the most mentioned papers in the area. Hence, the
top-cited articles clarify different antecedents of competency-based
training, such as analyzing competency frameworks, developing
tailor-made programs, and mostly measuring the benefits of the
techniques for achieving results.

Figure 9: Citation analysis based on documents

4.7.1 Co-Citation anlysis

Co-citation analysis is directed to signify the interconnections among
studies, journals, or authors in a research field (Vogel 2012; Zupic
and Cater 2015). The present research performs the co-citation
analysis to recognize links among journals based on a sample of 573
articles retrieved from the Scopus database through the VOSviewer
visualization tool. However, the threshold limit has been set to twenty
in this study. The journal had to be cited at least twenty times to be
included in the analysis. It gave rise to the identification of fifty-three
journals that fulfilled the measure. Figure:10 signifies Academic
medicine is the most-cited journal with two hundred forty citations.
Other journals such as Medical education and medical teachers are
journals with full authority. Therefore, it can be specified that a
significant group of journals guiding the field can be taken as a focus.
The leading group of the journal will present considerable linkages to
follow what progresses and gaps exist in the literature for future
studies in competency-based training. Lastly, the finding that draws
significant attention to the results is that the top-cited journals are
500
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

from medicine, so it can be an upcoming perspective for management

researchers to carry out research studies and add value to the
academic literature.

Figure: 10 Co-citation analysis map

4.8 Cluster analysis

The present research work carried the cluster analysis based on
keywords using VOSviewer software. It was restricted to five
occurrences of keywords, as shown in figure 11. Researchers
acknowledged five clusters grounded on the repetition of keywords.
The formations of groups are based on author keywords. Through five
colors, keywords were clustered: white (“Competency-based training
and Knowledge management”), Blue (“Competency-based training
and leadership development”), gray (“Competency-based training and
Vocational education”), pink (“Competency-based training and
experiential learning”), and yellow (“Competency-based training and
management”) that represents the five primary research flow in the
literature. Table 1: explains the clusters with their respective
keywords. Hence, the researchers conducted a wide-ranging content
analysis of the referred articles to recognize, elucidate and validate
their linkage among the papers.

501
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 11: Clusters using keywords

Table 1: Clusters using keywords

Sl.no Cluster Name of Cluster Keywords
1 Cluster “Competency-based training “Employability, higher
one and Knowledge education, learning, knowledge,
management” competence.”
2 Cluster “Competency-based training “Emotional Intelligence,
two and leadership management training.”
development”
3 Cluster “Competency-based training “Employability, Knowledge,
three and Vocational education” professional development,
Knowledge.”
4 Cluster “Competency-based training “Human Capital, Competencies”
four and experiential learning”
5 Cluster “Competency-based training “Competency framework,
five and management” training, and development”

5.Topic mapping
The researchers performed the content analysis of the crucial articles
to identify the association among various published articles covering
competency-based training. Thus, in the following subsections, the
authors have thoroughly reviewed the literature to understand the
published literature and develop a conceptual framework for
competency-based training from the linkage among various articles.
The researcher identified five research themes based on cluster
analysis, namely, (1) “Competency-based training and knowledge
management,” (2) “Competency-based training and leadership
development,” (3) “Competency-based training and vocational
education,” (4) “Competency-based training and experiential

502
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

learning” (5) “Competency-based training and management” using

content analysis and derived linkage between the identified areas and
developed a framework for upcoming researchers in this area.

5.1 Competency-based training and knowledge management

Knowledge management is a valuable tool that focuses on
understanding employees' existing skills and developing ways to
manage other functionalities effectively. The alliance between
competency-based training and knowledge management is well
documented in the literature; many studies measured the relationship
between the two factors (Lustriene, Miura and Takahashi,2007;
Emerson and Berge,2018) which signifies a positive relationship
between the two. On the other hand, the study by Kasim(2008) opined
that competency-based training could enlarge the scope of knowledge
management on a broader perspective for innovative results.
However, although the literature well acknowledged that the
relationship between competency-based training and knowledge
management is essential, their effects are still unclear for
organizational efficiency. Therefore, the current conversation
extracted three upcoming research questions from pathways to be
explored by upcoming researchers, which enable us to comprehend
the benefits and develop strategies to enhance organizational growth
perspectives.

5.2 Competency-based training and leadership development

The crucial responsibility of every leadership role is to develop
strategies that provide an organization with a forward-looking
approach. Leadership enhances the satisfaction and motivation level
of employees. However, despite the importance of this aspect, only a
handful of literature focused on measuring the relationship between
competency-based training and leadership development (Seemiller,
2018; Hodge,2011; Shet, Patil, and Chandawarkar,2019; Kiersch and
Peters 2017). The studies clearly illustrated that proper assessment of
competencies would enable leaders to understand the changing needs
and demands, develop appropriate competencies, and motivate them
with growth perspectives. Holmboe et al. (2017) dedicated to
examining the importance of competency-based education/training for
bringing reform in medical science through developing leadership
skills and incorporating milestones for better management of
resources. Therefore, the current discussion takes out three future
research questions to be examined by upcoming researchers and
established policies to match the organizational performance.

503
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

5.3 Competency-based training and Vocational education

Vocational education refers to the deliberate intervention to change
learning ability resulting in more productive results (Oviawe,
Uwameiye and Uddin, 2017). The existing literature demonstrated a
clear understanding of competency-based training's (CBT) importance
in developing employees' adaptable, flexible, and learning-oriented
culture. Tran and Nyland (2013) advocated vocational education-
based CBT approach can lead to developing a curriculum framework
that supports flexibility, adaptation, and responsiveness towards
changes. Chijioke and Tambari (2017) analyzed the role of CBT in
building strategies that enlarge the scope of skill enhancement among
youth. However, though existing literature has addressed the
implications of CBT in vocational education, clear descriptions of the
components are not enumerated, which became a significant source to
develop future research questions. Therefore, the current discussion
extracted two future questions to be examined by upcoming
researchers, analyzing the benefits and providing a strategic yardstick
for organizations to implement for better results and outcomes.

5.4 Competency-based training and experiential learning

Experiential learning focuses on learning strategy where the learners
are more advocated towards the problem-centered experiential
learning method. Dobos(2014) study supported techniques that create
an experiential learning approach for an organization where CBT
integrates to minimize the competency gap. The concept of
experiential learning has expanded its deep root in every field of
study (Birt et.al 2018; Lam et al., 2019; Zhang,2019). On the other
hand, there is still a lack of sound literature that measures the
significance of competency-based training in developing a learning-
oriented approach. The present discussion extracted three future
questions to be explored by upcoming researchers, enabling the
development of a broad insight towards the technique.
Competency based training

Benefits of CBT Impact of CBT

Relevant training design. Meet changing demands of
Cost minimization. industry.
Measure existing skills to
minimize the gap.

Outcome
Low turnover, Increase in employee satisfaction amnd loyalty, Motivation to work

Organizational Performance and growth

Figure 12: A framework to measure the role of competency-based training

504
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

5.5 Competency-based training and management

The role of management immensely plays a vital role in the effective
management of competency-based training. It allows analyzing the
strength of effective implementation of the technique. The
management support towards developing an integrated platform is
always a challenge. (Karami, Farokhzadian, &Foroughameri 2017) in
their research work, enumerated proper authorization from
management will enable the human resource department to develop
strategies that can address competency gaps and develop practical
training. But still, the existing literature does not bridge the gap on
creating a dynamic relationship between the attributes. Thus, the
present discussion extracted three future research questions to be
explored by future researchers, enabling them to develop an extensive
insight into the technique and its practical implementation in every
field and sector.

6. Implications and future research questions

6.1 Managerial Implications
With the period, the organizations are witnessed with multiple
challenges, analyzing employee competencies and designing training
became an essential predictor of organizational success. Thus, to
measure the role of competency-based training in providing adequate
support towards exploring employee and corporate growth in a secure
manner, the present study aimed to examine the part of competency-
based training from organizational perspectives. The current research
work analyzed relevant contributions made by authors, institutes, and
countries in the research field through bibliometric analysis. The
research work would help understand the theoretical aspects of the
application of competency-based training in an organizational context
and develop the right set of training designs and strategies that will
enable individual success and growth and increase the overall
performance of organizations. The study also directed the application
of competency-based training to deliver customized, customer-
oriented facilities by developing employee skills and competencies
and executing organizational performance.

6.2 Practical implications

The present research analyzed literature systematically and
bibilometric manner of comprehending the linkage between
competency-based training and organizational performance. Majorly,
the previous studies explained the application of competency-based
training in medicine and the role of competency-based training for
better perspectives. Thus, competency-based training needs to be

505
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

advocated in every sector and field, which provides the organizations

with a yardstick towards developing the right set of strategies and
enhancing the efficiency and effectiveness of employees. The present
research demonstrated the implication of competency-based training
in designing the right set of training movements in the organizational
context. The manager and industry practitioners should consider that
the method improves employee performance and enhances the
administration of different activities to handle the challenges and risks
better and develop better management practices.

6.3 Outlined upcoming research questions

Table: 2 Upcoming research questions
Research Impending Research Questions
Stream
“Competency- 1. “What is the role of Knowledge management to make
based training the CBT technique effective”?
and knowledge 2. “How to develop effective CBT training strategies
management” and minimize the skill gap”?
3. “What should be the strategy to deal with future
changes in market requirements”?
“Competency- 1. “What is the role of leadership development to
based training implement CBT effectively”?
and leadership 2. “What are the challenges to deal with creating a
development” CBT-oriented culture”?
3. “How to measure the benefits of the CBT method
towards the skill enhancement of leaders”?
“Competency- 1. “What is the role of Vocational education for
based training effective ways to CBT implementation”?
and Vocational 2. “What impact of dynamism, flexibility, and
education” adaptability attributes for developing CBT in an
organization”?
“Competency- 1. “What isrolerole of experiential learning in creating
based training a CBT approach”?
and experiential 2. “What are the characteristics of an experiential
learning” learning approach”?
3. “Is the CBT approachable to minimize the skill gap
and cost minimization”?
“Competency- 1. “Is management support plays a vital role in effective
based training CBT development”?
and role of 2. “What policies should a firm develop to create a
management” CBT environment”?
3. “What role does employee skill enhancement play in
taping the market”?
Figure: 12 enumerated that competency-based training is the most
critical aspect of every organization and has close links with

506
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

organizational growth. In the future, researchers need to investigate

and understand the relationships from the developed research
framework and contribute to the literature from a new point of view.
It helps the policymakers find the dry areas to be dealt with to assist
employees' long-run performance and skill enhancement. Thus, this
framework and framed research questions give prospects to future
researchers to contribute to the impending research agenda.

7.Contribution of the study

The unique contribution of the present study is the formulation of a
systematic literature review and bibliometric examination of the
literature on the role of competency-based training in the
organization. Thus, the current study analyzed adopting the
systematic literature review and bibilometric visualization for
developing network maps on author’s countries and based on
keywords occurrence using the VOS viewer tool. Thus,bibilometric
explore the citation and co-citation analysis to determine prominent
authors and documents in the area of competency-based training. It
also developed specified clusters that identify significant research
streams and paves for future research questions for upcoming
researchers in competency-based training. Lastly, the study identified
competency-based training plays a pivotal role in shaping employee
skills and competencies, and every sector should embrace the changes
for better performance and growth.

8.Conclusion
The concluding explanations of this paperwork specify that a broad
assortment of studies has been conducted on competency-based
training. The research questions framed are to make out that the
journal with the maximum number of papers on competency-based
training and the “Journal of Vocational and Educational Training”
belong to the Taylor and Francis publishers. The occurrence of
research shows a growing trend, particularly in 2019. The maximum
cited paper is of (Dickens and Graham, 2002). The most productive
author is Hodge, S. Extracting the maps, in context to the country, the
highest papers contributed by the USA, and the same country’s
authors have co-authored the highest number of times, with the
authors from other countries. Throwing light towards the institution,
the maximum papers, contributed by authors of the University of
Toronto. Lastly, the co-occurrences based on keywords state the
maximum appearing keywords are ‘Competency-based training,’
‘Competency-based Education,’ ‘Competencies,’ and ‘Competence.’

507
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Despite the above-cited points, the paperwork has certain limitations

that can be addressed and considered for future research.
First, the papers extracted are majorly confined to the area of
Medicine and Social Sciences; there are many other areas where
research studies can be carried out to explore and understand the
benefits of using a competency-based training approach. Second, the
study has been constrained to the database, i.e., Scopus, for searching
papers, outlining those available in other journals. Third, with specific
to language only English was included, whereas other languages were
excluded. Lastly, the extracted Scopus results excluded doctoral
dissertations, unpublished articles, conference proceedings, and book
chapters on competency-based training. Therefore, the extracted
results can include such changes in future studies and compare the
results. So considering the above limitations, future studies can be
developed. The concluding remark points out that this research has
put-forth effort to illuminate the competency-based training literature
in a new wave of length. So it is viewed that this paperwork will be a
foundation of knowledge for the research fraternity to conduct
potential studies on this area.The study shall form the basis for
upcoming research through testing various models applications and
attempting theory verification. Future researchers may try to
enumerate and adopt a mixed-method research design. Further, this
research was based on a single method or concept, i.e., competency-
based training. Future research may identify the relationship between
competency-based training and other HR practices. It can also analyze
different typologies of competencies and their application in
management studies.

References
1. Aggarwal, R., Grantcharov, T., Moorthy, K., Hance, J., & Darzi,
A. (2006), “A competency-based virtual reality training
curriculum for the acquisition of laparoscopic psychomotor
skill” ,The American journal of surgery, 191 (1),128-133.
2. Al-Raqadi, A. M., Abdul Rahim, A., Masrom, M., & Al-Riyami,
B. S. N. (2017), “Sustainability of knowledge and competencies
management on the perceptions of improving ships upkeep
performance”. International Journal of System Assurance
Engineering and Management, 8(1), 230-246.
3. Anane, C. A. (2013), “Competency-based training: Quality
delivery for technical and vocational education & training
(TVET) institutions”, Educational research international, 2(2),
117-127.

508
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

4. Arslan, R., & Uzaslan, N. T(2017), “ Impact of competency-

based and target-oriented training on employee performance: A
case study”. Industry and Higher Education, 31( 5) 289-292.
5. Azevedo, A., Hurst, D., & Dwyer, R. (2015), “Competency-based
training program for international students”, International
Business Research, 8 (3), 11.
6. Birt, J., Stromberga, Z., Cowling, M., & Moro, C. (2018),
“Mobile mixed reality for experiential learning and simulation in
medical and health sciences education” Information, 9 (2), 31.
7. Bissett, R. L., Cheng, M. S., & Brannan, R. G. (2009), “A
qualitative assessment of culinary science competencies defined
by the Research Chefs Association”Journal of Culinary Science
& Technology, 7 (4), 285-293.
8. Brightwell, A., & Grant, J. (2013) “Competency-based training:
who benefits?”, Postgraduate medical journal, 89 (1048), 107-
110.
9. bt Ab Rahman, A., & bin Ahmad, J. (2014), “Assessment
practices for competency-based education and training in
vocational college, Malaysia”, Procedia-Social and Behavioral
Sciences, 112, 1070-1076.
10. Cheng, M., & Bosselman, R. (2016), “An evaluation of the
research chefs association’s bachelor of science in culinology®
core competencies”, Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education,
28 (3), 127-141.
11. Chopra, M., & Gupta, V. (2020), “Linking knowledge
management practices to organizational performance using the
balanced scorecard approach”, Kybernetes. 49(1), 88-115.
12. Chuenjitwongsa, S., Oliver, R. G., & Bullock, A. D. (2018)
“Competence, competency‐based education, and undergraduate
dental education: a discussion paper”,European Journal of Dental
Education, 22 (1), 1-8.
13. Cohen, K. E., Morgan, P. J., Plotnikoff, R. C., Barnett, L. M., &
Lubans, D. R. (2015). “Improvements in fundamental movement
skill competency mediate the effect of the SCORES intervention
on physical activity and cardiorespiratory fitness in
children”, Journal of Sports Sciences, 33 (18), 1908-1918.
14. Cox, A., Gadd, E., Petersohn, S., & Sbaffi, L. (2019)
“Competencies for bibliometrics”. Journal of Librarianship and
Information Science, 51 (3), 746-762.
15. Dobos, Á. (2014) “Experiential learning for professional
development in the civil service”, Procedia-Social and
Behavioral Sciences, 116, 5085-5090.

509
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

16. Emad, G. & Roth, W.M. (2008), "Contradictions in the practices

of training for and assessment of competency: A case study from
the maritime domain", Education + Training, 50 (3), 260-272.
17. Frank, J. R., Snell, L. S., Cate, O. T., Holmboe, E. S., Carraccio,
C., Swing, S. R., & Harris, K. A. (2010) “Competency-based
medical education: theory to practice”. Medical teacher, 32 (8),
638-645.
18. Gersh, I. (2016) “Culinary industry practitioners’ and educators’
perceptions of core competencies for a 4-year bachelor’s degree
in the culinary arts”. Journal of Hospitality & Tourism
Education, 28 (1), 32-43.
19. Hatala, J. P., & Gumm, J. C. (2006) “Managing organizational
cultural influences during the implementation of competency-
based training”, Advances in Developing Human Resources, 8 (2),
229-246.
20. Hatala, J. P.,& Gumm, J. C. (2006), “Managing organizational
cultural influences during the implementation of competency-
based training. Advances in Developing Human Resources, 8 (2),
229-246.
21. Hignett, S., & Crumpton, E. (2007),“Competency-based training
for patient handling”, Applied Ergonomics, 38 (1), 7-17.
22. Hodge, S. (2011), “Learning to manage: Transformative
outcomes of competency-based training”, Australian Journal of
Adult Learning, 51 (3), 498-517.
23. Karimi, A., Teimouri, H., Shahin, A., & Barzoki, A. S. (2019)
“Identification and ranking of competency-based recruitment
system criteria: an empirical case study”, International Journal of
Learning and Intellectual Capital, Vol.16 No.1, pp.21-39.
24. Kashirin, A., Semenov, A., Ostrovskaya, A., & Kokuytseva, T.
(2016), “The modern approach to competencies management
based on IT solutions” The Journal of Internet Banking and
Commerce, 21 (1).
25. Kasim, R. S. R. (2008), “The relationship of knowledge
management practices, competencies and the organizational
performance of government departments in Malaysia”
International Journal of Social and Human Sciences, 2 (12),740-
746.
26. Khanna, V. K., & Gupta, R. (2014), “Comparative study of the
impact of competency-based training on 5 “S” and TQM: a case
study”, International Journal of Quality & Reliability
Management. 31 (3), 238-260.
27. Kiersch, C., & Peters, J. (2017) , “Leadership from the Inside
Out: Student Leadership Development within Authentic

510
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Leadership and Servant Leadership Frameworks”,Journal of

leadership education, 16 (1).
28. Kosbab, D.J. (2003), "Dispositional and maturational
development through competency‐based training", Education +
Training, 45 (8/9), 526-541
29. La Guardia, A. C., Cramer, R. J., Brubaker, M., & Long, M. M.
(2019), “Community mental health provider responses to a
competency-based training in suicide risk assessment and
prevention”, Community mental health journal, 55 (2),257-266.
30. Lam, C. K. C., Hoang, C. H., Lau, R. W. K., Cahusac de Caux,
B., Chen, Y., Tan, Q. Q., and Pretorius, L. (2019), “Experiential
learning in doctoral training programmes: Fostering personal
epistemology through collaboration”, Studies in Continuing
Education, 41 (1), 111-128.
31. Lekshmi, P., and Radhika, R. (2016),“Competency management
as a strategy for performance appraisal”. J Chem Pharm Sci, 9
(4), 1909-1912.
32. Lockyer, J., Bursey, F., Richardson, D., Frank, J. R., Snell, L.,
Campbell, C., and ICBME Collaborators. (2017), “Competency-
based medical education and continuing professional
development: A conceptualization for change”. Medical
Teacher, 39 (6), 617-622.
33. Mahajan, R., Gupta, P. & Misra, R. (2022), "Employability skills
framework: a tripartite approach", Education + Training, 64(3),
360-379
34. McClelland, D. C.(1973),“Testing for competence rather than for
intelligence.". American psychologist, 28 (1),1.
35. Mueller, T. L., Stauber, M., Kohler, T., Eckstein, F., Müller, R.,
and van Lenthe, G. H. (2009), “Non-invasive bone competence
analysis by high-resolution pQCT: an in vitro reproducibility
study on structural and mechanical properties at the human
radius”, Bone, 44 (2), 364-371.
36. Mulchay, D. E. (2006),“The Continuing Quest for Equal Schools:
An Essay Review”, Education Review.
37. Naquin, S. S., & Holton III, E. F. (2003), “Redefining state
government leadership and management development: A process
for competency-based development”,Public personnel
management, 32 (1), 23-46.
38. Okwelle, P. C., Deebom, M. T., Harcourt, P., & Okwelle, P. C.
(2017) “Technical vocational education and training as a tool for
sustainable empowerment of youths in Niger Delta, Nigeria”,
International Journal of Innovative Social & Science Education
Research, 5(1), 29-38.

511
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

39. Poorkiani, M., Beheshtifar, M., & Moghadam, M. N. (2010)

“Studying the competency-related models in succession
planning”, Social Sciences, 5 (6), 507-513.
40. Priyadarshini, R. R. G., & Dave, D. (2012) “Competency-based
training needs assessment model” Management and Labour
Studies, 37 (3), 195-207.
41. Rahmani, A.M., Ehsani, A., Mohammadi, M., Mohammed,
A.H., Karim, S.H.T.& Hosseinzadeh, M. (2022), "A new model
for analyzing the role of new ICT-based technologies on the
success of employees' learning programs", Kybernetes, 51 (6),
2156-2171.
42. Rowley, P.,& Walker, C. (2020), “Adapt or Perish: A New
Approach for Industry Needs-Driven Master’s Level Low-Carbon
Energy Engineering Education in the UK”,Energies, 13 (9), 2246.
43. Salman, M., Ganie, S. A., &Saleem, I. (2020) “Employee
competencies as predictors of organizational performance: a study
of public and private sector banks”. Management and Labour
Studies, 45 (4), 416-432.
44. Sanchez, J. I.,& Levine, E. L. (2009) “What is (or should be) the
difference between competency modeling and traditional job
analysis?”, Human resource management review, 19 (2), 53-63.
45. Seemiller, C. (2018) “A competency-based model for youth
leadership development”, Journal of leadership education, 17 (1).
46. Shet, S. V., Patil, S. V., and Chandawarkar, M. R. (2019)
“Competency based superior performance and organizational
effectiveness”, International Journal of Productivity and
Performance Management, 68 (4), 753-773.
47. Smith, E. (2010) “A review of twenty years of competency-based
training in the Australian vocational education and training
system”, International journal of training and development, 14
(1), .54-64.
48. Ten Cate, O., & Scheele, F. (2007) “Competency-based
postgraduate training: can we bridge the gap between theory and
clinical practice?” Academic medicine, 82 (6), 542-547.
49. Tran, L. T., & Nyland, C. (2013) “Competency-based training,
global skills mobility and the teaching of international students in
vocational education and training” Journal of Vocational
Education & Training, 65 (1), 143-157.
50. Tūtlys, V., Buligina, I., Dzelme, J., Gedvilienė, G., Loogma,
K., Sloka, B., Tikkanen, T.I., Tora, G., Vaitkutė, L., Valjataga,
T. & Ümarik, M. (2022), "VET ecosystems and labour market
integration of at-risk youth in the Baltic countries: implications of
Baltic neoliberalism", Education + Training, 64 (2), 190-213.

512
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

51. Üsdiken, B., & Pasadeos, Y. (1995), “Organizational analysis in

North America and Europe: A comparison of co-citation
networks”. Organization studies 16 (3), 503-526.
52. Van Eck, N. J., & Waltman, L. (2007), “Bibliometric mapping of
the computational intelligence field”, International Journal of
Uncertainty, Fuzziness and Knowledge-Based Systems, 15 (5),
625-645.
53. Van Eck, N. J., Waltman, L., Dekker, R.,& Van Den Berg, J.
(2010), “A comparison of two techniques for bibliometric
mapping: Multidimensional scaling and VOS”. Journal of the
American Society for Information Science and Technology, 61
(12), 2405-2416.
54. Yadlapati, R., Keswani, R. N., and Pandolfino, J. E. (2016)
“Competency based medical education in gastrointestinal
motility”. Neurogastroenterology & Motility, (28)10, 1460-1464.
55. Zhang, J., Xie, H. S., Schmidt, K., Xia, B., Li, H., & Skitmore,
M. (2019), “Integrated experiential learning-based framework to
facilitate project planning in civil engineering and construction
management courses”, Journal of professional issues in
engineering education and practice, 145 (4).
56. Zopiatis, A., Theodosiou, P., & Constanti, P. (2014), “Quality and
satisfaction with culinary education: Evidence from
Cyprus”, Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Education, 26 (2),
87-98.

Dr. Gayatri Panda

Asst. Professor, Nist University
E-mail [email protected]
Mobile no. 7008343704

513
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

CHAPTER 41

PERSPECTIVES OF ENTREPRENEURIAL
ORIENTATION CLUSTER AND ITS VALUE
ADDITION: A VISUALIZATION ANALYSIS
Dr.Manoj Dash & Dr. Gayatri Panda

Abstract:
Purpose: Entrepreneurial orientation has immensely increased its
importance in present business conditions.Entrepreneurial orientation
is a vital factor that undermines the importance of developing long-
run business perspectives and focusing on new entrants' strategies.
The prime objectiveof this research study is to do a visualization
analysis by synthesizing the literature on entrepreneurial orientation.
Design/Methodology/Approach: The research is conducted by
considering 961 articles from2001 to 2021. The study identifies the
journal with the maximum publication, year-wise publication, the
most prolific authors, and countries. Various maps describing the
citation and co-citation networks, co-authorship patterns, and
keyword co-occurrence networks have been provided. The extensive
metadata of all the 961articleswereextracted using the SCOPUS
database andvarious network maps constructed using the VOS viewer
visualization tool.
Findings: The findings of the research work identified eight influential
research pathways as (1) “Entrepreneurial orientation and
innovativeness,” (2) “Entrepreneurial orientation and learning
orientation,” (3) “Entrepreneurial orientation and environmental
dynamism,” (4) “Entrepreneurial orientationand transformational
leadership,” (5) “Entrepreneurial orientation and marketing capabilities”
(6) “Entrepreneurial orientation and technology orientation”
(7) “Entrepreneurial orientation and firm performance”
(8) “Entrepreneurial orientation and entrepreneurial marketing” and
developed 24 future research questions to be carried out in future
research work.
Implications: The current study confers a value addition to
entrepreneurial orientation by developing a framework for upcoming
researchers, which will add substantial value to the existing literature.

514

DOI: 10.25215/9189764560.41
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

It is considered a unique work focused on multiple angles from

visualization to trend analysis.
Originality/value – This research is one of the limited research
studies that proposed a conceptual framework to understand the
existing literature and future research areas to be explored by the
upcoming researcher.First, through bibliometric visualization, it tried
to analyze the present research state of the topic. Second, it gave
information on the top journal, top researcher, highest publication in
terms of country, and highest occurring keywords. Third, it identified
the dry areas that need exploration among future researchers adding
value tothe field of entrepreneurship.
Key words: Entrepreneurial orientation, Bibilometric, visualization,
Systematic literature review, Citenet,VOSviewer.
Introduction:
ntrepreneurial orientation is a well-defined concept that
identifies the extent to which organizations are proactive,
risk-taking, and innovative in their management
philosophies and behavior or stated concisely.
Entrepreneurial orientation has emerged as one of the most
recognized attributes in entrepreneurship research (Wales, 2016).
Fadda (2018) discussed the role of entrepreneurial orientation in the
tourism sector and signified that proactiveness, risk-taking, and
autonomy significantly influence profitability. Cho and Lee (2018)
opined that entrepreneurial orientationis positively associatedwith
business performance. Innovative and progressiveness affect a firm's
growth and are critical indicators for measuring financial and non-
financial performance. Genc et al.(2019) explored the impact of
internationalization on innovation where entrepreneurial orientation is
a mediator between business performance and market factors. Wang
et al.(2020) opined that entrepreneurial orientation motivates firms to
focus more on value creation with value appropriation.
The entrepreneurial orientation construct has gained substantial
interest from researchers over the years, leading to some significant
literature studies ( Walter, Auer, and Ritter, 2006; Sauka, 2007;
Wales, 2016, Covin and Wales,2012; Wales, Gupta, and Mousa,
2013, Andrade et al.,2018) and meta-analysis (Abebe, 2011). Very
few(Andrade et al. 2018; Pei and shan, 2021) studies have offered
bibliometric comments on entrepreneurship and a variety of other
interrelated topics,such as rural entrepreneurship (Pato and Teixeira,
2016), entrepreneurship, and family firm research (Lopez-Fernandez
et al., 2016), social entrepreneurship(Rey-martí et al., 2015; Sauka,
2007), entrepreneurial education (Kakouris and Georgiadis, 2016),

515
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

global entrepreneurship (Servantie et al., 2016), and small business

entrepreneurship (Mazzarol, 2015). Rauch et al.(2009) stated that
entrepreneurial orientation had indicated a positive relationship with
performance. Entrepreneurial orientation is an essential dimension for
organization performance measurement. Entrepreneurial orientation
was measured through innovativeness, risk-taking, and proactiveness
(Anderson et al.,2014;Kimbuand Tichaawa, 2018). It analyzed the
growth perspectives among firms and examined the ability to
understand the risk and develop strategies to handle the challenges
with the prospective outcome.
On the other hand, one of the significant gaps in the existing literature
is that though entrepreneurial orientation domain has been explored.
Still, the lack of prominent research work on visualizationstimulated
researchers to investigate this area. Thus, the researchers were
motivated to develop the current study to find note worthy
contributions of the method to business performance and create
research streams for prospective researchers. Though extant literature
is available in the area of entrepreneurial orientation, the current
research work attempts to present a comprehensive view of
entrepreneurial orientation from the year 2001 to 2021 by developing
the following research questions:
RQ1: What are the well-known journals, and countries, with primary
publications on this topic?
RQ2: What are the repeatedly used keywords, articles, clusters, and
content analysis on the topic?
RQ3: Who are the well-known authors in the context to co-authorship
with other authors?
RQ4:What are the potential trends of entrepreneurial orientation for
upcoming researchers?
The discussion above resulted in the formulation of thestated
questions, and objectives such as:
1. To congregate and re-examine articles on the topic of
entrepreneurial orientation.
2. To identify the research streamson entrepreneurial orientation.
3. To put forward prospective research ways on entrepreneurial
orientation.
The consecutive sections of the research paper are organized as
follows: section two, discussed the literature review of the study,
which enabled to understand the present state of condition,section
three intends to address the details of the research methodology;
section four encompasses the details about the results and analysis,
according to the research questions and objectives mentioned earlier,

516
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

and section five explained on content analysis,section six presented

future research perspectives, and section seven focused on the
implications of the study and section eight enumerated on the unique
contribution of the research and lastly section nine discussed on
conclusion of the study.
2. Literature Review:
Palmer et al.,(2017) tried to analyze the relationship between inter-
organizational learning towards transforming entrepreneurial and
market orientation to create a competitive edge. Tajeddini, Martin,
and Ali, (2020) providedan insight that a dynamic environment and
social and technological resources will enable aconstructive
relationship between entrepreneurial orientation and organizational
performance. Sauka (2007) studied the relationship between majorly
three drivers such as risk-taking, innovativeness, and proactiveness. It
was witnessed that risk-taking is predominantly considered an
attribute that drives a firm towards growth. The more the risk-taker,
the performance enhances. Mcgee and Peterson (2017) pointed out
that entrepreneurial self-efficacy and entrepreneurial orientation are
two antecedents closely associated with the firm account. The
founder's efficacy pulls the organizations towards enhancing
organizational growth perspectives.
Bernoster (2018) stated that entrepreneurial orientation is closely
connected with individual attributes. The positive attitude of
individuals is associated with innovativeness and proactiveness.
(Basco, Hernández-perlines and Rodríguez-garcía, 2019) research
work highlight that the firm's context is influenced to measure firm
performance. Anzenbacher and Wagner (2020), in their study
attempted to explore the effectiveness of innovation as an essential
determinant of entrepreneurial orientation. Ling, López-fernández,
and Serrano-bedia (2019) explored that organizational culture
dominatesentrepreneurial orientation success. Rwehumbiza and
Marinov( 2020), in their research, tried to identify the significant
determinants responsible for solid entrepreneurial orientation in a
weak economic system. Chavez et al., (2017) enumerated that
entrepreneurial orientation is a mechanism between manufacturing
capabilities and market needs. Arzubiaga et al.,(2018) tried to list the
relationship between how the board of directors of a family
encourages growth in entrepreneurial orientation and innovativeness
among members. Lastly, the entrepreneurial orientation encourages
the managers to understand risk and innovation. It enables them to
handle enormous challenges that can empower them to grow business
and develop forward-looking policies.

517
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

3. Methodology of the study

Bibliometric analysis is a practical method of analyzing a research
field over a given period(Alfonzo, Sakraida, and Hastings-tolsma,
2014). The bibliometric area is primarily concerned with
quantitatively studying the available bibliographic material (Science,
Carolina, and Hill, 1987).The present research adopted a unique
approach that focused on presenting the consolidated workusing
bibliometric visualization, citation analysis, cluster analysis, and
content analysis(Cheng and Bosselman, 2016). The present study
chooses to extract the data from the Scopus database, and the reason
is the availability of the highest number of publications (Emerald,
Taylor and Francis, Wiley, Elsevier, and Springer). Entrepreneurship
researchers have often conducted literature reviews and bibliometric
analyses by assembling information from this database (Rey-martí,
Ribeiro-soriano, and Palacios-marqués, 2015; Hernández-perlines et
al., 2019). The broad methodology adopted for searching literature is
through digital database—the Scopus database was adoptedfor
extracting the papers relating to entrepreneurial orientation from 2001
to 2021, and it is presented in figure: 1:
Research Questions/ Objectives:
1.What are the most influential areas of
entrepreneurial orientation literature in terms of
1. Entrepreneurial Orientation (2001-2021) popular authors, publications, countries and
keywords?
2. What are the popular research path ways in the
entrepreneurial orientation?
3. What research questions needs to be explored
in entrepreneurial orientation in future research
work by other reserachers?

Step 1: Use of VOS Viewer software to do

bibilometric analysis (most cited articles, country
with maximum publications, top cited authors,
2. Tools and Techniques Keyword)
Step 2: Use of VOS Viewer to develop citation
analysis.
Step 3: Cluster and Content analysis using VOS
viewer software.

Step: 1 Selection of Database

3. Collection of Articles

Scopus

Total no of Articles Extracted Step 2: Searching of Articles using Keyword

n=3418

“ENTERPRENEURIAL ORIENTATON”

Type of Document: Article, Subject Area:

Business and Management, Lanuguage: English
Articles excluded afterrepeated
screening (n=2457) Full Text Articles Extracted for
further Review (n=961)

10 518
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 1: Methodology Framework

4. Results and Findings
4.1 Highest publications on Entrepreneurial Orientation
The results and findings of the study are discussed in the following
sections, which focus on some of the significant attributes, such as
segregating the journals with the leading publications yearly basis,
well-known authors, countries, exploring entrepreneurial activities
orientation—developing network maps based on authorship and co-
authorship, inter-country wise, and keyword occurrences.The primary
objective of the research study is to create a plan for future
researchers in entrepreneurial orientation.

The total extracted 961 papers in the study were published in 160
journals. Figure 2.analyzes the journalswith the highest number of
publications on entrepreneurial orientation.The toptwenty journals
were considered, and the leadingjournals belong to Elsevier
publishers. Four journals come under the flagship of Springer, four
belong to Inderscience, and three journals fit into Emerald's publisher.
Other belongs to Wiley, Tandfoline, AB academics, Sage, Serial
publisher, etc. The most well-known Journal with the maximum
number of publications, such as the Journal of Business Research,
which published around 48 papers, belongs to Elsevier Publishers. It
is evident that the concept of entrepreneurial orientation has expanded
its root and entered every area, and the idea has gained prominent
attention from researchers from every field.

519
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

European Journal Of International Management

Entrepreneurial Business And Economics Review
Asia Pacific Journal Of Management
International Journal Of Entrepreneurial Ve nturing
Entrepreneurship And Regional Development
International Journal Of Economic Research
Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal
Journal Of International Entrepreneurship
International Journal Of Entrepreneurship And Innovation Management
Journal Of Small Business And Enterprise Development
Journal Of Business Ve nturing
Small Business Economics
International Small Business Journal Researching Entrepreneurship
International Journal Of Entrepreneurship
Management Decision
Industrial Marketing Management
International Journal Of Entrepreneurship And Small Business
International Journal Of Entrepreneurial Behaviour And Research
International Entrepreneurship And Management Journal
Journal Of Business Research

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

Figure 2: Journal-wise publications

4.2 Yearly-wise publication

Figure 3 depicts yearly publications from the Scopus database's
extracted papers published from 2001 to 2021. The extracted graph
illustrates that entrepreneurial orientation research has steadily
increased since 2009. Analyzing the publication volume was
significantly less during 2001 to 2008whereas, there was a steady
progressive trend from 2009 to 2021. The papers increased from 18 to
203, ensuring that researchers understand entrepreneurial orientation
in the organizational context and provide the concept for achieving
business performance and enhancing organizational excellence.

520
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 3: Yearly-wise Publications

4.3 Countries withthe maximum publication

Figure 4 demonstrates the top ten countries with leading publications
on entrepreneurial orientation. It is identified that the United States of
America (USA), with 220 publications, is leading with a very high
margin. Then, the United Kingdom stands in second place with 87
articles. Further, Spain, Germany, and China stand in the third, fourth,
and fifth positions. Evidently, of 961 pieces included in the study
belong to the top five countries' authors. Further, the following five
countries, Malaysia, Indonesia, Australia, Sweden, and Finland, have
more than forty publications in entrepreneurial orientation. So it is
evident that researchers can explorethe significant antecedents and
variables of entrepreneurial orientation and develops research work
adding value to the academic fraternity.

521
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

250

200

150

100

50

0
es om ai
n
an
y na ia si
a lia en nd
at i
ay
s
ne t ra ed la
St gd Sp rm Ch al n
ed
n e do Au
s Sw Fi
i t Ki G M In
d
Un i te
Un

Figure 4: Top ten countries

4.4 Most Significant Authors

Figure 5 displays the twenty authors who have contributed full
articles on entrepreneurial orientation. Nine hundred sixty-one papers
were extracted, authored by 160 authors-the top Author Sascha Kraus
who has written full documents of around nineteen pieces.The author
has published a variety of articles on entrepreneurship. Sascha Kraus
is a Professor at the ESCE International Business School, France, and
a visiting professor at various other universities. His works are primly
focused on entrepreneurship, international management, and strategic
entrepreneurship. The second Author, William J. Wales, is a Standish
Chair and Associate Professor of Entrepreneurshipat Albany, SUNY,
United States. The author's research interests lie in Entrepreneurial
Orientation, Strategic Behavior& Strategy Formulation, Corporate
Entrepreneurship & Renewal, and CEO Attributes and Strategy-
making. He holds a pretty impressive profile as a researcher.

Further, Eggers, Fabian, and Gupta, Vishal K. standin the third and
fourth position with ten articles. The author is currently working at
Menlo College, Atherton, United States. The interest areas are
entrepreneurial orientation, entrepreneurial marketing and SME
decision-making. The fourth author works at the University of
Alabama, Tuscaloosa, United States. He has worked in varied areasof
management.

522
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Chair and Professor of Entrepreneurship at the University of

Oklahoma, USA. His research interests primarily focuson
entrepreneurial orientation, social entrepreneurship, and family
business. Lumpkin is a highly recognized personality with an
imposing profile as a researcher. His article titled "Clarifying the
entrepreneurial orientation construct and linking it to performance,"
published in the year 1996, is an exceptionally outstanding
contribution to the area of entrepreneurial orientation research. It is
frequently cited by almost every other researcher working in
entrepreneurial orientation.

Further, the latter authors, M. Brettel, J.G. Covin, A. Engelen, and

V.K. Gupta, have eight articles. The authors have varied research
interest areas such as strategic management, business management,
etc., with entrepreneurship as a common interest.
20

18

16

14

12

10

S. .
, . J. F. K
. B. . . .
M M.J , G , A , K
. .
M
.
Y.
. . . . .
.T , G , K , W o, S B.S , M s, F
. .
us W e r s, , V. a n, e s, a n r P. Li, G a n s , l e
ra le s,
g g ta r b gh g a,
k ov e le of e de , in, ue n ine a le ma k son e tte r lin
K k la
a E up U u r te ir o Eng llnh ve r p q W do de r Br - Pe
W G H
- O Sh Fe illa
m Re uma A
iz Lu r a - A
n
de
z
Ru - V a r Pu ¡n
­a P Ã
c à n
ar er
G H

Figure 5:Top twenty authors with the highest publication on

Entrepreneurial Orientation

4.5 Co-authorship network map

This section discusses the co-authorship network map using the
bibliographic dataset downloaded using the Scopus dataset. The
VOSviewer 1.6.11 software has been utilized for conducting this
analysis. The software uses the visualization technique for
constructing such maps (Eck and Waltman, 2007). The co-authorship
network maps among different authors are done in co-authorship
network analysis(Eck and Waltman, 2014).The fundamental objective
of co-authorship is to identify the authors' patterns and identify the

523
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

authors who have co-authored maximum times. The dataset used in

the study contained a total of 2057 authors. Using VOSviewer, it was
found that out of these many authors, the most extensive set of
authors, among whom a co-authorship network map could be
constructed, was 130 authors.

Figure 6 displays the network map based on co-authorship

constructed using VOS viewer. The authors' co-authorship links are
denoted by the lines (Eck and Waltman, 2016). It has been visualized
that the software places the author into nine clusters. Cluster 1
comprises ten items; cluster 2 comprises 9items; cluster 3 and 4
contains 8items; cluster 5 includesseven items, cluster 6 and 7, and 6
items. Lastly,clusters 8 and 9 consist of 3 items.The five top authors
who have full articles in co-authorship with other authors in the
dataset are Marino, L. D. (22 authors), Kraus, S. (22 authors), Wales,
W. J. (14 authors), Gupta, V. K. (13 authors) and Li, Y. (13 authors).

Figure 6: Co-authorship network map

4.6 Inter-country Network Map

The consecutive section provided an idea of the international
collaboration patterns among various authors and identified with the
help of inter-country analysis through co-authorship using
theVOSviewer Software (Lee and Hew, 2017). The inter-country
network map based on co-authorship is shown in Figure 7. A total of
85 countries in the dataset were identified using VOS viewer, and it
was found that 59 of them were connected in terms of co-authorship.
After appropriate analysis of the network map in detail, it was
identified that authors from the United States of America (USA), the
U.K., and Germany are leading international collaboration articles.It
can be seen that the USA is leading, and the maximum number of
authors have co-authored with around 36 different countries.

524
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 7: Inter-country network map

4.7 Network analysis based on Key-words

The consecutive section elaborateson the keyword co-occurrences
network. The fundamental objective is to identify the keywords which
occurred maximum times in the current research works.Figure
8provides an insight into the developed keyword co-occurrences
network map. The map is constructed using all keywords provided in
the various articles included in this study. A total of 2502 keywords
were present in the dataset. The network map was created by
considering only those keywords which occurred in at least five
articles; in consideration, 168 keywords were found, that fulfilled this
criterion, and were further utilized by the software to construct a
network map.

Figure 8: Keywords co-occurrences map

525
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

4.8 Citation Analysis

Figure 9: Citation network maps

The citation network map, displayed in Figure 11, is extracted using

Cit Net Explorer Software. This software facilitates studying a
research field's development over time, reviewing the literature, and
describing a specific research field (Eck and Waltman, 2014). Figure
11 considers the direct citation links between the core publications
involved in entrepreneurial orientation evolution as an established
research field over the past years. The logic behind such analysis is
that by highlighting the most significant research publications related
to a particular area, arranged in the order of their publication years,
and the existing citation relationships among these publications, a
general picture of the development over the years can be obtained
(Eck and Waltman, 2014). Figure 11, the article by(Armstrong and
Overton, 1977), is the earliest cited article. The citenetexplorer
software utilizes only the first author's last name to label the circles,
so only "Armstrong" is visible in the figure instead of its full citation.
This article is cited by 98 out of the 716 items in the study. Upon
analyzing the figure in the software, it was found that various authors
such as(Baker and Sinkula, 2009),(Hughes and Morgan, 2007), etc.,
involving a questionnaire and survey-based methodology, have cited
this article often. The report is concerned about estimating non-
responsive bias in the mail surveys. Though this article is not related
to entrepreneurial orientation, it has helped the latter researchers in
their methodological part and empirical analysis of data(Tat et al.,
2007)

Seventy-eight articles in this study cite the following article in

chronological order (Miller and Friesen, 1978). This article, about
archetypes of strategy formulation, has little in common with
entrepreneurial orientation. Still, it has aided the latter researchers in
integrating strategies and entrepreneurship to develop entrepreneurial

526
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

orientation. In the order, Fornell (1981), the following article, cited by

143 items, evaluates through SEM technique with unobservable
variables and measurement error. This article has assisted the other
researchers in their data analysis and methodological part (e.g., Baker
and Sinkula, 2009).

Further, Miller and Friesen (1982) tested two different product

innovation models in conservative and entrepreneurial firms. The
researchers in later studies have cited this article while stating about
bringing new products and trying risky resource commitments in
entrepreneurially oriented firms(Lumpkin and Dess, 1996; Hult,
Hurley and Knight, 2004; Wales, 2016). Four hundred thirty-six other
articles in this study cite the following article (Miller 2011). This
article is the first in chronological order to be exceedingly beneficial
for the latter entrepreneurial orientation researchers. The prime
objective of the research work is to identify the significant
determinants of entrepreneurship. This process is followed by
organizations for renewing themselves and their relevant markets
through innovation, pioneering, and risk-taking. Miller operationally
described entrepreneurial orientation as proactiveness, risk-taking,
and innovation. The latter researchers, who have contributed
exponentially to entrepreneurial orientation development in the
subsequent ten to fifteen years, have frequently cited Miller's works
(Covin, Jeffrey, and Slevin, Dennis, 1989; Lumpkin and Dess, 1996;
Miller, 2011).

Then further observing the figure, another significant publication in

the order by and(Covin, Jeffrey, and Slevin, Dennis, 1989) is cited by
427 articles in this study. The authors prepared and validated scales
for measuring entrepreneurial orientation, extensively utilized by the
latter researchers in their studies (Miller, 2011). Further, Covin and
Slevin (1991) presented a theoretical entrepreneurship model. The
model depicted the elements of organizational systems related to the
entrepreneurial orientation of the larger firms. The model could also
be applied to the smaller firms, but with varying degrees.

Further, the article by(Lumpkin and Dess, 1996)is cited by 536 items
in this study. Such a high number of citations to this study can be
accredited to its vital purpose of clarifying the nature of the
Entrepreneurial Orientation (E.O.) construct comprehensively for the
first time. The authors also attempted to propose a possible
framework to inspect the relationship between Entrepreneurial
Orientation and firm performance. The latter researchers have often

527
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

cited this article while explaining the importance of integrating

different performance dimensions in empirical studies related to
entrepreneurial Orientation (Hughes and Morgan, 2007; Wiklund,
Patzelt and Shepherd, 2009). Further,(Wiklund 1999)examined the
sustainability of the relationship between E.O. and performance. The
author tried to investigate whether E.O. affects performance in the
long run or temporarily for a shorter time. Later on, another important
article (Lumpkin and Dess, 1996) focused on E.O.'s two essential
dimensions, i.e., proactiveness and competitive aggressiveness. The
researchers investigated how these two approaches relate to each
other and how their functions are different and how firms display
these approaches for making strategies.

(Wiklund and Shepherd, 2003) emphasized that it captures a

significant component of how a firm is organized. Their findings
suggested a positive relation between information-based resources
and firm performance and that entrepreneurial orientation enhances
this relationship. Two hundred five articles in this study cite this
article. The latter authors have often mentioned this article while
stating the strong linkage between entrepreneurial orientation and the
various firm-level attributes and outcomes. Further, in the later years,
the researchers have conducted significant studies by connecting
entrepreneurial orientation with multiple topics such as corporate
entrepreneurship (Dess and Lumpkin, 2005), small business
performance, (Wiklund and Shepherd, 2005) sales growth rate
relationship (Covin et al., 2006), the performance of SMEs (Keh et
al., 2007), learning orientation and firm Performance (Wang, 2008),
new venture performance (Stam and Elfring, 2008), profitability in
small businesses (Baker and Sinkula, 2009), etc.

Later, an important article by Rauch et al. (2009) attempted to re-

examine and assess the collaborative research on the existing
relationship between entrepreneurial orientation and business
performance. Three hundred twenty-six items in this study cite this
article. Further, Covin and Lumpkin (2011) focused on several
essential matters related to the ongoing development of the theoretical
understanding of entrepreneurial orientation research. Wales (2013)
provided a comprehensive review on a qualitative basis and assessed
EO's empirical literature.

4.9 Network analysis based on Co-citation

Co-citation analysis uses the two particular formsmentioned by the
other papers (Small, 1973).Figure 10 shows a co-citation network

528
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

map of the essential documents cited by the articles in this study.

With VOSviewer software's help, it was discovered that there wasa
total of 23019 cited references for the 961items included in this study.
Developing a map based on the network considers only those
documents (concerns) cited by more than 100 out of the total
articlesincluded in this study. Only nineteen papers met this threshold.
The co-citation network map of these documents was then created.

Figure 10: Network map using co-citation of articles

In Figure 10, the documents with a higher co-citation index are

connected with thicker lines. It can be seen that the most
comprehensive line exists between the articles by (Lumpkin and Dess,
1996) and(Miller 2011) since they have a co-citation index of 382.
Among all the items, the highest co-citation index between the two
reports (Lumpkin and Dess, 1996) has a remarkable semantic
similarity with other essentialdocuments in the references.

4.10 Cluster Analysis

To categorize and segregate leading research areas, the authors
conducted cluster analysis on the keywords using VOSviewer
software. The studywas restricted to five leads of keyword
occurrences for visualization, as shown in Figure 12. Researchers
identified eight clusters of research flow based onthe repetition of
keywords. The keywords are clustered into eight colors: yellow
(Entrepreneurial orientation and innovativeness), Red
(Entrepreneurial orientation and Learning orientation), blue
(Entrepreneurial orientation and Environmental dynamism), Green
(Entrepreneurial Orientation and transformational leadership),
Maroon (Entrepreneurial orientation and marketing capabilities),
Orange (Entrepreneurial orientation andtechnology
orientation),purple (Entrepreneurial Orientation and firm

529
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

performance),and Brown (Entrepreneurial Orientation and

Entrepreneurial marketing) that represents the eight main research
flow in theliterature.Table 7: figures out the clusters with their
respective keywords.Thus, the authors conducted a content analysis of
the highly cited articles in variousareas to identify, clarify and
substantiate their linkage among the papers.

Figure 11: cluster analysis

Table 1: Developing Clusters using Keywords

Sl. Cluster Name of Cluster keywords
no
1 Cluster “Entrepreneurial Risk-taking, Social capital,
one Orientation and Growth,Aggressiveness, Business
Innovativeness” Capital, Resources, Firm
size,Absorptive capacity.
2 Cluster “Entrepreneurial Small and Medium Enterprises,
two Orientation and Creativity, Networking,
Learning Motivation,Organizational
Orientation” Culture,Social capital, Individual
entrepreneurship.
3 Cluster “Entrepreneurial Competitive advantage, total
three Orientation and quality management.
Environmental
dynamism”
4 Cluster “Entrepreneurial Innovation, Knowledge sharing,
four Orientation and human capital, top management
transformational team, strategy, intellectual capital
leadership”

530
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

5 Cluster “Entrepreneurial Innovativeness, Risk-taking,

five Orientation and Proactiveness, Autonomy,
marketing competitive aggressiveness.
capabilities”
6 Cluster “Entrepreneurial Technology transfer, learning,
six orientation and corporate entrepreneurs,
technology innovation, new product
orientation” development, and strategic
Orientation.
7 Cluster “Entrepreneurial Business performance,
seven Orientation and Competitive intensity,
firm performance” environmental uncertainty, new
venture.
8 Cluster “Entrepreneurial Marketing Capabilities,
eight Orientation and sustainability, start-ups, social
Entrepreneurial entrepreneurship.
marketing”
5. Topic mapping
The bibliometric analysis and visualization of keywords and countries
highlighted thatthe USA was at the top with 220 articles.
Entrepreneurial orientationwas the most occurred keyword, followed
by 964 occurrences, respectively. Though entrepreneurial orientation
gained prominent attention in other countries to understand its
importance, it is still in a growth phase regarding published articles
and highly occurred keywords. It requires focusing on recent drives to
provide an idea to uncover thecurrent trends. The researchers
performed the content analysis of the crucial articles to identify the
association among various published articles covering the
entrepreneurial orientation journey from history; to recent trends to
develop a framework based on the developments. The researcher
identified eight research pathways based on cluster analysis, namely,
(1)“Entrepreneurial orientation and innovativeness,”
(2)“Entrepreneurial orientation and Learning orientation,”
(3)“Entrepreneurial orientation and Environmental dynamism,” and
(4)“Entrepreneurial orientation and transformational leadership”
(5)“Entrepreneurial orientation and marketing capabilities”
(6)“Entrepreneurial orientation and technology orientation”
(7)“Entrepreneurial orientation and firm performance”
(8)“Entrepreneurial orientation and entrepreneurial marketing” using
content analysis derived linkage between the identified areas and
developed a framework of entrepreneurial orientation for upcoming
researchers in this area Figure 13. in the followingsections,
researchers discussed the research pathways suggested a research

531
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

agenda for future researchers and proposed a framework for

upcoming researchers.
5.1 Entrepreneurial Orientation and Innovativeness
Innovativeness is designated a special place in the concept of
entrepreneurial orientation. It is well noted that innovation will
encourage new ideas and creativity. The higher the innovation level,
the more the company resources can be effectively utilized for
optimum results (Hernández-perlines et al., 2019). Innovativeness
among managers has impacted the process of entrepreneurial
orientation to a great extent. It encourages developing and framing
policies by considering differential strategies that focus on attaining
high performance(Anwar, 2020). It requires the researchers to explore
other dimensions of organizational growth and performance. The
present study has extracted four research questions from theabove-
discussed pathway

5.2 Entrepreneurial Orientation and Learning Orientation

It facilitates managers' and organizations' ability to consistently
incorporate learning to adapt and enhance new skills and technology.
It analyses an organization's existing resources and transforms them
to meet the required competencies. Considering the need for learning
orientation in entrepreneurial orientation, the researchers suggested
three research questions from the above research flow.
Entrepreneurial Orientation Components
Innovativeness, Risk-taking, Proactivenesstop management characteristics, organizational configuration, new entry

Entrepreneurial orientation closely connected with technology

Developing Government Policies is a way forward to encourage young enterpreneurs

Entrepreneurial Orientation provides a strategic –view to develop strategic policies for growth and development of organization.

Objective of EO
To promote innovation
Promote autonomy, risk –taking.
EO increases the ability of CEO and Top management to uphold risk taking attributes

Impact of EO
Entrepreneurial Orientation (EO) Entrepreneurial orientation
Upholding cultural values
A generational prespective
Reasons for success of EO
Self efficacy among entrepreneurs Trends in EO closely connected with
Vertical alliances
Effect of Environmental factors technology, market orientation
Benefits of EO
Consistently promoting
growth and profit of
organization

A significant impact of Entrepreneurial orientation on Artificial intelligence and data analytics

Linkage of entrepreneurial orientation towards international and cross-cultural approach

532
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Figure 13: A Conceptual Framework on Entrepreneurial Orientation.

6.3 Entrepreneurial orientation and environmental dynamism
Environmental dynamism consists of two significant aspects, i.e.,
internal and external. The internal environment discusses enhancing
employee skills and competencies to develop technological abilities.
The external environment focuses on creating a competitive
advantage over competitors. Technical capabilities moderate the bond
between entrepreneurial orientation and organizational performance.
This study's gravity explores and measures the expanding view to
developinga mechanism to undertake proper training to cope with
changing requirements. The present study has extracted three research
questions from theabove-discussed pathway.

6.4Entrepreneurial orientation and transformational leadership

Transformational leadership promotes a leadership style that
articulates the vision and develops a leadership behavior that focuses
on employees' positivity. It is a mediating agent betweenthe
entrepreneurial orientation model and firm performance. Further,
transformational leadership's role clarifies how the entrepreneurs
should behave and develop a positive attitude to uphold
organizational values to meet difficulties and required set objectives.
The researcher has opined three research questions from the above
research flow in connection to this.

6.5 Entrepreneurial orientation and marketing capabilities

Marketing capabilities as a contingent factor in entrepreneurship
investigate enhancing overall profitability.It tries to build the
network's ability and understand its requirements, leading to
developing strategies to meet the continuous needs. As the literature
review (Arunachalam et al., 2018) pointed out, entrepreneurship and
marketing are essential business dimensions closely linked with
profitability. The researcherdevelopedthree research questions that
have been extracted from the above flow.

6.6 Entrepreneurial orientation and technology orientation

Identifying the technological advancement and adapting technology
transfer will enable exploring new dimensions and achieving a
competitive advantage. It will develop the firm with technical
exposure, considered a critical success factor for growth and
innovation. Technological orientation will provide more autonomy to
address the challenges and succeed. The above discussions opined to

533
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

develop two research questions that future researchers can manage

and add to the academic and research fraternity.

6.7 Entrepreneurial orientation and firm performance

Success majorly depends on three components such as
innovativeness, risk-taking, and proactiveness. It is imperative to
create an environment where employees can understand their
competencies with their growth perspective attitude. Firm
performance measures profitability and focuses on developing
strategic decisions to meet the changing needs and requirements.Thus,
the authors suggested three questions to be addressed in future
studies.
Entrepreneurial Orientation

Innovativeness, Risk-taking Proactiveness

Learning Transformational Technology

Orientation leadership Orientation

IMPACT

Entrepreneurial Marketing

Firm Performance

Figure 13: Developed Framework for Future Research Agenda

6.8 Entrepreneurial orientation and entrepreneurial marketing

Entrepreneurial marketing is a component that addresses the passing
of business from one generation to another. It focuses on companies
owned from age to generation. The level of involvement,risk-taking,
and strategic decision-making process are the significant causes of
interest for those family-owned businesses to tape the market and
create a challenge for new entries. So, entrepreneurial orientation can
make them aware of the difficulties and framepolicies to face the
demand.In consideration, the authors came out with three research
questions that underline the issues to be addressed in future studies.

534
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Table 2: Future research questions

Research Pathways Future Research Questions
“Entrepreneurial 4. What is the role of innovation to make
Orientation and entrepreneurial Orientation effective?
Innovativeness” 5. How to develop innovative characteristics
among young entrepreneurs?
6. What difficulties are faced in implementing
entrepreneurial orientation effectively to
deal with changing conditions?
7. What should be the strategy to deal with
future requirements?
“Entrepreneurial 4. What is the role of learning orientation to
Orientation and make a firm competitive?
Learning 5. What are the challenges to deal with
Orientation” creating a learning-oriented culture?
6. How to measure the benefits of the learning
orientation approach towards
entrepreneurial orientation?
“Entrepreneurial 3. How to deal with environmental dynamism
Orientation and concerning entrepreneurial orientation?
Environmental 4. What is the role of competitors/competitive
dynamism” advantage for environmental sustainability?
5. What is the impact of a dynamic
environment on entrepreneurial
orientation?
“Entrepreneurial 4. What is the role of a transformational
Orientation and leader in creating a sustainable
Transformational entrepreneurial orientation?
Leadership” 5. What are the characteristics of a
transformational leader?
6. Are leaders able to create change?
“Entrepreneurial 4. Is marketing capabilities bringing changes
Orientation and in firm policy?
marketing 5. What policies should a firm develop to
capabilities” create a differential market environment?
6. What role do customer sentiments and
emotions play in tape the market?
“Entrepreneurial 1. How to create a technology-centric culture?
orientation and 2. What is the impact of data analytics on
technology developing strategic policies?
535
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

orientation”
“Entrepreneurial 1. What is the role of firm performance for
Orientation and firm entrepreneurship success?
performance” 2. What should strategies and policies the
government frame to encourage young
entrepreneurs?
3. Is financial profitability an essential factor
“Entrepreneurial to measure growth perspectives?
Orientation and 1. What is the role of entrepreneurial
Entrepreneurial marketing toenhance efficiency and
marketing” effectiveness?
2. How to deal with new marketing
strategies?
3. How to deal with upcoming competitors'
challenges?
The interconnection between the eight framed research gateways such
as (1) “Entrepreneurial orientation and innovativeness,”
(2)“Entrepreneurial orientation and learning orientation,”
(3)“Entrepreneurial orientation and environmental dynamism,”
(4)“Entrepreneurial orientationand transformational leadership,”
(5)“Entrepreneurial orientation and marketing capabilities”
(6)“Entrepreneurial orientation and technology orientation”
(7)“Entrepreneurial orientation and firm performance”
(8)“Entrepreneurial orientation and entrepreneurial marketing”is
shown in figure:13 will provide a broad idea which enabled to
develop future research questions in the above table-2. Future
researchers can consider the research questions and analyze their
linkage by creating research work and adding value to the existing
literature and research fraternity.

Figure: 13 shows that entrepreneurial orientation is the most critical

aspect of businessand has closely linked with innovation.
Entrepreneurial orientation impacts the relationship between
entrepreneurial orientation and learning orientation, which results in
accepting dynamism and new environmental challenges. This whole
system of the research pathways is closely connected.

In the future, researchers need to investigate possible relationships

from thedeveloped research framework and contribute to theliterature
from a new point of view, and help the government, policymakers,and
corporate in finding the dry areas to be dealt with to assist the
business performance and to encourage entrepreneurs to developat a

536
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

rapid pace. Thus, this framework gives opportunities to future

researchers to contributeto the future research agenda.

6. Implications of the study

6.1 Practical implications
The major implication of the present study determinedto measure the
role of entrepreneurial orientation in business performance.
Identifying entrepreneurial orientation behavior will facilitate young
entrepreneurs to frame a clear, purposeful plan to helpmake the
organization structured, systematic, and sustainable for the future.
This study attempts bibliometric visualization for organizations,
policymakers, and researchers to understand functional research
conditions. On the other hand, the research study provides a pathway
tounderstanding how proper management can strengthen business
performance, and be implemented in business performance and
growth.The previous studies suggested entrepreneurial orientation
plays an imperative role in business performance. Innovativeness,
proactiveness, and risk-taking enable entrepreneurs to measure the
risk and frame strategies in business performance. The present
research work demonstrated the significance of entrepreneurial
orientation and stated that proper management could develop better
management practices. Lastly, the entrepreneurial orientation can
broaden the scope of encouraging entrepreneurs to increase
innovation, risk-taking, and autonomy for business performance.

6.2 Theoretical implications

Entrepreneurial orientation expands its roots in every area with many
challenges and changes. Improved and competitive methods can be
essential for continued existence and systematic improvement in the
current chaotic business conditions. Thus, to understand the role of
entrepreneurial orientation in developingcompetitive techniques to
enhance business performanceand strategicallymanage operations by
encouraging more entrepreneurs, the present aimed to explore the role
of entrepreneurial orientationin business performance from previous
studies. The present study performed a bibliometric analysis to
measure the relevant contributions made by authors, institutes, and
countries in the research field. The present study developed a
framework that will enable understanding of the role of
entrepreneurial orientation for upcoming business performers and
learners andcreatemotivation among entrepreneurs for delivering
customized facilities for better organization performance.

537
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

7. Unique contribution of the research study

The unique contribution of the research study is through SLR and
bibliometric analysis of the literature on entrepreneurial orientation.
Thus, the present research develops network maps on authors,
countries, and keyword occurrence through bibliometric visualization
using the VOS viewer visualization tool. On the other hand,
bibliometric visualization developed the citation andco-citation
analysis to determine the productive authors and documents in the
entrepreneurial orientation. It also led to the cluster development and
content analysis that determines the significant research trends. It
developed a framework that enables upcoming researchers to
understand the present research condition and to what extent
entrepreneurial orientation has explored different functionalities of
business performance. Lastly, the study led to the framing of research
questions for upcoming researchers in entrepreneurial orientation.

8. Conclusion
Over the past twenty-five years, the entrepreneurship research field
has enormously attracted entrepreneurship researchers. This research
study commenced with several predefined objectives. Based on all
these objectives, this study's concise summary, discussion, and
limitations are presented in this concluding section. The results and
findings indicate that the most significant Journal with the highest
publications (48 articles) on entrepreneurial orientation research isthe
Journal of Business Research belonging to the ELSEVIER
publishers. The maximum cited article, with 847 citations, is about
the linkage between two dimensions of entrepreneurial orientation
and firm performance (Lumpkin and Dess 2001). Then, an increasing
trend is observed in the count of publications on E.O. research. Much
research has been conducted in the last five years, with complete
articles (115) published in 2016. The researchers belonging to the
USA, China, and Spain, have carried out the maximum research in
this area. The most prominent researchers in this area are Sascha
Krauss (France) and William J. Wales (USA). Both of them have
published eleven significant articles on this topic.

Further, this study signifies various analyses conducted using the

VOSviewersoftwarewere provided. Using the co-authorship network
analysis, it was found that the Author L.D. Marino has co-authored
with the maximum number of other authors in the dataset. Then, it
was found that the authors, belonging to the USA, England, and
Germany, are leading co-authorship with other countries' authors.
Using the Keyword co-occurrence analysis, it was found that apart

538
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

from the keyword "entrepreneurial orientation,"different keywords

such as firm Performance, market orientation, SMEs, and Innovation
have appeared in the maximum number of articles. Further, in the
latter section, the details about the evolution of the entrepreneurial
orientations research are provided by analyzing citation relationships
and the core articles' chronological appearance, using citenet explorer
software.

This study has comprehensively attempted to provide an efficient

bibliometric analysis of entrepreneurial orientation, but this study is
still not free from limitations. The first limitation is that only
themajorly Scopus and Web of Science indexed journals and articles
have been considered in this study. Other similar essential databases
can also be further utilized to conduct such analysis. Secondly, the
study finds articles published onlyfrom the year2001 to 2021. In the
future, the time frame can be stretched further. The third limitation is
that the dataset is utilized in only full published articles. Other
scholarly documents relating to entrepreneurial orientation research,
such as Ph.D. theses, unpublished reports, dissertations at the master’s
and doctoral level, etc., have not been considered in this study.

Further, another limitation of this research is the lack of bibliometric

algorithms utilized by the software. Various types of analyses in a
bibliometric study highly relyupon the number of citations the
particular articles have received. Sucha procedure is detrimental to
those recently published articles, which significantly impact but still
have a lower citation count than the older studies (Kakourisand
Georgiadis, 2016). Essential articles published on a far earlier date
generally rank higher in citations. Considering all such limitations, it
can be assumed that this analysis is not thoroughly holistic in all
facets. But,it is still an assertion that this bibliometric study entails
manyvital articles and various distinguished comments.Thus,as inthe
final part, it can be stated that this study attempts to add a valued
contribution to the entrepreneurial orientation literature. It can also act
as a distinct source of information for the scholars intending to carry
out future research on this area.

References
1. Abebe, M. A. (2011) ‘The internationalization of small and
medium-sized enterprises ( SMEs ): A multi-level integrative
framework Arifin Angriawan”, International Journal of
Entrepreneurship and Innovation Management, Vol.13 No.4, pp.
377–397.

539
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

2. Alfonzo, P.M., Sakaraida, T.J. and Hasting-Tolsma, M., (2014),

“Bibliometrics: Visualizing the impact of nursing research,”
Online J Nurs Inform, Vol.18 No.1.
3. Anderson, B.S., and Covin, J.G., (2014), “Entrepreneurial
orientation: disposition and behavior,” In Handbook of Research
on Entrepreneurship. Edward Elgar Publishing.
4. Andrade-Valbuena, N.A., Merigo-Lindahl, J.M. and Olavarrieta,
S., (2018), “Bibliometric analysis of entrepreneurial
orientation,” World Journal of Entrepreneurship, Management,
and Sustainable Development, Vol. 15 No. 1, pp. 45-69.
5. Anwar, M. (2020) “Entrepreneurial orientation and generic
competitive strategies for emerging SMEs: Financial and non-
financial performance perspective Entrepreneurial orientation,”
Journal of Public Affairs, Vol. 21 No.1.
6. Anzenbacher, A. and Wagner, M., (2020), “The role of
exploration and exploitation for innovation success: effects of
business models on organizational ambidexterity in the
semiconductor industry “International Entrepreneurship and
Management Journal,” vol. 16 No.2, pp.571-594.
7. Armstrong, J., and Overton, T. S. (1977), “ Estimating non-
response bias in mail surveys” Journal of Marketing Research,
Vol.16(8), pp. 396-402.
8. Arzubiaga, U., Kotlar, J., De Massis, A., Maseda, A. and
Iturralde, T., (2018), “Entrepreneurial orientation and innovation
in family SMEs: Unveiling the (actual) impact of the Board of
Directors,” Journal of Business Venturing, Vol.33 No.4, pp.455-
469.
9. Baker, W.E. and Sinkula, J.M., (2009), “The complementary
effects of market orientation and entrepreneurial orientation on
profitability in small businesses,” Journal of small business
management, Vol.47 No.4, pp.443-464.
10. Basco, R., Hernández-Perlines, F., and Rodríguez-García, M.,
(2020) “The effect of entrepreneurial orientation on firm
performance: A multigroup analysis comparing China, Mexico,
and Spain,” Journal of Business Research, Vol.113, pp.409-421.
11. Batra, S. and Gupta, V.K., (2015), “Entrepreneurial Orientation
and Firm Performance in Indian SMEs: Contingency
Perspectives” In Academy of Management Proceedings, Vol.
2015, No. 1, p. 14058.
12. Bernoster, I., Mukerjee, J. and Thurik, R., (2020), “The role of
effect in entrepreneurial orientation,” Small Business
Economics, Vol.54 No.1, pp.235-256.

540
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

13. Boso, N., Cadogan, J.W. and Story, V.M., (2013)

“Entrepreneurial orientation and market orientation as drivers of
product innovation success: A study of exporters from a
developing economy” International Small Business Journal,
Vol.31 No.1, pp.57-81.
14. Boso, N., Story, V.M. and Cadogan, J.W., (2013),
“Entrepreneurial orientation, market orientation, network ties, and
performance: Study of entrepreneurial firms in a developing
economy” Journal of Business Venturing, Vol.28 No.6, pp.708-
727.
15. Cheng, M. and Bosselman, R. (2016) “An Evaluation of the
Research Chefs Association’s Bachelor of Science in
Culinology® Core Competencies,” Journal of Hospitality and
Tourism Education. Routledge, Vol.28 No.3, pp. 127–141.
16. Cho, Y.H. and Lee, J.H., (2018), “Entrepreneurial orientation,
entrepreneurial education, and performance”, Asia Pacific
Journal of Innovation and Entrepreneurship, Vol 13 No.6, pp.
63-74.
17. Covin, J.G. and Slevin, D.P., (1989), “Strategic management of
small firms in hostile and benign environments,” Strategic
management journal, Vol.10 No.1, pp.75-87.
18. Covin, J.G. and Wales, W.J., (2012), “The measurement of
entrepreneurial orientation” Entrepreneurship theory and
practice, Vol.36 No.4, pp.677-702.
19. Covin, J.G., Green, K.M. and Slevin, D.P., (2006) “Strategic
process effects on the entrepreneurial orientation–sales growth
rate relationship” Entrepreneurship theory and practice, Vol.30
No.1, pp.57-81.
20. Dai, W. and Si, S., (2018), “Government policies and firms'
entrepreneurial orientation: Strategic choice and institutional
perspectives” Journal of Business Research, 93, pp.23-36.
21. Dubey, R., Gunasekaran, A., Childe, S.J., Bryde, D.J., Giannakis,
M., Foropon, C., Roubaud, D. and Hazen, B.T., (2020) “Big data
analytics and artificial intelligence pathway to operational
performance under the effects of entrepreneurial orientation and
environmental dynamism: A study of manufacturing
organizations” International Journal of Production Economics,
Vol.226, p.107599.
22. Eck, N. J. Van, and Waltman, L. (2007) “VOS: A New Method
for Visualizing” Advances in Data Analysis. Studies in
Classification, Data Analysis, and Knowledge Organization, pp.
299–306.

541
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

23. Eshima, Y. and Anderson, B.S.,(2017) “Firm growth, adaptive

capability and entrepreneurial orientation” Strategic
Management Journal, Vol.38 No.3, pp.770-779.
24. Fadda, N., (2018), “The effects of entrepreneurial orientation
dimensions on performance in the tourism sector.” New England
Journal of Entrepreneurship, Vol. 21 No. 1, pp. 22-44.
25. Genc, E., Dayan, M. and Genc, O.F., (2019) “The impact of SME
internationalization on innovation: The mediating role of the
market and entrepreneurial orientation” Industrial Marketing
Management, 82, pp.253-264.
26. Heersmink, R. et al. (2011) ‘Bibliometric mapping of computer
and information ethics”, Ethics and Information Technology,
Vol.13 No.3, pp. 241–249.
27. Hernández-perlines, F. et al. (2019) “Innovativeness as a
determinant of entrepreneurial orientation: analysis of the hotel
sector orientation: analysis of the hotel sector,”Economic
Research-Ekonomska Istraživanja. Routledge, 0(0), pp. 1–17.
28. Hughes, M. and Morgan, R.E., (2007) “Deconstructing the
relationship between entrepreneurial orientation and business
performance at the embryonic stage of firm growth” Industrial
marketing management, Vol.36 No.5, pp.651-661.
29. Hult, G.T.M., Hurley, R.F. and Knight, G.A., (2004)
“Innovativeness: Its antecedents and impact on business
performance” Industrial marketing management, Vol.33 No.5,
pp.429-438.
30. Hunt, R. A. (2021) “Entrepreneurial orientation and the fate of
corporate acquisitions,”Journal of Business Research. Elsevier
Inc., 122(September 2020), pp. 241–255.
31. Ibrahim, N. and Mas’ud, A., (2016), “Moderating role of
entrepreneurial orientation on the relationship between
entrepreneurial skills, environmental factors, and entrepreneurial
intention: A PLS approach,” Management Science Letters, Vol.6
No.3, pp.225-236.
32. Imran, M., Aziz, A., Hamid, S.N.B.A., Shabbir, M., Salman, R.
and Jian, Z., (2018), “Retracted: The mediating role of total
quality management between entrepreneurial orientation and
SMEs export performance.” Management Science Letters, Vol.8
No.6, pp.519-532.
33. Kakouris, A. and Georgiadis, P. (2016) “Analysing
entrepreneurship education: a bibliometric survey pattern,”
Journal of Global Entrepreneurship Research, Vol.6 No.6.
34. Koe, W. (2016) ‘The relationship between Individual
Entrepreneurial Orientation (IEO) and entrepreneurial intention,’

542
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Journal of Global Entrepreneurship Research. Journal of Global

Entrepreneurship Research.
35. Kuivalainen, O., Sundqvist, S. and Servais, P., (2007), “Firms’
degree of born-global ness, international entrepreneurial
orientation and export performance,” Journal of world business,
Vol.42 No.3, pp.253-267.
36. Laskovaia, A. et al. (2019) “Expect the unexpected: examining
the shaping role of entrepreneurial orientation on causal and
effectual decision-making logic during the economic crisis,”
Entrepreneurship and Regional Development. Routledge, Vol.31
No.5–6, pp. 456–475
37. Li, Y.H., Huang, J.W. and Tsai, M.T.,(2009) “Entrepreneurial
orientation and firm performance: The role of knowledge creation
process” Industrial marketing management, Vol.38 No.4, pp.440-
449.
38. Lomberg, C., Urbig, D., Stöckmann, C., Marino, L.D. and
Dickson, P.H., (2017), “Entrepreneurial orientation: The
dimensions’ shared effects in explaining firm performance”
Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, Vol.41 No.6, pp.973-998.
39. Lopez-Fernandez, M.C., Serrano-Bedia, A.M. and Gómez-López,
R., (2016), “Determinants of innovation-decision in small and
medium-sized family enterprises” Journal of Small Business and
Enterprise Development,Vol. 23 No. 2, pp. 408-427
40. Lumpkin, G.T. and Dess, G.G., (1996), “Clarifying the
entrepreneurial orientation construct and linking it to
performance” Academy of Management Review, Vol.21 No.1,
pp.135-172.
41. Mazzarol, T., (2015), “SMEs engagement with e-commerce, e-
business, and e-marketing” Small enterprise research, Vol.22
No.1, pp.79-90.
42. Mcgee, J. E., and Peterson, M. (2017) ‘The Long-Term Impact of
Entrepreneurial Self-Efficacy and Entrepreneurial Orientation on
Venture Performance,’Journal of Small Business Management,
Vol.57 No.3 pp. 720-737.
43. Miller, D. and Le Breton–Miller, I.,(2011), “Governance, social
identity, and entrepreneurial orientation in closely held public
companies” Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, Vol.35 No.5,
pp.1051-1076.
44. Palmer, C. et al. (2017) ‘The interplay of entrepreneurial
orientation and psychological traits in explaining firm
performance,’ Journal of Business Research. Elsevier,(4), pp.0–1.

543
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

45. Pato, M.L. and Teixeira, A.A., (2016) “Twenty years of rural
entrepreneurship: A bibliometric survey” Sociologiaruralis,
Vol.56 No.1, pp.3-28.
46. Pei, J., Shi, Y. and Shan, P.,(2021) “A bibliometric analysis of
entrepreneurial orientation” Chinese Management Studies, Vol.
15 No. 3, pp. 738-757
47. Perianes-Rodriguez, A., Waltman, L. and Van Eck, N.J., (2016)
“Constructing bibliometric networks: A comparison between full
and fractional counting” Journal of Informetrics, Vol.10 No.4,
pp.1178-1195.
48. Rauch, A., Wiklund, J., Lumpkin, G.T., and Frese, M., (2009)
“Entrepreneurial orientation and business performance: An
assessment of past research and suggestions for the future”
Entrepreneurship theory and practice, Vol.33 No.3, pp.761-787.
49. Rhee, J., Park, T. and Lee, D.H., (2010) “ Drivers of
innovativeness and performance for innovative SMEs in South
Korea: Mediation of learning orientation” Technovation, Vol.30
No.1, pp.65-75.
50. Rwehumbiza, D. and Marinov, M.A.,(2020), “Development of
entrepreneurial orientation of export manufacturers from
emerging economies” International Entrepreneurship and
Management Journal, Vol.16 No.2, pp.667-689.
51. Sauka, A. (2007) “Why does entrepreneurial orientation affect
company performance? Running Head: Why entrepreneurial
orientation affects company performance Why does
entrepreneurial orientation affect company performance?”
Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal, Vol.14 No.4, pp. 711–735.
52. Science, L., Carolina, N. and Hill, C. (1987) ‘Toward a definition
of " bibliometrics,"’ 12, pp. 373–379.
53. Servantie, V., Cabrol, M., Guieu, G. and Boissin, J.P., (2016) “Is
international entrepreneurship a field? A bibliometric analysis of
the literature (1989–2015)” Journal of International
Entrepreneurship, Vol.14 No.2, pp.168-212.
54. Shan, P., Song, M. and Ju, X., (2016), “Entrepreneurial
orientation and performance: Is innovation speed a missing
link?” Journal of Business Research, Vol.69 No.2, pp.683-690.
55. Small, H., (1973), “Co‐citation in the scientific literature: A new
measure of the relationship between two documents. Journal of
the American Society for Information Science, Vol.24 No.4,
pp.265-269.
56. Tajeddini, K., Martin, E. and Ali, A., (2020) “Enhancing
hospitality business performance: The role of entrepreneurial
orientation and networking ties in a dynamic environment”

544
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

International Journal of Hospitality Management, Vol.90,

p.102605.
57. Van Eck, N.J., and Waltman, L., (2007) “Bibliometric mapping
of the computational intelligence field” International Journal of
Uncertainty, Fuzziness and Knowledge-Based Systems, Vol.15
No.05, pp.625-645.
58. Wales, W., Gupta, V.K., Marino, L. and Shirokova, G., (2019)
“Entrepreneurial orientation: International, global and cross-
cultural research” International Small Business Journal, Vol.37
No.2, pp.95-104.
59. Wales, W., Wiklund, J. and McKelvie, A., (2015) “What about a
new entry? Examining the theorized role of the new entry in the
entrepreneurial orientation–performance relationship”,
International Small Business Journal, Vol.33 No.4, pp.351-373.
60. Wales, W.J., (2016), “Entrepreneurial orientation: A review and
synthesis of promising research directions” International Small
Business Journal, Vol .34 No.1, pp.3-15.
61. Wales, W.J., Gupta, V.K. and Mousa, F.T., (2013) “Empirical
research on entrepreneurial orientation: An assessment and
suggestions for future research,” International small business
journal, Vol.31 No.4, pp.357-383.
62. Walter, A., Auer, M., and Ritter, T., (2006) “The impact of
network capabilities and entrepreneurial orientation on university
spin-off performance” Journal of business venturing, Vol. 21
No.4, pp.541-567.
63. Wang, X., Dass, M., Arnett, D.B. and Yu, X.,(2020),
“Understanding firms’ relative strategic emphases: An
entrepreneurial orientation explanation” Industrial Marketing
Management, 84, pp.151-164.
64. Wiklund, J., Patzelt, H., and Shepherd, D.A., (2009) “Building an
integrative model of small business growth,” Small business
economics, Vol.32 No.4, pp.351-374.

Dr.Manoj Dash
ABV-Indian Institute of Information Technology and Management,
Gwalior- 474002
Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected]

Dr. Gayatri Panda

Assistant Professor, Department of Management, NIST Institute of
Science and Technology (Autonomous), Berhampur (India)

545
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

Email id: [email protected]

546
 Recent Trends in Multidisciplinary Research and Development: Volume-1

547

View publication stats